3480_MI_A01 3480 MI A01

3480_MI_A01 3480_MI_A01

User Manual: 3480_MI_A01

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 428

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

eeeeeeeeeeeoeee80eeOeeGe80eeeeeeec
Reference Drawing

tollating List of Pages
This reference drawing contains the collating sequence,
page side, and EC level of pages for IBM 3480 MagnetIc
Tape Subsystem Maintenance Information Manual (MI)
Volume A01, SY32-5048-13.
The part number of the divider tab list is 8673743.
This reference drawing is to be placed at the front of the
manual.
PAGE

SIDE

FRONT COVER Front
PREF 1
Back
SAFETY 10
SAFETY 20
SAFETY 30
SAFETY 40
TAB 1
TAB 2

Front
Back
Front
Back
Front
Back

LEVEL
EC C137B3
EC 336395
EC 336395
EC 336395
EC 336395
EC 336395
EC 336395
EC 336395

PAGE

SIDE

LEVEL

PAGE

PLAN 45
PLAN 46

Front
Back

EC A57693
EC 336396

START Tab

PLAN 50
PLAN 51

Front
Back

EC 336395
EC 336395

PLAN 55
PLAN 60

Front
Back

EC A57723
EC 336396

PLAN 65
PLAN 70

Front
Back

EC 336395
EC A57723

INTRO Tab

SIDE

LEVEL

START 1
START 2

Front
Back

EC A57724
EC 336396

START 10
START 100

Front
Back

EC A57724
EC A47957

START 101
START 105

Front
Back

EC 336396
EC A57723

START 106
START 110

Front
Back

EC A57723
EC A57723

GLOSS Tab
GLOSS 1
GLOSS 2

Front
Back

EC 336395
EC 336395

GLOSS 3
GLOSS 4

Front
Back

EC 336395
EC 336395

PLAN Tab

INTRO 1
INTRO 5

Front
Back

EC 336395
EC A57723

START 111
START 115

Front
Back

EC A57723
EC 336396

INTRO 10
INTRO 15

Front
Back

EC 336395
EC 336395

START 120
START 125

Front
Back

EC A57723
EC A57723

INTRO 20
INTRO 21

Front
Back

EC A57723
EC 336395

START 130
START 135

Front
Back

EC A57723
EC A57723

PAGE

SIDE

LEVEL

CART 1
CART 2

Front
Back

EC C13783
EC C13783

CART 5
CART 10

Front
Back

EC 336395
EC 336395

CART 10-1
CART 10-2

Front
Back

EC 336395
EC 336395

CART 10-3
CART 12

Front
Back

EC 336395
EC 336395

CART 13
CART 14

Front
Back

EC 336396
EC 336396

CART 15
CART 16

Front
Back

EC 336396
EC 336396

CART 17
CART 20

Front
Back

EC 336396
EC 336396

CART 21
CART 30

Front
Back

EC 336395
EC 336395

CART 40
CART 42

Front
Back

EC A57723
EC 336396

PLAN 1
PLAN 5

Front
Back

EC A57723
EC A57723

INTRO 22
INTRO 25

Front
Back

EC A57723
EC 336395

START 140
START 300

Front
Back

EC A57723
EC A57724

PLAN 6
PLAN 10

Front
Back

EC 336396
EC 336396

INTRO 30
INTRO 35

Front
Back

EC A57723
EC 336395

START 310
START 315

Front
Back

EC A57724
EC A57724

PNEU Tab

PLAN 11
PLAN 25

Front
Back

EC 336395
EC 336395

INTRO 40
INTRO 45

Front
Back

EC 336396
EC 336396

START 320
START 325

Front
Back

EC A57724
EC A57724

PNEU 1
PNEU 3

Front
Back

EC 336395
EC 336395

PLAN 30
PLAN 35

Front
Back

EC A57723
EC A57723

INTRO 50
INTRO 51

Front
Back

EC 336395
EC 336395

START 400
START 401

Front
Back

EC 336396
EC 336396

PNEU4
PNEU 5

Front
Back

EC 336396
EC A5i693

PLAN 40
PLAN 41

Front
Back

EC A57723
EC 336395

INTRO 55
INTRO 56

Front
Back

EC A57723
EC 336395

START 420
CART Tab

Front

EC 336396

PNEU 6
PNEU10

Front
Back

EC 336395
EC 336395

t Copyright IBM Corp. 1982. 1991. All Rights Reserved

A01-1

Reference Drawing

PAGE

SIDE

LEVEL

PAGE

SIDE

LEVEL

PNEU 11
PNEU12

Front
Back

EC 336395
EC A57723

MSG 220

Back

EC A57723

MSG 221
MSG 222

Front
Back

EC A57723
EC A57723

MSG 223
MSG 225

Front
Back

EC A57723
EC A57723

MSG 226
MSG 228

Front
Back

EC A57723
EC A57721

MSG 229
MSG 230

Front
Back

EC A47957
EC 336395

MSG 231
MSG 350

Front
Back

EC 336395
EC 336395

MSG 360
MSG 361

Front
Back

EC 336395
EC A57723

MSG 411
MSG 412

Front
Back

EC A47957
EC 336395

PNEU 20
PNEU 30
PNEU 103
PNEU 105
PNEU 106
PNEU 110
PNEU 111
PNEU 112
PNEU 120
PNEU 130
PNEU 140
PNEU 150

Front
Back
Front
Back
Front
Back
Front
Back
Front
Back
Front
Back

EC 336395
EC A57723
EC 336396
EC A57693
EC 336395
EC 336395
EC 336396
EC A57723
EC 336396
EC A57723
EC A57723
EC A57723

MSG Tab
MSG 1
MSG 10

Front
Back

EC A57723
EC 336395

MSG 15
MSG 20

Front
Back

EC 336395
EC C13783

MSG 21
MSG 21-1

Front
Back

EC C13783
EC C13783

MSG22
MSG23

Back
Front

EC C13783
EC C13783

MSG 30
MSG 100

Front
Back

EC 336395
EC A57723

MSG 105
MSG 200

Front
Back

EC 336395
EC 336395

MSG 201
MSG 210

Front
Back

EC 336395
EC A57723

MSG 211
MSG 212

Front
Back

EC A57723
EC A57723

MSG 213
MSG 215

Front
Back

EC A57723
EC 336395

MSG 216

Front

EC 336395

INST Tab

PAGE

SIDE

LEVEL

PAGE

SIDE

LEVEL

INST 56
INST 60

Front
Back

EC 336396
EC 336396

INST 306
INST 310

Front
Back

EC A47957
EC A57721

INST 61
INST 70

Front
Back

EC A57721
EC A57721

INST 311
INST 313

Front
Back

EC 336396
EC 336396

INST 71
INST 72

Front
Back

EC A57723
EC 336395

INST 320
INST 321

Front
Back

EC 336395
EC 336395

INST 73
INST 74

FrontBack

EC A57721
EC A57721

INST 325
INST 330

Front
Back

EC 336396
EC A57723

INST 75
INST 76

Front
Back

EC 336396
EC A57721

INST 331
INST 340

Front
Back

EC A57723
EC A57724

INST 77
INST 78

Front
Back

EC A57723
EC A57721

INST 341
INST 345

Front
Back

EC A57721
EC A57721

INST 79
INST 81

Front
Back

EC A57721
EC A57721

INST 350
INST 355

Front
Back

EC 336396
EC 336396

INST 82
INST 83

Front
Back

EC A57721
EC A57721

INST 356
INST 360

Front
Back

EC 336396
EC 336396

INST 1
INST2

Front
Back

EC 336396
EC A57721

INST 84
INST 90

Front
Back

EC A57721
EC A57723

INST 361
INST 370

Front
Back

EC 336396
EC A57721

INST4
INST 5

Front
Back

EC A57723
EC 336396

INST 100
INST 110

Front
Back

EC A47957
EC A57724

INST 371
INST 372

Front
Back

EC A57721
EC 336395

INST6
INST 10

Front
Back

EC 336396
EC A57723

INST 120
INST 130

Front
Back

EC 336396
EC 336396

INST 373
INST 374

Front
Back

EC 336395
EC 336395

INST 11
INST 13

Front
Back

EC A57693
EC 336396

INST 131
INST 135

Front
Back

EC 336396
EC A57723

INST 375
INST 376

Front
Back

EC 336396
EC A57721

INST 20
INST 21

Front
Back

EC A57723
EC 336396

INST 136
INST 137

Front
Back

EC 336396
EC A57723

INST 377
INST 378

Front
Back

EC A57721
EC A57721

INST 22
INST 30

Front
Back

EC A57723
EC A57723

INST 140
INST 150

Front
Back

EC A57i21
EC A47957

INST 379
INST 381

Front
Back

EC 336395
EC A57721

INST 31
INST 40

Front
Back

EC A57723
EC A57724

INST 160
INST 170

Front
Back

EC 336396
EC A5i721

INST 382
INST 383

Front
Back

EC 336396
EC A57721

INST 41
INST 45

Front
Back

EC A57721
EC A57721

INST 180
INST 190

Front
Back

EC 336396
EC A57723

INST 384
INST 390

Front
Back

EC 336396
EC 336396

INST 50
INST 55

Front
Back

EC 336396
EC 336396

INST 304
INST 305

Front
Back

EC A57723
EC 336395

INST 400
INST 410

Front
Back

EC A47957
EC A57724

3480
MI

A01-2
j

l

}

)

)

\

)

~)

)

~)

}

.)

,1

~)

i)

e e e e

- -- - --

PAGE

SIDE

LEVEL

INST 420
INST 430

Front
Back

EC 336396
EC 336396

INST 431
INST 435

Front
Back

EC 336395
EC 336395

INST 436
INST 437

Front
Back

EC 336395
EC 336395

INST 440
INST 450

Front
Back

EC A47957
EC A47957

INST 460
INST 470

Front
Back

EC 336396
EC 336396

INST 480
INST 490

Front
Back

EC 336395
EC 336395

INST 495
INST 500

Front
Back

EC 336396
EC A57723

INST 502
INST 505

Front
Back

EC 336396
EC A57723

INST 507
INST 510

Front
Back

EC 336396
EC 336396

INST 515
INST 520

Front
Back

EC A57723
EC 336396

INSP Tab

0

e

0 0

G 0 0 0 0

C)

0 0 0 0 0 G

PAGE

SIDE

LEVEL

PAGE

SIDE

LEVEL

INSP 41
INSP 45

Front
Back

EC 336395
EC 336395

INDEX 7
INDEX 8

Front
Back

EC A57723
EC A57723

INSP 55
INSP 56

Front
Back

EC 336395
EC A57721

INDEX 9
INDEX 10

Front
Back

EC A57723
EC A57723

INSP 58
INSP 60

Front
Back

EC 336396
EC 336396

INDEX 11
INDEX 12

Front
Back

EC A57723
EC A57724

INSP 65
INSP 70

Front
Back

EC 336396
EC 336396

INDEX 13
INDEX 14

Front
Back.

EC A57723
EC A57723

INSP 110
INSP 115

Front
Back

EC 336395
EC 336395

RCF-1
RCF-2

Front
Back

INSP 116
INSP 120

Front
Back

EC 336395
EC 336395

INSP 121
INSP 124

Front
Back

EC 336395
EC 336395

INSP 125
INSP 132

Front
Back

EC 336395
EC 336395

INSP 135
INSP 140

Front
Back

EC A47957
EC A47957

INSP 141
INSP 145

Front
Back

EC 336395
EC 336395

INSP 155
INSP 156

Front
Back

EC 336395
EC A57721

INSP 1
INSP 2

Front
Back

EC 336396
EC 336395

INSP 158
INSP 160

Front
Back

EC 336396
EC 336396

INSP 10
INSP 15

Front
Back

EC 336395
EC 336395

INSP 165
INSP 170

Front
Back

EC A47957
EC A47957

INSP i6
INSP 20

Front
Back

EC 336395
EC 336395

INDEX Tab

INSP 21
INSP 24

Front
Back

EC 336395
EC 336395

INDEX 1
INDEX 2

Front
Back

EC A57723
EC A57723

INSP 25
INSP 32

Front
Back

EC 336395
EC 336396

INDEX 3
INDEX 4

Front
Back

EC A57723
EC A57723

INSP 35
INSP 40

Front
Back

EC A57693
EC A47957

INDEX 5
INDEX 6

Front
Back

EC A57723
EC A57724

--

0

e

0 0

e e e 0
Reference Drawing

A01-3

()

~
~

»

~~.

•

..........,.~~

m

8673861

~

to
CO
M

.....

""'"

"

......

.........

....

r--..

to
CO

PUBLICATIONS HEFEHENCE DRAWING

~
tlffl

~
""",

~
'L

,.!!If

._--_._-

SY32-5048-4

336392

Filth Edition
IE C 0011225998
IEC 00112281181

~
~>

• •, . " . "

~
1----------- -----

336393

TNL SN32-5036

>,.,,,",,

336394

Sixth Edition

...-

--_. -------1----------------, --- - ----.. -

S Y32-5048-5

339394/\

1--------------------------

-----1---

SY32-5040-6
-._------."

336395

1

.

i'~"

TNL SN32-5037
Sevellth Edition
IEC 0011225844

----------~.---.------.-----.-

.... _------_._-_ ..._--_.

.

----_ ..

S Y32-5048-7

336396

SY32-5048-8

A47957C 1 Ninth Edition

SY32-5040-9

/\5""1693

Tenth Editioll

S Y32-5048-1O

A57121

E leve nth Edition

S Y32-50-18-11

/\57723

Twcllth Edition

S Y32-5048-12

1\57724

Thirteenth Edition

~.
>.",

-_ ... _-

--.

-----

--_._- -. --_ ...•.._-----_..

SY32-5048-13

__

....

__ ._- ._-_._-----~

...,

- ----

1----

._-

Eighth Edition
IEC 0011222905
IEC 001'1222986

~

._--------"-_.._-

'

~

..,.'

~

",.,.-'

........

._--

C13703

.....

Fourteellth Edition
- .---.-.---.

,,.

-- ._ _-".-..

.-.

~fi;

I

DESIGNI

IBid

DATE

PUB REF DWG (PRO)
SHT

OF

DETAIL
CHECK

CLASSIFICA TlON

CHANGE NO

DATE

co
en

1/24189

A5Tt23

5/11/9? - .

A57724 - : I - - t - - - - - - _ _ _ __

9/30/91

------'--'--~----'--.--- -_ ...."......-.-.y

-.J
VJ

I

CO

"'-,

Ol
~

C13783

. . UST· C~lN;;;-;;~:' TO r:tu; SP,_.~ I D~VELOPMENT NO

APPRO

-,
-

IREL 1---See E~ History

I

...........

CHANGE' NO

LOGIC PG NO

R0001

"'-,
,,.

OJ
•

-~
,til"

eeeeeoeooeOOOOOCCCCOGOOOOGOOGG_CGC

---..-------

----- --------~-.

Maintenance Information

-~-.-

3480
S/NHI
Haintenance
Information
GLOSS
PLAN
INTRa
*START*
CART
PNEU
HSG
INST
INSP
INDEX

Vol AOI

3480
S/N-

HI
Haintenance
Information
PWR
SENSE
PANEL
HO
LOC
CARR-CU

Vol ADZ

Maintenance library
Maintenance Information
Logic Diagrams

3480
S/N-

HI
Haintenance
Information

3480
S/NHI
Haintenance
Information

3480
S/NHI
Maintenance
Information

LGND
SPROC
SDISK
DIAG
OF
OPER

FSI
EAD

CARR-DR

Vol

A03

Vol A04

Vol

AOS

-

Vats. AD1 to ADS
Vats. CD1 and 001

3480 Magnetic Tape Subsystem

SY32-5048-13

Preface

Preface

This manual contains maintenance information about the IBM
3480 Magnetic Tape Subsystem and is intended for customer
engineers responSible for servicing the 3480 tape subsystem.
This publication is designed to be used with the IBM
Maintenance Device (MOl. Therefore, CEs using this manual
should be familiar with that tool.

Prerequisite Knowledge
It is assumed that you have a background in data processing
concepts and that you ..e familiar with the hexadecimal
numbering system, stored program concepts, and have a basic
understanding of tape subsystems and their relationship to a
processor I/O channel. "',,.
.

Related Publications

How to Order This Manual

IBM Systsm/360 and Systsm/370 I/O Intsrfacs Channel to
Control Unit OrigiMl Equipment Mllnuiactll'flf'S'lnformlltion,
GA22-6974.

This manual or pages can be ordered from one of the following:
•

United States

IBM 3480 MlIgNtic TII/HI Subsystem Description, GA32-0042.

•

Europe/Middle East/Asia IE/ME/A)

How to Update the Maintenance
Information

•

Americas/Far East (A/FE)

This manual is 'form number c:Ontrolhtd. The 3480 manuals will
. be updated by Technical Newsletters lTNUI. The TNL cover
letter will indicate the new EC level. The entire manual will be
updated by major revision. AD updates Me proc:esaed through
normal MLC control. The Publications Reference Drawing (PRDI
in the front of each volume contains the EC history.

PREF 1

Use the wiring Diagram/logic Page Request form, Z150-0130.
Be sure to include the form number of the manual when ordering
the new manual or pages. Please write your telephone number
on the form in case there ..e any questions repding your order.

United States
IBM Corporation .
General Products Division
Dept. 301..
Tucson, Arizona 85744

E/ME/A
International Business Machines
SA.E., Division de Fabricacion
Dept. 9290
Valencia, Spain

A/FE
IBM Argentina SA
Dept. 020
H. Yrigoyen 2149
1640
Martinec, Pcia.
Buenos Aires
Republic of Argentina

3480 MI

EC336395

Preface

• ~ raM CoD. 1984. 1115. 1.88

\

}

,

)

~

)

i)

~

) .)
\

~

} t)

~)

\."

.)

PREF 1

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

Safety

SAFETY 10

Safety
Rules for Safety

•

If (1) you know the safety rules for working with electrical and
mechanical equipment and (2) you observe the rules, you can
work safely with IBM equipment.

After maintenance, reinstall all safety devices, such as
guards, shields, labels, and ground wires. Exchange safety
devices that are worn or defective. (Remember: the safety
devices protect you from a hazard. You destroy their
purpose if you do not reinstall them when you have
completed the service call.)

•

When you are working with machines having voltages more
than 30 V ac or 42.4 V dc, observe the special safety
instructions given in customer engineering memorandums
(CEMs).

•

Summary

Never assume that power has been removed from a circuit.
First, check that it has been removed.

Do not fear electricity, but respect it.

Prevention is the main aid to electrical safety. Always think
about electrical safety and use good practice, for example:

Electrical Safety
While you are maintaining IBM equipment, (1) observe every
safety precaution possible and (2) observe the following safety
rules.

•
•

Work Environment

If possible, always unplug the power-supply cable before
you work on a machine. When you switch off power at the
wall box, lock the switch in the off position or attach a DO
NOT OPERATE tag (Z229-0237) to the switch.
•

•

Note: A non-IBM attachment to an IBM machine
may be powered from another source and may be
controlled by a different switch or circuit breaker.

Do not work alone in hazardous conditions or near
equipment that has dangerous voltages. Always inform
your manager if the conditions or voltages are a possible
problem.
•

•

Always look for possible hazards in your work environment.
Examples of hazards are: moist floors, nongrounded
extension cables, power surges, and missing safety
grounds.
•

•

•

Do not perform any action that makes the product unsafe or
that causes hazards for the customer personnel.
Before you start the equipment, ensure that other Service
Representatives (SRs) and customer personnel, are not in a
hazardous position.
•

•

Do not wear loose clothing that can be trapped in the
moving parts of a machine. Ensure that the sleeves of your
clothing are fastened or are rolled above the elbow. If your
hair is long, or if you wear a neck scarf, fasten it to make it
safe.

Switch off all power before (1) removing or assembling the
main units of the equipment, (2) working near to power
supplies, (3) inspecting power supplies, or (4) installing
changes in machine circuits.
Unless the maintenance documents specifically instruct you,
do not service the following parts with power on if the part
is removed from its installed position in the machine: power
supplies, pumps, blowers, motor generators, and other units
with voltages that are more than 30 V ac or 42.4 V dc.
(This rule ensures that correct grounding is maintained.)

Do not touch live electrical circuits with the surface of a
plastic dental mirror. (Remember: the surface of the dental
mirror is conductive and can cause damage and personal
injury.)

Use caution; do not be a victim yourself.

2.

Switch off the power.

3.

Instruct another person to get medical aid.

4.

If the victim is not breathing, perform mouth-to-mouth
rescue breathing. See "Electrical Accidents - First Aid"
(below).

Ensure that the customer's power receptacle matches the
IBM equipment specifications.

•

Inspect power cables and plugs; check for loose, damaged,
or worn parts.

•

Review the procedure in the maintenance documents before
you remove a part that can hold an electrical charge from
the machine. Carefully discharge the necessary parts
exactly as instructed by the procedure.

•

Do not use a normal light (for example, a table lamp) as an
extension trouble light at a machine.

Never assume that a machine or a circuit is safe. No machine is
always completely safe. You may not know the exact condition
of a machine because, for example:

Mechanical Safety
Do not touch moving mechanical parts when you are (1)
lubricating a part, (2) checking for play, or (3) doing other similar
work.

If you really need to work on equipment that has exposed
live electrical circuits, observe the following precautions:

•

If an electrical accident occurs:
1.

•

The power receptacles could be wrongly wired.

•

Safety devices or features could be missing or defective.

•

The maintenance and/or changes history could be wrong or
not complete.

•

The design could have a problem.

Safety Glasses

Ensure that another person, who is familiar with the
power-off controls, is near you. Another person must
be there to switch off the power, if necessary.

Wear safety glasses when:

The machine could have damage, caused when it was
shipped.

Using a hammer to drive pins or similar parts
•

•

•

•

•

Insert your necktie into your clothing or fasten it with a clip
(preferably nonconductive) at approximately 8 centimeters
(3 inches) from its end.

Do not wear jewelry, chains, metal-frame eyeglasses, or
other personal metal objects. (Remember: if the metal
touches the machine, the flow of current increases
because the metal is a conductor.)

Lift the equipment or parts by standing or pushing up with
your stronger leg muscles; this action removes the strain
from the muscles in your back. Do not lift any equipment or
parts that are too heavy for you.

Use only insulated probe tips or extenders.
(Remember: worn or cracked insulation is unsafe.)

Put removed machine covers ina safe place while you are
servicing the machine. Reinstall the covers before returning
the machine to the customer.

Use only one hand while you are working on live
equipment. Keep the other hand in your pocket or
behind your back. (Remember: there must be a
complete circuit for an electrical shock to occur. This
precaution prevents your body from completing the
circuit!)

Always keep your Service Representative (SR) tool kit away
from walk areas so that other persons cannot trip over it.
For example, keep the kit under a desk or table.
Observe good housekeeping practices in the area of the
machines while you are performing maintenance and after
completing it.

When you use a tester, set its controls correctly and
use insulated probes that have the correct electrical
specification.
Do not touch objects that are grounded, such as metal
floor strips, machine frames, or other conductors. Use
suitable rubber mats obtained locally, if necessary.

Do not use solvents, cleaners, or oils that have not been
approved by IBM.

Using a power drill
Using a spring hook to attach or remove a spring

•

The machine could have an unsafe change or attachment.

•

An engineering change or a sales change could be wrongly
installed.

•

The machine could be deteriorated (1) because it is old or
(2) because it operates in an extreme environment.

•

A part could be defective, therefore causing a hazard.

•

A part could be wrongly assembled.

Soldering parts
•

Cutting wire or removing steel bands

•

Using solvents, chemicals, or cleaners to clean parts

•

Working in any other conditions that could injure your eyes

Tools, Testers, and Field-Use Materials
•

Do not use tools and testers that have not been approved
by IBM. Ensure that electrical hand tools, such as
Wire-Wrap 1 tools and power drills, are inspected regularly.

•

Exchange worn and broken tools and testers.

These are some of the ways that the condition of the machine
could affect safety. Before you start a service call or procedure,
have good judgment and use caution.

Trademark of the Gardner-Denver Co.

3480 MI

EC336395

 Copyright IBM Corp. 1984, 1985

Safety

SAFETY 10

Safety

Safety
b.

Electrical Accidents - First Aid
When performing rescue procedures for an electrical accident,
do as follows:
•

•

•

Open your mouth wide and take a deep breath. Make a
tight seal with your mouth around the victim's mouth
as shown in Figure 3 and blow into the victim's mouth.

Use Caution: If the victim is still in contact with the
electrical-current source, remove the power; to do this, you
may need to operate the room emergency power-off (EPO)
switch or the disconnecting switch. If 'lou cannot find the
switch, use a dry wooden rod or other nonconductive object
to pull or push the victim away from contact with the
electrical-current source.
Work Quickly: If the victim is unconscious, he/she may
need (1) mouth-to-mouth rescue breathing and possibly (2)
external cardiac compression if the heart is not beating.

Reporting Accidents
Report, to your field manager, all electrical accidents, possible
electrical hazards, and accidents that nearly occurred.
(Remember: an accident that nearly occurs might be caused by a
design problem; your immediate reporting ensures that the
problem will be solved quickly.)
Report also all small electrical shocks. (Remember: a condition
that causes a small shock need only differ slightly to cause
serious injury.)

Figure 1.

2.

Call for the Rescue Service, such as the ambulance or the
hospital. Instruct another person to call for medical aid.

SAFETY 20

Look, listen, and feel to determine if the victim is breathing
freely:
Figure 3.

Determine if the victim needs mouth-to-mouth rescue breathing.
If he/she does, perform the following steps.
CAUTION
Use extreme care when you perform rescue breathing for
a victim who may have breathed-in toxic fumes. Do not
breathe-in air that the victim has breathed-out.
1.

a.

Put your cheek near to the victim's mouth and nose.

b.

Listen and feel for the breathing-out of air. At the same
time, look at the victim's chest and upper abdomen to
see if they move up and down.

c.

3.

a.

Ensure that the victim's airway is open and that it is not
obstructed; check the mouth for objects that may be
obstructing the airway, such as chewing gum, food,
dentures, or the tongue.

b.

Place the victim on his/her back, put one hand behind
the victim's neck, and put the other hand on his/her
forehead.

c.

Lift the neck with one hand, and tilt the head backward
by pressing on the forehead with the other hand. See
Figure 1.

4.

If the victim is not breathing correctly:
a.

Prepare for rescue breathing:

Remove your mouth to let the victim breathe-out, and
check that the victim's chest moves down. See Figure

Keep the victim's head tilted backward; (see Figure 1).
Continue to press on the forehead with your hand; at
the same time, rotate this same hand so that you can
pinch together the victim's nostrils with your thumb
and finger. See Figure 2.

d.

Repeat steps band c once every 5 seconds either until
the victim breathes for himself/herself or until medical
aid comes.

Figure 2,

3480 MI

EC336395

Safety

·~IBMCarp.1984.1i18&

.
\.

)

t)

o

u

SAFETY 20

,

)

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

Safety

o
Safety

Danger Notices
A danger notice is used to notify the service representative that
potentially lethal or extremely hazardous conditions exist.

DANGER
Hazardous electrical voltages are present in the
receptacle.

DANGER
Hazardous electrical voltages are present. Do not touch
the outlet before meeting the following requirements of
steps 1 and 2.

SAFETY 30

DANGER
Make sure the circuit breaker that supplies power to the
customer receptacle is off.
If you are installing a Dual Control Unit subsystem, power
to both customer receptacles must be off.

The danger safety notices and their page locations contained in
this MI are shown below.

DANGER
Electric shock. The Drive Power switch removes dc
voltages (both ac and dc voltages on tape units without
8M 6460006) to that drive only, and does not affect the
other drive in the tape unit.

o

Make sure that there are no cables attached to the 110
tailgate assembly in the bottom rear of the control unit.

INST 6,306.

DANGER
Hazardous electrical voltages are present in the connector.
Do not touch the outlet case with anything other than test
probes until step 3 is completed.

INST 6,306.

DANGER
Hazardous voltages are present. If the measured voltage
values are less than 1.0 V ac, you can touch the outlet.
Avoid contact with the internal parts (pins and sockets) of
the outlet.

INST 6,306.
INST 60, 360.

CARR-DR 8.

DANGER
Electric shock. Hazardous voltages are present on the ac
power circuit breaker and the line cord.

DANGER
Electric shock. Hazardous voltages can be present in the
ac line cord connectors.
INST 6,306.

CARR-CU 1440, 1490.
CARR-DR 8.
DANGER
Electric shock. When setting the control unit ac power
circuit breaker off, hazardous voltages are still present on
the ac power circuit breaker and on the ac power line
cord.

DANGER
Dangerous voltages are present at the ac power cable
socket. The safety cover must be on when the socket is
not being used.

DANGER
Lethal voltages are present in the power servicing area.
Safety is most important. Treat all circuits as live until
measured.
Capacitors are possible exploding devices. Wear safety
glasses when working in the power area. Always reinstall
all safety covers before powering on the machine.

DANGER
Hazardous electrical voltages are present. Do not touch
the internal parts (pins and sockets) of the outlet until
step 5 is completed.

INST 10,310.

CAUTION: TILT HAZARD

PWR 130-1,400-1.

Do NOT open both drives of a tape unit that is not bolted
to another tape unit or control unit. With the automatic
cartridge feature installed and both drive drawers fully
extended, a tape unit that is not bolted to another unit will
tilt forward with about 20 Ibs. of force applied to the top
of either automatic cartridge loader.

DANGER
High voltage.

INST 4,11,20,135,180,304,311,320,435,480.

PWR 400-7.

INST 6,306.

CARR-CU 6.

INSP 15, 115.

3480 MI

EC336395

<0 Copvroght IBM Co Copyright IBM Corp. 1984. 1985. 1986

•

~

\

}

~)

~}

;)

t)

~)

, .Jl
~

l

, ...1

J

o

o

o

o

o

o

Glossary and Abbreviations
This glossary defines the special terms, abbreviations, and
acronyms that are used in this publication. It does not include
all terms previously established for the IBM System/370 or its
operating systems; therefore, if you do not find the term you are
looking for, refer to the index or to the Vocabulary for Data
Processing, Telecommunications, and Office Systems
GC20-1699.

The ISO Vocabulary of Data Processing, developed by the
International Standards Organization, Technical Committee
97, Subcommittee 1. Definitions from published sections of
this vocabulary are identified by the symbol "OSO)"
preceding the definition. Definitions from draft proposals
and working papers under development by the ISO/TC97
vocabulary subcommittee are identified by the symbol
"(TC97)," indicating that final agreement has not yet been
reached among its participating members.

o

Glossary and Abbreviations
backhitch. A slight motion in the backward direction just
before moving tape in a forward direction.

u".

back
BCC.

BSB.

Backspace block.

CHPID.

BSF.

Backspace file.

clk.

Clock.

cm.

Centimeter.

Buffer channel command register.

BCPC.

Buffer channel pad counter register.

BCPH.

Buffer channel pointer high register.

BCPL.

Buffer channel pointer low register.

CMD.

Command.

BWRP.

CMR.

Channel modifier register.

Buffer wrap register.

Channel adapter.

card extractor.
CARR.

Checks-Adjustments-Removal-Replacement.

condition code. A code that reflects the result of an
input/output, arithmetic, or logical operation.

CART.

Cartridge Analysis.

contaminant.

BCSE.

Buffer channel status/error register.

BCSH.

Buffer channel stop high register.

BCSL.

Buffer channel stop low register.

CAUTION (Notice!. A word to call attention to possible
personal harm to people. Contrast with DANGER.

BCSS.

Buffer channel storage sars register.

CB.

BOAT.

Buffer data not real register.

centimeter.

Buffer device command register.

command. A control signal that initiates an action or the
beginning of a sequence of actions.

A service representative tool.

Buffer channel remainder register.

BDC.

Channel path identification.

buffer. * A routine or storage used to compensate for a
difference in rate of flow of data, or time of occurrence of
events, when transferring data from one device to another.

CA.

BCR.

CC.

Something that contaminates.

contingent connection. A connection between a channel
path and a drive caused when a unit check occurs during an I/O
operation.

Circuit breaker.
One hundredth of a meter. See meter.

Condition code.

control unit. A device that controls input/output operations of
one or more devices.
CP.

Circuit protector.

BDGO.

Buffer diagnostic 0 register.

CCA.

Channel card address register.

CPS.

Cycles per second. See Hz.
Cyclic redundancy check.

BDG1.

Buffer diagnostic 1 register.

access method. A technique for moving data between
processor storage and input/output devices.

CCB.

Communication control block.

CRC.

BDPH.

Buffer device pointer high register.

CCC.

Channel card control register.

CS.

adj.

BDPL.

Buffer device pointer low register.

CCR.

Channel command retry.

CRR.

Channel request register.

ccw.

Counterclockwise.

CST.

Command status table.

CSW.

Channel status word.

ALD.

Adjustment.
Automated logic diagram.

allocation.
alter.

See resource allocation.

To change.

BDR.

Buffer device remainder register.

BOSE.

Buffer device status/error register.

CCW.

BOSS.

Buffer device storage sars register.

CCW chain. A list of channel command words to be
performed in sequence.

amplifier. A device whose output is an enlarged reproduction
of its input.

beginning of tape (BOT). The location on a magnetic tape
that indicates the beginning of the permissible recording area.

CDR.

analog. Pertaining to data in the form of continuous variables,
which are related to measurable physical quantities.

bfr.

CDTI.

Buffer.

bill of material.
assignment.
function.

A list of part numbers.

The naming of a specific device to perform a
BM.

Bill of material.

CER.

Channel command word.

asynchronous. Without regular time relationship; unexpected
or unpredictable with respect to the execution of a program's
instructions.

BOB.

Beginning of block.

char.

BOC.

Bus-out check.

checklist.

att.

BOR.

Beginning of record.

CHK.

Check.

BOT.

Beginning of tape.

CHL.

Channel.

B/M.

Bill of material.

bpi.

3480 MI

EC336395

{: CnpYf'qhl ,8M Coro 1984 19Mf)

ctr.

Counter.

ctrl.

Control.

CU.

Control unit.

Channel error register.

Buffer mode register.

Attachment.

Channel tag out.

Channel diagnostic tag-in register.

BMR.

Aid.

CTO.

Control storage.

Channel data register.

channel command. An instruction that directs a data channel,
control unit, or device to perform an operation or set of
operations.

assistance.

GLOSS 1

To go back to a recovery point for retransmission.

This glossary includes definitions from:
The American National Dictionary for Information
Processing, published by the Computer and Business
Equipment Manufacturers Association. This material is
reproduced from the American National Dictionary for
Information Processing, copyright 1977 by the Computer
and Business Equipment Manufacturers Association, copies
of which may be purchased from the American National
Standards Institute, 1430 Broadway, New York, New York
10018. These definitions are identified by an asterisk (*).

o

Character.
A list of items to be checked.

CUA.

Channel unit address.

CUT.

Control unit operations table.

DANGER (Notice). A word to call attention to possible lethal
harm to people. Contrast with CAUTION.
data. * Any representations such as characters or analog
quantities to which meaning is, or might be, assigned.
data buffer. The storage buffer in the control unit. This buffer
is used to increase the data transfer rate between the control
unit and the channel.

Bits per inch.

Glossary and Abbreviations

GLOSS 1

Glossary and Abbreviations

Glossary and Abbreviations

data check. A synchronous or asynchronous indication of a
condition caused by invalid data or incorrect positioning of data.
Some data checks can be suppressed.
OBI.

DOT.

Device operation table.

Double-stick cellophane tape.. Cellophane tape that has
adhesive on both sides of the tape.

Error register A register.

ERB.

Error register B register.

Data buffer out.

Functional microcode. Microcode that is resident in the
machine during normal customer operation.
FVP.

Functional verify program.

gnd.

Ground.

Environmental recording, editing, and printing.

EREP.

Data buffer in.

DBO.

ERA.

drive, magnetic tape. (ISO) A mechanism for moving
magnetic tape and controlling its movement.

ERG.

DSC.

Device secondary clock register.

ERPA.

Data security erase.

E / ME / A.

Erase gap.
g.

dc.

Direct current.

DCB.

Data control block.

DSE.

DCK.

Data check.

DSE (register).

OCR.

Device control register.

DSH.

Device status and error register.

OSlo

Dynamic device reconfiguration.

DSR.

device end.

degauss.

To demagnetize an object.

degradation. A decrease in quality of output or throughput, or
increase in machine error rate.

Control unit serial high register.

Device tag register.

EAD.

Error Analysis Diagrams.

EBCDIC.

Extended binary-coded decimal interchange code.

EC.

demark.

ECA.

Engineering change activity.

ECC.

Error correction code.

designed.

Has as a purpose.

detent. A mechanical device for holding moving parts in
position.
detented.
DEV.
OF.

Edge connector. Engineering change.

elsewhere.

Device.

end of file (EOF).

Data Fields and Registers.

FE.

IBG.

Interblock gap.

Field Engineering.
Field Engineering automated logic diagram.

Hertz (cycles per second).

10.

Identification.

identifier. That difference by which one thing can be
distinguished from another.

FIFO.

IML.

First in first out.

A code that marks the end of a block of

file. * (ISO) A set of related records, treated as a unit, for
example, in stock control, a file could consist of a set of
invoices.
file protection. Prevention of the destruction of data recorded
on a volume by disabling the write head of a unit.

The end of the recording area on a tape.

End of block.

DGOVL Y.

Diagnostic overlay log.

EOF.

End of file.

FP.

* (ISO) The arrangement or layout of data on a data

Initial microprogram load.

immediate access storage. * A storage device whose access
time is negligible in comparison with other operating times.
inertia. Tendency to remain at rest or continue in the same
direction.
initial microprogram load (lML). The action of loading a
microprogram from an external storage to writable control
storage.
INST.

File protect.

DIAG.

Diagnostic.

EOJ.

End of job.

frayed.

DIDO.

Data in data out bus.

EOR.

End of record.

FRU.

Field replaceable unit.

Device interrupt register.

EOT.

End of tape.

FSB.

Forward space block.

EPO.

Emergency power off.

FSC.

Fault symptom code.

EQC.

Equipment check.

FSF.

Forward space file.

EQU.

Equate.

FSI.

Damaged as if by an abrasive substance.

Installation.

inter block gap (lBG). (1) * An area on a data medium to
indicate the end of a block or physical record. (2) (Te97) The
space between two consecutive blocks on a data medium.
interface. * A shared boundary. An interface might be a
hardware cO'l1ponent to link two devices, or it migh[ be a
portion of storage or registers accessed by two or more
computer programs.
intervention required.

equipment check.
malfunction.

An asynchronous indication of a

Manual action is needed.

Fault symptom index.

FTSC.

INTLK.

Interlock.

INTRO.

Introduction.

Field Technical Support Center.

functional.

Of, connected with, or being a function.

Device level register.

ips.

EC336395

inches per second.

Glossary and Abbreviations

~ CopyrIght IBM Corp. 1984, 1985

,

Hz.

field replaceable unit (FRU). An assembly that is replaced in
its entirety when anyone of its components fails,

EOB.

3480 MI

High voltage.

Input/output.

Diagnostic hardware error log.

DLR.

HV.

1/ O.

DGHELO.

directories. Data sets at the beginning of the MD diskettes
that contain the names and locations of the other data sets on
the diskette.

High speed.

fault symptom code (FSC). A hexadecimal code generated
by the drive or control unit microcode in response to a detected
subsystem error, This code is used as an MI entry point by the
service representative.

FEALD.

A code that marks the end of a file of data.

end of tape (EOT).

direct access storage. (1) * A storage device in which the
access time is in effect independent of the location of the data.
(2) (TC97) A storage device that provides direct access to data.
(2) See also immediate access storage.

HS.
Fuse.

format.
medium.

DIR.

See host processor.

To or at another place.

end of block (EOB).
data.

Held in position by a detent.

Hexadecimal.

host system.

Device secondary register.

DTR.

hex.

Unit of frequency. One hertz equals one cycle per

Can explode or cause to explode.

Control unit serial low register.

degraded. Decreased in quality of output or throughput or
increased machine error rate.
Mark to show that the buffer segment is not usable.

hertz (Hz).
second.

Europe/Middle East/Asia.

exchange. ( 1) The act of removing an old or imperfect part
and installing a new or perfect part. (2) Contrast with "swap."

F.
DE.

Gram.

Error recovery procedure action.

explosive.
DDR.

.' '\

\~J

,

"\

,)

GLOSS 2

:J

~)

u

~)

"

I"

'<,

}

GLOSS 2
J

o

o

o

o

o

o

Glossary and Abbreviations
irrecoverable error lnJ (1) (TC97) An error that makes
recovery impossible without the use of recovery techniques
external to the computer program or run. (2) In item (11. the
recovery techniques would be external to those that are
incorporated, not only within the program that failed but also
within the system, and would include human action such as
analysis by a program support representativp..
ITA.

magnetic tape. (TC97) A tape with a magnetizable surface
layer on which data can be stored by magnetic recording.
maintonance agreement. A contract between IBM and a
customer for supplying service to the customer.
maintenance package. The maintenance aids that IBM
supplies for servicing the subsystem.

microprogram. • (1) (ISO) A sequence of elementary
instructions that corresponds to a specific computer operation,
that is maintained in special storage, and whose execution is
started by the introduction of a computer instruction into an
instruction register of a computer. (2) A group of micro
instructions that, when executed, performs a preplanned
function.

MAP.

Maintenance analysis procedure.

MAQ.

Maintenance agreement qualification.

Note: The term microprogram represents a dynamic
arrangement or selection of one or more groups of micro
instructions for execution in order to perform a particular
function. The term microcode represents micro
instructions used in a product as an alternative to
"'hard-wired" circuitry to implement certain functions of
a processor or other system component.

Interval timer B register.

ITC.

Interval timer C register.

IMR.

Interrupt mask register.

JAL.

Jump address low register.

JAH.

Jump address high register.

mask. * (ISO) (1) A pattern of characters that is used to
control the retention or elimination of portions of another pattern
of characters. (2) To use a pattern of characters to control the
retention or elimination of portions of another pattern of
characters.

microprogram load.
milli.

K. (1) * When referring to storage capacity, two to the tenth
power; 1024 in decimal notation. (2) Kelvin.

master file. * (ISO) A file that is used as an authority in a
given job and that is relatively permanent, even though its
contents may change. Synonymous with main file.

kb.

MCR.

LO.

MD.

Maintenance information.

mm.
MOA.

Maintenance device adapter.

MOD.

Maintenance device display.

MOL

Maintenance data in register.

M P.
MPL.

Legend.
MOO.

load point.
LOC.

Locations.

LRC.

Longitudinal redundancy check.

LSB.

Least-significant bit.

Nanosecond.

OBR.

Outboard recorder.

offline. (TC97) Pertaining to the operation of a functional unit
without the continual control of a computer. Contrast with
online.
OL T.

Online test.

online. (TC97) Pertaining to the operation of a functional unit
that is under the continual control of a computer. Contrast with
offline.
OP.

Operator panel.

OPER.
osc.

Operation.
Oscillator.

oscillator.

A device that periodically varies a voltage.

OSU panel.

That which changes the meaning.

Microprocessor.

outstanding.
ov.

Operator setup panel.
Waiting for processing.

Over voltage.

overrun. Loss of data because a receiving device is unable to
accept data at the rate it is transmitted.

Microprogram load.
owner.

ms.

One who owns something.

Millisecond.

media capacity. The amount of data that can be contained on
a storage medium, such as tape, expressed in bytes of data.

MSB.

Most-significant bit.

parameter. * (ISO) A variable that is given a constant value
for a specified application and that may denote the application.

meter (m).

MSG.

Message.

part.

Part number.

Multiple track error.

p bit.

Parity bit.

A unit of measure equal to 0.9144 yard.

MICR.

Micro instruction register.

MTE.

micro.

One millionth of.

MTI.

MICRO.

Microcode.

MTO.

Maintenance tag in register.
Maintenance tag out register.

PC.

Parity check.

PCR.

Processor control register.

POR.

Processor diagnostic register.

Large scale integration technology.

LSP.

Local storage page register.

LSR.

Local storage register.

LWR.

Loop write-to-read.

m.

Millimeter.

Maintenance data out register.

See beginning of tape.

locate block. A subsystem operation in which a tape is moved
so that a specific block is available for processing.

LSI.

Machine level control.

modifier.

Light-emitting diode.

LGNO.

ns.

Non-return-to-zero change-on-ones recording.

Maintenance device. Microcode diagrams.

Load.

LED.

One thousandth part of a meter.

NRZI.

GLOSS 3

Maintenance control register.
MLC.

land pattern. Wires and connections on or below the surface
of a circuit board.

See initial microprogram load.

One thousandth of.

millimeter.
MI.

Kilobyte; a unit of 1024 bytes.

o

Glossary and Abbreviations

Interval timer A register.

ITB.

o

Meter.

microcode. ( 1) One or more micro instructions. (2) A code,
representing the instructions of an instruction set, implemented
in a part of storage that is not program-addressable. (2) To
design, write, and test one or more micro instructions. (3) See
also microprogram.

multi path.

Pertaining to using more than one path.

nano.

One billionth part of.

PE.

N I A.

Not applicable.

PER.

microdiagnostic routine. A program that runs under the
control of a supervisor, usually to isolate field-replaceable units.

net wire list.
logic boards.

microdiagnostic utility. A program that is run by the service
representative to test the machine.

net.

A list that shows the wiring connections for the

Parity error.

PG.
pgm.

MIT.

Multiple track.

magnetic recording. * (ISO) A technique of storing data by
selectively magnetizing portions of a magnetizable material.

PGIO.

EC336395
1985

Path group identification.

PGM (map).

Path group map.

No operation.
PGT.

'( Copyrtght IBM Corl" 1984

Program.

The interconnection of electrical components.

A basic or elementary machine instruction.
NOP.

3480 MI

Parity generator.

Network.

network.
micro instruction.

Processor error register.

Path group 10 table.

Glossary and Abbreviations

GLOSS 3

Glossary and Abbreviations
Maintenance Plan.

reinstall.

Preventive maintenance.

remove.

PLAN.
PM.

Glossary and Abbreviations

PNEU.

RER.

Pneumatics.

To put back the original part that was removed.
To take a part off of the machine.

Read error register.

pneumatic. The parts of the subsystem that control the
pressurized air and vacuum.

resource allocation. (ISO) The assignment of the facilities of
a data processing system for the accomplishment of jobs.

POR.

resume.

special feature. A feature that can be ordered to enhance the
capability, storage capacity, or performance of an IBM product.
but is not essential for its basic work.

TI.
TIE.

Track in error.

SIO.

TM.

Tapemark.

Start I/O.

SNERRH.
SNS.

Power-on reset.

Sense error history table.

TU.

Status store.

TUBI.

ST.

Store.

TUBO.

Tape unit bus-out.

UEPO.

Unit emergency power off.

To attempt again.

REW.

Rewind.

PS.

ROS.

Read-only storage.

standard feature. The significant design elements of an IBM
product that are included as part of the fundamental product.

RPM.

Revolutions per minute.

ST ART.

PST.

RPR.

Read pattern register.

RRC.

Read residual count register.

Product trained.

PWR.

Power.

R/W.

Read/write.

RAM.

RSR.

Read status register.

RUN.

Rewind-unload.

SAR.

Storage address register.

SB.

Sense byte.
Silicon-controlled rectifier.

Read control register.

sync.
SOR.

RD.
ROB.

saturate.

To completely fill.

Read diagnostic control register.
sel.

Select.

tach.

RECl.

segment.

A part.

SEROES.

Serializer/deserializer.

serialize.

To change from parallel-by-byte to serial-by-bit.

tachometer. A device that emits pulses that are used to
measure/check speed or distance.

Record length.

reconnect.

To physically or electrically put back together.

tailored.

record. * (ISO) A collection of related data or words, treated
as a unit; for example, in stock control, each invoice could
constitute one record.
recording density. The number of bits in a single linear track
measured per unit of length of the recording medium.

serializer. (ISO) A device that converts a space distribution of
simultaneous states representing data into a corresponding time
sequence of states.

SM.

Service

ref.
reg.

SR.

tape void. An area in the tape in which no signal can be
detected; may be caused by a machine failure.

~v1emorandum.

VOM.

Volt ohmmeter.

VRC.

Vertical redundancy check.

WCR.

Write control register.

word. (1) (ISO) A character string that is convenient for some
purpose to consider as an entity. (2) In 3480 and System/7,
16 bits, or 2 bytes. (3) In System/360 and System/370, 32
bits, or 4 bytes.
WSE.

Write status/error register.

WTM.

servo [n.]. servos. An adjectival noun for use in qualifying
some part or aspect of a servomechanism.
servomechanism [nl * A feedback control system in which
at least one of the system signals represents mechanical motion.

Write command.

Terminal board.

Service Representative.

Reference.

3480 MI

Volume error statistics.

WRITE.

TCC.

Register.

Changed to meet individual specifications.

tape cartridge. A container holding magnetic tape that can be
processed without separating it from the container.

TB.
recoverable error. (1) An error condition that permits
continued execution of a program. (2) Contrast with
.. irrecoverable error."

VES.

WARNING (Notice). A word to call attention to possible
damage to a program, device, or system. Contrast with
CAUTION.

Tachometer.

Read forward.

ROF.

Under voltage.

volume. (ISO) A certain portion of data, together with its data
carrier, that can be handled conveniently as a unit.

Synchronous. synchronize.

synchronous. (1) (ISO) Pertaining to two or more processes
that depend upon the happening of specific events such as
common timing signals. (2) Occurring with a regular or
predictable time relationship.

Second(s) of time.

Read backward.

ROC.

Utility programs.. (1) * (ISO) A computer program in general
support of the processes of a computer; for instance, a
diagnostic program. (2) a program that enables the service
representative to maintain (or prepare to maintain) data or other
programs.

Statistical data recorder. Storage data register.

Read.
s.

Utility programs.

Support.

swap. ( 1) The act of interchanging two identical
field-replaceable units Within the same machine for test
purposes. (2) Contrast with "exchange."

See direct access storage.
SCR.

utilities.

uv.

Random access memory.

Random access memory.
RCR.

subsystem. A secondary or subordinate system, usually
capable of operating independently of, or asynchronously with, a
controlling system.
SUPP.

Tape unit bus-in.

unload. Prepare the tape cartridge for removal from the drive.
and so on.

Start maintenance.

Stoplock. A position-hold mode used when the tape is in a
stopped position and under tension.

Product support trained.

PT.

Tape Unit.

SS.
retry.

PSR. Processor status register. Program support
representative.

Test point.

To continue.

primed. Pertaining to a condition of a tape drive when the
controlling computer has addressed the drive but the drive was
not in a ready state.
Power supply.

Tape Indicate.

tp.

Sense.

Write tape mark.

Top-card connector.
XR.

tension [nl (1) The force tending to produce elongation. (2)
The condition of being stretched.
thread / load operation.
the tape path.

XRA.

External register.
External register address register.

A procedure that places tape along

EC336395

Glossary and Abbreviations

~ COPVrlght IBM Corp. 19B4. 19B5

\

• J

i

1

~;.J

GLOSS 4

, \

,)

~)

-"f,

J

)
'\

"

}

'~

}

GLOSS 4
~

, J

3480 Maintenance Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Maintenance Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Special Tools and Test Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DC Test Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Card Extractor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tape Removal Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PressurelVacuum Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PressurelVacuum Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Oscilloscope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Integrated Logic Probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cartridge Automation Facility Wrap Tool . . . . . . . . . . .
ESD Grounding Wrist Strap Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Leader Block Replacement Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Attachment Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Clutch Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Channel Wrap Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hose Clamp Tool
.........................
File Protect Gauge " . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..

5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6

Maintenance Information Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Volume A01--Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . .
GLOSS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INTRO (Introduction)
.....................
START . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CART (Cartridge) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PNEU (Pneumatics) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MSG (Message) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INST (Installation/Removal) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INSP (Safety Check Procedures) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Volume A02--Maintenance Procedures and Control Unit
Checks, Adjustments, Removals and Replacements
PWR (Power) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SENSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MD (Maintenance Device) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LOC (Locations) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CARR-CU (Control Unit Checks, Adjustments,
Removals, and Replacements) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Volume A03--Drive Checks, Adjustments, Removals, and
Replacements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CARR-DR (Drive Checks, Adjustments, Removals, and
Repl acements) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Volume A04--Support Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LGND (Legend) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SPROC (Support Procedures) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SDISK (Support Diskette Procedures) . . . . . . . . . . .
DIAG (Support Diagnostics) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DF (Data Fields) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OPER (Theory of Operation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Volume A05--Error Analysis Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . .
FSI (Fault Symptom Index) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EAD (Error Analysis Diagrams) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10

3480 MI EC A51723
Cl Copyrlg ht IBM Corp. 1982. 1899

Contents

"AN 1

Contents

PLAN 1

3480 Maintenance Package Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Main Menu display

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

3480 Product Support Summary

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vary Offline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to Vary a Drive Offline (Single or Dual Subsystem) ..
How to Vary a Control Unit Offline (Single or Dual Control
Unit Subsystem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Intermittent Failures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
End a Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engineering Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Online Tests (OLTS)
.........................
Section A: Control Unit Functional Test . . . . . . . . . . . .
Section B: Pathing Commands Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Section C: ReadlWrite Reliability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Section 0: Tape Interchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Integrated Logic Probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sceping (Using Oscilloscope) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Related Publications

55
55
55
55
55
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
65
65

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
11
11
11
11
11

IBM Confldentl al - 15 May 89

o

()

()

()

o

()

()

()

o

()

e

o

e

3480 Maintenance Summary

e

o

3480 Maintenance Summary

e PLAN 5

The 3480 maintenance p,ackage has two parts, the maintenance
diskettes and the 3480 Maintenance Information manual.

Tape Removal Tool

Integrated Logic Probe

Cartridge Automation Facility (CAF) WRAP Tool

The Maintenance Device

This tool (part 6850663) is shipped with the subsystem. Use it to
rewind tape into the cartridge when the tape must be rewound by
hand. See CART 12 for instructions on how to use the tape
removal tool.

The integrated logic probe (llP) (part 453222) can be used
instead of an oscilloscope for all measurements except those
that show timing between si~nals or the need to measure voltage
values and tolerances. See 'Integrated logic Probe" in this
section for instructions on how to use the probe.

The cartridge automation facility (CAF) wrap tool (part 39F3884)
is used when runnin~ diagnostic EE15 to veri fy the cartridge
automation feature. "See DIAG "Cartridge Automation Facility
WRAP test- Routine EE15" for more information on how to use
this tool. This tool is shipped with the RPO.

The maintenance device (MO) is the primary maintenance tool
for the 3480 Magnetic Tape Subsystem.

For more instructions, see the Integrated Logic Probe Operators
Guide, S226-3951.

The 3480 maintenance package supplies two diskettes for the
MO, a product diskette and a suppqrt diskette. All 3480
maintenance analysis procedures (MAPs), except power MAPs,
are resident on the prOduct diskette. In aadition, tlie product
diskette contains utility programs. The support diskette contains
diagnostics, subsystem display and alter controls, support utility
programs, and microcode patch programs.
When the product diskette is inserted into the maintenance
device, the maintenance device processes MAPs to analyze
machine symptoms and display log data and to guide you to the
failure. When necessary, y.ou enter symptom information on the
MO keyboard/display as aClditional input to the MAPs.

uo
....

-~'n

Tape Removal Tool (part 6850663)

·"lDI

Pressure/Vacuum Gauge
Special Tools and Test Equipment

This tool (part 6850747) is used to measure the pneumatic system
pressure or vacuum. See PNEU 5 for instructions on how to use
the pressure/vacuum gauge.

DC Test Tool

........

·..·0
-1J'fWi

This tool (part 8492781) is shipped with the subsystem. Use this
tool to determine if sUDsystem ~wer supplies are supplying
output voltages. See PWR 10 or PWR 12 for a description of this
tool and a description of how to use it.

,

2 3 458 7 8

Cartridge Automation Facility (CAF) WRAP Tool 1.14

PressureIVacuum Gauge (part 6850747)

DC Test Tool (part 8492781)

Pressure/Vacuum Kit
(Part 6857823)

Card Extractor
This tool (part 1310707) is a site tool but must be obtained
separately. It is used to remove logic cards from the subsystem.
ThiS tool IS the same extractor tool as used on other IBM devices.

This kit contains hoses, fittings and the Pressure/Vacuum gauge
(shown above) for measuring the P.J:leumatic system pressure or
vacuum. This kit is not shipped With the subsystem and must be
ordered.

Oscilloscope
The error analysis diagrams in the maintenance information
manual instruct the service representative to use an
oscilloscope. A Tektronix' MOdel 453/454 or 475 or equivalent
oscilloscope is needed.
"Trademark of Tektronix, Inc.

Card Extractor (part 1310707)

3480 MI EC A57723
Cl Copyright IBM Corp. 1982,1989

IBM Confidential- 09 May 89

3480 Maintenance Summary

PLAN 5

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

()

•

3480 Maintenance Package Summary (Continued)

3480 Maintenance Package Summary (Continued)

It
PLAN 30

1--------------------~

1 Troutlle Call Information Source:
System Console Error Message.
,--------------------------------- I
Drive Message Display Check Msg .
I
I
Internal Subsystem error Logs.
I
EREP Output.
I
1
AudiblelVisual Indications.
1
Customer Description of Problem.

-1

I

All Maintenance action begins at the
. Maintenance Information (M!) START section.

II

y
I

START 1::1 defines problem eetermination and SR
a::tlons to follow in the MI and MD Diskettes.

1
1------______________ 1

1
I

yl~------------------- i--------------------y~,--------------------------------------~y
!
i

~

Failure

Subsystem Check Out

Miscellaneous Procedures
START indicates MI sections that define non-repair procedures or
provides supplemental Information to assist repair. Included are items
such as: Predictive Maintenance; Operating tne Tape Drive; MD Use;
Installation/Removal procedures; Analysis of sys~em console messages:
EREP, Sense; Manual cartridge removal procedu~es.

START Identifies those failures that do not reQuire the MD diskette,
making reference to the MI sections to use, or defines actions to be
performed before you use the MD Product Diskette.

...

y

Non-t.m repair procedures
follow MI repair procedures
until fixed.

MI procedures prior to use of
MD Product Diskette. For
repair follow MI pre-MD
repair procedures.

~

I~

I

y

~
MI sections for non-rep&ir procedures.
MI sections for supplemental information.

I

y

Connect MD and IML Product
Diskette. When main menu is
displayed,select UNIT TEST.

Connect MD and IML Product
Diskette. When main menu is
displayed seiect START REPAIR.

MD Product Diskette
PLAN 35, 50

@

~

~

y

I
I
I

I

,

Main Menu Display
Option 1. Start Repair

G
PLAN 40
Start Repair

I Option

2. Defer Call

I

CV
PLAN 35
Defer Call

I Option

3. Unit Test

~
PLAN 35
Unit Test

I Option

4. Display FRU

FSC Error.
Key FSC into
the MD and
hit enter.

-

Option 5. Utilities

Utilities
Option 1. Read Tape Option 2. Real. ~ime Analysisioption 3. Main Menu

I

~

Note:
Use the product diskette.
This gives a list of
possible defective FRUs to
exchange. This diskette can
be run without the MD attached
to the Control Unit.

~

This Is • non-directed option that gives the
service representative the ability to read
customer tapes and display the first 80
cltafacter. of the record. on the MD.

I

This OPtion gives the service representative
the ability to Enable or Disabl, Real Time
Statistical Analysis and Reponing System.

·ttJ

,

N

PLAN 45

3480 MI EC A57723
Cl Copyright/BN Co". 1182, 1...

Read Tlpe

IBM Confldentill- 31 May 89

3480 Maintenance Package Summary (Continued)

PLAN 30
,

> ~

_____111- •

,

f)

o

o

[)

()

()

()

o

()

()

o

34s.aintenance pa.ge Summary (8tntinUed)
Product MD diskette
Option 2 - D.f.r cell

Product

0,.

To be~ih deferred
call itetus. press
R.s.t on the MD
keyboerd.

Main menu is dlsp l"yed. S.l.c t
opt i on 2. De r e r
(" ll.

~v1f)

o

3480 Maintance Package su.ary (Continued)

.LAN 35

3480 Maintenance Package Summary (Continued)

PLAN 35

diskette

Opt inn J - Unit Test
f"I.I\N .30

PLAN 30

S.rvice r.pr.s.ntetiv.
is In
midst of
st."rt r"p"ir •.N".d
ar'SeS to term'n"te
call prior to fix.

o

o

r-----------------------------l

Th 15 proc.dur. is e wey to form" lly .. nd en
I i ncorn;:> le te Ce ll.
I

-"I

: Possib l. R."sons.
I I. Required FRU not on si te.
12. End of shi ft.
13. Customer r.quests SR to work on higher
IL _ _ priority
troubl .. within (lccount.
___________________________

J

AdditioneL uses,

S9~vic~

representntive
h(1!'; made the fi1C vi~
Mf wi thout LIse of the
MO or just w"nts to
check out the subsystp~. Retpst. record
on FRU. "nd.

C'

SR-;;-r~ d"s

dr i
eir

2. EC instalL
J. MES insteLL
_______________________ J

To
in

~nSur. d~vice
~n Qperetion~l

is returned
condition.

v.

____
=r
[

Execute
Func lion" l
V.. rify Progrllm
(FVP)

-------'

Ex i t to MAP
s"L"ction for
error code.

No

L

P.~~iCP. Rp.p~esentetivp.
is l"d to "nd
of procedure.

PLAN 40

-------

PLAN 30

3480 MI EC A57723
C) Copyright IBM Corp. 1982,1989

IBM Confidential- 09 May 89

o

o

o

()

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

3480 eintenance pac_e Summary (Ceinued)

Product MD Diskette
Main Menu Selection
PLAN 30

3480 Mainteae Package sumay (Continued)

8

PLAN 35
PLAN 41

A

E

0)f----.
PLAN 41
Execute
Test MD

/Did you""
previous ly"" Yes ~
enter sense ~ Call MAP
data?
/

(

'V

MAP selected and
executed for error
code identified,

FRU list displayed in order
of failure probability.
REF message indicates MI
sections for locations and
CARR procedures.

No

IYes

The FVP is executed. This
determines if a solid failure is fixed and also that
no other errors were found.
The service representative
(SR) is then given the
chance to run the automatic
cartridge loader test.

No

Enter sense data to develop
drive address. channel adapter
(A-D), and control unit (O or

1).

8

Yes

V

)::

Yes
CHK 1 error~
(

"'v/

'----1;---......

)'0

Functional Verify Program (FVP) is
being performed. Is the program solid
or intermittent? If an error is detected, that error code is used to
select a MAP for FRU isolation. You
will be told when to operate switches,
load tape, etc •.

Fail?
Sense from
OLTs?

/~ecovere~

<

/

Key in the
drive check
code and
call MAP

(i/

0)

)::

Enter drive address to
be tested. (Channel
adapter A is selected.)

1. For intermittent problems.
Logic card FRU's are to be
exchanQed as a group, neyer
sequentially or one at a time.
2. For problems that can be
duplicated with the MD
(Solid). Logic FRU's are
to be replaced one at a time
until the problem is fixed.
This is true for both Drive
and Control Unit.
3. Always exchange nonlogic FRUs sequentially.
4. The FRUs exchanged must
be returned as a group,
with a description of
the fai lure.

tlAN 40

If a POR diagnostic
failed during IML,
ca 11 MAP,

<::;e;:;i,/

""

8

/

'v/

0)

Was

/Channel~
detected
Yes
error from
.~all
MAP
OLTs?

No

""V/

1

Maintenance
package'has
not detected
an error.
Trouble not
found (TNF).
End of call.

NO

/Are
/ you
/ here for

Yes

~te~porary

data
~rrors?
/

'v//
No

FSC and call

~

PLAN 41

3480 MI EC A57723
c:J Copyright IBM Corp, 1982, 1989

IBM Confidential- 09 May 89

3480 Maintenance Package Summary (Continued)

PLAN 40

()

o

o

f)

o

o

o

o

o

()

o

Procares
Vary Offline

Intermittent Failures

Before you perform a maintenance action on a drive, the drive
address must be offline to the operating system. Before you
perform a maintenance action on a control unit, all drives
attached to the control unit must be offline to the operating
system in a single control unit configuration or have the raths
offline for all drives in a dual control unit configuration.

Intermittent failures are delined as those that cannot be
duplicated during a service call.

o

•

Procedures

~AN

55

When you start a repair call. you are instructed to attach the MD
and follow this sequence:
1. Enter a drive check code. if available.

Failure to have the drive or control unit offline during a
maintenance action could affect the operation of the opp-rating
system.

If not.
2. Enter a sense data, if

~"ailable.

If not.

How to Vary a Drive Offline (Single or Dual
Control Unit Subsystem)

3. Enter a host detected symptom, if available.

Have the customer:

4. Enter a drive address.

1. Determine all of the channel addresses that have access to
the drive.
2. Vary each of these addresses offline to the operating system.
Be sure to verify that the customer has completed the vary offline
procedure before starting the maintenance procedure.

How to Vary a Subsystem Offline (Single or Dual
Control Unit Subsystem)
Have the Customer:

If not,

5. II there is an automatic cartridge loader problem, go to the
MAP for that problem
If not,
6. The Functional Veriiy program is run. If there are no errors,
the intermittent leg is rim. The intermittent leg is performed
in this sequence.
a. A test to see if sense data was entered previously.
If not,
b. A test for ref"""reci check 1 is

perform~.

If none are found,
1. Determine all channel paths that have access to the
subsystem.
2. Vary all channel path addresses, to each drive that is
attached to the conl!"';1 unit, ofHine to the operating system.
Be sure to veri fy that the customer has completed the vary
offline procedure before starting the maintenance procedure.
Do the following:

1. If you have dual Control Units, verify all paths to all drives

c. A test for power on diagnostic errors is performed.
If no errors are found, the program asks,
7. If there are any high temperature errors. Answer the
question.
If there are no errors lhe program asks,
8. Check for visible or audible symptoms.
If there are none,

are offline.
9. Run all 3480 Online Tests (OLTS).
2. Remove all cartridges from the drives. If the cartridges
cannot be removed, see M I VOL AO 1, CART 10, for further
instructions.

If no "rrors ar..

r", 10 ' " , I or) trouble found.

3. Open the control unit front cover.
4. Set the control unit Online/Offline switch to the Offline
position. Wait for up to one minute for the green Offline LED
to come on.
Note: The Offline LED does not light until all control unit to
channel pror.~sses have stopped.
5. If the green Offline LED does not come on see MI VOL A02,
CARR-CU 5.

3480 MI EC A57723
() COPyri9ht IBM Corp. 1982, 1989

IBM Catfidential

Procedures

PLAN 55

!

()

f)

o

()

o

o

()

f).

()

f)

ReJae Publications

tit

o

o

o

o

o

o

Rlted Publications

~LAN 70

Although there is no prerequisite reading for using this book,
additional information related to the IBM 3480 subsystem can be
found in:

•

IBM 3480 Magnetic Tape Subsystem Reference: Channel
Command, Status and Sense Bytes, and Error Recovery
Procedures, GA32·0042.

•

IBM Input/Output Equipment: Installation manual- Physical
Planning for System 360, System/370, and 4300 Processors,
GC22-7064.

•

IBM S/370 Installation Manual: Physical Planning,
GC22-7004.

•

IBM 3480 Magnetic Tape Subsystem Introduction,
GA32-0041.

•

IBM 3480 Magnetic Tape Subsystem Planning and Migration
Guide, GC35-0098.

•

IBM 3480 Magnetic Tape Subsystem Operator's Guide,
GA32-0066.

•

IBM 3480 Magnetic Tape Subsystem User's Reference,
GC35-0099.

•

Care and Handling of the IBM Magnetic Tape Cartridge,
GA32-0047.

•

Tape and Cartridge Requirements for the IBM Mngnetic Tape
Cartridge Drives, GA32-0048.

•

IBM System/3iG Principles of Operation, GA22-7000.

•

IBM Systeml370 Extended Architecture Principles of
Operation, SA22-7085.

3480 MI EC A57723
t: Copyright IBM Corp. 1982.1989

IBM Confidential

Related Publications

PLAN 70

()

()

{)

()

()

()

()

()

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

()

Contents
3480 Maintenance Summary ....................................
The Maintenance DevIce
Special Tools and Tes. Equipment
DC Test Tool
. . . . . . . . ..
Card Extractor
Tape Removal Tool
PressurelVacuum Gauge
PressurelVacuum Kit ...
Oscilloscope
..........
. . . . . .. .. ...........
Integrated logic Probe ..... ...............................
ESD Grounding Wrist Strap Toot ..............................
Cleaning Cartridge ....................................... "
leader Block Replacement Kit ...................... ........
Allachment Tool ........................................
Clutch Tool ............................................
Channel Wrap Blocks ......... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Hose Clamp Tool ..........................................
File Protect Gauge .........................................
Maintenance In'ormallon Descrlpllon ..•..•.••.•••..•••.•••••
Volume AOl o-Maintenance Procedures ...................... "
GLOSS ...............................................
PlAN ................................................
INTRO (Introduction) ....................................
START ...............................................
CART (Cartridge) ........... ..........................
PNEU (Pneumalics) ....................................
MSG (Message) .......................................
INST (Installation/Removal) ..............................
INSP (Safety Check Procedures) ..........................
INDEX ...............................................
Volume A02-Maintenance Procedures and Control Unit ..........
0

0

•

0

5
5
5
5

5
5
5
5
5
5
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6

Procedure. ..•................•....•..•..•....•..••••..•.••
Vary Ollilne .............................................
How to Vary a Drive Ollline (Single or Dual Subsystem) ...
How to Vary a Control Unit Olliine (Soogle or Dual Control Unit
Subsystem) ............
...........
Intermittent Faitures .........
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
End a Call ..................................................
Engineering Change .........................................
Online Tests (Ol TS) .........................................
Section A: Control Unit Functional Test .......................
Section B: Pathlng Commands Test ..........................
Section C: Read/Write Reliability ............................
Section 0: Tape Interchange ................................
Integrated logic Probe .........•.............................
Seoping (Using Oscilloscope) ..................................

o

o

o

o
Contents

PLAN 1

Contents

PLAN 1

55
55
55
55
55
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
65
65

10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10

Checks. Adjustments. Removals and Replacements
PWR (Power) ..........................................
SENSE ...............................................
PANEL ..............................................
MD (Maintenance Device) ...............................
lOC (locations) .......................................
CARRoCU (Control Unit Checks. Adjustments. Removals. and
Replacements) .........................•.............
Volume A03-Drive Checks. Adjustments. Removals. and
Replacements ..........................................
CARR-DR (Drive Checks. Adjustments. Removals. and
Replacements) .......................................
Volume A04--Support Procedures ............................
lGND (legend) ........................................
SPROC (Support Procedures) ............................
SDISK (Support Diskette Procedures) ......................
DIAG (Support Diagnostics) ..............................
OF (Data Fields) .......................................
OPER (Theory of Operations) ..............................
Volume AOS--Error Analysis Diagrams .....................•..
FSI (Fault Symptom Index) ...............................
EAD (Error Analysis Diagrams) ...........................
3480 Maintenance Package Summary
Main Menu dlsptay

10
10
10
10
10
10
10
to
11
11
11
tl
11

••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 25

•••••.•••••..••••••••••••••••••••••••••• o. 30

3480 Product Support Summary

3480 MI

10
10
10
10
10

ECJ36J96

•••••..•••••••••.••••••.•••••••• 50

3480 Maintenance Summary

3480 Maintenance Summary

PLAN 5

The 3480 maintenance package has two parts, the maintenance
diskettes and the 3480 Maintenance Information manual.

Card Extractor

Pressure/Vacuum Gauge

Integrated Logic Probe

The Maintenance Device

This tool (part 1310707) Is a site tool but must be obtained
separately. It Is used to remove logic cards from the subsystem.
This tool is the same extractor tool as used on other IBM devices.

This tool (part 6850747) Is used to measure the pneumatic system
pressure or vacuum. See PNEU 5 lor instructions on how to use
the pressure/vacuum gauge.

The Integrated logic probe (ILP) (part 453222) can be used
instead of an oscilloscope lor all measurements except those
that show timing between signals or the need to measure voltage
values and tolerances. See "Integrated Logic Probe" in this
section for instructions on how to use the probe.

The maintenance device (MO) is the primary maintenance tool
for the 3480 Magnetic Tape Subsystem.

For more instructions, see the Integrated Logic Probe Operators
Guide. 5226-3951.

The 3480 maintenance package supplies two diskettes for the
MO, a product diskette and a support diskette. All 3480
maintenance analysis procedures (MAPs), except power MAPs,
are resident on the product diskette. In addition, the product
diskette contains utility programs. The support diskette contains
diagnostics, subsystem display and alter controls, support utility
programs, and microcode patch programs.

o

When the product diskette Is inserted into the maintenance
device, the maintenance device processes MAPs to analyze
machine symptoms and display log data and to guide you to the
failure. When necessary, you enter symptom information on the
MO keyboard/display as additional input to the MAPs.

DO
.1 ..
ftClI

lI::n

_·lDJ

Special Tools and Test Equipment

DC Test Tool
This tool (part 8492781) is shipped with the subsystem. Use this
tool to determine if subsystem power supplies are supplying
output voltages. See PWR 10 or PWR 12 for a description of this
tool and a description of how to use it.

Card Extractor (part 1310707)

LA""

."·'111

'"

Tape Removal Tool

IAII In

+uvO

2 345 6

This tool (part 6850663) Is shipped with the subsystem. Use It to
rewind tape Into the cartridge when the tape must be rewound by
hand. See CART 12 for Instructions on how to use the tape
removal tool.

8

-uvllll

..

PressurelVacuum Gauge (part 6850747)

- I"JI.'

ee@

Pressure/Vacuum Kit (Part 6857823)
This kit contains hoses, IIlIings and the PressurelVacuum gauge
(shown above) for measuring the pneumatic system pressure or
vacuum. This kit Is not shipped with the subsystem and must be
ordered.

Oscilloscope
The error analysis diagrams in the maintenance information
manual Instruct the service representative to use an
oscilloscope. A TektronIx· Model 453/454 or 475 or equivalent
oscilloscope Is needed.
Integrated Logic Probe (part 453222)
·Trademark of Tektronix, Inc.
DC Test Tool (part 8492781)

Tape Removal Tool (part 6850663)

3480 MI
EC336396
C eopy"ultl IBM C....p. '114. ,iIes. I!IIMI.

,
\ J

3480 Maintenance Summary

,.,

~)

:)

:)

~)

PLAN 5

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

3480 Maintenance Summary (Continued)

o
3480 Maintenance Summary

o
PLAN 6

ESD Grounding Wrist Strap Tool

Leader Block Replacement Kit

Channel Wrap Blocks

Hose Clamp Tool

This tool (use the most current part number available) is used to
prevent damage when you work with electrostatic discharge
(ESD) sensitive parts. See CARR-CU 1-9 or CARR-DR 1.9 for
information on using the ESD grounding wrist strap tool. This
tool is nol shipped with the subsystem and must be ordered.

The Leader Block Replacement Kit (part 4780625) is a customer
purchased kit that Includes the clutch tool and the attachment
tool. See Cart 20 for Information on using these tools.

There are two channel wrap blocks; part 4299873 for the tag wrap
and part 4299876 for the bus wrap. These blocks are used when
running diagnostics on the channel interface. In addition, there
is a wrap terminator (part 6315622) used with the two channel
wrap blocks. See DIAG "Channel Interface Wrap Test - Routine
EE62" for more information on how to use the channel wrap
blocks. These tools are shipped with the subsystem.

This tool (part 2496268) Is used to clamp various air pt""essure
hoses for use In FRU isolation and for concurrent maintenance.
See CARR-DR 3-1 for information on how to use the hose clamp
1001. This tool is shipped with the subsystem.

FIgure 1.

Clutch Tool

File Protect Gauge
This tool (part 6178974) is used to adjust the file protect switch to
ensure correct contact is made with the tape cartridge. This tool
is shipped with the subsystem.
Figur. 3.

Wrep Block

Figur. 4.

Wrap Terminator

Cleaning Cartridge
This tool (part 4780527) is used to clean the head guide
assembly. To use, load the cartridge on a drive, and the cleaning
procedure occurs automatically. The cartridge unloads when the
cleaning procedure is done. This tool is shipped with the
subsystem.

FIgure 2.

3480 MI

EC336396

AItIIchment Tool

Figur. S.

FII. Prot.ct Gauge

3480 Maintenance Summary

PLAN 6

Maintenance Information Description

Maintenance Information Description

This socllon describes the 3480 Maintenance Informalion and
explains how to use the maintenance information to repair the
3480.
The maintenance informatIOn (MI) is a five-volume manual that
supplies maintenance procedures and theory of operation
information. This mformation is con tamed in the following five
volumes:
•
•

A01--Maintenance procedures
A02--Maintenance procedures and control unit checks,
adjustments. removals, and replacements
A03--Drive checks. adjustments, removals, and
replacements
A04--Support procedures
AOS--Error analysis diagrams.

•
•
•

E:ach volume of maintenance information is divided into sections
that are marked with tabs for quick identification and access.
The following describes the sections contained in each of the
maintenance information volumes.

Volume A01 - Maintenance Procedures
The sections contained in this volume supply maintenance
procedures and repair information needed to diagnose and
repair the 3480.

PWR (Power)

This section contains analysis and error-recovery procedures for
tape cartridge problems. The START section or the maintenance
device will send you to the CART section to perform specific
repair procedures.

This section contains the MAPs to isolate failures in the power
areas. It also contains voltage reference tables and charts,
wiring diagrams, and a description of the dc test card. The
START section or the maintenance device will send you to the
PWR section to analyze power failures.

SENSE

This section supplies analysis procedures to isolate failures in
the pneumatic system. The START section or the maintenance
device will send you to the PNEU section.

MSG (Message)
This section describes the system console messages and the
Environmental Recording Editing and Printing (EREP) program.
It contains examples of console messages and EREP printouts
and explains how to use the information. Use this section to
analyze the console messages and printouts from the EREP
program. This analysis will send you to the correct entry in the
START section.

INST (Installation/Removal)
This section supplies the information necessary for you to install
or remove the subsystem. Use this section when the customer
wants the subsystem (or a machine from the subsystem)
installed, removed, or relocated.

GLOSS
This section supplies descriptions of terms and abbreviations
used in the 3480 Maintenance Information. Use this section to
look up the meaning of any word or abbreviation that you do not
understand.

PLAN
This section (the section you are now using) describes the 3480
Maintenance Information, supplies a summary of the
maintenance package, and explains how to use the maintenance
information to repair the 3480. Use this section to learn what
aids the maintenance package supplies and how to use the
maintenance package to service the subsystem.

INSP (Safety Check Procedures)
This section supplies the safety check procedures to ensure that
a machine that has not been under an IBM Maintenance
Agreement has the needed safety items installed and that no
other changes were made to make it unsafe. Use this section
when servicing status 3 machines and when preparing a status 3
machine to be covered by a maintenance agreement.

INTRO (Introduction)
ThiS section supplies a summary of the 3480 Magnetic Tape
Subsystem, describes the tape cartridge, and describes the
subsystem features. Use this section to learn what the
subsystem consists of and what it does.

Volume A02 - Maintenance Procedures and
Control Unit Checks, Adjustments, Removals,
and Replacements

START

The sections contained in this volume supply maintenance
procedures and repair information needed to diagnose and
repair the 3480 and the removal and replacement procedures for
all FRUs in the control unit.

3480 MI

This section supplies summary charts and descriptions of the
subsystem sense bytes and the channel status byte. This section
deSCribes how to analyze the sense bits. Use this section to
determine the correct entry point to the START section and to
answer the maintenance device when it requests data about
sense bytes.

PANEL

This volume contains tho section that sllpplies the lit Ive removal
and replacement procedures.

CARR-DR (Drive Checks, Adjustments,
Removals, and Replacements)
This section supplies the removal and replacement procedures
for all FRUs in the tape unit. The check or adjustment proce(Jures
are included. At the front of the section is a list of all FRU
numbers, which you can use for FRU identification and to find
required procedures. Use this soction when the S r AfH section
or the maintonance dovice instructs you to check, adjust, or
exchange a FRU in the tape unit.

Volume A04 - Support Procedures

This section describes the switches and indicators on the control
unit and tape unit panels, and supplies tape drive operating
instructions. Use this section to learn the function of the control
unit and tape unit panels. YOli can also use thiS section for
directions about performing operations as instructed by tho
START section and the maintenance device.

MD (Maintenance Device)
This section describes the maintenance device (MOl. MO
messages, and MD menus. Instructions on how to use the MO
are provided. Use this section to learn about the MD and how to
use it with the 3480 subsystem.

The sections contained in thiS volume supply diagnostic
procedures and information, theory of operatIOn, microcode data
field, and register information to aid you in diagnosing problems.

LGND (Legend)
This section deSCribes with graphics HIe symbols used in the
maintenance information. In addition, examples and deSCriptions
of logic, net wire, and voltage pin lists are supplied. Use this
section to learn how to read the diagrams in the maintenance
package.

SPROC (Support Procedures)
LOC (Locations)
This section shows the location of FRUs, assemblies, and parts in
the control unit and tape unit. Use this section to find the
locations of items you are sent to by the maintenance device or
by other sections of this manual.

This section provides a step by step procedure for entering and
using the support maintenance package. II reminds you of what
error data is available and gives hints on analyzing that data.

SD/SK (Support Diskette Procedures)

INDEX
This section supplies an alphabetic list of key words and phrases
in maintenance information volumes A01, A02, A03, A04, and
AOS. Use this section to lind the subject you want.

This section supplies the initial entry into the maintenance
package. It contains problem-finding procedures that guide the
service representative to a diagnostic or repair procedure. Use
this section to start your analysis of a problem. This section aids
you in analyzing the problem or instructs you to use the
maintenance device to analyze the problem.

Volume A03 - Drive Checks, Adjustments,
Removals, and Replacements

CART (Cartridge)

PNEU (Pneumatics)

PLAN 10

CARR-CU (Control Unit Checks, Adjustments,
Removals, and Replacements)
This section supplies the removal and replacement procedures
for all FRUs in the control unit. The check or adjustment
procedures are included. At the front of the section is a list of all
FRU numbers, which you can use for FRU identification and to
find required procedures. Use this section when the START
section or the maintenance device instructs you to check, adjust,
or exchange a FRU in the control unit.

EC336396

This section describes the support diskette procedures and gives
directions on using the maintenance device (MD) to display
registers, run the trace program, and do other support MD
operations that are resident on the support diskette.

DIAG (Support Diagnostics)
This section contains a description of the diagnostic control
program, the diagnostic tests, and the Drive Command Exerciser
that are resident on the support diskette.

Maintenance Information Description

PLAN 10

.(l COPVn9ht IIlM Corp. 1984. f985 1986 1987

,

l

)

\,

"J

:)

!)

:)

I)
'-

~}

:J

~)

"\. \).

o

c

Maintenance Information Description (Continued)

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

Maintenance Information Description (Continued)

PLAN 11

Maintenance Information Description (Continued)

PLAN 11

DF (Data Fields)
This section describes the control unit and drive microcode data
fields, logs, and registers that are useful to you in diagnosis of
subsystem hardware failures.
The data field definitions are predominantly used to define bit
meanings within a register or field when EADs make reference to
them. Additionally, support diagnostics display register
contents, and the data fields section can be used to define their
meanings.

OPER (Theory of Operations)
This section supplies the theory information necessary to
understand subsystem operations. Included are card, command,
and data flow descriptions.

Volume A05-Error Analysis Diagrams
This volume contains a Fault Symptom Index (FSI) and Error
Analysis Diagrams (EAD) that are used to diagnose problems
when detailed troubleshooting is necessary.

FSI (Fault Symptom Index)
This section contains a listing of error codes generated by the
control unit or drive. A description of each error code, a FRU list
associated with the error code, and troubleshooting references
are provided. Use this section when you are sent here by the
Support Procedures to diagnose problems that were not
corrected by the product procedures.

EAD (Error Analysis Diagrams)
This section contains error diagrams, error condition theory, and
troubleshooting guides for error codes that are generated by the
control unit or drive. Use this section when you are sent here by
the FSI for diagnosing problems that were not corrected by the
product procedures.

3480 MI
( CopYf'qhllBM Corp

EC336395
1984

198~

3480 Maintenance Package Summary

3480 Maintenance Package Summary

PLAN 25

3480 Maintenance Package Summary

PLAN 25

The flowcharts on pages PLAN 30 through PLAN 5 1 show the
process that the maintenance package follows to lead you to a
repair. The flowcharts do not make up a repair procedure. The
repair procedure is completely contained in the sections starting
at START and in the maintenance device diskettes.
PLAN 30 shows the process up to the selection of an action
from the MD main menu.
PLAN 35 shows the process the maintenance package follows
for an interrupted service procedure. PLAN 35 also shows the
procedure that the maintenance package follows when you want
to test the subsystem for correct operation.
PLAN 40 and PLAN 41 show the procedure the maintenance
package follows when you select Start Repair from the MD main
menu. They show how the package diagnoses the problem
from the information you supply.
PLAN 50 and PLAN 51 describe the maintenance package tools
available to the service representative with support education.

3480 MI

EC336395

C Copyright IBM Corp. 19B4. 1985

,')

o

{)

u

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

3480 Maintenance Package Summary (Continued)

o

o

3480 Maintenance Package Summary (Continued)'

o
PLAN 30

,-------------------1
I

Trouble Call Information Source:

I

.J
System Console Error Message.
I
.---------------------------------- I
Drive Message Display Check Msg.
I
I
Internal Subsystem error Logs.
I
I
EREP Output.
I
I
AudlblelVlsual Indications.
I
Customer Description of Problem.
I
J
II____________________

All Maintenance action begins at the
Maintenance Information (MI) START section.

START 10 defines problem determination and SR
actions to follow in the MI Ilnd MD Diskettes.

y

Failure

Subsystem Check Out

Miscellaneous Procedures
START Indicates MI sections that define non-repair procedures or
provides supplemental Information to assist repair. Included are Items
such as: Predictive Maintenance: Operating the Tape Drive: MD Use:
Installation/Removal procedures: Analysis of system console messages;
EREP, Sense: Manual cartridge removal procedures.

START Identifies those failures that do not require the MD diskette,
making reference to the MI sections to use, or defines actions to be
performed before you use the MD Product Diskette.

MI procedures prior to use of
MD Product Diskette. For
repair follow MI pre-MD
repair procedures.

Non-MD repair procedures
follow MI repair procedures
until fixed.

I

Connect MD and IML Product
Diskette. When main menu is
displayed select START REPAIR.

l

Connect MD and IML Product
Diskette. When main menu Is
displayed select UNIT TEST.

l

I

MI sections for non-repair procedures.
MI sections for supplemental information.

I

I

MD Product Diskette
PLAN 35, 50

@>-----~~
Main Menu Display
Option 1. Start Repair

I Option

2. Defer Call

I

Option 3. Unit Test

I Option

4. Display FRU

Option 5. Utilities

I
PLAN 40
Start Repair

PLAN 35
Defer Call

PLAN 35
Unit Test

FSC Error.
Key FSC into
the MD and
hit enter.

Utilities
Option 1. Read Tape Option 2. Real Time AnalYSi10ption 3. Tape lifter Solenoid Test IOption 4. Main Menu

I

I

Note:
Use the product diskette.
This gives a list of
possible defective FRUs to
exchange. This diskette can
be run without the MD attached
to the Control Unit.
This Is a non-directed option that gives the
service representative the ability to read
customer tapes and display the first 80
characters of the record on the MD.

This OPtion gives the service representative
the ability to Enable or Disable Real Time
Statistical Analysis and Reporting System.

Tape Lifter Solenoid Response
Checking Procedure.
CARR DR 3·2

PLAN 45
Read Tape

3480 MI

EC A47957

C CopY"OnIIBM Corp.

1984. 1985. 1986. 1987

3480 Maintenance Package Summary (Continued)

PLAN 30

3480 Maintenance Package Summary (Continued)

3480 Maintenance Package Summary (Continued)
Product MD diskette
Option 2 - Di rer call
PLAN 30

Product MD diskette
Option 2 - Derer caLL
PLAN 30

Service representative

is in the midst of
st.art r.,pair •.Need

ariseS to terminate

coLL prior to fix.

To begin deferred
call S14tuS. preSS

PLAN 35

r-----------------------------,I
I This procedure Is a way to formally end an
I I ncomp le t., ca ll.
I

I
I
I

: Possl b l .. R.. asons.
I I. Requ i r .. d FRU no t on 51 t e.
12. End of shl ft.
13. Customer requests SR to work on higher
IL _ _priority
within
account.
_ _ _ _ _ _ trouble
______
____
___________

:
I
I
I
I

-~

Addltlonol USeS'

Service representotive

has made the fix via
1011 without uSe of the
MD or just wants to
check out the subsysteM. Retest. record

on FRU. end.

r-----------------------,
I Following.
I
-~

I
IL

1. Non-MD assisted repair
2. EC Install
3. MES Install
_______________________

~

To ensure d.,vlce Is returned
In an operational condition.

~

Res .. t on th .. Me
keyboard.

Moin menu is dis-

Execute

pLayed. Select
option 2. Derer
Ca ll.

Functional
Verify Program
(FVP)

Ex I t to MAP
s.,lectlon for
.rror code.

PLAN 40

PLAN 30

3480 MI

EC336396

II:> CopynOhllBM Corp. 1984. 1985. 1986. 1987

\

,j

3480 Maintenance Package Summary (Continued)

PLAN 35

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

3480 Maintenance Package Summary (Continued)

o

o

PLAN 35
PLAN 41

8

E

A

<

/Did you,

~~~~:o~!~~~~

PLAN 41

MAP selected and
executed for error
code identified.

FRU list displayed in order
of fai lure probabi I ity.
REF message indicates MI
sections for locations and
CARR procedures.
Enter drive address to
be tes ted. (Channe I
adapter A is selected.)

Key in the
drive check
code and
ca II MAP

No

Functional Verify Program (FVP) is
being performed.
Is the program solid
or intermittent? If an error is detected, that error code is used to
select a MAP for FRU isolation. You
will be told when to operate switches,
load tape, etc ..
No

Enter sense data to develop
drive address, channel adapter
(A-D), and control unit (0 or

I).

3480 MI
;~

EC336395

COPVflQ.hIIBM Corp_ 1984. 1985. 1986

IYes

0)

PLAN 40

3480 Maintenance Package Summary (Continued)

Product MD Diskette
Main Menu Selection
PLAN 30

Execute
Test MD

o

Logic card FRUs are to be
exchanged as a group, never
sequentially or one at a
time.
I. For the control unit,
exchange the entire
logic FRU group called.
2. For a drive, exchange
all logic FRUs as a
group.
3. Always exchange nonlogic FRUs sequentially.
4. The FRUs exchanged must
be returned as a group,
with a description of
the fai lure.

The FVP is executed. This
determines if a sol id fai lure is fixed and also that
no other errors were found.
The service representative
(SR) is then given the
chance to run the automatic
cartridge loader test.

data?

/

V

)NO

/

/~

Fa i I?
/sense from
OLTs?

<'

", /

~

0)

Yes

~

~
Call MAP

0)

V

/

Recovered
CHK I error?

<

Yes

V1

No

/wa~"

there a
~es If a POR diagnostic
POR failure?
failed during IML,
'"
call MAP.
/

<

~//

L -_ _~I

____~

0)
/
/

No

Maintenance
package has
not detected
an error.
Trouble not
found (TNF).
End of call.

/Are
you
here for

~
No

FSC and ca I I

~

PLAN 41

3480 Maintenance Package Summary (Continued)

PLAN 40

3480 Maintenance Package Summary (Continued)

3480 Maintenance Package Summary (Continued)

PLAN 41

3480 Maintenance Package Summary (Continued)

PLAN 41

PLAN 40

No

SR asked if a II
FRUs have been
replaced.
Product Diskette
exhausted for
this error code.

SR informed this
is a different
error. Then new
MAP is executed
for the new error
code.

PLAN 40
Yes

PLAN 40

PLAN 50

3480 MI

EC336395

e Copyright IBM Corp. 19B4. 1985

.

... )

'\

,)

o

o

o

o

o

3480 Maintenance Package Summary (Continued)
Read Tape/Tape Read Program
The Tape Read program will read a record and display up to 80
characters of data on the MD panel. The program will also
perform motion commands associated with locating blocks or
files of data. This program makes no attempt to define a tape
problem and as such is not part of the normal product
maintenance package. Its use requires a knowledge of the layout
of data on tape. Further information about the MVS/370 or
MVS/XA system with Data Facility Product processes, magnetic
tape labels can be obtained by consulting the publication titled
Magnetic Tape Labels and File Structure Administration
(GC26-4064 for MVS/370 or GC26-4003 for MVS/XA) if that
program product is installed.

Read backward
•

Data would be placed into the buffer backwards.

Parameters are required for the locate command as follows:

xx = Segment

***MA[N MENU-**
ENTER A NUMBER
FROM THE FOLLOWING
LIST.

I

YY
1

1=STA~T REPAIR
2-CA'-.L DEFERRED
3-UNIT TEST
4=DISPLAY FRUS

Provides data in the same format as indicated in the locate command
above but shows the beginning and ending buffer "pointers."
Nole: If a Tape Mark is the record that the
RBI is issued for, the beginning and ending
pOinters will be equal.

I

3 = FSF = Forward space file

I 1.READ TAPE
2.REAL TIME ANALYSIS
3.TAPE LIFTC:R
SOLENOID TEST ...

I

ECA57693
IBM Corp , ..... '.85, 1986. 1987, 1988

5 = FSB = Forward space block
6

= BSB = Backward space block

= REW = Rewind

8 = RUN = Rewind unload
9

I

3480 MI

= BSF = Backward space file
Spaces the tape either forward or backward until a Tape Mark is
detected.

7

DRIVE X MUST BE
LOADED AND READY
BEFORE PROCEEDING.

OPTION:
4-BSF
5-FSB
6-BSB

4

Spaces the tape either forward or backward one block.

I

ENTER
1=RDF
2-RBI
3=FSF

= RDF = Read forward

2 = RBI = Read block 10

I

(1)

= Block 10

Will read and fill the buffer until either a Tape Mark is detected
or the buffer fills.

5=UTILITIES

ENTER ADR OF DRIVE
TO USE.

1) Copyright

PLAN 45

XXyyyyy

(5)

To prevent altering data

a

o = LaC = Locate
Theory Only - The MO displays
in this diagrcm rncy not be the
serne os ocbc! 11110 d:s::lloys.

The following commands are not provided:

•

o

3480 Maintenance Package Summary (Continued)

This utility is located on the product disk because of space
requirements and to separate the program from the Drive
Command Exerciser which has the ability to write data. The tape
read program will run concurrent with customer operations and
the data on the tapes being used cannot be altered.

Write

o

o

= END = Returns to menu

O=LOC
7=REW
8-RUN
9-END

3480 Maintenance Package Summary (Continued)

PLAN 45

3480 Maintenance Package Summary (Continued)

3480 Maintenance Package Summary (Continued)
EXAMPLE.

The following is presented for the use of the service
representative and does not cover all possible combinations 01
tape label structure. The information is presented only as an
example.

RESULTS OF A READ BLOCK 10
COMMAND (RB I )

Blk ID of next record
to send to the ch(:lnnel.

000044

Blk ID of l(:lst record
in buffer.

EXAMPLE.

Tapes can be used that have IBM standard labels. non-standard
labelS. user labels and no labels. If IBM standard label
processing is used, a tape that has been used for output will
consist of a volume label plus data set header and trailer labels.
The volume label is created by either a utility program or user's
program when the tape is first received.

SECTOR

000042

The IBM standard volume label (VOL 1) appears at the beginning
of each tape. The volume label identifies the volume and its
owner and Is used to verify that the correct volume Is mounted.

RESULTS OF A LOCATE COMMAND
(LOC)

READ FORWARD ON A TAPE THAT
HAS AN IBM STANDARD LABEL AND
HAS BEEN USED FOR OUTPUT.
VOL1XI2345

Volser

READ FORWARD PAST VALID DATA

I

I

HDRIOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO
00000000000000000000
00000000000000000000
00000000000000000000

I

HDR2F231802318000ABC

I

IX

TAPE MARK

TAPE MARK

READ FORWARD ON A BLANK TAPE
(NEVER INITIALIZED)
FAILED READ FWD
COMMAND

•

The identifier is EOV or EOF instead of HDR .

•

A block count is recorded in the first trailer label (EOV1 or
EOF1) and Is used on Input to verify that all blocks of the
data set are processed. The block count field In the HDR1
label contains zeros.

I

Crp"t.d on drive 6
using control unit
10143

I
(Customp, doto
reco,ds)

I
TAPE MARK

I

EOF1ABC.OPEN.TOOOOOI Formot of EOFI ond
EOV 1 is tr,. som.
X1234500010001
86029 000000057000 os HDRI.
IBM OS/VS 370

The data set trailer label group consists of IBM standard data set
label 1 (EOV1 or EOF1) and IBM standard data sellabel 2 (EOV2
or EOF2). These labels duplicate the IBM data set header labels
so that the tape can be read backward. The trailer labels are
identical to the header labels except that:

SNS.0850204100078C20
000270C270C20000
0000000200000000
F08002El01431 101

S

/PP
01436

These labels are created automatically by data management
each time a data set is recorded on tape.

I

XI2345

HDR1ABC.OPEN.TOOOOOI
X1234500010001
86029 000000000000 Crp"tpd on doy 29
of 1986.
IBM OS/VS 370

The HDR2 label contains additional data set characteristics.
These labels are used to identify and describe the data set and to
protect it from unauthorized use. It also contains the last four
digits of the control unit serial followed by the drive number that
created the tape.

FAILED READ FWD
COMMAND

EXAMPLE.

EXAMPLE.

The data set header label group consists of IBM standard data
set label 1 (HDR1) and IBM standard data set label 2 (HDR2). The
HDR1 label contains operating system and device-dependent
data that relates to the data set. It also contains the year and
Julian date that the tape was created.

ENTER LOCATE ADDRESS
AS 01000005. ERROR
OCCURS IF PAST AREA
WRITTEN.
EXAMPLE.

READ FORWARD ON A TAPE THAT
HAS BEEN INITIALIZED BY
IEHINITT BUT HAS NEVER
BEEN USED FOR OUTPUT.
VOLIX12345

BLOCK ID ........... .
02 000042
02 000044
02

EXAMPLE.

PLAN 46

I

EOF2F231802318000ABC Format of EOF2 ond
EOV2 is the som..
S oS HDR2.
/PP
IX
01436

I
TAPE MARK

TAPE MARK

I

I

SNS.0041202EOOOOO020
0000716171617153
0000000200000000
F08002El01431 100

3480 MI

EC336396

© Copyright IBM Corp.

~J

3480 Maintentmce Package Summary (Continued}

PLAN 46

t984. 1985. 1986. 1987

~J

~.

< )

J

.)
\,

~}

~J

3

J

t \

1-

l '"

·:~l

.

o

G

o

o

o

o

o

o

3480 Product Support Summary

o

3480 Product Support Summary

o
PLAN 50

Note:
Registers displayed by programs/diagnostics on
the support diskettes are useful in isolating hardware
failures and are explained in the OF (Data Fields) section.
See ··Contents·· on OF 1.

Plan 41

Support Diskette Main Menu
The support diskette is used with the HI EAD section or independently
as a tool for independent troubleshooting. However, immediately after
using all of the aids of the support MI and diskette, the SR must request the next level of support, instead of continuing self-analysis.
This is to decrease down time and customer dissatisfaction.

Product package has fai led to repair
a subsystem fai lure. SR is instructed
to request next level of support.

I. Subsystem Diagnostics 2. Subsystem
(Run options are supDisplay/Alter
pI ied for diagnostics
such as Stop on Error,
Loop, and others)

You must go to the Support Procedures
(SPROC) section and the Fault Symptom
Index (FSI) section for direction.

~

EADS are listed sequentially, 2-digit
tape unit codes through 4-digit
control unit codes. Based on the
error code, the EAD supplies error
description, error detection theory,
error diagram, and troubleshooting
guide. The troubleshooting guide
refers to logic, power, net pin lists,
and support diagnostic setup and use,
if needed. The support SR diagnoses
the problem using the EAD or takes independent action, using the support
diskette as an added support tool.
For some error codes the Fault
Symptom Index (FSI) defines the error.

Repair
successful?

Plan 51

Selected Diagnostics

I
Entering a 4-digit
error code selects
single or mUltiple
diagnostics.

Yes
>---------------______________

I

An aided repair is made.

G

Plan 51

Drive Command Exerciser

I
Runs a chained set
of all diagnostics.

Takes a user-selected
chain of up to 8 commands. The command
format is listed on the
reference display.
This diagnostic runs
concurrently. Command
chains can be recommended in the EADs for
error codes.

~

No
If the product support package fails
to repair the device failure,
call for the next higher level of aid.

Diagnostics

3. Support Utilities

GO to Main Menu.
/ Select Unit Test.

CJ

1

----------------J

Note:
The unit test option requests
that you IML the control unit
functional code if needed.

----------------

Plan 30

3480 MI

EC336395

• Copyroght IBM Ccyp 1984 1985

3480 Product Support Summary

PLAN 50

3480 Product Support Summary (Continued)

3480 Product Support Summary (Continued)
Plan 50

Plan 50

M

L

1. Storage

Display/Alter

I
Supp lies acces s to
the control unit
tables, control unit
storage, channel
storage, status
storage, and drive
storage.

PLAN 51

2. Register
Display/Alter

I
Supplies access to
the control unit and
drive external registers and local storage registers and the
control unit scan
ring.

1. Control unit

trace/match control

2. Microprocessor

3. Control unit

subsystem dump,

control

I

I

I

Prompts the user for
setup data. Action
taken at the time
selected errors occur.

Permi ts control operations in these areas:
maintenance adapter
registers and
microprocessor, control storage, and
maintenance adapter
commands.

Dump files can be
wr i tten fQ":- the,
control unit and
drives, of long or
short format.
Dump files are
written on the
support diskette.

I
1. Product mainten-

ance adapter registers

3480 MI

I

I

Displays the fo I lowregisters: MCR, MSB,
MTI, ADR, and DREG.

Provides microprocessor control simi lar
to an SR panel. (For
example, stop, step,
start, reset, etc. )

EC336395

10 Copyright IBM Corp. 19B4,

Microprocessor
commands

Control storage
commands

1

Product maintenance
adapter commands

1

AI lows control
storage read and
write operations.

AI lows product maintenance adapter control via commands.
(For example, set
address, comp
sync/stop, iJnore
errors, etc.

3480 Product Support Summary (Continued)

Hiss

tJ

PLAN 51

o

o

o

o

o

Procedures
Vary Offline
Before you perform a maintenance action on a drive, the drive
address must be offline to the operating system. Before you
perform a maintenance action on a control unit, all drives
attached to the control unit must be offline to the operating
system in a single control unit configuration or have the paths
offline for all drives in a dual control unit configuration.
Failure to have the drive or control unit offline during a
maintenance action could aifect the operation of the operating
system.

How to Vary a Drive Offline (Single or Dual
Control Unit Subsystem)

2.

Determine all of the channel addresses that have access to
the drive.

2.

Vary each of these addresses offline to the operating system.

Be sure to verify that the customer has completed the vary offline
procedure before starting the maintenance procedure.

How to Vary a Subsystem Offline (Single or Dual
Control Unit Subsystem)

o

o

o

o

Procedures

PLAN 55

Procedures

PLAN 55

If the Offline green lED does not light, press the IMLlReset
switch to the Reset position.
Nole: Check with the customer to ensure that the
subsystem has been varied offline completely before
pressing Reset.

Intermittent Failures
Intermittent failures are defined as those that cannot be
duplicated during a service call.
When you start a repair call, you are instructed to attach the MD
and follow this sequence:
1.

Have the customer:
1.

o

Enter a drive check code, if available.
If not,

2.

Enter a sense data, if available.
If not,

3.

Enter a host detected symptom, if available.
If not,

4.

Enter a drive address.

5.

If there is an automatic cartridge loader problem, go to the
MAP for that problem.

Have the Customer:
If not,
1.
2.

Determine all channel paths that have access to the
subsystem.

6.

Vary all channel path addresses, to each drive that is
attached to the control unit, offline to the operating system.

The Functional Verify program is run. If there are no errors,
the intermittent leg is run. The intermittent leg is performed
in this sequence.
a.

Be sure to verify that the customer has completed the vary
offline procedure before starting the maintenance procedure.

If not,

Do the fOllowing:
1.

A test to see if sense data was entered previously.

b.

A test for recovered check 1 is performed.
If none are found,

Switch the control unit Online/Offline switch to the Offline
position.
c.
Note: A delay can be expected because the Offline
green LED does not light until alJ channel processes
have stopped.

A test for power on diagnostic errors is performed.
If no errors are found, the program asks,

7.

If there are any high temperature errors. Answer the
question.
If there are no errors the program asks.

8.

Check for visible or audible symptoms.
If there are none,

9.

Run all 3480 Oline Tests (OlTS).
If no errors are found; no trouble found.

3480 MI
t)

EC336396

Copyngr11 IbM Corp 1~84 1985 1Ybb l~tsl

Procedures (Continued)
End a Call

Online Tests (OLT5)

Section D: Tape Interchange

During normal maintenance actions the maintenance device
(MO) will guide you through the End a Call procedure. However,
if the maintenance action you have performed did not use the
MO, connect the MO to the control unit and select option 3, Unit
Test. The Unit Test option will run the Functional Verify Program
to check out the subsystem and guide you through the End a Call
procedure.

If you have any question concerning the use of the 3480 Online
Tests (OL Ts) see the Online Tests (OL Ts) Users Guide, Document
Number 099-3480.

The tape Interchange test Is used to verify thai a tape written on
one tape drive can be correctly read on another tape drive. The
test runs In the buffered write and read mode of the 3480
subsystem.

The 3480 Online Tests (OL Ts) program contains four test
sections:
•

Section A - Control Unit Functional Test

•

Section B - Pathing Commands Test

Engineering Change

•

Section C - Read/Write Reliability

To install an engineering change, follow the instructions supplied
with the engineering change. These instructions should specify
that you run the Unit Test option at the end of the rework. If the
instructions do not specify that you run the Unit Test option, run
this option to check out the subsystem.

•

Section 0 - Tape Interchange

Note: The Unit Test option will request that you IML the
control unit functional code if needed.

Note: The Unit Test option will request that you IML the
control unit functional code if needed.
If a failure occurs, check your rework.

Section
Section
Section
Section

A contains
B contains
C contains
0 contains

Procedures (Continued)

PLAN 60

Procedures (Continued)

PLAN 60

~)

~J

The subsystem automatic error recovery is not disabled for this
test. All errors received by the program are treated as
permanent and Section 0 Is ended after appropriate error
messages are Issued.

2 routines
1 routine
1 routine
3 routines

Section A: Control Unit Functional Test
Section A determines that all valid 3480 commands, except
Control Access, Assign, Unassign, and Suspend Multipath
Reconnection commands, can be correctly performed.
Most of the commands are performed chained to a 'Mode Set'
command to inhibit the Error Recovery Program (ERP), and are
executed as a single CCW. There may be requirements for
chaining commands, such as the Data Security Erase or Set Tape
Immediate commands or to obtain faster test completion time by
chaining multiple write commands.

Section B: Pathing Commands Test
Section B is used to check the five pathlng commands of the IBM
3480 tape subsystem. These commands are Set Path Group 10,
Sense Path Group 10, Assign, Unasslgn, and Control Access.

Section C: Readl Write Reliability
This section is a motions-intensive read/write/reliability test
based on the read/write reliability tests for the 3420 and 3430
tape subsystems (T342x and T3430F, respectively).

3480 MI

EC336396

(j CopYrlgnl IBM Corp. 1984. 1985. 1986. 1987

•

\
I

., l-

,}

.f

, j"'

\

,J

~}

:J

~)

~)

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

Procedures (Continued)

o

Procedures (Continued)

Integrated Logic Probe

Scoping (Using Oscilloscope)

Use the integrated logic probe (part 453222) for all probing
specified by the MAPs.

An oscilloscope. Tektronix
used.
IIMain Input

Use it as follows:

liJ

1.

Connect the red power lead
to any 003 (+5 V dc) logic
board pin in any column except A. B. and K.

2.

Connect tho black power lead
board pin.

3.

Ensure that the gating pins

4.

Set the GATE REF

S.

Set the LATCH

6.

Connect the logic ground
(008) pin.

III to any 008 (groulld) logic

II have no inputs.

III switch off.

8.
9.

Test the general logic probe as follows:

Set the TECH

a.

b.

c.

With nothing connected to the main probe test lead.
neither the UP or DOWN light should be on.
Connect the main probe test lead to any 008 (ground)
pin; the DOWN light should be on.

454A. 475. or equivalent. may be

Use a X 10 probe. sync=auto. volts= 1 volt/cm. sweep=as
required.
1.

Probe the points as directed by the MAPs.

2.

If the MAP indicates the UP light is on. the line level should
be in the up signal level area. See the voltage signal levels
below.

3.

If the MAP indicates the DOWN light is on. the line level
should be in the down signal level area. See the voltage
signal levels below.

4.

If the MAP indicates the light is flashing. the line level
should be changing between up and down level. Ensure
that the up and down levels are within limits. See the
voltage signal levels below.

B lead to a convenient ground

III Power
Lead Ends

PLAN 65

Set the oscilloscope controls as follows:

III switch to any position.

II switch to MULTI.
Connect the main probe II test lead to the pin to be tested.

7.

\

1

o

+5.0
+2.2
+5V
+0.7
+0.1

Connect the main probe test lead to any 003 (+5 V dc)
pin; the UP light should be on.

When an up or down signal is detected. the associated light is
held on by the probe circuits for enough time to see it. even
though the signal may be of short duration.
For more instructions. see the Integrated Logic Probe Operators
Guide, S226-3951.

Trademark of Tektronix. Inc.

3480 MI

EC336395

'll Copyright IBM COfp. 1984, 1985

Procedures (Continued)

PLAN 65

Notes

3480 MI

Notes

PLAN 70

Notes

PLAN 70

EC336395

 COPYright IBM Corp. 19B4. 1985

.

l

I

~

'\

)

\

.J

"'

~J

\.)

J

.'f

\. )

~)

~

J

\-

(

J

\

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

Contents

Introduction to the 3480 Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control Unit Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data Buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Write Data Flow Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Read Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maintenance Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Status Store and Status Store Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Microprocessor and Control Storage ....... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Voltage Regulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power-On-Reset and Undervoltage Detector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Writing Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Buffered Write Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tape Write Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reading Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Single Control Unit Subsystem Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Channel Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Additional Channel Interface (1. 2. or 3) Optional Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Drive-Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Read Data Bus .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Dual Control Unit Subsystem Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dual Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Drive Attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

;; CopYflght IBM

o
Contents

Introduction to the 3480 Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Operating Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Optional Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 5
Operating Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 5
Physical Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Cartridge .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Drive Message Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10
Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10
10
Initial Microprogram Load OML) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3480 MI

o

EC336395
C~)tv 1984 ':385 ~g86

15
15
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
22
22
22
22
25
30
30
30
30
35
40
40

Introduction to the 3480 Tape Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tape Unit Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pneumatic Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Drive LogiC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Drive Control Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. ............. .
Microprocessor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Digital Servo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. ...........
Message Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Write Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Read Preamplifier Card ......... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Power Amplifier Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Loader Control Card .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Drive Transport Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tape Loading and Unloading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motion Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stop lock Positions ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Tape Transport Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

o
INTRO 1

45
45
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
51
51
51
51
51

Introduction to Channel Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Channel Command Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

Contents

INTRO 1

Introduction to the 3480 Subsystem
The 3480 is a high performance buffered magnetic tape storage
Subsystem. The subsystem consists of a Modei A22 or Model
A 11 COntrol Unit and up to four Model 822 or Model 811 Tape
Units. Each tape unit contains two drives. Therefore, each
Control unit can have a maximum of eight drives connected to it.
8y adding the Dual Control Unit COupler accessory, a Second
control unit and up to four tape units can be connected to the first
Control unit to form a two-Control unit, sixteen-drive Subsystem.
The 3480 Subsystem attaches to the host processors through a
block multiplexer data channel or a block multiplexer high Soeed
data streaming feature channel.

Operating Systems
Introduction to the 3480 Subsystem

Physical Characteristics
The programming support for the Subsystem is provided within
the fOllowing operating systems and their future exte'lsions:

DimenSions

MVS
•

Type: Reel-to-reel. automa:;c self threading

Control Unit:

Number of tracks

VM/370.
Height: 1.000 m (3937 in.)
Width: .660 m (2598 in)
Depth
.750 m (29.53 in.)

Optional Features
The 3480 Subsystem has the fOilowing optional feature

Reading Speed' 2000

The 3480 tape drive has the fOllowing optional feature:
Data streaming 3 megabyte/second

Jr1iSec)

Unload time: 5 '0 10 seconds
Rewind speed: 4000 mn;,sec (157 in.lseci

VVirh A~toma~ic Car~ridge Laaders
.930 m (3663 in.)

Data streaming 2 megabyte/second

(787

With Automatic Cartridge Loaders
7 to 30 seconds

Withcut Automatic Cartridge Loaders
.750 m (2953 in.)

An enhanced Channel feature that permits 4.5 megabytes/second
data streaming (standard on current A.22 Control units).

DC interlock 1.5 megabyte/second

~m,'sec

Without Automatic Cartridge Loaders
5 to 10 seconds

Height: 1.000 m (3937 In.)
Width: .517m(2011in)
Depth:

Additional Channel Interface (1, 2, or 3,:.

18

Load time:

Tape Unit:
EaCh Control unit can have one to four block multiplexer data
channel adapters. Each channel adapter permits the Subsystem
to attach to a host proceSsor along a data channel path that
operates in any of the fOllowing modes:

INTRO 5

Tape Transport

Rewind time: maximum 4.8 SeConds.

Recording Media
An automatic cartridge loading feature that handles up to six
cartridges that load and unload automatically.

Data streaming 4.5 megabyte/second.

•

Tape car:ridge

Tape width: 127 mrn (05 in.)

Operating Characteristics

,'.,lean usable tace length: 154 rn (505 it)

Some of the Subsystem operating characteristics are:
A compact design with front loading.
A small reel of half-inch tape enclosed in a compact
cartridge for greater tape protection.
•

Automatic tape threading.

•

A con[rol unit with a 512K, 1 megabyte or 2 megabyte data
buffer and a microprocessor that Controls the data flow
within the Subsystem.
A Dual Control Unit Communication accessory that has the
ability to interconnect two control units into a single
Subsystem configuration.
A drive with microprocessor control that moves tape without
capstans or vacuum Columns.

•

A message display panel for each drive that provides visual
information for the operator or service representative.

3480 Ml ECA57721
(; Copyngl'H IBM Corp. 1982. 1988

Introduction to the 3480 Subsystem

)

"

~J

:J

INTRO 5

,

~J

'-

r)

{)

3

~)

a

"

\

,-.I

Intro_tion to the 34Seubsystem

o

The 3480 is a high performance buffered magnetic tape storage
subsystem. The subsystem consists of a Model A22 or Model
A 11 Control Unit and up to four Model B22 or Model B 11 Tape
Units. Each tape unit contains two drives. Therefore, each
control unit can have a maximum of eight drives connected to it
By adding the Dual Control Unit Coupler accessory, a second
control unit and up to four tape units can be connected to the first
control unit to form a two-control unit, sixteen-drive subsystem.
The 3480 subsystem attaches to the host processors through a
block multiplexer data channel or a block multiplexer high speed
data streaming fe:lture channel.
Each control unit can have one to four block multi plexer data
channel adapters. Each channel adapter permits the subsystem
to attach to a host processor along a data channel path that
operates in any of the following modes:
•

DC interlock 1.5 megabyte/second

•

Data streaming 2 megabyte/second

•

Data streaming 3 megabyte/second

•

Data streaming 4.5 megabyte/second.

o

o

o

Operating Systems

Physical Characteristics

The programming support for the subsystem is provided within
the following operating systems and their future extensions:

Dimensions

•

MVS

•

VM/370.

•

o

Control Unit:
Height: 1.000 m (39.37 in.)
Width: .660 m (25.98 in.)
Depth: .750 m (29.53 in.)

•

Optional Features

o

Introduction
Tape Transport
•

Type: Reel-to-reel, automatic self threading

•

Number of tracks: 18

•

Reading speed: 2000 mm/sec (78.7 in.lsec)

•

Load time:
Without Automatic Cartridge Loaders
5 to 10 seconds.
With Automatic Cartridge Loaders
7 to 30 seconds

•

Unload time: 5 to 10 seconds

•

Rewind speed: 4000 mm/sec (157 in.lsec)

•

Rewind time: maximum 48 seconds.

Tape Unit
Height: 1.000 m (39.37 in.)
Width: .517/T1 (20.11 in.)
Depth:
Without Automatic Cartridge Loaders
.750 m (29.53 in.)
With Automatic Cartridge Loaders
.930 m (36.63 in.)

The 3480 subsystem has the following optional feature:
Additional Channel Interface (1. 2, or 3).
An enhanced channel feature that permits 4.5 megabytes/second
data streaming (standard on current A22 control units).

toO 3480 sUbsystemGNTRO 5

Recording Media

Improved Data Recording Capability

•

The 3480 tape drive has the following optional feature:

Tape cartridge

An automatic cartridge loading feature that handles up to six
cartridges that load and unload automatically.

Tape width: 12.7 mm (0.5 in.)
Mean usable tape length: 154 m (505 ft)

Operating Characteristics
Some of the subsystem operating characteristics are:
•

A compact design with front loading

•

A small reel of half-inch tape enclosed in a compact
cartridge for greater tape protection

•

Automatic tape threading

•

A control unit with a 512K, 1 megabyte or 2 megabyte data
buffer and a microprocessor that controls the data flow
within the subsystem

•

A Dual Control Unit Communication accessory that has the
ability to interconnect two control units into a single
subsystem configuration

•

A drive with microprocessor control that moves tape without
capstans or vacuum columns

•

A message display panel for each drive that provides visual
inform~tion for the operator or service representative.

3480 MI EC A57723
~

Copyright IBM Corp. 1982. 1989

IBM Co nfidential

Introduction to the 3480 Subsystem

INTRO

5

()

o

()

()

()

f)

()

()

()

(l

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

Introduction to the 3480 Subsystem

o

Introduction to the 3480 Subsystem

o
INTRO 10

Cartridge

Drive Message Display

Addressing

Initial Microprogram load (JMl)

The drive uses a compact cartridge that has a nominal data
capacity of 200 megabytes.

Each drive has an operator panel on the top of the tape unit,
which contains an eight-character visual message display. The
operator panel is mounted on a swiveling fixture that can be
adjusted by hand to make the message display visible from
various operator positions.

The drive addresses and control unit address are set during
installation.

During an IML, a microcode image that permits the subsystem
to become functional is loaded into the control unit.

The control unit address can be any value in the range of
hexadecimal 0 through F.

The drive microprocessor, the error sensing logic, and the host
software can cause the following types of messages to be
displayed for the operator or the service representative.

The drive address can be any value in the range of hexadecimal
through 7 for a single control unit subsystem. When dual
control units are installed, the address can be any address within
the range of hexadecimal 0 through F. However, all drives
physically attached to a control unit must be addressed within
the group of hexadecimal 0 through 7 or the group of
hexadecimal 8 through F.

The IML diskette contains the microcode image and patches for
the control unit. This diskette must be kept in the IML device at
all times. The microcode image and patches contained on the
IML diskette are related to the EC level of the control unit and
attached drives, therefore, only the specific IML diskette
designated for a control unit should be used in that control unit.

The tape cartridge remains closed during storagp 3nd handling to
protect the tape from external contaminants. When a cartridge
is inserted into a drive, the drive automatically pulls the tape
from the cartridge and threads it onto a fixed machine reel.
Each cartridge has a physical file protect selector. When the
selector is set to file protect, data is prevented from being
written on or erased from tape. For additional cartridge
information see the CART section.

•

Error message

•

Service representative information

•

Drive status

•

Host response.

o

Control Unit

0

II
I

Leader Block

Drives

oj 1

21 3 415

81 9 AlB

Anytime the control unit is powered on, or the IML button is
pushed on an offline control unit, the control unit will attempt to
IML itself from the diskette in its IML device. The IML device is
also accessed when drive patches are loaded.

61 7

CID ElF

~

File Protect
Selector

3480 MI

EC336395

~ Copyright IBM COI"P 1984, 1985

Introduction to the 3480 Subsystem

INTRO 10

Introduction to the 3480 Control Unit

Introduction to the 3480 Control Unit
The control unit, under control of the microprocessor, moves
read and write data between the host processor, the data buffer,
and the attached drives. In addition, the control unit:
•

Receives, interprets, and executes data commands from the
host processor

•

Generates and sends control commands to the attached
drives

•

Processes read and write data into and out of the data
buffer

•

Control Unit Diagram
This is a high level drawing
showing theory only.
For
detailed point-to-point
wiring see the machine logics.

CONTROL UNIT

Schedules various I/O and drive operations

•

Detects control unit errors

•

Collects and sends sense and status information to the host
processor

•

Stores the sense and status information for error recovery or
analysis

•

Performs stand alone error recovery on some subsystem
failures.

INTRO 15

...-----------------------------------.~
II

Status
Store

Maintenance
Adapter

••--------__.~

To and from
maintenance
device

••----------..

To and from
drives

••-----------

From drives

Microprocessor

I
Is::l

_c_o_n_t_r_o_l
Storage ..... +-+ ~
....

DriveAdapter

Write Data
Channel
Adapter
A

To and from ••______••
host processor

Write Data
Read Data

Data Buffer

Write Data
Flow

Write Data

!Addi~i~n~ll

I
L

Channel
Adapter

I

B __ J
__

!Addi~i~n~ll

I
L

Channel
Adapter

I

C __ J
__

Read Control
!Add i ~ i~n~
Channel
I Adapter
L

3480 MI

EC336395

11

Read Data
Read
Data

I

D __ J
__

Introduction to the 3480 Control Unit

C Copyright IBM Corp. 1984. 1985

~)

~)

INTRO 15

Intro_tion to the 34S.ontrol Unit (CoAued)

o

o

o

o

Introductio.o the 3480 ControQit (Continued)

QTR 0 20

Data Buffer

Maintenance Adapter

Microprocessor and Control Storage

Power

The data buffer provides data buffering between the drives and
the data channel. This improves system performance by
permitting the high speed channel to perform other operations
while the selected drivo is reading or writing tape.

The maintenance adapter (MAl card provides a means for the
maintenance device (MD) to monitor and change the StdtUS of the
control unit. The adapter logic permits the MD to communicate
with the subsystem components, to load and run diagnostics, and
to interrogate registers.

The microprocessor card contains the microprocessor, storage
for the local store register, and associated logic for control of and
communication with the other areas of the control unit. In
addition, all processor related external registers, the external
interrupt hardware, and most of the processor error detection
and reporting logic are located on this card. The processor
executes microprograms to control and monitor control unit
activity through external registers that are accessed by way of
the external register bus.

The power area of the control unit consists of an AC power
supply and two DC power supplies. The AC power supply
furnishes power for the DC power supplies, the cooling fans, and
the AC power for each of the tape units. The DC power supply
PS02 furnishes dc power to the control unit only. DC power for
the tape units is developed within the tape units.

Control storage consists of tables accessible only by the
microprograms and the microprocessor. It contains the initial
microprogram load (IML) data that has been read from the IML
diskette. Any time the microprocessor needs a microprogram to
perform a function, it communicates with control storage to
obtain the microprogram.

The voltage regulator card, located in the OIA-Al logic board
controls the voltages needed for the storage cards in the control
unit.

All data transferred between the channel and the control unit
passes through the data buffer.
If Improved Data Recording Capability is installed, data is
compacted before entering the buffer on a write operation and
uncompacted after leaving the buffer on a read operation.

Write Data Flow Card
The write data flow card receives data that is to be written on
tape from the data buffer. It contains the logic required to
process and format the data and to control the write operation. It
also generates clocking and parity lines that are transferred with
the data to a selected drive through the control unit drive
adapter.

Status Store and Status Store Communication
The status store provides a common storage area for status
information in the control unit and contains the status of each
drive. Drive status information is used by the microprocessor
and channel adapter areas for allocation of common resources.
The channel adapter and microprocessor use this drive status
information to keep track of each drive's status. The status store
communication card provides a communication path between
control units when the dual-control-unit communication cables
are installed.

Read Control

Voltage Regulator

Power-On Reset and Undervoltage Detector
The power-on reset (POR) card contains POR and undervoltage
circuitry. In addition to resetting the control unit circuitry power
on, the POR and undervoltage pulses are used to provide POR to
the channels. A POR during a power off clamps the channel
interface off before power is lost. During a power-on sequence,
the channel interface is clamped off for approximately 800 ms to
permit the voltages to stabilize.

The read control area consists of:
•

A read clock and format card

•

A read ECC/correction card

•

One or three detect cards (EC sensitive)

•

Three read skew cards

•

A read buffer card.

The read area receives data from the drive; interprets, verifies
and formats the data; and transfers it to the data buffer.
The size of the data buffer is EC sensitive and can be 0.5
megabyte, 1 megabyte, or 2 megabyte in size.

3480 MI EC A!iT723

e COPyri9 ht IBM Corp. 1982, 1989

IBM Co nfidential

Introduction to the 3480 Control Unit (Continued)

INTRO 20

o

o

o

{}

()

()

f)

o

o

()
/

I

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

Introduction to the 3480 Control Unit (Continued)

o

o

Introduction to the 3480 Control Unit (Continued)

o
INTRO 20

Data Buffer

Maintenance Adapter

Microprocessor and Control Storage

Power

The data buffer provides data buffering between the drives and
the data channel. This improves system performance by
permitting the high speed channel to perform other operations
while the selected drive is reading or writing tape.

The maintenance adapter (MA) card provides a means for the
maintenance device (MD) to monitor and change the status of the
control unit. The adapter logic permits the MD to communicate
with the subsystem components, to load and run diagnostics, and
to interrogate registers.

The microprocessor card contains the microprocessor, storage
for the local store register, and associated logic for control of and
communication with the other areas of the control unit. In
addition, all processor related external registers, the external
interrupt hardware, and most of the processor error detection
and reporting logic are located on this card. The processor
executes microprograms to control and monitor control unit
activity through external registers that are accessed by way of
the external register bus.

The power area of the control unit consists of an ac power supply
and a dc power Sl!pply. The ac power supply furnishes power for
the dc power supply, the cooling fans, and the ac power for each
of the tape units. The dc power supply furnishes dc power to the
control unit only. DC power for the tape units is developed within
the tape units.

Control storage consists of tables accessible only by the
microprograms and the microprocessor. It contains the initial
microprogram load (IML) data that has been read from the IML
diskette. Any time the microprocessor needs a microprogram to
perform a function, it communicates with control storage to
obtain the microprogram.

The voltage regulator card, located in the 01 A-A 1 logic board
controls the voltages needed ror the storage cards in the control
unit.

All data transferred between the channel and the control unit
passes through the data buffer.

Status Store and Status Store Communication
Write Data Flow Card
The write data flow card receives data that is to be written on
tape from the data buffer. It contains the logic required to
process and format the data and to control the write operation. It
also generates clocking and parity lines that are transferred with
the data to a selected drive through the control unit drive
adapter.

Read Control
The read control area consists of:
•

A read clock and format card

•

A read ECC/correction card

•

One or three detect cards (EC sensitive)

•

Three read skew cards

•

A read buffer card.

The status store provides a common storage area for status
information in the control unit and contains the status of each
drive. Drive status information is used by the microprocessor
and channel adapter areas for allocation of common resources.
The channel adapter and microprocessor use this drive status
information to keep track of each drive's status. The status store
communication card provides a communication path between
control units when the dual-control-unit communication cables
are installed.

Voltage Regulator

Power-On Reset and Under voltage Detector
The power-on reset (POR) card contains POR and undervoltage
circuitry. In addition to resetting the control unit circuitry power
on, the POR and undervoltage pulses are used to provide POR to
the channels. A POR during a power off clamps the channel
int~rface off before power is lost. During a power-on sequence,
the channel interface is clamped off for approximately 800 ms to
permit the voltages to stabilize.

The read area receives data from the drive: interprets, verifies
and formats the data: and transfers it to the data buffer.
The size of the data buffer is EC sensitive and can be 0.5
megabyte, 1 megabyte, or 2 megabyte in size.

3480 MI EC A57721
C COPY"9n, 9M Cor, '982. '988

Introduction to the 3480 Control Unit (Continued)

INTRO 20

Notes

3480 MI

Notes

EC336395

II Copyright IBM Corp. 1984. 19B5

Notes

INTRO 21

INTRO 21

_,

0

0.,

Introduction to the 3480 Control Unit (Continued) ."

. - . :>.'~.

o

o

'e

o

o

Introduction to the 3480 Control Unit (Continued)

Wrlti ng Data

Tape Write Mode

Reading Data

Two modes of writing can be selected by the host system when
using this subsystem: buffered write and tape write. When in
buffered write mode. the control unit signals completion as soon
as the data has been written correctly to the buffer. The
subsystem does any error recovery required to physically write
the data block on tape. Tape write mode is for writing critical,
non-restartabie data files. This mode requires a dedicated
channel until the data has been written and read-back-checked
(verified).

When the control unit receives a write command in tape write
mode, it moves the data from the channel adapter into the buffer
at channel speed. As soon as the drive is moving tape at
recording speed the data is sent to the drive.

Data is read from the drives into a control unit buffer. The
contents of the control unit buffer is transferred to the host
processor on an 1/0 channel.

The control unit sends the ending status to the host after the data
has been written on the tape and a read-back-check has been
completed. When the host receives the ending status, it sends
another write command and block of data to the control unit.

Data Compaction

Buffered Write Mode
When the control unit receives a write command from the
channel in buffered write mode, it loads the data buffer and ends
the operation by presenting channel end and device end status to
the channel. The control unit writes the buffered data blocks
when the drive is available. This increases channel efficiency by
freeing the channel before the data is written.
Sending data between the data buffer and channel and between
the data buffer and drive are asynchronous operations. which
can overlap because of independent controls on the buffer. Data
can be loaded into the buffer for the next record while the current
write operation finishes; drive motion is maintained and writing
continues. This is called streaming.

In tape write mode, each write command from the host causes
the drive to perform a backhitch (reposition the tape to a position
before the gap called stoplock). Because of the physical
construction of the recording head, the host can never send the
next data block fast enough to avoid a backhitch. The read
portion of the head, which is involved in the read-back-check,
trails the write portion of the head by more than a gap-length.
Once the read-back-check is finished for the current record, the
write portion of the head is far beyond the place it needs to be to
write the next data block. After the backhitch, tape motion is
started and the next data block is written.

o

tit

INTRO 22

If data compaction is installed and enabled, data is compacted in
the buffer adapter card before entering the buffer during a WRITE
operation, and decompacted after leaving the buffer during a
READ operation.
Data compaction supports both buffered and tape write modes,
but does not support read backward mode.

.

With the correct features, the control unit has the following
streaming modes.
•

2 megabyte/second data streaming

•

3 megabyte/second data streaming

•

4.5 megabyte/second data streaming

3480 MI EC A57723
Cl Copyright IBM eo". 1982, 1981

Introduction to the 3480 Control Unit (Contlt1ued)

IBM Confidential-31 May 89

li":t~Ji'~':·~~i:itYT~;i;:."j~;f.~.li >_'f,f 1~':f'~:" ~'f~

:

•••• ::.,

•

.'<

INTRO 22
";r·i~.

3

:.A.:

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

Introduction to the 3480 Control Unit (Continued)

o

o

Introduction to the 3480 Control Unit (Continued)

Writing Data

Tape Write Mode

Reading Data

Two modes of writing can be selected by the host system when
using this subsystem: buffered write and tape write. When in
buHered write mode, the control unit signals completion as soon
as the data ~as been written correctly to the buffer. The
subsystem does any error recovery required to physically write
the data block on tape. Tape write mode is for writing critical,
non-restartable data files. This mode requires a dedicated
channel until the data has been written and read-back-checked
(verified).

When the control unit receives a write command in tape write
mode, it moves the data from the channel adapter into the buffer
at channel speed. As soon as the drive is moving tape at
recording speed the data is sent to the drive.

Data is read from the drives into a control unit buffer. The
contents of the control unit buffer is transferred to the host
processor on an 110 channel.

Buffered Write Mode
When the control unit receives a write command from the
channel in buffered write mode, it loads the data buffer and ends
the operation by presenting channel end and device end status to
the channel. The control unit writes the buffered data blocks
when the drive is available. This increases channel efficiency by
freeing the channel before the data is written.
Sending data between the data buffer and channel, and between
the data buffer and drive are asynchronous operations, which
can overlap because of independent controls on the buffer. Data
can be loaded into the buffer for the next record while the current
write operation finishes; drive motion is maintained and writing
continues. This is called streaming.

o

o
INTRO 22

The control unit sends the ending status to the host after the data
has been written on the tape and a read-back-check has been
completed. When the host receives the ending status, it sends
another write command and block of data to the control unit.
In tape write mode, each write command from the host causes
the drive to perform a backhitch (reposition the tape to a position
before the gap called stoplock). Because of the physical
construction of the recording head, the host can never send the
next data block fast enough to avoid a backhitch. The read
portion of the head, which is involved 'in the read-back-check,
trails the write portion of the head by more than a gap-length.
Once the read-back-check is finished for the current record, the
write portion of the head is far beyond the place it needs to be to
write the next data block. After the backhitch, tape motion is
started and the next data block is written.

With the correct features, the control un:t has the following
streaming modes.
•

2 megabyteisecond data streaming

•

3 megabyte/second data streaming

•

4.5 megabyte/second data streaming

3480 MI EC A57721

Introduction to the 3480 Control Unit (Continued)

INTRO 22

Introduction to the 3480 Control Unit (Continued)

INTRO 25

Introduction to the 3480 Control Unit (Continued)

Single Control Unit Subsystem Diagram
This is a high level drawing
showing theory only.
For
detai led point-to-point
wiring see the machine logics.

Tape Unit

Control Unit

To and from {
host system

Channel
Channel
Channel
Channel

Bus· Out
Bus· In
Tag· Out
Tag· In

Channel
Adapter

Read
Detect

Drive 0

Drive 1

Read Preamp

Read Preamp

Read Data Bus

A

Local IRemote

---,

I Additional I
Channel
I Adapter
I
I
B
---~

:

Local IRemote

I

I
Drive
Adapter

Dev ice Interconnection
Local

Remote
Inter·
connection

I

Remote

From other
drives

Device Interconnection
Local

I

Remote

,----1
Additional Channel
Interface 1, 2, and 3
optional fea tures

I Additional
Channel
: Adapter

I
I

_~_J

Local
Inter·
connection

Device Control Bus Local

To and from
other drives

r----'
Additional I
Channel
Adapter
D _
L... _ _

3480 MI

I

JI

EC336395

Introduction to the 3480 Control Unit (Continued)

<0 Copyright IBM Corp. 1984. 1985

,

,
l

....)
'

~J

~}

:}

J

:)

J

f

\

...1

INTRO 25

:)

Introd_on to the 3480 atrol Unit (CanOed)
Channel Adapter
The channel adapter connects the control unit to the host
processor data channel through a standard System/370 interface.
The channel must block multiplex, have command retry
capability, and have the 110 error alert feature. In addition, the
control unit must be connected to non-shared subchannels.
The channel adapter moves data between the data channel and
the control unit buffer. Data is also compacted and uncompacted
if the data compaction feature is inst;olled. The data rate used by
the channel adapter is specified by the setting of the control unit
channel type switch. The following types of channels and their
data rate can be specified:
•

DC Interlocked: The maximum data rate is controlled by the
channel's interlocking of tag lines, up to a control unit limited
data rate of 1.5 megabytes per second, ± 5 percent.

•

2 Megabyte Data Streaming: The control unit clocks the data
rate to 2.0 megabytes per second, ± 5 percent.

•

3 Megabyte Data Streaming: The control unit clocks the data
rate to 3.0 megabytes per second, ± 5 percent.

• 4.5 Megabyte Data Streaming The control unit clocks the
data rate to 4.5 megabytes/second, +1 -5 percent. This is
only applicable to an A22 3480 control unit with both the 4,5
megabyte/second buffer adapter card. and the 4.5
megabyte/second channel attachment installed.
The 4.5 megabyte/second channel attachment feature
(bus/tag shoe connectors and cards) will not enable the 3480
to clock data at the 4.5 megabyte/second rate without the 4.5
megabyte/second buffer adapter card. But it will permit
propagation of the 4.5 megabyte/second data rate to devices
down stream.
Each channel adapter operates as an asynchronous unit. It
decodes all commands and provides initial status for each
command. The channel adapter also causes the channel to
disconnect, using channel command retry. if the command
cannot be executed immediately.

3480 MI EC A57723
to Copyright IBM Corp.

1982,1989

o

o

o

Additional Channel Interface (1, 2, or 3) Optional
Feature
The control unit has one channel adapter as part of the base
equipment. Up to three more channel adapters can be added
with the optional additional interface features. The additional
interface features permit the control unit to operate with up to
four channels at the same time.
When a channel adapter is processing an 110 operation for a
specific drive, additional channel adapters in the control unit can
process 110 operations for oU,er drives.

o

Introductio.,Qhe 3480 ControlQt (Continued)

OrRO 30

Drive Adapter

Read Data Bus

The drive adapter provides the write data and control information
path between the control unit and:

The read data bus sends analog read data from the drives to the
control unit. The read data bus is a single flat cable that
connects the drive read buffer directly to the control unit read
clock/detect cards. The devices are connected to this bus similar
to the way the devices are connected to the device control bus.
The read data bus consists of two selectable groups, A and B.
Each group has 18 line pairs that send the analog data on the 18
read data tracks to the control unit.

•

One serial string of up to eight drives in a single control unit
subsystem

•

Two serial strings of up to eight drives each in a dual control
unit subsystem.

The control unit drive adapter contains two interconnections,
local and remote. In a single-control unit subsystem, the drives
must be connected to the local interconnection. The remote
interconnection is not used. In a dual-control unit SUbsystem,
each control unit has one set of drives connected to the local
interconnection and another set of drives connected to the
remote interconnection.
The drives physically attached to a control unit are connected to
that control unit's local interconnection. The drives physically
attached to the other control unit are connected to the remote
interconnection. Therefore, each drive is connected to the local
interconnection on one control unit, and the remote
interconnection on the other control unit, at the same time.
The drives physically attached to control unit 0 (CUO) are
addressed hexadecimal 0 through 7, and the drives physically
attached to control unit 1 (CU1) are addressed 8 through F.
Drives 0 through 7 are attached to the local interconnection of
CUO, and the remote interconnection of CU1. Drives 8 through F
are attached to the local interconnection of CUl and the remote
interconnection of CUO.
The device control bus is a single flat cable that connects the
control unit drive adapter to the drives. There is one device
control bus for the drives attached to the local interconnection,
and another device control bus for the drives attached to the
remote interconnection. The device control bus is termi!'lted at
the last drive on a set of drives.

IBM Co nfidential

Introduction to the 3480 Control Unit (Continued)

INTRO 30

o

o

o

f)

o

()

()

o

o

()

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

Introduction to the 3480 Control Unit (Continued)
Introduction to the 3480 Control Unit (Continued)
Channel Adapter
The channel adapter connects the control unit to the host
processor data channel through a standard System/370 interface.
The channel must block multiplex, have command r'etry
capability, and have the I/O error alert feature. In addition, the
control unit must be connected to non-shared subchannels.
The channel adapter moves data between the data channel and
the control unit buffer. The data rate used by the channel
adapter is specified by the setting of the control unit r;hannel type
switch. The following types of channels and their data rate can
be specified:
•

DC Interlocked: The maximum data rate is controlled by the
channel's interlocking of tag lines, up to a control unit limited
data rate of 1.5 megabytes per second. ± 5 percent.

•

2 Megabyte Data Streaming: The control unit clocks the data
rate to 2.0 megabytes per second, ± 5 percent.

•

3 Megabyte Data Streaming: The control unit clocks the data
rate to 3.0 megabytes per second, ± 5 percent.

•

4.5 Megabyte Data Streaming: The control unit clocks the
data rate to 4.5 megabytes/second, + 1 -5 percent. This is
only applicable to an A22 3480 control unit with both the 4,5
megabyte/second buffer adapter card, and the 4.5
megabyte/second channel attachment installed.
The 4.5 megabyte/second channel attachment feature
(bus/tag shoe connectors and cards) will not enable the 3480
to clock data at the 4.5 megabyte/second rate without ihe 4.5
megabyte/second buffer adapter card. But it will permit
propagation of the 4.5 megabyte/second data rate to devices
down stream.

Each channel adapter operates as an asynchronous unit. It
decodes all commancs and provides initial status for each
command. The channel adapter also causes the channel to
disconnect. using channel command retry, if the command
cannot be executed immediately.

Additional Channel Interface (1, 2, or 3) Optional
Feature
The control unit has one channel adapter as part of the base
equipment. Up to three more channel adapters can be added
with the optional additional interface features. The additional
interface features permit the control unit to operate with up to
four channels at the same time.
When a channel adapter is processing an I/O operation for a
specific drive, additional channel adapters in the control unit can
process 1/0 operations for other drives.

Drive-Adapter

INTRO 30

Read Data Bus

The drive-adapter provides the write data and control information
path between the control unit and:
•

One serial string of up to eight drives in a single control unit
subsystem

•

Two serial strings of up to eight drives each in a dual control
unit subsystem.

The read data bus sends analog read data from the drives to the
control unlt. The read data bus is a single flat cable that
connects the drive read buffer directly to. the control unit read
clock/detect cards. The devices are connected to this bus similar
to the way the devices are connected to the device control bus.
The read data bus consists of two selectable groups, A and B.
Each group has 18 line pairs that send the analog data on the 18
read data tracks to the control unit.

The control unit drive-adapter contains two interconnections,
local and remote. In a single-control-unit subsystem, the drives
must be connected to the local interconnection. The remote
interconnection is not used. In a dual-control-unit subsystem,
each control unit has one set of drives connected to the local
interconnection and another set of drives connected to the
remote interconnection.
The drives physically attached to a control unit are connected to
that control unit's local interconnection. The drives phYSically
attached to the other control unit are connected to the remote
interconnection. Therefore, each drive is connected to the local
interconnection on one control unit, and the remote
interconnection on the other control unit, at the same time.
The drives physically attached to control unit 0 (CUO) are
addressed hexadecimal a through 7, and the drives physically
attached to control unit 1 (CU1) are addressed 8 through F.
Drives 0 through 7 are attached to the local interconnection of
CUO, and the remote interconnection of CU1. Drives 8 through F
are attached to the local interconnection of CU1 and the remoie
interconnection of CUO.
The device control bus is a single flat cable that connects the
control unit drive-adapter to the drives. There is one device
control bus for the Clrives attached to the local interconnection,
and another device control bus for the drives attached to the
remote interconnection. The device control bus is terminated at
the last drive on a set of drives.

3480 MI EC A57721

Introduction to the 3480 Control Unit (Continued)

INTRO 30

Introduction to the 3480 Control Unit (Continued)

Introduction to the 3480 Control Unit (Continued)

INTRO 35

Dual Control Unit Subsystem Diagram
This is a high level drawing
showing theory only.
For
deta i led po i nt-to-po i nt
wiring see the machine logics.
Adresses a th rough F
Control Unit 1

To and from
host system

{

Channel
Channel
Channel
Channel

Bus· Out
Bus -In
Tag· Out
Tag· In

Channel
Adapter

Read
Detect

Tape Unit

Read Data Bus Local
Read Data Bus Remote

A

Drive 0

---,

Drive
Adapter

I

I Additional
Channel
Adapter
B

I

L _ _ _ -II

I

Additional
I Channel
I Adapter
C _
L.. _ _

I

I
I

Read Preamp

Locai {Remote

Local IRemote

•
•

Local

Remote
Inter·
connection

(Drives a-F)
Device Control Bus Local

. ..

I

Additional I
Channel
Adabter
I
L.. _ _ _ ....

,

Local

I

Remote

1t
I I

I I

)

To and from
other drives

(Drives a-F)

Status
Store
Feature

I

} From other drives

Device I ntercon nnection

t1

I I Device Control Bus Remote

r----,

I

I

Remote

~

I

I

Device Interconnection

r----,

Additional Channel
Interface 1 ,2, and 3
optional fe atures

Read Preamp

I

Local
Inter·
connection

Drive 1

Adresses 0 through 7
Control Unit 0

To and from
host system

{

Channel
Channel
Channel
Channel

Bus·
Bus·
Tag·
Tag·

Out
In
Out
In

A

---,

I
I
L _ _ _ -II
Additional
Channel
Adapter
B

Drive
Adapter
Read Data Bus Local

Remote
Inter·
connection

I

Read Preamp

Read Preamp

Local IRemote

Local IRemote

I
-

Local

Local
Inter·
connection

I

I

Read
Detect

I

(Drives 0-7)
Device Control Bus Local

I I I

I
----'

3480 MI

Drive 1

I

_I

(Drives 0-7)

I

} From other drives

I

Device Interconnection

Remote

Local

tt
I

Device Control Bus Remote

I

Remote

tt
I

I

I

)

To and from
other drives

Read Data Bus
Remote

EC336395

Introduction to the 3480 Control Unit (Continued)

'" Copyright IBM Corp. 1984. 1985

~)

.•

Device Interconnection

r----,
Additional
Channel
Ad abte r

Drive 0

•

----,

Additional I
Channel
Adapter
C _ -JII
L.. _ _

I

Additional Channel
Interface 1, 2, and 3
optional fea tures

Tape Unit

Status
Store
Feature

Channel
Adapter

~)

~)

~)

[)

t)

:)
-.

-~)

J
-,

INTRO 35

.\
'<

J

o

o

o

o

o

Introduction to the 3480 Control Unit (Continued)

o

o

o

Introduction to the 3480 Control Unit (Continued)

Dual Control Unit

Drive Attachment

Two control units can be connected together for dual control unit
operation. With dual control units. all channel path interfaces are
common between the two control units, as are all attached
drives. Load balancing between the resources of the two control
units is automatically performed under control oi the
microprocessors in the control units. When I/O operations are
directed to a drive along a single channel path, those I/O
operations can be handled in either control unit, depending on
the internal subsystem load.

The drives are attached to each control unit as shown in the
following iable:

Each control unit can have up to four channel adapters,
perrnitting the entire subsystem to be accessible from a
maximum of eight channel paths. Each channel adapter on
either control unit can communicate at full internal data path
speeds with the data buffer in either control unit. While such
data movement is going on, each control unit data buffer can also
move data to or from a drive. Therefore, the entire
dual-control-unit subsystem can move data with four operations
occurring at the same time. The microprocessors in each control
unit agree and establish the internal data paths to be used
between the drive and the channel path. This agreement is
independent of host processor program control.

o

o
INTRO 40

CUID DR ADR BUS

e

e-

e

8 - F

Remote

1

e-

Remote

1

8 - F

7

7

local

local

The status store communication card provides the
control-unit-to-control-unit communication path. It also permits
the two control units to share control and status information
about "all the drives in the subsystem.

3480 MI

EC336396

Introduction to the 3480 Control Unit (Continued)

INTRO 40

Introduction to the 3480 Tape Unit

Introduction to the 3480 Tape Unit

A tape unit consists of two drives (drive 0 and drive 1). The
drives operate independently of each other, except for the shared
use of the tape unit pneumatic supply and the tape unit dc power
supply.

TAPE UNIT WITHOUT EC 333293 (S •• CARR-DR q)

TAPE UNIT WITH EC 333293 (S •• CARR-DR q)

r------------------------------------------ ______ ,

r------------------------------------------------,

I

Receives, interprets, and performs data commands sent
from the control unit

•

Receives, interprets, and performs motion control
commands sent from the control unit

•

Sends and receives read and write data to and from the
control unit

•

Sends sense and status Information to the control unit.

: Opt i ona l
I

DRIVE 0

r--------------------t-~
I
I

A drive, under control of the control unit:

•

INTRO 45

Loce l

Device
(ontrol BUB
to and from

Local

O.vlce

Control Bus

R.mote

to Clnd rrom

Control Unit

Control Unl t

IO~~-IAtl/t I
Read Bus To
Control' Unit

Read Bus To
Con I r 0 l Un 1 I

I I

I I

Tape Unit Diagram

+.

[

These are high level drawings
showing theory only. For
detail~d pOint-to-point
wiring see the machine logics.

Optional Fealur.

DRIVE 1

r
*

This FRU is EC sensitive.
See CARR-DR 4.

R.mote
Wr 1 te Date Clnd
commands to end

Write Data and

I

commands to and
from next drive

from next drive

.J41

02wAr-1At1e

Local
R.mote

Read Data from
th. nex t dr Ive

3480 MI

L __ -

-

-

EC336396

f

)

-- -- -- -- -

-- _

-

_____ _

___ _

_

_

_

__ ___ _

_

__ _

__ _

_

__

Read Data from
the nex t dr f VI'

L _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ oJ

Introduction to the 3480 Tape Unit

() Copyright IBM Corp. t984. 1985. 1986. 1987

\

-

{}

{)

t}

INTRO 45

o

o

o

o

o

o

Introduction to the 3480 Tape Unit (Continued)

c

o

o

Introduction to the 3480 Tape Unit (Continued)

o
INTRO 50

Power

Microprocessor Card·

Drive Control Card·

Message Display

The tape unit ac power is supplied by the control unit. Up to 4
tape units (8 drivesl can be connected to a single control unit,
and the ac power is cabled from the control unit to the first tape
unit then cabled from that tape unit to the next tape unit and so
on.

The microprocessor card contains the microprocessor, storage
for the lo(;al storage register, and associated logic for control and
communication.

The Drive control card controls all functions within the drive.
Write data and commands are received by the adapter section
and are passed, under control of the microprocessor section, to
the digital servo section and the write card. Read data is read
from the tape by the read head and sent to the read preamplifier
card, under control of the digital servo section, as directed by
the microprocessor section. All motion controls are controlled
by the digital servo section, power amplifier card, and the
microprocessor section.

The message display provides the operator with visual messages
sent from the host processor or the tape subsystem. The
message display, using eight LEDs and two bar LEDs, displays
messages sent from the microprocessor through the digital
servo.

The dc power for the tape unit is developed in each tape unit's
dc power supply. The dc power supply furnishes the dc power
for both drives in that tape unit.

Pneumatic Supply
The tape unit contains one pneumatic supply that is shared by
both drives. The pressure side of the pneumatic supply consists
of a pump, a regulator, and an output filter. The vacuum side of
the pneumatic supply uses the same pump and an inlet filter.

Drive Logic
The drive logic controls the data flow and tape motion within the
tape unit.

Some external registers (XRsl, the external interrupt hardware,
and most of the processor error detection and reporting logic are
located on this card.
The microprocessor performs microcode to control and monitor
control unit activity through the external registers, which are
accessed by way of the external register interconnection.

Digital Servo Card·
The digital servo card serves as a buffer and interconnection to
and from the processor and the rest of the drive. The digital
servo card gathers information from sensors, mechanical
switches, and error lines from other cards in the drive and
presents these to the drive processor.
Because the drive is a microprocessor based system operating in
a real time mode and because tight control is needed to maintain
proper tape tension and tape velocity, high speed control
processing is required. The digital servo card is designed to
relieve the processor of having to do certain simple
housekeeping work.

Adapter Card·
A drive can attach to one or two control units. The adapter card
contains two buses and the controls that permit communication
between the drive and one or both of the control units.
In the two-control-unit environment, only one control unit is
permitted to communicate with a specific drive at anyone time.
The other control unit cannot access the drive until the first
control unit has finished its operation.

Microprocessor
The microprocessor section of the drive control card contains
the microprocessor, storage for the local storage register, and
associated logic for control and ccmmunication.

The microprocessor performs microcode to control and monitor
control unit activity through the external registers, which are
accessed by way of the external register interconnection.

The read preamplifier card also provides isolation from the read
bus when the drive is powered off.

Digital Servo

Power Amplifier Board

The digital servo section of the drive control card serves as a
buffer and interconnection to and from the processor and the
rest of the drive. The digital servo section gathers information
from sensors, mechanical switches, and error lines from other
cards in the drive and presents these to the drive processor.

The power amplifier board accepts digital current inputs from the
processor through the digital servo, converts them to analog
signals, and applies necessary gain and phase shifting to drive
the reel motors.

Because the drive is a microprocessor based system operating in
a real time mode and because tight control is needed to maintain
proper tape tension and tape velocity, high speed control
processing is required. The digital servo section is designed to
relieve the processor of having to do certain simple
housekeeping work.

In the two-control-unit environment, only one control unit is
permitted to communicate with a specific drive at anyone time.
The other control unit cannot access the drive until the first
control unit has finished its operation.

EC336395

Copy"ghl IBM Co
 Copyright IBM Corp. 1982.1989

.S

$

FSC Caused by other than 3480 Hdw. Failures (Cont.)

START 120

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

Fault Symptom Codes Caused by other than 3480 Hardware Failures (Continued)

o

o

FSC Caused by other than 3480 Hdw. Failures (Cont.)

FSC

FSC Delinitlon

Causes Olher Ihan 3480 Hardware Failures

Acllon

7171

When in synchronous mode. the device
transler overran the channel transfer.

Possible host processor channel problem or overrun
condition.

See "Possible Host Processor Channel Problems or Overrun Condition"
on START 135.

74nn

A read back check error occurred on the
last record.

Possible t81-'e media problem.

See "Possible Tape Media Problems" on START 130.

7503

During the read back check of a recol d, the
microprocessor received a level 3 interrupt
because 'end sync' timed out waiting for
'interblock gap' (100 microseconds).

Possible tape media problem.

See "Possible Tape Media Problems" on START 130.

76nn

A read error occurred on the last record. A
level 3 interrupt was received because 'end
sync' limed oul waiting for 'interblock gap'
(100 microseconds).

Possible tape media problem.

See "Possible Tape Media Problems" on START 130.

7702

256 'erase gaps' have been read without
detecting a block or tape mark.

Tape was written with only 'erase gaps'.

IPL the MD and select option 3, Unit Test.

8100

No patches are available for this drive's EC
level.

Possible EC compatibility problem.

See "Possible EC Level Compatibility Problems" on START 135.

8101

Possible hardware EC compatibility
problem.

Possible EC compatibility problem.

See "Possible EC Level Compatibility Problems" on START 135.

8102

Possible hardware EC compatibility
problem.

Possible EC compatibility problem.

See "Possible EC Level Compatibility Problems" on START 135.

8202

The Unload switch was pressed.

The operator manually unloaded a drive.

1.

Search your sense data for a previous record for the same device.

2.

IPL the MD.

3.

Select option 1, Start Repair.

4.

Enter the new sense data from the record identified in step 1 when
requested.

8204

Manual rewind.

The operator pressed the Rewind switch.

IPL the MD and select option 3, Unit Test.

86CO

Bit 0 of status byte 2 from the drive did not
indicate the correct interface.

A drive or drives are set to the wrong range of logical
addresses. Drives attached to control unit 0 must be
addressed from 0-7. Drives attached to control unitl must be
addressed from 8-F.

Check the drive logical address'switch settings.

o
START 120

I! the drive address switches are set correctly, return to the procedure
that sent you here and continue with that procedure.
I! the drive address switches are set incorrectly, set the switches to the
proper addresses. IPL the MD and select option 3, Unit Test.

9000

Two drives with logical address in sense
byte 9 and sense byte 30 are indicating the
same phYSical address.

Two drives may have the same physical address set in their
Physical Address switches.

Check the drive physical address switch settings for the two indicated
drives.

I! the physical address switches are not set to the same value, return to
procedure that sent you here and continue with that procedure.
I! the physical address switches are set to the same value, change one or
both physical address switches to a unique value. IPL the MD and select
option 3, Unit Test.
A130

A buffer-to-channel transfer caused a check
2 condition.

Possible host processor channel problem or overrun
condition.

See "Possible Host Processor Channel Problems or Overrun Condition"
on START 135.

A170

A channel-to-buffer transfer caused a check
2 condition.

Possible host processor channel problem or overrun
condition.

See "Possible Host Processor Channel Problems or Overrun Condition"
on START 135.

CCDD

Fifty consecutive errors have occurred.

Information message only.

Using the host processor console messages or EREP, look for other
sense records with a different FSC for this control unit. Use the new
determined FSC for troubleshooting.

3480 MI

EC336396

FSC Caused by other than 3480 Hdw. Failures (Cont.)

START 120

Fault Symptom Codes Caused by other than 3480 Hardware Failures (Continued)

FSC Caused by other than 3480 Hardware Failures (Cont.)

FSC

FSC Dellnilion

Causes Other than 3480 Hardware Failures

Action

CCEE

An error occurred during a synchronous
read or write operation.

Information message only.

Using the host processor console messages or EREP, look for other
sense records with a different FSC for this control unit. Use the new
determined FSC for troubleshooting.

START 125

Note: Error recovery is not
performed for errors that occur in
'synchronous mode '.
DOnn

The read status register (RSR) contains
active bits 5, 6, or 7. The nn indicates which
bits are active in the RSR.

Possible tape media problem.

See "Possible Tape Media Problems" on START 130.

0584

During channel/buffer communication, a
buffer checker had detected an error.

Possible host processor channel problem or overrun
condition.

See "Possible Host Processor Channel Problems or Overrun Condition"
on START 135.

E501

A condition code 3 (CC3) or path inoperative
condition has occurred.

Possible host processor channel problem or overrun
condition.

See "Possible Host Processor Channel Problems or Overrun Condition"
on START 135.

E502

A condition code 3 (CC3) or path inoperative
condition has occurred and the control unit
will not go online.

Possible host processor cha.nnel problem or overrun
condition.

See "Possible Host Processor Channel Problems or Overrun Condition"
on START 135.

E505

A solid condition code 3 (CC3) or path
inoperative condition has occurred and
channel adapters are enabled.

Possible host processor channel problem or overrun
condition.

See "Possible Host Processor Channel Problems or Overrun Condition"
on START 135.

E511

An interface control check or channel data
check has occurred.

Possible host processor channel problem or overrun
condition.

See "Possible Host Processor Channel Problems or Overrun Condition"
on START 135.

E513

There is an IFCC or channel data check and
a tag failure is indicated.

Possible host processor channel problem or overrun
condition.

See "Possible Host Processor Channel Problems or Overrun Condition"
on START 135.

E514

There is an IFCC or channel data check and
a bus failure is indicated.

Possible host processor channel problem or overrun
condition.

See "Possible Host Processor Channel Problems or Overrun Condition"
on START 135.

E520

The host processor channel has detected a
timeout or a hang condition.

Possible host processor channel problem or overrun
condition.

See "Possible Host Processor Channel Problems or Overrun Condition"
on START 135.

E800

The service representative has informed the
MD that there are too many temporary data
errors based on Format 21 sense records
from EREP or processor Console message
information.

Possible tape media problem.

See "Possible Tape Media Problems" on START 130.

3480 MI

EC336396

FSC Caused by other than 3480 Hardware Failures (Cont.)

(' Copyngnlll:lM Corp 1~84 1985 19Bo l':1e~

li')

()

(J

0

{}

0

0

a

f)

"

START 125

o

Fault SAtom Codes CaAd by other thaQ480 Hardware Glures (ContinuO

FSC Osed by other tha.Qao Hardware FaOes (Cont.)

FSC

FSC Delnilion

causes Other than 3480 Hardware Failures

Action

A130

A bUffer-to-channel transfer caused a check 2
condition.

Possible host processor channel problem or overrrun condition.

See "Possible" 0Sl Processor Channel Problems or Overrun Condition" on START
135.

A170

A bUffer-to-channel transfer caused a check 2
condition.

Possible host processor channel problem or overrrun condition.

See "Possible .. ost Processor Channel Problems or Overrun Condition" on START
135.

A2nn

A buffer-to-channel transfer caused a check 2
condition.

Possible host processor channel problem or overrrun condition.

See "Possible .. ost Processor Channel Problems or Overrun Condition" on START
135.

A3nn

A buffer-to-channel transfer caused a check 2
condltton.

Possible host processor channel problem or overrrun condition.

See "POSSible" ost Processor Channel Problems or Overrun Condition" on START
135.

A5nn

A bUffer-to-channel transfer caused a check 2
conditton.

Possible host processor channel problem or overrrun condition.

See "Possible .. ost Processor Channel Problems or Overrun Condition" on START
135.

A8nn

A buffer-to-channel transfer caused a check 2
condition.

Possible host processor channel problem or overrrun condition.

See "Possible"
135.

ost Processor Channel Problems or Overrun Condition" on START

A7m

A buffer-to-channel transfer caused a check 2
condition.

Possible host processor channel problem or overrrun condition.

See "Possible"
135.

ost Processor Channel Problems or Overrun Condition" on START

A8nn

A buffer-to-channel transfer caused a check 2
condition.

Possible host processor channel problem or overrrun condition.

See "Possible"
135.

ost Processor Channel Problems or Overrun Condition" on START

CCDD

Rftyconsecutlve errors have occurred.

Information message only.

Using the host Processor console messages or EREP, look for other sense records
with a different F SC for this control unit. Use the newly determined FSC for
troubl eshootlng.

CCEE

An error occurred during a synchronous read or
write operation.

Information message only.

Using the host Processor console messages or EREP, look for other sense records
with a different F SC for this control unit. Use the newly determined FSC for
troubleshooting.

Note: Error recovery is not performed for errors
that occur in 'synchronous mode'.

DOnn

The read status register (RSR) contains active bits
5,6, or 7. The nn indicates which bits are active In
the RSR.

Possible tape media problem.

See "Possible T.ape Media Problems" on START 130.

D584

~ring channel/buffer communication, a buffer
checker had detected an error.

Possible host processor channel problem or overrun condition.

See "Possible H ost Processor Channel Problems or Overrun Condition" on
START 135.

DAnn

The CMS register Indicates an error, where nn =
the BCSE register.

Possible tape media problem.

See "Possible T ape Media Problems" on START 130.

oem

The CMS register indicates an error, where nn =
the CTXE or CPEO register.

Possible tape media problem.

See "Possible T ape Media Problems" on START 130.

E501

A condition code 3 (CC3) or path Inoperative
condition has occurred.

Possible host processor channel problem or overrun condition.

See "Possible," ost Processor Channel Problems or Overrun Condition" on
START 135.

E502

A condition code 3 (CC3) or path Inoperative
condition has occurred and the control unit will not
go online.

Possible host processor channel problem or overrun condition.

See "Possible'" ost Processor Channel Problems or Overrun Condition" on
START 135.

E505

A solid condition code 3 (CC3) or path Inoperative
condition has occurred and channel adapters are
enabled.

Possible host processor channel problem or overrun conditt on.

See "Possible I- ost Processor Channel Problems or Overrun Condition" on
START 135.

E511

An I nterface control check or channel data check
has occurred.

Possible host processor channel problem or overrun condition.

See "Possible I- ost Processor Channel Problems or Overrun Conditton" on
START 135.

E513

There is an IFCC or channel data check and a tag
failure Is Indicated.

Possible host processor channel problem or overrun condition.

See "Possible I- ost Processor Channel Problems or Overrun Condition" on
START 135.

E514

There is an IFCC or channel data check and a bus
failure is Indicated.

Possible host processor channel problem or overrun condition.

See "Possible I- ost Processor Channel Problems or Overrun Condition" on
START 135.

E520

The host processor channel has detected a
timeout or a hang condition.

Possible host processor channel problem or overrun condition.

See • Possible I- ost Processor Channel Problems or Overrun Condition" on
START 135.

EBOO

The service representative has informed the MD
that there are too many temporary data errors
based on Format 21 sense records from EREP or
processor Console message information.

Possible tape media problem.

See • Possible T ape Media Problems" on START 130.

3480 MI EC A57723
10 Copyright IBM Corp. 1982,1889

IBM Confide. tia'-10 May 89

FSC Caused by other than 34ao Hardware Failures (Cont.)

STOT125

START 125

o

o

o

o

o

f)

()

()

o

Fault sym'om Codes cau2 by other than
Actions for Possible Non-FRU Caused Error
Codes.

Possible Software Problems
The following error codes can indicate possible software
problems.

Possible Tape Media Problems
The following error codes can indicate possible tape media
probiems.

47BO
7093
7094
70C2
7GC3
7141

7142
7143

7144
7152
7153
7154

7155
7159
7161
7162
7163

74nn
7503
76nn
77G2
OGnn
EBGS

Errors detected in the data-flow area of the 3480 subsystem can
also be caused by the tape media. The FSC/Error Code correctly
points to the possible subsystem hardware FRUs. However,
sometimes the replacement of these FRUs does not correct the
problem. You should determine if the problem was caused by
the tape media before replacing the subsystem FRUs.

33E4
33E5
3C60
3F13
4200
4260

•

If the EREP Analysis/Predictive Maintenance Procedures
indicate that the tape media is not the problem, continue with
the maintenance specified for the product trained service
representative in the product maintenance package, or for
the support trained service representative, the additional
actions specified in the FSI for the failing FSC.

•

If the EREP Analysis/Predictive Maintenance Procedures
indicate that tape media ;s the problem and multiple
cartridges are failing, go to Media Contamination Fault
Determination Criteria on START 140.

•

If the EREP Analysis/Predictive Maintenance Procedures
indicate that the tape media is the problem and a single
cartridge is failing, go to Single Cartridge Fault
Determination Criteria on START 145.

4261
4252
4280
47B0
4B20

4821
4B22
4823
4B24
4D70

4071
4072
4073
4074
4D75

4E80
4E81
4E8A
4E8B

00_

FSC Caused by other than 3480 Hdw. Failures (Cont.)

This can be used to determine if the processor is set up to
provide access to the device specified in the user's failing CCW
program. It may be necessary to take processor traces of the I/O
operations. The access paths set up for the operating processor
in use are defined in the host processor's UCBs.
•

There are error codes that can be caused by either hardware or
software problems. For example:

If the software is not the problem, continue with the
maintenance specified for the product trained service
representative in the product maintenance package, or for
the support trained service representative, the additional
actions specified in the FSI for the failing FSC.
If the software is the problem, inform the customer of the
problem and do one of the following:

•

A programmer could accidentally use an illegal 3480
subsystem command.

1. IML the control unit (see PANEL 7)

•

The 3480 hardware could have a malfunction that decodes a
correct command as an illegal command.

2. Re-IPL the MD
3. Select option 3, Unit Test.

For these possible software problems suspect
1. New programs or jobs, new PTFs, APARs, or program
versions have been installed.

This procedure assumes that you have an error code that is
listed in the above list. This error code came from the 3480
product-trained maintenance package failure detection process
(without a fix), the sense data from the host processor console
message, or EREP. To determine if the problem could be caused
by the tape media, do the following action.
Perform EREP analysis to determine if the problem is related to a
unique tape volume. See MSG 1 for "EREP Analysis/Predictive
Maintenance." Look at the subsystem exception report to
determine if a tape volume is shown on the "Volume or Creating
Drive Permanent Read or Write Errors on One or More Drive" or
''Volume or Creating Drive Failed Temporary Read or Write
Limits on More Than One Drive" or "Volume Failed Temporary
Read or Write Limits." Follow the directions defined in the EREP
Analysis/Predictive Maintenance Procedures.

o

Qo Hardware F9ures (COntinUed"

2. New applications of existing programs or jobs are being run.
3. Configuration changes have been made and the description
of the error code rei ates to assignment or path group
problems. This assumeS that the 3480 Product MD Diskette,
Start Repair option run without detecting an error.
If there is a potential software problem, you should ask for
software aid.
Assistance in identifying software problems can be found by
looking at the failing CCW in the EREP OBR edit report (SEE
MSG 1). The 3480 Magnetic Tape Subsystem manual,
GA32-0042, can also be used as a reference. This manual
defines all of the legal 3480 commands and any necessary
prerequisites. By identifying the failing CCW chain, you can
determine if the commands are correct If they are correct, you
can use OLT 0200A (FRIEND) to execute a loop of the failing CCW
. string for the drive reporting the error code.
Problems relating to Assign, Unassign, Control ACCeSS, or Path
Group 10, usually can be related to the host processor 110
generation. See the host processor problem determination
manual for the operating processor in use at the time of failure
(for example, 3033/MVS Processor Problem Determination
Guide, Z229-0344).

3480 MI EC A57723

IBM Conflden tlal- 27 May 89

Cl Copyright IBM Co'p. 1182. 1989

WE

FSC Caused by other than 3480 Hdw. Failures (ConI.)

START 130

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

Fault Symptom Codes Caused by other than 3480 Hardware Failures (Continued)
Actions for Possible Non-FRU Caused Error
Codes.
Possible Tape Media Problems
liltl followlny en or code:;
problem:;.
4780
7093
7094
70C2
70C3
7141

7142
7143
7144
7l'i~

1153
7154

C.1f1

II'J'J

ilHlic.lte po~:;rbft! td:~" rnedl..!

741111
7503
76nn
7702
OOnn
£800

7159
7161
7162
7163

Error:; detucted In the ,lata flow area of the J4tlO sllb:;YStolll can
afso be caused by the tape modra. The FSC/Error Code correctfy
points to the posslbfe subsystem hardware fRUs. Howover,
sometimes the replacement of these FRUs doos not corroct the
problem. You should determino if the problem was caused by
the tape media before replacing the subsystem FHUs.
lhls proclIlluro assumo:; fhat you have an error code that Is
lisfed In the abovu list. This error code carne from thu 34!l0
product-trained malntenanco package failure detectfon process
(without a fix). tho sonse data from the host processor consolo
messago. or EREP. To determine if the problem could be caused
by the tape media, do the foflowrng action.
Perform EHEP analysis to determine if the problem is related to a
unique tape volume. See MSG 1 for" EHEP Analysis/Predictive
Maintenance." Look at the subsystem exception report to
determlile if a tape volume is shown on the "Volume or Creating
Drive Permanent Head or Write Errors on One or More Drive" or
"Volume or Creating Drive Failed Temporary Read or Write
Limits on More Than One Drive" or "Volume Failed Temporary
Read or Write Limits." FOllow the directions dofined in the EflEP
Analysis/Predictive Maintenance Procedures.

•

If the EHEP Analysis/Predictlvo Maintonance Procedures
indicate that the tape media is II0t the problem, contrnue With
the maintenance specified for the product trained service
ropresentative III Ihe product maintenance package, or for
the support trained servico lopresentallve, the additional
actions specified in Ihe FSI tor the failing FSC.

•

If the EREP Analysis/PI odictive Mcllntenance Procedures
indicate that tape media Is the problem and multiple
cartridges are laillng. go to Media Contamination Fault
Determination Criteria on S TAH r 140.

•

It EHEP Analysis/Predictive M.1intenanctl Procedules
indicate that tho tape media Is the problem and a singlo
cartridge is falling. go 10 Singh! Cartridgo Fault
Determination Criteria on S r Afll 145.

3480 MI

EC33u396
',,",

Possible Software Problems
lhe fullowlllg error codus call IIlllic.ltu 1J1lS:;lblu softwcllO
problems
33£4
33E5
3C60
3F13
4200
4260

4261
4262
4280
47BO
4B20

4821
4822
4B23
4B24
4070

4071
4072
4073
4074
4075

There are error codus that can be caustlu by either haldware or
software problems. For example:
•

A programmer could accidentally ust! an IIIt!gal 3480
subsystem command.

•

The 3480 hardware could have a malfunction that decodes a
correct command as an illegal command.

o

o

o

o

o

FSC Caused by other than 3480 Hdw. Failures (Cont.)

START 130

1hls can be usod to determine if the proctlssor is set up to
prOVide clccess to the device specified in the user's failing CCW
program. II may be necessary to take processor traces of the 110
operations: The access ·paths set up for the operating processor
In use are defined in the host processor's UCSs.

•

It the software Is nol the problem. continue with the
maintenance specilied for the product trained service
representative in the product maintenance package, or for
the support trained service representative, the additional
actions specified In the FSI for the lalling FSC.

•

If the .ollware I. the problem, inform the customer of the
problem and do one 01 the following:

1.

IML the control unit (see PANEL 7)

2.

Re-IPL the MD

3.

Select option 3, Unit Test.

For these possible software problems suspect:
1.

New programs or jobs, new PTFs, APARs, or proyrulll
versions have been Installed.

2.

New applicatrons of existing programs or jobs are being run.

3.

Confrguration changes have been made and the description
of the error code relates to assignment or path group
problems. This assumes that the 3480 Product MD Diskette,
Start Repair option run Without detecting an err or.

If there is a potential software problem, you should ask for
software aid.

Assistance in id~ntifying software problems can be found by
looking at tlw failing CCW in the EREP OSH edit report (SEE
MSG 1). The 3480 Magnetic Tape Subsystem manual,
GA32-0042, can also be used as a reference. This manual
defines all of the legal 3480 commands and any necessary
prerequisites. Sy id~ntifying the falling CCW chain, you can
determine if the commands are correct It they are correct, you
can uso OL T 0200A (FRIEND) to exocute a loop of the failing CCW
string lor the drive reporting the error code.
Problems relating to Assign, Unassign, Control Access, or Path
Group 10, usually can be related to the host processor I/O
generation. See the host processor problem determination
manual for the operating processor in use at the time 01 failure
(for example, 3033/MVS Processor Problem LJetemrinatlOII
Guide, Z229-0J44)

FSC Caused by other than 3480 Hdw. Failures (Cont.)
"III'

o

START 130

Fault Symptom Codes Caused by other than 3480 Hardware Failures (Continued)
Possible Host Processor Channel Problems or
Overrun Condition

6.

The following error codes can indicate possible host processor
channel problems or overrun conditions.

7.

2200
2201
3300
33E4
33E5

5605
5880
5881
7171
AI30
AI70

0584
E501 (CC=3)
E511
E520
52nn

Actions 'or Possible Overrun Condillons

processor channel to be the problem and contact the service
representative responsible for the host processor.

Two types 01 overrun conditions are possible:

If diagnostic EE62 lails, the 3480 is the cause 01 the problem.
The area most likely to be causing the problem is the
channel adapter driver/receiver cards or the bus and tag
shoe cards.
Prior to replacing FRU's, ensure that the terminators used
for this test are not defective.

8.

Run OLT 3480A to determine that the subsystem operates
correctly with the host processor channel.

If diagnostic EE62 runs successfully, suspect the host

•

If the original product maintenance package Internal wrap
diagnostics continue to fall even alter all FRUs called out
were replaced, diagnostiC EE64 (see DIAG 3) can be used to
isolate board Interconnection problems.
If the host processor channel Is not the problem, do one of

the following:
2.

3.

4.

If OLT 3480A runs correctly, suspect a possible overrun
condition. Go to "Actions for Possible Overrun Conditions"
on START 135.

Product Trained Service Representative

If OLT 3480A fails, run the internal electronic wrap test
diagnostic. (See DIAG 1 for "Channel Adapter Function Test
- routine EE64.'·)
If diagnostic EE64 fails, the problem is in the 3480 control
unit. Do one of the following:

•

IML the control unit (see PANEL 7)

b.

IPL the MD

c.

Select option 1, Start Repair.

5.

2.

IPL the MD

3.

Select option 1, Start Repair.

" the host processor channel Is the problem, do one of the
following:
Product Trained Service Representallve

Support Trained Service Representallve

1.

IML the control unit (see PANEL 7)

Follow the procedures for additional actions in the FSI
for the failing FSC.

2.

Re-IPL the MD

3.

Select option 1, Start Repai r.

If diagnostic EE64 runs correctly, run the external wrap test
diagnostic. (See DIAG 1 for "Channel Interface Wrap Testroutine EE62.")
Warning: Use care when running this diagnostic.
Disconnecting the channel interface cables will cause
Interference to host processor operation for other units on
the same channel.

Support Trained Service Representative

Overruns that occur between host processor channel and the
3480 subsystem.
Overruns that occur between the 3480 control unit and the
3480 drive.

Intermittent overruns should not be a concern. However, if
overruns occur repeatedly, the following areas should be
considered:
•

•

Verify that the 3480 control unit address (mode) switches are
set for the correct channel (see PANEL 12).
Verify that the host operating processor In use has the UCW
for the 3480 subsystem assigned In the 'unshared' and
'streaming' mode.

Some additional non-3480 subsystem causes of overruns are:

Product Trained Service Representative
1.
2.

•

IPL the MD
Select option 3, Unit Test.

Support Trained Service Representative
Follow the procedures for additional actions in the FSI for the
failing FSC.

The 3480 buffer synchronizes the data rate between the 3480
drive and the host processor channel.

Possible EC Level Compatibility Problems
The following error codes can indicate possible EC compatibility
problems.

8100 - Microcode patches not available
8101 - Possible hardware EC compatibility
problem
8102 - Possible hardware EC compatibility
problem
There are several types of EC level compatibility problems. The
most common mismatches are:

•

Host processor loading can cause throughput to deteriorate.
For example, the operating processor access method
(Indirect Addressing List pointer) slowing down can cause
3480 overruns .

•
•

•

When the host processor is operating In Interlock Mode
(3033 or low end host processors) and the 3480 subsystem Is
operating in tape synchronous mode, large blocks of data
are being processed. This can occur during data chaining
when the CCW count is more than 128 kilobytes.

The error codes listed above apply to specilic EC compatibility
problems. Almost any error can be caused by some type of EC
compatibility problem. For problems that cannot be resolved by
corrective action specilied by the maintenance package (for that
FSC/Error Code), the EC levels of the subsystem must be
verified.

Follow the procedures for additional actions in the FSI
for the falling FSC.
•

•

IML the control unit (see PANEL 7)

•

Support Trained Service Representative

Product Trained Service Representative
a.

1.

•

START 135

If the overrun condition is the problem, inform the customer of
the problem and do one of the lollowing:
•

Note: An overrun condition on an MVS system may be
caused by customers canceling a job.
1.

FSC Caused by other than 3480 Hdw. Failures (Cont.)

Inform the customer to reduce the chained block size to less
than 128 kilobytes to resolve the specific overrun condition.
"the overrun condition Is not the problem, continue with the
maintenance specified for the product trained service
representative in the product maintenance package, or for the
support trained service representative, the additional actions
specified In the FSI for the failing FSC.

Follow the procedures for additional actions In the FSI
for the falling FSC.

In the drive compared to the control unit.
In the control unit functional microcode compared to the
hardware.

Review the current ECA listing to determine the EC levels and
required EC companions. Review the EC history to determine
that all of the required ECs have been installed.
The MD Support diskette (see "Display Subsystem Configuration"
on SDISK 105) Is used to Indicate the EC levels of the control unit
and the microcode. Verify that the correct functional microcode
IML diskette Is Inserted In the control unit.
tf any EC levels or microcode patches are not correct. order any

required Ees and end this maintenance call. When the ECs are
available for installation, follow the directions given with the ECs.

If all EC levels and microcode patches are correct. and there stili
Is an EC compatibility problem, contact your next level of
support.

3480 MI

FSC Caused by other than 3480 Hdw. Failures (Cont.)

EC336396

© Copyrignt IBM Corp.

1984. 1985. 1986. 1987

()

o

()

START 135

o

Fault Satom Codes CaAd by other thaAso Hardware Glures (ContinuO
Possible Host Processor Channel Problems or
Overrun Condition

6. If diagnostic EE62 runs successfully, suspect the host
processor channel to be the problem and contact the service
representative responsible for the host processor.

The following error codes can indicate possible host processor
channel problems or overrun conditions.

7. If diagnostic EE62 fails, the 3480 is the cause of the problem.
The area most likely to be causing the problem is the
channel adapter driver/receiver cards or the bus and tag
shoe cards.

5605
5605
5BB0
5BB1
7171
A13e
Al70
A2nn
A3nn
A5nn

2200
2200
2201
3300
33E4
33E5

D584
D584
E501 (CC=3)
E502
E5BS ,. - - -.
E513
E514
E520
52nn
A6nn
A7nn
A8nn

•

If the host processor channel is not the problem, do one of
the following:

1. IML the control unit (see PANEL 7)

Support Trained Service Representative
Follow the procedures for additional actions in the FSI
for the failing FSC.

•
•

•

3. Select option 1, Start Repair.
•

Follow the procedures for additional actions in the FSI
for the failing FSC.
•

•

Overruns that occur between the 3480 control unit and the
3480 drive.

Verify that the 3480 control unit address (mode) switches are
selfor the correct channel (see PANEL 12).
Verify that the host operating processor in use has the UCW
for the 3480 subsystem assigned in the 'unshared' and
'streaming' mode.

Some additional non-3480 subsystem causes of overruns are:

Support Trained Service Representative

c. Select option 1, Start Repair.

•

Product Trained Service Representative

3. If OLT 3480A fails, run the internal electronic wrap test
diagnostic. (See DIAG 1 for "Channel Adapter Function Test
- routine EE64.")

b. IPL the MD

Overruns that occur between host processor channel and the
3~0 subsystem.

Intermittent overruns should not be a concern. However, if
overruns occur repeatedly, the following areas should be
considered:

2. IPL the MD

a. IML the control unit (see PANEL 7)

•

8. If the original product maintenance package internal wrap
diagnostics continue to fail even after all FRUs called out
were replaced, diagnostic EE64 (see DIAG 3) can be used to
isolate board interconnection problems.

2. If OLT 3480A runs correctly, suspect a possible overrun
condition. Go to "Actions for Possible Overrun Conditions"
on START 135.

Product Trained Service Representative

Two types of overrun conditions are possible:

The 3480 buffer synchronizes the data rate between the 3480
drive and the host processor channel.

1. Run OLT 3480A to determine that the subsystem operates
correctly with the host processor channel.

•

Actions for Possible Overrun Conditions

Prior to replacing FRU's, ensure that the terminators used
for thi s test are not defective.

Note: An overrun condition on an MVS system may be caused
by customers canceling a job.

4. If diagnostic EE64 fails, the problem is in the 3480 control
unit. Do one of the following:

If the host processor channel is the problem, do one of the
following:

Host processor loading can cause throughput to deteriorate.
For example, tile operating processor access method
(Indirect Addressing List pointer) slowing down can cause
3480 overruns.
When the host processor is operating in Interlock Mode
(3033 or low end host processors) and the 3480 subsystem is
operating in tape synchronous mode, large blocks of data
are being processed. This can occur during data chaining
when the CCW count is more than 128 kilobytes.
Inform the customer to reduce the chained block size to less
than 128 kilobytes to resolve the specific overrun condition.

Product Trained Service Representative
1. IML the control unit (see PANEL 7)

If the overrun condition is not the problem, continue with the
maintenance specified for the product trained service
representative in the product maintenance package, or for the
support trained service representative, the additional actions
specified in the FSI for the failing FSC.

2. Re-IPL the MD
3. Select option 1, Start Repair.
Support Trained Service Representative
Follow the procedures for additional actions in the FSI
for the failing FSC.

5. If diagnostic EE64 runs correctly, run the external wrap test
diagnostic. (See DIAG 1 for "Channel Interface Wrap Testroutine EE62.")

3480 MI EC A51123

STtl)r135

If the overrun condition is the problem, inform the customer of
the problem and do one of the following:
•

Product Trained Service Representative
1. IPLthe MD
2. Select option 3. Unit Test.

•

Support Trained Service Representative
Follow the procedures for additional actions in the FSI for the
failing FSC.

Possible E C Level Compatibility Problems
The following error codes can indicate possible EC compatibility
problems.

8100 - Microcode patches not available
8101 - Possible hardware EC compatibility
problem
8102 Possible hardware EC compatibility
problem
There are several types of EC level compatibility problems. The
most common mismatches are:
•

In the drive compared to the control unit.
In the control unit functional microcode compared to the
hardware.

The error codes listed above apply to specific EC compatibility
problems. Almost any error can be caused by some type of EC
compatibility problem. For problems that cannot be resolved by
corrective action specified by the maintenance package (for that
FSC/Error Code), the EC levels of the subsystem must be
verified.
Review the current ECA listing to determine the EC levels and
required EC companions. Review the EC history to determine
that all of the required ECs have been installed.
The MD Support diskette (see "Display Subsystem Configuration"
on SDISK 105) is lIsed to indicate the EC levels of the control unit
and the microcode. Verify that the correct functional microcode
IML diskette is inserted in the control unit.
If any EC levels or microcode patches are not COl I ect, order any
required ECs and end this maintenance call. When the ECs are
available for installation. follow the directions given with the ECs.

If all EC levels and microcode patches are correct, and there still
is an EC compatibility problem. contact your next level of
support.

Warning: Use care when running this diagnostic.
Disconnecting the channel interface cables will cause
interference to host processor operation for other units on
the same channel.

() Copyright IBM Corp. 1982. 1989

FOcaused by otherOn 3480 Hdw. FailGs (Cont.)

IBM Confidential-10 May 89

FSC Caused by other than 3480 Hdw. Failures (Cont.)

START 135

o

o

o

o

o

()

o

()

o

o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o

Q

o o o o o o o o o o o o o o

3480 Media Fault Determination Criteria

3480 Media Fault Determination Criteria

Note: You were sent to this page because of a possible media
problem with multiple cartridges and/or multiple drives.
There should be a pattern of similar unscheduled service
calls.

ISOLATION

Single Cartridge Fault Determination Criteria

ENSURE HARDWARE

The hardware has been verified by running all diagnostics error
free.

This procedure should be followed for each suspected media
service call. After following this procedure, do NOT approach the
customer about a potential media problem until further analysis
is completed by the next level of support. Notify your manager at
this time of a possible media problem.

The integrity of the hardware must be established. This requires
utilization of the maintenance package to ensure there are no
hardware malfunctions in the subsystem which could be causing
the degradation. The hardware must be able 10 run all
diagnostics error free.

Description/Definition

Once hardware problems have been eliminated as the reason for
poor performance, and media is suspected, the following items
need 10 be verified:

Tape media can create a number offailure modes similar 10
those caused by actual hardware problems and the severity can
be significant if not properly handled. For this reason, it Is
important that careful analysis and problem determination be
made if a media failure is suspected.

ENSURE ENVIRONMENT
Temperature and humidity of both the tape storage area and the
computer room should be observed to assure they are within
acceptable limits. The operating limits are given in the Care and
Handling of the Magnetic Tape Cartridge, GA32-0047.

One failure mode is media generated debris. Debris can be
caused by minute particles separating from the tape and will
normally appear as a thin line of deposits (very difficult to see
without magnification) across the tape, the ReadlWrite head or
the cleaner blade.

ENSURE ADEQUATE DRIVE CLEANING

Some typical failure modes commonly associated with media
problems include but are not limited 10:

Customer drive cleaning procedures should be studied. The
drives should be cleaned by the customer:

•

Permanent read or write errors caused by:

•

You were sent to this page because a single cartridge is failing
for one of the following reasons:
1. The maintenance package has found a physical defect with
this cartridge such as a broken tape.
2. A single cartridge fails on multiple drives.
3. EREP analysis indicates a single cartridge in the tape library
is causing a high number of read/write problems.
If the failure is caused by a single cartridge, notify the customer
to purge the tape from the library.

whenever a 'CLEAN' message is displayed on the pod

deposits transferred to and from the cleaner blade

• every 8 hours

transfer of media particles to the ReadlWrite head

•

media particles left on the tape surface may cause the
tape 10 be lifted from the head thereby causing a failure.

• whenever an increase in temporary errors is observed.

after every permanent R/W error

•

Dropping records due to debris deposits and subsequent
loss of tape position indicated by block sequence errors.

The customer should be encouraged to install all error recovery
and error recording modules available for his operating system.

•

High temporary error rate.

If the failure is the result of a media oriented problem, contact
your next level of support for further media analysis. Notify your
manager of a possible media problem. DO NOT notify the
customer of the possible media problem at this time.

evidenced by highly erratic drive performance day to
day

START 140

not definable to a single drive, control unit or subsystem
not the result of repeat failures on a particular volume.
The following information provides some basic considerations
and guidelines relative to handling media problems.

3480 MI EC A57723
() Copyright IBM Corp. 1882.1889

3480 Media Fault Determination Criteria

START 140

Determining a Fault Symptom Code

Determining a Fault Symptom Code

START 300

Determining a Fault Symptom Code

START 300

Determining a Fault Symptom Code
The Determining a Fault Symptom Code procedures are written to guide you through the
process of determining which sense byte error code to use as a fault symptom code
(FSC). Normally the MD identifies the fault symptom code, determines the corrective
action, and prompts you to perform the corrective action. However, there can be
conditions where you would manually determine a fault symptom code. The following is
a list of these conditions:
To develop fault symptom codes from sense records in EREP analysis and predictive
maintenance.
•

To determine FRU's ahead of time for a problem when you are away from the
subsystem or are unable to connect the MD to the subsystem.

•

To develop multiple fault symptom codes from several records in EREP reports,
system console messages, or other external symptoms for comparison purposes.

•

To verify that the correct fault symptom code was used by the MD product diskette
analysis procedures.

If you have any of these conditions, or should you chose to manually determine a fault
symptom code for any reason, use the following maps to determine the fault symptom
code. After you have determined the fault symptom code, return to the procedure that
sent you here.
Look for sense error codes that are used to select an FSC in the following sense bytes:
(four digit error codes) 10-11, 12-13, 14-15, 16-17, (two digit error codes) 21, and 23.
When two digit error codes (from sense bytes 21, or 23) are described in the maintenance
information (MI) or displayed on the MD, they are preceded by two zeros (example: drive
error code 25 in sense byte 21 becomes fault symptom code 0025).

3480 MI EC AS7724
Cl CoPyril'" IBM Corp 1112.1110

"'}

"-

If"\

~

J

U

~)

~)

U ,) ;J U

~)

~)
~.

D

i)

~)

~J

~}

:)
..

~)

,

,J
\

".'"

\J

~J
\.

K

.. ""j

{)

~J

"

"

)

fJ rJ

~

\

)

(1

{)

4

\

)

f'}
if.

.,
~

~

J

,

"

o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o
Determining a Fault Symptom Code (Continued)

Determining a Fault Symptom Code (Continued)

START 310

MAP 0310: Determining a Fault Symptom Code

la aenae data available?
Vea No

-

Preceed Sense Byte 18 with -E7- and use as the
FSC.
Continue at Step 001 on page START-325.

Are you here for frequent temporary ReadlWrlte
errors or High ECC's?
Ves No

Do you have a drive CHK code?
Vea No

~

022

~

Go to Maintenance Starting Point on START 10.

Continue at Step 003 on page START-315.

Go to Maintenance Starting Point on
START 10.

004
Doea the CHK Code equal 75, 76, A3 or A4?
Vea No

023
Continue at Step 001 on page START-315.

013

~

020(COntinued)
Continue at Step 001 on page START-325.

021

EJ

110021

-

~

010 (continued)
Is there other format 19, 20 or 22 sense data for this
address?
Ves No

~

-

Perform EREP analysis for temporary errors (see
MSG 360).
Does EREP indicate temporary errors?
Ves No

Doea the CHK Code equal EC, ED, EE or EF?
Vea No

8

110061

- Turn of Forced Error Logging (see MSG 1).
Continue at Step 017, when you have format 19
data for temporary errors.

-

Preceed the CHK Code with two zeros (ie
Check 25 becomes FSC 0025).
Continue at Step 001 on page START-325.
015
007
Get the two digit code from the Loader Card (see
LOC 1). If blank enter 00.
Preceed the Loader Code with -E7- (ie Code 96
becomes FSC E796).
Continue at Step 001 on page START-325.

008
Could be Normal operation (see FSI).
- Preceed the CHK Code with two zeros (ie Check 75
becomes FSC 0075)
Continue at Step 001 on page START-325.

016

I

Continue at Step 017.

~

Does Sense Byte 21
Vea No

= 64, 75, A3 or FF?

8

Does Sense Byte 21
Ves No

009
Doea Senae Byte 7
Ves No

- Use E800 as the FSC.
Continue at Step 001 on page START-325.

= 19,20 or 22?

~

8

= OO?

Does Sense Byte
Ves No

This is sense data for statistical or frequent temporary
errors.
(Step 010 continues)

21

=

EC, ED, EE or EF?

11020 1 .
-

Preceed Sense Byte
use as the FSC.
(Step 020 continues)

3480 MI EC A57724

21 with two zeros and

Determining a Fault Symptom Code (Continued)

C Cop,,;, hi IBM Cor,. 1112.1190

... $L&@24!L2l

START 310

Determining a Fault Symptom Code (Ctonlnued)

Format 19 and 20 Sense Analysis

START 315

MAP 0315: Format 19 and 20 Sense Analysis
012 (continued)
Do aenae bytes 10·11 equal 2000 or 2010?
Vea No

EJ

Does Sense Byte 23 equal 00, 64, 75 or A3?
Ves No

§J

~

Preceed Sense Byte 23 with two zeros and use as the
FSC.
Continue at Step 001 on page START-325.

- Use sense bytes 10-11 as the FSC.
Continue at Step 001 on page START-325.

-

014
Do sense bytes 12-13 equal OOOO?
Vea No

003

§J

Do sense bytes 10·11 equal OOOO?
Ves No

- Use sense bytes 12-13 as the FSC.
Continue at Step 001 on page START-325.

1' 004 1
Do sense bytes 10·11 equal 33E7, 33ES, 33E9, S202, or
S204?
Ves No

016
-

8

Call your next level of support

Do sense bytes 16-17 equal OOOO?
Ves No

1' 006 1
- Use sense bytes 16-17 as the FSC.
Continue at Step 001 on page START-325.
007
Do sense bytes 10·11 equal SE06?
Ves No

I'oosl
Continue at Step 012.
009
Continue at Step 001 on page START-320.
010
Continue at Slep 010 on page START·320.
011
-

Can your next level of support

[§J
(Step 012 continues)

Determining a Fault Symptom Code (Ctonlnued)

3480 MI EC A57724
c)

,

~

}

Copyri,htlB'" Corp. 1'112, 11tO

il

()

o

f}

t

o

a o

t)

{) f) ()

o

~)

o

{)

START 315

o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o
Format 19 and 20 Sense Analysis (Continued)

Determining a Fault Symptom Code (Continued)

START 320

MAP 0320: Format 19 and 20 Sense Analysis (continued)
011 (continued)
Do sense bytes 16·17 equal OOOO?
Yes No

~

Do sense bytes 12.13 equal 2000 or 2010?
Vas No

§J

,' 002 1
Do sense bytes 12·13 equal OOOO?
Ves No

- Use sense bytes 16-17 as the FSC.
Continue at Step 001 on page START-325.
013
-

Use the last non-zero error code that sent you to this
step as the FSC.
Continue at Step 001 on page START-325.

,' 003 1
Continue at Step 006.
004
014

Continue at Step 010.

Is other sense data available for this control unit's address?
Ves No

005

~

Continue at Step 007.

Go to Maintenance Starting Point on START to.

, 006 1
016

Do sense bytes 12·13 equal 8E06?
Ves No

Continue at Step Ot7 on page START-3tO.

,;.

,' 007 1
- Use sense bytes 12·13 as the FSC.
Continue at Step 001 on page START·325.
008
Do sense bytes 14·15 equal 0000 or 8E06?
Ves No
,' 009 1
Use sense bytes 14·15 as the FSC.
Continue at Step OOt on page START-325.
010
This can be a normal operating condition.
Using the last non·zero error code that sent you to this step
(as an FSC), see the FSI and determine if the problem has a
non-FRU cause.
Perform any action as necessary.
Is the problem a non·FRU?
Ves No

~

(Step 011 continues)

3480 MI EC A57724

DeterminIng a Fault Symptom Code (Continued)

C Copy,I,,,, IBM Corp. lin, 1110

£&

.

'"

START 320

Action After A Fault Symptom Code Has Been Determined

Action After A Fault Symptom Code Has Been Determined

START 325

MAP 0325: Action After A Fault Symptom Code Has Been Determined
An FSC has been determined. FRU's for this FSC can now be
identified and ordered.

~

003 (continued)

010 (continued)
Consider the error that was detected by Start
Repair a new error that occurred after the list you
analyzed.
Repair action is completed.
Return to the procedure that brought you here,
and continue with any remaining actions.

Is this a two control unit configuration?
Ves No

EJ

Do you wish to perform corrective action and Is the subsystem
hardware (CU or Drive) relating to this FSC available for
corrective action?
Ves No

Does the FSC error description In the FSI relate to a
channel adapter problem?
Ves No

011

~

,1 0021
Do one of the following procedures to generate the FRU
list

Consider the error that was detected by Start Repair to
be the same error that was identified by your analysis.
Repair action is completed.
Return to the procedure that brought you here, and
continue with any remaining actions.

Continue at Step OOS.

006

Note: The following do not require connecting the MD
to a control unit

Follow the ·Error Path Isolation· procedures (see Start
400) to determine the failing channel adapter (A-D) for
the channel adapter FRU's to be exchanged
Continue at Step OOS.

1. Display FRU's program
a. Connect the MD AC power to an AC power
outlet
007

b. Power on the MD.
c. Insert the product diskette into the MD.
d. When the Main Menu is displayed, select
option 4 (Display FRU's).
e. Enter the data when it is requested by the MD.
An FSC is determined and the FRU list for the
FSC is displayed on the MD.

2. Maintenance Information (MI) FSC FRU list
a. Look up the FRU's and possible additional
causes of failure for the FSC in the FSI section
of the MI.
b. Record the FRU list for later use in your
corrective action.

Follow the ·Determining the Control-Unit-t~MD Connection·
procedure (see START 420) to determine which control unit
the MD should be connected to and also which FRU's should
be exchanged in which control unit
Continue at Step OOS.

, DOS

Follow the vary offline procedures on PLAN 55 and have the
customer vary offline the units needed for corrective action.
Connect the MD to the control unit, insert the product diskette,
and IPL the MD (see MD 40).
Select Main Menu option 1, Start Repair.
Enter the data when it is requested by the MD.
An FSC is determined and the FRU list for the FSC is displayed
on the MD.
Did the message 'ANALYZING PREVIOUSLV ENTERED SENSE
DATA' appear on the MD display?
Ves No

,1 009

These FRU's can be obtained in advance so that when
you perform the corrective action, the FRU's are
available for exchanging.
.
Return to the step that brought you here, and continue
any remaining actions.

Record the displayed FRU list
Follow the MD/MI directions and exchange the FRU's on
the list, then continue with the MD directions until
completed.
Compare the FSC code from the MD start repair action
with the FSC code from your analysis.
Are the FSC codes ttle same or associated with the same
area?
Ves No

(Step 003 continues)

The MD then displays a FRU list based on the entered data.
Follow the procedure in the MI and exchange the FRU's on
the displayed list
Repair action is completed.
Return to the procedure that brought you here, and continue
with any remaining actions.

I

Schedule, with the customer, a time for corrective
action.

003

012

1

§J
(Step 010 continues)

3480 MI EC A57724

Action After A Fault Symptom Code Has Been Determined

CI Copyn,IIIIBM eorp. 1'12,1.

t)

il

()

o

(t)

[)

o

o

~)

()

o

o

-f)

l

o

{)

START 325

o

o

o

o

Action After A Fault Symptom Code Has Been Determined
An FSC has been determined; FRUs for this FSC can now be
identified and ordered.

A

00 you wish to perform corrective action and I

the subsystem hardware (CU cr drive) relating
this FSC available for corrective action?
YES NO

I

002
00 one of the following procedures to generate
the FRU 1i s t:

Note.
The following does not require connecting the
MD to a control unit.
1.

o

A

4.

a.

Connect the MD ac power to an ac power
outl et.

b.

Power on the MD.

c.

Insert the product diskette into the MD.

d.

IPL the MD.

e.

When the Main Menu is displayed, select
option 4 (Display FRUs).

2.

Connect

3.

Select Main Menu option 1.

Follow the Mo/MI directions
and exchange the FRUs on the
displayed list, the MD will
verify correct subsystem
operation.

F

ow the 'Error Path isolation' procedures
see START 400) to determine the failing
channel adapter (A-D) for the channel adapter
FRU to be exchanged.
Go to step 005.
012
Follow the "Determining the Control-Unlt-to-+1D
Connection' procedure (see START 420) to determine
which control unit the MD should be connected to
and also which FRUs should be exchanged in which
control unit.

Any more corrective actions to be
performed?

action is completed.

I

006
1.

009
Repeat this procedure for ea
identified error that you are
perform corrective action on.

displayed FRU list.
the MO/MI directions and
ange the FRUs on the displayed FRU list. then verify
that the error was corrected.

Foll

1.

Select Main Menu option 3.
Unit Test. to verify subsystem
operation and to complete the
end of call actions.

2.

Have the customer vary online
the drives that were varied
offline.

3.

Return to the procedure step
that brought you here. and
continue with any remaining
actions.

Select Main Menu option 1.
Start Repair again.
3.

003

Is this a two control unit configuration?
YES NO

The MD asks if a 'CHK' message
is displayed on the drive; respond NO to this question.
The MO then asks if sense data
is available for the suspected
failure; respond YES to this
question. then enter the requested sense data again.
using the sense error record
that was used to determine
the FSC.

I

004
Does the FSC error description i~ the FSI or
EAD relate to a channel adapter problem?
YES NO

A B

EC336396

011

YES NO

Return to the step that brought you here,
and continue any remaining actions.

tUM Cu,p 1984. 1~85. 1~66 1~81

Follow the procedures In the Mlj.s.ee"---CARR-DR 1-1) and exchange
1Rus on
the displayed list.

nsider the error that was detected by the functional verify program
to be the same error that was identified by your analysis.

Does the message 'ANALYZING PREVIOUSLY
ENTERED SENSE DATA' appear on the MD
display?
(This message means that the functiona
verify program completed without
detecting an error.)

Record the FRU list for later use in your
corrective action. Schedule, with the customer. a time for corrective action. These
FRUs can be obtained in advance so that when
you perform the corrective action. the FRUs
are available for exchanging. Also. have
the sense data available.

iC Copyright

I

010
The MD then displays a FRU list based
on the entered EREP sense data.

I

007
Consider the error that was detected by the functional verify
program a new error that occurred after the EREP report you
analyzed was printed.

The MD asks if a 'CHK' message is displayed on the drive; respond NO to this
question.
The MD then asks if sense data is available for the suspected failure; respond
YES to this question. then enter the requested sense data from the sense record
that was used to determine the FSC.

Look up the FRUs and possible additional
causes of fai lure for the FSC in the FSI
and EAD, if applicable.

3480 MI

START 325

Go to step 005.

Maintenance Information (MI) FSC FRU list

II

o

YES NO

Follow the vary offline procedure on
N 55 and have the customer vary
off'
the units needed for corrective

Enter the sense data when it is requested
by the MO. An FSC is determined and
the FRU list for the FSC is displayed
on the MO.

ABC

o
0

Compare thIs FRU list WIth your
recorded FRU list (from the
functional verify program
error) .

Are the FRU lists eIther the same
or associated with the same area.

Di splay FRUs program

f.

2.

A B

C

BEFORE YOU START CORRECTIVE ACTION, YOU
SHOULD REVIEW THE CUSTOMER'S CLEANING
PROCEDURE. THEN DETERMINE THE CLEANLINESS OF THE SUSPECTED DRIVE HEAD ANO
GUIDE ASSEMBLY AS OESCRIBED ON CARR-OR 130
(SEE 'HEAD. DECOUPLER. AND CLEANER BLOCK
CLEANING PROCEDURE'). IF THE HEAD AND GUIDE
ASSEMBLY NEEDS CLEANING. CLEAN THE ORIVE
USING THE TAPE CLEANER CARTRIDGE. IBM
PART 47B0527. OR EQUIVALENT (SEE THE 3480
MAGNETIC TAPE SUBSYSTEM OPERATORS GUIDE.
GA32-o066. IF ADDITIONAL CLEANING IS
NEEDED. PERFORM THE CLEANING PROCEOURE
DESCRIBED ON CARR-DR 130. INFORM THE CUSTOMER TO CLEAN THEIR DRIVES MORE OFTEN.

(Entry Point D)

o

Action After A Fault Symptom Code Has Been Determined

I
005

001

o

o

A B

o

o

Action After A Fault Symptom Code Has Been Determined

START 325

Error Path Isolation

Error Path Isolation

The purpose of the following procedure is to identify the failing path and to determine
which control unit to connect the MD to, which channel adapter (CA) to test for a problem,
and which control unit FRUs are to be exchanged in which control unit.

1.

Analyze sense byte 2 bit 4 to determine the control unit that detected the failure.
This will determine in which control unit you should exchange the FRUs (except for
the channel adapter) and to which control unit the MD should be connected.

2.

Use the error description theory of the EAD or the FSI for the fault symptom code
(FSC) selected by the MD or the FSC you determined from" Determining a Fault
Symptom Code" procedure (see START 300).

Bit 4 - Indicates the control unit that detected the failure. This bit determines in
which control unit the control unit FRUs (except the channel adapter) should be
exchanged, and to which control unit to connect the MD.

4.

Assume the FSC is 5CC3, and sense byte 9 is 0010xxxx. In this example, sense byte 9
Indicates channel adapter C, which is attached to host channelS, although the host
operating processor reports channel 1, which is attached to channel adapter A.
If interface or host processor channel problems are indicated by Ihe FSC, run OL T 3480A
(Channel Interface Test) using the suspected channel, or use the appropriate host
processor channel tests on the control unit channel adapter Identified In sense byte 9.

To determine the host processor channel connection to the 3480 control unit channel
adapter, see the customer's host processor channel configuration drawing or the 1/0
GEN.

0- Control unit 0 detected this error.
1 - Control unit 1 detected this error.

II the error description relates to the channel adapter or a channel adapter FRU Is
Identified, look at sense byte 9, of the sense record for the FSC. This will determine
the failing channel adapter (A through OJ for the control unit identified by sense byte
2 bit 4. You should replace the identified FRU in the channel adapter Identified in
sense byte 9.

3.

Note: Bits 0 through 3 have very little meaning for troubleshooting. For
troubleshooting, bit 4, and for channel adapter problems. sense byte 9
provides useful information.

Sense Byte 9 - Failing Channel Adapter Identified for Channel Adapter FSCs
For channel adapter FSCs, sense byte 9 identifies the failing channel adapter (A through
D) that is in the control unit that detected this error, as defined by sense byte 2 bit 4.
Only sense byte 9 bits 0 through 3 have meaning to identify the failing channel adapter
lor channel adapter FSCs.

I

--,
I

Channel adapter B reported the problem.

011

=

Channel adapter C reported the problem.

100

=

Channel adapter 0 reported the problem.

•
•

•
•

Bit 3 - Indicates the control unit location of the channel adapter reporting the
problem.

•

The channel adapter reporting the problem is in control unit O.

Loca I

Not
Used

A
Local

The drive selected at the time of the error is drive O.
The 3480 channel adapter A is connected to host system channel 1 and is addressed
as 8 (CUA = 180).
The 3480 channel adapter C Is connected to host system channelS and Is addressed
as 8 (CUA = 580).
The host processor I/O GEN has 180 as the primary CUA and 580 as the alternate
CUA.
The host processor channel 1 is busy with another drive and a program wants to
process data through CUA 180. The host then selects CUA 580 as an alternate to
process the data on drive 580.
An error occurs on drive 0 while processing the data. The host operating processor
will report the CUA/PCUA as 180, which Is not the correct data path to drive O.

When instances such as the above occur, sense byte 2 has no useful Information.
Because there is only one control unit, sense byte 2 bit 4 will always be zero. Only the
channel adapter must be determined II the FSC error description relates to the channel
adapter or a channel adapter FRU is identified. For channel adapter FSCs, sense byte 9
bits 0 through 3 identify the falling channel adapter.

1 = The channel adapter reporting the problem is In control unit 1.

3480 MI

D

See Figure 1 and assume the following conditions:

•

o=

I

D

CONTROL UNIT 0
l __ ~

Single 3480 Control Unit

Bits 0, 1 and 2 - Indicates the channel adapter reporting the problem for the control
unit that detected the problem as specified In bit 4.

=

A
B
C

I

C

Channel
Adapter

Buffer

Device
Interconnections

Examples of EREP and Actual Data Path Differences

Sense Byte 2 - Reporting Path and Failing Path (Except Channel Adapter) Definitions

010

IA
I

B

The cont ro 1 un it is spec if i ed
by sense byte 2 bit 4.

Error Path Sense Byte Definitions

Channel adapter A reported the problem.

Failing
Channel Adapter

1000
0100
0010
0001

When errors occur in multi-path processors or in 3480 dual control unit subsystems, It
may be necessary to determine the actual path to the falling device. EREP lists the
errors of its selected CUA while the 3480 subsystem is using another control unit for a
data path. For example, data load balancing can cause this condition.

=

Att ached to
Chan nel 5
Addr essed as
B (CUA ~ S8X)

2\, I

Replace all FRUs (except the channel adapter) in the control unit specified by sense
byte 2 bit 4. For channel adapters FSCs, or when a channel adapter FRU is
identified, replace the channel adapter specified in sense byte 9, in the control unit
specified in sense byte 2 bit 4.

001

-

Att ac hed t 0
Ch annel 1
Ad dressed as
B (CUA ~ lax

Return to the MI section that sent you here. When requested to connect the MD,
connect it to the control unit with the failure as defined by sense byte 2 b114.
Sense Byte g
Bits 0-3

B
Remote

DR 0

DR 7

Failing Data Path Reported by EREP
Actual Failing Data Path
Figure 1. Single Control Unit

Error Path Isolation

EC336396

~ COPVngh11tJM Corp. 1984. 1985. 1986. 1987

()

()

o

START 400

o

f)

.()

l

o

t)

START 400

o

o

o

o

o

o

Error Path Isolation (Continued)

o

o

Error Path Isolation (Continued)

Examples of EREP and Actual Data Path Differences (Continued)
Sense Byte 2 = 38

Dual 3480 Control Units

o 123

•

The drive selected at the time of the error is drive 8.

•
•

In control unitl, channel adapter A is addressed as 8 and is channell (CUA = 188).
All 3480 channel adapters in control unit 0 are addressed as 8 (CUA
XB8).

•

CUA 188 is selected in control unit 1, however, control unit 0 has the least data load.
The 3480 routes the data through the channel adapter in control unit I, through
control unit O's buller and drive interconnections, to drive 8.

I lL

•

An error occurs while drive 8is processing the data. EREP will reportthePCUA as
180, which is not the true data path.

Does 110t apply.
Indicates that CU 1 WdS the
failing control unit.
Indicates the reporting chann~l addpter
and control unit at the time of the
error. not useful for troubleshooting.

=

In cases such as the above, the actual data path will be defined in sense byte 2 bit 4, and
for channel adapter FSCs the actual failing channel adapter will be defined in sense byte
9 bits 0 through 3.
For the following two examples, the data path at the time of failure is the same, and is
shown in Figure 1 on START 401. However, because each example has a.failure in a
dille rent part of the subsystem, the sense data troubleshooting information Is different.
Example A:
Assume the FSC is 70E4 (buffer problem), sense byte 2 is hexadecimal 30 and sense byte
9 contains no useful information.

Sense Byte 2 = 30
o1 2 3 4 5 6 7
o 0 1 lOX XX

I lL

Does not apply.
Indicates that CU 0 was the
failing control unit.
. Indicates the reporting channel adapter
and control unit at the time of the
error. not useful for troubleshooting.

Looking up the 70E4 FSC in the FSI indicates that the problem relates to a buller error.
As a result, sense byte 9 has.no usefl,ll meaning. In this case, all control unit FRUs
identified by the 70E4 FSC are in control unit 0, as defined by sense byte 2 bit 4.
Example B:
Assume the FSC is SCCl (channel adapter problem), sense byte 2 is hexadecimal 38 and
sense byte 9 contains 0010xxxx.

START 401

In some cases an error Cdn be caus~d by either control unit. When this Occurs. It may be
necessary to use the maintenance package on both control units.

4 5 6 7

001 1 1 X X X
See Figure 1 and assume the following conditions:

o

o

For Single drivfl failures. the data path will have less meaning. and the maintenance
device (MD) can be used with either control unit to troubleshoot the failing drive.
Use lhe FSC selected by the MD or by follOWing the" Determining a Fault
Symptom Code" procedure. See START 300.

Looking up the SeCl FSC in the FSI indicates that the problem relates to a channel
adapter error. As a result, sense byte 9 identifies the falling channel adapter. In this
case, sense byte 9 contains 0010xxxx and indicates the channel adapter is for channel C
in control unit 1 (as defined by sense byte 2 bit 4).
If the channel adapter or host processor channel problems are Indicated (either by a
channel adapter FSC in the sense data or a host detected channel error). the product
trained service representative should follow the Product MaintElnance package beginning
at the MI START section. The MD should be connected tu the control unit defined by
sense byte 2 bit 4, and the channel adapter defined by sense byte 9 for channel adapter
FSCs; or to the host processor that reported the host detected error.

For any other FSCs in sense data, connect the MD to the control unit specified by sense
byte 2 bit 4. For any other error condition, (audible, or visual). connect the MO to the
control unit with the error condition.
•

Run OL T 3480A to the identified control unit channel adapter (as determined for
channel adapter FSCs by sense byte 2 bit 4, and sense byte 9, in the sense data or to
the control unit and channel adapter connected to the host processor that reported
the host detected error. When a failure is found, Isolation between the control unit
and the host processor channel or cables must be determined. Use support
diagnostics as follows:
EE64 (DIAG) runs an internal wrap that tests the control unit channel adapter but
not the bus and tag shoe card drivers and receivers to the host processor
channel cable.
EE62 (OIAG) is an external control unit wrap test that tests the bus and tag shoe
card drivers and receivers.

If both support diagnostics run successfully, suspect the host system channel or cables.
Inform the person responsible for maintenance of the host processor channel and
cabling.

To determine the host processor channel connected to the 3480 control unit channel
adapter, refer to the customer host processor channel configuration drawing or the I/O
GEN.
To determine which control unit is control unit 0 and which is control unit 1, look at the
position of the CU O/CU 1 switch on the control unit. (See LOC 1).

3480 Nil

~EC336396

, Copy"gnl IUM Curp 1984. 1985 1%b. 1987

Error Path Isolation (Continued)

START 401

.Determining the Conttol-UnU-to-MD Connection
This lIowchart determines whi..:h FRUs are exchanged in which
control unit, in a 2 control unit configuration, and which channel
adapter the channel adapter FRU should be exchanged in.

Determining the Cu/MD Connection
ABC

0

Determining MD/Control Unit Connection (For a 2
CU Configuration)

F

I

008

Connect the MO to tile
contral unit specIfied
in sense byte 2 bit 4.
Replace the channel
adapter FRU in the chann~l
adapter specified in sense
byte 9 bits 0-3.

001 (Enlry Polnl A)

Does the FSC equal 8007?
YES NO

I

002
Does the FSC equal a CHK code or DOnn?

To determine which CU to connect the MD to, you must:
•
•
•

009
Connect the MO to control unit
(CUI). Replace FRUs in CUI.

YES NO

I

010
Connect the MO to control unit 0
(CUO). Replace FRUs in CUO.

003
Does the FSC equal Ennn?
YES Nii

I

Ennn error codes are MO generated FSCs
that are usually caused by audio or
visual indications. including host-detected errors without any sense data or
CHK codes available.
See the error description of the FSC in
the FSI.

Do sense bytes 10 and 11 or
12 and 13 equal 201e?

Does the FSC relate to a channel
problem?

YES NO

YES NO

004
Do sense bytes 10 and 11 or
12 and 13 equal 2000?
YES NO

oes

I

See the FSI for the description of the failing
FSC.

IB

C

Local

A

J

I

IB

I

C

0

CONTROL UN IT 1
Buffer

1

I

Channel Adapters

Local

Remote

Device Interconnections

I

l __ -,

Connect the MO to the control unit
that is connected to the channel
on which the host detected an error.
Replace FRUs in this CU.

YES NO

0

Attached to
Ch anne I 1
Addressed as 8
(CUA • 18X).

Remote

an

Does the FSC relate to a
channel adapter problem?

I

CONTROL UN IT 0

I

Use sense byte 2 to find
the failing path.
See START 400,

All control unit 0
Ch anne I Ad apters
Addressed as 8 (CUS • X8X)

A

01Z
Connect the MD to the control
unit that the MO was connected
to when the Ennn error code was
generated. Replace FRUs in this CU.

006

Local

I

Rem~~

I

Local

I

I

DR 0

'DR 8

DR 7

DR F

1
Rr ote

t

e14
Connect the MD to either control unit.
(You lay have to change the Control
Uni t to Me connect i on based on the
HD results). Replace FRUs in the failing drive. and CU FRUs in the CU that
the HD is attached to.

I

ee7
Connect the MD to the
control unit specified
by sense byte Z bit 4.
Unless otherwise specified
by the Ho or fRU list.
exchange all the control
unit FRUs specified by
sense byte 2 bit 4.
0

•

For any problem, connect the MD to the failing control unit
specified by sense byte 2 bit 4.
Use the error description from the EAD or the FSI.
II the error description indicates a channel adapter problem,
sense byte 9 (Indicates the failing channel adapter). This is
the failing channel adapter that should be exchanged when a
channel adapter FRU Is called out.
For single drive failures, the maintenance device (MD) can
be used with either control unit to troubleshoot the failing
drive.

011

I

ABC

START 420

015
Connect the MD to the control unit specified
in the control unit address that was recorded
when the FSC was determined. Any control unit
FRUs called out are for the control unit
specified by this control unit's address.

F

--

Failing Data Path Reported by EREP (CUA/PCUA • 180)
Actual Failing Data Path (As Established by the Load
Balancing)
Figure 1. Dual Control Units

3480 MI

Determining the CWMD Connection

EC336396

.. COPYrlQhl IBM Corp. 198'4. 1985. 1986 1987

{)

f}
\

{)

{l

:..)
~

fl

START 420

o o

o

o o

()

c o c o

()

c o

Contents
T:tpc M('(ti:t Dint('n.. inn..

2

Carfrid~('

5

Dc.'scrirfinn

.

Cartri"ge Remnval hy lIan"
B{~rorc You Bcgin . . . . . .
I'roccdurc i\: Drivc~ Without ""tomntie Clirtridge 10:lder
Procedure 0: Drivcs With Automatic Cartridge loader
Illentirying the Cartridge and/or Tarc Condition . . . . . . .
Example of a leader OIock Separated From thc Magnetic Tare
bC:lInple of Magnetic Tapc Pulled Out of the Cartridge
F:mmple of thc I.eader Olock and Threader rin in thc Mat'hine Rt,(,) Huh
EX:lInrlc of the leader OIock and Threadcr Pin Slorred in the Tare Path
Examrle of the leader OIot'k and '111reader Pin at the Cnrtridgt' , :1tch A~<:cmhly
Ex:unple of Operation Stoprcd \Vith Tape on thc Machine Red
leader Block and Thrcader Pin in the I\.bchine Reel Huh ...
Procedure A: ()ri\'es Without Automatic Cartridge' .o:lder
Procedure B: Dri\'cs With "utnm:llic Cartridge loader
T.eader Block and 111re:tder Pin SI<'pred in thc Tape rath ..
I'roc~dllrc A: Dri\'cs Without. Al.ltom:ttic Cartridge T.(,:-Icler
Procedure B: Dri\"es With Automatic Cnrtridgc TO:lder
Te:tder Blnd< :lIld "Ihrc:ldcr Pin :It thc C:.rtridgc l:ttch A«cmhly
Procedure i\: Dri\"Cs Without !\utf'ln:ttic C:lrtridge If' Copynght IBM Corp. 1984, 1985, 1986

()

Set the drive power switch on the ac power circuit
breaker to On, see LaC 1.

If the latch bar opens and the cartridge has moved into
position for removal, remove it and continue the repair
action by selecting either a or b:
a.

3480 MI

1)

If the latch does not open, request aid from your next level
of support.

If the machine reel motor binds so that the file reel motor
cannot move the tape, place your finger on the machine reel

4.

If you were sent here by the MD:

Return to the MAP or procedure that sent you here.

m,

hub

r)

{)

CART 12

If the latch does not open, go to step 3,

Notes:

CAUTION
The motor and shaft may be hot.

1.

Cartridge Removal by Hand

()

f)

"

~'.)

"

CART 12

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

Cartridge Removal by Hand (Continued)

o

o

o

Cartridge Removal by Hand (Continued)

CART 13

IiIThreader
Arm
Pivot Point

ElLeader
Block

II Machine
Reel Hub
Receiver

I

~

Interlock
Cartridge
Latch
Assembly

DSocket
Wrench
Handle

Top View

Top View

Top View

Load Motor

Threader
Pin

IIiI Receiver And Interlock In
The Correct Position

BReciever

Cartridge Latch Assembly

Load Assembly (Drives With Automatic Cartridge Loader)

3480 MI

EC336396

~ Copy,ignt IBM Co'p. 1984, 1995, 1986 1987

Cartridge Removal by Hand (Continued)

CART 13

Cartridge Removal by Hand (Continued)
Leader Block and Threader Pin Stopped in the
Tape Path

Procedure A, Drives Without Automatic Cartridge
Loader

Procedure S, Drives With Automatic Cartridge
Loader

Perform the following steps to remove the cartridge by hand
when the leader block and threader pin have stopped in the tape
path between the machine reel hub and the cartridge latch
assembly.

1.

1.

Remove all cartridges from the input staCk, see LOC 1.

2.

Remove all cartridges from the output stack, see LOC 1.

3.

Set the mode selection switch to Manual, see LOC 1.

4.

Turn the knurled knob
on the load motor
counterclockwise (as viewed from the end of the motor) until
the latch Is fully raised.

5.

Place your finger on the cartridge at the point Indicated
and push toward the front of the machine until the cartridge
can be removed from the feed assembly.

6.

Continue the repair action by selecting the following, step a
or step b.

Nole:

See CART 15 for Ihe following locallons.

Press down on the latch assembly Bilto open the cartridge
latch.

2.

If the latch opens and the cartridge has moved into position
for removal, remove the cartridge and continue the repair
action by selecting either a or b:

a.

2.

11.

Find the file reel motor shaft
Attach the tape removal
tool
(part 6850663) to your socket wrench handle
From the bottom of the drive, slide the tape removal tool
through the slot in the air baffle and onto the file reel motor
shaft.

II

II.

II

Find the threader arm pivot point
above the threader
assembly. Move the threader arm clockwise and at the
same time turn the file reel motor shaft clockwise (as seen
from the top of the drive) to wind the tape into the cartridge.

3.

Continue winding the tape into the cartridge until the leader
block
is in the cartridge.

4.

The threader pin will move the receiver
block is in the cartridge.

5.

For drives with the automatic cartridge loader go to
procedure B.

6.

For drives without the automatic cartridge loader go to
procedure A.

II

3480 MI

EC336396

.1: COPVroQhl

IBM Corp 1934. 1985. 1986 1981

()

iii when the leader

(J

CART 14

Cartridge Removal by Hand

CART 14

If the latch does not open, go to step 3.

CAUTION
The molor and shall may be hoI.

1.

Cartridge Removal by Hand

b.
3.

m

If you were sent to this procedure by the MD:
1)

Set the Drive Power switch or the ac power circuit
breaker to On (see LOC 1).

2)

Install the front safety cover (see CARR-DR 2-2 or
2-4) if removed.

3)

Set the Online/Offline switch to Online.

4)

Return to the MD and press the ENTER key.

ID

a.

If you were sent here by the MD:

1)

Set the drive power switch on the ac power circuit
breaker to On, see LOC 1.

2)

Install the drive safety cover, see CARR-DR 2-2 or
2-4 if removed.

3)

Set the Online/Offline switch to Online.

4)

Return to the MD and press the Enter key.

Return to the MAP or procedure that sent you here.

Look at the top of the latch assembly and find the pivot
position
where the receiver
and the interlock
overlap. Move the pivot so the interlock rotates away from
the latch assembly, as shown

IJ

iii

m

II.

b.

Return to the MAP or procedure that sent you here.

*)
4

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

Cartridge Removal by Hand (Continued)

o

o

Cartridge Removal by Hand (Continued)

CART 15

II Leader
Block

Threader
Arm
Pivot Point

I

~

Receiver
Interlock
Cartridge
Latch
Assembly

DSocket
Wrench
Handle

Top View

Top View

Load Motor

Threader
Pin

Interlock a---_~

...

v.....c:

II The
Recei"er And Interlock In
Correct Position
Cartridge L.tch Assembly

iii Recie"er
D Pivot
position

Load Assembly (Drives With Automatic Cartridge Loader)

3480 MI

EC336396

Cartridge Removal by Hand (Continued)

(' Copy-ngn118M Corp 1984 '985 '~E ''l61

JL

__

CART 15

Cartridge Removal by Hand (Continued)
Leader Block and Threader Pin at The Cartridge
Latch Assembly

Procedure A, Drives Without Automatic Cartridge
Loader

Perform the fol/owlng steps to remove the cartridge by hand
when the leader block and threader pin are at the cartridge latch
assembly (home position), but the interlock has not rotated away
from the latch.

1.

Note:

Press down on the latch assembly
latch.

II to open the cartridge

If the latch does not open, request aid from your next level of
support.

2.

If the latch opens and the cartridge has moved Into position
for removal, remove the cartridge and continue the repair
action by selecting either a or b:

Look at the top of the latch assembly and find the pivot
where the receiver
and the interlock
position
overlap.

2.

Move the pivot so the interlock rotates away from the latch
assembly, as shown

1)

Set the Drive Power switch or the ac power circuit
breaker to On (see LOC 1).

For drives with the automatic cartridge loader go to
procedure B.

2)

Instal/ the front safety cover (see CARR-DR 2-2 or
2-4) If removed.

For drives without the automatic cartridge loader go to
procedure A.

3)

Set the Online/Offline switch to Online.

4)

Return to the MD and press the ENTER key.

II

D

II

a.

II.

4.

Cartridge Removal by Hand

CART 16

Procedure B, Drives With Automatic Cartridge
Loader
1.

Remove all cartridges from the input stack, see LOC 1.

2.

Remove aI/ cartridges from the output stack, see LOC 1.

3.

Set the mode selection switch to Manual, see LOC 1.

4.

Turn the knurled knob
on the load motor
counterclockwise (as viewed from the end of the motor) until
the latch Is fully raised.

If you were sent to this procedure by the MD:

5.

Place your finger on the cartridge at the paint Indicated
and push toward the front of the machine until the cartridge
can be removed from the feed assembly.

6.

Continue the repair action by selecting the following, step a
or step b.

0

fJ

a.

b.

Return to the MAP or procedure that sent you here.

b.

If you were sent here by the MD:

1)

Set the drive power switch on the ac power circuit
breaker to On, see LOC 1.

2)

Install the drive safety cover, see CARR-DR 2-2 or
2-4 if removed.

3)

Set the Online/Offline switch to Online.

4)

Return to the MD and press the Enter key.

Return to the MAP or procedure that sent you here.

3480 MI
EC336396
Cl CopyrighllBM Corp. 1984. 1985. 1986 1987

()

CART 16

See CART 17 for the following locations.

1.

3.

Cartridge Removal by Hand

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

u

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

Cartridge Removal by Hand (Continued)

o

o

Cartridge Removal by Hand

CART 17

Top View
Load Motor

II Knurled Knob
Threader
Pin

Interlock EI'---_~r,u.JC.

II Receiver And Interlock In

II Reciever

The Correct Position

Cartridge Latch Assembly

II Pivot
Position

Load Assembly (Drives With Automatic Cartridge Loader)

3480 MI
,I:;.

-

EC336396

COPYlight tUM Corp. tM4. 18115. llH1b !IHIT

Cartridge Removal by Hand

CART 17

Leader Block Replacement Procedure

Leader Block Replacement

Perform the following steps to replace the leader block when it
has separated from the magnetic tape.
Nole:

Remove the leader block

2.

Move the threader arm
clockwise until the threader pin
is at the cartridge and causes the receiver
to move.

3.

On drives with the automatic cartridge loaders go to CART
14 for the procedure to remove the cartridge by hand, and
when completed return to step 5.

See CART 20 and 21 for Ihe following locations.

Warning: This procedure should be used only when data must
be copied onto another cartridge. Use of this procedure may
affect the performance of the leader block during threading and
unloading. Recommend that the customer destroy the cartridge
after the data has been copied.
The use of any tool to remove the customer's tape may cause
damage to the tape. Inform the customer before continuing with
this procedure.
Do not damage the edges of the tape because edge damage can
affect tape guiding.

0

1.

from the threader pin.

fJ

II

9.

Place the tape so that the inside (the side faCing the center of
the cartridge) is up, In the guide groove
and over the
leader block. Move the end of the tape against the end of the
guide cavity.

11

m

11. Close the Insertion lever
On drives without the automatic cartridge loaders press
down on the latch assembly
to open the cartridge latch.

II

1m,

10. Close the insert guide as shown
and then place the
Insert pin
into the opening of the guide.

muntil it touches the insert pin.

17. Put the leader block in the cartridge.
18. Using the clutch tool carefully turn the tape reel to tighten
.
the tape inside the cartridge.

19. Remove the clutch tool.
20. Continue the repair action by selecting either a or b:
a.

12. Push on the handle of the Insertion lever to force the insert

Remove the cartridge.

5.

Use the clutch tool
to release the clutch in the cartridge.
Then turn the tool to unwind about 12 inches of tape from the
cartridge. Use care so as not to damage the tape.

13. Open the insertion lever and the Insert guide.

II

2)

14. Remove the leader block from the attachment tool.

of the leader block. If the edges are not aligned, go back to
step 7 and repeat the procedure.

Remove the clutch tool.

7.

Cut the tape end so that it is 90° to the tape edge.

16. Use the clutch tool to wind the tape back into the cartridge.
8.

Place a new leader block in the cavity
tool

m.

Set the Drive Power switch or the ac power circuit
breaker to On (see LOC 1).
Install the front safety cover (see CARR-DR 2-2 or
2-4) if removed.

15. Make sure that edges of the tape are aligned with the edges

6.

II you were sent here by the MD:
1)

pin and the tape Into the leader block.

4.

CART 20

b.

3)

Set the drive Online/Offline switch to Online.

4)

Return to the MD and press the ENTER key.

Return to the MAP or procedure that sent you here.

II of the attachment

EI Threader Arm

Interlock
Cartridge

Latch
Assembly

Top View

3480 MI

Leader Block Replacement

cC336396

CART 20

t~ Copyngnt IbM Corp 1984. 1985. 1986. 1987

()

o

o

()

o

o

o

{)

u

D

o

Q

o

o

o

o

Leader Block Replacement Procedure (Continued)

o

o

o

o
CART 21

Leader Block Replacement

II Clutch--_
Tool

Cartridge Latch Assembly

mlnsert
Pin

~m

Insertion
Lever

Insert Guide
(Open)

DGuide Groove

3480 MI

EC336395

II Copyright IBM Corp. 1984. 1985

Leader Block Replacement

CART 21

Magnetic Tape Attachment Procedure
Perform the following steps when the end of the magnetic tape
has pulled out of the cartridge and has wound onto the machine
reel.
Warning: This procedure should be used only when data must
be copied onto another cartridge. Use of this procedure may
affect the performance of the leader block during threading and
unloading. Recommend that the customer destroy the cartridge
after the data has been copied.

Magnetic Tape Attachment
1.

CAUTION
The motor and shaft may be hot.

Pull the tape by hand along the tape path until it is at the
opening to the cartridge.
Note: If the machine reel motor binds and does not allow
the tape to move, place your finger on the machine reel hub
as shown. Move the hub counterclockwise, and at the
same time move the magnetic tape.

D
2.

The use of any tool to remove the customer's tape may cause
damage to the tape. Inform the customer before continuing
with this procedure.

Attach a 5 centimeter (2-inch) piece of double-stick
cellophane tape to the shiny side of the magnetic tape.
Leave a 2.5 centimeter (1-inch) overlap of cellophane tape.

Find the file reel motor shaft
Attach the tape removal
(part 6850663) to your socket wrench handle
tool

5.

From the bottom of the drive, slide the tape removal tool
through the slot in the air baffle and onto the file reel motor
shaft.

Attach the protruding end of the cellophane tape to the
eraser end of a pencil or similar object.
6.

Do not damage the edges of the tape because edge damage can
affect tape guiding.

Note:
Make sure the cartridge is in the latched
position.

3.

Insert the pencil and the tape with the cellophane tape into
the cartridge opening and attach the cellophane tape to the
cartridge hub
Remove the pencil without disturbing the
cellophane tape that is attached to the hub.

D.

4.

EI

III .

Turn the tool clockwise (as seen from the top of the drive)
to wind the magnetic tape onto the cartridge. Make at least
one complete revolution of the hub.

8.

Set the Drive Power switch or the ac power circuit breaker
to On (see LOC 1).

9.

Install the front safety cover (see CARR-DR 2-2 or 2-4) if
removed.

10. Press the Unload switch to fully wind the tape into the
cartridge. If the tape does not fully wind into the cartridge,
request aid from your next level of support.
11. Remove the cartridge from the drive.
12. Continue the repair action by selecting either a or b:
a.

Note:
If the cellophane tape pulls off the hub,
attach the cellophane tape again.

EJ.

b.

7.

CART 30

If you were sent here by the MD:
1)

Set the drive Online/Offline switch to Online.

2)

Return to the MD and press the ENTER key.

Return to the MAP or procedure that sent you here.

Rotate the machine reel hub counterclockwise, and at the
same time rotate the file reel motor shaft clockwise to make
it easier to wind the tape onto the cartridge hub.

D Machine

Reel Hub

I

I

K.

J~

\0',9

iii Tape Removal
Tool

!11~1'\' III
I,

.

Top View

3480 MI

~

Socket
Wrench
Handle

Magnetic Tape Attachment

EC336395

~ Copyr'gh. IBM Corp. '994, '995

{)

{)

fl

[}

a

CART 30

proceduOo Determine if

Q Cartridge CaJ)d the Failure 0

This page contains the steps needed to determine if the drive
failure is caused by a cartridge. You should have been directed
here from the MD. Follow the procedure on this page for the
CHK code you have. At the end of the procedure return to the
rJlD and be prepared to answer the question "Was the Failure
due to a cartridge?"

CHK 14 occurs when the drive times out while trying to remove
lape slack (loose wraps) at the beginning of the load operation,
before the thread operation starts. The file reel motor is slowly
turned backwards until it is stopped by the tape which is attached
to the leader block.
CHK 14 can be caused by a cartridge if:

•

CAOr40

Chart A

CHK 25 occurs when the drive threading mechanism is slow or
stalled during an unload operation or the leader block is not
attached during a load retry.

CHK 2B occurs when the drive times o"t while trying to remove
tape slack after tape tension is lost. Tension is lost as a result of
a power failure or a device hard error condition. The file reel
motor is slowly turned backwards until two machine reel
revolutions have been detected. An unload operation is
performed automatically.

Press the Unload bullon and remove the cartridge from the drive.

If the leader block is loose, the threader pin doesn't catch the
leader block when the load operation starts. When the drive tries
to recover. it cannot return to the home position because lhe
leader block is in the way.

1. Load a cartridge, different from the cartridge lhat caused the
original failure on the drive.
Does CHK 25 appear on the drive display?

CHK 2B can be caused by the cartridge if:
•

The leader block is not attached to the tape

•

The cartridge clutch is sticking

•

The tape breaks or is damaged

•

Some foreigh object is between the file reel and the
cartridge.

Because the problem occures on more than one cartridqe, the
problem is not caused by a cartridge.
Return to the MD

Chart B
Remove the cartridge from this drive and load that cartridge on
several different drives.
Does that cartridge fail on other drives?
YES 1-l0

The tape is not attached to the leader block.

YES

Go to Chart A.

NO

Go to Chart B.

1. Load a cartridge.

Note: Do not use the cartridge that caused the original
failure on the drive.

1. Load a cartridge, different from the cartridge that caused the
original failure on the drive.

Does CHK 2B appear on the drive display?

CHK28

Does CHK 14 appear on the drive display?

NO

Qrtridge Failure Armination

CHK2B

There are excessive loose wraps in the cartridge

YES

o

CHK 25

CHK 25 can be caused by a cartridge if the leader block is loose
when the cartridge is loaded.

CHK14

•

o

o

Go to Chart A.

CHK 28 occurs when the tape is not attached to the threader pin,
or the file reel motor turns backwards during the threading
operation.

Go to Chart B.

YES

Go to Chart A.

NO

Go to Chart B.

I

The problem is IIOT caused by the cartridge.
Return to the !1O.
The problem is caused hy the cartridge.
Oi sconnect the 110 and go to START 145.

CHK 28 can be caused by a cartridge if, during a threading
operation:

CHK21
CHK 21 occurs when the drive threading mechanism is slow or
stalled. This can occur at the time the leader block is being put
into the slot in the machine reel.

•

The leader block falls off the threader pin

•

The tape breaks or is damaged.

1. Load a cartridge. different from the cartridge that caused the
original failure on the drive.

CHK 21 can be caused by a cartridge if:
tap~

•

The leader block is not attached to the

r.oIT('ctly

•

The leader block is damaged (burrs or milrk,,)

•

The cartridge clutch is sticking.

Does CHK 28 appear on the drive display?

YES

Go to Chart A.

NO

Go to Chart B.

1. Load a cartridge, different from the cartridge that caused the
original failure on the drive.
Does CHK 21 appear on the drive display?

YES

Go to Chart A.

NO

Go to Chart B.

3480 MI EC A57723
'" Copyright rSM Corp. 1982,

IBM Con rid"ntial

1~89

,·Z

xu

Cartridge Failure Determination

CART 40

()

()

o

()

()

()

l)

o

o

()

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

Procedure to Determine if the Cartridge Caused the Failure
This page contains the steps needed to determine il the drive
lailure is caused by a cartridge. You should have been directed
here Irom the MD. Follow the procedure on this page lor the
CHK code you have. At the end 01 the procedure return to the
MD and be prepared to answer the question "Was the Failure
due to a cartridge?"

CHK 14 can be caused by a cartridge il:

Cartridge Failure Determination

o
CART 40

CHK 21

CHK 25

CHK28

CHK 21 occurs when the drive threading mechanism is slow or
stallGd. This can occur at the time the leader block Is being put
into the slot in the machine reel.

CHK 25 occurs when the drive threading mechanism Is slow or
stalled during an unload operation or the leader block is not
attached during a load retry.

CHK 28 occurs when the tape is not attached to the threader pin,
or the file reel motor turns backwards during the threading
operation.

CHK 21 can be caused by a cartridge il:

CHK 25 can be caused by a cartridge il the leader block is loose
when the cartridge is loaded.

CHK 28 can be caused by a cartridge if, during a threading
operation:

If the leader block is loose, the threader pin doesn't catch the
leader block when the load operation starts. When the drive tries
to recover, it cannot return to the home position because the
leader block is in the way.

•

The leader block falls off the threader pin

•

The tape breaks or is damaged.

1.

Load a cartridge, different from the cartridge that caused the
original failure on the drive.

CHK14
CHK 14 occurs when the drive limes out while trying to remove
tape slack (loo!'6 wraps) at the beginning 01 the load operation,
belore the thread operation starts. The Iile reel motor is slowly
turned backwards until it is stopped by the tape which is attached
to the leader block.

o

•

The leader block is not attached to the tape correctly

•

The leader block is damaged (burrs or marks)

•

The cartridge clutch is sticking.

1.

Load a cartridge, different Irom the cartridge that caused the
original failure on the drive.

1.

Load a cartridge, different from the cartridge that caused the
original failure on the drive.

Does CHK 28 appear on the drive display?
•

There are excessive loose wraps in the cartridge

•

The tape is not attached to the leader block.

1.

Load a cartridge, different Irom the cartridge that caused the
originallailure on the drive.
Does CHK 14 appear on the drive display?

Does CHK 21 appear on the drive display?

I

Remove the cartridge from this drive and load
that cartridge on several different drives.
Does that cartridge fail on other drives?
YES NO

YES NO

YES NO

YES NO

I
Remove

I
Remove

Does that cartridge fail on other drives?

Does that cartridge fail on other drives?

YES NO

YES NO

the cartridge from this drive and load
that cartridge on several different drives.

I
The

YES NO

Does CHK 25 appear on the drive display?

the cartridge from this drive and load
that cartridge on several different drives.

I

problem is NOT caused by the cartridge.

Return to the MD.

Does that cartridge fail on other drives?
YES NO

I

The problem is NOT caused by the cartridge.

The problem is NOT caused by the cartridge.
Return to the MD.

Return to the MD.
The problem is caused by the cartridge.

The problem is caused by the cartridge.

The problem is caused by the cartridge.

Disconnect the MD and go to START 145.

Disconnect the MD and go to START 145.

Disconnect the MD and go to START 145.

I

Press the Unload button and remove the
cartridge from the drive.

Press the Unload button and remove the
cartridge from the drive.

Return to the MD.
The problem is caused by the cartridge.

Because the problem occurs on more than one
cartridge, the problem is NOT caused by a
cartridge.

Because the problem occurs on more than one
cartridge, the problem is NOT caused by a
cartridge.

Disconnect the MD and go to START 145.

Return to the MD.

Return to the MD.

The problem is NOT caused by the cartridge.

I

Remove the cartridge from this drive and load
that cartridge on several different drives.

Press the Unload button and remove the
cartridge from the drive.
Because the problem occurs on more than one
cartridge, the problem is NOT caused by a
cartridge.
Return to the MD.

Press the Unload button and remove the
cartridge from the drive.
Because the problem occurs on more than one
cartridge, the problem is NOT caused by a
cartridge.
Return to the MD.

3480 MI

Cartridge Failure Determination

EC336396

 with associated sense dat::i indicating
ERPA code 47, Volume Fenced, far al: commands
that arc eligible to recei"'e the deferred uni: check
until the condition is reset or until the cartridge is
unloadcd. The condition that cau5ed the fenCL'1g to
occur has already been indicated by the pre ...ious
unit check and aS50ciatec sense data.

Buffered Write Operations
During buffered write operatiom, sense hyie 2 bit 7
is not set. The block 10 identifies the area on tape
where the data block or ftle mark should have been
written. \Vhen the control unit determines that the
data cannot be \.\oTitten on the tape, the controlling
computer performs a Read Buffer command to
retrieve the buffered data. After the cartridge is
moved as a dynamic device reconfiguration (OOR)
action, the controlling computer issues a Read
Block 10 command using the block 10 as the argument to move the tape to the correct position to
perform the reissued write channel command.

3480 MI EC C13783

Error Description List

MSG 23

CCopyrighIIBJ.ACorp.1984.1991

·1

t)
~,

() ()

()

{\

)
.

f)
\

(

.~

.)"

I)

()

{)

~)

{)

()

{)

:)

,

J

tJ

o

o

o

c

o

o

o

Error Description List (Continued)
System Recovery Action for Channel Control Check or
Interface Control Check.
When a channel control check or an interface control check occurs, the system program
determines if the error should be retried. If it can be retried, the program determines
where, during the operation, the error occurred.

Errors That Cannot Be Retried.
Some errors cannot be retried because of the command or other conditions at the time
of the error. Some of the reasons that errors cannot be retried are:
•

The error has already been retried once.

•

Intercept is on (this error is caused by a previous I/O error).

o

o

Error Description list (Continued)
Errors That Can Be Retried
Errors that can be retried are treated differently, depending on the command. The
commands and the conditions examined for a retry are listed below:
For Read. Write. ERG. WTM. Read Buffer. Locate Block. Read Buffered Log. or
any Space command.

When one of the above error conditions is found, the system program retries the failing
CCW one time.

System Recovery Action for Channel Data Checks or
Chaining Checks
If command chaining and data chaining is used, or the SIO condition code is 1:

These conditions are tested and may be retried.
•

Interface disconnect and command out sent.

•

Stop, stack, normal termination, and command out sent.

•

Selective reset and command out sent.

Indicate a permanent error.
Generate a permanent error message.
•

Log the EREP OBR record.

If Unit Check is not on and the command is a read, read backward, or write:

For Read Block 10. Sense. Sense I/O. Sense Path. Assign. Unassign.

Reposition the tape and retry the failing CCW.

The error is on a Halt I/O.

Control Access. Load Display, Mode-set, or Set Path

Read commands are retried six times.

•

Retry is not allowed (the no retry bit is on).

(Data transfer commands with no tape motion):

Write commands are retried eleven times.

•

The SIO and interrupt bits are both on.

These conditions are tested and may be retried.

The SIO and interrupt bits are both off.

•

Interface disconnect and command out sent.

Reposition the tape and retry the failing CCW.

The SIO bit is on and unit status is invalid.

•

Interface disconnect and no data transfer.

Read commands are retried six times

The SIO bit is on and the command address is invalid.

•

Interface disconnect and some data transferred.

•

The SIO bit is on and the channel address is invalid.

Stop, stack, normal termination and command out sent.

If Unit Check is on and the command is not a read or write:

Both command and data chaining are used.

Stop, stack, normal termination and no data transfer.

The error is on a Test I/O.

•

•

CSW unit check and sense byte 3 are not equal to one of the following:

•

Stop, stack, normal termination and some data transferred.
Selective reset and command out sent.

26,2A, 2B,32, 33,34, 3A,41,42,or43.

Selective reset and no data transferred.

(Definition of sense byte 3 can be found on page SENSE 15.)
When the error cannot be retried, the system program performs the following actions:

•

1.

System pointers are reset.

For Rewind. RUN. Synchronize. DSE. Suspend. NOP. Old MOde-sets. LWR. and
TIE (Non-data-transfer commands):

2.

A permanent error is posted.

3.

A permanent error message is generated.

4.

If the error is an intercepted error, change the error code from X'7E' to X'44'.

MSG 30

If Unit Check is on and Bus Out Check (ERPA = 49) is on:

Write commands are retried eleven times.

Retry the failing CCW once.

System Recovery Action for Channel Protection Checks or
Channel Program Checks.
Indicate a permanent error 41 unless the ERPA is 4A, then indicate a permanent
error 4B.

Selective reset and some data transferred.
Generate a permanent error message.
Log the EREP OBR record.

These conditions are tested and may be retried.
•

Interface disconnect and command out sent.

•

Interface disconnect and no data transfer.
Stop, stack, normal termination, and command out sent.

3480 MI
(!)

EC336395

Copyroght IBM Corp. 1984. 1985

•

Stop, stack, normal termination, and no data transferred.

•

Selective reset and command out sent.

•

Selective reset and no data transferred.

Error Description list (Continued)

MSG 30

Environmental Recording Editing and Printing Program

Environmental Recording Editing and Printing Program
Forced Error Logging/Permanent Error
Summary Report

Tape Report Description

Subsystem Exception Report

The following section describes the format and content of the
3480 tape reports produced by release 2.2 of EREP. All 3480
tape subsystem reports should be run daily. Use of data more
than three days old may result in improper diagnosis of errors
and exception codes. Shared device control cards are required
for 3480 tape systems operating on multiple CPUs. See the
following manuals for more information on the use of EREP:

The purpose of this report is to determine whether the 3480
tape subsystem has permanent errors and if the subsystem is
operating within limits that are acceptable to the user. The user
specifies "limit" controls for both the hardware and the tape
volumes, which prevent temporary errors from being printed if
they are within the specified limit. If corrective action is to be
taken, failure details will be found in the various types of reports
in this section.

•

•

OS/VS REL2 SYS1.LOGREC Error Recording Manual,
GC28-0638

When no limits are specified, only permanent errors will appear
on the exception report. Exceptions are ranked by severity and
error rate, based on accumulated statistics.

OS/VS 1 REL3 SYS 1.LOGREC Error Recording Manual,
GC28-0668

All the errors will be listed by the Channel Unit Address (CUA)
for hardware errors and the Volume Identifier (VOLlD) for volume
errors.

•

OS/VS1 REL3 SYS1.LOGREC Error Recording Logic,
SY28-0669

•

OS/VS Environmental Recording Editing and Printing (EREP)
Program, GC28-0772

•

OS/VS Environmental Recording Editing and Printing (EREP)
Program Logic (SU 1), SY28-0773

•

OS/VS Independent component: Environmental Recording
Editing and Printing (EREP) Program system information (SU
1), GC38-1045
OS/VS, DOS/VSE, VM/370 Environmental Recording
Editing and Printing (EREP) Program, GC28-0772

•

The errors will be listed by the Channel Unit Address (CUA)
unless the errors occur on the same volume identifier (VOLlD) on
at least two different drive addresses, and in that case, the
errors will be listed by volume identifier (VOLlD).
For example, write errors on drives 280 and 380 would be
listed separately under hardware for address 280 and 380 or
write errors for volume identifier SSBOO 1, occurring on drives
280 and 281 would be listed separately under volume by VOLID
SSB001.
For an example of the 3480 Subsystem Exception Report Tape,
and a listing of field definitions, see MSG 200.

Environmental Record Editing and Printing Program (EREP)
User's Guide and Reference, GA28-1378

Refer to MSG 105 for limit setting procedures.

The Forced Error Logging report is generated whenever an
intermittent error occurs and the MD sets the Forced Error
Logging bit.
The Permanent Error Summary contains all permanent errors
that have occurred.
Both reports list the errors by Channel Unit Address (CUA) for
hardware errors and by Volume Identifier (VOLlD) for volume
errors.

Volume Statistics Report
All activity is shown for each volume that is listed as an
exception on the Tape Subsystem Exception Report. This
includes volumes that have permanent errors or have exceeded
the volume temporary error limits. If a volume does not exceed
the limits for the Tape Subsystem Exception Report, its statistics
are not listed. Entries are grouped by VOLID and are listed in
chronological order.
For an example of the 3480 Volume Statistics Report, and a
listing of field definitions, see MSG 215.

Error Code Summary Report
The errors will be listed by the Channel Unit Address (CUA)
unless the errors occur on the same volume identifier (VOLlD) on
at least two different drive addresses, and in that case, the
errors will be listed by volume identifier (VOLlD).
For example, write errors on drives 280 and 380 would be
listed separately under hardware for address 280 and 380 or
write errors for volume identifier SSBOO 1, occurring on drives
280 and 281 would be listed separately under volume by VOLID
SSB001.
For an example of the 3480 Forced Error Logging/Permanent
Error Summary, and a listing of field definitions, see MSG 205.

3480 Temporary Error Summary Report
All temporary error statistics are shown. Limit controls do not
affect this report. All temporary errors are listed by Channel Unit
Address (CUA).
For an example of the 3480 Temporary Error Summary, and a
listing of field definitions, see MSG 210.

All of the following reports except those listed as "Other Useful
Reports" on this page are generated by inserting SYSEXN in the
JCL selection parameters for EREP (see the referenced manuals
for detailed information).

MSG 100

The error code summary report will provide a summary of all
error codes logged, and will be listed by CUA.
For an example of the 3480 Error Code Summary Report, and a
listing of field definitions, see MSG 225.

Other Useful Reports
The following are other useful EREP reports. Details and
examples of these reports are found in the "Environmental
Record and Editing and Printing Program (EREP) Users's Guide
and Reference, GA28-1378."

OBR Edit Report
The OBR Edit Report is generated by inserting PRINT=PS in the
JCL selection parameters for EREP (see the reference manual for
detailed information).
The Outboard Record (OBR) Edit Report will be a detailed report
of each OBR record logged against a control unit address (CUA).
For an example of the 3480 OBR Edit Report, and a listing of
field definitions, see MSG 230.

Event History Report
The Event History Report is generated by inserting EVENT in the
JCL selection parameters for EREP (see the reference manual for
detailed information).
The Event History Report provides a chronological list of all
select activity and units on the host system.

Trends Report
The Trends Report is generated by inserting TRENDS in the JCL
selection parameters for EREP (see the reference manual for
detailed information).
The Trends Report provides a chronological list of all error data
in Julian date for all selected units on the host system.

3480 MI

Environmental Recording Editing and Printing Program

EC336395

It CopYright IBM Corp. 1984. 1985

o

o

o

o

()

o

o

o

o

MSG 100

EnvirorOntal RecordingQliting and printQ Program

The following section describes the format and content of the
3480 tape reports produced by release 2.2 of EREP. All 3480 tape
subsystem reports should be run daily. Use of data more than
three days old may result in improper diagnosis of errors and
exception codes. Shared device control cards are required for
3480 tape systems operating on multiple CPUs. See the following
manuals for more information on the use of EREP:

•
•

o

o

at least two different drive addresses, and in that case, the errors
will be listed by volume identifier (VaLID).

Tape Report Description

•

o

OS/VS REL2 SYS1.LOGREC Error Recording Manual,
GC28-0638
OS/VS1 REL3 SYS1.LOGREC Error Recording Manual,
GC28-0668
OSIVS1 REL3 SYS1.LOGREC Error Recording Logic,
SY28-0669

•

OS/VS Environmental Recording Editing and Printing (EREP)
Program, GC28-0772

•

OS/VS Environmental Recording Editing and Printing (EREP)
Program Logic (SU 1), SY28-0773

•

OSIVS Independent component: Environmental Recording
Editing and Printing (EREP) Program system information (SU
1), GC38-1045

•

OS/VS, DOS/VSE, VMI370 Environmental Recording Editing
and Printing (EREP) Program, GC28-0772

•

Environmental Record Editing and Printing Program (EREP)
User's Guide and Reference, GA28-1378

All of the following reports except those listed as "Other Useful
Reports" on this page are generated by inserting SYSEXN in the
JCL selection parameters for EREP (see the referenced manuals
for detailed information).

Subsystem Exception Report

For example, write errors on drives 280 and 380 would be listed
separately under hardware for address 280 and 380 or write
errors for volume identifier SSB001, occurring on drives 280 and
281 would be listed separately under volume by VaLID S58001.
For an example of the 3480 Subsystem Exception Report Tape,
and a listing of field definitions, see MSG 200.

When no limits are specified, only permanent errors will appear
on the exception report Exceptions are ranked by severity and
error rate, based on accumulated statistics.

~100

Volume Statistics Report

Trends Report

All activity is shown for each volume that is listed as an
exception on the Tape Subsystem Exception Report This
includes volumes that have permanent errors or have exceeded
the volume temporary error limits. If a volume does not exceed
the limits for the Tape Subsystem Exception Report, its statistics
are not listed. Entries are grouped by VaLID and are listed in
chronological order.

The Trends Report is generated by inserting TRENDS in Ule JCL
selection parameters for EREP (see the reference manual for
detailed information).

Refer to MSG 105 for limit setting procedures.

For an example of the 3480 Volume Statistics Report, and a
listing of field definitions, see MSG 215.

Forced Error Logging/Permanent Error Summary
Report

Error Code Summary Report

The Trends Report provides a chronologica: Ii <;t of all error data
in Julian date for all selected units on the host system.

The error code summary report will provide a summary of all
error codes logged, and will be listed by CUA.

The Forced Error Logging report is generated whenever an
intermittent error occurs and the MD sets the Forced Error
Loggi ng bi t.

For an example of the 3480 Error Code Summary Report, and a
listing of field definitions, see MSG 226.

The Permanent Error Summary contains all permanent errors
that have occurred.

Other Useful Reports
Both reports list the errors by Channel Unit Address (CUA) for
hardware errors and by Volume Identifier (VaLID) for volume
errors.

The following are other useful EREP reports. Details and
examples of these reports are found in the "Environmental
Record and Editing and Printing Program (EREP) Users's Guide
and Reference, GA28-1378."

The errors will be listed by the Channel Unit Address (CUA)
unless the errors occur on the same volume identifier (VaLID) on
at least two different drive addresses, and in that case, the errors
will be listed by volume identifier (VaLID).

OBR Edit Report

For example, write errors on drives 280 and 380 would be listed
separately under hardware for address 280 and 380 or write
errors for volume identifier 5SB001, occurring on drives 280 and
281 would be listed separately under volume by VaLID SSBOO1.

The OBR Edit Report is generated by inserting PRINT- PS in the
JCL selection parameters for EREP (see the reference ".anual for
detailed information).
The Outboard Record (OBR) Edit Report will be a detailed report
of each OBR record logged against a control unit address (CUA).

For an example of the 3480 Forced Error Logging/Permanent
Error Summary, and a listing of field definitions, see MSG 205.

The purpose of this report is to determine whether the 3480 tape
subsystem has permanent errors and if the subsystem is
operating within limits that are acceptable to the user. The user
specifies "limit" controls for both the hardware and the tape
volumes, which prevent temporary errors from being printed if
they are within the specified limit. If corrective action is to be
taken, failure details will be found in the various types of reports
in this section.

Oironmental RecoQ,g Editing and p.Qng Program

For an example of the 3480 OBR Edit Report, and a listing of field
definitions, see MSG 230.

3480 Temporary Error Summary Report

Event History Report

All temporary error statistics are shown. Limit controls do not
affect this report. All temporary !"rrors are listed by Channel Unit
Address (CUA).

The Event History Report is generated by insel ting EVENT in the
JCL selection p~rameters for EREP (see the reference manual for
detailed information).

For an example of the 3480 Temporary Error Summary, and a
listing offield definitions, see MSG 210 thru 213.

The Event History Report provides a chronological list of all
select activity and units on the host system.

All the errors will be listed by the Channel Unit Address (CUA)
for hardw~re errors and the Volume Identifier (VaLID) for volume
errors.
The errors will be listed by the Channel Unit Address (CUA)
unless the errors occur on the same volume identifier (VaLID) on

3480 MI EC A57723

Environmental Recording Editing and Printing Program

IBM Confidential

iP Copyr;gh! IBM Carp_ 1982,1989

,.{

4 _"

, .z_.

W

$

MSG 100

()

o

o

f)

o

o

o

o

o

,

0

o

o

c

o

o

o

o

Limit Controls
Limit controls are used to specify the point when temporary
errors begin to be reported on the Subsystem Exception Report
(see MSG 200). Limit controls are limits set on the megabytes
per error rate and the count of errors for the following errors:
•
•
•
•

Temporary
Temporary
Temporary
Temporary

hardware write
hardware read
volume write
volume read.

If the limit controls are set, temporary errors are not reported on
the Subsystem Exception Report until the following conditions
specified by the limit controls are met:
•

The temporary error megabytes processed per error rate is
less than the specified megabytes per error limit.

•

The number of errors that occur are more than the number
specified by the count limit.

•
•

Setting the Limit Controls
Limit controls are set by limit control cards. There are two limit
control cards; one is used to set the temporary hardware write
and read limits and the other to set the temporary volume write
and read limits. The limit control can be either punched card or
terminal input. The following is a description of the keyword
parameters for the 3480 limit control cards. For detailed
procedures on limit control cards see os/vs, DOS/VSE,
VM/370 Environmental Recording Editing and Printing (EREP)
Program, GC28-1178.
•

LIMIT 3480,HW3480=XXX(CTI.HR3480=XXX(CT)

•

LIMIT 3480,VW3480=XXX(CTI.VR3480=XXX(CT).

Determining the Limits

•

HW3480=XXX(CT) = Hardware Write Limit

The limits are determined by you and the customer through
analysis of the Temporary Error Summary Report to:

•

HR3480=XXX(CT) = Hardware Read Limit

•

VW3480=XXX(CT) = Volume Write Limit

•

VR3480=XXX(CT) = Volume Read Limit.

If the limit controls are not set, no temporary errors are reported
on the Subsystem Exception Report.

•

establish an acceptable temporary error rate for normal
account operation

Definition of XXX and CT

and
•

indicate when corrective action is needed.

•

XXX is a decimal value from 1 to 999 that defines the limit
for the number of megabytes per error.

•

Count Limit (CT) is a decimal value from 1 to 99 that
defines the limit for the number of times an error needs to
occur (with the exception of the "Volume or Creating Drive
Permanent Read or Write Errors on More Than One Drive"
which defaults to one).

Use the following procedure to determine the limits:
1.

As a starting point, set the limits as follows:
•
•
•
•

2.

HW3480=500 (5) = Hardware Write Limit
HR3480=999 (1) = Hardware Read Limit
VW3480=040 (3) = Volume Write Limit
VR3480=200 (1) = Volume Read Limit.

Allow the subsystem to operate for 30 days with the limits
as set in step 1. After the 30 days have passed, review the
limit requirements for the account. If adjustments are
needed, follow these steps:
a.

b.

Analyze the Temporary Error Summary Report to
identify the actual account error conditions. Use the
actual account error conditions to establish limits that
are acceptable to the customer for normal account
operation in the next step.
Determine the number of megabytes per error and the
number of times that the error can occur before the
error is reported on the Subsystem Exception Report for
the following errors:

•

XXX and CT define the temporary error limits. If the
number of megabytes processed per error is less than the
number of megabytes specified by XXX and the number of
times the error occurs is more than the number specified by
CT the error will be reported on the Subsystem Exception
Report.

o

o

Limit Controls

MSG 105

Limit Controls

MSG 105

If temporary read errors were occurring at a rate of 50
megabytes per error and 15 errors occurred, the errors
would be reported on the Subsystem Exception Report,

Temporary volume write
Temporary volume read.

After you have determined the limits for normal account
operation it may be necessary to adjust the limits by a variable
factor (such as 10%) to meet the needs of the account.

o

•

If temporary read errors were occurring at a rate of 50
megabytes per error and 4 errors occurred, the errors would
not be reported on the Subsystem Exception Report.

•

If temporary read errors were occurring at a rate of 100
megabytes per error and 10 errors occurred, the errors
would not be reported on the Subsystem Exception Report.

If only a hardware read (HR) limit is specified, the volume read
(VR) limit will default to the values used for the hardware read
(HR) limit.
For example: Assume that the following limits were specified for
a 3480. Note that the volume read (VR) limit is not specified.
•

LIMIT 3480,HW3480=003(15),HR3480=00 1(02)

•

LIMIT 3480,VW3480-003(15).

In this example, the unspecified volume read (VR) limit would
default to the hardware read (HR) limit of 001(02).
If only a hardware write (HW) limit is specified, the volume write
(VW) limit will default to the values used for the hardware write
(HW) limit.
If only a volume read (VR) limit is specified, the hardware read
(HR) limit will default to the values used for the volume read
(VR) limit.
For example: Assume that the following limits were specified for
a 3480. Note that the hardware read (HR) limit is not specified.
•

LIMIT 3480,HW3480=005( 15)

•

LIMIT 3480, VW3480=00 1 (02)VR3480=OO3( 15).

In this example, the unspecified hardware read (HR) limit would
default to the volume read (VR) limit of 003( 15).
If only a volume wrote (VW) limit is specified, the hardware write
(HW) limit will default to the values used for the volume write
(VW)limit.

For example:
If you wanted the Subsystem Exception Report to report
hardware temporary read errors only when the megabytes read
per error are less than 75 megabytes per error and only when
the errors pccur at least five times, the hardware read limit
control card would be set as follows:
HR3480=075(5) where XXX=075 and CT=5
With this setting for a given reporting period:

•
•

3480 MI

Temporary hardware write
Temporary hardware read

EC336395

II CopyrigilllBM Corp. 19B4, 19B5, 19B6

Subsystem Exception Report

Subsystem Exception Report
The purpose of this report is to determine whether the 3480
tape subsystem has had permanent errors and if the subsystem
has been operating within limits that are acceptable to the user.
The user specifies "limit" controls for both the hardware and
the tape volumes. These limits prevent the printing of
temporary errors if the number of temporary errors detected is
within the specified limits. If corrective action is to be taken,
failure details can be found in the various reports in this section.

II REPORT

3480 EXCEPTION
TAPE

DATE
PERIOD FROM
TO

ElCURRENT LIMITS
MBYTES/ERR

TEMP WRT( cT)
999 5
40 3

HARDWARE
VOLUME

When no limits are specified, only permanent errors will appear
on the exception report. Exceptions are ranked by severity and
error rate, based on accumulated statistics.
All errors shown are for the period
105 for limit setting procedures.

II indicated.

II

Refer to MSG

EXCEPTION

II

VOLUME
SERIAL

II mB

DEVNO
EQU
/CUA CPU CHK

MSG 200

063 86
049 86
052 86

TEMP RD( cT)
999 1
200 1

m

iii

----MB/ERR PERM---- ----MB/ERR TEMP---READ(CT)
WRITE(CT) WRITE(CT)
READ(CT)

m

mm
BUS OVR

TOTAL - MBYTES
READ
WRITE

OUT RUN

m

HDR
SER

HARDWARE
PERMANENT ERROR
0
0

0
0

0
0

0

0

0

0

0

428

VOLUME OR CREATING DRIVE
PERMANENT READ OR WRITE ERRORS ON MORE THAN ONE DRIVE
1 5A5
F 1
L30570
0 0
1
3
L27530
5A2
E 0
0 0
1
5

0
0

0
0

0
0

0
39

5A3
5A7

E
E

1
0

0
0

HARDWARE
FAILED TEMPORARY READ OR WRITE LIMITS
0
5BC
E 0

1339 1
0 0

VOLUME OR CREATING DRIVE
FAILED TEMPORARY READ OR WRITE LI MITS ON MORE THAN ONE DRIVE
F 0
L70630
5A4
0 0
12
0
0 0
F 0
5B2
0 0
L72930
0
0 0 0
VOLUME
FAILED TEMPORARY READ OR WRITE L1MI TS
B42750
5BC
E 0
0 0
0
0 0 0
B07146
5A2
E 0
0 0
0
0 0 0
TOTAL NUMBER OF DRIVES FAILING LIMITS
PASSING LIMITS
IDCPU
E
F

3480 MI

004 (20%)
016 (80%)

m

0
0

0
0

0
0

0
0

3249
3985

0

0

428

0
0

0
0

0
0

0
0

3
5

00000
00000

0
1

0
0

0
0

0
39

o
o

00000
00000

0
0

0
0

0
73

73

0
73

TOTAL NUMBER OF VOLUMES USED
TOTAL NUMBER OF VOLUMES LISTED

o

823
6

MODEL SERIAL NUMBER
3081
210819
3081
010819

Subsystem Exception Report

EC336395

ID CopyrIght IBM Corp. 1984. 1985. 1986

o

1339
1160

()

o

o

()

o

o

o

o

MSG 200

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

Subsystem Exception Report (Continued)

Report Date. Period From. Period To

II

REPORT DATE is the Julian date the report ran.
PERIOD FROM is the Julian date of the earliest record.

The indicated volumes had an error rate equal to, or
exceeding, the specified volume limits as shown. Use
the Temporary Error Summary report and the Volume
Statistics report to get more details.

Current Limits. Mbytes / Err

B

CURRENT LIMITS and megabytes/error for both the
hardware and the volume are the limit values from the limit
control cards. See MSG 105 for more information on
setting limit controls.
Exception

EI

There are five exception categories:

Hardware Failed Temporary Read or Write Limits
All CUAs that had an error rate equal to, or exceeding,
the specified limits are shown (but are not identified by
a common volume identifier). Use the Temporary Error
Summary report and the Volume Statistics Summary
report to get more details.

•

Volume or Creating Drive Permanent Read or
Write Errors on More Than One Drive
The indicated volume had permanent errors on more
than one drive. The volume may have been written
(created) on one drive and had read errors detected on
another drive. Use the Permanent Error Summary
report and the Volume Statistics Summary report to .get
more details.

•

Volume or Creating Drive Failed Temporary Read
or Write Limits on More Than One Drive
The indicated volume had an error rate equal to or
exceeding the specified limit on more than one drive.
The volume may have been written (created) on one
drive and had read errors detected on another drive.
Use the Temporary Error Summary report and the
Volume Statistics Summary report to get more details.

3480 MI

EC336395

• CopYright IBM Corp. 1986

WRITE is the total number of megabytes written.

m

For example:
Header serial is 3892F.

III

CPU
identifies the host processor reporting the
exception, and is shown as a value of A thru H. The actual
CPU model and serial number are shown at the bottom of
the report

DJ.
Eau CHK D is the number of equipment checks that have
MB / ERR PERM

•

MSG 201

READ is the total number of megabytes read.

primary control unit address (PCUA). The message may
refer to a condition that occurred on an alternate CU path.
(See START 400 to determine the actual path.)

Hardware Permanent Error
All CUAs with a tape permanent error are listed, or
there are read/write errors on more than one drive not
identified by a common volume identifier. Details of the
permanent errors are found on the Tape Permanent
Error Summary report. When the CUA has an X as the
last digit, sense bytes 16-17 have indicated a control
unit failure.

o

m

HDR SER
is the header serial number on the tape
volume. The header number is derived from the last 4 digits
of the control unit serial number that wrote the volume, with
the drive address added to the last position.

occurred.
•

Total-MBYTES

II is the volume serial number.
DEVNO / CUA B is the device number in XA mode or the
Volume Serial

PERIOD TO is the Julian date of the latest record.

o

Subsystem Exception Report (Continued)
Volume Failed Temporary Read or Write Limits

Field Definitions

o

I!J

READ is the average number of megabytes read per
permanent read error.
CT is the number of permanent read errors that have
occurred.
WRITE is the average number of megabytes written
per permanent write error.
CT is the number of permanent write errors that have
occurred.
MB/ERR TEMP

II

WRITE is the average number of megabytes written
per temporary write error.
CT is the number of temporary write errors that have
occurred.

The last 4 digits of control unit serial number are 3892.
Drive address is F.

DJ

CPU. MODEL. SERIAL NUMBER
further identifies the
CPU
listed in the error summary lines of the report.

III

TOTAL NUMBER OF DRIVES ON REPORT. NOT ON
REPORTm
DRIVES ON REPORT lists the number and the percentage of
drives that exceeded the limit controls for temporary errors,
and lists all drives that had permanent errors.
DRIVES NOT ON REPORT lists the number and the
percentage of drives that were within the limit controls for
temporary errors, and had no permanent errors.
TOT AL VOLUMES USED / LISTED

III

VOLUMES USED is the number of volumes used during the
report period that did not exceed the limit controls for
temporary errors and had no permanent errors.
LISTED is the number of volumes used during the report
period that exceeded the limit control values for temporary
errors and all volumes that had permanent errors.

READ is the average number megabytes read per
temporary read error.
CT is the number of temporary read errors that have
occurred.
BUS OUT
occurred.
OVR,RUN
occurred.

1m is the number of bus out checks that have

m

is the number of overruns that have

Subsystem Exception Report (Continued)

MSG 201

Forced Error Log / Permanent Error Summary Reports (EREP 3. 1. 1)
Both types of reports have the same format. The only difference
is the heading. one titled Permanent Error Summary. the other
Forced Error log.

Forced Error Log / Permanent Error Summary Reports

Forced Error Log/Permanent Error Summary
Example

All errors are listed by channel unit address (CUA) for hardware
errors and by volume identifier (VOLID) for suspected volume
errors.
The errors are listed by the channel unit address (CUA) unless
the errors occur on the same volume identifier (VOLID) on at
least two different drive addresses. and in that case. the errors
are listed by volume identifier (VOLID).
All errors are for the report period indicated

II.

1.

2.

II REPORT
PERIOD
**** HARDWARE ****

fJ II'~ II

The Forced En:or log report is generated only when the MD
has set the forced error logging bit. In this case temporary
errors. (FMT 19) are presented with sense data the same as
permanent errors (FMT 20).
Sense byte 7 on the Forced Error log report will be 19 to
indicate format 19 sense. Sense byte 7 on the Permanent
Error Summary report will be 20 to indicate format 20
sense.

m
TIME

CHP DEVNO P
-ID ICVA U DTE HHHMSS
22
06
22

Notes:

5A3
5A4
5A7

r.II

B

.a

mm ..

1

II!r.'II

R
SENSE BVTES--> 0
W
CCW SCSW64-95
VOllD ECHO FlG ICSW32-63

E 051 192213 B35790 E 01
F 051 214532
0 00
E 051 221637 TAPENO 0 02

DATE 063 86
FROM 049 86
TO
052 86

4

2

6

8

5A5
5A2
5B2

1

1

I

1

222

2

2

3

om21fJ4DJ6m8
-------CU---------ERRI ERR2 ERRl HW

01112.4
---DR---ERRI ERR2

6

8
CU
SER#

o

64 060079EO
00 26000000
44 06000050

1044 394A 0000 2C20 0000 7151 7607 CCBB D708 0002 0000 0000 F680 OCEI 0813 3319
4048 3934 0000 0020 730C 8E06 0000 0000 0000 0002 192C 0000 F680 OCEI 0813 4419
0049 402E 0000 0020 0000 7161 7161 7161 0000 0002 0000 0000 F680 OCEI 0813 7700

F 051 190322 l30570 W 01
E 051 203122 l27530 W 01
F 051 183221 l30570 W 01

64 OE007FF8
64 06002090
64 OE007FF8

OA44 7025 0007 3F20 0000 7404 7401 7407 0007 0002 0000 0000 F680 OCEI 0819 5519
OA44 3025 OOOC C620 0000 7401 7407 7401 0002 0002 0000 0000 F680 09El 0813 2219
OA44 7025 0007 3F20 0000 7405 7405 7407 0012 0002 0000 0000 F680 OCEI 0819 2219

64 OE002B63

4244 783B 0001 BF20 0000 8202 0000 0000 0000 0002 0000 0000 F680 OCEI 0819 3319

**** OPERATOR OR OPERATIONAL ****

CPU
E
F

5A3

E 051 205124 Mll047 0 01

MODEL
3081
3081

SERIAL NUMBER
210819
010819

3480 FORCED lOG REPORT
C
CHP DEVNO P
-10 ICUA U DTE

TIME

VOllD

R SENSE BVTES---> 0
W
CCW SCsw64-95
E CMD FLG ICSW32-63

2

4

6

I
lmllfJ1DJlml
o
2
468
--------CU--------FC-l FC-2 FC-L HWFC

21112.2
024
---DR---FC-l FC-2

2

6

2

8
CU
SER#

I

3
0

06

05B3 F 051 192536 B04012 0 01

64

00000000

0244 6048 OOOF 5619 0000 7401 7401 0000 0002 0002 0000 0000 F680 OCEI 1249 330E

06

05BB F 051 155433 TAPENO 0 03

20

00000000

4240 6048 0000 0019 6COO 8E06 0000 0000 0000 0302 0075 0075 F680 OCEI 1249 BBOO

1m
CPU
E
F

MODEL
3081
3081

SERIAL NUMBER
210819
010819

Forced Error Log/Permanent Error Summary Reports

EC336395

~ Copyright IBM Corp. 1984. 19B5. 1986

o

1

**** VOLUME OR CREATING DRIVE ****

06

3480 MI

()

M S G 205

o

f)

t)

o

{)

MSG 205

o

o

o

o

o

Forced Error Logging / Permanent Error Summary Reports (Continued) (EREP 3. 1. 1)

REPORT DATE. PERIOD FROM. PERIOD TO

II

REPORT DATE is the Julian date the report ran.
PERIOD FROM is the Julian date of the earliest record.
PERIOD TO is the Julian date of the latest record.

II is the channel path 10 (used in XA mode).

DEVNO I CUA Elis the device number in XA mode or the
Primary Control Unit Address (PCUA). The message may
refer to a condition that occurred on an alternate CU path.
(See START 400 to determine the actual path.)

II

identifies the host processor reporting the
CPU
exception and is shown as a value of A thru H. The actual
CPU model and serial number are shown at the bottom of
the report.

II is the Julian date from the OBR record.
TIME II is the time from the OBR record.
VOLID II is the volume serial number.
R/W IE/O II defines the type of check as read. write.
DTE

equipment OR other check.

III is the sense data from the OBR record.

For sense byte definitions see the SENSE section of the MI.

m

CU-ERR1
is the microcode-detected error code for the
first error (control unit or drive). from the OBR record (sense
bytes 10 and 11). This error code should not be used as an
entry to the maintenance package unless efforts using
CU-HW
and/or DR-ERR 1
have not corrected the
subsystem problem.

m

o

o

o

Forced Error Logging / Permanent Error Summary Reports

MSG 206

Forced Error Logging/Permanent Error Summary Reports

MSG 206

CU-ERRL
is the microcode-detected error code for the
last error (control unit or drivel. from the OBR record (sense
bytes 14 and 15). This error code can be a result of the
first error indicated in CU-HW
DR-ERR.!III.
CU-ERR 1
DR-ERR2
or CU-ERR2 ~

m.

m.

III.

III

CU-HW
is the control unit hardware-detected error
code from the OBR record (sense bytes 16 and 17). This
error code defines a control unit failure and should be used
to enter the Maintenance Package if you have multiple drive
failures.

III

DR-ERR1
is the drive hardware-detected error code.
from the OBR record (sense bytes 20 and 21). This error
code defines the first failure for any drive and should be
used to enter the maintenance package if you have single
drive failures.

III

DR-ERR2
is the drive hardware-detected error code.
from the OBR record (sense bytes 22 and 23). This error
code defines the second or last failure for any drive and
should not be used to enter the maintenance package if you
have single drive failures. This error information provides
supplemental information and may be a result of the first
failure (DR-ERR 1) in the drive.
CCW FLG

lEI is CCW bits 32 to 39 from the OBR.

SCSW ICSW

m

is:

SCSW64 - 95 (in XA Mode)

II

CMD
is the command code from the channel command
word (CCW) in the OBR record.
SENSE BYTES

o

lEI

Field Definitions

CHPID

o

III

CSW32 - 63
These are the SCSW or CSW bits from the OBR record.

1m

CPU. MODEL. SERIAL NUMBER
provides further
in the error summary lines
information on the CPU listed
of the report.

II

Note: More information on CSW and SCSW (used in
XA mode) can be found in IBM Extended Architecture
Principles of Operation. SA22-7085.

III

is the microcode-detected error code for .the
CU-ERR2
second error (control unit or drive). from the OBR record
(sense bytes 12 and 13). This error code can be a result of
the first error indicated in CU-HW
DR-ERR 1
or
CU-ERR1

m.

3480 MI

EC336395

C> Copyright IBM Corp. t9B6

m.

III.

Temporary Error Summary Report (EREP 3. 1. 1)

Temporary Error Summary Report

MSG 210

Temporary Error Summary Report

MSG 210

All temporary error statistics are shown. listed by CUA for the
period indicated
The Temporary Error Summary report is a
summary of all MDR records. Because limit controls can not be
established for this report. all temporary errors are listed.

II.

Temporary Error Summary Example

II
fJ
DEVNO
/CUA

5AO
5Al
5A2
5A3
5A1t
5A5
5A6
5A7
5BO
5Bl
5B2
5B3
5B4
5B5
5B8
5B9
5BA
5BB
5BC
5BD

DAY YR TO
049 86

DAY YR
052 86

II II D
DRIVE

CPU MOUNTS

10

08160
08151
08152
08153
08154
08155
08156
08157
12450
12451
12452
12453
12454
12455
12458
12459
1245A
1245B
1245C
1245D

TOTAL

E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E

--WR~E----- --R"D-----MB/ERR ERRCT MB/ERR ERRCT

101
94
118
151
94
109
106
127
23
35
29
25
18
17
21
25
19
15
12
16

1155

III

AVERAGE MEGABYTES/TEMPORARY
AVERAGE MEGABYTES/TEMPORARY
AVERAGE MEGABYTES/PERMANENT
AVERAGE MEGABYTES/PERMANENT
AVERAGE MEGABYTES/PERMANENT
TOTAL MEGABYTES PROCESSED
TOTAL MEGABYTES READ
TOTAL MEGABYTES WRITTEN

III

CPU
E
F

MODEL
3081
3081

3480 MI

866
2108
179
1516

383

0
0
1
1
12
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

7030

528

609

16

m
m 111
TOTAL BLOCKS 1m
READ WRITE
m
m
TOTAL MBYTES -PROCESSED- --READ------ --WRITE---- RECVY ERASE
READ

WRITE

0 2495
0 4070
1 7030
0 5563
0 6114
0 6492
0 1676
0 5697
42
0
0 2584
1 528
0
22
0 541
0
19
0
5
0 856
0
6
0
12
1 609
0 728

2328
1691
866
2108
2148
1516
1590
1970
142
195
55
383
481
8
553
185
4
256
13
83

3 45076

READ ERRORS
WRITE ERRORS =
READ ERRORS
WRITE ERRORS
ERROR

READ

530176
458240
653056
793088
802408
797440
190464
705792
5376
173070
95744
4864
48384
2048
3840
77568
768
1024
53760
65792

17076 5534K

WRITE HB/COR
300288
237824
94720
330752
243968
200448
283392
227072
13568
25600
4096
46848
26112
1024
18432
6144
0
23040
3328
6912
1899K

68
74
35
34
49
60
45
85
27
27
132
19
14
35
64
52

ECC MB/COR

ECC

ACTS

71
146
391
318
243
215
79
248
1
182
15
0
87
3
0
53
0
0
26
43

100
101
56
207
102
51
166
121
13
42
1
22
1
21
1
0
15
4
4

0
0
3
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

950

3

1843

62
49
33
20
41
59
20
56
10
4
44
82
80
8
66
185
0
42
3
41

17

GAPS

ID

BLOCKS/ERR
READ WRITE

0
0
0 315904
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0 37888
0

167168

23040

15025
1067

*

8538
15538
62152
45076
17076

SERIAL NUMBER
210819
010819

EC336395

Cl Copyright IBM Corp, 1986

()

()

o

o

~)

"-

r)

,

~)

!J

~)

...

o

o

o

o

Temporary Error Summary Report (Channel) (EREP 3.4)

o

o

o

o

o

Temporary Error Summary Report- Channel

.A.II temporary error statistics are. shown, listed by CUA for thp
period indicated
The Temporary Error SummClry report is a
summary of all MDR records. Because limit controls can not be
established for this report, all temporary errors are listed.

D.

Temporary Error Summary Example

D

0

DAY YR TO DAY YR
049 86
052 86

D D 11

0

m

D

m

1m

D

TOTAL BLOCKS
DEVNO DRIVE
--WRITE----- --READ------ TOTAL flBYTES -PROCESSED- --READ------ --WRITE---/CUA 10
CPU flOUNTS liB/ERR ERRCT fiB/ERR ERRCT READ WRITE READ \

EC336395

Copyrigh.IBM Corp. 1984. 1985. 1986

I!I

m

m
m

DRV DET ERR
drive.

is the number of unit checks set by the

is the number of errors found in the use
CU EQU CHK
of external regs in the CU for a given device.

III

READ is the total number of blocks read on the device.

SPD V AR
Flag indicating that tape speed variations
have been detected by hardware checkers.

WRITE is the total number of blocks written on the
device.

TOTAL and AVERAGE

1m

MB/COR is the average number of megabytes read on
the device, per read ECC error.
ECC is the number of read ECC corrected blocks read
from the device.

m

m

AVERAGE is the total number of megabytes divided by
the total number of errors of a particular type, for all
3480 drives that were used by the operating system.
For example:
Average Megabytes/Temporary Read Errors is the total
number of the megabytes read divided by the total
number of the temporary read errors.

MB/COR is the average number of megabytes written
on the device, per correctable error.

The PERMANENT ERROR values are meant to provide a
source of performance information for all 3480 drives in
the operating system.

ECC is the number of blocks that have been written
with read ECC correctable errors, as determined by
read-back ECC checking.

The TOTAL MEGABYTES read, written and processed
are for all 3480 drives used by the operating system.

lEI

MSG 213

OJ

WRITE is the total number of megabytes written on the
device.
TOTAL BLOCKS PROCESSED READ WRITE

o

WRITE ERASE GAPS
is the total number of blocks
rewritten during error recovery.

READ is the total number of megabytes read on the
device.

WRITE MB/COR ECC

o

Temporary Error Summary Report (Continued)

TOT AL MBVTES READ WRITE

READ MB / COR ECC

o

READ RECVV ACTS
is the total number of
correctable read errors detected during 3480 read error
recovery.

An asterisk (*) in the calculation field (to the right of the
"=") indicates that no errors were logged.

m

CPU. MODEl. SERIAL NUMBER
further identifies the
CPU listed in the error summary lines of the report.

Temporary Error Summary Report (Continued)

MSG 213

Volume Statistics Report

Volume Statistics Report

MSG 215

Volume Statistics Report

MSG 215

All activity is listed for each volume shown as an exception on
the Tape Subsystem Exception report. This includes volumes
that have permanent errors or have failed the volume temporary
error limits. No other volumes are listed.
Entries are grouped in VOLID order and are listed by date and
time for the period indicated

II.

Volume Statistics Report Example

II 049
DAY

TO

YR
86

DAY YR
052 86
VOLUMES EXCEEDING LIMITS OR PERMANENT ERRORS
TEMP WRT(CT) TEMP RD(CT)
200( 1)
40( 3)

fl

CURRENT LIMITS
(MB/ERR)

EJ
VOLUME

II
DATE

B
TIME

II
R m
m
D
m
CHP DEVNO W BLOCK ----MB/ERR PERM--/CUA E

m
READ lEI
m
----MB/ERR TEMP---- RECVY ERASE

READ(CT) WRITE(CT) WRITE(CT)

READ( cT) ACTNS GAPS

SERIAL DAY YR

HH:MM:SS -ID

B07146 051 86

18:48:31

00

5A2

0)

0)

0)

B42750 051 86

15:34:33

00

5BC

0)

0)

0)

M11407051 86
M11407 051 86
M11407051 86

20:51:24
20:57:53
21 :07: 11

06
00
00

5A3
5A3
SAl

0)
0)
0)

0)
0)
0)

0)
0)
0)

(
(

TAPENO 051 86
TAPENO 051 86
TAPENO 051 86

22: 16: 18
22:16:37
22: 18:40

22
22
22

5A7
5A7 0
5A7

0)
0)
0)

0)
0)
0)

L30570 051 86

19:03:22

22

5A5 W

0)

0)

L27530 051 86

20: 31:22

06

5A2 W

0)

0)

L70630 051 86

16:24:33

06

5A4

0)

L72930 051 86

11 :22: 19

22

5B2

B35790 051 86

19:22: 13

22

5A3 E

ID

o 001BF

001BF
001C5

COLUMN TOTALS:

m
CPU MODEL

TOTALS:
TOTALS:

3081
3081

SERIAL NUMBER
210819
010819

3480 MI

EC336395

A
B

(

MOUNTS =
9
MEGABYTES PROCESSED

m
-BLKS PROC-

READ

III

WRITE

BLK
LEN

m
C
III
--JOB--- P
--NAME-- U

0)

3

0

6144

6144

0000

E

o(

1)

0

0

0

0

0000

E

(

0)
0)
0)

0
0
0

0
0
0

0
0
0

0
256
0

2EE4
0000
0000

0)
0)
0)

0)
0)
0)

0
0
0

0
0
0

0
0
0

0
0
0

0000
0050
0000

EOX EXIT E
OPERX
E
EOS EXIT E

3

1)

0)

0

0

0 5934

0234

EOS EXIT E

5

1)

0)

0

0

o 10120

0256

EOS EXIT E

0)

12 )

0)

0

0

0 9050

1250

EOS EXIT E

0)

0)

0)

1)

0

0 20302

0

2350

EOS EXIT E

0)

0)

0)

0)

0

0

0

0

0000

E

0)

( 14)

0)

=

(

39

(

2)

(

3)

(

C4KCC33E

E
E

0)

201

Cl Copvnght IBM Corp. 19B6

o

f)

o

{}

()

{)

o

f)

c

0

0

c

c

0

0

0

Volume Statistics Report (Continued)
Field Definitions

EI

VOLUME SERIAL

EJ is the volume serial number.

II

DATE DAY YR
is the Julian date and year from the
OBR or MOR record.

II is the time from the OBR or MDR record.
CHP-IO II is the channel path 10 {used in XA mode} and
TIME

only appears if all errors have occurred on 1 CHP-ID.

fJ

OEVNO / CUA
is the device number in XA mode or the
primary control unit address (PCUA). The message may
refer to a condition that occurred on an alternate CU path.
(See START 400 to determine the actual path.)

II

defines the type of permanent error as a read,
R/ W / E
write, or equipment check.
BLOCK 10
errors.

3480 MI
ill Copyright

III is the logical block position for permanent

EC336395

IBM Corp. 1986

Volume Statistics Report (Continued)
MB / ERR PERM

CURRENT LIMITS (MB/ERR)
is the megabyte per
temporary error limit threshold from the limit control cards
{See MSG 105 for more information on the limit cards.!

0

1m

MSG 216

OJ

ERASE GAPS
is the number of times a block is
rewritten during error recovery for the listed volumes.

READ is the average number of megabytes read per
permanent read error.
CT is the total count of all permanent read errors.
WRITE is the average number of megabytes written per
permanent write error.
CT is the total count of all permanent write errors.
MB / ERR TEMP

c

m

READ is the average number of megabytes read per
temporary read error.
CT is the total count of all temporary read errors.
WRITE is t~" average number of megabytes written per
temporary write error.
CT is the total count of all temporary write errors.

m

READ RECVY ACTNS
is the total count of
recoverable read errors detected during 3480 read error
recovery.

BLKS PROCESSED

m

READ is the total number of blocks read for a volume
that has had at least one temporary, but no permanent,
errors.
WRITE is the total number of blocks written for a
volume that has had at least one temporary error, but
no permanent errors.

III

BLK LEN
is the block length as taken from the OBR
record for any listed volume that had permanent errors.

m

JOB NAME
is the job name from the OBR record for
any listed volume that had permanent errors.

m

CPU
identifies the host processor reporting the
exception.

m

CPU, MODEL, SERIAL. NUMBER
further identifies
the CPU listed in the error summary lines of this report.

Volume Statistics Report (Continued)

MSG 216

Permanent/Recovered Error Summary Report (EREP 3.2)

Permanent/Recovered Error Summary Report

MSG 220

Permanent/Recovered Error Summary Report

MSG 220

Permanent/Recovered Error Summary Example

All permanent and recovered errors will be recorded on this
report. The errors are catagorized by 'CONTROL UNIT',
'DRIVE', 'OPERATOR OR OPERATIONAL' and 'OTHER'.
Sense byte 7 on the permanent errors will be 20 to indicate
format 20 sense. Sense byte 3 will be a value other that 48.
Sense byte 7 on the recovered errors will also be 20 but sense
byte 3 will always indicate 48. This is indication that an error
ocurred and it took host interaction to recover from the error (eU
error recovery was not adequate).

All errors are for the report period indicated.

D

~r.I
DEVNO P

fl IJ

CHP
-10 /CUA

II

n

m m m

R r.I SENSE BYTES--> a
.. w ~ CCW SCSW64-95
ValiD E CMD FLG /CSW32-63

~ TIME
U DTE HHMMSS

05A3
05A4
05A7

2

4

1m
.

6

8

lmlmlDJlml
2
4
6
8
-------CU---------ERRI ERR2 ERRL HW

a

2DJ2m2
024
---DR---ERR 1 ERR2

2

6

2
8

3

CU
SER#

a

***** PERMANENT ERRORS *****

**** DRIVE ****
22
06
22

REPORT DATE 063 86
PERIOD FROM 049 86
TO
052 86

E 051 192213 B35790 E 01
F 051 214532
a 00
E 051 221637 TAPENO a 02

64 060079EO
00 26000000
44 06000050

1044 394A 0000 2C20 0000 7151 7607 CCBB 0708 0002 0000 0000 F680 OCEI 0813 3319
4048 3934 0000 0020 730C 8E06 0000 0000 0000 0002 192C 0000 F680 OCEI 0813 4419
0049 402E 0000 0020 0000 7161 7161 7161 0000 0002 0000 0000 F680 OCEI 0813 7700

64 OE007FF8
64 06002090

OA44 7025 0007 3F20 0000 7404 7401 7407 0007 0002 0000 0000 F680 OCEI 0819 5519
OA44 3025 OOOC C620 0000 7401 7407 7401 0002 0002 0000 0000 F680 OCEI 0813 2219

64 OE002B63

4244 783B 0001 BF20 0000 8202 0000 0000 0000 0002 0000 0000 F680 OCEI 1249 330E

**** VOLUME OR CREATING DRIVE ****
05A5
05A2

F 051 190322 l30570 W 01
E 051 203122 l27530 W 01

**** OPERATOR OR OPERATIONAL ****
06

05A3

E 051 205124 Mll047 a

01

***** RECOVERED ERRORS *****
**** CONTROL UNIT ****
22
22

05A7
05A7

E 051 040633
E 051 221838

a

01
02

64 OE007FF8
43 00000000

oA44 7048 0000 0020 0000 A130 3300 0000 D5Cl 0002 0000 0000 F680 OCEI 0813 7719
0044 4048 0002 1720 0040 3300 0000 0000 0000 0002 0000 0000 F680 OCEI 0819 7700

a

02
02

24 00000000
24 00000000

0048 3948 0000 0020 0000 7161 7161 7161 0000 0002 0000 0000 F680 OCEI 0813 7700
0048 3948 0000 0020 0000 7161 7161 7161 0000 0002 0000 0000 F680 OCEI 0819 7719

0

**** DRIVE ****
06
22
CPU
E
F

05A7
05A7
MODEL
3081
3081

3480 MI

F 051 221618
F 051 221840

a

=

last four digits

1m

EC336395

C Copyright IBM Corp. 1984, 1985, 1986

o

Note: CU SER#

SERIAL NUMBER
210819
010819

()

o

o

o

o

o

permanO/Recovered

o

ErG Summary RepQ

All permanent and recovered errors will be recorded on this
report.

o

o

o

permanent/Aovered Error suGary Report

rA220

Permanent/Recovered Error Summary Report

MSG 220

Permanent/Recovered Error Summary Example

Sense byte 7 on the permanent errors will be 20 to indicate
format 20 sense. Sense byte 3 will be a value other that 48.
Sense byte 7 on the recovered errors will also be 20 but sense
byte 3 will always indicate 48. This is indication that an error
ocurred and it took host interaction to recover from the error (eU
error recovery was not adequate).

All errors are for the report period indicated.

D

REPORT DATE 063 86
PER 100 FROI·! 049 86
TO 052 86

R

SEI15E BYTES--> 0
CHP OEVIIO P
TIllE
\or
WI 5C5\o164-95
- ID /CUA U OTE HHI1HSS VaLID E WO FLG /C5\o132-63
C

FJO DO 0

BllJD

2

4

6

m

8

1
1
1
1
1
02468

222

-------cu----------

---OR---ERR1 ERR2

ERR1 ERR2 ERRL HW

o

2

2
6

4

2

3

8
0
CU
SERB

m *****mPERI·IANEtlT ERRORS ***** m m mm mm

**** cornRoL UN IT ****
22 0186 07 262 081934 TAP lAO a 00 00 OE004000 0244 2049 002F 8820 0000 7407 0000 0000 0007 0002 0000 0000 F680 08E1 0140 6FOO
06 0187 07 262 081931 TAP1A7 0 00 00 OE004000 0244 2040 002F 8820 0000 7407 0000 0000 0007 0002 0000 0000 F6BO OBE1 0140 6FOO

**** DRIVE ****
22
22
22
06
22

0181
01B3
0183
0286
0287

07
17
17
07
07

262
262
262
262
262

081935
OB1936
081937
081940
081910

TAP1A1
TAP1AZ
TAP1A3
TAP1B6
TAP1C5

0
\·1
W
a
0

00
00
00
00
00

00
00
00
00
00

OE004000
0[004000
OE004000
OE004000
OE004000

0244
0244
0244
0244
0244

2022
2025
2025
2031
2032

002F
002F
002F
002F
002F

B820
8820
8820
8820
8820

0000
0000
0000
0000
0000

7407
7407
7407
7407
7407

0000
0000
0000
0000
0000

0000
0000
0000
0000
0000

0007
0007
0007
0007
0007

0002
0002
0002
0002
0002

0000
0000
0000
0000
0000

0000
0000
0000
0000
0000

F6BO
F680
F680
F680
F680

08E1
08El
08E1
08E1
08E1

0140
0140
0140
0140
0140

6FOO
6FOO
6FOO
6FOO
6FOO

H** VOLUltE FAILED ItORE THAN DlIE DRIVE ****
06 0182 17 262 081936 TAPIAZ

\or

00 00 OE004000 0244 2025 002F 8820 0000 7407 oooa aooo 0007 0002 0000 0000 r680 08El 0140 6roo

**** VOLUIIE ****
22 0288 07 262 OB1920 TAP1D6 0 00 00 OE004000 0244 2037 002F B820 0000 7407 0000 0000 0007 0002 0000 0000 F680 08E1 0140 6FOO

**** OTHER ****
0286 07 262 081940 TAP1F6

\01

00 24 OE004000 0244 2039 002F 8820 0000 7407 0000 0000 0007 0002 0000 0000 F680 OBEl 0140 6roo

**** RECOVERED ERRORS *****
H** CONTROL mIlT ****
06 01B6 17 262 081930 TAPIA6 0 00 00 OE004000 0244 2048 002F B820 0000 7407 0000 0000 0007 0002 0000 0000 F6BO OBE1 0140 6FDO

*-.** OPERATOR OR OPERATIOIIAL H**
06 0186 17 262 081930 TAP1A6 0 00 00 OE004000 0244 2048 002F 8820 0000 7407 0000 onoo 0007 0002 0000 0000 r680 08El 0140 6FOO

3480 MI EC A57723

IBM

Cor:fid~ntial

'" Copyright IBM Corp. 1982.1989

44

_~. __-5",=_ -

., -••J..

"

$

k ..",# __

w

o

o

o

()

f)

()

o

o

o

o

0

m,

REPORT DATE is the Julian date the report ran.
PERIOD FROM is the Julian date of the earliest record.
PERIOD TO is the Julian date of the latest record.

& is the channel path 10 (used in XA mode).
0

DEVNO/CUA
is the device number in XA mode or the
Primary Control Unit Address (PCUA). The message may
refer to a condition that occurred on an alternate CU path.
(See START 400 to determine the actual path.)

II

CPU
identifies the host processor reporting the
exception. The actual CPU model and serial number are
shown at the bottom of the report.

g

is the Julian date from the OBR record.

D is the time from the OBR record.
VOllD D is the volume serial number.
R/W/E/O iii Defines the type of check as read, write,

TIME

equipment OR other check.

III

1m

is the sense data from the OBR record.

For sense byte definitions see the SENSE section of the MI.

m

m

m

is the microcode-detected error code for the
CU-ERR2
second error (control unit or drive), from the OBR record
(sense bytes 12 and 13). This error code can be a result of
the first error indicated in CU-HW
DR-ERR1
or
CU-ERR1

m.

3480 MI EC A57723
f!:) Copyright 19M Corp 1982,1989

!ill

_._< __ Jlbb8iL

MA221

m,

m·

m

Permanent/Recovered Error Summary Report

MSG 221

ED,

CU-HW
is the control unit hardware-detected error code
from the OBR record (sense bytes 16 and 17). This error
code defines a control unit failure and should be used to
enter the Maintenance Package if you have multiple drive
failures.

m

DR-ERR1
is the drive hardware-detected
from the OBR record (sense bytes 20 and 21).
code defines the first failure for any drive and
used to enter the maintenance package if you
drive failures.

error code,
This error
should be
have single

1m

DR-ERR2
is the drive hardware-detected error code,
from the OBR record (sense bytes 22 and 23). This error
code defines the second or last failure for any drive and
should not be used to enter the maintenance package if you
have single drive failures. This error information provides
supplemental information and may be a result of the first
failure (DR-ERR1) in the drive.

m is CCW bits 32 to 39 from the OBR.

SCSW/CSW

1m is:

SCSW64 - 95 (in XA Mode)
CSW32 - 63
These are the SCSW or CSW bits from the OBR record.

CU-ERR1
is the microcode-detected error code for the
first error (control unit or drive), from the OBR record (sense
bytes 10 and 11). This error code should not be used as an
entry to the maintenance package unless efforts using
CU-HW
and/or DR-ERR1
have not corrected the
subsystem problem.

III

1m,

CCW FLG

CMD
is the command code from the channel command
word (CCW) in the OBR record.
SENSE BYTES

Permanent,Qovered Error suGary Report

m

REPORT DATE, PERIOD FROM, PERIOD TO

DTE

o

CU-ERRL
is the microcode-detected error code for the
last error (control unit or drive), from the OBR record (sense
bytes 14 and 15). This error code can be a result of the first
error indicated in CU-HW
DR-ERR1
CU-ERR1
DR-ERR2
or CU-ERR2

Field Definitions

CHPID

o

o

0

permanD/Recovered ErQsummary RepQ (Continued)

m,

CPU, MODEL, SERIAL NUMBER
information on the CPU listed
of the report.

0

1m provides further
in the error summary lines

Note: More information on CSW and SCSW (used in XA mode)
can be found in IBM Extended Architecture Principles of
Operation, SA22-7085.

ED,

IBM Confidential

o

o

o

o

o

il

If ..

u

o

o

o

Sense byte 7 on the service alert errors will be 20, but sense byte
3 will always indicate 48. This is an indication that an error
occurred and it took host interaction to recover from the error
(CU error recovery was not adequate).

o

o

permanOt/Recovered ErR Summary RepQ (Service Alert'(EREP 3.4)

o

permanent.covered Error sAary Report

ra222

Permanent/Recovered Error Summary Report

MSG 222

PermanentJRecovered Error Summary Example

All errors are for the report period indicated.

D REPORT

DATE 217 88
PERIOD FROH 262 84
TO . 262 84

C

CHP DEVNO P
-ID /CUA U DTE THtE

R SENSE BYTES--> 0
W
CCW SCS\oI64-95
VOLID E CI·ID FLG /CSH32-63

FJ II 110 II

D

mm m m
~****

2

4

6

B

1
a

I
2

I
4

1m
1
6

1
8

2
0

2
2

2
4

2
6

2
8

3
0

HDW- STR- V/CPSC DEV FSC

mmm

SERVICE ALERTS ***** HARDWARE DEGRADED *****

"""" COIITRL UNIT ***"
01BB FF 262 OB1932

o 00 00 OE0040oo 0244 204B 002F BB2a 0000 BOlO BODO BlBO D007 0002 0000 0000 F680 08EI 0140 6Foa

*"** STRING 0 - 7 "*"*

0185 FF 262 081932

o 00 00 OE004000 0244 2948 002F BB20 0000 BOll 0400 BlBl 0007 0002 0000 0000 F6RO OBE1 9149 6FOO

"""" STRING B - F ****
0189 FF 262 081932

o 00 00 OE004000 0244 2048 002F B820 0000 B012 2000 B140 0007 0002 0000 0000 F6BO 08E1 0140 6FOO

"**" DEVICES ****

6186 FE 262 081932

o 00 00 OE004000 0244 2048 002F BB20 0000 B013 0200 B108 0007 0002 0000 0000 F6BO OBEI 0140 6FOO

0189 FE 262 OB1933

o 00 00 OE004000 0244 2948 002F 8B20 0000 B013 1000 8120 0007 0002 0000 0000 F6BO 08El 0140 6FOO
Note: CU SERf

CPU HODEl SERIAL NUHBER
FE 3081
010B47 HI
FF 3081
010B19

last four digits

IBM Cor,fidential

3480 MI EC A57723
o Copyright IBM Corp. 1982. 1989

. • ~- g--

e

_.. ¥.4

a

o

o

o

o

()

(1

o

o

o

o

PermaAt/Recovered Ar Summary ReQrt (Service AleQ (EREP 3.4)
Field Definitions
REPORT DATE, PERIOD FROM, PERIOD TO

0

o

o

o

permanenlecovered Error amary Report

Note: More information on CSW and SCSW (used in XA mode)
can be found in IBM Extended Architecture Principles of
Operation. SA22-70El5.

REPORT DATE is the Julian date the report ran.
PERIOD FROM is the Julian date of the earliest record.
PERIOD TO is the Julian date of the latest record.

B is the channel path 10 (used in XA mode).
DEVNO/CUA II is the device number in XA mode or the

CHPID

Primary Control Unit Address (PCUA). The message may
refer to a condition that occurred on an alternate CU path.
(See START 400 to determine the actual path.)

D

CPU
identifies the host processor reporting the
exception. The actual CPU model and serial number are
shown at the bottom of the report
DTE Dis the Juli an date from the 08 R record.

II is the time from the 08R record.
VOLID fJ is the volume serial number.
R/W/E/O iii Defines the type of check as read, write,
TIME

equipment OR other check.

111

CMD
is the command code from the channel command
word (CCW) in the OBR record.
SENSE BYTES

1m is the sense data from the OBR record.

With the exception of bytes 10 through 15, the sense record
is a normal Format 20 sense record. For sense byte
definitions see the SENSE section of the MI. Sense bytes 10
through 15 are described below.

m

Sense bytes 10 and 11 are the error code for
HDW-FSC
statistical analysis of temporary errors and will always be a
BOnn type error code. This error code can be used for entry
into the maintenance package.

m

STR-DEV
Sense bytes 12 and 13 identify the drives
within the string that are failing. See the MI FSI section for
FSC B011 or 8012 for a detailed description.

m

VlC-FSC
Sense bytes 14 and 15 identify U,e types of
unacceptable temporary errors. If sense byte 14 ... 81 then
byte 15 identifies the type of temporary errors that are
unacceptable. See the MI FSI section for FSC BOll or B012
for a detailed explanation.
CCW FLG

m is CCW bits 32 to 39 from the OBR.

SCSW/CSW

1m is:

SCSW64 - 95 (in XA Mode)
CSW32 - 63
These are the SCSW or CSW bits from the OBR record.

Em

CPU, MODEL, SERIAL NUMBER
provides further
information on the CPU listed
in the error summary lines
of the report.

D

3480 MI EC A57723
II:)

Copyright IBM Corp. 1882. 19~8

IBM Confidential

Permanent/Recovered Error Summary Report

MSG 223

o

o

o

o

o

o

{}

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

Permanent/Recorded Error Summary Report (Continued) (EREP 3.2)

REPORT DATE. PERIOD FROM. PERIOD TO

II

REPORT DATE is the Julian date the report ran.
PERIOD FROM is the Julian date of the earliest record.
PERIOD TO is the Julian date of the latest record.

EJ is the channel path 10 (used in XA mode).
DEVNO I CUA II is the device number in XA mode or the
CHPID

Primary Control Unit Address (PCUA). The message may
refer to a condition that occurred on an alternate CU path.
(See START 400 to determine the actual path.)

II

CPU
identifies the host processor reporting the
exception and is shown as a value of A thru H. The actual
CPU model and serial number are shown at the bottom of
the report.

B is the Julian date from the OBR record.
TIME II is the time from the OBR record.
VOLID II is the volume serial number.
R/W IEIO II Defines the type of check as read, write,

DTE

equipment OR other check.

c

o

Permanent/Recovered Error Summary Report

MSG 221

Permanent/Recovered Error Summary Report

MSG 221

CU-ERRL
is the microcode-detected error code for the
last error (control unit or drive), from the OBR record (sense
bytes 14 and 15). This error code can be a result of the
DR-ERR 1m,
first error indicated in CU-HW
CU-ERR 1
DR-ERR2
or CU-ERR2

m,

m,
m

III,

m-

CU-HW
is the control unit hardware-detected error
code from the OBR record (sense bytes 16 and 17). This
error code defines a control unit failure and should be used
to enter the Maintenance Package if you have multiple drive
failures.

III

is the drive hardware-detected error code,
DR-ERR1
from the OBR record (sense bytes 20 and 211. This error
code defines the first failure for any drive and should be
used to enter the maintenance package if you have single
drive failures.

III

DR-ERR2
is the drive hardware-detected error code,
from the OBR record (sense bytes 22 and 231. This error
code defines the second or last failure for any drive and
should not be used to enter the maintenance package if you
have single drive failures. This error information provides
supplemental information and may be a result of the first
failure (DR-ERR 1) in the drive.
CCW FLG

m
m

is CCW bits 32 to 39 from the OBR.

SCSW ICSW

is:

SCSW64 - 95 (in XA Mode)

D

CMD
is the command code from the channel command
word (CCW) in the OBR record.

III is the sense data from the OBR record.

For sense byte definitions see the SENSE section of the MI.

m

CU-ERR1
is the microcode-detected error code for the
first error (control unit or drive), from the OBR record (sense
bytes 10 and 11). This error code should not be used as an
entry to the maintenance package unless efforts using
CU-HW
and/or DR-ERR 1
have not corrected the
subsystem problem.

m

o

m

Field Definitions

SENSE BYTES

o

lEI

CSW32 - 63
These are the SCSW or CSW bits from the OBR record.

1m

CPU. MODEL. SERIAL NUMBER
provides further
information on the CPU listed
in the error summary lines
of the report.

II

Note: More information on CSW and SCSW (used in
XA mode) can be found in IBM Extended Architecture
Principles of Operation, SA22-7085.

lEI

CU-ERR2
is the microcode-detected error code for the
second error (control unit or drive), from the OBR record
(sense bytes 12 and 13). This error code can be a result of
the first error indicated in CU-HW
DR-ERR 1
or .
CU-ERR1

m.

3480 MI
C> Copyrigh.IBM

EC336395
Corp. 1986

III,

III,

FRU SUMMARY REPORT (EREP 3. 1. 1)
THE FRU summary report provides a summary of error codes
logged and is listed by CUA.
THE FRU codes can provide an entry into the MI for both drive
and control unit faillM"es.

Field Definitions
DAY YR TO DAY YR

II

The first DAY YR is the Julian date of the first record.
The second DAY YR is the Julian date of the latest
record.

lEI

DEVNO 1CUA
is the device number in XA mode or the
primary control unit address (PCUA). The message may
refer to a condition that occurred on an alternate CU path.
(See START 400 to determine the actual path.)

II

CPU
identifies the host processor reporting the
exception and is shown as a value of A through H. The
actual CPU model and serial number are shown at the
bottom of the report.

II

CHA
identifies the channel adapter that was in use at
the time of error.

cu II identifies the control unit containing the channel
adapter.

II

PTH
identifies the control unit containing the buffer and
data flow in use at the time of error.

II

CU-ERR 1
is the microcode-detected error code for the
first error (control unit or drivel. from the OBR record (sense
bytes 10 and 11). This error code should not be used as an
entry to the maintenance package unless efforts using
CU-HW
andlor DR-ERR 1
have not corrected the
subsystem problem.

II

II

MSG 225

FRU SUMMARY REPORT

II

CU-ERRL
is the microcode-detected error FRU code for
the last error (control unit or drive). from the OBR record
(sense bytes 14 and 15). This error code can be a result of
the first error indicated in CU-HW
DR-ERR 1
CU-ERR 1
DR-ERR2
or CU-ERR211·

FRU SUMMARY REPORT EXAMPLE

from the OBR record (sense bytes 16 and 17). This error
code defines a control unit failure and should be used to
enter the maintenance package if you have multiple drive
failures.

DEVICE TYPE 3480

II.
II.
II.
m.
CU-HW II is the control unit hardware-detected error code

II

DR-ERR1
is the drive hardware-detected error code.
from the OBR record (sense bytes 20 and 21). This error
code defines the first failure for any drive and should be
used to enter the maintenance package if you have single
drive failures.

II!I

is a microcode-developed flag byte. from the OBR
DR-F
record (sense byte 18). This byte provides additional
information. if available. for DR-ERR 1
This byte. when
available. is further defined in the MI EAD section under the
error code in CU-ERR 1.

II.

m

DR-ERR2
is the drive hardware-detected error code.
from the OBR record (sense bytes 22 and 23). This error
code defines the second or last failure for any drive and
should not be used to enter the maintenance package if you
have single drive failures. This error information provides
supplemental information and can be a result of the first
failure (DR-ERR 1) in the drive.
OCCURRENCES
code occurred.
DATE/TIME
occurrence.

m

II

fJ
OEVNO

DAY YR
049 86

DAY YR
OS2 86

C
U

P
T
H

FRU CODE ****
CU-l F CU-2 CU-L CUHW OR-l F OR-2

OCCURRENCES

a

7401 00 7407 7401 0002 0000 00 0000

00001

OSI/86

19: 22: 13: 31

71S1 00 7607 CCBB 0708 0000 00 0000

00001

OS1/86

19:03:22:23

8E06 OC 0000 0000 0000 192C 00 0000

00001· oSI/86

21:4S:32:21

7407 00 7401 7407 0007 0000 00 0000

00001

OS1/86

20:31:22:4S

A130
7161
7161
3300
7161

00001
00001
00001
00001
00001

OSI/86
OS1/86
OSI/86
OSI/86
OS1/86

04:06:33:44
22 16:37:22
22 16: 18: S4
22 18:38:S2
22 18:40:60

II

/CUA

C
P
U

C
H
A

SA2

E

B

SA3

E

SA4

F

SAS

B
F .B
E B
E B

SA7
SA7
SA7
SA7
SA7

TO

a
B a
B a

F

F
F

CPU MODEL
E 3081
F 3081

B
B

a
a
a
a
a

a
a
a
1
a
a

SERIAL NUMBER
210819
010819

II II 1111 II
****

00
00
00
40
00

3300
7161
7161
0000
7161

0000
7161
7161
0000
7161

OSCI
0000
0000
0000
0000

11m m

0000
0000
0000
0000
0000

00
00
00
00
00

0000
0000
0000
0000
0000

II

****

****

lEI

DATE IT I ME
LAST ENTRY

****

****

III

is the total number of times this error

lEI is the Julian date and time of the last

III

CPU. MODEL. SERIAL NUMBER
further identifies the
CPU listed in the FRU SUMMARY REPORT.

II

CU-F
is a microcode-developed flag byte. from the OBR
record (sense byte 9). This byte provides additional
information. if available. for CU-ERR 1
This byte. when
available. is further defined in the MI EAD section under the
error code in CU-ERR 1 .

II.

CU-ERR211 is the microcode-detected error code for the
second error (control unit or drive). from the OBR record
(sense bytes 12 and 13). This error code can be a result of
the first error indicated in CU-HW
DR-ERR 1
or
CU-ERR111·

II.

3480 MI
o Copyright IBM Cap.

o

II

EC336395

FRU SUMMARY REPORT

1984. 1986. 1986

()

o

()

(')

o

()

{)

o

MSG 225

NOTES

0

o

o

o

o

o

IBM Conftdentl al - 15 May 89

3480 MI EC A57723
., Copyright IBM Corp. 1982, 1989

"_"_

k.US

o

o

o

NOTES

MO 225

NOTES

MSG 225

,

I

I

()

o

()

()

o

()

o

()

()

Error

o

cQ Summary RepQ

CU·ERRL
is the microcode-detected error FRU code for
the last error (control unit or drive), from the OBR record
(sense bytes 14 and 15). This error code can be a result of
the first error indicated in CU·HW
DR·ERR1
CU-ERR1
DR-ERR2
or CU·ERR2

The error codes call provide an entry into the MI for both drive
and control unit failures.

D,

m

m,

m.

D

The first DAY YR is the Juli an date of the first record.

m

D

DEVNO/CUA
is the device number in XA mode or the
primary control unit address (PCUA). The message may
refer to a condition that occurred on an alternate CU path.
(See START 400 to determine the actual path.)

1m

DR·F
is a microcode-developed flag byte, from the OBR
record (sense byte 18). This byte provides additional
information, if available, for DR·ERR1
This byte, when
available, is further defined in the MI EAD section under the
error code in CU·ERR1.

m.

D

CPU
identifies the host processor reporting the
exception. The actual CPU model and serial number are
shown at the bottom of the report.

m

D

CHR
identifies the channel adapter that was in use at the
time of error.

DR·ERR2
is the drive hardware-detected error code,
from the OBR record (sense bytes 22 and 23). This error
code defines the second or last failure for any drive and
should not be used to enter the maintenance package if you
have single drive failures. This error information provides
supplemental information and can be a a result of the first
failure (DR-ERR1) in the drive.

0

CUR
identifies the control unit containing the channel
adapter.

D

identifies the control unit containing the buffer and
CUD
data flow in use at the time of error.

D

OCCURRENCES
code occurred.

CU·ERR1
is the microcode·detected error code for the
first error (control unit or drive), from the OBR record (sense
bytes 10 and 11). Thi s error code should not be used as an
entry to the maintenance package unless efforts using
CU·HW
and/or DR-ERR1
have not corrected the
subsystem problem.

DATE/TIME
occurrence.

m

m

o

Error Code Summary Report

MI; 226

m,

DR·ERR1
is the drive hardware·detected error code,
from the OBR record (sense bytes 20 and 21). This error
code defines the first failure for any drive and should be
used to enter the maintenance package if you have single
drive failures.

The second DAY YR is the Julian date of the latest
record.

o

Error Code Summary Example

o PERREPORT
DATE 063 86
10D FROtl 049 86

CU·HW
is the control unit hardware-detected error code
from the OBR record (sense bytes 16 and 17). This error
code defines a control unit failure and should be used to
enter the maintenance package if you have multiple drive
failures.

Field Definitions

m

m,

o

o

0

The Error Code Summary report provides a summary of error
codes logged and is listed by CUA.

DAVVRTO DAVVR

o

o

TO

DEVIIO
/CUA

C
P
U

D

C

C

052 86

C+

H U U
R

R

D

5A2

EO a

0

0

5A3

EO B

0

5A~

EO B

0

5A5

FO B

5A7
SA7
SA7
SA7
5A7

FO
EO
EO
FO
FO

0

B

a
B
B
B

0
0
0
0
0

----------CU---------- -----DR------ERR1 F ERR2 ERRL HW ERR1 F ERR2

m Dim m
7401 00 7407 7401 D002 0000 00 0000
II g D D

**** DATE/TJ liE
OCCURRENCES **** LAST EIHRY

*++:+:
~.,

.•.

051/86

m
19: 22: 13:31

7151 00 7607 CCBa D708 0000 00 0000

00001' 051/86

19:03:22:23

8E06 DC 0000 0000 0000 192C 00 0000

00001

051/86

21:45:32:21

0

7407 00 7401-7407 D007 0000 00 0000

00001 051/86

20:31:22:45

0
0
1
0
0

A130
7161
7161
3300
7161

00001 051/86
00001 051/86
00001 051/86
00001 051/86
00001 051/86

04: 06: 33:44
22:16:37:22
22:16:18:84
22:18:38:52
22: 18:40:60

(ru 110DEL SERIAL NUI1BER
EO 3081
210819
FO 3081
010819

00
00
00
40
00

3300
7161
7161
0000
7161

0000
7161
7161
0000
7161

D5C1
0000
DODO
0000
0000

0000
0000
0000
0000
0000

00
00
00
00
00

0000
0000
0000
0000
arGO

m00001

m

m is the total number of times this error
is the Julian date and time of the last

m

CPU. MODEL. SERIAL NUMBER
further identifies the
CPU listed in the Error Code Summary report.

0

CU·F
is a microcode·developed flag byte, from the OBR
record (sense byte 9). This byte provides additiondl
information, if available. for CU-ERR1
This byte, when
available, is further defined in the MI EAD section under the
error code in CU·ERR1.

D.

m

CU·ERR2
is the microcode-detected error code for the
second error (control unit or drive), from the OBR record
(sense bytes 12 and 13). This error code can be a result of
the first error indicated in CU-HW
DR-ERR1
or
CU·ERR1

m,

a.

m

3480 MI EC A57723

IBM

Error Code Summary Report

Cor"id~ntial

tr Copyright IBM Corp 1982.1989

, __ #22PS

!t.

A

*-444

._~_"

__ i

,W. __

ZUE -.. ~,--

MSG 226

o

o

o

o

()

()

o

()

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

The error codes can provide an entry into the MI for both drive
and control unit failures.

Field Definitions
DAY YR TO DAY YR

D

The first DAY YR is the Julian date of the first record.
The second DAY YR is the Julian date of the latest
record.

fJ

DEVNO / CUA
is the device number in XA mode or the
primary control unit address (PCUA). The message may
refer to a condition that occurred on an alternate CU path.
(See START 400 to determine the actual path.)

II

identifies the host processor reporting the
CPU
exception and is shown as a value of A through H. The
actual CPU model and serial number are shown at the
bottom of the report.

II

CHR
identifies the channel adapter that was in use at
the time of error.

II

identifies the control unit containing the channel
CUR
adapter.

II

CUD
identifies the control unit containing the buffer and
data flow in use at the time of error.

II

CU-ERR1
is the microcode-detected error code for the
first error (control unit or drivel. from the OBR record (sense
bytes 10 and 11). This error code should not be used as an
entry to the maintenance package unless efforts using
CU-HW
and/or DR-ERR 1
have not corrected the
subsystem problem.

m

II

o
MSG 226

Error Code Summary Report

Error Code Summary Report (EREP 3.2)
The Error Code Summary report provides a summary of error
codes logged and is listed by CUA.

o

D

CU-ERRL
is the microcode-detected error FRU code for
the last error (control unit or drivel. from the OBR record
(sense bytes 14 and 15). This error code can be a result of
the first error indicated in CU-HW
DR-ERR 1
CU-ERR 1
DR-ERR2
or CU-ERR2

Error Code Summary Example

m.

Ill.

II.
m.
II·
CU-HW III is the control unit hardware-detected error code

from the OBR record (sense bytes 16 and 17). This error
code defines a control unit failure and should be used to
enter the maintenance package if you have multiple drive
faiiures.

m

is the drive hardware-detected error code,
DR-ERR1
from the OBR record (sense bytes 20 and 21). This error
code defines the first failure for any drive and should be
used to enter the maintenance package if you have single
drive failures.

1m

DR-F
is a microcode-developed flag byte, from the OBR
record (sense byte 18). This byte provides additional
information, if available. for DR-ERR 1
This byte, when
available, is further defined in the MI EAD section LInder the
error code in CU-ERR 1.

m.

m

DR-ERR2
is the drive hardware-detected error code,
from the OBR record (sense bytes 22 and 23). This error
code defines the second or last failure for any drive and
should not be used to enter the maintenance package if you
have single drive failures. This error information provides
supplemental information and can be a a result of the first
failure (DR-ERR 1) in the drive.
OCCURRENCES
code occurred.
DATE / TIME
occurrence.

D

fJ

REPORT DATE 063 86
PERIOD FROM 049 86
TO
OS2 86

II C

II II II D II

m1m m

m

lEI

DEVNO
/CUA

C
P
U

C
H
R

U
R

C+
U
D

----------CU---------- -----DR------ERR 1 F ERR2
ERR 1 F ERR2 ERRL HW

SA2

E

B

0

0

7401 00 7407 7401 D002 0000 00 0000

00001

OSI/86

19:22: 13:31

SA3

E

B

0

71S1 00 7607 CCBB D708 0000 00 0000

00001

OSI/86

19:03:22:23

SA4

F

B

0

8E06 DC 0000 0000 0000 192C 00 0000

00001

OSI/86

21 :4S:32:21

SAS

F

B

a

7407 00 7401 7407 D007 0000 00 0000

00001

OSI/86

20:31:22:4S

SA7
SA7
SA7
SA7
SA7

F

B
B
B
B
B

0

E
E
F

A130
7161
7161
3300
7161

00001
00001
00001
00001
00001

OSI/86
OSI/86
OSI/86
OSI/86
OSI/86

04:06:33:44
22: 16:37:22
22: 16: 18:84
22: 18:38:S2
22: 18:40:60

F

CPU MODEL
E 3081
F 3081

0
0
0
0
0

a

1
0
0

SERIAL NUMBER
210819
010819

00
00
00
40
00

3300
7161
7161
0000
7161

0000
7161
7161
0000
7161

DSCI
0000
0000
0000
0000

0000
0000
0000
0000
0000

00
00
00
00
00

0000
0000
0000
0000
0000

OCCURRENCES

****
****

DATE/T I ME
LAST ENTRY

****

****

m

m

is the total number of times this error

lEI is the Julian date and time of the last

m

further identifies the
CPU. MODEL. SERIAL NUMBER
CPU listed in the Error Code Summary report.

II

CU-F
is a microcode-developed flag byte. from the OBR
record (sense byte 9). This byte provides additional
information. if available. for CU-ERR 1
This byte. when
available. is further defined in the MI EAD section under the
error code in CU-ERR 1 .

II.

II

CU-ERR2
is the microcode-detected error code for the
second error (control unit or drivel. from the OBR record
(sense bytes 12 and 13). This error code can be a result of
the first error indicated in CU-HW
DR-ERR 1
or
cU-ERR111·

II.

3480 MI

EC336395

II> Copyright IBM Corp. 1984. 1985. 1986

m

Error Code Summary Report

MSG 226

3480 DEVNO/CUA Statistics Summary Report
READ RTY
is the total number of correctable read
errors detected during 3480 read error recovery. (Data from
sense byte 30 of the format 21 Statistical Record.)

Field Definitions

CU EQU CHKS
is the number of errors found in the use
of external regs in the CU for a given device. (Data from
sense byte 13 of the format 21 Statistical Record.)

D.

3480 DEVNO/CUA Statistics Summary Report

MSG 228

m

INSTANT SPD VAR
flag indication that tape speed
variations have been detected by hardware checkers. (A
function of Control Unit microcode.)

PERIOD FROM is the Julian date of the earliest record.
PERIOD TO is the Julian date of the latest record.

m

D

CURRENT LIMITS and megabytes/error for both the
hardware and the volume are the limit values from the limit
control cards. (See MSG 105 for more information on the
limit control cards.)

D is the Julian date and year from the OBR

DATE DAY YR
or MDR record.
VOllD

m

DRV DET
is the number of unit checks set by the drive.
(Data from sense byte 25 of the format 21 Statistical Record.)

m

REPORT DATE is the Julian date the report ran.

Currenl Limits, Mbytes/Err

MSG 228

m

The eata in this report is listed by CUA for all device addresses
that exceed hardware limits or hac! permanent errors. The data is
a summary of all activity on the device for the given period in
which the report was run. This includes permanent, temporary
and statistical data.

Report Dale, Period From, Period To

3480 DEVNO/CUA Statistics Summary Report

D is the volume serial number.
B is the error recovery action code to the host

ERPA
(contents of Sense Byte 3).

BlK PROC
is the total number of blocks processed.
(Data from sense byte 19 on a write and 18 on a read of the
format 21 Statistical Record.)

m

BlK COR
is the total number of blocks corrected. (ECC
corrected) (Data from sense byte 12 on :; VIIrite and 11 on a
read of the format 21 Statistical Record.)

1m

HDR SER
is the header serial number on the tape
volume. The header number is derived from the last 4 digits
of the control unit serial number that wrote the volume, with
the drive address added to the last position.

For

m

FMT
is the format of the sense record. Valid formats are
19.20, or 21.

D

MBPROC
is the number of megabytes processed. (Data
from se!'1se byte 14-15 for write and 16- 17 for read in the
format 21 Statistical Record.)

III

is the number of data checks corrected.
DATA CHK
(Criteria) (Data from sense byte 22 for write and 23 for read
in forma: 21 Statistical Recore.)

Examp~e:

Header Seri ali s 3892 F

The last 4 djgits of control
unit serial number is 3892
Drive address
CPU

1m

is F

is the host processor reoorting the data.

m

is the number of Hardware ERP made. (Data
DATA ERR
from sense byte 10 for write. sense byte 8 for read forward.
and 9 for read backward in format 21 Statistical Record.)
MB/ERR

II!l

WRITE is the average number of megabytes written per
temporary write error.
READ is the average number of megabytes read per
temporary read error.

m

ERSE GAPS
is the total number of blocks re-written
curing error recovery. (Data from sense byte 24 of the
format 21 Statistical Record.)

3480 MI EC A57721

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

3480 DEVNO/CUA Statistics Summary Report (Continued)

o

o

o

o

3480 DEVNO/CUA Statistics Summary Report

MSG 229

3480 DEVNO/CUA Statistics Summary Report

MSG 229

All error and statistical data (MDR records) are shown for
devices which were listed in the Subsystem Exception Report.
They are listed by CUA for the period indicated. ····NOTE····
Due to space limitations, this report will not
show activity on all devices that were listed
in the Subsystem Exception Report.

D

3480 DEVNO/CUA STATISTICS SUMMARY FOR-0480

REPORT DATE 063 86
PERIOD FROM 049 86
TO
052 86

DEVICES FAILING LIMITS OR PERMANENT ERRORS

EJ
II

DTE
049
049
049
050
050
050
050
050
050
051
051
051
051
051
051
051
a51
051
CPU
A
B
C
D
E

CURRENT LIMITS
MBYTES/ERR

II

HARDWARE

m
am
& CRITERIA
ER F MB PROC DATA CHK

TIME VaLID PA MWRT
T
021022
021228
025623
069527
182840
185954
193136
200742
232824
022619
035419
035510
035849
050204
193036
214532
230711
233355

L32345
L32345
L32345
L18500
L33825
L31800
L16550
L31720
L31918
L13221
L22277
L22814
L22814
L22814
L34645

2B
2B
2B
2B
2B
2B
2B
2B
2B
2B
2B
2B
2B
2B
2B
34
L16553 2B
L16546 2B

21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
20
21
21

40
1
1
201
1
1
119
1
200
173
178
1
1
1
1
0
147
200

TEMP WRT (CT)
999 ( 5)

aERP

TEMP READ (CT)
999 ( 1)

m m mmm m
MB/ERROR ERSE READ DRV CU INSTANT

DATA ERROR
RD WRT RD WRT RD RD TEMPORARY GAPS RTY DEl EQU SPD VAR
FWD BKWD WRITE READ
CHKS RD WRT

0
45
76
0
23
56
0
79
0
1
1
29
41
68
92
0
2
1

0
0
0
0

a
a
a
a
0
a
7
0
0
0
0

a
a
5

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

a

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
7
0
0
0
0
0
0
5

0
0
0
0
0

a

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

0
0
0
0
0
0
0

0
0
0
0
0

a

a

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

178

200

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

0
0
0
0
0

a
0
a
0
0
0
0
0

a
0
1
0
0

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

a 0
a a
a a
0 0
a 0
0 0
a a
a 0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

m
ECC
m
1m
m
HDR
BLK PROC BLK COR
C
WRT READ WRT READ
1
0
7
1
0
0
0

96 12
866 12
2821 14
2097 12
12 12
262 12
197 12
4198 6368
2884 12
544 32
5375 12
5505 12
1966 12
64 12
66 12

0
0
3
12
1
0
0

2687 12
3808 224

2
0

11

SER

0 oaooo
0 00000
9 oaooo
0 aoooa
a 00000

a ooaaa
0 oaooo
7 oaooo
00000
00000
00000
00000
00000
00000
00000
43000
0 00000
0 00000
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

P
U
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E

MODEL SERIAL NUMBER
3a81
218819
3081
018819
3081
170563
3a81
371074
3a81
271280

3480 MI

EC A47957

e CopYright IBM Corp

1984. 1985. 19l1li. 1987

OBR Edit Report
The OBR Edit Report is a detailed report of any OBR/Unit Check
Log record. Service representative (SR) selection/options control
if the OBR records are printed.

OS/VS REL2 SYS1.LOGREC Error Recording Manual,
GC28-D638

•

OS/VS REL3 SYS1.LOGREC Error Recording Manual,
GC28-0668

MSG 230

OBR Edit Report

MSG 230

OBR Edit Report Example

RECORD TYPE -UNIT CHECK

SOURCE - OUTBOARD

CPU

MODEL - XXXX

SERIAL NO. XXXXX

OS/VS RELEASE XX.X

See the following manuals for further information on SR
selection of options for the OBR/Edit report:

•

OBR Edit Report

DAY
IIDATE- 123

HH MM SS TH
TIME 14:27: 14:01

DEVICE TW

~FAILING

II

EI

YEAR
84

.. VOLUME SERIAL

XXXXXXXX

II

BLOCK ID
II BLOCK LENGTH

3480
XXXX
XXXXXX

iJ DEVNOICUA

JOB NAME

XXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXX

The following information is presented in a condensed form for
the 3480 Tape Subsystem.
•

Counter overflow statistics for devices.

•

Demount conditions.

•

Permanent device failures (unit checks and uncorrectable
errors).

•

Temporary or intermittent device failures.

CC
XX

FAILING CCW

ATTENTION
STATUS MODIFIER
CONTROL UNIT END
BUSY

CA
XXXXXX

FL

xx xx

CT
XXXX

UNIT STATUS
X CHANNEL END
X DEVICE END
X UNIT CHECK
X UNIT EXCEPTION

CSW

X
X
X
X

K

xx

CA
XXXXXX

CHANNEL
X
PRGM-CTLD IRPT
INCORRECT LENGTH X
PROGRAM CHECK
X
PROTECTION CHECK X

US

CS

xx xx

CT
XXXX

STATUS
CHAN DATA CHECK
CHAN CTL CHECK
IIF CTL CHECK
CHAINING CHECK

X
X
X
X

[lSENSE BYTE DATA

o

2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
30
XXXX XXXX xxx X XXXX XXXX XXX X XXXX XXXX xxxx XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX

J
CU
CU
CU
. CU

3480 MI

ERR 1
ERR2
ERRL
HW

XXXX XX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX

I

XXXX XX
XXXX

DR ERR 1
DR ERR2

EC336395

C Copyright IBM Corp. 19B6

o

{)

()

()

()

o

I)

t.

EREP

A«IIYSiS/PredictiveQaintenance (ccAnued)

3480 Temporary Error Summary
For best error analysis, use all of the data contained in the body
of thi s report, not just the averages listed at the bottom. The
averages are indicators of overall account performance, such as
TOTAL MEGABYTES PROCESSED versus AVERAGE
MEGABYTES/PERMANENT ERROR.
Note: If more than one entry appears for the same device, the
SHARE cards are eithp.r not present or not correct. For
more information see SHARE cards in EREP Users Guide
and Reference, GA28-1378.
Looking at this report, attempt to "weight" the data in a general
manner, without placing restrictions on any particular columns of
data. Observe the following columns:
1. Mounts
Is the number of mounts consistent across the range of devices?
Is the number of mounts high enough to renect meaningful data
(such as 10 to 15 mounts or more)?
2. MB/ERR and ERRCT

o

o

o

An entry is generated each time thf! following sequence occurs:
a. A write error occurs
b. The tape is repositioned for a retry

diG 361

If an error results in a check code, sense data is sent to the
host. This sense data may have byte 0 bit 1 on, which
indicates "intervention required," This permits the operator
the opportunity of attempting to clear the check condition
without the job ending abnormally,

c. An e"ror is detected on the second attempt
d. The tape is repositioned for another retry
e. A data pattern is written on the tape indicating an "erase
gap,"
If the value in this column is 10 or more, look for one or two
single cartridges as the source of the error and perform these
steps:
a. Refer to the VOLUME STATISTICS REPORT for volumes
exhibiting erase gaps on particular control unit addresses.
b. If unable to isolate to one or two cartridges, suspect the
drive. Use the MD and the START REPAIR option to further
isolate the problem.

3480 Volume Statistics Summary

If the MB/ERR column is less than the number in the LIMIT card
(500) and the error count is equal to or greater than the UMIT
CARD (5) an entry on the exception report will occur.

Analysis must be done for time periods greater than a couple of
days. Use the EREP history tape to obtain data for a week or
more,

The 3480 subsystem is capable of performing well in excess of
the LIMIT card values. Any MB/ERR values less than 500 should
be suspect. Set 'Force Logging' in the control unit and use the
FORCED LOG REPORT to obtain the sense data for further
isolation

If the volume is listed and shows poor performance before and
after the time period in question (Permanent or high Temporary
Errors) suspect the media.

b. Pursue values from 10-99 MB/ERR second, and so on.

EREP AnatYSis/pluctive Maintena.l (Continued)

This report is helpful when investigating a drive check code, as in
the following example:

4. WRITE ERASE GAPS

MB/ERR is calculated by EREP by dividing the total megabytes
read and written by the error count (ERRCT).

a. Pursue values from 0-10 M8:ERR first.

o

If the volume does not show poor performance, use the other
EREP reports (PERMANENT and TEMPORARY ERROR
SUMMARY) to isolate the problem.

3480 Error Code Summary Report

3. MB/COR
This column represents the numb~r of megabytes of data
processed between ECC's.
Any drive that indicates a value of '0' is processing less than one
megabyte of data between ECC's and requires attention.
ECC's mayor may not result in temporary errors. To further
isolate, turn on 'Force Logging' in the control unit.

This report shows Error codes for the control unit (CU) and the
drive (DRV) in sense bytes 10-17 and 20-23 for selected
subsystem errors,
The control unit involved is displayed in column 'CUR'.
The control unit sending the sense data to the host is identified in
column 'CUD',
The channel adapter in use is indicated in column ·CHR'.

Current field data indicates that the nominal value for this column
should be approximately 10-15.

3480 MI EC A57723
"Copyright IRM Corp 1982,1989

IBM Confidential

EREP Analysis/Predictive Maintenance (Continued)

MSG 361

o

o

f)

()

()

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

OBR Edit Report (Continued)

II is the Julian date and year the report

B is the time the error occurred, taken from the OBR

TIME
record.

EI

JOB NAME
is the job name taken from the OBR record
for any listed volume with permanent errors.
BLOCK 10
errors.

o

o

o

II is the logical block position for permanent
II

DEVNO I CUA
is the device number in XA mode or
primary control unit address (PCUA). The message may
refer to a condition that occurred on an alternate CU path.
(See START 400 to determine the actual path.)

o

OBR Edit Report (Continued)

MSG 231

OBR Edit Report (Continued)

MSG 231

m

Field Definitions
DA TE DAY YEAR
ran.

o

DR-ERR2
is the drive hardware-detected error code,
from the OBR record (sense bytes 22 and 23). This error
code defines the second or last failure for any drive and
should not be used to enter the maintenance package if you
have single drive failures. This error information is
supplemental information and may be a result of the first
failure (DEV FRU # 1) in the drive.

OJ

CU-ERRL
is the microcode-detected error FRU code for
the last error (control unit or drive), taken from the OBR
record (sense bytes 14 and 15).

m

CU-HW
is the control unit hardware detected error
code taken from the OBR record (sense bytes 16 and 17).
This error code defines a control unit failure and should be
used to enter the maintenance package if you have multiple
drive failures.

iii

BLK LEN
is the block length as taken from the OBR
record for any listed volume with permanent errors.
Volume Serial
SENSE

11 is the volume serial number.

[J are the sense bytes from the OBR record.

Note: The correct maintenance device connection point is
determined from the information in sense byte 2, using the
procedures described on START 400.

m

CU-ERR 1
is the microcode-detected error code for the
first error (control unit or drivel. taken from the OBR record
(sense bytes 9, 10 and 11). This error code is to be used
as the entry code to the Maintenance Package if
troubleshooting with CU-HW and/or DR-ERR 1 has not
corrected the problem.
A microcode-developed flag byte, taken from the OBR
record (sense byte 9) is also provided. This byte provides
additional information, if available, for CU-ERR 1. This byte,
when available, is further defined in the MI EAD section
under the error code in CU-ERR 1.

m

DR-ERR1
is the drive hardware-detected error code,
from the OBR record (sense bytes 20, and 21). This error
code defines the first failure for any drive and should be
used to enter the maintenance package if you have single
drive failures.
A microcode-developed flag byte, taken from the OBR
record (sense byte 18) is also provided. This byte provides
additional information, if available, for DR-ERR 1. This byte,
when available, is further defined in the MI EAD section
under the error code in DR-ERR 1.

m

CU-ERR2
is the microcode-detected error code for the
second error (control unit or drivel. taken from the OBR
record (sense bytes 12 and 13).

3480 MI

EC336395

III Copynght IBM Corp. 19B4. 19B5. 1986

12L

EREP Analysis / Predictive Maintenance Overview
EREP analysis/predictive maintenance is the process of:
•

Analyzing EREP reports to identify existing problems and
error trends that indicate potential problems.

•

Determining when corrective action should be performed.

•

Deciding what corrective action to perform before the
problem results in a customer service request.

Note:
The EREP reports are described in detail in this
section starting on MSG 100. For the page number of
each report see "Contents" on MSG 1.

About the 3480 Subsystem EREP
Analysis / Predictive Maintenance Procedure
This page provides an overview of the 3480 subsystem EREP
analysis/predictive maintenance procedure. To perform the
EREP analysis/predictive maintenance procedure go to "Starting
EREP Analysis/Predictive Maintenance" on MSG 360.
The 3480 subsystem EREP analysis/predictive maintenance
procedure is designed to aid you in analyzing EREP reports, in
determining when corrective action should be performed, and in
deciding what corrective action to perform. The procedure
guides you through the analysis of EREP reports to:
•
•
•

Identify permanent errors that have not been corrected.
Monitor temporary errors that, if permitted to continue,
could cause a customer service request.
Determine the units in the subsystem that should be worked
on first by identifying the units with the highest number of
failures.

After you have identified the errors and determined that
corrective action is needed, the procedure guides you through
additional analysis to determine if you have a control unit
problem or a drive problem. If you determine that you have a
creating-drive problem, you are directed to the procedure for
hardware errors on that drive.
If you determine that you have hardware temporary errors that
require corrective action, you are directed to an MD procedure.

Use of EREP History Tapes
At times it can be more useful to have more than daily
information on the EREP reports. to determine on-going trends
of performance. Most accounts have the necessary data on a
history tape.
A method to get this data is to build a temporary data set. using
selected parameters to pull the data from the data set. For
detailed information, see EREP User's Guide and Reference,
GA28-1378.

3480 MI

The temporary data set can then be used to run history reports
using a program such as SYSEXN. EVENT and TRENDS reports
can be run by using KEYWORD parameters. The following JCL
is an example of how to build a temporary data set for history.
It must be modified to apply to your specific account:

IIEREPSP

EREP analysis can also be used when system console messages
are not readily available or when trends of errors are to be
analyzed for current problems.

EREP Analysis / Predictive Maintenance Overview

IISTEPI
IIACCIN
II
II
II
IIACCDEV
II
II

JOB MSGLEVEL=l
EXEC PGM=IFCEREP1,PARM='CARD'
DSN=EREP.HIST.TAPE
DO
DCB=(RECFMT=VB,
BLKSIZE=12000),DISP=(OLD.KEEP).
UNIT=3480,VOL=SER=LBJ995
UNIT=SYSDA,DSN=EHISTORY
DD
DISP=(NEW,PASS),SPACE=(CLY,(5,5)),
DD
DCB=(RECMFT=VB,BLKSIZE=4000)5,5)),
DD
UNIT,SYSDA,SPACE=(CYL,(8))
DD
SYSOUT=A,DCB=BLKSIZE=133
DD
SYSOUT=A,DCB=BLKSIZE=133
DO
DO
*

IIDIRECTWK
IIEREPPT
I/TOURIST
IISYSIN
HIST=Y
ACC=Y
CUA=(28o)
DATE=(84020-84040)
VOLID=(TAPE1.TAPE2)

•
•

Hardware permanent errors.
Volume or creating-drive permanent read or write errors on
more than one drive.

The Subsystem Exception report also shows a summary of the
following temporary errors when the limits are specified by the
limit controls (which are described in MSG 105) and the limits
are exceeded:
•
•
•

Hardware failed temporary read or write limits.
Volume or creating drive failed temporary read or write
limits on more than one drive.
Volume failed temporary read or write limits.

The limits can also be adjusted for specific conditions such as:
•

Notes:
1.

the results of your Subsystem Exception report analysis, you will
be directed to, and guided through, the analysis of the detailed
EREP reports. The Subsystem Exception report shows a
summary of the following permanent errors:

/ /STEP 1 specifies that the parm cards are shown after
SYSIN.

2.

//ACCIN defines the input as a history tape.

3.

/ / ACCDEV defines EHISTORY as the temporary data set. to
be used by the next program run.

4.

CUA, DATE, and VOLID are specific selection parameters to
be included in the temporary data set.

•
•

The predictive maintenance procedure guides you through the
analysis of EREP reports to identify problems in the following
order:
1.

Hardware permanent errors

2.

Volume or creating-drive permanent read or write errors on
more than one drive:
a. Identify any read permanent errors that are potential
creating-drive problems.
b. Identify any read permanent errors that are potential
control unit problems relating to the reading drive.
c. Identify any remaining volume permanent read errors.
d. Identify any write permanent errors that are potential
control unit problems.
e. Identify any remaining volume permanent write errors.
Volume or creating-drive failed temporary read or write
limits on more than one drive:
a. Identify any temporary write errors that exceed the
limits and could have been caused by subsystem
hardware.
b. Identify any temporary read errors that exceed the limits
and dre potential creating-drive problems.
c. Ider,tlfy any temporary read errors that exceed the limits
and are potential control unit problems relating to the
reading drive.
d. Identify any remaining volume-caused temporary write
errors that exceed the limits.
e. Identify any remaining volume-caused temporary read
errors that exceed the limits.

Analysis Of EREP Reports
The EREP analysis/predictive maintenance procedure depends
on a thorough analysis of the EREP reports. EREP reports
should be reviewed daily to determine changing trends in the
performance of the 3480 subsystem. This is of particular
importance in identifying creating-drive problems. Remember
when you analyze these reports, it is possible that the problem
which caused a reported error may have been fixed.

3.

EREP reports are analyzed for hardware errors (such as potential
creating-drive problems) to determine whether the problem
exists across multiple drives, which may indicate a control unit
problem, or is a single drive problem. Corrective action is based
on selected error codes, in the sense data, which are used to
determine a fault symptom code (FSC).
EREP analysis for temporary errors cannot be directly used to
define an error code or fault symptom code (FSC). Temporary
errors are reported as statistical data (megabytes read or written
per temporary error), which does not provide error codes for
corrective action. Corrective action is based on a list of FRUs
generated by the MD procedure for temporary errors.
Use the Subsystem Exception report (See MSG 200) as the
starting point for your analysis of EREP reports. Depending on

When you want any temporary error to initiate a corrective
action.
When you want to track deteriorating volumes.
When you want to track increasing temporary error rates.

4.

5.

Volume failed temporary read or write limits:
a. Identify any temporary write errors that exceed the
limits and could have been caused by subsystem
hardware.
b. Identify any temporary read errors that exceed the limits
and are potential creating-drive problems.
c. Identify any temporary read errors that exceed the limits
and are potential control unit problems relating to the
reading drive.
d. Identify any remaining volume-caused temporary write
errors that exceed the limits.
e. Identify any remaining volume-caused temporary read
errors that exceed the limits.

Before You Start Corrective Action
Before you start corrective action, you should review the
customer cleaning procedure. Then determine the
cleanliness of the suspected drive head and guide
assembly as described on CARR-DR 130 (Head, Decoupler,
and Cleaner Block Cleaning Procedure).
If the head and guide assembly needs cleaning, clean the
drive using the tape cleaner cartridge, part 4780527, or
equivalent.
Refer to IBM 3480 Magnetic Tape Subsystem Operators Guide,
GA32-0066 for additional information. If additional cleaning
is needed, perform the cleaning procedure described on
CARR-DR 130. Inform the customer to clean the head
more often.

Hardware failed temporary read or write limits:
a. Identify any hardware temporary write errors that
exceed the limits.
b. Identify any hardware temporary read errors that exceed
the limits.

EC336395

EREP Analysis/Predictive Maintenance Overview

c Copyrighl18M control Unit

11. Lock the rear casters on the new tape unit by turning the
caster lock thumbscrews clockwise until they are tight.

Installing Additional Tape Units (Continued)
8.

12. Repeat the steps on INST 20 and INST 21, for each

Place the next tape unit against the preceding tape unit.
Warning: When installing a B box to a B box with the
automatic cartridge loader feature installed on drive 1,
drive 1 must be opened approximately 5 cm (2 in.) to
prevent the conductive seal from being pinched between
the tape unit frames.

Tape Units

additional tape unit that is attached to the control unit.
13. Go the next step on INST 22.

Note: Be sure the position of the casters does
not prevdnt the tape units from fitting snugly
together.

9.

Fasten the new tape unit to the preceding tape unit by
Installing a hex bolt and washer at the rear of the tape
unit
and at the front of the tape unit
It may be
necessary to remove the Tape Unit Front Safety cover to

0,

fJ.

install hex bolt
to be removed.

fJ.

Rear View

See CARR-DR 2-1 if the cover needs

II Caster

Note: If the tape units are not correctly aligned,
the covers may bind. Ensure that the covers are
not binding.

Lock
Thumbscrew

Tape Unit

Rear View

Front View
Front

Installation Instructions
3480 MI
~.

COPYrign •• HM Cor:>

o

INST 21

EC336396
1~84

1385

1,Pl!!'

nur CJ!P!'nd!09 uoan

~aiue

~jdr9SS.

:If

Add.

2.

4,7,

PlJwef

Manual

D

Off

a,

~.

o.

=:nen

use ttl . . . values for iype:
OC InterlOCK 1..5 MS ."'nU..
2
2.0 M B Str.aming
~
3.0 MB $rruming
C
4.5 MB Streaming
e
{A22 ~"Iy Wllten 4.5 Me ;:eatur. is Instailedt

---------------------1__-0

ILl_-S~=====~~~.___J

Typ,

11111111I1111I111 fllllllllll

~

Ii'

If ~ddreSi is O. :3. 5, S, 9, A, C, F thel"l

l

U

I

o

OC Interlock 1.5 .'VIS max.

.r:(;::::===~--------::~--.,
~ ~(»)
~

5.25 Inch Drive __

3

2.0 MS Str .. min~

B

0

4.5 MS Streaming

F

Power

3.5 Inch Drive

us. the•• 1II.lues for Tv".:

3.0 'VI S Streaming

Start

LOCiI Pawer

Enable

~O'~======~1
:-1.II
II -©~f----O---jP=-'

,

;:,

DO

Type

If aadrHS is

~

4.5 MB Ready

00
Add.

I:

, I' ' :~

4.5 MB Ready

Type

D

DR En.ble
t::J CI
Disable

8[1;
-1=1-,
..
'&= :=1

00

I0

System

Walt

Channel Address

4.5 MB Ready

m

1

Qff

When In local

OC Power

Auto

--

m~----OR------~

Drive Switch Panel

m

Drive Oe.~~~o!.}~~':Iel

[ ~~
D

1m
0
R.... u'ld

Unload

Remy

8 8 LE3
..

',:: ;.~.

No! Readv

I

•

•

E3

I E3
Reset

..

m

m

a

a

Drive Power

.

Online

Offline

Drive Power

~ ~

E3
Reset

Drive Address

Online

E3

Offline

3480 MI EC A57721

Installation Instructions

INST 71

3480 Installation Instructions

Installation Instructions

This page is for control units with 8M
6460460 (See CARR-CU 9) and tape units
with 8M 6460006 (See CARR-DR 9)

A

B

your next level of
support.

Note the addresses of any drives that
do not show the correct display, then
continue with the next step.

Checking the Addresses
15. On the control unit operator setup panel, set the CU

B to CU Online.

After a short delay (1 1/2 minutes or less) does "L=x
P=x" (x being any number between 0 and 71 appear on
any drive display?
YES NO

Note the addresses of any drives that do
not show the correct display, then
continue with the next step.

16. Compare the "L=x" (logical address) portion of each
drive display to the address labelliJ on each display.
Does each drive display match the label?

~ower

off the control unit with the
Power On/Off swi tch II and ver i fy that
the switches are set correctly on the
control unit and tape unit panels. See
"Setting Up for the Checkout" steps 1,
2, and 3 on INST 70 for the correct
switch settings. Correct any switch
settings that are wrong. Power up and
repeat the actions you performed in
step 14.
Does "L=x P=x" appear on any tape
drive display?
YES NO

~he

CU will not load the microprogram and must be fixed to
continue. Set the Normal/Test
switch D to Normal and press
the IHL switch II. Insert the
product maintenance diskette into
the HD and do an IPL on the HD.
Follow the maintenance package to
correct the problem and return
here when the problem is fixed.

YES NO

I

Ensure that all the drive logical
addresses are set correctly.
See
"Setting the Drive Logical and
Physical Addresses" on INST 50.
Leaving the control unit online, power
it off then back on again.
Note the
addresses of any drives whose display
labels II sti II do not match the "L=x"
portion of the display, then continue
to the next step.
Ensure that the Ip=X" (physical address)
Rortion of each display does not match the
Ip=X" portion of any other drive display
in the subsystem.

Does each drive display have a "P=x" number not
shared by any other drive?

Set the Normal/Test switch to Test
and check the CU and tape unit
~witc~ settings again.
See"
Setting Up for the Checkout steps
1,2, and 3 on INST 70 for the
correct switch settings. Correct
any switch settings that are wrong.
Power up and repeat the actions
you performed in step 14.
Does "L-x p.. x" appear on any tape
drive display?
YES NO

YES NO

I

Ensure that all of the drive physical
addresses are set correctly.
See
"Setting the Drive Logical and
Physical Addresses" on INST 50.
Leaving the control unit online, power
it off then on again.
Note any drive
physical addresses that are still
incorrect and continue to the next step.
ontinue with the next step.

II
3480 MI

Checking Read/Write

Note the addresses of any drives
that do not show the correct
display, then continue with the
next step.

See INST 73 for the following locations.

Online/CU Offline switch

D

~all

Running Offline Checkout for a Single
Control Unit Subsystem -,Continued)
Note:

C

Each drive will require about 1 3/4 minutes to execute
the test, and when complete, will show a single
asterisk on the display.

17. On the control unit operator setup panel, set the CU
Online/CU Offline switch

B to CU Offline.

After a delay of 1 1/2 minutes or less, does TEST show
with the indicator bars
flashing on the message
display of any drive?

II

25. While the first drive is being tested, set another blank
to not file protect and insert it into the next
cartridge
drive displaying TEST. The display will show READY U.

D

When UNLOAD appears on the display of the first
drive, the next drive with a tape loaded will begin
testing.

Note:
If an Action message appears on any
drive display, go to INST 5 and perform the
action described for that message. Return here
when finished, and set the Power On/Off
switch
to Off then On and go to step 14 on
this page.

Note: This testing procedure can be
performed with one scratch tape, but you must
wait for each drive to unload the tape. This
increases the test time to 2 1/2 minutes for
each drive.

II

YES NO

I

The CU wi II not load the microprogram
and must be fixed to continue.
Set
the Normal/Test switch D to Normal
and press the I ML sw itch II.
I nser t
the product maintenance diskette into
the MD and do an IPL on the MD.
Follow the maintenance package to
correct the problem and return here
when the problem is fixed.

D

26. When the first drive UNLOADs, move that tape to the
next drive showing TEST. If the cartridge does not
unload, go to "Cartridge Removal by Hand" on CART

10.
27. Repeat this procedure for all drives in the subsystem
showing TEST.

28. If failures occur on multiple drives in a string, there may

Set the Normal/Test switch
to Test
and the Onl ine/Offl ine switch fJ to
Online. Wait until addresses appear on
the drive displays, then repeat step 16
on this page.

be a cable connection problem. Check the seating of
the device data and read bus cables, and the dual
control unit communication cables (for dual control unit
subsystems). See LOC 1 for the control unit and tape
unit cable locations.

Continue to the next step.

18. Set a blank cartridge

When you have finished checking the cables, insert a
cartridge into those drives that were failing and the
tests will be rerun.

D to not file protect.

19. If the Automatic Cartridge Loader feature is installed,
skip the next step.
20. Insert the cartridge into the drive that is nearest the
control unit and displaying TEST. Close the cartridge
latch and skip the next TWO steps.

29. If any drives will not run the tests to completion, note
the failing drive addresses and that CUO was running
the test. This will be used later on INST 90 when the
product package is run.
30. Go to the next step on INST 74.

21. Put a cartridge in the top position of the loader on the
drive nearest the control unit and displaying TEST.

II is set to Auto
1lJ.

22. Ensure that the Loader mode switch
mode and press the Start switch

23. If the display shows Action Message 1, 2, 3, or 5 after
you load the tape cartridge, go to "Action Messages"
on INST 5 and perform the procedure as directed.
Return here when you have completed the required
procedure.
24. The diagnostic will show various messages on the drive
display as it executes, indicat~ng the action the drive is
performing.

EC336395

Installation Instructions

• Capyright IBM Carp. 1984. 1985. 1988

o

INST 72

o

{)

o

o

{)

o

o

INST 72

u

c

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

3480 Installation Instructions

o

o
INST 73

Installation Instructions

This page is for control units with 8M 6460460
(See CARR-CU 9) and tape units with 8M 6460006
(See CARR-DR 9)

Automatic Cartridge
Loader Operator Panel

Auto
System

D~

Manual

WJ

Start

DO
A,..

hM

t· lIGaI"", is Q 3.5, I I .... C. F

",I. t"._ ... ,"'.. '0' T,,_
QC

i .." ... ,OC_

~.5 "". ""-_.

2.01'.41 Sn ....... u'.
3.0 IIItI s" .. """'

• 5 M8 St.... "'.,.,

,".ft
3

•

~

•

IIIIIIU 11111111111111111111
Optional Feature on 3480 A22
Control Units Prior to EC A58284

D

Power

7_I!J____________________-. "

D,iV.OP·..

[
Blank
Cartridge
File Protect
Position

3480 MI EC A57721
,: Copy~'ght IBU COI'P, 1982 ~988

Not File Protect
Position

~~

o
rE5lrE51
lbJjg

~
g
"NIh'
"'0'

Installation Instructions

INST 73

Installation Instructions

3480 Installation Instructions

INST 74

Checking the Initial Microprogram Load (lML)

This page is for control units with 8M 6460460
(See CARR-CU 9) and tape units with 8M 6460006
(See CARR-DR 9)

32. On the control unit operator setup panel. set the Power
On/Off switch

m

to Off. then On.

D

After approximately 60 seconds the Wait light
on the
control unit operator setup panel should be on solidly.

Running Offline Checkout for a Single Control
Unit Subsystem (Continued)

and the Error light

D should be oH.

Are all the lights correct?

Final Checkout

YES NO

31. On the control unit operator setup panel. set the
Normal/Test switch
to Normal.

I

0

The control unit will net load the microprogram and must be fixed to continue.
Ensure the Normal/Test switch D is set
to Normal and the Online/Offline switch
D is Offline. Press the lML switch D.
Insert the product maintenance diskette
into the MD and do an IPL on the MD.
Follow the maintenance package to correct
the problem. and return here when the
problem is fixed.

Do eight asterisks (........ ) show on all drive displays
not showing TEST?
YES NO

I

Is the Normal/Test switch
to Normal?

D

set

YES NO

Go to INST 90. the Offline checkout is comp1ete.

I

Set the swi tch to Normal and
repeat step 26.
Do eight asterisks sho.· on all
drive oisplays not showing TEST?

II

YES NO

I ~ote the drive addresses
that do not show eight
or TEST and
I! asterisks
continue to the next step.

o

m

Operator Setup Panel

-~::-

Rcuo

t=:l CUI

!-,Ml---l t-,

1-1:::: D

~

0"

CI

I

o

§ o.

Wh. . . 1e..1

Continue to the next steo.
Note the drive addresses
not show eight asterisks

hat do
r TEST

and continue to the next

~eo.

in.,

00CI...

Continue to the next step.

o

t=:l CI
0 ... 101,

Il10

CU Addrns

DR hi

BRhllllo

ARhllllo

'~H

'[II

00

DD
..... I,,.

D~

m

A.tI.

1".

If address is O. 3. 5. 6. 9. A.. C, F then
use these values for Type:

InsHucllons

for". Sol r YD.
M.1 ....1'10'... vOOft ."UI .t Act.n...

Il1o

00CI.......

S.l Ch....,.; .. dO....

DC Interlock 1.5 Me rnax.
2.0 M B Str .. minl

3
B

3.0 Me Str •• ming

0

4.5 MS Streaming

F

f

Optional Feature on 3480 A22
Control Units Prior to EC A58284

3480 MI EC A57721

Installation Instructions

" COPYright 'BIA Corp. 1982. 1988

# .)

\.

INST 74

o

o

o

c

o

o

c

o

o

o

Notes
Notes

3480 MI

EC336396

!C Copyrignt IBM Corp.

1984. 1985. 19116. 1987

Notes

INST 75

INST 75

Installation Instructions

3480 Installation Instructions
This page is for control units with BM 6460460
(See CARR-CU 9) and tape units with BM 6460006
(See CARR-DR 9)
Running Offline Checkout for a Dual Control Unit
Subsystem
Note: See INST 77 for the physical locations.
This procedure is used for oHline checkout of a dual control unit
subsystem only. Go to INST 70 if you have a single control unit
subsystem.
The offline checkout tests whether both control units can
communicate with all the drives in the subsystem. Therefore,
some steps in the following procedure appear to be repeated.

4. On each drive with the Automatic Cartridge Loader
feature, set the Loader switch
to Auto.

m

I

Are all the switches set correctly?

5. On both control units:

I

3.5 Inch IML Disk Drive

Switch off the mainline circuit
breaker (CBl on the ac power
supply) and set the switches as
specified in steps I, 2, and 3;
then perform steps 5 through 7.

a. Push the release button on the IML disk drive

II and remove the head protector.

b. Insert the IML diskette (label up and toward you)
and push until the drive closes.
c. Set the Power On/Off switch
to On.

YES NO

I

Note the drive addresses of the drives
without the special box-shaped
symbols and which CU those drives are
attached to, and continue to the next
step.

Does a single asterisk show for
ten seconds or 10nger on each
drive display?

1:1

Continue to the next step.

YES NO

5.25 Inch IML Disk Drive,

a. Open the latch on the IML disk drive

I ~ote
the drive addresses of
the dri ves wi thout a

II and

remove the head protector.
and close the drive latch.
c. Set the Power On/Off switch

1:1 to On.

Switching on the Power

I

13. On each drive switch panel, set the Online/Offline switch
m to Online and ~erify that the special box-shaped
symbols go away.

single asterisk, and which CU
those dri ves are attached to,
and continue to the next step.

Continue to the next step.

Do the special box-shaped symbols go away?

Note the drive addresses of the
drives without a sing1e
asterisk, and which CU those drives
are attached to, and continue to
the next step.

YES NO

I

Note the drive addresses of the drives
where the special box-shaped symbols
do not go away, and which CU those
drives are attached to; then continue
to the next step.

Continue to the next step.

the ac power supply) is off; then switch it On.

7. On both control units, set the Unit Emergency Power
switch
to Power Enable.

II

8. Press the Local Power Enable pushbutton

Setting Up for the Checkout

Do special box-shaped symbols show in the first and last
positions of the message display?

YES NO

6. Ensure that the main circuit breaker on the CU (CB1 on

11

The error light
will light when certain portions of the offline
tests are run. This condition is normal and does not indicate a
failure in the control unit unless you are asked to note the status
of the error light.

12. On each drive switch panel, set the Online/Offline switch
m to Offline.

YES NO

b. Insert the IML diskette (label !.lP and toward you)
As you progress through the tests, you are asked to note the
addresses of any drives without the display response expected.
Also, you should note whether the drive failed during checkout
from CUO or CU1. After the offline checkout is complete, you will
be sent to INST 90 to analyze any drives that failed during the
checkout.

INST 76

B

on both

10. On each drive switch panel, set the Drive Power switch
to Off; then set it back to On.

Continue with the next step.

II

Does a Single asterisk
on each drive display?

n show for ten seconds or longer

_

14. Go to INST 78 to continue the offline checkout.

control units.
9. Does a single asterisk (0) show for ten seconds or longer
on each drive display?

Note: The offline checkout should be performed by only one
service representative.
1. On both control unit operator setup panels:

1:1

a. Verify that the Power On/Off switch
is set to
Off.
b. Set the Normal/Test switch
to Test.
c. Verify that the CUO/CU1 switch
is set to CUO
on control unit 0 and is set to CU1 on control
unit 1.
d. Verify that the CU Online/CU Offline switch
is set to CU Offline.

0

I Note
I

the drive addresses of the
drives without a single
asterisk, and which CU those drives
are attached to, and continue to the
next step.

Continue to the next step.

fJ

11. On each drive switch panel, press then release the drive
Reset switch

m.

II

Does a single asterisk (0) show for ten seconds or longer
on each drive display?

YES NO

2. On all drive operator panels:
a. Set the Ready/Not Ready switches
Ready.

YES NO

ED

I

Note the drive addresses of the
drives without a single
asterisk, and which CU those drives
are attached to, and continue to the
next step.

to

3. On all drive switch panels:

Continue to the next step.

II

are set
a. Verify that the Drive Power switches
to On.
b. Verify that the Online/Offline switches mare
set to Online.

Installation Instructions

3480 MI EC A57721
C Copyrrght IBM Corp. 1882. 1988

o

o

,f)

{)

t)

INST 76

o·

o

o

34.80 Installation Instructions

o

o

o

o

o

o

Installation Instructions

This page Is for control units with BM6460460
(See CARR-CU 9) and tape units with BM 6460006
(See CARR-DR 9)

Automatic: Cartridge
Loader Operator Par-el

m

Auto

~

:.t •••
£....1"',

,,-

tr
o.

DIM~

'_I ..".

"''''!I I. I.e"
011

.viM I

S'lstam

0

Manual

. , _ Off

D

..

DR :oa'"
0:1....,.

• R :oa...
t::::l :J......

=

c::::II

1111111111111111111111111111

Ct~1
;

Start

I

:iI £O'~======r:i!
..
--=g::.i,j:-,
I

...;~

Ii

~
O~_____

1~~~O~I~--..J
!L'.-J:

4.5:1119 R_dy

EJ[]

I

T,u

Power

3.5 Inch Drive

-

5.25 Inch Drive

f ....... il~. 3. 5.1 .•. A. : . ~ ;FIe'"
wl.:fI . . ".h• • "o' 'TYM'
CC L"lr.CC 1.J
3

\II. "9'\a..

o

Z., "'. Sor..",;",
:I.'
",. Sor.....;'"
•. 5 'W I Scr..",i".

•
0
II

»)

Drive Operator Pli!nel

Drive Switch Panel

"'"

[

~~

D

0

._.....

.8

m

-.-8 8..........

m

3480 MI EC A57723

IBM Confidential

l

~a
Drive P:)wer

~B

I
- EJ
Aeset

1ft
~

Cl Copyright IBM Corp. 1182.1181

m

Onlin.

OHlin.

t3
E3

Drive Power

~ ~

AlSlt

Drive AddrlU

Onlin.

8

Offlin.

Installation Instructions

INST 77

o

o

o

f)

o

()

o

()

o

o

c

o

o

o

c

o

o

c

3480 Installation Instructions
This page is for control units with 8M 6460460
(See CARR-CU 9) and tape units with 8M 6460006
(See CARR-DR 9)

a

a

EJ

m

~.tO'~tup~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
o

1'4.,,,,,1

R

cuo

F=t CU 0"1,",

To..

t::l CUI

t:::1 CU Ottlone

A

R

E""bl.

CJO,Yblt

CI

Add,

o

Typ.

cu

=

=

nee; je~!'ldl"g :loon 'Ialu~"J! A.j(HP.~S

\

POWI"

Enlbj,

Pawer

Off

System

III

0

Manual

D

Start

Local Power
E:lollble
~

11111111" 111111111111111111

-0

CJ

Power

4.5 Me Ready

00

s~! C:1an:I!!" A~c!t!SS t,,~:, S~~ "7 ,(::Ie

/

PQwe,

~

4.5 Me Ready

~adress li1S:~lIctloI1S

D

t:::] OI\olIble

Crnl
Add,

tf

DR E"obl,

Ern",enc'f

§

0"

Ott

CIUbl,

A':::::::=::::'

00

INST 77

Auto

Unit

\

When In lOCi'

8 RE"Obl'

Chl ••,1 Add"...

4.5 Me Ready

OIML
=

Error

t::l

Installation Instructions

1m

~

CI

OC POw..

o

Automatic Cartridge
Loader Operator Panel

II

R

o

EJ0
A.d

Ty ••

Add

T'I"

If adore" is 2. 4,7.3.3. ::l. :: :nitn

use 'tn_e val",. for ivai:
OC Interlock 1.5 Ma -nu.
2
2.0 MS Str •• ming
..l.
3.0 MB Str •• ",in;
C
4.5 M S StrNmin9
e
(A22 Only When 4.5 ""3 '='.t!.or' " Inltalled)

TVllf

5.25 Inch Drive

If "ddrHS is O. 3. 5, 6, 9. A, C, ;: tne"
us. ,=n ... "alun for Tyoe

DC InterlOck 1.S MB max.
2.0 'VIa Str •• ming
3.0 .'VI a Stre.ming
4.3 M

a Str •• ming

3
B
0
F

Drive Operator Panel

Drive Switch Panel

I'

[

m

~~

0
R.IM

D

Un_

1m

.8 8 [84
R.adv

~Ol

RUdV

m

m

I

I

~E3
Reset
Online

~E3
Offline

3480 MI EC A57721
( Copyrlgh1 IBM Corp. 1982. ·988

a

~E3
Drive Power

Drive Power

~ ~

E3
Reset

Drive Address

Online

E3

Offline

Installation Instructions

INST 77

Installation Instructions

3480 Installation Instructions
Checking Read/Write, Control Unit 0

This page is for control units with 8M 6460460
(See CARR-CU 9) and tape units with 8M 6460006
(See CARR-DR 9)

A B

Running Offline Checkout for a Dual Control Unit
Subsystem (Continued)

Note the addresses of any drives that do
not show the correct display, then continue
with the next step.

Note: See INST 79 for the following locations.

16. Compare the "L=x" (logical address) portion of each
drive display to the address label
on each display.

II

Checking the Addresses, Control Unit 0

Does each drive display match the label?

15. On the CUO operator setup panel, set the CU Online/CU
Offline switch
to CU Online.

fJ

After a short delay (2 1/2 seconds or less) does" L = x
P = x" (x being any number between 0 and F) appear on
any drive display?

I

~~er.off.the centrol
uni: with the Power
EI and ver1fy that the

,

O~IOfT SWltch

I

switches are set correctly on the control
un; t and tape un it pane 1s • See ·Set t ; ng Up
for the Checkout" steps I, 2. and 3 on INST
76 for the cor"ect switch settings. Correct
any switch settings that are wrong. Power
up and repeat the actions you perfonned in
steo 14.

I
I
I
'I'

I
1

Ensure that the "pox" (phys i ca I address)
portion of each display does not match the
·p·x· portion of any other drive display
in the subsystem.

I

Does each drive display have a "P=x" number not
shared by any other drive in the subsystem?

II

Note: If an Action message appears on any display, go
to INST 5 and perform the action described.
Return here, set the Power On/Off switch
to
Off then On and go to step 15 on this page.

II

I

Set the Normal/Test switch to Test and
check the CU and tape uni t swi tch
settings again. See 'Setting up for
the Checkout" steps I, 2, and 3 on
INST 76 for the correct switch
settings. Correct any switch settings
that are wrong. Power up and repeat
the actions you performed in step 15.

I

The CU wili net load the microprogram
and must be fixed to continue. Set the
Normal/Test switch
to Normal and
press the IML switch~. Insert the
product maintenance diskette into the MD
and do an IPL on the MD. Follow the
maintenance package to correct the
problem and return here when the problem
is fixed.

26. When the first drive UNLOADs, move that tape to the
next drive showing TEST. If the cartridge does not
unload. go to "Cartridge Removal by Hand" on CART 10.

0

27. Repeat this procedure for all drives in the subsystem
showing TEST.
28. If failures occur on multiple drives in a string. there may
be a cable or terminator connection problem. Check the
seating of the device data and read bus cables. and the
dual control unit communication cables (for dual control
unit subsystems). See LOC 1 for the control unit and
tape unit cable locations.

Set the Normal/Test switch
to Test
and the Onl ine/Offl ine switch
to
Online. Wait until addresses appear on
the drive displays, then repeat step 17
on this page.

fJ

Continue to the next step.

18. Set a blank cartridge

D to not file protect.

Ensure that all of the drive phySical
addresses are set correctly. See
"Setting the Drive Logical and
Physical Addresses" on INST 50.

20. Insert the cartridge into the drive that is nearest the
control unit and displaying TEST. Close the cartridge
latch and skip the next TWO steps.

Leaving the control unit online, power
it off then on again. Note any drive
physical addresses that are still
incorrect and cant i nue to the next step.

21. Put a cartridge in the top position of the loader on the
drive that is nearest the control unit and displaying
TEST.

Continue with the next step.

22. Ensure that the Loader mode switch
mode and press the Start switch

iii.

When you have finished checking the cables. insert a
cartridge into those drives that were failing and the tests
will be rerun.
29. If any drives will not run the tests to completion. note the
failing drive addresses and that CUO was running the
test. This will be used later in INST 90 when the product
package is run.
30. Go to the next step on INST 81.

mis set to Auto

23. If the display shows Action Message 1, 2, 3, or 5 after
you load the tape cartridge, go to "Action Messages" on
INST 5 and perform the procedure as directed. Return
here when you have completed the required procedure.

Does 'Lox P'x' appear on any tape
drive display?
YES NO

I

Note: This testing procedure can be performed with one
scratch tape, but you must wait for each drive to
unload the tape. This increases the test time to 2
1/2 minutes for each drive.

~C

19. If the Automatic Cartridge Loader feature is installed,
skip the next step.

YES NO

and must be fixed to continue. Set the
NormallTest switch R_to Normal and
press the IML swi tch----g. Insert the
product rna; ntenance di skette into the MD
and do an :PL on the MD. Foll ow the
rnai ntenance package to correct the
prOblem and return here "hen the problem
is fixed.
•

When UNLOAD appears l>n the display of the first drive,
the next drive with a taJle loaded will begin testing.

After a delay of 1 1/2 minutes or less, does TEST show
with the indicator bars
flashing on the message
display of any drive?

R

I!I

;;;·~~'cu.m"" '''' '"' .,,~...._

II iI

I

fJ

Does "L=x P'x' appear on any tape drive

.1

I

I

Ensure that all the drive logical
addresses are set correctly. See
"Setting the Drive Logical and
Physical Addresses' on INST 50.
Leaving the control unit online, power
it off then back on again. Note the
addresses of any dri ves whose di spl ay
labels
still do not match the "L=x"
portion of the display, then continue
to the next step.

YES NO

17. On the control unit (CUO) operator setup panel, set the
CU Online/CU Offline switch
to CU Offline.

YES

YES NO

25. While the first drive is being tested, set another blank
cartridge
to not file protect and insert it into the next
drive displaying TEST. The display will show READY U.

fJ

I

Note the addresses of any drives that
do not show the correct display, then
continue with the next step.

!all your next level of support.

24. The diagnostic will show various messages on the drive
display as it executes, indicating the action the drive is
performing.

Note the addresses of any drives that do
show correct display, tnen continue with
the next step.

A B

Each drive will require about 1 3/4 minutes to execute
the test, and when complete, will show a single asterisk
on the display.

Installation Instructions

3480 MI EC AS7721
c: Copy,ighl18M Co,p. ~ge2. 1988

()

INST 78

o

()

f)

u

~.).

t

{)

INST 78

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

3480 Installation Instructions

o

o

Installation Instructions

INST 79

This page is for control units with 8M 6460460
(See CARR-CU 9) and tape units with 8M 6460006
(See CARR-DR 9)

Opeiator Setup Panel

o

B

n

II

Y

J.D

_/-

Automatic Cartridge
Loader Operator Panel

.....

~-----t----I----r,:==l..:==~r~J=~:H='
"M,. ='. .::ili 0
0""
tjT.'
/§
:::
t::::l

R .~...,
t::l '"I

R tUD
t:::::J CUl

=0

DC'._

R

CU

=0

!

cu 0.....

0""""

=0

Oft

~====_=.="~,,u='~====~"=_=D"~

=

111 •• \

Auto

DRE~'"

System

t:::::l =0
D~"I.

em
4.5 .... a

Manual

Start

"e.,v

[~][ID

If
~

.oes,...

IS

Aad
T,a'
O. :I. 5,5,; A.. C ,:

.. t" ... v.h....

trI..,

fO' TYQ4"

OC i"t.,.IO::_ 1 5 va
:.0 M8 SU.. ..,;"9
l.O MS StT .. m,"'II
".5 ~S Str_,.,ing

,."..

l
B
0
~

II " 111111111111111111111111
Optional Feature on 3480 A22
Control Units Prior to EC A58284

o

Drive Operator Panel

T

D

Blank
Cartridge
File Protect
Position

3480 MI EC A57721
~ CODyr'gnt IBM Corc.

'982 . 988

Power

I:l

o

Not File Protect
Position

Installation Instructions

INST 79

3480 Installation Instructions

Installation Instructions

This page is for control units with BM 6460460
(See CARR-CU 9) and tape units with BM 6460006
(See CARR-DR 9)
Running Offline Checkout for a Dual Control Unit
Subsystem (Continued)
Note: See INST 82 for the following locations.

Does each drive display match the label?

Checking the Addresses, Control Unit 1
32. On the CU1 operator setup panel, set the CU Online/CU
Offline switch
to CU Online.

There is a cable connection problem.
Power off CUI and check the seating
of the devi ce data and read bus
cab 1es and the dual contra I uni t
COIIII1unicationcables. See LOC 1 for
the control uni t and tape un; t cable
locations.

After a short delay (2 1/2 minutes or less) does "L=x
P = x" (x being any number between 0 and F) appear on
any drive display?

0

Do eight asterisks (" ....... ) show on all drive displays not
showing TEST?
YES NO

i

Is the Normal/Test switch

0

set to Normal?

Does 'L=x P=x" appear on any tape drive
display?

Does each drive di spl ay match the label?

YES NO

YES NO

The CU wi 11 not load the mi croprogram
and must be fixed to continue. Set the
Norma 1 Test swi tch
to Normal and
press the IML sWitch-lJ. Insert the
product rna i ntenance diskette ; nto the MD
and do an IPL on the MO. Fon Ow the
maintenance package to correct the
prob 1em and return here wher. the problem
is fixed.

Il__

YES NO

I

Set the switch to Normal and repeat step 31.
Do eight asterisks show on all drive displays
not showing TEST?

I

Continue to the next step.
Note the drive addresses that do not show eight
asterisks or TEST and continue to the next step.

Does "L=x P=x" appear
drive d;splay?

01'1

I
I:

You must now check out CU1 and all the drives again to be sure
that CU1 can communicate with all the drives.
Go to the next step to test CU1.
Note: Do not change the switch settings or power off CUO during
the following checkout of CU1.

When you have finished checking
cab 1es, power on the CU. After
delay of 2 1/2 minutes or less,
the ·P=x· portion of each drive
to the ·P=x· portion of all the
drive displays.

+here is a cable connection problem.
Power off CUI and check the seating
of the device data and read bus cabl es,
and the dual control unit cOllll1unication
cab 1es. See LOC 1 for the control un i t
and tape unit cable locations.

any tape

Note the addresses of any drives that
do not show the correct display, then
continue with .the next s:ep.
Note the addresses of anj drives that do not
show the correct display, then continue w;th
the next step.
Note the addresses of any drives that do not
show the· correct di sp 1ay, then cant i nue wi th
the next step.

YES NO

I I

I

IIhen you have finished checking the
cab 1es, power on the CU. After a
delay of 2 1/2 minutes or less,
compare the "P'x' portion of each
drive displ ay to the "P=x" portion
of all the other dri ve d i sp 1ays.

tll your next I evel of support.

the
a
compare
display
other

Does each drive have a 'P=x" number
not shared by any other drive?

NOTE: Do not change any of the CU
switch settings while checking the
cable connection problem, except
for the Power On/Off swi tch.

YES NO

I

NOTE: Do not change any of the CU
switch settings while checking out
the cable connection problem, except
for the Power On/Off swi tch.

YES NO

Continue to the next step.

You have completed the checkout of'CUO and the drives attached
to both control units. If the tests worked correctly, you know that
CUO can communicate with all the drives.

There is a cable connection problem.
Power off CUI and check the seating of
the device data and read bus cables
and the dual control unit communication
cabl es. See LOC ! for the contrel unit
and tape unit cable locations.

I

Call the next level of support.

Does each drive di spl ay have a "P'x"
number not shared Dy any other drive?

Set the Normal iTest switch to Test and
check the CU and tape unit swi tch
settings again. See "Setting Up for the
Checkout" steps 1, 2, and 3 on INST 76
for the correct switch settings. Correct
any switch settings that are wrong. Power
up and repeat the actions you performed
in step 32.

Note the drive addresses that do not show
eight asterisks or TEST and continue to
the next step.

I

If this drive failed during the checkout of cue, note that it also failed on
on CUI and go to the next step on INST 83.
If it did not fail during the checkout of
C.UO, continue with this step.

Ensure that the ·P=x" (physical address)
portion of each display does not match
the 'P'x' portion of any ether drive
display in the subsystem.

YES NO

8J.

YES NO

EI

II

I

Call the next I evel of support.

Does each drive display have a "P = x" number not
shared by any other drive?

When you have fini shed checking the
cables, power on the control unit.
After a delay of 2 1/2 minutes or less,
compare the "L=x· portion of each drive
display to the adare.s label
on the
drive.

I

0

Ensure that the "P=x' (physical address)
portion of each display does not match the
"P=x" portion of any other drive display
in the subsystem.

NOTE: 00 not change any of the CU
switch settings while checking out
the cable connection problem except
for the Power On/Off swi tch.

Power off the control unit and verify that
the control unit and tape unit switches (for
CUI and the drives physically attached to
CUI) are set correctly. See 'Setting Up for
the Checkout' steps 1, 2, and 3 on INST 76
for the correct switch settings. Correct
any switch settings that are wrong. Power
up and: repeat the actions you perfonned in
step 32.

I

II

It"~":. : : : : ::~~; ::'

I

fJ

I

31. On the CUO operator setup panel, set the Normal/Test
switch
to Normal.

I

YES NO

YES NO

Final Checkout of Control Unit 0

ABC

INST 81

Call the next 1eve 1 of support.

Go to the next step on I NST 83.
Go to the next step on INST 83.

Does each drive have a ·P=x· number
not shared by any other dri vel
YES NO

I

A

II

C 0

33. Compare the "L= x" (logical address) portion of each
drive display to the address label
on each display.

EJ

3480 MI EC A57721

Installation Instructions

C Copyright IBM Corp. 1982. 1988

f

}

0

~)

rl

t

,

)

~)

t. •

r)

rl

~.l

INST 81
f

\

'\

j

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

3480 Installation Instructions

Installation Instructions

o
INST 82

This page is for control units with 8M 6460460
(See CARR-CU 9) and tape units with 8M 6460006
(See CARR-DR 9)

Jl

Operator Setup Panel

~--~'-------------------~7~------~t--r,========~lt~~~~
~:I;rgencv
I'
0
o
Be;,:B
I \

power

aNolml1
leu

A

B

B

t:j

=

Enlbl.

REn.bl.

Dlubl,

Oluble

D

C2

D

C2

/
Power OH

,

00
Type

Add.

If addr,ss is 2. 4,7,8.8. O.
use t"fte values for Type
OC Int.rloe~ 1.5 MS ~a ....

o

2.0

·'\its

=men

StreamIng

~.O MB Streaming
4.5 Me Streaming
iA22 Only When 4.3 Me ;:: •• tur

Ot"bl.

loc.1 Power
Enlble

m

LJ~

I.

DO

DD

Type

=

D

D~.,~

1 __ •

!I

Add.

oREnlblt

C[I

B

A

Off
Whtn In lOCI'

Error

C,ubl!

Ch,nn.1 Addr ...

p

P::: Enlbl.

=

=

=

~

cu Onion.

t::::J CU Offhn.

CUI

DC Power
Enlbl.

R

SCUO

Type

Add

Type

If address is O. 3, 5, 6. 9, A. C. F then
us. these ... alues for Type"
DC InterlOCk: 1.5 Me max.
:l

2.0 M9 Streaming
3.0 M B Suea,..,ing
4.3 Me Streaming

a

0
F

Optional Feature on 3480 A22
Control Units Prior to EC A58284

Drive Operator Panel

o
Not R • .,.,

3480 MI EC A57721

Installation Instructions

_\

$ -~

INST 82

3480 Installation Instructions

Installation Instructions

This page is for control units with BM 6460460
(See CARR-CU 9) and tape units with BM 6460006
(See CARR-DR 9)

40. If the display shows Action Message 1, 2, 3, or 5 after
you load the tape cartridge, go to "Action Messages" on
INST 5 and perform the procedure as directed. Return
here when you have completed the required procedure.

Running Offline Checkout for a Dual Control Unit
Subsystem (Continued)

41. The diagnostic will show various messages on the drive
display as it executes, indicating the action the drive is
performing.
Each drive will require about 1 3/4 minutes to execute
the test, and when complete, will show a single asterisk
on the display.

Note: See INST 84 lor the following locations.

Checking Read/Write, Control Unit 1
34. On the control unit (CU1) operator setup panel, set the
CU OnlinefCU Offline switch
to CU Offline.

II

Does TEST show with the indicator bars
the message display of any drive?

III flashing on

Note: If an Action message appears on any display, go
to INST 5 and perform the action described.
Return here and set the Power On/Off switch
to Off then On; then go to INST 81, step 32, and
continue.

m

B

When UNLOAD appears on the display of the first drive,
the next drive with a tape loaded will begin testing.
Note: This testing procedure can be performed with one
scratch tape, but you must wait for each drive to
unload the tape. This increases the test time to 2
1/2 minutes for each drive.
43. When the first drive UNLOADs, move that tape to the
next drive showing TEST. If the cartridge does not
unload, go to "Cartridge Remova! by Hand" on CART 10.

YES NO

I

The CU will not load the micr~program
and mus t be fi xed to cont i nue. Set
the Normal/Test switch Lto Normal
and press the IML switch--ml. Insert
the product maintenance diskette into
the MO and do an IPL on the MO.
Follow the maintenance package to
correct the problem and return here
when the problem is fixed.

44. Repeat this procedure for all drives in the subsystem
showing TEST.

Checking the Initial Microprogram Load (IML)

Final Checkout of Control Unit 1

D

48. Set the NormallTest switch
to Normal on the CU1
control unit operator setup panel.
.

r·······) show on all drive displays

Do eight asterisks
not showing TEST?

49. Ensure that the IML diskettes in CUO and CU1 are at the
same, or equivalent, microcode level; if not, you will get
an error light when you attempt an IMl.
Note: See the labels on the IML diskettes.
On both CUO and CU1, set the Power On/Off switch
Off, then On.

YES NO

I

m

to

II

Is the NOr'lla 1/Test swi tch D set
to Normal?

After approximately 60 seconds the Wait light
on the
control unit operator setup panel should be on solidly.
and the Error light
should be off.

fJ

YES NO

I

Are all the lights correct?

Repeat step 39.
Do eight asterisks show on all
drive displays not showing TEST?

YES NO

I

The control unit will not load the microprogram and must be fixed to continue.
Ensure the Normal Tes t swi tch Dis set
to Normal and the Online/Offline switch
Dis Offl i ne. Press the IML switch D.
Insert the Product Maintenance diskette
into the MD and do an IPL on the MD.
Follow the maintenance package to correct
the problem, and return to this page and
repeat step 40 when the problem is fixed.

YES NO

I

Note the drive addresses
that do not show eight
asterisks or TEST and
continue to the next step.
Continue to the next step.
Note the drive addresses that do
not show eight asterisks or TEST
and continue to the next step.

Go to INST 90; the Offline checkout is
complete.

Continue to the next step.

45. If failures occur on multiple drives in a string, there may
be a cable connection problem. Check the seating of the
device data and read bus cables, and the dual control
unit communication cables (for dual control unit
subsystems). See LOC 1 for the control unit and tape
unit cable locations.

Set the Ne"mal jTest switch 0 to Test
and the Online/Offiine switch D to
Online. Wait until addresses aocear on
the drive ~splays, then repeat' ~tep 34
on thi s cage.

When you have finished checking the cables, insert a
cartridge into thcse drives that were failing and the tests
will be rerun.

Continue to the next step.
35. Set a blank cartridge

42. While the first drive is being tested. set another blank
cartridge
to not file protect and insert it into the next
drive displaying TEST. The display will show READY U.

INST 83

46. If any drives will not run the tests to completion, note the
failing drive addresses and that CU1 was running the
test. This will be used later on in INST 90 when the
product package is run.

B to not file protect.

36. If the Automatic Cartridge Loader feature is installed,
skip the next step.

47. Goto the next step and continue.
37. Insert the cartridge into the drive that is nearest the
control unit and displaying TEST. Close the cartridge
latch and skip the next TWO steps.
38. Put a cartridge in the top position of the loader on the
drive that is nearest the control unit and displaying
TEST.

II
1IiJ.

39. Ensure that the Loader mode switch
mode and press the Start switch

is set to Auto

3480 MI EC AS7721

Installation Instructions

C Copyright IBM Corp. 1982. '988

o

{)

()

{)

f)

t

()

rl

INST 83

o

o

o

o

o

o

3480 Installation Instructions

o

o

o

o

Installation Instructions

INST 84

This page is for control units with 8M 6460460
(See CARR-CU 9) and tape units with 8M 6460006
(See CARR-DR 9)

D

Operator Setup Panel

o

/

E1

/

I
FlII.,...

1

C........ Add ....

o

~

'DO
m

-I

4.5 MB Ready

00
Add.

00

Typ.

Add.

=

CI

'[I

Add.

Typ.

1ft ••uI

DO

Typ.

Add.

DC IntarlociC. 1.5 MB mix.

2

A

Typ.

If ladr.,s is 0, 3. 5.6, 9. A. C, F tn."
us. these ''''lluI' for Tva.:

use these values for Tvpe:
2.0 MS Streaming

LOCII POWft

E•• bl,

11

If .adr... is 2. 4, 7. 8. S. O. E then

o

D

DR Enabl.
DO...b,.

t:::lo",,~

CI

A[I

OH

WIt...

REo.b'.

OMbI.

=

O.

WI.I

B~E"b"

Do",,~

c:::::l

lloIL

CI

CI
Erro,

Automatic Cartridge
Loader Operator Panel

1~
tj

D

t:::l CU OHio...

CUI

AREAl'"

1m

RCUOn'o..

§CUO

t:::l T..I

II

3.0 Me Stre.ming
C
4.5 MS Stre.ming
E
( 22 Onlv When 4.5 MS F •• tur. is Instilled'

OC Int.rlock 1.5 Me
2.0 MB Streaming
3.0 MS Streaming
4.5 Me Str •• ming

miX.

3
S
C

D

F

Optional Feature on 3480 A22
Control Units Prior to EC A58284

Drive Oper atQr Pane

~~7

/'"

/
0

A_....

0
3480 MI EC A57721

~

-~ ~

Blank.
Cartridge

_A_

Installation Instructions

INST 84

3480 Installation Instructions
This page Is for control units with 8M 6460460
(See CARR·CU 9) and tape uriits with 8M 6460006
(See CARR·DR 9)

5.

Insert the product maintenance diskette Into the MD, and
do an IPL on the MD.

6.

Select Option 1 for each drive whose address was noted
during the offline checkout of CUD (If any) and Is
physically attached to CUD. If no drive addresses were
noted during the offline checkout of CUD, select Option 3
and run the last drive attached to CUD.

7.

If you are Installing a dual control unit subsystem,
connect the MD to CU1 and repeat steps 2-6 for CUi
where CUD was called out. Use the other support and
product diskettes which come with CU1 so they are
configured and verified.

8.

After all the problems have been fixed (If any). Insert the
support diskette and go to INST 100 to run the channel
wrap test on each channel In the subsystem.

Configuring the Maintenance Device Support
Diskette and Analyzing Drives with the MD
1.

Connect the maintenance device (MD) to CUD. See MD
4D.

2.

Insert the support diskette Into the MD, and do anlPL on
the MD.

3.

Enter the serial number requested by the MD. When
configured, the main menu will be displayed.
Note: If the support diskette has already been
configured, the main menu will display Immediately. If
the serial number of the control unit Is wrong, the
support diskette can be reconfigured using the following
procedure:

4.

a.

Select option 3 (SUPPORT UTILITIES) and press
enter.

b.

Select option 4 (RE-CONFIGURE DSKT) and
press enter.

c.

Perform step 3 above.

Installation Instructions

INST 90

Installation Instructions

INST 90

Check the CU serial number on the machine frame
against the serial number set on the drive adapter card
by performing the following steps:
a.

Select Option 2 (SUBSYS DSPLY/ALTER) of the
main menu.

b.

Select Option 1 (SUBS CON FIG DSPL Y), then
compare the CU serial number on the MD
display to the serial number on the CU machine
frame.

Does the serial number on the MD display match
the serial number on the machine frame?
YES ND

I

Go to CARR-CU 1189. "Drive Adapter Card
Switch Setting." Return here and repeat
step 4 when you have correctly set the
switches on the adapter card.
Continue with the next step.

3480 MI

EC336396

© CopyrighllBM Corp.

f)

1984. 1985. 1986. 1987

()

fl

[)

,f

)

:)

{)

{)

tJ

:1

3480 IDaliation InstrucA,s

o

This page Is for control units with 8M 6460460
(See CARR-CU 9) and tape units with 8M 6460006
(See CARR-DR 9)
Configuring the Maintenance Device Support
Diskette and Analyzing Drives with the MD
1. Connect the maintenance device (MD) to CUO. See MD

40.
2. Insert the support diskette into the MD, and do an IPL on
the MD.
3. Enter the serial number requested by the MD. When
configured, the main menu will be displayed.
Note: If the support diskette has already been
configured, the main menu will display
immediately. If the serial number of the control
unit is wrong, the support diskette can be
reconfigured using the following procedure:

o

o

o

o

InstalAn Instructions

eST 90

Installation Instructions

INST 90

5. Insert the product maintenance diskette into the MD, and
do an IPL on the MD.
6. Select Option 1 for each drive whose address was noted
during the offline checkout of CUO (if any) and is
physically attached to CUO. If no drive addresses were
noted during the offline checkout of CUO, select Option 3
and run the last drive attached to CUO.
7. If you are installing a dual control unit subsystem,
connect the MD to CU1 and repeat steps 2-6 for CU1
where CUO was called out. Use the other support and
product diskettes which come with CU1 so they are
configured and verified.
8. If you are installing the Cartridge Automation Facility
feature, go to DIAG 70 and run the CAF wrap test to
verify the interface. Return here when complete.
Otherwise, continue with step 9.
9. After all the problems have been fixed (if any), insert the
support diskette and go to INST 100 to run the channel
wrap test on each channel in the subsystem.

a. Select option 3 (SUPPORT UTILITIES) and press
enter.
b. Select option 4 (RE-CONFIGURE DSKT) and
press enter.
c. Perform step 3 above.
4. Check the CU serial number on the machine frame
against the serial number set on the drive adapter card
by performing the following steps:
a. Select Option 2 (SUBSYS DSPLY/ALTER) of the
main menu.
b. Select Option 1 (SUBS CONFIG DSPLY), then
compare the CU serial number on the MD
display to the serial number on the CU machine
frame.

Does the serial number on the MD display match
the serial number on the machine frame?
YES NO

I

Go to CARR-CU 1189, ]Drive Adapter Card
Switch Setting." Return here and repeat
step 4 when you have correctly set the
switches on the adapter card.
Continue with the next step.

3480 MI EC A57723
Cl Copyright IBM Corp. 1982, 1989

-

A

IBM ConftclentJal-11 May 89

o

o

()

()

o

{)

{)

o

o o c o o o o o o c o c o o o

o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o

3480 Installation Instructions

Installation Instructions

This page is for control units with 8M 6460460
(see CARR-CU 9) and tape units with 8M 6460006
(see CARR-DR 9)
Channel Wrap Test, Diagnostic Routine EE62
You use wrap blocks to wrap the channel adapter bus and tag
lines, and the diagnostic program generates bit patterns and
sends them through the wrap path. The wrap path is:

•
•

From the channel adapter to the bus and tag shoe card
drivers

Setup Procedure for the Channel Wrap Test
For dual control unit subsystems, if two MDs are available, two
service representatives (one on each control unit) should
perform the wrap test on the control units at the same time to
reduce the install time.
1.

2.

Through the wrap blocks to the bus and tag shoe card
receivers
Back to the channel adapter.

The pattern received at the end of the wrap is compared with an
expected pattern. A non-compare produces an error and a
maintenance device error display that provides data to define the
error.

Ensure the support diskette is in the MD and IPL the MD.
a.

Select option 1, SUBSYS DIAGNOSTICS, and
press enter.

b.

Select option 1. SELECTED DIAG, and press
enter.

7.

D

Install the wrap terminator (part 6315622)
in the
bus-out cable connector position of the 1/0 connector
assembly. This part is included in the ship group.

fJ

Install the bus wrap block (part 4299876)
in the
bus-in cable connector position of the 110 connector
assembly. This part is included in the ship group and is
labeled 3880 .
6.

3.
•

5.

Install the common 370 channel tag terminator (part
2282676)
in the tag-out cable connector position of
the 1/0 connector assembly.

II

c.

Enter EE62 on the diagnostic selection screen,
and follow the prompts.

d.

Enter channel A for channel selection.

e.

Follow prompts to run the diagnostic.

See DIAG 1. "Channel Interface Wrap Test - Routine
EE62" for the error displays and failure IDs that may
occur during the test.
8.

4.

II

Install the tag wrap block (part 4299873)
in the tag-in
cable connector position of the 1/0 connector assembly.
This part is included in the ship group and is labeled
3880.

INST 100

Repeat the channel wrap test for each channel installed
on the CUs. The wrap tools must be moved to each 110
connector assembly before running the test for each
channel. Restart the diagnostic for each channel as
follows:
a.

After the diagnostic is complete and the status
is displayed. press enter until the option menu
comes up on the MD.

b.

Enter option 2. TEST OPTN.

c.

Enter YES when asked to ALTER PAR MS.

d.

Enter channel B. C. or 0 depending on which
channel you are testing.

e.

Follow prompts. and enter option 7 to run.

Ensure that the IML diskettes in CUO and CU1 are at the
same microcode level; if not. you will get an error light
when you attempt an IMl.
When all channels on the control unit have been tested
(all channels on both control units in a dual control unit
subsystem). and any detected errors have been
corrected. re-IML both control units. Use the backup IML
diskette(s) when you re-IML so both copies of the
functional microcode get tested.
Go to INST 110.

•

Tag Terminator

Tag Wrap Block

Tag Wrap Block

Tag Terminator
Bus Wrap Block
Wrap Terminator

I/O Connector (Horizontal Style)
I/O Connector (Vertical Style)

3480 MI

EC A47957

·e Copyrighl18M Corp. 1984. 1!185. 1986, 1987

Installation Instructions

INST 100

3480 Installation Instructions

Installation Instructions

This page Is for control units with 8M 6460460
(See CARR-CU 9) and tape units with 8M 6460006
(See CARR-DR 9)

For all other channel tag shoe cards. check to see that the high
or low priority plug on the tag shoe card
is correct. II the
word high is facing out. the channel has high priority. If the word
low is facing out. the channel has low priority.

INST 110

4. Before installing the interface cables. press the cable
contacts firmly against the ESD pad
to remove any
electrostatic charge.

D. EI

D

5. Connect the four channel interface bus and tag cables.

Checking the Priority Plug

or the two channel interface cables and two terminators
in the 1/0 connectors. Use the diagrams below as a
guide.

Installing the 110 Cable

The tag shoe cards are plugged for high priority from the factory.
If the priority must be checked or changed on the 4.5 Mb/s
channel 110 connectors. they must be removed from the mounting
assembly.

Perform the following steps to install the subsystem 110 cables:

6. II there are more I/O cables to attaCh. repeat the

Nole: 3480 Model A22 Control Units with the 4.5 megabyte
channel feature (FC 3355) must be cabled ahead of slower
devices on the channel.

For the 4.5 Mb/s channel tag shoe cards. perform the following
steps:

1. Find the I/O connectors

0

preceding steps for each channel.

7. Connect the 1/0 cables to the host systems.

at the bottom of the control

unit.

1. Remove the screw and hold down bracket that goes
across the top of the connectors. and lift the four
connectors from the mounting assembly.

0

2. Pass the cables
for channel A up through the
opening in the bottom of the control unit.
Nole:

2. Check to see that the high or low priority plug on the tag
shoe card
I] is correct. II the word high is facing
out, the channel has high priority. If the word low is
facing out, the channel has low priority.

D.

II the 3480 subsystem is the last control unit on
this channel, you will have two cables and two
terminators.
If the 3480 subsystem is not the last control unit
on this channel. you will have four cables.

3. When you have checked for correct priority. install the
3. Warning: The tailgate connectors are attached to logic
cards which are sensitive to electrostatic discharge
(ESD). See "Instructions for ESD·Sensitive Parts" in the
CARR section of Volume A02.

four connectors into the mounting bracket and reinstall
the top hold down bracket and screw.

Check all tailgate connectors and cable connectors for
bent pins.

a. Bus-Out

I/O ConneC1or (4.5 MBtS Channell

110 ConneC1or (Vertical StYle)

b. Bus·ln
3480 MI EC A57724

:)

"

I"

\

)

,~)

Installation Instructions

I/O ConneC1or (Horizontal Style)

'"
'\

)

0

.'

.. )

,) 0
f

~J

.~

\

J

~)

')

,

" "

)

~J

:J

~)

~)

.
..

l

~)

.)

\

,

"

j

~)

,)

#:

\

)

"t)
'.

;)

..

~

j

rl

,J"
d

INST 110

!

, 1

,f

..

\

E

j

~

\

j

"

'
,)

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

3480 Installation Instructions

c

o
Installation Instructions

This page is for control units with 8M 6460460
(See CARR-CU 9) and tape units with 8M 6460006
(See CARR-DR 9)

2.

Pass the UEPO cables to be installed up through the
opening in the bottom of the control unit.

3.

Find the four UEPO cable sockets located at the rear of
the control unit ac power supply.

Installing the Unit Emergency Power Off (UEPO)
Cable

4.

o
INST 120

Complete the cable installation:
a.

Connect the UEPO cables to the host system.

b.

Continue the installation on INST 130,
"Installation Checks."

Insert the UEPO cable connectors into any UEPO socket
(J5 through J8)

D.

Perform the following steps to install the Unit Emergency Power
Off (UEPO) cable:
1.

Determine if UEPO cables are to be installed.
If no UEPO cables are to be installed, go to INST 130,
"Installation Checks."

Note: The 3480 subsystem does not require
UEPO jumpers if the Local/Remote switch ;s set
to the Local mode.

Power Supply CU-PSOl 60 Hz

JZ

~
Jl

W

]

J&

J48

II
..

J7

JI

J

00000

looooap
00000

U

I

Rear View

Power Supply CU-PSOl 50 Hz

II

J2 (AC) - , ~ TO POWE R::---l

J' bv::::::=.1.. :~,~~"''' •• CONTROL PANEL
• ~ roTC'

J4A •

~3(DCI2Ji8°81

J3,W2

I

0

J9

00

J48

Ilr- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ,

00000)

ggggg
JIO

II II

J5

J6

J7

J.

F~ ~ F~ ~~
~t

~-t

iiilt

iiilt

I

Rear View

3480 MI
1('

EC336396

Installation Instructions

CopynghllBM Corp 198-' 1985 19t16. 1987

-:"242

.a

INST 120

'''~IC1I1AIi()'' I,,~"

3480 Installation Instructions

INST 130

Nole: If there are no tape units attached to CUt,
there will be an eKtra end plate
to store for
later use.

This page Is for control units with 8M 6460460
(See CARR-CU 9) and tape units with 8M 6460006
(See CARR-DR 9)

II

Control Unit

Reinstalling Subcovers and Covers

Installation Checks

lldions

When the Installation checks have been completed, all the
subcovers and covers that were removed must be reinstalled

These procedures complete the checkout of the installation
,.

Installing the radio frequency Interference (RFI) frame pans
and end plates.

2.

Replacing all the subcovers and covers

3

Running the Online Tests (OL Ts) to verify correct subsystem
operation.

Installing the Radio Frequency Interference (RFI)
Frame Pans and End Plates.

Take the cover that was on the rlyht side of the control
unit. and Inslall it on the right side of the last tape unit
attached to that control unit.
2.

Go to CARR-CU 2-2, and CARR-or~ 2-2 for proceliures to
adjust (If necessary) and reinstall the covers and
subcovers on the control unit(s) and tape units.

3.

Go to INST 131 to continue the Installation checks

Tape Unit

The RFllrame pans and end plates are part of the ship group
There are two frame pans for each tape unit, one frame pan (of a
different size) fc,r each control unit, and two end plates (one for
Ihe side of the control unit, and one for the side of the last drive
attached to that control unit).
Note: When you are adding a tape unit(s) to an installed
subsystem, ensure that you move the tape unit end plate
(described in step 7) to the last tape unit attached to the
control unit.
1.

Place one tape unit frame pan under the front of the first

Tape Unit

Control Unit

II

tape unit attached to CUD
Attach the frame pan II>
the lower front frame of the tape unit with two screws
2
3.

Repeat step 1 for each tape unit attached to CU~.
Place one tape unit frame pan under the rear of the fil!;t

13

tape unit attached to CUD
Attach the frame pan to
the lower rear frame of the tape unit with two screws
4.

Repeat step three for each tape unit attached to CUO

5.

Place one control unit fralTle pan under the front of CUO
and attach it to the lower front frame of the control
unit with two screws.

6

Place one end plate under the left side of the control lInit
(as you face the front of the control unit)
and attach
Itto the lower control unit frame with three screws

7

Place one end plate under the right side of the last tape
unit attached to CUD (as you face the front of the tape
unit)
and attach it to the lower tape unit frame with
three screws.

II

D,

0,

II,

8

Repeat steps 1 through 7 lor CU 1 il you have a dual
control unit subsystem.

3480 MI

o

'nstallation Instructions

EC336396

o

o

o

()

"

o

o

{)

INST 130

o

o

c

c

c

o

o

c

3480 Installation Instructions
This page is for control units with BM 6460460
(See CARR-CU 9) and tape units with BM 6460006
(See CARR-DR 9)

Installation Instructions
Dual Control Unit Subsystem

11. Select Option 3, Support Utilities, and press enter.

1.

Connect the MO to control unit 0, then Insert and do an
IPL on the support diskette.

12. Select Option 1, CUlTrace Match Control, and press
enter.

Installation Checks (Continued)

2.

Select Option 3, Support Utilities, and press enter.

13. Selact Option 3, Microcode Control, and press enter,

Running Online Tests (OL Ts)

3.

Select Option 1, CUlT race Match Control, and press
enter.

14. Select Option B, Force Pathing, and press enter.

4.

Select Option 3, Microcode Control, and press enter.

5.

Select Option B, Force Pathlng, and press enter.

Note: Incorrect channel switch settings can cause
overruns and other symptoms of hardware failures.
Run the OLTs with the NSI (no spurious interrupts) option active If
you are using OLTSEP.
There are different procedures for a single control unit
subsystem and a dual control unit subsystem. Be sure to use the
correct procedure.

6.

7.

Single Control Unit Subsystem
1.

Run OL T T3480A on each channel of the control unit, to
the last drive attached to the control unit. The online test
operating procedures are described In the 3480 Online
Test User's Guide, 099-3480.

8.

9.
2.

Run OL Ts T3480B, T3480C, and T34800 on any channel
on the control unit to any drive on the subsystem.
Note: If the messages seen on the drive
displays are not in the correct language, go to
"Drive Adapter Card Switch Setting" on
CARR-CU 1189 and set the switches to the
language requested by the customer.

3.

If any OL T fai Is, insert the product diskette in the MO, do
an IPL on the MO, and select Option 1. Follow the
maintenance package.

3480 MI

a.

Obtain the OL T hard copy printout.

b.

Verify that the control unit serial number in the
OL T sense bytes Is the same as the control unit
serial number on U!e'machlne karne. tf the
serial number listed Is diHerent., see MOrive
Adapter Card Switch Setting M on CARR-CU 1189
and correct the swtlch settings.

Enter the address of the last drive attached to CUO. (The
display will show your Input and ask If it Is correct,
answer YES If It Is correct.)
Run OL T T3480A on each channel installed on CUO, to
the last drive attached to CUO. The online test operating
procedures are described in the 3480 Online Test User's
Guide, 099-3480.
Run OLT T3480A on each channel installed on CU1, to
the last drive attached to CUO.
Run Ol Ts T3480B, T3480C, and T34800 on any channel
on CUO to any drive.
Note: If the messages seen on the drive
displays are not In the correct language, go to
"Drive Adapter Card Switch Setting" on
CARR-CU 1189 and set the switches to the
language requested by the customer.

10. Remove the MO and connect it to CU1, then insert and
do an IPL on the support diskette.

liM!£.

15. Enter the address of the last drive attached to CU1. (The
display will show your input and ask if it is correct,
answer YES if it is correct.)
16. Run OlT T3480A on each channel Installed on CU1, to
the last drive attached to CU1.

Note: If the messages seen on the drive
displays are not In the correct language, go to
"Drive Adapter Card Switch Setting" on
CARR-CU 1189 and set the switches to the
language requested by the customer.
19. If any OL T fails while testing either CU, insert the
product diskette in the MO, do an IPl on the MO, and
select Option 1. Follow the maintenance package.
a.

Obtain the OLT hard copy printout.

b.

Verify that the control unit serial number In the
Ol T sense bytes Is the same as the control unit
serial number on the machine frame. If the
serial number listed is different, see "Drive
Adapter Card Switch Setting" on CARR-CU 1189
and correct the switch settings.

...

INST 131

1.

Put the product and support diskettes, and the blank
cartridge In the pocket In the front cover of the control
unit.

2,

Check and repair any drive that did not operate
correctly.

3.

If the Automatic Cartridge loader feature is Installed,
skip the next step.

4.

Close all the tape drive cartridge latches.

Note: The cartridge latch should be closed when the
tape drive Is not being used. (A cartridge need not be In
the drive.) When the tape drive Is needed, open the
cartridge latch by pressing the Unload switch.

17. Run OlT T3480A on each channel installed on CUD, to
the last drive attached to CU1.
18. Run OL Ts T3480B, T3480C, and T34800 on any channel
on CUl to any drive.

o

Before You're Through ...

Post-Installation

Installation Reporting
After tlie subsystem is installed and tested:
•

Update the Account Management Plan book.

•

Report the installation complete using the existing branch
office procedure.

•

If your account has EREP, go to MSG 1, "Limit Control
Cards" to establish limits of reporting temporary errors to
determine future maintenance action.

Installation Instructions

EC336396

~ COPV"ghIIBM Corp. 1984, 1985, 1986. 1987

_

o

INST 131

3480 Adding Tape Units to an Installed Subsystem
Installation Instructions - Adding Tape Units
This page is for control units with 8M 6460460
(See CARR-CU 9) and tape units with 8M 6460006
(See CARR-DR 9)

8.

If you are allachlng a tape unit with BM 6460006 10 a conlrol unit
without BM 6460460, go 10 INST 500 before you begin Ihe

IIlJ

If you are allachlng a lape unit with BM 6460006 to a lape unll
without BM 6460006, go 10 INST 505 before you begin the

9.

Inslallallon.

Adding Tape Units
The following procedures are used to add more tape units to an
already installed subsystem:

2.

3.

4.

INST 135

Ensure that the ac power cable is routed away from the
compressor motor and is fastened to the back of the
to prevent pinching the cable when the units
frame
are moved together.

Ins lalla lion.

1.

II
iii

Connect the next tape unit ac power cable
to the
preceding tape unit's power cable socket
after
removing the socket safety cover (if not already
removed).

Have the customer vary offline alliobs and paths to the
control unit and tape units that wUI be receiving the
additional tape unit(s).
Power off the control unit and tape units that will be
affected.
Remove the side cover from the end tape unit installed
on the subsystem.
Remove the radio frequency interference (RFI) endplate
from the end tape unit installed on the subsystem.

5.

Place the the new tape unit into position.

6.

Open the front and rear covers.

Remove the device data bus terminator card. part
8576373
and thermal terminator
from the
preceding tape unit.

m

11.

D

10. Plug the device data bus cable
from the new tape
unit into the preceding tape unit's device data bus
connector. and fasten the cable In place with the
retaining screws.

II
D.

11. Connect the two read bus cables
from the new tape
unit to the preceding tape unit
Ensure that the local
(bus A) and the remote (bus 8) cables are plugged into
the proper sockets on the tape unit. making sure they
are not crossed.

fJ Thermal

Local

.. ~ Thermal Terminator

II

iii

12. Connect the thermal cable
on the new tape unit to
the thermal connector
on the preceding tape unit.

fJ

13. Continue with the next step on INST 136.

Connector

Device Data Bus
Terminator Card

Read Bus
II Connectors

Warning: Ensure that the power cable Is not pinched
between the machine frames.

7.

If the safety COver has the retainer tightened over it.
loosen the screw holding the retainer to the ac power
cap. rotate the retainer and retighten the screw.

Read Bus
Cables

Ii Device

Data
Bus Cable

m

Thermal Cable

3480 MI

EC336396

~ COPy"ghIIIlM Corp. 198-4. 1;,85. 1966. 1967

()

AC Power
Connector

()

Installation Instructi.Jns - Adding Tape Units

i)

~)

()

~)

"

~)

tJ

,,,')

INST 135

:)

3480 A.ng Tape Units Oan Installed suOystem
This page Is for control units withBM 6460460
(See CARR-CU 9) and tape units with BM 6460006
(See CARR-DR 9)
If you are attaching a tape unit with 8M 6460006 to a control unit
without BM 6460460, go to INST 500 before you begin the
installation.
If you are attaching a tape unit with 8M 6460006 to a tape unit
without BM 6460006, go to INST 505 before you begin the
installation.

Adding Tape Units
The following procedures are used to add more tape units to an
already installed subsystem:

1. Have the customer vary offline all jobs and paths to the
control unit and tape units that will be receiving the
additional tape unit(s).
2. Power off the control unit and tape units that will be
affected.

3. Remove the side cover from the end tape unit installed
on the subsystem.

o

o

o

o

Installatllnstructions - A2g Tape Units

0

8. Connect the next tape unit ac power cable
to the
after
preceding tape unirs power cable socket
removing the socket safety cover (if not already
removed).

III

B Thermal Connector

Ensure that the ac power cable is routed away from the
compressor motor and is fastened to the back of the
to prevent pinching the cable when the units
frame •
are moved together.

9. Remove the device data bus terminator
terminator

Device Data Bus
Terminator Card

Local

D, and thermal

iI from the preceding tape unit
II

10. Plug the device data bus cable
from the new tape
unit into the preceding tape unirs device data bus
connector, and fasten the cable in place with the
retaining screws.

II

II
II.

11. Connect the two read bus cables
from the new tape
Ensure that the local
unit to the preceding tape unit
(bus A) and the remote (bus B) cables are plugged into
the proper sockets on the tape unit, making sure they
are not crossed.

Read Bus
Connectors

Remote

3rd Style

iii

12. Connect the thermal cable
on the new tape unit to
the thermal connector
on the preceding tape unit

II

13. Continue with the next step on INST 136.
4. Remove the radio frequency interference (RFI) endplate
from the end tape unit installed on the subsystem.

5. Place the the new tape unit into position.
6. Open the front and rear covers.
Warning: Ensure that the power cable is not pinched
between the machine frames.

7. If the safety cover has the retainer tightened over it,
loosen the screw holding the retainer to the ac power
cap, rotate the retainer and retighten the screw.

II DeYice D,u
Sus Cabl.

3480 MI EC A57723
c)

Copyright IBM Corp. 11ft, 1.1

IBM Confidential

Installation Instructions - Adding Tape Units

INST 135

o

o

o

()

o

()

o

o

o

o

c

o

o

o

o

o

3480 Adding Tape Units to an Installed Subsystem
This page is for control units with 8M 6460460
(See CARR-CU 9) and tape units with 8M 6460006
(See CARR-DR 9)
Adding Tape Units (Continued)
13. Place the next tape unit against the preceding tape unit.

o

o

Installation Instructions - Adding Tape Units

o
INST 136

16. Lock the rear casters on the new tape unit by turning the
caster lock thumbscrews clockwise until they are tight.
17. Repeat steps 4 through 16. on INST 135 and INST 136. for
each additional tape unit that is attache.d to the control
unit.

18. Go to the next step on INST 137.

Control Unit
Warning: When installing a B box to a B box with the
automatic cartridge loader feature InstaUed on any drive.
the drive must be opened approximately 5 cm (2 in.) to
prevent the conductive seal from being pinched between
the tape unit frames.
Note: Be sure the position of the casters do&s
not prevent the tape units from fitting snugly
together.

14. Fasten the new tape unit to the preceding tape unll..by
Installing a hex bolt and washer at the rear of the tape
unit
and at the front of the iape unit
It may be
necessary to remove the Tape· Unit Front Safety cover to
install hex bolt
See CARR-OR 2-1 if the cover needs
to be removed.

D.

II.

II.

Note: If the tape units are not correctly aligned.
the covers may bind. Ensure that the covers are
not binding.
15. Place the rear casters on the new tape unit so the caster
lock thumbscrews
are accessible.

II

Tape Unit
('

I

I

~

\.

. --.

Tape Unit

II Caster
Lock
Thumbscrew

Front View
Front

Hex Bolt

Rear View
3480 MI

EC336396

C Copyroght IBM Corp.

1984, 1985, 198b, 1987

Installation Instructions - Adding Tape Units

INST 136

Installation Instructions - Adding Tape Units

3480 Adding Tape Units to an Installed Subsystem
This page is for control units with BM 6460460
(See CARR-CU 9) and tape units with BM 6460006
(See CARR-DR 9)

21. Screw the safety cover
socket.

0

onto the ac power cable

DANGER
Dangerous voltages are present at the ac power cable •
socket. The safety cover mus' be on when the socket Is
no' being used.

Adding Tape Units (Continued)
On the lastlape unit allached to the control unit:

II

Before You're Through ...

23. Go to INST 50 for instructions on setting the drive logical
and physical addresses, return here when linished.

1.

Run the product maintenance diskette to the last drive
attached to the affected control unit(s).

2.

Go to INST 130 and install the RFI frame pans and end
plates, and reinstall all covers and subcovers that were
removed.

3.

Go to INST 131 and run the OlTs.

4.

This completes the installation of additional drives to an
existing subsystem. Return the subsystem to the
customer.

24. Go to INST 56 for Instructions on checking tape unit
power supply jumpers, return here when finished.
25. Go to INST 70 if the tape unit is attached to a single
control unit subsystem, return here when finished.

26. Go to INST 76 If the tape unit is attached to a dual control
unit subsystem, return here when finished.

19. Place the device data bus terminator card PIN 8576373
removed from the last tape unit Installed in the new
tape unit's device data bus connector

g.

II

20. Plug the thermal terminator
into the thermal
connector
The thermal terminator was removed In
a prior step from the preceding tape unit.

&.

INST 137

0
0

22. After the safety cover
is installed, loosen the screw
holding the retainer
to the ac power box. Rotate the
retainer and tighten the screw with the retainer
pOSitioned to prevent the safety cover from being
removed.

fJ

@(i
AC Power
Cable Socket

Thermal Connector

t:D/

/11 TIw. .,1
""0'

T,. . ,

.;...-------EI Device Data

HJ.

Bus Connector
Remote

AC Safetv Cover

3480 MI
EC336396
:i:' Copyright IBM Corp. 1984. 1985. 1986.

~)

Installation Instructions - Adding Tape Units

INST 137

1987

iJ

#)

4.

{)

{)

~

')

!)

#)
\.

~

",

\)

o

000

3480 Adding Tape Units to an Installed Subsystem
This page Is for control units with BM 6460460
(See CARR-CU 9) and tape units with BM 6460006
(See CARR-DR 9)

o

o

21. Screw the safety cover
socket.

0

onto the ac power cable

DANGER
Dangerous voltages are present at the ac power
cable socket. The safety cover must be on
when the socket is not being used.

Adding Tape Units (Continued)
On the last tape unit attached to the control unit

II

19. Place the device data bus terminator card
removed
from the last tape unit installed in the new tape unit's
device data bus connector

o

Installat91nstructions - Adlg Tape Units

23. Go to INST 50 for instructions on setting the drive logical
and physical addresses, return here when finished.

Before You're Through •••

24. Go to INST 56 for instructions on checking tape unit
power supply jumpers, return here when finished.

II.

attached to the affected control unit(s).

2. Go to INST 130 and install the RFI frame pans and end
plates, and reinstall all covers and subcovers that were
removed.

26. Go to INST 76 if the tape unit is attached to a dual control
unit subsystem, return here when finished.

3. Go to INST 131 and run the OlTs.
4. This completes the installation of additional drives to an
existing subsystem. Return the subsystem to the
customer.

D

into the thermal
connector
The thermal terminator was removed in a
prior step from the preceding tape unil

1. Run the product maintenance di skette to the I ast drive

25. Go to INST 70 if the tape unit is attached to a single
control unit subsystem, return here when finished.

D.

20. Plug the thermal'terminator

laT 137

D

is installed, loosen the screw
22. After the safety cover
holding the retainer
to the ac power box. Rotate the
retainer and tighten the screw with the retainer
positioned to prevent the safety cover from being
removed.

m

B

Thermal Connector

@(i..'0//11
AC Power

~~------B

Cable Socket

The ..,,'

f

T,rmh_,

Device Data
Bus Connector

II Device Data Bus·
Terminator Card

Remote

3rd Style

2nd Style

AC Safety Cover

3480 MI EC A57723
Cl Copyright IBM Corp. 1'.2,1988

IBM Cor,fidential

Installation Instructions - Adding Tape Units

INST 137

o

o

o

o

o

()

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

c

3480 Relocate or Discontinue
This page is for control units with BM 6460460
(See CARR-CU 9) and tape units with BM 6460006
(See CARR-DR 9)

Removing Power
3. Remove the control unit rear safety cover.
4. Set the CU Online/CU Offline switch

1. For World Trade countries, refer to WT General CEM 257,
"General Internal Packaging Instructions for Replant
Machines."

•

BM 7359073 (for control unit).

0

5. Set the control unit Power On/Off switch

to CU Offline.

fJ

to Off.

6. Set the control unit Unit Emergency Power switch
Power Off.

2. Before atlempting to relocate or discontinue a subsystem,
ensure that you have the following packing material BMs on
hand:
BM 7359079 (for tape units)

INST 140

Relocate or Discontinue

Not•• :

•

o

7. Set the Drive Power switch

II to

II to Off on each drive.

8. Have the customer remove power from the outlet.

9. Remove the power cable

II

from the customer's outlet
and tape the coiled cable behind the I/O cable
connectors

-0

m.

Getting Started
To remove or relocate a 3480 subsystem, perform the following
steps:
1. Before proceeding, check the following:

a. Make sure that all drives are unloaded and that
the tape cartridges have been removed.
b. Make sure that the 3480 subsystem is offline to
all host systems. (The vary offline procedures
are described on PLAN 55.)
c. Make sure that any channels to be removed
from the control unit have been varied offline to
the operating system.
2. Remove the front, rear, and left side covers from the
control unit. See CARR-CU 2-1 for cover removal
procedures.

II
.0

Operator Satup Panel

0

EJ::.-

.&8=
0m

em

c:II

....

.. -

:.-=~:.:=

-'--2;---"
1In'_

~=t...:.:

B
R...t

Online

E3

Offline

DCI........ 1..... ~

2.1 ... . . - - .

a

c:II

[!]@]
r_

r ___

s..o.- ........

E3=
sa

1[1)]

\:11-

o

c:II

--

!

Orive Switcn Pinel

8
E3

Driv. Powe,

DriveP_

:u_

R

c:II

.....

E3:~'-

~I

IEj=

I

t

E3-

R

--- &[1

EJ

~ ~
Dri." Add""

R... t

Online

E3

Offline

2

..

Optional Feature on 3480 A22
Control Units Prior to EC A58284

3480 MI EC A57721
C CDPyrognllBM Corp. 1982. 1988

Relocate or Discontinue

INST 140

Relocate or Discontinue

3480 Relocate or Discontinue

INST 150

This page is for control units with BM 6460460
(see CARR-CU 9) and tape units with BM 6460006
(see CARR-DR 9)
Removing 1/0 Cables
Note: If the control unit has the vertical style //0
connectors. remove the drip-screen guard.

AD.

10. Start with channel
Unscrew and remove
all the cables and terminators from the I/O
connector assembly.

a.

11. Pass the channel cables down through the
opening in the bottom of the control unit.

b.
12. Disconnect all channel cables from the host
system and ensure that the channels are
correctly terminated.

c. Tag-Out -

13. Repeat steps 10 through 12 for any remaining
channel cables.

c. Terminator --...:.;,..!..;.;;~~~

I/O Connector (Vertical Style)

I/O Connector (Horizontal Style)

3480 MI
EC A47957
C CopyrighllBM Corp. 1984. 1985. 1988.

()

Relocate or Discontinue
1981

()

()

{)

o

o

{)

o

INST 150

o

o

o

o

o

3480 Relocate or Discontinue

o

o

o

o
Relocate or Discontinue

o
INST 160

This page is for control units with BM 6460460
(See CARR-CU 9) and tape units with BM 6460006
(See CARR-DR 9)
Removing Unit Emergency Power Off (UEPO)
Cables
14. Disconnect lhe UEPO cables from the controlling
computer.

15. Remove the four UEPO cables from connectors J5
through J8.
16. Pass the UEPO cables down through the opening in the
bottom of the control unit.

Pewer Supply CU-PSOl 60 Hz
J1

~

]

D
...

I

TO 'OWER
CONTROL STATION

)1

JI

Ji

J.tA

0000
oooo~
0000
u ....
rt

JJ

tgg~ fi§~ ~g*1
~.
-

-=--

-::-e
•

-::!r e

-

'.

00000
100000
00000

U

I

Rear View

Power Supply CU-PSOl 50 Hz

,

m

II
,.

JI

I

I?
JI

J1I

II
II
mM
mM

~7

JI

;gg~ t?g~

Ih

It

1

View

3480 MI

EC3'36396

(" Cc.pyngllllUM Curp 1904, 1985. l:mo 19bi

Relocate or Discontinue

INST 160

INST 170

Relocate or Discontinue

3480 Relocate or Discontinue
This page is for control units with 8M 6460460
(See CARR-CU 9) and tape units with 8M 6460006
(See CARR-DR 9)
Removing Dual Control Unit Communication
Cables

EJ Ground Strap

Note: This is a feature on 3480 model A 11, standard on model
A22.

t

-D

0

17. Disconnect both ends
of the 3-connector cable (A3;
A4, and AS), one end at each control unit.
18. Disconnect both ends of the 2-connector feature cable
(A 1 and A2)

fJ

at the control units.

19. Loosen the wingnuts

IJ

on the cable retaining brackets

mand open the brackets.

20. Slide the cables from between the guide posts.
21. Swing the retaining brackets closed and tighten all the
wingnuts.

AS
Control Unit

22. Disconnect the cable ground straps
control unit.

D from each

23. Place protective covers over the connectors at both ends
of the feature cable.

II Ground Strap

24. Place the cables in the shipping carton.

\

Note: If you are relocating the machines within the same room.
yot.; don't have to pack them.

A2

B

A'1

Retaining Bracket

Relocate or Discontinue

INST 170

3480 MI EC A57721
I: CODyngn"BM CO'P '952 '98e

f)
'-"

()

r,)

il

f'l

:)

n

r)

~J

,
~

I

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

3480 Relocate or Discontinue

o

o

Relocate or Discontinue
26. Remove the hex bolts and washers
from the front
and rear of each unit. It may be necessary to remove
the Tape Unit Front Safety cover to remove hex bolt
See CARR-DR 2-1 If the cover needs to be removed.

Disconnecting the Tape Units and the Control
Unit

27. Push the control unit about 20 cm (8 in) away from the
first tape unit.

II of the control unit and tape

INST 180

fJ II

This page Is for control units with 8M 6460460
(See CARR-CU 9) and tape units with 8M 6460006
(See CARR-DR 9)

25. Unlock the rear casters
units.

o

fJ.

28. Disconnect the tape unit to control unit power cable

D

and tape It to the side of the tape unit.

Control Unit

CAUTION: TILT HAZARD
Do NOT open both drives of a tape unit that Is not bolted
to another tape unit or control unit. With the automatic
cartridge loader feature Installed and both drive drawers
'ully extended, a tape unit that Is not bolted to another
unit will tilt forward with about 20 Ibs.
'orce applied to
either automatic cartridge loader.
the top

0'

0'

Control Unit
Tape Unit

'Front View

II Caster
lock

Thumbscrew

~

D AC Power
Connector

3480 MI

EC336396

!C CopyrighllBM Corp.

1984, 1985, 1986. 1961

Relocate or Discontinue

INST 180

3480 Relocate or Discontinue
This page is for control units with 8M
6460460 (See CARR-CU 9) and tape units
with 8M 6460006 (See CARR-DR 9)
Disconnecting the Tape Units and the
Control Unit (Continued)

Relocate or Discontinue

INST 190

Relocate or Discontinue

INST 190

To complete the removal/replacement:
33. Install the side cover you removed from the tape unit on
the right side of the control unit (as you face the front
of the control unit).
34. Reinstall any covers that were removed.

29. On the last tape unit attached to the control unit:
a.

Remove the side cover.

b.

Remove the device data terminator card PIN
6384571

c.

Remove the thermal terminator

d.

Be sure the terminators are included with the
control unit shipping group.

35. Report the activities performed, using the existing
Branch Office procedures.

D.

a.

30. Disconnect the device data and read bus cables
and tape them to the side of the tape unit.
31. Disconnect the thermal cable

II B

II.

Remote

----:,~~..I

32. Repeat steps 30 and 31 for each additional tape unit.

3480 MI
o Copyright IBM Corp.

o

EC336395
1984, 1985, 1986

()

o

()

[)

()

{)

o

3480 RQcate or DisconO""e
This page is for control units with 8M 6460460
(See CARR-CU 9) and tape units with 8M 6460006
(See CARR-DR 9)
Disconnecting the Tape Units and the Control
Unit (Continued)

o

o

o

o

RetocatA Discontinue

AT

190

To complete the removal/replacement
33. Install the side cover you removed from the tape unit on
the right side of the control unit (as you face the front of
the control unit).
34. Reinstall any covers that were removed.

35. Report the activities performed, using the existing
Branch Office procedures.

29. On the last tape unit attached to the control unit:
a. Remove the side cover.
b. Remove the device data terminator card
c. Remove the thermal terminator

f).

D·

d. Be sure the terminators are included with the
control unit shipping group.

30. Disconnect the device data and read bus cables
and tape them to the side of the tape unit.

31. Disconnect the thermal cable

D III

D.

Remote ----+.t:~~1

32. Repeat steps 30 and 31 for each additional tape unit.
3rd Style

2nd Style

3480 MI EC A57723
CI CopyrigllllBM Corp. 1982, 1989

IBM Cor. fidential

Relocate or Discontinue

INST 190

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

3480 Aallation InstrucOns

o

o

This page is for control units without 8M 6460460
(See CARR-CU 9) and tape units without 8M
6460006 (See CARR-DR 9)

CAUTION: TILT HAZARD

This procedure describes all installation actions in detail, step by
step. Mark off each step as it is completed. Two service
representatives (5Rs) are needed for the mechanical installation
of a dual control unit subsystem, to reduce the install time. Only
one SR is needed to run the checkout and diagnostic procedures.

•
•

•
•

3480 Online Test routines
Maintenance device
Product diskette
Support diskette
5/370 Channel Tag Terminator (part 2282676)
Blank scratch cartridge.

Start

Perform_
safety checks.
INST 306

Install the
control unit
and the first
tape un it.
INST 310

Check with the IBM branch office or physical planning
representative to ensure that installation planning specifications
have been met (correct power service outlet or connector, line
voltage, phase rotation, grounding, cable lengths, service space,
environment, and so forth). See INST 6, for pre-installation safety
checks.

1. Inventory the items on each Bill of Malerial to verify that
all items were received.

Install
additional
tape units.
INST 320

BILL OF IIATERIAlj! 3480
B/H
.
TITLE
110DEl
NUI·IBER
L--------+----l---.-1
IBasic Shipping G.·oup IA22

Set control
unit addresses.
INST 340

Configure 110
and analyze
drive failures.
INST 390

Set drive
logical and
physical
addresses.
INST 350

Run channel
wrap test.
INST 400

Connect control unit
power cable.
INST 360

I

s,

Run single
control unit
off line
c!1eckout.
INST 370

5 Vo

1:::::::1

I
B22' 86 7371 2
umesIA22,
I

I
!Wiring Diagram and
logic Block Diagrams A22

4470092

\-firing Diagram and
Logic Block Diagrams IB22

4470093

Figure 1.

3480 MJ EC A57723
1; Copyright 'BM Corp. 1982,1989

Check control
unit and tape
unit power
supply jumpers.
INST 355 and
INST 356

Run dual
contro I un it
off line
checkout.
INST 376

YES

Install Dual
Control Unit
Communication
Cables.
INST 330

YES

Preparation

[,11
"anua
i

NO

YES

Only one blank cartridge is required; however, a second
blank cartridge, if available, reduces the installation time.

Pre-Installation Checks

~

lOT 304

Cleaner cartridge (part 4780527)
IML Diskette

The Installation Overview chart shows the sequence of steps to
complete the installation. However, the chart provides an
overview only; follow the step-by-step instructions as you
proceed through the installation.

leaSic Shipping Group IB22

InstallA Instructions

The following items are needed to complete the installation:

Note: Ensure for dual CU Installations, all IML Diskettes ;. ,.
at the same EC level.

Do NOT open both drives of a tape unit that is not bolted to
another tape unit or control unit. With the automatic cartridge
loader feature installed and both drive drawers fully extended, a
tape unit that is not bolted to another unit will tilt forward with
about 20 Ibs. of force applied to the top of either automatic
cartridge loader.

o

o

Tools and Test Equipment Needed

•
•

Before Installation

o

o

Ins:all I/O
cables between
subsystem and
host.
INST 410

Ins ta II
tape units{s)
INST 435

NO

,;
Install UE?O
cables.
INST 420

Perform
installation
c!1ecks.
INST 430

Installation Overview

IBM COriridp.ntial

Installation Instructions

INST 304

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

c

o

o

o

o

o

Cleaner cartridge (part 4780527)
IML Diskette

Start

Note: Ensure for dual CU Installations, all IML
Diskettes are at the same EC level.
•
•

•

A

Perform
safety checks.
INST 306

3480 Online Test routines
Maintenance device
Product diskette
Support diskette
Blank scratch cartridge.

NO
Run dual
control unit
off 1 ine
checkout.
INST 376

YES
YES

This procedure describes all installation actions in detail, step by
step. Mark off each step as it is completed. Two service
representatives (SRs) are needed for the mechanical installation
of a dual control unit subsystem, to reduce the install time. Only
one SR is needed to run the checkout and diagnostic procedures.

Only one blank cartridge is required; however, a second
blank cartridge, if available, reduces the installation time.

The Installation Overview chart shows the sequence of steps to
complete the installation. However, the chart provides an
overview only; follow the step-by-step instructions as you
proceed through the installation.

Install the
control unit
and the first
tape unit.
INST 310

Pre-Installation Checks
Check with the IBM branch office or physical planning
representative to ensure that installation planning specifications
have been met (correct power service outlet or connector, line
voltage, phase rotation, grounding, cable lengths, service space,
environment, and so forth). See INST 6, for pre-installation
safety checks.

Preparation
1.

Inventory the items on each Bill of Material to verify
that all items were received.

3480
MODEL

I nsta 11
additional
tape units.
INST 320

BIM
NUMBER

Basic Shipping Group

A22

4799123

Basic Shipping Group

B22

4798853

Run single
control unit
off 1 ine
checkout.
INST 370

Set control
unit addresses.
INST 340

Configure MD
and analyze
drive failures.
INST 390

Set drive
logical and
physical
addresses.
INST 350

Run channel
wrap test.
INST 400

Wiring Diagram and
Logic Block Diagrams

A22

4470092

Wiring Diagram and
Logic Block Diagrams

B22

4470093

Figure 1.

EC336395

• Copyright IBM Corp. 1984. 1985. 1986

Check control
unit and tape
unit power
supply jumpers.
INST 355 and
INST 356

Connect control unit
power cable.
INST 360

MI Manuals, 5 Volumes A22, B22 8673712

3480 MI

Install Dual
Control Unit
Communication
Cables.
I NST 330

YES

BILL OF MATERIAL
TITLE

INST 304

The following items are needed to complete the installation:

CAUTION: TILT HAZARD
Do NOT open both drives of a tape unit that is not bolted
to another tape unit or control unit. With the automatic
cartridge loader feature installed and both drive drawers
fully extended. a tape unit that is not bolted to another
unit will tilt forward with about 20 Ibs. of force applied to
the top of either automatic cartridge loader.

o

Tools and Test Equipment Needed

•
•

Before Installation

o

Installation Instructions.

3480 Installation Instructions
This page is for control units without BM
6460460 (See CARR-CU 9) and tape units
without BM 6460006 (See CARR-DR 9)

o

Install liD
cables between
subsystem and
host.
INST 410

I nsta 11
tape units(s)
INST 435

Install UEPO
cables.
INST 420

Perform
installation
checks.
INST 430

Installation Overview

Installation Instructions.

INST 304

3480 Installation Instructions

Installation Instructions

INST 305

This page is for control units without 8M
6460460 (See CARR-CU 9) and tape units
without 8M 6460006 (See CARR-DR 9)
ACTION Messages
The following procedures are used to correct or help isolate drive
problems. The service representative is sent here from the INST
section following an ACTION message on a drive display.
ACTION messages are generated for problems encountered after
loading a cartridge into a drive during the installation checkout
procedures.

Messages

Description

Actions

ACTION 1

The cartridge failed to load
correctly.

1.

Unload and reload the cartridge.

2.

If the same failure occurs, stop testing and note the address of the failing drive and
the CU controlling that drive.

3.

Return to the procedure that sent you here and continue testing with the next drive
displaying TEST.

1.

Unload the cartridge and check to see that it is not set to file protect.

2.

Reload the cartridge and if it fails again, try a different cartridge.

3.

If the second cartridge fails in the same way, stop testing and note the address of
the failing drive and the CU controlling that drive. Return to the procedure that sent
you here and continue testing with the next drive displaying TEST.

1.

Restart testing using the next drive.

2.

If the next drive to be tested fails in the same way, a cable connection problem may
exist.

3.

Note the address(es) of the failing drivels) and the CU controlling the drivels). then
return to the procedure that sent you here and continue testing.

1.

Go to INST 340 and check the address switch settings.

2.

If the problem remains, run the product maintenance package, then return to the
procedure that sent you here and continue testing.

Drive did not get patches correctly.

1.

Ensure that the IML diskette is the correct one for the subsystem. If not, replace it
and start the installation checkout again from power on.

This could be the drive patch or the
Automatic Cartridge Loader code
load.

2.

If the diskette is correct, continue using only the drives that display TEST.

1.

Go to INST 340 and check the address switch settings.

2.

If the problem remains, run the product maintenance package, then return to the
procedure that sent you here and continue testing.

1.

Go to INST 340 and check the address switch settings.

2.

If the problem remains, run the product maintenance package, then return to the
procedure that sent you here and continue testing.

1.

Go to INST 340 and check the address switch settings.

2.

If the problem remains, run the product maintenance package, then return to the
procedure that sent you here and continue testing.

1.

Go to INST 340 and check the address switch settings.

2.

If the problem remains, run the product maintenance package, then return to the
procedure that sent you here and continue testing.

Go to the message that matches the message on the drive
display that sent you here and perform the actions listed in the
Actions column.
Return to the procedure that sent you here when you have
completed the actions listed in the Actions column.

ACTION 2

The cartridge may be set to file
protect.

ACTION 3

Incorrect address.

ACTION 4

Channel address parity error.

ACTION 5

ACTION A

Channel address parity error on
channelA.

ACTION B

Channel address parity error on
channel B.

ACTION C

Channel address parity error on
channel C.

ACTION D

3480 MI

Channel address parity error on
channel D.

Installation Instructions

EC336395

~ CopyrIght IBM Corp. 1984. 1985. 1986

t)

l

{}

i}

~)

()

t)

,
\

}.

INST 305

0··

o

o

"

c

o

c

c

3480 Installation Instructions
This page is for control units without 8M 6460460
(See CARR-CU 9) and tape units without 8M
6460006 (See CARR-DR 9)

Branch Circuit CB Switched Off Check
1.

Before starting the installation, perform the following safety
checks:

DANGER

c

o

o

Installation Instructions

INST 306

Installation Instructions

INST 306

Branch Circuit CB Switched On Check
1.

DANGER

Hazardous electrical voltages are present in the
connector. Do not touch the outlet case with anything
other than test probes until step 3 is completed.

Hazardous electrical voltages are present. Do not touch
the outlet before meeting the following requirements of
steps 1 and 2.

Have the customer find and switch oN the branch circuit
CB.

Have the customer switch on the CB that supplies
voltage to the receptacle.

Safety Checks

Machine Ground Wire Check
1.

DANGER

Hazardous electrical voltages are present in the
receptacle.

2.

3.

Check the voltage from the ground pin to the building
ground for less than 1.0 V ac. If the voltage is less than
1.0 V ac, the outlet is now safe to touch.

4.

DANGER

Use the volt/ohm meter to ensure that:
a.

The resistance between the machine frame and the
ground pin on the power plug is less than 0.1 ohm.

b.

'The resistance between the machine frame and
ground pin (pin 4) on the output socket of the control
unit and each tape unit is less than 0.1 ohm. See
diagram A below.

c.

The resistance between the machine frame and
ground pin (pin 4) on the input cable assembly
connector of each tape unit is less than 0.1 ohm.
See diagram B below.

Check the voltage from the outlet case to the building
ground for less than 1.0 V ac. (Begin with the meter
scale that is appropriate for normal line voltage checks.)

2.

DANGER

Hazardous voltages are present. If the measured
voltage values are less than 1.0 V ac, you can touch the
outlet. Avoid contact with the internal parts (pins and
sockets) of the outlet.

Hazardous electrical voltages are present. Do not touch
the internal parts (pins and sockets) of the outlet until
step 5 is completed.

Measure the voltages from the outlet case to the building
ground and the outlet case to the ground pin. Voltage
values are to be less than 1.0 V ac.
3.

At the outlet, measure the voltages from the ground pin
and the neutral pin (if present) to all phases, and
measure the voltages from phase to phase. This
ensures that the outlet is wired correctly.

4.

Have the customer's branch circuit CB switched off
before connecting the 3480 power cord into the outlet.

Check the resistance from the ground pin to the outlet
case for a reading of less than 0.1 ohm.

If the resistance is greater than 0.1 ohm, determine the

Check the resistance from the ground pin to the building
ground for reading of less than 0.1 ohm.

cause and correct it before proceeding with the
installation.

A reading of less than 0.1 ohm indicates the presence of
a safe, continuous grounding conductor.
5.

Measure the phase-to-phase voltage and the
phase-to-ground voltage at the outlet.
Measure the phase-to-neutral voltage (if present) and
the neutral-to-ground voltage (if present).
All voltage values are to be less than 1.0 V ac.

Diagram A

Output Socket (CU and TU)

Diagram B
Input Cable Assembly (TU)

3480 MI

EC A47957

~: COPY"19"t IBM Corp '9&& 1985 "986 198:"

3480 Installation Instructions
This page is for control units without BM 6460460
(See CARR-CU 9) and tape units without BM
6460006 (See CARR-DR 9)

Installation Instructions

INST 310

Installation Instructions

INST 310

7. Remove the rear safety cover. See CARR-CU 2-3 for the
control unit cover removal. procedures.
Do not reinstall the safety cover until after you have
installed the Unit Emergency Power Off (UEPO) cable
(INST 320).

Installing the Control Unit and the First Tape Unit
Warning: The 3480 A22 control units with the 4.5 megabyte
channel feature must be cabled ahead of slower devices on the
channel.

8. If the control unit has the vertical style 110 connectors,
remove the drip-screen guard. See CARR-CU 2-1 for the
control unit cover removal procedures.
Do not reinstall the drip-screen guard until after you
have installed the Unit Emergency Power Off (UEPO)
cable (INST 120).
9. Is this control unit being installed without any tape units
attached?

Control Unit

YES NO

Note: For dual control unit subsystems, two service
representatives should be present to install the two
control units and their attached tape drives at the same
time to reduce the install time for the subsystem.
1. Before you begin installation:
a

Place the cables that run between the control
units (on dual control unit subsystems) in the
positions they need to be in for installation.
Either end of the cables attaches to either of the
control units.

b. Place the channel cables that come from the
host system(si in the positions they need to be
in for installation.
These steps ensure that the cables are easily accessible
when it is time to install them.
2. Place the control unit (CU) iCl the position where it is to
be installed.

I

!o to INST 311. step 1.

Open the device data bus connector holding
clip O.
Locate the two terminator cards. PIN 8492916.
and the card guides in the ship group.
Plug the cards into the device data bus
sockets II.
Close the device data bus connector holding
clip g.
Continue with the next step.
10. Install the safety cover

D on the ac power cable socket.

DANGER
Dangerous voltages are present at the ac power
cable socket. The safety cover must be on
when the socket is not being used.

3. Place the rear casters of the CU so that the caster lock
thumbscrews
are accessible.

II

4. Lock the rear casters by turning the caster lock
thumbscrews clockwise until they are tight.
5. Open the front and rear covers.
6. Remove the left and right outside covers. See CARR-CU
2-3 for procedures to remove the covers from the control
unit.

11. Plug the thermal terminator
connector

II.

D into the thermal

12. Go to INST 321, step 19.

The covers are not reinstalled until after the hardware is
completely installed.

3480 MI EC A57721
~ Copy"o~t

IBM Corp. 1982. 1988

t)

()

()

()

{)

{)

o

o

o

o

o

o

3480 Installation Instructions

o

o

o

o
Installation Instructions

This page is for control units without 8M 6460460
and tape units without 8M 6460006 (See
CARR-DR 9)

3.

Open the front and rear covers.

4.

Plug the tape unit ac power connector
control unit ac socket

m.

m

into the

5.

Fasten the ac power cable to the side of the tape unit
with the retaining strap

First Tape Unit

6.

Open the connector-holding Clip
by pulling up on the
and pulling the clip outward.
top tab

m.

II

II.

7.
TILT HAZARD CAUTION
Do NOT open both drives of a tape unit that Is not bolted to
another tape unit or control unit. With the automatic cartridge
loader feature Installed and both drive drawers fully extended. a
tape unit that Is not bolted to another unit will lilt forward with
about 20 Ibs. of force applied to the top of either automatic
cartridge loader.

8.

Connect the multi-colored read bus cables
from the tape unit to the control unit.
Connect the device data bus cables
tape unit to the control unit.

10.

2.

Place the first tape unit
to the right of the control unit
(as you face the front of the control unit) about 20 cm
(8 in) from the control unit.

~

~DThermal
""'V Connector

m
_ _ _ _'I"':l

iii Device Data
Bus Cables

III II from the

II.
Connect the thermal cable II IIiI on the tape unit to
Close the connector-holding clip

the thermal connector
Place the tape units near the area where they are to be
Installed.

II

,,~--,

Note: Plug in the cable connectors to their
matching sockets in the same positions as the
cables are located In the rubber cable guide. Do
not cross the cables.

9.

1.

iii Thermal Cable

~om Tape Unit

Installing the Control Unit and the First Tape Unit
(Continued)

CAUTION

INST 311

II on the control unit.

11. Continue to the next step on INST 313.

fJ

o

/

d'

m
II Connector - Holding
Clip (Open)

Thermal
Cable
from
Tape Unit

Retaining
Front View

Strap

II Top Tab
3480 MI

EC336396

1~ Copyr,ghllllM Corp 1984. 1985 1~.6 1981

~

""m

Installation Instructions

AC Power
Connector

INST 311

13. Fasten the control unit to the tape unit by installing a hex
bolt and washer at the rear of the control unit
and at

This page is for control units without BM 6460460
(See CARR-CU 9) and tape units without BM
6460006 (See CARR-DR 9)

the front of the tape unit

fJ·

D.

Installing the Control Unit and the First Tape Unit
(Continued)

Nole: If the control unit and tape unit are not
correctly aligned. the covers may bind. Ensure
that the covers are not binding.

First Tape Unit (Continued)
_
Warning: Be careful that the cables do not get pinched
between the frames or covers.

Before You're Through ...
Are you installing additional tape units to this control unit?

Hex bolts and washers are part of the ship group.

12.

INST 313

Installation Instructions

3480 Installation Instructions

YES NO

I

Go to INST 321, step 16.
Go to INST 320 to install additional tape
units.

14 .. Place the rear casters so the caster lock thumbscrews
are accessible.

II

15. Lock the rear casters on the tape unit by turning the
caster lock thumbscrews clockwise until they are tight.
Control Unit

rold the c.I~'.-ice data and read bus cables in toward the
middlt.. 01 the machines. Fold the power cable up toward
the top of the machines. Ensure the power cable Is not
pinched between the machine frames.
Push the tape unit against the control unit.
Note: Be sure the position of the casters does
not prevent the tape unit frame from fitting snugly
against the control unit frame.
Control Unit

Tape Unit

Front View
Front View

3480 MI

Installation Instructions

EC336396

() COPYright IBM C~lp. 1984, '985 '9110, t987

f)
l.

II Caster

()

1)

f\

\'

()

Lock
Thumbscrew

iNST 313

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

3480 Installation Instructions

o

Installation Instructions

o
INST 320

This page is for control units without 8M
6460460 (See CARR-CU 9) and tape units
without 8M 6460006 (See CARR-DR 9)
Thermal Cable
from Tape Unit

Installing Additional Tape Units

~

fJ Thermal Connector

~~I

CAUTION: TILT HAZARD
Do NOT open both drives of a tape unit that is not bolted
to another tape unit or control unit. With the automatic
cartridge loader feature installed and both drive drawers
fully extended. a tape unit that is not bolted to another
unit will tilt forward with about 20 Ibs. of force applied to
the top of either automatic cartridge loader.

~

.......______'7

1.

Place the the next tape unit into position.

2.

Open the front and rear covers.

Device Data
8us Cables

CAUTION
Ensure the power cable is not pinched between
the machine frames.

D Connector· Holding

II Connector - Holding

Clip (Open)

Clip (Closed)

3.

_

III

Connect the next tape unit"s ac power cable
to the
preceding tape unit" s power cable socket m after
removing the safety socket (if not already removed).

4.

Fasten the ac power cable to the side of the tape unit
with the retaining strap

5.

Open the connector-holding clip

6.

Connect the two multi-colored read bus cables
the next tape unit to the preceding tape unit.

7.

Connect the two device data bus cables
next tape unit to the preceding tape unit.

8.

Close the connector-holding clip

9.

Connect the thermal cable
on the next tape unit to
the thermal connector
on the preceding tape unit.

II Thermal
Cable

161.

D.

m

from

II from the

EI

EJ.

II

10. Continue with the next step on INST 321.

mAC Power
Cable Socket

3480 MI

EC336395

II Copyright IBM Corp. 19B4. 1985, 1986

Installation Instructions

INST 320

3480 Installation Instructions

Installation Instructions

This page is for control units without 8M
6460460 (See CARR-CU 9) and tape units
without 8M 6460006 (See CARR-DR 9)
Installing Additional Tape Units (Continued)

13. Place the rear casters on the new tape unit so the
caster lock thumbscrews

III are accessible.

14. Lock the rear casters on the new tape unit by turning
the caster lock thumbscrews clockwise until they are
tight.

15. Repeat steps 1 through 14, on INST 320 and INST
321. for each additional tape unit that is attached to

See INST 321 and 325 for the following locations.

11. Place the next tape unit against the preceding tape unit.
CAUTION
When installing a B box to a B box with the
automatic cartridge loader feature installed on any
drive. the drive must be opened approximately 5
em (2 in.) to prevent the conductive seal from
being pinched between the tape unit frames.
Note:
Be sure the position of the casters
does not prevent the tape units from fitting
snugly together.

12. Fasten the new tape unit to the preceding tape unit by

the control unit.

17. Screw the safety cover
socket.

m

onto the ac power cable

DANGER
Dangerous voltages are present at the ac power
cable socket. The safety cover must be on when
the socket is not being used. :ed.
18. Plug the thermal terminator
connector

EJ.

B in the thermal

Open the connector-holding clip

b.

Push the terminator cards

c.

Close the connector-holding clip

YES NO

I

I

Go to INST

340.

Have you already installed the second
control unit and the attached tape
units?

I

m.

Return to INST 310 and repeat the
procedure for the second control
unit.

and
the card guides. in the ship group. Plug the cards in the
device data bus sockets.

a.

19. Are you installing a second control unit that is to
be attached to this control unit with feature
cables?

YES NO

On the last tape unit attached to the control unit:

16. Locate the two terminator cards pin 8492916

INST 321

For a dual control unit subsystem, each
control unit has a unique identity:
CUO
or CUI.
The identification switches
wi I I be set later during the installation.

D.

m

straight in until tight.

Go to INST 330 to connect the dual control
unit communication cables.

g.

installing a hex bolt and washer at the rear of the tape
unit
and at the front of the tape unit

m.

O.

Note:
If the tape units are not correctly
aligned. the covers may bind. Ensure that the
covers are not binding.

B Thermal
Terminator

Tape Unit

~~~IJ 6':~ :~o,

('

I

\

,,
>
'

.

---~

....

Tape Unit '"

"'..,..- ..-

II Connector· Holding

D Connector· Holding

Clip (Closed)

Clip (Open)
Front

3480 MI

Installation Instructions

EC336395

II> Copyright IBM Corp. 19B4. 19B5. 1986

()

()

l.f)

{l

()

INST 321

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

3480 Installation Instructions
Installation Instructions

o
INST 325

This page Is for control units without 8M 6460460
(See CARR-CU 9) and tape units without 8M
6460006 (See CARR-DR 9)
Control Unit

Installing Additional Tape Units (Continued)

Tape Units

Control Unit

iii Hex Bolt

D

Hex Bolt

II Caster

Lock
Thumbscrew

3480 MI

EC336396

Installation Instructions

'('. C"pyrighllBM Corp 19114. 1985. 1986 1981

&4iM;ZAt=

INST 325

Installation Instructions

INST 330

3480 Installation Instructions
This page Is for control units without 8M 6460460
(See CARR-CU 9) and tape units without 8M
6460006 (See CARR-DR 9)
Connecting the Dual Control Unit Communication
Cables
Note: Two service representatives should perform the
following steps at the same time. to reduce the Install
time.

0

1.

The 2-connector cable
must be toward the front 01
the control unit; the 3-connector cable
must be
toward the rear.

2.

Bring the cable ends up from the bottom of the control
unit inside the machine frame.

fJ

Note: Ensure that the cables are positioned so
the cable connectors will line up correctly with
the cable sockets before placing the cables
inside the frame.
3.

Continue to the next step on INST 331.

Front View

Installation Instructions
3480 MI

EC336396

© Copyright IBM Corp.

f)

INST 330

1984. 1985. 1986. 1987

0

()

0

f)

()

0

~]

i~

.

D

:J

o

o

0

3480 Installation Instructions

o

o

o

o

o

Installati~nstructions

I " 330

This page Is for control units without 8M 6460460
(See CARR-CU 9) and tape units without 8M
6460006 (See CARR-DR 9)
Connecting the Dual Control Unit Communication
Cables
Note: Two service representatives should perform the following
steps at the same time, to reduce the install time.

D

....

~

1. The 2-connector cable
must be toward the front of
the control unit; the 3-connector cable
must be
toward the rear.

fJ

Control Unit 1
2. Bring the cable ends up from the bottom of the control
unit inside the machine frame.
Note: Ensure that the cables are positioned so the cable
connectors will line up correctly with the cable
sockets before placing the cables inside the
frame.
3. Continue to the next step on INST 331.
Note: Both control units of a dual control unit subsystem must
have the Improved Data Recording Capability feature
before the Improved Data Recording Capability allowed
switch can be set If only one control unit has the feature,
the Improved Data Recording Capability allowed switch
must be set off. See CARR-CU 1200 for switch position
assignments.

Front View

3480 MI EC A57723
"Copyrivht IBM Corp_ 1982,1989

IBM COinfidential

Installation Instructions

INST 330

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o
3480 Installation Instructions

()

o o
Installation Instructions

This page Is for control units without 8M 6460460
(See CARR-CU 9) and tape units without 8M
6460006 (See CARR-DR 9)

8. If your control unit has retaining screws for sockets A3,
A4, and AS. do the following:
a. Plug the 3-connector cable connectors A3, A4,
and AS
in sockets A3. A4, and AS.

III

Connecting the Dual Control Unit Communication
cables (Continued)
4. Before installing the cables,~ess the cable contacts
firmly against the ESD pad
to remove any
electrostatic discharge.

m

b. Fasten the cables in place with the retaining
screws.
c. Insert the 3-connector cable in the cable
retaining bracket

II.

o o
INST 331

m

9. loosen the wingnuts
on the cable retaining brackets
and rotate the brackets upward.

II

II

10. Place the cables between the bracket guide posts
and ensure there is no excess cable between the
connectors and the brackets, 80 the cable will remain
flat against the side of the control unit. Rotate the
retaining brackets downward

1m.

11. Tighten the wingnuts on the retaining brackets.
12. Go to INST 340 to set the control unit addresses.

5. Connect the grounding straps from both the 3-connector
cable and the 2-connector cable to the frame at

D.

6. Plug the 2-connector cable connectors

0

in sockets

A1, andA21J.

7. There are two types of cable retention hardware. If your
control unit has a retaining plate and screw assembly for
sockets A3, A4, and A5, go to step 7. If your control unit
has connector holding clips on sockets A3, A4, and A5,
do the following:

IJBracket
Guide
Posu

a. Open the connector-holding clips for sockets A3,
A4, and A5

II.

b. Plug the 3-connector cable connectors A3, A4,
and AS
in sockets A3, A4, and AS.

III

Be sure that a" cables are seated flat in the
connectors; if not, they will damage the cable
retention hardware in the next step.
c. Close the connector-holding clips.
d. Insert the 3-connector cable in the cable
retaining bracket

II.

e. Go to step 8.

Connector Holding Clip

Retaining Screw Assembly

3480 MI EC A57723
o Copyri,ht IBM Corp. 1182. ln9

Installation Instructions

INST 331

Q

3480 Installation Instructions

Installation Instructions

This page is for control units without BM 6460460
(See CARR-CU 9)

Setting the Control Unit CUO/CU1 Switch

Setting the Channel Address Switches

On a single control unit subsystem:

On each control unit being installed, set the control unit address
switches
as follows:

Setting the Control Unit Addresses

1. Set the CUO/CU1 switch

The following procedures are used to set the control unit
addresses.

0

Depending on what features the control unit has, there may be
address switches in positions A, B, C, and 0 on the control unit
operator setup panel.

fJ

1. On CUO, set the CUQ/CU1 switch

0

to CUO.

Nole: CUO has drive addresses 0 -7 physically
attached to the control unit.
2. On CU1, set the CUO/CU1 switch

0

requirements for control unit addressing and unit control word
(UCW) assignment before setting the address switches. All unit
control word (UCW) specifications for the 3480 addresses must
be set to block, unshared. Also, the proper channel protocal
(data streaming or DC Interlock) must be specified. All 16
possible addresses for a 3480 subsystem must be specified, even
if some of the drives will not be present. The 3480 control unit
can address all 16 addresses, and may generate error
information or interrupts for non-existent devices in certain
ci rcumstances.

a. Find your control unit address on the left.
b. Move to the right to your channel type.
The point of intersection contains the value to use for the
right thumbwheel switch.

The channel types are:

to CU1.

Nole: CU1 has drive addresses 8 - F phySically
attached to the control unit.

Attention: The 3480 is a non-shared device. Check the system

3. Use the Switch Setting Chart on INST 341 to find the
value for the right thumbwheel switch as follows:

1. If the ·Channellnformation Chart" on INST 341 has been
completed, go to step 2. If the ·Channellnformation
Chart" has not been completed, obtain the channel
address, control unit address, and type of channel being
used from the customer, the installation planning
representative, or the systems assurance
representative. Record this information in the "Channel
Information Chart."

On a dual control unit subsystem:

Each switch pair has two thumbwheel switches. The left switch
is set to the control unit address. The right switch is set to a
value to be determined by the "Switch Setting Chart" on INST
341.

2. Start with switch position A: set the left thumbwheel
switch to the control unit address from the "Channel
Information Chart."

to CUO.

2. Go to "Setting the Channel Address Switches- on this
page.

3. Go to "Setting the Channel Address Switches· on this
page.

INST 340

c. Set the right thumbwheel switch.

•

Interlocked (DCI)

•

2-Megabyte data streaming (2 Mb)

•

3-Megabyte data streaming (3 Mb)

•

4.5-Megabyte data streaming (4.5 Mb).

4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for all installed channels.

Attention: All channel adapters installed on the control unit
must be set to a valid configuration, as shown in the table on
INST 341, even if the channel is not connected to a host system.
Failure to set a valid configuration causes symptoms of hardware
failure.
5. Attach the control unit address labels
setting on the address selectors.

D to match the

6. Determine if the control unit has 'the Improved Data
Recording Capability (IDRC) feature installed. If the
customer does NOT have software to support IDRC,
ensure that the feature is disabled in FRU 120.
7. Go to INST 355 if no tape units are to be attached to this
control unit.
8. Go to INST 350 to set the drive addresses.

Installation Instructions

3480 MI EC A57724

,

}

~J

,f)

~)

~J

it

V

. 'J"

"
'I.

J

(l

t..'#

~J

f,

....1

,,",t"

,

, J1

f

'~,

, ,•
l

,}

,

)
"-

:)

if

,

\

,J

~,

I

''l
J

f

,

"'}

~

~

.j

:J

"

"

}

\

\,

J

[)

I
'4.

)

'\

,J

f '\

""

j

~)

INST 340

)

"'- I

f{

')

.j

"

)

f

'\

tJ

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

3480 Installation Instructions

o

o
Installation Instructions

o
INST 341

This page is for control units without 8M 6460460
(See CARR-CU 9) and tape units without 8M
6460006 (See CARR-DR 9)
Setting the Control Unit Addresses (Continued)
Chennel Informetlon Chert

II

Operator Setup Panel
CONTROL UN IT 0
SWITCH
POSITION

CHANNEL
ADDRESS

CONTROL UN IT
ADDRESS

CHANNEL
TYPE

A

RCUO

RCUOnli..

t::::1 CUI

t::l CU Offli_
1:1

B

C

OCP._

D

CHANNEL
ADDRESS

BR

t::::1 OiSlb11

--'''-/A~~~~

'[I

R

1:1

En.b..

D R Enob"

t::l Oisabll

t::::1 ~isable

m'

~___I:I
___________________
I:I
____-J~~__________
I:I
__________________I:I
__~

CONTROL UN IT
ADDRESS

CHANNEL
TYPE

A
B

, Add.

T

I

o

II CU Address Instructions

TYPI,

T
El

Sol Chan.11 Add .... lirs!. 511 Type
M.t

dlptndlng upon

0

00

[!]@]

Ty",

,Add.

11
4.5 MB Ready

00

C
D

w.it

Enobll

t::::1 Oisable

CONTROL UN iT 1
SWITCH
POSITION

Err.,

h.....

AR

OIML

Vlluf 01

Address.

,Add.

If address is 2. 4, 7. 8. B. 0, E then

UI. th ... values far Type:
DC Interlock 1.5 MB max.

2.0 MB Struming

A

C

1A.52~~!t~:~~~g4.5 MB

b

2

3.0 MB S".. minG

DD

TYPI ,

,Add.

o

Futur.EiS Installed)

T

TYPI,EI

.

I addreu i, D, 3. 5, 6, 9, A. C. F then
u

th._ valu .. for Type:
nterlock 1.5 Me max.

2.0 B Str.. ming
3.0
Str•• ming
4.5 M Struming

3
B
0
F

Switch Setting Chart

Optional Fe'ature on 3480 A22
Control Units Prior to EC A58284

CHANNEL TYPES

CONTROL UNIT ADDRESS
DCI
1.5MB

2MB

3MB

4.5MB"

0 3 5 6 9 A C F

3

B

D

F

1 2 4 7

2

A

C

E

8 B D E

" Optional feature on 3480
A22 control units prior
to EC A58248.

left
Thumbwheel
Switch

3480 MI EC A57721
r

...

CopyrighllBM Corp. '982. '988

Right
- -- Thumbwheel
Switch

Installation Instructions

INST 341

Notes
Notes

INST 345

3480 MI EC A57721
C CopyrigllllBM Corp. 1982. 1988

Notes

o

t}

f)

INST 345

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

3480 Installation Instructions
4.

Remove the drive safety cover (see CARR-DR 2-5).

5.

Find the physical address switch
tape deck, on the rear panel cover

Setting the Drive Logical and Physical Addresses

6.

Set the drive physical address switches to match the
logical address switches.

7.

Replace the drive safety cover (see CARR-DR 2-5), and
close the drive drawer.

8.

Ensure that the logical and phySical address switches
are set on all drives before continuing.

Single Control Unit Subsystem
1.

2.

Set the drive logical address switches If) to 0 through 7;
set the drive next to the control unit to 0, set the next
drive to 1, and so forth. See figure 1.

D

Attach the address labels
to the drive operator
panels. Each label should match the number set on the
drive logicaf address switch.

o
INST 350

Installation Instructions

This page Is for control units without 8M 6460460
(See CARR-CU 9) and tape units without 8M
6460006 (See CARR-DR 9)

Use the following procedures to set the drive logical address,
and physical address. There are separate procedures for a
single control unit subsystem and a dual control unit subsystem
-- be sure to use the correct procedure.

o

9.

Dual Control Unit Subsystem

II at the rear of the

II.

1.

2.

3.

Go to INST 355 to check the control unit power supply
jumpers.
4.

CUO

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

CUl

8

9

A

B

C

D

E

F

Set the drive logical address switches If) on the drives
attached to CUO, to 0 through 7; set the drive next to the
control unit to 0, set the next drive to 1, and so forth.
See figure 1.
Set the drive logical address switches If) on the drives
attached to CU1, to 8 through F; set the drive next to the
control unit to 8, set the next drive to 9, and so forth.
See figure 1.

D

Attach the address labels
to the drive operator
panels. Each label should match the number set on the
drive logical address switch.

5.

Remove the drive safety cover (see CARR-DR 2-5).

6.

Find the physical address switch
tape deck, on the rear panel cover

7.

Set the drive physical address switches to match the
logical address switches.

8.

Replace the drive safety cover (see CARR-DR 2-5), and
close the drive drawer.

9.

Ensure that the logical and physical address switches
are set on all drives before continuing.

II at the rear of the

II.

10. Go to INST 355 to check the control unit power supply
Jumpers.

Open the drive drawers.

Phvsical Address Switch
3.

Open the drive drawers.

Figure 1.

Required Drive Address Values

Drive Operator Panel

o

~
..D label
Drive Switch Panel
0 .... _

-B
D
3480 MI

<:

EC336396

Copyngh"UM Corp_ 1984 1985 1986 '~bl

Installation Instructions

INST 350

Installation Instructions

3480 Installation Instructions
This page is for control units without 8M 6460460
(See CARR-CU 9) and tape units without 8M
6460006 (See CARR-DR 9)

2.

CONTROL UNIT VOLTAGE JUMPERS - 60 HZ AND 50 HZ JAPAN
CU INPUT VOLTAGE

Checking Control Unit Power Supply Jumpers
Check the jumpers for the control unit ac (PS01) and dc (PS02)
power supplies. If the installation is a dual control unit
subsystem, check both control units.

1.

Use one of the following two tables to check the voltage
settings. Ensure the jumpers are installed correctly for
the voltage being used.
Note: For 50 Hz (except Japan) machines, if the
DeltalWye jumper has to be changed (J09 and
J10 on CU-PSOI), ensure that the cap is
reinstalled on the empty socket.

POSITION OF AC
(PSOl) JUMPER

200/208 V ac

JOg

220 V ac

JIG

230/24G V ac

Jll

REF

POSITION OF DC
(PS02) JUMPER

II
II
II

Jl3
J14
J15

INST 355

A control unit has from 1 to 4 channel adapters. The
position of the jumper plug for CU-PS02-J17 through
CU-PS02-J20
is determined by the number of
channel adapters in the control unit. Use the following
table to ensure that the CU is jumpered for the correct
number of channel adapters.

D

REF

0
0
D

Nole: If the Power Supply on the CU has
different Jumper Labels than described here,
follow the instructions on the Power Supply
Template.

CONVENIENCE
OUTLET

CONTROL UNIT CHANNEL JUMPERS

100 V ac

J12

120 V ac

Jl3

II
II

NUMBER OF
CHANNEL ADAPTERS

CONTROL UNIT VOLTAGE JUMPERS - 5G HZ (EXCEPT JAPAN)
CU INPUT VOLTAGE

POSITION OF AC
(PSOl) JUMPERS

REF

POSITION OF DC
(PSG2) JUMPER

2GG/2G8 V ac

JGg, JU, J13

II

Jl3

22G V ac

JOg, JIl, J14

23G/24G V ac

JGg, Jll, J15

38G V ac

JIG, J12, J14

4GG V ac

JIG, Jl2, Jl5

415 V ac

JlG, JI2, Jl5

••
••
II

J14
J15
J14
J15
JI5

REF

0
D
0
D
D
0

POSITION OF DC
(PSG2) JUMPER

1

Jl7

2

JI8

3

JIg

4

J20

3.

Switch all of the circuit breakers on each control unit off
then back on. See LOC 1 for the CU dc and ac power
supplies.

4.

Open the back of each CU and ensure that the Service
switch mounted on the gate is in the On pOSition. See
LOC 1.

5.

Go to INST 360 if no tape units are to be connected to
this control unit.

6.

Go to INST 356 to check the tape unit power supply
jumpers.

60 Hz ( and 50 Hz in Japan)

a

J20

CU·PS02

DC Power Supply
Jll ~',

~

CU·PSOI

AC Power Supply

.. Vo"

Installation Instructions

EC336396

.t,~ CopyrighllBM Corp. 1984. 1985. 1986. 1987

o

W

50 Hz (except Japan)

Front

3480 MI

J12

{)

,

~'.)

INST 355

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

3480 Installation Instructions
This page is for control units without 8M 6460460
(See CARR-CU 9) and tape units without 8M
6460006 (See CARR-DR 9)

2.

o

o

o

Installation Instructions

INST 356

Installation Instructions

INST 356

Switch all circuit breakers on each tape unit off then
back on. See LOC 1 for circuit breaker locations,
Replace the front safety cover removed in step 1, See
CARR-DR 2-4 for replacement procedures.

Checking Tape Unit Power Supply Jumpers
3,
Use the following table to check for correct voltage jumpering on
each tape unit dc power supply.

Go to INST 360 to connect the control unit ac power
cable.

Attention: The correct position of the tape unit's dc (PSO 1)
jumper is determined by the control unit's input voltage, NOT the
tape unit's input voltage. See the table below.
1.

Remove the front safety cover to gain access to the dc
power supply. See CARR-DR 2-3 for
removal/replacement procedures.

TAPE UNIT VOLTAGE JUMPER
CU INPUT VOLTAGE

POS ITI ON OF DC
(PSOl) JUMPER

200/208 V ae

Jl2

220 V ae

Jl3

230/240 V ae

Jl4

380 V ile

Jl3

400 V a{;

Jl4

415 V ae

Jl4

CBl
@
DROO

Fl
DRle)

F2

00000

C[j)

00000

@

F3

F4

F5

Fa

F7

Fa

Fe

FlO

Fll

F12

~
000

•••••
ORO •••••
•••••

J12

(I)

C[j)

*

J9
DRI

0

J13

~

•••••

•••••
•••••

J14

~

CB2
F13

~

0
(

J
@

L

)

o

(

J

~

0

L)

~
S

Front

3480 MI

EC336396

C Copyroght IBM Corp 1984 1985. 1986, 1981

Installation Instructions

3480 Installation Instructions
This page Is for control units without 8M 6460460
(See CARR-CU 9) and tape units without 8M
6460006 (See CARR-DR 9)

3.

7.

On the control unit operator setup panel:
a.

Set the Power On/Off switch

II to On.

b.

Set the CU Online/CU Offline switch
Offline.

c.

Set the Local/Remote switch

Connecting the Control Unit AC Power Cable
Make sure the circuit breaker that supplies power to the
customer's receptacle Is OFF.

fJ

to CU

Make sure that there are no cables attached to the I/O tailgate
assembly in the bottom rear of the control unit.

III to Local.

Note: Early control units have a Local Power
On/Off switch located directly be/ow the Power
On/Off switch
Ensure this is set to the On
position if it is present.

II.

" you are Installing a dual control unit subsystem, power to both
customer receptacles must be OFF.
4.

On each drive switch panel:
a.
b.

m to On.
Set the Online/Offline switch m to Online.

9.

6.

Have the customer switch on the circuit breaker that
supplies power to the customer receptacle.

1m

II,

iii.

Press the reset button located on the upper thermal
switch, then lower the top cover, and tighten the two top
cover screws.

10. Locate the lower thermal switch
the logic gate.

II

a.

Set the UEPO switch

to Power Enable.

b.

Press the Local Power Enable switch
to
supply power to the control unit and its attached
drives.

II

Is the Service switch on the OIA
gate in the CU
set to On?

m

On the control unit operator setup panel, set the Power
OnlOff switch
to Off. Set the Unit Emergency Power
Off (UEPO) switch
to Power Off.

II

YES NO

I

II

Are you satisfied that the customer receptacle and
control unit power connector are wired correctly? See
INST 306 for safety checks.

YES NO

I

3480 MI

Connect the control unit ac power connector
customer receptacle.

Is the DC Power light on the control unit operator setup
panel
On?

II

YES NO

Go to MAP DIDO-Power Start, on PWR 100,
to repair the power failure; then return
here to complete the installation.
17. Are you installing a single control unit subsystem?

I

YES NO

Go to MAP DIDO-Power Start, on PWR
lOa, to repair the power failure;
then return to this page, INST 360,
step 2 and continue.

I

Are two service representative's installing
this subsystem at the same time?
YES NO

I

Checking the Unit Emergency Power Off (UEPO)
switch

15. Set the UEPO switch

Go step 14 on this page.

m

II

Is the DC Power light on the CU
operator setup panel D On1

I

Continue to the next step.
2.

I

Go to step 17 on this page.

13. Press the Local Power Enable switch
to supply
power to the control unit and its attached drives.

14. Set the control unit Power On/Off switch
pOSition.

Go step 7 on this page.

Does the control unit power on with the
UEPO switch in the Power Off position?
YES NO

II to Power Enable.

Set the switch to On and press
the loca 1 Power Enable switch II.

YES NO

Inform the customer to have the
wiring corrected.

There is a problem with the UEPO switch
(FRU198) or the ac power supply (FRU144).
Follow the instructions in the CARR
section of the Maintenance Information
for the removal and replacement of those
FRUs. Return here and repeat steps 14
through 16 after each FRU is replaced.

11. Press the lower thermal switch reset button.

Continue with the next step.

I

1.

m on the bottom of

On the control unit operator setup panel:

YES NO
See INST 361 tor the tollowlng locations.

Go to step 17 on this page.

Set the Drive Power switch

Is the DC Power light on the control unit operator setup
panel DOn?

Note:

I

II to Off.

Loosen the two screws
on the top of the logiC gate
and raise the top cover to gain access to the upper
thermal switch

12. Set the UEPO switch
5.

Does the control unit power on with the UEPO switch In
the Power Off position?

YES NO
Set the UEPO switch
8.

DANGER

Vibration or temperatures exceeding operating
temperatures during shipping may trip the upper or
lower thermal switches on the logic gate.

INST 360

II to the Off

II to the Power Off position.

16. Attempt to power on the control unit with the UEPO
switch In the Power Off pOSition, by doing the following:

Repeat steps 1 through 16 for
the second control unit, then
set the Power ON/OFF switch II
to OFF on both control units
and go to INST 376.
Set Power ON/OFF swi tch
and go to INST 376.
Set Power ON/OFF swi tch
and go to INST 370.

II

E1

to OFF

to OFF

II to the On

a.

Set the Power On/Off switch
position.

b.

Press the Local Power Enable switch

II.

Go step 7 on this page.
to the

Go step 14 on this page.

Installation Instructions

EC336396

~ Copyright IBM Corp, 1984, 1985, 1986. 1987

~)

INST 360

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

3480 Installation Instructions

o

o
Installation Instructions

This page is for control units without 8M 6460460
(See CARR-CU 9) and tape units without 8M
6460006 (See CARR-DR 9)

0

t3"-...

a

c...... ,'*-o

"111
00
.... "..
o

.a

leIell ............".'''.1 Sit r,.
,I • ." ... ,

D§'......

DL,.......'.-

DO
... ....

DO
... '...

'.1,..

rflM

1\

J Ifl S.r .....""

C

It

A'••&I ,. a]

Logic Gate

...........

ICI

DmJ

lit. _. AI
,II,S,,,,,,,,,
Inl.. , ...

D

o

0'·'

C[I

II .......... I 2.' , I I 0 I

...." ........

DC

..

§'-

~

0@l
... 'fl•

A,Jd'IUlntlluCl.onl

... t ........'" lito" .","

hr.

.
1m]

0_

a

tu

cu .......
a

I§'.'"...

"§'-

II

..
~-••

cu ......

cu,

le'_

II
,...,

§CUD

INST 361

Press to
Reset Thermal
Switch

B

II

o

~'t

I~=)

i

.• C, ,.....

_''''_.eI.... I'' 1,"
DC .", .. '., I 5 1If, ""I' J
1... Su....'"
•
J II' S'u.......
D

o
II Service Switch
lUCiI

__--r---D
Front of Panel

,.....---------... m

Rem011

Drive Power
Switch

Control Unit

lEI Drive

Online/Offline
Switch

mAC Power
Connector

3480 MI

EC336396

C COPYright IBM Corp. '~84. 1985 19116 1987

Press to
Reset Thermal
Switch

Installation Instructions

INST 361

3480 Installation Instructions

Installation Instructions

This page is for control units without 8M 6460460
(See CARR-CU 9) and tape units without 8M
6460006 (See CARR-DR 9)

4. On each drive with the Automatic Cartridge Loader
feature, set the Loader switch
to Auto.

m

12. On each drive switch panel, set the Online/Offline switch
to Offline.

10. On each drive switch panel, set the Drive Power switch
to Off; then set it back to On.

m

fJ

n

Do special box-shaped symbols show in the first and last.
positions of the message display?

Does a single asterisk
show for ten seconds or longer
on each drive message display?

5. On the control unit:

INST 370

3.5 Inch IML Disk Drive

Running Offline Checkout for a Single Control
Unit Subsystem

YES NO

a. PuSh the release button on the IML disk drive
and remove the head protector.
b. Insert the IML diskette (label up and toward you)
and push until the drive closes.
c. Set the Power On/Off switch
to On.

m

This procedure is used for offline checkout of a single control unit
subsystem only. Go to INST 376 if you have a dual control unit
subsystem.

iii

The offline checkout tests whether the control unit can
communicate with all the drives in the subsystem.

5.25 Inch IML D.isk Drive

m

a. Open the latch on the IML disk drive
and
remove the head protector.
b. Insert the IML diskette (label up and towards
you) and close the drive latch.
c. Set the Power OnlOff switch
to On.

As you progress through the tests, you are asked to note the
address of any drive that does not show the display response
expected. After the offline checkout is complete, you will be sent
to INST 390 to analyze the drives that failed during the checkout.

VI

t:S iO

I

I

Note the drive addresses that do
not show the specia~ box-shaped
symbols and continue to the next
step.

Nete the drive addresses that did not
show a single asteriSK and continue to
tne next ste~.

Continue to the next steo.
Continue to the next step.

11. On each drive switch panel, press then release the
Reset switch

Ill.

13. On the drive switch panel, set the OnlinelOffline switch
to Online and verify that the special box-shaped
symbols go away.

m

n

Does a single asterisk
show for ten seconds or longer
on each drive message display?

Do the special box-shaped symbols go away?

iii

YES NO

II

The error light
will light when certain portions of the offline
tests are run. This condition is normal and does not indicate a
failure In the control unit unless you are asked to note the status
of the error light.

I

Nete the drive adcresses where the
special box-shaped symbo1s de net go
away, and cont;nue with tr,e next step.

Switching on the Power

Note: See INST 371 for the following locations.

6. Ensure that the main circuit breaker on the control unit
(CB1 on the ac power supply) is off; then switch it On.

Setting Up for the Checkout

7. Set Unit Emergency Power Off switch on the control unit
to Power Enable.

Continue to the "ext

ste~.

Cor.tinue wi!n

m

Note: If you are adding a tape unit to a previously installed
subsystem, do the following procedures testing only that
tape unit you are adding.

8. Press the Local Power Enable pushbutton
control unit operator setup panel.

~he

next S!:p.

14. Go to INST 372 to continue the offline checkout.

mon the

n

9. Does a single asterisk
show for ten seconds or longer
on each drive message display?

1. On the control unit operator setup panel:

iii

a. Verify that the Power On/Off switch
is set to
Off.
b. Set the Normal/Test switch
to Test.
is set to CUO.
c. Verify that the CUO/CU1 switch
Recommended (but not required) for Single
control unit subsystems.
d. Verify that the CU Offline/CU Online switch
is set to CU Offline.

D

fJ

II

a. Set the Ready/Not Ready switch

,

~O

i

Are all

m to Ready.

t~e sw~

t:hes set correctly?

YES NO

!

Switc~

I
I
I

i

2. On each drive operator panel:
_

YES

I

off the mainline circuit
b'eaker (eBl on tne ac power
supply) and set the swi tches as
scecified in steps 1, 2. and 3;
then perform stees 5 through 7.

Does a single asterisk show for
ten seconds or longer on each
drive message display?

YES iO

3. On each drive switch panel:
a. Verify that the Drive Power switch
On.

fJ

b. Verify that the Online/Offline switch
to Online.

is set to

m is set

I"
I!
i

Note the d~ive addresses
t~at did not show a single
asterisk and cont;n~e to
the next step.
Continue

~o

the next step.

Note tne drhe add~esses that did
not snow a single aste"isk and
cont i nue to the next step.
Cont i nue to the next step.

3480 MI EC A57721

Installation Instructions

e Copyr'gllt IBM Corp. 1982. 1988

~)

o

~)

INST 370
if \

• .1

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

Installation Instructions

3480 Installation Instructions

INST 371

This page is for control units without 8M 6460460
(See CARR-CU 9) and tape units without 8M
6460006 (See CARR-DR 9)

op~ator

Setup

pa~D_'

R

~--_/_-

ze

___

No,mol

R

~T.u

CUO

tr

OIML

§

/

011

When

I

~----~~~~--------------~--------------~~
DC Power
Error
Wa,1
A REnabl.

BREnable

REnilb,e

C]Oisable

~D,sable

t:::l Disable

~

\

On

~CUI

~

-

D

o ~ Enable

local

Disable

0

B r::::=="

:~ r~1

"
i~

00
Add.

Type

cu

o

Set

Add.

Adctress

Typ.

Add

Auto

Power Enable

\

Power

Off

Drive Switch Panel

))

-

@

~

I :

Tvp.

~ .........

Set Tvpe

~ow.,

~

~

Online

5.25 Inch Drive

If Jdojres$ :s J. 3. 5, 6, g, A, C, F :nen
'.lse :hasa -/aIU9S for :'I:Je:
DC Int,!r!oc< 1.5 'v1a "'ax.
3
2.0 \AS Str.aaming
3
3.0 .~13 5:l"ul"'"ling
0
4.5 Y3 Str~aming
F

next depending :.Joon value of .A.\Jdress.

Automatic Cartridge
Loader Operator Panel

Reset

BJB
y.'''.,
I

Orlve Address

Optional Feature on 3480 A22
Control Units Prior to EC A58284

Local

i

Remote

q0
i~

OR
/

"

Drive Operator Panel

System

m

Manual

D
D

o

Start

RIJWII1d

III" "'" II "" 111111111 "'

3480 MI EC A57721
e Copy"gnl IBM Corp 1982. ~988

fl~st

~[

DO

Address Instructions
Channel

'r.~

0

Power

-

~

Chlnnlt Address

Aro:::::::::=:="

Unit

Emergencv

0,.",.

Locol Pow"
Enable

~

~

In

.~

./

D

Unload

8-'"-:---&3
Reldv

Not Readv

L©~I~~DF_i~I ""

3.5 Inch Drive

Power

Installation Instructions

INST 371

Installation Instructions

3480 Installation Instructions
This page is for control units without 8M
6460460 (See CARR-CU 9) and tape units
without 8M 6460006 (See CARR-DR 9)

A

B

C

See INST 373 for the following locations.

Checking the Addresses
15. On the control unit operator setup panel, set the CU
Online/CU Offline switch

EJ to CU Online.

After a short delay (1 1/2 minutes or less) does "L=x
P=x" (x being any number between 0 and 7) appear on
any drive display?

YES NO

Call your next level of
support.
Note the addresses of any drives
that do not show the correct
display, then continue with the
next step.

off the control unit with the
Power On/Off switch !4! and verify that
the switches are set correctly on the
control unit and tape unit panels. See
"Setting Up for the Checkout" steps I,
2, and 3 on INST 370 for the correct
switch settings. Correct any switch
settings that are wrong. Power up and
repeat the actions you performed in
step 14.
Does "L=x P=x" appear on any tape
drive display?

YES NO

I

The CU will not load the microprogram and must be fixed to
continu~ Set the Normal/Test
switch II to Normal and press
the lML switch
Insert the
product maintenance diskette into
the MD and do an IPL on the MD.
Follow the maintenance package to
correct the problem and return
here when the problem is fixed.

II.

Set the Normal/Test switch to Test
and check the CU and tape unit
switch settings again. See
"Setting Up for the Checkout" steps
I, 2, and 3 on INST 370 for the
correct switch settings. Correct
any switch settings that are wrong.
Power up and repeat the actions
you performed in step 14.
Does "L=x P=x" appear on any tape
drive display?

B

3480 MI
• CCIpvright IBM

II

Note the addresses of any drives that
do not show the correct display, then
continue with the next step.
Note the addresses of any drives that do
not show the correct display, then
continue with the next step.

drive display to the address label

YES NO

I

Ensure that all the drive logical
addresses are set correctly.
See
"Setting the Drive Logical and
Physical Addresses" on INST 350.
Leaving the control unit Online, power
it off then back on again.
Note the
addresses of any drives whose display
labels
still do not match the "L=x"
. portion of the display, then continue
to the next step.

II

Ensure that the "P=x" (physical address)
p,0rtion of each display does not match the
'P=x" portion of any other drive display
in the subsystem.

Online/CU Offline switch

EJ to CU Offline.

After a delay of 1 1/2 minutes or less, does TEST show
with the indicator bars
flashing on the message
display of any drive?

II

Note:
If an Action message appears on any
drive display, go to INST 305 and perform the
action described for that message. Return here
when finished, and set the Power On/Off
switch
to Off then On and go to step 14 on
this page.

II

Note: This testing procedure can be
performed with one scratch tape, but you must
wait for each drive to unload the tape. This
increases the test time to 2 1/2 minutes for
each drive.

26. When the first drive unloads, move that tape to the
next drive showing TEST. If the cartridge does not
unload, go to "Cartridge Removal by Hand" on CART

10.

I

The CU wi 11 not load the microprogram
and must be fixed to cO~inue.
Set
the Normal/Test switch
to Normal
and press the IML switch
.
Insert
the product maintenance diS ette into
the MD and do an IPL on the MD.
Follow the maintenance package to
correct the problem and return here
when the problem is fixed.
Continue to the next step.

18. Set a blank cartridge

When UNLOAD appears on the display of the first
drive, the next drive with a tape loaded will begin
testing.

D to not file protect.

19. If the automatic cartridge loader feature is installed, skip
the next step.

20. Insert the cartridge into the drive that is nearest the
control unit and displaying TEST. Close the cartridge
latch and skip the next two steps.

27. Repeat this procedure for all drives in the subsystem
showing TEST.

28. If failures occur on multiple drives in a string, there may
be a cable connection problem. Check the seating of
the device data and read bus cables, and the dual
control unit communication cables (for dual control unit
subsystems). See LOC 1 for the control unit and tape
unit cable locations.
When you have finished checking the cables, insert a
cartridge into those drives that were failing and the
tests will be rerun .

29. If any drives will not run the tests to completion, note
the failing drive addresses and that CUO was running
the test. This will be used later on INST 390 when the
product package is run.

30. Go to the next step on INST 374.
21. Put a cartridge in the top positions of the loader on the
Does each drive display have a "P=x" number not
shared by any other drive?
YES NO
lnsure that all of the drive physical
addresses are set correctly.
See
"Setting the Drive Logical and
Physical Addresses" on INST 350.
Leaving the control unit Online, power
it off then on again.
Note any drive
physical addresses that are still
incorrect and continue to the next step.
ontinue with the next step.

drive nearest the control unit and is displaying TEST.

22. Ensure the loader mode switch
and press the Start switch

m.

II is set to Auto mode

23. If the display shows Action Message 1, 2, 3, or 5 after
you load the tape cartridge, go to "Action Messages"
on INST 305 and perform the procedure as directed.
Return here when you have completed the required
procedure.

24. The diagnostic will show various messages on the drive
display as it executes, indicating the action the drive is
performing.
Each drive will require about 1 3/4 minutes to execute
the test, and when complete, will show a single
asterisk on the display.

Installation Instructions

EC336395
carp.

II on each display.

25. While the first drive is being tested, set another blank
cartridge
to not file protect and insert it into the next
drive displaying TEST. The display will show READY U.

D

17. On the control unit operator setup panel, set the CU

YES NO

16. Compare the "L=x" (logical address) portion of each

Does each drive display match the label?

I
Power

YES NO

Checking Read/Write

I

Running Offline Checkout for a Single
Control Unit Subsystem (Continued)
Note:

o

INST 372

1984. 19B5. 19B8

o

INST 372

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

3480 Installation Instructions

o

o

o

INST 373

Installation Instructions

This page is for control units without 8M
6460460 (See CARR-CU 9) and tape units
without 8M 6460006 (See CARR-DR 9)

Automatic Cartridge
Loader Operator Panel

B

II

II

:,mo, :~_:~_~__~:::: \==-'-M-'----tTrI=::::-fi==~I~B~~~~:=~=E~bN:;'iI
. ".
.....
~

A~Eo''''

0",1111.

0,\01"
CI

B~I

00

m@J

-

Add.

o

Tvp.

c:=o

WI,1

~(

A[I
.
I'~

~

Eno,

B~(

CI

ClNlnMlAdd,n,

Add.

CU Addless InstruCllons

D~Enlblf

D,ybl.

0,,,111.

em om
c:=o

~

..

DO

Typ.

Add.

II Addrl'SS 151.24.7 8,B.0 E
,'~r

"'PSr walUl!S 10f T fPt
DC Inlltflock 1 5 \t8 Ill ... 2

Sel Channel Address IIIsl Sf! TvPI'

2 ~B SUl!amlllq

A

ne~1

3 1'.18 S"";t,nmQ

C

dePt'ndtrl9 IIpon value 0' Address

/

!'1@1l

DO

Tv"

Add

IIAddrru'lO.1.569A.CF

Type

System

0

Manual

~~

D~

DLOU"OWft
Eftlbl,

IF] :

1111 i 111111111111 " " " 11111

D

1'11'11

"st' ,IU!S!! valtu!s lor T~pl'

o

ac tUlfltod

IS \18 "1 .. ' 3
B
1MB SUUlnlllq

3 MS SII'lIl1n"'1I

E1~tjAuto

0

lo..1

i
Drive Operator

Rlmotl

pane~

/'
o
m'-+-"'~D
File Protect
Position

3480 MI

EC336395

• Cq>yright IBM Corp. t984. 19B5. 19B6

Not File Protect
Position

Installation Instructions

INST 373

3480 Installation Instructions
This page is for control units without 8M
6460460 (See CARR-CU 9) and tape units
without 8M 6460006 (See CARR-DR 9)
Running Offline Checkout for a Single
Control Unit Subsystem (Continued)
Final Checkout

Installation Instructions

INST 374

Checking the Initial Microprogram Load (lML)
32. On the control unit operator setup panel, set the Power
On/Off switch
to Off, then On.

m

II

After approximately 60 seconds the Wait light
on
the control unit operator setup panel should be on
solidly, and the Error light fJ should be off.
Are all the lights correct?

31. On the control unit operator- setup panel, set the
Normal/Test switch
to Normal.

II

YES NO

~he

control unit wi II not load the microprogram and must be fixed to continue.
Ensure the Normal/Test switch D is set
f£,Normal and the Onl ine/Offl ine switch
1.1 is Offline. Press the IML switch D.
Insert the product maintenance diskette
into the MD and do an IPL on the MD.
Follow the maintenance package to correct
the problem, and return here when the
problem.is fixed.

Do eight asterisks (•••••••• ) show on all drive
displays not showing TEST?
YES NO

I

Is the Normal/Test switch
set to Normal?

D

YES NO

I

o to INST 390, the Offline checkout is complete.

Set the switch to Normal and
repeat step 26.
Do eight asterisks show on all
drive displays not showing TEST?
YES NO
Note the drive addresses
that do not show eight
asterisks or TEST and
continue to the next step.

II

Operator Setup Panel

I

0

-

".....

ontinue to the next step.

A~l"""

ontinue to the next step.

0 ....
~

a..... A. . . .

00
I"..

[!]@]

_

!

A••.

a••.

CU Add.mlnstruc,ions

O·

51, C......... A..... Ii..,. 51, " ••
...' .......... u"n .......1 Ad.... ,

OH

•• i.I....

/

, . _ 0"

om

~

CI

1ft
DD
I".

..

DOI".

A••.

II A..... it 1.2.4.7 ..... D.E .......
u.III....... nl ...
DC In,..loc' 1.5 M8 ...... 2
2MIS"um,,,,
A

I'...

C

h .....

Diu....

I~!

A••.

I,...

@

l)

I

I

~

II Ad. . . d O.3.5.&.9.A.C.F. ,.....
_ _ ••un lar

I

DC Inltrloc' 1.5 M8 mil. 3
2MIS,._,,,,
3MIS.,_,,,,
0

0

•

~
3480 MI

(5

DL. . '.-

D~E_""

Diu ....

T"•.

3M8S"._",

I

~E"""

~

'mJ]

I

o.

Welt

'~E"""
Diu ....

..
'[I

POM'

w~

I:

i:n_

~'§ ,.'._h.W.
E_ _,

rr

~

I:

oc._

\

IMl

CU OH .....

CUI

=

I

Note the drive addresses that do
not show eight asterisks or TEST
and continue to the next step.

cu 0 __

~cuo

Ten'

iii

EC336395

Local

Remote

Installation Instructions

• Capyrighll8M Carp. 1984. 1985. 1988

~)

INST 374

~

o

o
Notes

3480 MI

o

o

o

o

c

o

o

o
Notes

EC336396

o CopyrighllBM Corp. 1984. 1985

lYHo 1987

Notes

INST 375

INST 375

3480 Installation Instructions

Installation Instructions

This page is for control units without 8M 6460460
(See CARR-CU 9) and tape units without 8M
6460006 (See CARR-DR 9)
Running Offline Checkout for a Dual Control Unit
Subsystem
This procedure is used for offline checkout 01 a dual control unit
subsystem only. Go to INST 370 if you have a single control unit
subsystem.
The offline checkout tests whether both control units can
communicate with all the drives in the subsystem. Therefore,
some steps in the following procedure appear to be repeated.
As you progress through the tests, you are asked to note the
addresses of any drives that do not show the display response
expected. Also, you should note whether the drive failed during
checkout from CUO or CU1. A:ter the offline checkout is
complete, you will be sent to INST 390 to analyze any drives that
failed during the checkout.

m

Are all the switches set c:Jrrect1y?

I

I
'I

m and remove the head protector.

b. Insert the IML diskette (label up and toward you)
and push until the drive closes,
c. Set the Power On/Off switch
to On.

m

5.25 Inch IML Disk Drive

m

a. Open the latch on the IML disk drive
and
remove the head protector.
b, Insert the IML diskette (label up and toward you)
and close the drive latch.
to On.
c. Set the Power On/Off switch

m

Do special box-shaped symbols show in the first and last
positions of the message display?

YES NO

3.5 Inch IML Disk Drive
a. Push the release button on the IML disk driv'e

IIlJ

I ,
I

5. On both control units:

12. On each drive switch panel, set the Online/Offline switch
to Offline.

YES NO

I, I,
!

I
I
I I
I
I

I
I
t

,

Switch off the mainline circuit
breaker (eBl on the ac power
suPOly) and set the sw; tches as
specified in steps 1. 2, and 3;
then perform steps 5 througn 7.

D

!

~ote

the drive addresses of
the dri ves that do not show a
single aSteriSk, and which eu
those drives are a~tached to,

anc continue to the

~ext

step.

Do the special box-shaped symbols go away?

Note the drive addresses of the
asterisl(. and which CU those drives
are a:tached to, a!1d con:ir.ue to

Switching on the Power
6. Ensure that the main circuit breaker on the CU (CB1 on
the ac power supply) is off; then switch it On.
7. On both control units, set the Unit Emergency Power

mto Power Enable,

Note: The offline checkout should be performed by only one
service representative.

9. Does a single asterisk (.) show for ten seconds or longer
on each drive display?

1. On both control unit operator setup panels:

m

YES

where the special box-shaped symbols
de not go away, and which CU those
drives a"e attached to; t~en continue
to the next step.

Continue with the next step.

to Off; then set it back to On.

Does a single asterisk (.) show for ten seconds or longer
on each drive display?

on both

14. Go to INST 378 to continue the offline checkout.

NO

I
,I Note

I
I

is set to

the jrive addresses of the
drives t~at de net shew a single
asterisk, and which CU those drives

are a::ac!1ed to. and

:o~tinue

to :he

next step.

Continue to tne next step.

b. Set the Normal/Test switch
to Test.
is set to CUO
c. Verify that the CUO/CU1 switch
on control unit 0 and is set to CU1 on control
unit 1.

EI

d. Verify that the CU Online/CU Offline switch
is set to CU Offline.

11. On each drive switch panel, press, then release the
drive Reset switch

iii,

D

Does a single asterisk (') show for ten seconds or longer
on each drive display?

2. On all drive operator panels:
a. Set the Ready/Not Ready switches
Ready.

II

10. On each drive switch panel, set the Drive Power switch

fJ

YIES r:te the drive addresses of the drives

I

Cont i roue to the next s teo.

m

Setting Up (or the Checkout

0

1m

drives that do not show a single

8. Press the Local Power Enable pushbutton
control units.

a. Verify that the Power On/Off switch
Off.

13. On each drive switch panel, set the Online/Offline switch
to Online and verify that the special box-shaped
symbols go away. '

Continue to the next step.

III

switch

See INST 377 lor the following locations.

I

Note the drive addresses of the drives
that do not show the special box-shaped
symbols and which CU those drives are
attached to, and continue to the next
step.
Continue to the next step.

YES NO

I

,
I

YES NO

Does a single asterisk show for
ten seconds 0" 1cnger on each
orive display?

the next s :ep.

The error light
will light when certain portions of the offline
tests are run. This condition ;s normal and does not indicate a
failure in the control unit unless you are asked to note the status
of the error light.

Note:

4. On each drive with the Automatic Cartridge Loader
feature, set the Loader switch
to Auto.

INST 376

YES NO

I

m to

I

3. On all drive switch panels:

~ote

the drive adcresses of the
drlves that do not show a single
asterisk, and which CU those drives
are attached to, and continue to the
next stec.

I

a. Verify that the Drive Power switches
to On.

fJ

b. Verif.y that the Online/Offline switches
set to Online.

Continue to the next step.

are set

1m are

3480 MI EC A57721
-t" COPYright IBM Corp.

Installation Instructions

~982. '988

# ).

t

INST 376

o

o

o

o

o

c

o

o

o

o

3480 Installation Instructions

Installation Instructions

INST 377

This page is for control units without BM 6460460
(See CARR-CU 9) and tape units without BM
6460006 (See CARR-DR 9)

D

~-

~

o

EJ

EJ

§

=

I

DC Power

A §En.ble

B§

D,sable
=:I
Channel Add, ...

A

CUI
'"'

=:I

Error

Wait

I

En.ble

§En.ble

D § En.ble

Disable
=:I

Oi.able
=:I

OOlable
=:I

om

'[I
.

I!

•

:

On

§

Off

/

~

•

D

Add.

@J0

[!]@]

Type

Add.

Add.

Type
If lddrsss is 2, 4, 7

o

,:1, D. :: then

CU Address Instructions

os~ ;~::~J~~~I.I~S/·"':~a·~.

Se~ Channel Address first. Set Type

3.0 Me Stra' ~ng
4.5 '\liS Str "'."9

2.0 '\AS Strear: ng

.

.

f A-d

2
A
C
E

Add.

2.0 MS Streaming

3.0 MS Streaming
.3 MS Streaming

0

Power Enable

\

Power Off

Drive Switch Panel

@

l)

i

Type

i

»V

l,.; 5.25 Inch Drive
Online

R...t

B B'

0

3
9
0
F

~

~

'6l

If address is 0,3.5,6,9, A. C, F than

Os~ ~~::~t~~~U~~;~:~a·~.

~

Pow"

Orivi Power

DO

. Type

Unit
Emergency

~

~(

F-

!~

j

Locol Power
En.ble

4.5 MB Ready

00

\

When In local

=:I

I

- /'

tr

IML

CU Olflone
=:I

/

'[I

[I

D

Ef"''"'

§No,m'l
hIt

~

/7 /7

Offline

Drive Add,l"

~.t~Md~u"n~ueO "~~ rnO~~~W~h.~n~~S~M~a~F'~M~ur~.~~I~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~

Optional Feature on 3480 A22
Automatic Cartridge
Control Units Prior to EC A58284
Loader Operator Panel

Local
C
I
Remote

\

OR

qD
>

Auto

Drive Operator Panel

System

m

Manual

D

R_IInd

1111111111111111111111111111

o
3480 MI EC A57721
~.

Copyr,ght IBM Corp. 1982. 1988

o

Start

D

Unl~

[E!j]B

Not Readv

3.5 Inch Drive

Power

Installation Instructions

INST 377

3480 Installation Instructions

Installation Instuctions

This page is for control units without 8M 6460460
(See CARR-CU 9) and tape units without 8M
6460006 (See CARR-DR 9).
Running Offline Checkout for a Dual Control Unit
Subsystem (Continued)
Note: See INST 319 for the following locations.

Checking Read/Write, Control Unit 0
~c:! ~"e a~C~eii~S Of any d~ives that
de no~ S~OW t~e corr!~t d~iol~y. then
c:r:iru! ~i~M t~e n!xt st!o.

No e t~!
no S~Cw
~i

t~!

h

D

After a delay of 1 1/2 minutes or less, does TEST show
with the indicator bars
flashing on the message
display of any drive?

of any drives tnat do
:~e Clrrect d i sc1ly, ~,en continue
~ex~ step.
add~esses

II

Note: If an Action message appears on any display. go
to INST 305 and perform the action described.
Return here. set the Power On/Off switch
to
Oif. then On and go to step 15 on this page.

16. Compare the "L = x" (logical address) portion of each

drive display to the address label

Checking the Addresses, Control Unit 0

[J

E1

on each display

Does each drive display match the label?

15. On the CUO operator setup panel, set the CU OnlinefCU

D to CU Online.

Offline switch

On the control unit (CUO) operator setup panel, set the
CU Oniine!CU Offline switch
to CU Offline.

17

NO

I::S

~IC

I

i

The CU H~11 no~ load the ~icr~pr=gram
and ~U5~ ~e fixed to CJntinue. Set the

i

!; I t,.,~ d:",~'/e log~c3.;
adj~es5es ~re set cor~2::1y.
5e~
I'Se~:ir:g the Drive L~gici1 ar.j
E~s:..;re

After a short delay (2 1/2 seconds or less) does" L = x
P x" (x being any number between 0 and F) appear on
any drive display?

=

:~a:

Addresses'!

Pr:j5;:l:

01"1

I

ato

,~orl1a: i~~5t s'''; ~~h
Norl1al and
p~~S5 t~e [~L swi:=~. Inse~t the

INS; 3jO.

orod~c: Tia;r.t~nance

and cc !n

uni~ on1ine. power
on aga;n. No:~ the
jF any drives ~~o5a display

Le!v~~; ~~e c~ntrol

YES NO

i: 0::

ajd~~s3~S

Power off the c:mtrol un1':. '",i th the P~we'"

13.:)~:3

II

On/OfT SIf; tC."l
4r.Q I/~ri fy t."a~ the
S'I4; :Ches are set correctly on the Cllnti?l
'Jni t a~d taoe uni t pa~el s. Se~ 'SH:;ng Up
for the Checkout" s:eps 1. 2. and 3 on [~S7
375 for the carr!ct s'''-1t:h sl!t~ings. CJrrec~
any swit:h set:ings t:,at ar! '~rong. P~we!'"
up ar.d repeat the actions you performed in
step 14.

t~e~

~J

t~~ ~~x~

t:'SJr'~ :~~:

proo1!~

s:~11 CO no~ :na~:~ t~e IIL=x"

oc~:~:~ of t~e

'=,ie

tI

i

t~e1 :~n:inue

di3Jlaj.
s:ep.

0: !!cn d~sJ~~y does not
~c~:;on of any ot~er drive

~dt:h

'!p:~,1

d~s~lay

Follow tne

$

f: X!:l.

II

t~e

en

i

~ne S~~5J5:~~.

i1

~O.

Se~ :~e ~cr:nal /Tes~ s'~i t:h
to Test
and :~e ~r:7i\e/Off~ine 5'.'4i:c~
to
Q~~ ir,e.
''';d. i tun:; 1 aaoresses appear" en
:1e jr~~e jjscl!ys, t~e~ rece~t step 17

?:;C (~r:ys: Cd.' d.ccres3)

~c~:jo~

on the

package to cor~!c: the
!nj ret~r' here ~hen the problem

~ain:!~l:'C!

~ack

m

[P~

diskette into the MO

t:1i 5

CJnti~ue

::

fJ

:J:3,;e.
:~e

next s:ec.

Does "LlIx P'x" appe3.r on any tape drive
dis~lay~

Does eacr, drive display have a "P = x" number not
shared by any other drive in the subsystem?

VES NO
I
i

Set the Normal/Test swi tch to Test and
check the eu and tape uni t s~i tch
settings again. See "Setting UP for
the Checkout" steps 1. 2. and 3 on
I ~ST 376 for the correc t swi teh
settings. Correct any switCh settings
that are wrong. Power up and repeat
the actions you performed in step 15.
Does 'L'x P'x" appear on any tape
drive display?
:1 ES

:to

:

Call your next level of suooor';.
.~ote ~he

addresses of any ori',es that do
s~o ... C:lrrect disolay. then :ontinue '14ith

:he
A

18. Set a biank cartridge

Il

to not file protect.

•

I
The eu will not load the m~croor'Jgr!m
and must be fixed t:J cjntinue. Se: tne
No,."a i /Test swi t:n ~to Norma I and
press the IML swi t:h-.J. Insert tr'!!
pr,duct maintenance diskette into the ~O
and do an [PL on the ~D. Follow the
ma ;~tenance package to correct the
proble!1l and return here when the oroblem
is fixed.
.

19. Ii the automatic cartridge loader feature is installed, skip

v::s

~w

,I

adcr~53~s

the next s:ep.

I

a'l of t~e dri~e physical
are set c~r:e:~1y. S~Q
t~e Drive Log~cai and
A~dres3~s'! on I~S~ 35C.

25. While the first drive is being tested. set another blank
cartridge f) to not file protect and insert it into the next
drive displaying TEST. The display will show READY U.
When UNLOAD appears on the display of the firstdrive,
the next drive with a tape loaded will begin testing.
Note: This testing procedure can be performed with one
scratch tape. but you must wait for each drive to
unload the tape. This increases the test time to 2
1/2 minutes for each drive.
26. When the first drive unloads, move that tape to the next
drive showing TEST. If the cartridge does not unload. go
to "Cartridge Removal by Hand" on CART 10.
27. Repeat this procedure for a!1 drives in the subsystem
showing TEST.
29. If failures occur on multiple drives in a string, there may
be a cable or terminator connection problem. Check the
seating of the device data and read bus cables, and the
dual control unit communication cables (for dual control
unit subsystems). See LOC 1 for the control unit and
tape unit cable Iccations.
When you have finished checking the cables, insert a
cartridge into those drives that were failing and the tests
will be rerun.
29. If any drives will not run the tests to completion, note the
failing drive addresses and that CUO was running the
test. ThiS will be used later on INST 390 when the
product package is run.

30. Go to the next step on INST 381.

Eis~r! :~at
USe::~,"g
P~ys~:~~

Leaving tne control

un~t

it oFf tnen on again.

online, power

Note any drive

physi:!~

addresses that are still
incJr~ect and continue to the next step.

Continue

~ith

the next steo.

20. Insert the cartridge into the drive that is nearest the
control unit and displaying TEST. Close the cartridge
latch and Skip the next two steps.
21. Put a cartridge in the top pOSitions of the loader on the
drive nearest the control unit and is displaying TEST.
22. Ensure the loader mode switch
and press the Start switch

m·

m

is set to Auto mode

23. If the display shows Action Message 1, 2.3, or 5 after
you load the tape cartridge. go to "Action Messages" on
INST 305 and perform the procedure as directed. Return
here when you have completed the required procedure.
2.:1

The diagnostic will show various messages on the drive
display as it executes. indicating the action the drive is
performing.

"'lex': s~eo.

8

3480 MI EC AS7721

Each drive will require about 1 3/4 minutes to execute
the test. and when complete, will show a single asterisk
on the display.

Installation Instuctions

C CopY"Q"t ISM Corp. 1982. 1988

I .. ) '
\,

INST 378

t)

INST 378

o

o

o

c

o

o

o

o

3480 Installation Instructions

o

o

Installation Instructions

INST 379

This page is for control units without 8M
6460460 (See CARR-CU 9) and tape units
without 8M 6460006 (See CARR-DR 9)

II

B

D

Operator Setup Panel

\

\

\

Power

t:::l CUI

CU Offline
CI
CI
Error

DC 'ower

Off
When In loc.1

§Enlbl.

O R En.ble

Olyble

t::l CI
OISlble

CI

o

Add.

CU Address Instrucl,"ns
Set Channel Address first. Stt Type
nellt depending upon \/alue of Address

Power

Off

Add.

If Address.s 1.2.4,7 B.B.D,E, then
use these values fOf Type

Type

Add.

5.6 9.A.C.F.
use Ihese values tor Tvpe

It Address.s 0.3

DC Inte,lock I 5 M8 mille. 2
2 MB Streaming
A

2 M8 Slreamlllg

B

3 MB Srreamlng

3 M8 Streaming

0

C

System

lDCIIIPOWlI
En.ble

Manual
Start

WI
DO

DO

Type

D

D~

..

Type

/

En.bl.

Auto

'[I
Add.

§l ::::
~

0

Wilt

t:::l CI
DIMble
Ch,nn.1 Add'''1

~;';.gen'y

CI

AREn.ble

00

On

IMl

§ c u Onl,n.

RCUO

c::a

Automatic Cartridge
Loader Operator Panel

Typ.

th~n

o

DC Interlock 1 5 M8 mall 3

~

::.

1111111111111111111111111111

Cl

Power

O,;ve ope",to~______________________........

[
File Protect
Position

3480 MI

EC336395

II CopyrighllBM Corp. 1984. 1985. 1986

~~

o

Not File Protect
Position

Installation Instructions

INST 379

3480 Installation Instructions
This page is for control units without BM 6460460
(See CARR-CU 9) and tape units without BM
6460006 (See CARR-DR 9)

Installation Instructions

Running Offline Checkout for a Dual Control Unit
Subsystem (Continued)
Nole:

Does each drive display match the label?

Checking the Addresses, Control Unit 1
32. On the CU1 operator setup panel. set the CU Online/CU
Offline switch

EI

I

to CU Online.

After a short delay (2 1/2 minutes or less) does" L = x
p = x" (x being any number between 0 and F) appear on
any drive display?

off the c:mtroi unit and veri·y that
the can':rol unit and tape unit switches (for

Do eight asterisks (........ ) show on all drive displays not
showing TEST?

CUl and the drives physically at:'c:hed to
CUI) are set corr"ect~y. See 1'5et~~ng U~ fJr
the Checkout steps 1, 2. and 3 on INS7 75
for the co!"rect switch sett~ngs. Co!"!'"'ec:
any switch se!.t~ngs troa: are wr:Jng.
Power
up and repeat the actions you P€!!"formec in
step 32.
l

YES NO

I

I s the Ncrma1/;es: switch

I]

set to Norma~?

YES NO
,

Do
10t

e~grt aste~isks

snowing

snow on

a~l

drive

dis;~ays

7~S~?

t:,e nex: s:e::.
:ont~nue

to the

~ext

step.

Note :ne :~~ve ad~~!sses that ~~ ~c: show eig~t
asteriSKS ~r 7~S7 a~c contin~e :: :re next st.!:.

appear on any tape drive

display?

Does eacr!

YES NO
i
The CU wi~l not load the mi~!"oorogram
and must :,e fixed to continue. Set !rle
Normai Test swi':.cn Lto Normal anc
press the r~!.. switcn-----U. Insert t~e
;Jr:duct rna;nter.a~ce :~skette in:o t~e MD
and co an IPL on t~le ~D. F')'~ow !ne
mai"ter.ance package to c:lrrec:t t:1e
proD I em and return here when the p"cb I e!'l

YES NO

!

I

You must now check out CU1 and all the drives again to be sure
that CU1 can communicate with ail the drives.

£nsur~

:r.at ':he np:x" (physi:a~ address)
of eacn disp~ay :::es ret match
:,e II;;:X" pc"':~on cf any o:her ::ive
o~s:J~a.i 11': tr·e subsys':err..
port~o~

:)oes eacl; cr';ve

Set the Normal/Test sw~tch to 7est a~c
cneck the CU and taoe i..in~ t swi tch
setti~g$ again.
See "Se:t~ng Up fc~ the
CheckoJt U steps 1, 2, anc 3 on INST 376
for tt1e correct switcn se:tings. C::,,"'e:<:
any switch sett~n;s :~a~ d!"e fJI"ong. P:Jwe""
up and reoeat the ac:ions you ;::Jerf~!,";ned
in step 32.

Go to the next step to test CU1.

~f

~a'Je

a "P:x ll

by any ::he'" 8:;ve?

data and rear: b",s Cei;) l es,
Qua: con::01 unit COmlur.ice.:~~m
:ab1es. See LOC 1 for tne contra: ~~;t
ana :aDe L.;r,i: caoie locat~:ns.

t"'e

a~d

.Jev~:e

:~e

~c·-:::

sW'~::h

::a: e

Go not char,ge any of t,e

.,..r;':e

se::~flgs

:~e:dng

-~1"1er;

::-,e

connec:~on

f~ n; shed c~ecki ng the
or. the Cu. Af:e r a
delay of 2 1/2 minutes Jr iess,
:: :Jm;::a ~e ~he P:x port; on : f each

SLj~por~,

you "',ave

cab'es.

':IOi've~

II

~r';\'e cisp~ay

~f

:hat do rot

a::

t!"le

any d:-ives that do net
then CGntinue with

show the cor~ect c~sp1ay.
the next step.

out of CUO, note that it also fa;led on
on CUI and go t~ the next step on INST 383
If it did not fail during tne checkout of
cuo, cont~nue with this step.
There is a cable connection problem.
Power off CU 1 and check tne sea t i n9 of
the dev ~ ce data and reac bus cae j es
and t~e dl.la~ contr:i unit communication
cao1 es. See ~OC 1 for the controi un; t
and ta:l€ •.mit cab1e joca:~ons.
Do net cha~ge any of the :U
swi:ch se::~ngs wh~le checKing out
the cab~e c,rnection problem, exce':lt
fo:- the Power On/Off sw~ tch.

NOTE:

"hen you have f;nishec checking
cab 1es. po..ver on :he :U. Af~er
deiay of 2 1/2 m~nt..:tes or less.
the "P=x" portion Of each jrive
to the IIP:X" por:ion cf ai 1 the
drive o~sp1ays.

the
a
c·,moal"'e
diSPlay
o:her

Does ea:h j"'~ve have a IIP:X" r"1umber
not shared by any I)tr,e~ cr~ ve?
YES NO
I

Cail tr,e next ievei of SuPDO:"t,
Go to :he next step on INST 363,
Go to the next step on INST 383.

:0

~he

IIP:X" =,O ... tiC1

o~her dr~\ie c~s~;ays.

nave a "P=x" numbe!"

nc,: sr,ared :ly ar;j

YES

i

If this drive failed cur-~ng the che::k-

II

Does eacr. jrive

the~ c:~:;nl.Je \iI'~t~

NO

_>.I

probiem, except
fer :he Power In./Off sw~t:~.

I

Note the add"'esses

Nole: Do not change the switch settings or power off CUO during
the following checkout of CU1.

s~a:ed

r,c':.

c~

Note t~e addresses of any drhes that
do net show the c~!":'"ec! d i sj;i ay tner:
continue w~,:n the nexO: steo,
c:-~ves

diso~ay

P',e"'e ~s a cable :onnecticr o:oclem.
P:lwe r off :~: and c~eCK :ne seat~r.g

Does "~=x P:x" appeal" en a:1y :ape
dr;'Je cisplay?

Note tre 3·jdresses of ary
show t~e CQr""e:t d';sp~aj.
the next s:ep.

match the label?

i

::;,.:mDe r

Cal1 your next leve1 of

driVe disp~ay

-:a11 the next level of s\.!opcr:,

YSS NO

You have completed the checkout of CUO and the drives attached
to both control units. If the tests worked correctly. you know that
CUO can communicate with all the drives.

Does each drive display have a "P = x" number not
shared by any other drive?

D

is fixed.

Note t~e c~~ve addresses :Mat do not sr~w
eight as:er~sks ~r TEST arj conti~Je to

EnSure that the "P:x" (physical address)
port i on of each d i SP 1ay does not match the
II P:x II port i on Of any other dri ve di sp 1ay
in the subsystem.

When you ~ave finished cnecKing the
cab 1es t ;lower on the :or.t ro 1 ur':i t.
Af~er a ::e'ay of 2 1/2 minutes or less,
compare the IIL:X" portion of each drive
Cispiay to the adcress label
on the
dri ve.

'

Does "L=x P:x"

c to the next step on INST 3e3.

NOTE: Do not change any of the CU
switch settings while che.:king out
the cable conr,ection pr~olem exce:n
for the Power On/Off swi tch,

I

Po~er

0

Go to the next step on INS; 383.

There is a cable connection problem.
Power off CUI and check the seating
of the devi ce data and read bus
cab 1es and the dual control un 1 t
communicat;on cables. See LOC I for
the cont"ol unit and tape unit cabl e
1ocat; ons.

ES NO

31. On the CUO operator setup Danel. set the Normal/Test
switch
to Normal.
.

Call the next 1evel of support.

NO

See INST 382 for Ihe following locations.

Final Checkout of Control Unit 0

INST 381

o:~er

dri'-.'e?

~o

A

33. Compare the "L= x" (logical address) portion of each
drive display to the address label

3480 MI EC AS7721

D on each display.

Installation Instructions

~.')

\.

INST 381

o

o

o

o

o

o

c

o

o

3480 Installation Instructions

o

Installation Instructions

INST 382

Installation Instructions

INST 382

This page is for control units without 8M 6460460
(See CARR-CU 9) and tape units without 8M
6460006 (See CARR-DR 9)

B

I
~cuo

~cuonlin.

CUI

CU Dill,..
CII

7-

Off

I

B~Enlbl'

~Enlbl'

D~Enlbll

DO",bl.
CI

Oi"bll
CI

Oi"bl.
CI

Oi"bl.
CII

'[I]
00
Add.

Typ.

00
Add.

CU Address Instruct,ons
511 Channel Addre .. 111.1. SOl Typ.
nil' depend,ng upon value 01 Addr ....

DB.

11

Typ.

If Add.e .. " 1.2.4.1.B.B.0.E.lhen

use these vllues lor Typ.
DC Interlock 1.5 MB ma •. 2
2 MB S"eam,ng
A
C
3 MB S".. ming

.

DO

DO
Add.

tr
On

When

ARblb'.
Chlnn.1 Addrm

POwel

OIML

CI
Wli'

CI
E"Dr

CI
DC POWlr

o

I

II

L

/

Typ.

Add.

Typ.

D

I~.

In

IDCII

Locil Po... r
Enlbll

,)

:

If Addre.. " D.3,5,6,9,A,t,F, then
use these v.lues lor Type
DC Int .. lock 1.5 MB m... 3
Z MB St... ming
B
3 MB S""ming
D

o

i ,. .
Rlmotl

Drive Operator Panel

o

-yHiil1
~
Not IIotoIy

3480 MI

EC336396

i~. CopyrognllBM Corp 1984 1985. Igob 1981

3480 Installation Instructions
This page is for control units without 8M 6460460
(See CARR-CU 9) and tape units without 8M
6460006 (See CARR-DR 9)

40. If the display shows Action Message 1. 2. 3. or 5 after
you load the tape cartridge. go to .. Action Messages" on
INST 305 and perform the procedure as directed. Return
here when you have completed the required procedure.

Running Offline Checkout f·or a Dual Control Unit
Subsystem (Continued)

41. The diagnostic will show various messages on the drive
display as it executes. indicating the action the drive is
performing.
Each drive will require about 1 3/4 minutes to execute
the test. and when complete. will show a single asterisk
on the display.

Nole: See INST 384 for the following locations.

Checking Read/Write, Control Unit 1
34. On the control unit (CU1) operator setup panel. set the
CU Online/CU Offline switch
to CU Offline.

II

Does TEST show with the indicator bars
the message display of any drive?
Note:

mflashing on

42. While the first drive is being tested. set another blank
cartridge
to not file protect and insert it into the next
drive displaying TEST. The display will show READY U.

B

If an Action message appears on any display. go
to INST 305 and perform the action described.
Return here and set the Power On/Off switch
to off then On; then go to INST 381. step 27. and
continue.

YES NO

0

Do eight asterisks (........ ) show on all drive displays
not showing TEST?

50. Ensure that the IML diskettes in CUO and CU1 are at the
same microcode level; if not. you will get an error light
when you attempt an IML.
Note:

44. Repeat this procedure for all drives in the subsystem
showing TEST.
45. If failures occur on multiple drives in a string. there may
be a cable connection problem. Check the seating of the
device data and read bus cables. and the dual control
unit communication cabies (for dual control unit
subsystems). See LOC 1 for the control unit and tape
unit cable locations.

Set the Normal/Test switch
to Test
and the Onl i ne/Offl i ne swi tch
to
Online. Wait until addresses appear on
the drive displays. then repeat step 29
on this page.

II

See the labels on the IML diskettes.

On both CUO and CU 1. set the Power On/Off switch
off. then On.

YES NO

I

Is the Nonnal/Test switch
set to Normal?

mto

EI

0

After approximately 60 seconds the Wait light
on the
control unit operator setup panel should be on solidly.
and the Error light
should be off.

D

YES NO

Are all the lights correct?

I

Repeat step 39.

YES NO

00 eight asterisks show on all

Note: This testing procedure can be performed with one
scratch tape. but you must wait for each drive to
unload the tape. This increases the test time to 2
1/2 minutes for each drive.

i

The CU will not load the microprogram
and must be fixed to continue. Set
the Norma liTes t switch L t o Normal
and press the IML switch~. Insert
the product maintenance diskette into
the MD and do an IPL on the MD.
Follow the maintena~ce package to
correct the problem and return here
when the problem is fixed.

I

The control unit will not load the microprogram and must be fixed to continue.
Ens ure the Norma 1 Tes t switch
is set
to Normal and the Online/Offline switch
is Offl i ne. Press the IML switch
Insert the Product Maintenance diskette
into the MO and do an IPL on the MD.
Follow the maintenance package to correct
the problem, and return to this page and
repeat step 40 when the problem is fixed.

0

YES NO

I
I

i

I

~ote the drive addresses

m.

II

that do not show eight
asterisks or TEST and
continue to the next step.

Continue to the next step.

Note the drive addresses that.do
not show eight asterisks or TEST
and continue to the next step.

Go to INST 390; the Offline checkout is
complete.

Continue to the next step.

When you have finished checking the cables. insert a
cartridge into those drives that were failing and the tests
will be rerun.
46. If any drives will not run the tests to completion. note the
failing drive addresses and that CU1 was running the
test. This will be used later on INST 390 when the
product package is run.

Continue to the next step.

35. Set a blank cartridge

Checking the Initial Microprogram Load (IML)

49. Set the Normal/Test switch
to Normal on the CU1
control unit operator setup panel.

When UNLOAD appears on the display of the first drive,
the next drive with a tape loaded will begin testing.

43. When the first drive unloads. move that tape to the next
drive showing TEST. If the cartridge does not unload, go
to "Cartridge Removal by Hand" on CART 10.

0

Final Checkout of Control Unit 1

drive displays not showing TEST?

m

II

INST 383

Installation Instructions

B to not file protect.

36. If the automatic cartridge loader feature is installed. skip
the next step.

47. Go to the next step and continue.

37. Insert the cartridge into the drive that is nearest the
control unit and displaying TEST. Close the cartridge
latch and skip the next two steps.
38. Put a cartridge in the top pOSitions of the loader on the
drive nearest the control unit and is displaying TEST.
39. Ensure the loader mode switch
and press the Start switch

1m.

m

is set to Auto mode

3480 MI EC A57721
c, Copyrognt IBM Corp 1982 -9sa

~)

~c

Installation Instructions

tJ

~)

\.

:)

~)

~)

,

~)

~)

~)

INST 383

~)

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

Installation Instructions

3480 Installation Instructions

o
INST 384

This page Is for control units without BM 6460460
(See CARR-CU 9) and tape units without BM
6460006 (See CARR-DR 9)
Automatic Cartridge
Loader Operator Panel

~

I

0

B

II

Operator Setup Panel

EI

~''''""'

§cuo

~No'mll
THI

I

l~MI

1-

DIMl

CU Offhnl

CUI

I

II

c::::I

~
c::::I

DC POWI.

E,r.r

CI

I

CI
Wlil

A§Enlbll

B§Enlbll

§Enlbll

D§Enlbll

D,,,bll

Di"bll

Oi"bll

Oi"bll

CI

CI

8m]. .

00

00

Add,

TYPI

CU

0

Add,

Add.ess Insuutllons

S., Chlnnel Address I"" S., Type
nul dependong upon value 01 Add,ess.

om I~j
DD

'91

..

DD
Add,

TYPI

"Address" 1,2,4,l,B,B,O,E,Ihen
use Ihese v.lues 10' T yp.
DC Inle,lock 1,& MB mu. 2
2 MB Slreamlng
A
3 MB S"eamong
C

I--

On

-

Whln in lotll

I--

D

'0

Emlrgency
Pow..

m

POWl' Enlbl.

Off
/

'OWl' Off

m~

lOClI POWl'
Enlbll

E3
D

Auto
System
Manual
Start

CI

CI

I~. .:
A~
= -

Chlnnll Add,,,,

~'."
~ j
\

Typo

Add,

Typo

1111111111111111 1111 1111" II
@

)

I I

~

If Add, ... "D,3,&,6,9,A,C,F, Ihon
use they values lor Type

I

D

Power

0

DC Inlerlock 1.5 MB max 3
2 MB S"eamlng
B
3 MB Slre.mlng
0

LOCiI

i
Drive Operator Panel

~~/

/'

/
0

e
A..."nd

D
3480 MI

EC336396

'i' Copyroghl IBM Curp. 1984, 1985. 1~86 1987

Remote

.\~.

: ..

,

Un'' '

R_.

[f:] ~
1"!t'I'

_A-,

Blank
Cartridge

Installation Instructions

INST 384

3480 Installation Instructions
This page is for control units without BM 6460460
(See CARR-CU 9) and tape units without BM
6460006 (See CARR-DR 9)

5.

Insert the product maintenance diskette Into the MD. and
do an IPL on the MD.

6.

Select Option 1 for each drive whose address was noted
during the offline checkout of CUD (If any) and Is
physically attached to CU~. If no drive addresses were
noted during the offline checkout of CUD, select Option 3
and run the last drive attached to CUD.

7.

If you are installing a dual control unit subsystem.
connect the MD to CU1 and repeat steps 2-6 for CU1
where CUD was called out. Use the other support and
product diskettes which come with CU1 so they are
configured and verified.

8.

After all the problems have been fixed (If any). Insert the
support diskette and go to INST 400 to run the channel
wrap test on each channel in the subsystem.

Configuring the Maintenance Device Support
Diskette and Analyzing Drives with the MD
1.

Connect the maintenance device (MD) to

CU~.

See MD

40.
2.

Insert the support diskette into the MD, and do an IPL on
the MD.

3.

Enter the serial number requested by the MD. When
configured. the main menu will be displayed.
Note: If the support diskette has already been
configured. the main menu will display Immediately. If
the serial number of the control unit is wrong. the
support diskette can be reconfigured using the following
procedure:

4.

a.

Select option 3 (SUPPORT UTILITIES) and press
enter.

b.

Select option 4 (RE-CONFIGURE DSKT) and
press enter.

c.

Perform step 3 above.

Installation Instructions

INST 390

Installation Instructions

INST 390

Check the CU serial number on the machine frame
against the serial number set on the drive adapter card
by performing the following steps:
a.

Select Option 2 (SUBSYS DSPL YI AL TER) of the
main menu.

b.

Select Option 1 (SUBS CONFIG DSPl V). then
compare the CU serial number on the MD
display to the serial number on the CU machine
frame.

Does the serial number on the MD display match
the serial number on the machine frame?
YES NO

I

Go to CARR-CU 1189. "Drive Adapter Card
Switch Setting." Return here and repeat
step 4 when you have correctly set the
switches on the adapter card.
Continue with the next step.

3480 MI

EC336396

C> CopyrlghllBM Corp.

1984. 1985. 1986. 1987

t)

~)

:1

,,-----------------,-----------------

o o o 0 o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o
3480 Installation Instructions

Installation Instructions

This page is for control units without 8M 6460460
(see CARR-CU 9) and tape units without BM
6460006 (see CARR-DR 9)
Channel Wrap Test, Diagnostic Routine EE62

Setup Procedure for the Channel Wrap Test

5.

For dual control unit subsystems, if two MDs are available, two
service representatives (one on each control unit) should
perform the wrap test on the control units at the same time to
reduce the install time.
1.

Install the wrap terminator (part 6315622)
in the
bus-out cable connector position of the 110 connector
. assembly. This part is included in the ship group.

•

From the channel adapter to the bus and tag shoe card
drivers

2.

•

Through the wrap blocks to the bus and tag shoe card
receivers

Install the bus wrap block (part 4299876)
in the
bus-in cable connector position of the 110 connector
assembly. This part is included in the ship group and is
labeled 3880.

•

Back to the channel adapter.

The pattern received at the end of the wrap is compared with an
expected pattern. A non-compare produces an error and a
maintenance device error display that provides data to define the
error.

4.

Warning: Make sure the wrap blocks are installed
correctly. The 1/0 connector assembly will not close if
the blocks are installed wrong. Do not force the handle
when closing the 110 connector assembly.

See DIAG 1, "Channel Interface Wrap Test - Routine
EE62'· for the error displays and failure IDs that may
occur during the test.

8.

Repeat the channel wrap test for each channel installed
on the CUs. The wrap tools must be moved to each 1/0
connector assembly before running the test for each
channel. Restart the diagnostic for each channel as
follows:
a.

After the diagnostic is complete and the status
is displayed, press enter until the option menu
comes up on the MD.

b.

Enter option 2, TEST OPTN.

c.

Enter YES when asked to ALTER PARMS.

d.

Enter channel B, C, or D depending on which
channel you are testing.

e.

Follow prompts and enter option 7 to run.

B

Install the common 370 channel tag terminator (part
2282676)
in the tag-out cable connector position of
the 110 connector assembly.

II

Close the 110 connector assembly.

II

Install the tag wrap block (part 4299873)
in the tag-in
cable connector position of the I/O connector assembly.
This part is included in the ship group and is labeled
3880.

Tag Shoe Card

INST 400

7.

0

You use wrap blocks to wrap the channel adapter bus and tag
lines, and the diagnostic program generates bit patterns and
sends them through the wrap path. The wrap path is:

3.

If you have the horizontal or vertical style 1/0 connector.
go to step 6.

o o

6.

Ensure the support diskette is in the MD and IPL the MD.
9.
a.

Select option 1, SUBSYS DIAGNOSTICS, and
press enter.

b.

Select option 1, SELECTED DIAG, and press
enter.

c.

Enter EE62 on the diagnostic selection screen.
and follow the prompts.

d.

Enter channel A for channel selection.

e.

Follow prompts to run the diagnostic.

Ensure that the IML diskettes in CUO and CU1 are at the
same microcode level; if not, you will get an error light
when you attempt an IML.
When all channels on the control unit have been tested
(all channels on both control units in a dual control unit
subsystem). and any detected errors have been
corrected, re-IML both control units. Use the backup IML
diskette{s) when you re-IML so both copies of the
functional microcode get tested.
Go to INST 410.

Tag Shoe Card
Tag Wrap Block

Tag Shoe Card

Tag Terminator
Bus Wrap Block
Wrap Terminator

Bus Shoe Card

Bus Wrap Block

Bus Shoe Card

Wrap Terminator

I/O Connector (Movable Rail Style)
Tag Wrap Block

3480 MI

EC A47957

t· Copyroght IBM Corp.

Wrap Terminator

I/O Connector (Vertical Style)

Installation Instructions

1984 1985 1986. 1987

I/O Connector (Horizontal Style)

INST 400

3480 Installation Instructions

Installation Instructions

D

firmly against the ESD pad
electrostatic discharge.

Note: If the 3480 subsystem is the last control unit on
this channel, you will have two cables and two
terminators.

Checking the Priority Plug

to remove any

3. The following steps are different for movable rail style
and horizontal or vertical style 110 connectors.

b. Bus cable from the channel

Go to step 4 if you have a movable rail style 110
connector.

d. Tag cable from the channel.

9. Close the I/O connector assembly by pulling the handle
back and down as far as it will go. The connectors
should seat firmly in the sockets.

B

Movable Rail Style 110 Connector

iii

card
or
is correct If the word high is facing out,
the channel has high priority. If the word low is facing
out, the channel has low priority.

4. Open the 110 connector assembly for channel A by lifting
the handle and pushing it toward the front of the machine
as far as it will go.
5. The cable plugs should be connected to the opposite
colored sockets in the I/O connector assembly. For
example, a dark gray cable plug mates with a light gray
socket

For all other channel tag shoe cards, check to see that the high
or low priority plug on the tag shoe card
is correct If the
word high is facing out, the channel has high priority. If the word
low is facing out, the channel has low priority.

II, II

16. If there are more 110 cables to attach, repeat the
preceding steps for each channel.

17. Connect the I/O cables to the host system(s).

11. Connect the 110 cables to the host system(s).

Horizontal, Fixed or Vertical Style 110 Connectors
12. The cable plugs should be connected to the opposite
colored sockets in the 110 connector assembly. For
example, a dark gray cable plug mates with a light gray
socket

6. Warning: The tailgate connectors are attached to logic
cards which are sensitive to electrostatic discharge
(ESD). See "Instructions for ESD-Sensitive Parts" in the
CARR section of Volume A02.

Installing the 110 Cable

m

10. If there are more 110 cables to attach, repeat the
preceding steps for each channel.

o

3. When you have checked for the correct priority, install
the four connectors into the mounting bracket and
reinstall the top hold down bracket and screw.

14. Before installing the interface cables, press the the
cable contacts firmly against the ESD pad
to remove
any electrostatic discharge.
15. Connect the four channel interface bus and tag cables,
or the two channel interface cables and two terminators
in the 110 connectors. Use the diagrams below as a
guide.

c. Tag cable to the next control unit or Tag
Terminator

Go to step 12 if you have a horizontal or vertical style 110
connector.

1. Remove the screw and hold down bracket that goes
across the top of the connectors and lift the four
connectors from the mounting assembly.

13. Warning: The tailgate connectors are attached to logic
cards which are sensitive to electrostatic discharge
(ESD). See "Instructions for ESC-Sensitive Parts" in the
CARR section of Volume A02.
Check all tailgate connectors and cable connectors for
bent pins.

order (bottom to top): Use the diagrams below as a
guide.
a. Bus cable to next control unit or Bus Terminator

For the 4.5 Mb/s channel tag shoe cards perform the following
steps:

2. Check that the high or low priority plug on the tag shoe

m

8. Slide the cables into the 110 connector in the following

If the 3480 subsystem is not the last control unit
on this channel, you will have four cables.

The tag shoe cards are plugged for high priority from the factory.
If the priority must be checked or changed on the 4.5 Mb/s
channel 110 connectors, they must be removed from the mounting
assembly.

II

7. Before installing the interface cables, press the contacts

2. Pass the cables
for channel A up through the
opening in the bottom of the control unit.

This page Is for control units without 8M 6460460
(See CARR-CU 9)

INST 410

Check all tailgate connectors and cable connectors for
bent pins.

Perform the following steps to install the subsystem 110 cables:

Note: 3480 Model A22 Control Units with the 4.5 mega~yte
channel feature (FC 3355) must be cabled ahead of slower
devices on the channel.
1. Find the 110 connectors
unit

0

a. Bus-Out

at

,)

.f
;,

~

;

~)

1

I/O Connector (Horizontal Style'
or 1/0 Connector (Fixed Style)

"12. lHO

"COp),,"ithlIBM Co.p.

)

.. I

:}

()

~)

,-)

J

~)

~}

t}

\#)
..

,J !J

I/O Connector (4.5 MBtS Channen

1/0 Connector (V.rtical Style)

I/O Connector (Moyable Rail Styl.,

Installation Instructions

.~)

;)

(J

(

"

,,

"\

\.c,l

~J

:1 J

•

)

:) !J :)

~)

!}

~

)

'-.

INST 410

!J ,)

"'

"J

\
ct.}

"

o

c

o

c

o

c

c

3480 Installation Instructions
This page is for control units without BM 6460460
(See CARR-CU 9) and tape units without BM
6460006 (See CARR-DR 9)

2.

Pass the UEPO cables to be installed up through the
opening in the bottom 01 the control unit.

3.

Find the lour UEPO cable sockets located at the rear of
ihe control unit ac power supply.

Installing the Unit Emergency Power Off (UEPO)
Cable

4.

c

o

o

Installation Instructions

INST 420

Installation Instructions

INST 420

Complete the cable installation:
a.

Connect the UEPO cables to the host system.

b.

Continue the Installation on INST 430.
"Installation Checks."

Insert the UEPO cable connectors into any UEPO socket
(J5 through JBI

D.

Perlorm the lollowing steps to install the Unit Emergency Power
Oil (UEPOI cable:
1.

Determine il UEPO cables are to be Installed.
If no UEPO cables are to be Installed, go to INST 430,
"Installation Checks."
Nole: The 3480 subsystem does not require
UEPO jumpers if the Local/Remote switch is set
to the Local mode.

Power Supply CU·PS01 60 Hz

.
JZ

~
Jl

M

II
..

]

JI

~

V~

,

J41

r

00000
(00000)
00000
.~

I

Rear- View

Power Supply CU·PS01 50 Hz

'"
JI

m
I

iii?

JI

JIO

II
II
mM
mM

I

II
..
Jl

JI

@g~ ~g~
lilt
lilt

Rear View

3480 MI

EC336396

f~ Copy"gn. 'BIA Corp '984 1985 1906 l!i117

Installation Instructions

3480 Installation Instructions
This page Is for control units without 8M 6460460
(See CARR-CU 9) and tape units without 8M
6460006 (See CARR-DR 9)

1.

Wrap one end of the shield one time to enclose the
magnet. The metal side should be on the outside.

4.

Wrap the other end of the shield one time to enclose the
magnet.

2.

Attach the shield, foam-side up, under the bottom front of.
each unit between the unit and the floor.

5.

Attach the shield, foam-side up, under the bottom rear of
the machine, Inside the frame.

Installation Checks

•

These procedures complete the checkout of the installation:

1.

Installing the radio frequency interference (RFI) shields.

2.

Replacing all the subcovers and covers.

II.

•

3.

Running the Online Tests (OlTs) to verify correct subsystem
operation.

Installing the Radio Frequency Interference (RFI)
Shields

Position the shield on the control unit to permit the
installation of two shields, side by side. The shield
should go from the front of the CU to the frame
opening for the channel and power cables
This
leaves room for the cables to enter the CU.

3.

The shield on the tape unit should be positioned In
the center. Be sure the shield Is positioned Inside
the machine frame so it doesn't interfere with the
covers.

Reinstalling Subcovers and Covers
All the subcovers and covers that were removed must be
reinstalled.

1.

Take the cover that was on the right side of the control
unit, and install it on the right side 01 the last tape unit
attached to that control unit.

2.

Go to CARR-CU 2-4, and CARR-DR 2-4 lor procedures to
adjust (if necessary) and reinstall the covers and
subcovers on the control unit(s) and tape units.

3.

Go to INST 431 to continue the installation checks.

Make sure the shield does not become twisted under the
machine. The shield must sag, and touch the floor.
6.

Repeat steps 1 through 5 for each control unit and tape
unit In the subsystem.

Warning: The RFI shields must be installed so they sag and
touch the floor, for correct shielding to occur.

INST 430

Push the shield under the unit toward the rear of the
machine.

The radio frequency interference shields are provided in two
lengths. Two of the shorter lengths are to be Installed on the
control unit, and one of the longer lengths is to be instlilled on
each tape unit.
Warning: Do not put the RFI shields near the IMl diskette or MD
diskettes ,because the magnets at the ends of the shields can
destroy the recorded data.

Radio Frequency
Interference Shield

Radio Frequency
Interference Shield

Installation ,Instructions

3480 MI
EC336396
 CopyrignllBM Corp. 1984. 1985. 1986.

o

---------------

INSP 1

Notes

Notes

3480 MI

Notes

EC336395

" Copvl'IghllBM Corp. 1984. 19B5

f)

1')
\.

INSP 2

INSP 2

o

o

o

o

o

General Instructions
This page is for control units with 8M
6460460 and tape units with 8M 6460006
(See CARR-DR 9)
This safety checklist is to ensure that a machine that has not
been under an IBM Maintenance Agreement has the necessary
safety items installed and that no other changes were made that
would make it unsafe. Each machine, as it was designed and
assembled, had needed safety items installed to protect the
owners, operators, and service personnel from injury. This
checklist verifies only those items.
This checklist should be performed before the normal inspection
for maintenance agreement. The machine should be
suspected to be unsafe and you should think it unsafe until
you verify that it is safe. If any unsafe conditions are present,
you must decide how serious the hazard could be and whether
you can continue without first correcting the problem.
Think about these conditions and the safety hazards they
present:
•

Electrical, especially primary power, for example: an
electrically charged frame can cause serious or lethal
electrical shock.

•

Explosive, for example: damaged or expanding capacitors
can cause serious injury.

•

Mechanical hazaroo, such as a cartridge latch assembly
cover missing, can cause injury to the body.

o

o

o

o

Procedure EC Sensitive (See CARR-DR 9)

o
INSP 10

Needed Materials
The following items are needed or will be useful during the
inspection.
•

Logic/wiring diagrams

•

Copies of safety SMs (service memorandums) and ECAs for
this machine type

•

Parts catalog

•

Machine history

•

FE Safety Handbook, 5229-8124.

•

Power and Electrical Safety, ZZ2S-720S

Education
Service personnel must be trained on the new general
maintenance agreement qualification (MAQ), tailored
maintenance agreement qualification, and changed machine
safety inspection procedures as part of the electrical safety
course.

Some of the pages are for features and need not be checked if
the features are not installed on the machine.

3480 MI

EC336395

.1: Copyright IBM Corp. 1984. 1985

Procedure EC Sensitive (See CARR-DR 9)

INSP 10

Inspection Procedures

Procedure EC Sensitive (See CARR-DR 9)

This page is. for control units with 8M
6460460 and tape units with 8M 6460006
(See CARR-DR 9)
Note: See INSP 15 and INSP 16 for the following
locations.

Tape Unit and· Control Unit Outside

•

Powered off with power cable and system attach cables
disconnected
6.

On the Tape Unit:

INSP 15

If the power cable is not marked. measure the diameter
of a wire in the cord with the insulation removed. The
diameter of a 10-gauge wire is 2.S88 millimeters
(0.102 inches).

That the power plug type is R&S· 3760

II.

• R&S is Trademark of Russell & Stoll
Check and Correct As Needed

Preparation

1.

That the machine is stable. that there are no defective
casters or pedestals.

2.

That the caster lock thumbscrews are in the two rear
casters.

3.

That all hinges and latches are in acceptable operating
condition. not broken or corroded.

4.

That the tape unit displays rotate without binding and the
mechanical stops are not broken

CAUTION: TILT HAZARD
Do NOT open both drives of a tape unit that is not bolted
on to another tape unit or control unit. With the
automatic cartridge loader feature installed and both drive
drawers fully extended. a tape unit that is not bolted to
another unit will tilt forward with about 20 Ibs. of force
applied to the top of either automatic cartridge loader.
Start the checklist with the machine powered off and with all
electrical power removed from the machine.

II.

Note:

The displays have detented stop positions.

1.

Power off the subsystem.

2.

Have the customer open the CB/CP (circuit breaker/circuit
panel) to the outlet supplying power to the subsystem.

Check and Correct As Needed

Check the customer's plug housing to building ground.

1.

That the machine is stable. that there are no defective
casters or pedestals.

2.

That the caster lock thumbscrews are in the two rear
casters

3.

That all hinges and latches are in acceptable operating
condition. not broken or corroded.

4.

That the ac mainline cord does not have frayed or damaged
wiring at the plug end

S.

That the power cable is 10 gauge. 4 wire for 60 Hz and
SO Hz Japan. or 10 gauge S wire for SO Hz World Trade
machines.

3.

On the control unit:

•

There should be no voltage present.

•

Resistance should be less than O. 1 ohm.

4.

Unplug the power cable.

S.

Unplug the system attach cables (if any) from the control
unit. They are located at the rear of control unit ac power
supply CU-PS-o 1. See LOC 1.

6.

Unplug the channel cables from the control unit. See LOC
1.

7.

Disconnect the read/write bus connectors and the thermal
and the ac power connector
between the
connector
control unit and the first tape unit and between all the tape
units.

II.

Note: The IBM part number for the EMEA SO Hz
power cable is 479893S. The R&S· 3760 plug is for
60 Hz machines only.

fJ.

lEI.

iii.

•

B.

•
8.

Check that there is no equipment plugged into any of the
convenience outlets in the control unit. They are located on
the left front of the ac power supply CU-PS-O 1.

9.

Obtain the items that are needed or will be useful before
starting the inspection.
a.

Copy of the safety SMs/ECAs for this machine type.

b.

Latest machine history if possible.

The IBM part number for the correct power cable is
806997. This part number is stamped into the
insulation of IBM power cables
If the power cable is not stamped with the IBM part
number. see if it is stamped with the wire size and
A power cable with the correct size wire
number
will be stamped 10/4.

B.

•

If a non-IBM power cable is stamped with a vendor
number instead of with the wire size and number. check
the vendor number to ensure that the cord contains
either four or five 10-gauge wires.

II Read/Write Bus Connectors

fJ AC

3480 MI

____~~_ _~

and Thermal Connector

Power Connector

ProcedureEC Sensitive (See CARR-DR 9)

EC336395

• Capyright IBM Carp. 1984. 1985. 1986

t)

~)

~)

!)

INSP15

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

Inspection Procedures (Continued)

o

o

Procedure EC Sensitive (See CARR-DR 9)

o
INSP 16

This page is for control units with 8M
6460460 and tape units with 8M 6460006
(See CARR-DR 9)
Tape Unit
Control Unit

Rear View
Front View

II

o

Front View
Rear View

m·---~{;

3480 MI
I:)

EC336395

Copyri';'t IBM Corp'. 1$84 .. '.985

Procedure EC Sensitive (See CARR-DR 9)

INSP
16
.,

Inspection Procedures CContinued)

Procedure EC Sensitive (See CARR-DR 9)

INSP 20

Procedure EC Sensitive (See CARR-DR 9)

INSP 20

This page is for control units with 8M
6460460 and tape units with 8M 6460006
(See CARR-DR 9)
Note:

SeelNSP 21 for the folowing locations.

Tape Unit Inside
Powered Off with Power Cable and System
Attach Cables Disconnected
Check and Correct As N....ed
1. That all ground jumpers (normally .l!.een/yellow) are tightly
attached by frame ground screws iii.

2. That all grounded metal has good ground continuity (less
than 0.1 ohm) - covers, housings, metal box sides, and so
on.
3.

That all hinges and latches are in acceptable operating
condition - not broken or corroded.

4.

That all normal safety covers (operator and service areas)
are in place including those protecting mechanical devices
and hot surfaces - no sharp corners or edges should be
unprotected.

11.

a.

The ac CB 1 safety cover is correctly in place

b.

The ac power cap is present for each,!!pe unit and
securely attached to the safety cover II.

c.

The logic board 02A-A 1 covers (pin and card side) are
in place

d.

The drive and tape path safety cover is in place

e.

The blower safety cover is in place

f.

The ac terminal block cover is in place

g.

The limited customer access covers are in place 1,1.

II.

3480 MI

II.

a.
fJ.

EC336395

II CopyripIt IBM Corp. 1984. 1985

~)

"

~)

o

o

c

o

o

Inspection Procedures (Continued)

o

o

o

o

Procedure EC Sensitive (See CARR-DR 9)

o
INSP 21

This page is for control units with 8M
6460460 and tape units with 8M 6460006
(See CARR-DR 9)

Tape Unit Front

Tape Unit Front witn Safety Cover
Tape Unit Rear

3480 MI

EC336395

~ Copyright IBM Corp. 1984, 1985

Procedure EC Sensitive (See CARR-DR 9)

INSP 21

Notes

Notes

3480 MI

Notes

EC336395

" CopyrIght IBM Corp. 1984. 19B5

~)

~)

~)

~.)

\.

INSP 24

INSP 24

o

o

o

o

o

o

Inspection Procedures (Continued)

o

o

o

Procedure EC Sensitive (See CARR-DR 9)

o
INSP 25

This page is for control units with 8M
6460460 and tape units with 8M 6460006
(See CARR-DR 9)
Tape Unit Inside (Continued)
Check and Correct As Needed
1.

That all safety labels are located where indicated:
a.

b.

That all labels reading "LINE VOLTAGE PRESENT WITH
POWER OFF" are attached in the following locations:

Tape Unit

D.

•

Terminal strip at lower rear

•

Main tape unit circuit breaker

II.

That a label reading "Unit Weight 101 LB (46 KG)" is
located on the de power supply TU-PS-O 1

fJ.

2.

That the thermal switches are not bypassed. See CARR-DR
1100 and CARR-DR 820 for a procedure to get access to
the thermal switches.

3.

No obvious non-IBM changes.

4.

No metal filings, dirt or contaminants, water or other fluids,
or marks of earlier smoke or burning are present.
If there are any marks of earlier smoke or burning, and so
on, check the Maintenance Agreement Qualification (MAQ)
report for correct procedures for repair action if needed.

Front View

Tape Unit Rear
3480 MI

EC336395

~ Copyright IBM Corp. 1984. 1985

Procedure EC Sensitive (See CARR-DR 9)

INSP 25

Procedure EC Sensitive (See CARR-DR 9)

INSP 32

Inspection Procedures (Continued)
This page Is for control unils with BM 6460460
and tape units with BM 6460006 (See CARR-DR 9)
Tape Unit-DC Power Supplies
Powered Oil with Power Cable and System
Attach. Cables Disconnected
Check and correct As NHdecI
1.

That all power supplies are attached tightly. The dc power
supply TU-P5-01 has two screws • .

2.

That all grounded metal has good ground continuity (less
than 0.1 ohm) - covers, housings, metal box sides, and so on.

3.

The power wiring for frayed or damaged wiring.

4.

That the following aclde CBs and fuses are the correct size:

CBl AC
Fl/Z
F3/4

FS/6
F7I8
F9/1G .
FU/lZ
Fl3/l4
FlS

Drive frame
Drive 8/1
Drive 811
Drive 911
Drive 81l
Drive GIl
Drive 911
Drive 011

19 A
12 A
5A
1A
3A
8A
.75 A
15 A
2A

Medium blow
Long blow
Long blow
Long blow
Medium blow
lnmedlate blow
Medium blow
Long blow

These values can be EC sensitive, so check the fuses and
CBs against the machine logic.

Tape Unit Inside-Miscellaneous
Powered Oft with Power Cable and System
Attach Cables Disconnected
Check and Correct AI Needed
1.

All cables, connections, plugs, and so on for frayed or
damaged wiring.

2.

All connections, plugs and so on for damaged latches andlor
clamps.

Tape Unit Rear

Procedure EC Sensitive (See CARR-DR 9)
3480 MI

EC336396

e CopyrighllBM Corp. 19114. 1985. 1911e. 1987

o

o

()

,#)

[)

INSP 32

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

Inspection Procedures (Continued)

o

o

Procedure EC Sensitive (See CARR-DR 9)

This Page is for Control Units with 8M 6460460
and Tape Units with 8M 6460006 (See CARR-DR
9)

o
INSP 35

11. If there are marks of earlier smoke or burning, and so on.
check the Maintenance Agreement Qualification (MAO)
report for correct procedures for repair action if needed.

Control Unit Inside
Powered Off with Power Cable and System
Attach Cables Disconnected
Check and Correct As Needed
1.

That all ground jumpers (normally green/yellow) are tightly
See INSP 65 for the
attached by frame ground screws
AC grounding diagram.

2.

That all grounded metal has good ground continuity (less
than 0.1 ohm) - covers, housings, metal box sides, and so on.

3.

That all hinges and latches are in acceptable operating
condition - not broken or corroded.

4.

That all normal safety covers (operator and service areas)
are in place inciuding those protecting mechanical devices
and hot surfaces - no sharp corners or edges should be
unprotected.

m.

m.

•
•

The logic gate card covers (A 1, A2) are in place
All three gate DC voltage strip (TB) covers are in place

•
•
•

The AC safety cover is in place
All four limited customer access covers are in place
Machines with vertical style 110 connectors have the
drip-screen guard in place

D.

5.

II.

1m.

That all safety labels are located where indicated.
•

6.

II.

Labe!s reading, "Hazardous Area, etc ... " must be
and
located on the frame members at

II

II.

Mark the customer's circuit breaker/circuit panel (CB/CP)
number for the circuit controlling AC power to subsystem at
CB1 (main line CB)
and on the main line power cable
plug.

fJ

7.

That the thermal switches are not bypassed. These are
located at the top and the bottom of 01-A gate. See
CARR-CU 1430 for a procedure to get access to the thermal
switch.

8.

That no obvious non-IBM changes have been made.

9.

That the fan safety screens on the fans on the bottom of the
A 1 gate are in place

D.

10. That no metal filings, dirt or contaminants, water or other
fluids, or marks of earlier smoke or burning are present.

3480 MI

ECA57693

© Copyright IBM Corp

19M. 1185. 1988. 1987 1988

..... .....

.... .....

..........

..........

' .........
Procedure EC Sensitive (See CARR-DR 9)

INSP 35

Inspection Procedures (Continued)
This page is for control units with 8M
6460460 and tape units with 8M 6460006
(See CARR-DR 9)

7.

The resistance from the frame ground to DC ground at:

•

TB1-S

•

TB1-S

•

TB1-7

•

TB 1-B
TB2-S

Powered Off with Power Cable and System
A ttach Cables Disconnected

•
•

TB2-S

Check and Correct As Needed

•

TB2-7

•

TB2-8

Note: See INSP 40 and INSP 41 for the following
locations.

Control Unit-AC Primary Power

1.

INSP 40

Procedure EC ·Sensitive (See CARR-DR 9)

That the ac power supply is attached in ~Iace tightly. The
power supply has two mounting screws

D.

2. That all ground jumpers (normally i!:.een/yellow) are strongly
attached by frame ground screws 1t,I. The system attach

8.

That all ac/dc CBs and fuses are the correct size:
50 Hz

CBl
CB2
CB3
Fl

AC
AC
AC
DC

Main Line
Conv.
211 V
211 V

25 A
5 A
1 A
5 A Long Blow

60 Hz

CB1
CB2
CB3
F1

AC
AC
AC
DC

Main Line
Conv. /211 V
Cony

25 A
5 A
7 A
5 A Long Blow

211 V

These values can be EC sensitive. so check the fuses and
CBs against the machine logic.

and to the ground pin on:
•

Logic board 01 A-A 1D2D08

•

Logic board 01A-A2D2D08

ground wires are not present if feature is not installed.
To check the shield ground of the..e.0wer cable. you must
remove the left side safety cover U and the ac input filter
cover on the power supply
Leave these covers off. you
will need to return to this area later.

Convenience Outlet

Mainline Breaker

The resistance should not be more than 0.1 ohm.

1:1

tN ..

•

than 0.1 ohm) - covers. housings. metal box sides. and so
on.

4.

S.

r::I

;:r~=- ~~.,.

3. That all grounded metal has good ground continuity (less

"""

11.,'·

&

-Gii Jt

ffilfll ~
lU!!1I
Iii
r

~
•--•--, S:+':-:.-:;::E=~J"
::;::.-::::: ..

L

___

Control Unit

That the ac mainline cord has no fr~ed or damaged wiring
at the ac power supply CU-PS-O 1 IJ.

---:=]

I

~

HI

III

:.~ '"
A .......
'V'Inn,

:'1 FAIl.URE

...JO

El

That all ac service outlets are safe
Measure from ground
pin to frame. The resistance should not be more than 0.1
ohm.

AC Power Supply 60 Hz and 50 Hz Japan

Nota: That the service outlets are for temporary
use of service equipment only.

s.

EJ

The resistance from the line cord ground pin and housing to
all frames and to all power assembly grounds as follows:
•

Line cord ground pin to frame ground.

•

Line cord housing to frame ground.

Mainline Breaker

r-----\-.~

OVIRCURRlor •• 0 1 l C I I O O - - - - - ,
CI2 SA
Cil I "

M.I"L~:: :::"11"

CONY

LONG ILo

512137

•

"

"

6)

S sa
"r-----,

,..---------,:

L _______ ....;

Front

3480 MI

·,.V to.,OOL

L

•

"."' ............ ~,.
I)

:'I'AU,U .. t

.J 0

......'.o.eo.'.....
::,':::.:.,~:.t:!::I'
..,.........

.ZOt VAC

Jl.

UIV .. C.
",...,., ImV'CUOII

J1'

%2D1Z'ov .. C

~z '~~:~~ISV .. C
~

~

~

W

................. ..,

.... _._ . __ . . _.J

Procedure EC Sensitive (See CARR-DR 9)

EC A47957

~)

__

0

~

AC Power Supply 50 Hz (Except Japan)

C CopyriGhtlB'" Corp. 1984. ,..,5. ,..,7

()

ls

A~A~:~~~~~[f~'

~aUTLlT rR~"SFO'''I' W'
~\A IOV r~
,\iSI,

•

The resistance should not be more than 0.1 ohm.

-uv CONTIIOL

~)

u

,~.)

INSP 40

o

o

o

o

o

o

Inspection Procedures (Continued)

o

o

o

o

Procedure EC Sensitive (See CARR-DR 9)

INSP 41

This page is for control units with 8M
6460460 and tape units with 8M 6460006
(See CARR-DR 9)

Control Unit

o
II

Left Side

AC Input Filter Cover

II

60 Hz, and 50 Hz Japan
Control Unit Left Front with Access
to AC Power Supply Left Side
syst~eAttaCh

AC/DC distribution to TCU System
TO'OWER
f70ijTRDlITATiDil
"A

I
J3

M

.00
888
"I

I

tA'I
JI

JI

Jl

JI

~

~ee~~-+-EJ

-.F.

-.Fe

*e

"'ire

AC Power Supply 60 Hz ami 50 Hz Japan

AC/DC distribution to TCU

System Attach
,)}-Ill------....;._ Neutral

Phase 3

Left Side

50 Hz, Except Japan
Control Unit Left Front with Access
to AC Power Supply Left Side

AC Power Supply 50 Hz (Except Japan)

3480 MI

EC336395

 Copyright IBM Corp. 1984. 1985

Procedure EC Sensitive (See CARR-DR 9)

INSP 41

Inspection Procedures (Continued)
Procedure EC Sensitive (See CARR-DR 9)
This page is for control units with 8M
6460460 and tape units with 8M 6460006
(See CARR-DR 9)

INSP 45

Control Unit-DC Power Supplies
Powered Off with Power Cable and System
Attach Cables Disconnected
Check and Correct As Needed

1. That aU grounded metal has good ground continuity (less
than 0.1 ohm) - covers, housings, metal box sides, and so
on.

2. All power wiring for frayed or damaged wires.

3. That the de power supply is attached in iiace tightly. The
power supply has two mounting screws

.

4. That all aC/de CBs and fuses are the correct size:
CB1
CB2
CBl
CB4
F1
F2

AC
DC +5
DC +5
DC -5
+8.5
+ 24

v
v
v
v
v

10
65
45
12
5
2

A
A
A
A
A medium blow
A long blow

These values can be EC sensitive, so check the fuses and
CBs against the machine logic.

3480 MI

EC336395

o Copyright IBM Corp. 1984. 1985

Procedure EC Sensitive (See CARR-DR 9)

o

[)

{)

~)

[)

INSP 45

o

o

o

o

o

c

o

This page is for control units with 8M
6460460 and tape units with 8M 6460006
(See CARR-DR 9)

9.

Turn ac CB 1 and the Unit Emergency Power Off switch on,
and put the Local/Remote switch in the Remote position.
Plug in the host system attach cables, if used, one at a time
and ensure that the subsystem will power up and down
normally.

13. For control units with EPO cables installed; ensure that the
control unit will power off with the host channel (CU
Local/Remote switch in the remote position).

14. Repeat the 'POWER ON/OFF' TEST for each host power

10. With power up, ensure that the machine will power down
Power
Power
Power
Power

with the Unit Emergency switch.

Powered Off with Power Cable and System
A ttach Cables Disconnected

11. Reset the Unit Emergency switch.

Check and Correct As Needed

12. For control units with Unit Emergency Power Off (UEPO)

2.

All connections, plugs, and so on for damaged latches
and/or clamps.

INSP 55

control cable.

Control Unit Inside-Miscellaneous

All cables, connections, plugs, and so on for frayed or
damaged wiring.

o

o·

Procedure EC Sensitive (See CARR-DR 9)

Inspection Procedures (Continued)

1.

o

Control
Control
Control
Control

0
1
2
3

J5
J6
J7
J8

cables installed; ensure that the control unit (CU) will power
on with the host channel (CU Local/Remote switch in the
remote position).

Safety ECs
+24 V control

Powered Off with Power Cable and System
A ttach Cables Disconnected

Overcurrent
Protection

"Mainline Breaker

transformer
ac vC?ltage taps

Mainline Breaker
Check and Correct As Needed
ClI, tu

•• r~~" 1~J1
~ IBIBl
~ ~III
• • LtJ
. _.
.. ........_........
r----,:'0
..·-.. ,.. (
---=:=] L___
O ..... ".

1. That all safety ECs have been installed correctly.
2.

m

The location or list of ECA's.

Power Off and On
Check the customer plug housing to the ground pin. There
should be no voltage prec;ent and the resistance should be
less than 0.1 ohm.

2.

Set CB 1 off and plug in the power cable.

3.

Have the customer close the CB/CP (circuit breaker/circuit
panel) that supplies the outlet to which the subsystem is
attached.

4.

Does machine power label
match customer power?
Measure with the volt/ohm meter at the ac input filter

5.

Have the customer open the CB/CP that supplies the outlet
to which the subsystem is attached and unplug the power
cable.

6.

Reinstall the covers over the ac input filter.

7.

Reinstall all covers and set CB 1 off and plug in the power
cable.

fJ

am

=~,- ,.:..-::a Jtt

I

1.

F

.. ,... r - II am

...J

1 'AllU ..

:.~

loa

......

r- - -

- -

-,

L _____ ..J

Phase 1

D.

Phase 2

)~t-------;""-

Neutral

Phase 3

8. Have the customer close the CB/CP to the outlet that
supplies the subsystem.

Left Side

AC Input Filter Cover

Control Unit AC Power Supply 50 Hz (Except Japan)

3480 MI

EC336395

CI Copyright IBM corp. 19B4. 19B5. 1986

Left Side

AC Input Filter Cover

Control Unit AC Power Supply 60 Hz, and 50 Hz Japan

Procedure EC Sensitive (See CARR-DR 9)

INSP 55

Inspection Procedures (Continued)

Drive

INSP 56

Drive

INSP 56

This page is for tape units without BM 6460006
(see CARR-DR 9).
Automatic Cartridge Loaders
Check and correct as needed:
•

That the lower automatic cartridge loader safety cover is in
place

•

That all components are mounted correctly and all cable
clamps are installed.

•

Inspect all cables, connectors, and plugs for frayed or
damaged wiring.

•

Inspect ail connections and plugs for damaged latches
and/or clamps.

•

Inspect the automatic cartridge loader base plate for correct
installation of the fuse labels

•

That the two fuses are the correct value as shown on the
labels
on the automatic cartridge loader base plate.

D.

m.

m

F1

+ 24 V dc 16A Slow Blow

F2

+ S V dc SA Instantaneous Blow.

3480 MI EC A57721
C Copy"g'" IBM Corp. 1982. 1988

()

{)

,',')

~)

o

o
Notes

3480 MI

EC336396

,t; COpyroUhllBM Corp. 1984. 1985. 1986. 1987

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o
Notes

INSP 58

Notes

INSP 58

Completion Report and Signature

1

Procedure EC Sensitive (See CARR-DR 9)

INSP 60

Procedure EC Sensitive (See CARR-DR 9)

INSP 60

This page is for control units with 8M 6460460
and tape units with 8M 6460006 (See CARR-DR 9)
•

SAFETY INSPECTION FOR MACHINE TYPE 3480

•

GENERAL SAFETY INSPECTION

•

MAINTENANCE AGREEMENT QUALIFICATION (MAQ)

After the inspection, sign and date the checklist and store it with
the Maintenance Agreement inspection.

DATE

NAME
SAFETY HAZARDS

LIST ALL SAFETY HAZARDS, IF NONE SAY NONE.
1.

2.
3.
4.

5.
6.
7.

8.

9.
10. --------------------------------

3480 MI

EC336396

,e Copy"gn. IBM Corp. 1984. 1985. 1986. 1981

~)

~)

o

o

o

o

c

o

o

o

o

o

Procedure EC Sensitive (See CARR·DR 9)

AC Grounding Diagram (Control Unit 50 Hz and 60 Hz)

INSP 65

Not••:

This page is for control units with BM 6460460
and tape units with BM 6460006 (See CARR-DR 9)

1,

All wires shown are green/yellow.

2.

Blocks are for adjacent frame attachment. They are used for
frame ground and stability.

ITEM PART NO. OESCRI PTION

AWG

1

4451675 AC-24V DC CIA

2

4799941 Cont. gate fan CIA 18

3

4799949 Cont. AC fan CIA

4

329638 Jumper

14

18
18

Logic gate
CU dc supply
4798875 60Hz
479894150Hz

Legend

Jr:B: External tooth lockwasherlstarwasher

IT

Metal to meta 1 wi th self tappi ng screws
Welded connection

~ Connector with grounding pin
~

Tapped holes for screw attachment

ACbox
4798865 60Hz
4798831 50Hz

System ac main power

3480 MI

EC336396

e Copyright IBM Corp. 1984, 1985, 1986. 1987

Procedure EC Sensitive (See CARR·DR 9)

INSP 65

AC Grounding Diagram (Tape Unit and Drive 50 Hz and 60 Hz)

Procedure EC Sensitive (See CARR-DR 9)

This page is for control units with 8M 6460460
and tape units with 8M 6460006 (See CARR-DR 9)

INSP 70

Nolel:
1.

All wires shown are green/yellow.

2.

Threaded block for adjacent frame attachment. frame ground
and stability.

ITEM PART NO. DESCRIPTION

Tape
Unit
Blower

AWG

1

8576642 A/C Input cable Asm 12
60 and 50 Hz Japan

1

8576643 A/C Input cable Asm 12
50 Hz WTC

2

8576645 Power supply A/C
14
input cable assembly

3

8576678 A/C box assembly,
60 and 50 Hz Japan

N/A

3

8577037 A/C box assembly,
50 Hz WTC

N/A

4

4479778 Ground Jumper Asm

16

5

4451691 Cable Asm compressor 16

6

8577023 Pneumatic supply

N/A

7

6390360 Ground jumper Asm

16

Pl'-2
P15-2

Legend

Jl'-2

J15-2

J(l(
TU POWER SUPPLY
60 Hz 4798945
50 Hz 4798946

External tooth lockwasherlstarwasher

Cl

Tapped holes for screws attachment

J:[

Metal to metal self tapping screws
Weld

FRAME

~

Connector with ground pin

~

Double crimp

JX-X

Ground pin in connector

PANEL A Jl-4

3480 MI

EC336396

Procedure EC Sensitive (See CARR-DR 9)

~ COPYright IBM Corp. 1984. 1985. 1986. 1987

{)

~)

,I.)

INSP 70

o

o

c

o

o

General Instructions
This page is for control units without BM
6460460 and tape units without BM
6460006 (See CARR-DR 9)
This safety checklist is to ensure that a machine that has not
been under an IBM Maintenance Agreement has the necessary
safety items installed and that no other changes were made that
would make it unsafe. Each machine, as it was designed and
assembled, had needed safety items installed to protect the
owners, operators, and service personnel from injury. This
checklist verifies only those items.
This checklist should be performed before the normal inspection
for maintenance agreement. The machine should be
suspected to be unsafe and you should think it unsafe until
you verify that it is safe. If any unsafe conditions are present,
you must decide how serious the hazard could be and whether
you can continue without first correcting the problem.
Think about these conditions and the safety hazards they
present:
•

Electrical, especially primary power, for example: an
electrically charged frame can cause serious or lethal
electrical shock.

•

Explosive, for example: damaged or expanding capacitors
can cause serious injury.

•

Mechanical hazards, such as a cartridge latch assembly
cover missing, can cause injury to the body.

o

o

o

o

o

Procedure EC Sensitive (See CARR-DR 9)

INSP 110

Procedure EC Sensitive (See CARR-DR 9)

INSP 110

Needed Materials
The following items are needed or will be useful during the
inspection.
•

Logic/wiring diagrams

•

Copies of safety SMs and ECAs for this machine type

•

Parts catalog

•

Machine history

•

FE Safety Handbook, S229-8124.

•

Power and Electrical Safety, ZZ2S-720S

Education
Service personnel must be trained on the new general
maintenance agreement qualification (MAQ), tailored
maintenance agreement qualification, and changed machine
safety inspection procedures as part of the electrical safety
course.

Some of the pages are for features and need not be checked if
the features are not installed on the machine.

3480 MI

EC336395

o Copyright IBM Corp. 19B4. 19B5

Procedure EC Sensitive (See CARR-DR 9)

Inspection Procedures
This page is for control units without 8M
6460460 and tape units without 8M
6460006 (See CARR-DR 9)
Note: See INSP 11 5 and INSP 11 6 for the
following locations.

•

Tape Unit and Control Unit Outside
Powered off with power cable and system attach cables
disconnected
6.

On the tape unit:

INSP 115

If the power cable is not marked. measure the diameter
of a wire in the cord with the insulation removed. The
diameter of a 10-gauge wire is 2.588 millimeters
(0.102 inches).

That the power plug type is R&S· 3760

g.

• R&S is Trademark of Russell & Stoll
Check and Correct As Needed

Preparation

1.

That the machine is stable, that there are no defective
casters or pedestals.

2.

That the caster lock thumbscrews are in the two rear
casters

3.

That all hinges and 'Iatches are in acceptable operating
condition. not broken or corroded.

4.

That the tape unit displays rotate without binding and the
mechanical stops are not broken

CAUTION: TILT HAZARD
Do NOT open both drives of a tape unit that is not bolted
on to another tape unit or control unit. With the
automatic cartridge loader feature installed and both drive
drawers fully extended. a tape unit that is not bolted to
another unit will tilt forward with about 20 Ibs. of force
applied to the top of either automatic cartridge loader.
Start the checklist with the machine powered off and with all
electrical power removed from the machine.

g.

D.

Note:
1.

Power off the subsystem.

2.

Have the customer open the CB/CP (circuit breaker/circuit
panel) to the outlet supplying power to the subsystem.

3.

Check the customer's plug housing to building ground.
•

There should be no voltage present.

•

Resistance should be less than 0.1 ohm.

The displays have detented stop positions.

II Read/Write Bus Connectors

On the control unit:

and Thermal Connector

Check and Correct As Needed
1.

That the machine is stable. that there are no defective
casters or pedestals.

2.

That the caster lock thumbscrews are in the two rear
casters I).

4.

Unplug the power cable.
3.

5.

Unplug the system attach cables (if any) from the control
unit. They are located at the rear of control unit ac power
supply CU-PS-O 1. See LaC 1.

That all hinges and latches are in acceptable operating
condition. not broken or corroded.

4.

That the ac mainline cord does not have frayed or damaged
wiring at the plug end

Unplug the channel cables from the control unit. See LaC
1.

5.

That the power cable is 10 gauge. 4 wire for 60 Hz and
50 Hz Japan. or 10 gauge 5 wire for 50 Hz World Trade
machines.

6.

7.

8.

9.

Disconnect the read/write bus connectors and the thermal
connector
and the ac power connector
between the
control unit and the first tape unit and between all the tape
units.

a.

II.

Check that there is no equipment plugged into any of the
convenience outlets in the control unit. They are located on
the left front of the ac power supply CU-PS-O 1.

g.

•

•

b.

Latest machine history if possible.

3480 MI

If the power cable is not stamped with the IBM part
number. see if it is stamped with the wire size and
number
A power cable with the correct size wire
will be stamped 10/4.

B.

•
Copy of the safety SMs/ECAs for this machine type.

The IBM part number for the correct power cable is
806997. This part number is stamped into the
insulation of IBM power cables

B.

Obtain the items that are needed or will be useful before
starting the inspection.
a.

Note: The IBM part number for the EMEA 50 Hz
power cable is 4798935. The R&S· 3760 plug is for
60 Hz machines only.

If a non-IBM power cable is stamped with a vendor
number instead of with the wire size and number. check
the vendor number to ensure that the cord contains
either four or five 1D-gauge wires.

Procedure EC Sensitive (See CARR-DR 9)

EC336395

.. Copy.ight IBM Corp. 19B4. 19B5. 19B6

{)

o

{)

~)

o

INSP 115

o

o

o

()

c

o

o

Inspection Procedures (Continued)

o

o

Procedure EC Sensitive (See CARR-DR 9)

o
INSP 116

This page is for control units without 8M
6460460 and tape units without 8M
6460006 (See CARR-DR 9)

II

Tape Unit
Control Unit

Rear View
Front View

lJ

Front View
Rear View

3480 MI
o Copyright IBM Corp.

EC336395
19B4, 19B5

m__

---~u

Procedure EC Sensitive (See CARR-DR 9)

INSP 116

Inspection Procedures (Continued)

Procedure EC Sensitive (See CARR-DR 9)

INSP 120

Procedure EC Sensitive (See CARR-DR 9)

INSP 120

This page is for control units without 8M
6460460 and tape units without 8M
6460006 (See CARR-DR 9)
Note:

See INSP 121 for the following locations.

Tape Unit Inside
Powered Off with Power Cable and System
A ttach Cables Disconnected
Check and Correct As Needed
1.

That all ground jumpers (normally ~een/yellow) are tightly
attached by frame ground screws II. See INSP 170 for the
ac grounding diagram.

2.

That all grounded metal has good ground continuity (less
than 0.1 ohm) - covers, housings, metal box sides, and so
on.

3.

That all hinges and latches are in acceptable operating
condition - not broken or corroded.

4.

That all normal safety covers (operator and service areas)
are in place including those protecting mechanical devices
and hot surfaces - no sharp corners or edges should be
unprotected.

EJ·

a.

The ac CB 1 safety cover is correctly in place

b.

The ac power cap is present for each tape unit and
securely attached to the safety cover

c.

The logic board 02A-A 1 covers (pin and card side) are
in placeD.

d.

The drive and tape path safety cover is in place

e.

The fan terminal cover is in place

f.

The ac terminal block cover is in place

g.

The limited customer access covers are in place

B.

3480 MI

II.

I!J.
I!J.

D.

EC336395

CI Copyright IBM Corp. 1984. 1985

' ).

"

...

~)

o

o

o

o

o

o

Inspection Procedures (Continued)

o

o

o

Procedure EC Sensitive (See CARR-DR 9)

o
INSP 121

This page is for control units without 8M
6460460 and tape units without 8M
6460006 (See CARR-DR 9)

Tape Unit Front

D

D

Tape Unit Rear

D

Tape Unit Front with Safety Covers

3480 MI

EC336395

C Copyright IBM Corp. 1984. 19B5

Procedure EC Sensitive (See CARR-DR 9)

INSP 121

Notes

Notes

3480 MI

Notes

EC336395

G Copyright IBM Carp. 1984, 1985

o

o

~)

()

INSP 124

INSP 124

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

Procedure EC Sensitive (See CARR-DR 9)

Inspection Procedures (Continued)

INSP 125

This page is for control units without 8M
6460460 and tape units without 8M
6460006 (See CARR-DR 9)
Tape Unit Inside (Continued)
Check and Correct As Needed
1. That all safety labels are located where indicated:
a.

b.

2.

That all labels reading "LINE VOLTAGE PRESENT WITH
POWER OFF" are attached in the following locations:

IJ·

•

Terminal strip at lower rear

•

Main tape unit circuit breaker

EJ·

That a label reading "Unit Weight 101 LB (46 KG)" is
located on the de power supply TU-PS-O 1

II·

That the thermal switches are not bypassed. See CARR-DR
1100 and CARR-DR 820 for a procedure to get access to
the thermal switches.

3.

No obvious non-IBM changes.

4.

That both fan safety screens are in place on the drive
assembly

5.

That (on 50 Hz machines only) the safety screen is in place
on the power supply cooling fan. The fan is located at the
rear of the tape unit, above the power supply.

6.

No metal filings, dirt or contaminants. water or other fluids.
or marks of earlier smoke or burning are present.

D

II·

If there are any marks of earlier smoke or burning. and so
on, check the Maintenance Agreement Qualification (MAQ)
report for correct procedures for repair action if needed.

II

3480 MI

EC336395

II Copyright IBM Corp. 19B4. 19B5

Procedure EC Sensitive (See CARR-DR 9)

INSP 125

Inspection Procedures (Continued)

ProcedureEC Sensitive (See CARR-DR 9)

INSP 132

This page is for control units without BM
6460460 and tape units without BM
6460006 (See CARR-DR 9)
Tape Unit-DC Power Supplies
Powered Off with Power Cable and System
A ttach Cables Disconnected
Check and Correct As Needed
1.

That all power supplies are attached tightly. The dc power
supply TU-PS-O 1 has two screws

2.

That all grounded metal has good ground continuity (less
than 0.1 ohm) - covers, housings, metal box sides, and so
on.

3.

The power wiring for frayed or damaged wiring.

II.

4. That the following ac/dc CBs and fuses are the correct size:
CB1
AC
CB1
DC
CB2
DC
F1/2
F3/4
F5/6
F7/8
F9/10
F11/12
F13

Drive
Drive
Drive
Drive
Drive
Drive
Drive
Drive
Drive

frame
0
1
0/1
0/1
0/1
0/1
0/1
0/1

10
20
20
12
5
1
3
8
.75
2

A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A

Medium blow
Long blow
Long blow
Long blow
Medium blow
Immediate blow
Long blow

These values can be EC sensitive, so check the fuses and
CBs against the machine logic.

Tape Unit Inside-Miscellaneous
Powered Off with Power Cable and System
A ttach Cables Disconnected
Check and Correct As Needed
1.

All cables, connections, plugs, and so on for frayed or
damaged wiring.

2.

All connections, plugs and so on for damaged latches
and/or clamps.

3480 MI
o Copyright IBM Corp.

~)

EC336395

Procedure EC Sensitive (See CARR-DR 9)

1984. 1985. 1986

~)

{)

()

o

INSP 132

c

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

Procedure EC Sensitive (See CARR-DR 9)

Inspection Procedures (Continued)

o
INSP 135

This page is for control units without BM 6460460
and tape units without BM 6460006 (See
CARR-DR 9)
Control Unit Inside
Powered Off with Power Cable and System
Attach Cables Disconnected
Check and Correct As Needed
1.

That all ground jumpers (normally ,i!;een/yellow) are tightly
attached by frame ground screws 01. See INSP 165 for the
ac grounding diagram.

2.

That all grounded metal has good ground continuity (less
than 0.1 ohm) - covers, housings, metal box sides, and so on.

3.

That all hinges and latches are in acceptable operating
condition - not broken or corroded.

4.

That all normal safety covers (operator and service areas)
are in place including those protecting mechanical devices
and hot surfaces - no sharp corners or edges should be
unprotected.

iii·

•
•

The logic gate card covers (A 1,A2) are in place
All three gate dc voltage strip (TS) covers are in place

•
•
•

The ac safety cover is in place
All four limited customer access covers are in place
Machines with vertical styie I/O connectors have the
drip-screen guard in place

D.

5.

Ill·

1m.

That all safety labels are located where indicated.
•

6.

II·

Labels readino, '"Hazardous Area, etc .. .'· must be
located on the-frame members at
and

D

m·

Mark the customer's circuit breaker/circuit panel (CS/CP)
number for the circuit controlling ac power to subsystem at
CS1 (main line eS)
and on the main line power cable
plug.

EI

7.

That the thermal switches are not bypassed. These are
located at the top and the bottom of 01-A gate. See
CARR-CU 1430 for a procedure to get access to the thermal
switch.

8.

That no obvious non-IBM changes have been made.

9.

That the fan safety screens on the fans on the bottom of the
A1 gate are in place

D.

10. That no metal filings. dirt or contaminants, water or other
fluids, or marks of earlier smoke or burning are present.
11. If there are marks of earlier smoke or burning. and so on,
check the Maintenance Agreement Qualification (MAQ)
report for correct procedures for repair action if needed.

3480 MI

EC A47957

II

Procedure EC Sensitive (See CARR-DR 9)

INSP 135

Procedure EC Sensitive (See CARR-DR 9)

Inspection Procedures (Continued)
This page is for control units without 8M
6460460 and tape units without 8M
6460006 (See CARR-DR 9)
Note: See INSP 140 and INSP 141 for the
following locations.

Control Unit-AC Primary Power
Powered Off with Power Cable and System
A ttach Cables Disconnected

7.

The resistance from the frame ground to DC ground at:

2.

That all ac/dc CBs and fuses are the correct size:

50 Hz

TB 1-5
TB 1-6
•

TB 1-7

•

TB 1-8

•

TB2-S

•

TB2-6

CBl
CB2
CB3
F1

60 Hz

Cal
Ca2
CB3
F1

AC
AC
AC
DC

Maln Line
Cony.
24 V
24 V

25 A
5 A
1 A
5 A Long Blo ....

AC
AC
AC
DC

Main Line
Conv./24 V
Con v
24 V

25 A
5 A
7 A
5 A Long Blow

These values can be EC sensitive. so check the fuses and
CBs against the machine logic.

TB2-7

Check and Correct As Needed
1.

8.

That the ac power supply is attached in place tightly. The
power supply has two mounting screws

a·

That all ground jumpers (normally ~een/yellow) are strongly
attached by frame ground screws U. The system attach
ground wires are not present if feature is not installed.
To check the shield ground of the..e,ower cable, you must
remove the left side safety cover U and the ac input filter
Leave these covers off, you
cover on the power supply
will need to return to this area later.

TB2-8
Mainline Breaker

and to the ground pin on:
•

Logic board 01 A-A 1D 2 D08

•

Logic board 01A-A2D2D08

5.

That all ac service outlets are safe
Measure from ground
pin to frame. The resistance should not be more than 0.1
ohm.

~

S>

~JIO

I
Control Unit

AC Power Supply 60 Hz and 50 Hz Japan

EJ.

Note: That the service outlets are for temporary
use of service equipment only.

Mainline Breaker

The resistance from the line cord ground pin and housing to
all frames and to all power assembly grounds as follows:
•

S>

'-"."'-'

-------,

than 0.1 ohm) - covers, housings, metal box sides, and so
on.

m·

U'A""

M

The resistance should not be more than 0.1 ohm.

S>

That the ac mainline cord has no fraved or damaged wiring
at the ac power supply CU-PS-O 1

lu

ell

lIU'ltU_,

3. That all grounded metal has good ground continuity (less

4.

Convenience Outlet

,...-----~. "'"''''" "'''''''' ----.

Ll

6.

INSP 140

, . . - - - - - \ - OVERCURRENT PROTECTION - - - - -....
CSI lSA
C82 SA
CBl I.OA
MAINLINE BREAKER
CONV. .zev CONTROL

[& il l8m

Line cord ground pin to frame ground.

$

Line cord housing to frame ground.
The resistance should not be more than 0.1 ohm.

..

$

..

$

$

Iro"

OUTLET

$

$

TR ANSFORMER

$

$

·zev CONTROL
TRANSFORMER

O~~NZ~~lO ~~:Olz:::::A'lI81
I,'
51%137

..."'''••• ,•.•" ".f
..... "

'UCOlllftIllUID

:",':~:.:(:::'C!::"

" " ,. "r-----,:FI FAilURE .. ".. "....
_______ -.i
L _____ ~ 0

)14

~
""""z
JIS

~

0

220 VAC

(llO VAC lINEI
230/zeo VAC
leOO/41SVAC

, - ______ - - , :

,.!. ___ LH~II____ .,

L

~------------

~
~
I...sJ...)

.. .:

AC Power Supply 50 Hz (Except Japan)

Front
3480 MI

~)

EC A47957

Procedure EC Sensitive (See CARR-DR 9)

~)

INSP 140

c

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

Procedure EC Sens.itive (See CARR-DR 9)

Inspection Procedures (Continued)

o

o

INSP 141

This page is for control units without 8M
6460460 and tape units without 8M
6460006 (See CARR-DR 9)

Control Unit

II

Left Side

B

60 Hz, and 50 Hz Japan

Attach System

AC/DC Distribution to TCU

AC Input Filter Caver

Control Unit Left Front with Access
to AC Power Supply Left Side

J2

~
JJ
~
~

n

J48

00000
[OOOOOP

00000

U

l

Phase 1
Phase 2

AC Power Supply 60 Hz anri 50 Hz
AC/DC Distribution to TCU

System attach

~----I-------II
I
M ., D'

fo..-J2(AC)~~POWER~
J2

Japan

I

OIUIII,"IIU"
fD It,

CONTROL PANEL
J4A

~3(OC)2
J~8000w
.JX,4
8(;(]

J31~2

I

0

J9

00

.--------;........------,

J4B

00000
00 0 0 a
00000

JIO

Jr---------;- Neutral

Phase 3

II II

J5

6It i
mo

DOO

I

J6

J7

@:!j ~g~
lit

It

Left Side

50 Hz, Except Japan
Control Unit Left Front with Access
to AC Power Supply Left Side

JllM
3480 MI

EC336395

~ Copyright IBM Corp. 1984, 19B5

Procedure EC Sensitive (See CARR-DR 9)

INSP 141

Inspection Procedures (Continued)

Procedure EC Sensitive (See CARR-DR 9)

INSP 145

Procedure EC Sensitive (See CARR-DR 9)

INSP 145

This page is for control units without 8M
6460460 and tape units without 8M
6460006 (See CARR-DR 9)
Control Unit-DC Power Supplies
Powered Off with Power Cable and System
A ttach Cables Disconnected
Check and Correct As Needed

1. That all grounded metal has good ground continuity (less
than 0.1 ohm) - covers, housings, metal box sides, and so
on.
2.

All power wiring for frayed or damaged wires.

3.

That the dc power supply is attached in e!!ce tightly. The
power supply has two mounting screws II.

4.

That all ac/dc CBs and fuses are the correct size:
CB1
CB2
CB3
CBII
F1
F2

AC
DC
DC
DC

+5
+5
-5
+8.5
+ 211

v
v
v
v
v

10
65
liS
12
5
2

A
A
A
A
A medium blow
A long blow

These values can be EC sensitive, so check the fuses and
CBs against the machine logic.

D

3480 MI
C)

EC336395

Copyright IBM Carp. 19B4. 1985

~)

{)

~)

{)

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

Inspection Procedures (Continued)
This page is for control units without 8M
6460460 and tape units without 8M
6460006 (See CARR-DR 9)
Control Unit Inside-Miscellaneous

All cables, connections, plugs, and so on for frayed or
damaged wiring.

2.

All connections, plugs, and so on for damaged latches
and/or clamps.

Turn ac CB 1 and the Unit Emergency Power Off switch on.
and put the Local/Remote switch in the Remote position.
Plug in the host system attach cables, if used, one at a time
and ensure that the subsystem will power up and down
normally.

14. Repeat the 'POWER ON/OFF' TEST for each host power
control cable.
Power
Power
Power
Power

Powered Off with Power Cable and System
A ttach Cables Disconnected

The location or list of ECA's.

i
~
CBI 2SA
IIIAINLINE BREAKER

~

~~~NCS~~~~OE~

CB2 5A
CBl I OA
CONY. '2'V COl'HROL

"ffliBi" i ~:.~:" I.~:"'~:'·:"l

~g~:=~I~~l~;:~~
~2 ~~:;2::~~~NEI
ro........

(t S)
I) I)
(t
(t
S)
(t . - - - - - ,
••
,------ - , :
:Fl FAILURE

Power Off and On

L _______ -.i

1.

Check the customer plug housing to the ground pin. There
should be no voltage present and the resistance should be
less than 0.1 ohm.

2.

Set CB 1 off and plug in the power cable.

3.

Have the customer close the CB/CP (circuit breaker/circuit
panel) that supplies the outlet to which the subsystem is
attached.

4.

Does machine power label
match customer power?
Measure with the volt/ohm meter at the ac input filter

5.

Have the customer open the CB/CP that supplies the outlet
to which the subsystem is attached and unplug the power
cable.

EI

L _____ .J

0

~ 1400 ' 41SVAC

,! ... LH~~I._ •• _,

;. ._ .. _. _____

~-.J

Reinstall the covers over the ac input filter.

7.

Reinstall all covers and set CB 1 off and plug in the power
cable.

S.

Have the customer close the CB/CP to the outlet that
supplies the subsystem.

EC336395

-----~- '"'''''''' '"''''''''I-~--'

I1II1
Il

I)

'r~~i" I
I ~ J.I
.~.:....
rftlfll ~ *
l!1!!1J
(t

JII

s....

CD

- ---==:]

I

(t

"

I.e.,
_1&"_
....
- '." '"II•••• .l'Q"c:;L J' I
".lIe .........., ' ..I ~

..,••• " .....r' ..,'

r -- --, :.'::::::::".
I

Irl FAIL URI

L ___ J 0 0

FI

r - - - - - -...,

~~~~::lO ~-

- --~

\
EI

D

Phase 3

Left Side

Input Filter Cover

Control Unit AC Power Supply 50Hz, Except Japan

3480 MI

Overcurrent Protection

+24 V Control
Transformer
AC Voltage Taps

II.

6.

CI Copyright IBM corp. 1984. 1985. 1986

J5
1 J6
2 J7
3 J8

....

r-----\-OVERCURRENT PROTECTION - - - - - - ,

Check and Correct As Needed

2.

a

Mainline Breaker

Mainline Breaker

That all safety ECs have been installed correctly.

Control
Control
Control
Control

12. For control units with Unit Emergency Power Off (UEPO)
cables installed; ensure that the control unit (CU) will power
on with the host channel (CU Local/Remote switch in the
remote position).

Safety ECs

1.

INSP 155

13. For control units with EPO cables installed; ensure that the
control unit will power off with the host channel (CU
Local/Remote switch in the remote position).

11. Reset the Unit Emergency switch.

Check and Correct As Needed
1.

9.

o

o

Procedure EC Sensitive (See CARR-DR 9)

10. With power up, ensure that the machine will power down
with the Unit Emergency switch.

Powered Off with Power Cable and System
A ttach Cables Disconnected

o

Left Side

AC Input Filter Cover

Control Unit AC Power Supply 60 Hz, and 50 Hz Japan

Procedure EC Sensitive (See CARR-DR 9)

INSP 155

Inspection Procedures (Continued)
Drive

This page is for tape units without 8M 6460006
(see CARR-DR 9).

INSP 156

Automatic Cartridge Loaders
Check and correct as needed:
•

That the lower automatic cartridge loader safety cover is in
place

•

That all components are mounted correctly and all cable
clamps are installed.

•

Inspect all cables, connectors, and plugs for frayed or
damaged wiring.

•

Inspect all connections and plugs for damaged latches
and/or clamps.

•

Inspect the automatic cartridge loader base plate for correct
installation of the fuse labels

•

That the two fuses are the correct value as shown on the
labels
on the automatic cartridge loader base plate.

D.

fJ.

fJ

+ 24 V dc

-

F1

1.6A Slow Blow

-

F2 ~ 5 V dc SA Instantaneous Blow.

3480 MI EC AS7721
r

Copy"g~t

~)

IBM Corp. 1982. 1988

Drive

t)

()

{)

()

()

,'.)

INSP 156

o

o

o

c

o

o

o

o

o
Notes

Notes

3480 MI

o

EC336396

() CopyrighllBM Corp. 1984. 1885. 1986. 1981

Notes

INSP 158

INSP 158

Completion Report and Signature

Procedure EC Sensitive (See CARR-DR 9)

INSP 160

Procedure EC Sensitive (See CARR-DR 9)

INSP 160

This page is for control units without 8M 6460460
and tape units without 8M 6460006 (See
CARR-DR 9)
•

SAFETY INSPECTION FOR MACHINE TYPE 3480

•

GENERAL SAFETY INSPECTION

•

MAINTENANCE AGREEMENT OUALIFICA TlON (MAO)

After the inspection, sign and date the checklist and store it with
the Maintenance Agreement inspection.

DATE

NAME
SAFETY HAZARDS

LIST ALL SAFETY HAZARDS, IF NONE SAY NONE.
1.

2.
3.
4.

5.
6.

7.
8.
9.
10. ---------------------------------

3480 MI

EC336396

C Copyrogn"B'-I Corp. 1984. 1985. 1986. 19l17

{)

r)

f)

o

o

o

o

o

o

AC Grounding Diagram (Control Unit 50 Hz and 60 Hz)

o

o

o

o

Procedure EC Sensitive (See CARR-DR 9)

This page is for control units without 8M 6460460
and tape units without 8M 6460006 (See
CARR-DR 9)

INSP 165

Notes:
1.

All wires shown are green!yellow.

2.

Blocks are for adjacent frame attachment. They are used for
frame ground and stability.

ITEMlpART NO. iDESCRIPTION
1 14451675 AC-24V DC CIA

AWG
14

2 '4799041 Cont. gate fan CIA 18
3
4

4799040 Cont. AC fan CIA
320638 Jumper

18
18

Logic gate

CU de supply

Legend

4798875 60Hz
4798941 50Hz

XI Externa 1 tooth 1ockwasherIstarwasher

r:E

Metal to metal with self tapping screws
Welded connection

~

~

Connector wi th groundi ng pi n
Tapped holes for screw attachment

AC box
479886560Hz
4798831 50Hz

r--<---

p8nel A J1~

3480 MI

()

~

Connector ~;i th 'g""ound pi n

~

Double crimp

JX·X

Ground pin in connector

DD
Procedure EC Sensitive (See CARR-DR 9)

EC A47957

t)

'-'.)

~)

INSP 170

Index

I

o

o

Special Characters

I

+1.7 V dc regulator, 01A-A1-T2 MAP 410 PWR 410-1
+24 V control transformer ac voltage taps location, control unit ac power
supply LOC 55, LOC 60
+24 V control voltage
diagram PWR 40
local mode MAP 110 PWR 110-1
MAP PWR 130-1
remote mode MAP 120 PWR 120-1
+5 V dc (J5 through J12) locations, control unit dc power supply LOC 35
+5 V dc distribution diagram, control unit PWR 42
+8.5 V dc distribution diagram, control unit PWR 48
-5 V dc distribution diagram, control unit PWR 46

abbreviations GLOSS 1
ac grounding diagram
control unit INSP 65, INSP 165
tape unit INSP 70,INSP 170
ac input and output locations (J1 and J3), control unit dc power
supply LOC 35
ac input filter cover location, control unit ac power supply LOC 55,
LOC 60
ac Ii ne cord, control unit
removal and replacement CARR-CU 1490
ac power circuit breaker, drive
description PANEL 14, PANEL 15
removal and replacement CARR-DR 2180, CARR-DR 2185
arc rower cord, maintenance device MO 10
ac power supply
ac power connector LOC 40, LOC 45
cable, removal and replacement CARR-DR 7SO
control unit
local mode diagram PWR 36
panel PWR 15
remote mode diagram PWR 38
jumper checks INST 55, INST 355
overview diagrllln PWR 32
power off and on procedures CARR-CU 6
removal and replacement CARR-CU 1440
safety inspection INSP 40, ItlSP 140
50 Hz except Japan
location LOC 60
voltage tolerance table PWR 20
60 Hz and SO Hz Japan
location LOC 55
voltage tolerance tables PWR 20
acldc distribution location, control unit ac power supply LOC 55, LOC 60
action messages trlST 5, INST 305
adapter cable assembly part number 8576623 or 8576624,
installing INST 500
adapter card
clocks EAO 80
introduction INTRO 50
location, drive LOC 15, LOC 130
logical components OPER 40
switch setting procedure CARR-CU 1189
adding tape units to an installed subsystem INST 135, INST 435
additional channel interface optional feature INTRO 30
additional tape unit installation INST 20, INST 320
address and register selection chart, scope loop utility OIAG 600
address cross-reference tables, external register DF 5

3480 MI

EC A57723

~CDDyri9ht IBM Corp. 1982, 1989. All Rights Resernd

o

o

o

o

address in line operation, channel to control unit interface OPER 190
address in line operation, control unit to drive interconnection OPER 190
address out line operation, channel to control unit interface OPER 190
address out line operation, control unit to drive
Interconnection OPER 190
address, sync (scope loop utility) DIAG 600
addresses, setting the
control unit INST 40, INST 340, PANEL 12
drive PANEL 12
drive, logical INST 50, INST 350
drive, physical INST SO, INST 3SO
addressing
external register OPER 65
introduction INTRO 10
adjustments
cartridge latched sensor CARR-DR 110
fiie protect switch CARR-DR 90
pressure regulator PNEU 5, PNEU 105
tach sensor A, alter replacement CARR-DR 22SO
tach sensor B, after replacement CARR-DR 2260
tach sensors A and B CARR-DR 40
tape path sensor A CARR-DR 50, CARR-DR 120
tape path sensor B CARR-DR 10, CARR-DR 40, CARR-DR 70
vacuum PNEU 5, PNEU 105
air fitting location, drive LOC 120
air fitting location, drive, SO Hz LOC 115
air fitting location, drive, 60 Hz LOC 110
air pressure hose clamp, illustration of r:_I\N 6
air pressure loss analysis procedure
air pressure loss PNEU 10, PNEU 110
pneumatics problem on a single drive PNEU 20, PNEU 120
air pressure test hose assembly
removal and replacement CARR-DR 2620
alert sequence from the drive to the control unit EAD 42
alert sequence, control unit to drive operation OPER 185
alter control storage, MD support diskette SOISK 110
area of subsystem served by cable group, cable group list FSI 200
assembly
feed CARR-DR 2950
input stack CARR-DR 2900, LOC 171
left input rail CARR-DR 2930
load CARR-DR 2820, CART 17
loader mechanical CARR-DR 28SO, LOC 170, LOC 171, OPER 240
output stack CARR-DR 2970, LOC 171
right input rail CARR-DR 2940
assign command OPER 160
aSSigner! ~Isewhere sense bit SENSE 110
attaching additional tape units INST 20, INST 320
attacl""""t tool for leader block replacement, illustration of PLAN 6
attention indicator OPER 240, PANEL 40
attention status bit SENSE 205
automatic cartridge loader INSP 56, INSP 156, LGND 46, LGND 47,
LGND 48. PANEL 40

backspace block command OPER 160
backspace file command OPER 160
bar LEOs (indicators) description PANEL 14, PANEL 15
basic control unit test
E010 description DIAG 2
how to run DIAG 30
basic tape motion test, diagnostic routine EEA2 OIAG 500
BCPH
See buffer channel pOinter high register
BCPL

o

See buffer channel pOinter low register
BCSE
See buffer channel status and error register
BCSS
See buffer channel SARS register

BooO
See buffer diagnostic 0 register
B001
See buffer diagnostic 1 register
BOPH
See buffer device pOinter high register
BDPL
See buffer device pOinter low register
BOSE
See buffer device status and error register
beginning-of-tape sense bit SENSE 110
bill of material level determination procedure CARR-DR 9, CARR-CU 9
block diagram
control unit theory INTRO 15
dual control unit subsystem, theory INTRO 35
single control unit subsystem, theory INTRO 25
tape unit theory INTRO 45
block 10 position indicator for error recovery sense bit SENSE 110
blower assembly 1 and 2, control unit
removal and replacement CARR-CU 1500
blower assembly, drive
location LOC 120
location,50 Hz LOC 115
location,60 Hz LOC 110
removal and replacement CARR-DR 200, CARR-DR 205
blower assembly, tape unit power supply
removal and replacement, 50 Hz CARR-DR 718
removal and replacement, 60 Hz CARR-DR 710
board and cable Interconnection failures EAD 5000
branch circuits CB check INST 6, I NST 306
buffer (local/remote) communication path from channel
adapter OPER 140
buffer adapter card
location LOC 15
operation OPER 20
removal and replacement CARR-CU 1110
buffer adapter, cable group from channel adapter FSI 200
buffer area clocks EAD 20
buffer channel SARS (BCSS) bit definitions DF 20
buffer channel status and error register (BCSE) bit definitions DF 15
buffer control card
clocks EAD 20
location Lac 15
operation OPER 20
removal and replacement CARR-CU 1110
buffer control external registers DF 5
buffer device pointer high register (BDPH) bit definitions DF 30
buffer device pointer low register (BDPL) description DF 30
buffer device status and error register (BOSE) bit definitions OF 20
buffer diagnostic 0 (8000) bit definitions DF 25
buffer diagnostic 1 register (BOG1) bit definitions DF 25
buffer memory reference CARR-CU 7
buffer page 0, 1,2, and 3, MD support diskette channel RAM
display SDISK 116
buffer registers
buffer channel pOinter high register (BCPH) OF 15
buffer channel pOinter low register (BCPL) DF 15
buffer channel SARS register (BCSS) DF 20
buffer channel status and error register (BCSE) DF 15
buffer device pOinter high register (BOPH) DF 30
buffer device pOinter low register (BDPL) DF 30
buffer device status and error register (BOSE) DF 20
buffer diagnostic 0 legister (BOC..o) DF 25

IBM Conf idential

o

o

buffer diagnostic 1 register (B001) DF 25
buffer wrap register (BWRP) DF 30
buffer storage cards
location LOC 15
removal and replacement CARR-CU 1110
buffer storage operation OPER 20
buffer wrap register (BWRP) bit definitions OF 30
buffer, data
controls test, diagnostic I outine EE33 DIAG 110
data path test, diagnostic routine EE32 DIAG 100
introduction INTRO 20
operation OPER 20
buffered write mode INTRO 22,OPER 100
buffers 0 and 1, MD support diskette status store display SOISK 121
bundled lines, how to read graphic format LGND 70
bus and control lines, graphic symbol LGND 5
bus and tag wrap, channel wrap blocks illustration PLAN 6
bus connectors location, control unit read/write LOC 25, LOC 30
bus in line operation, channel to control unit interface OPER 190
bus interconnection checks CARR-DR 3-3
bus out check sense bit SENSE 110
bus out line operation, channel to control unit interface OPER 190
bus problems, support troubleshooting EAD S010
bus shoe cards
locations Lac 40, Lac 45
removals and replacements CARR-CU 1360
buses, MD support diskette control unit scan rings SDISK 131
busy status bit SENSE 205
BWRP
See buffer wrap register

cable
ac power distribution
removal and replacement CARR-DR 765
after using the fault symptom index FSI 2
checking device interconnections CARR-DR Cl "I
connectors
dual control unit locations LOC 25, LOC 30
from and to, cable group list r-SI 200
control unit
power, connecting INST 60, INST 360
removal and replacement C.ARR-CU 150
control unit subsystem diagrams EAD 5010, EAD 5030
dc power distribution
internal locations, drive LOC 140
removal and replacement CARR-DR 790, CARR-DR 794,
CARR-DR 797, CARR-DR 800, CARR-DR 805
drive
read adapter Incation LOC 145
tach sensor location LOC 155
write adapter location Lac 150
groups, listing of FSI 200
110, installation INST 110, INST 410
Installing adapter cable assembly, part number 8576623 or
8576624 INST 500
interconnection failures, troubleshooting EAD 5000
location chart, tape unit CARR-DR 491
message display dc power
removal and replacement CARR-DR 900, CARR-DR 905
power LOC 170
signal Lac 170
table, cable groups FSI 201
tachometer sensor
removal and replacement CARR-DR 810, CARR-DR 815

INDEX 1

()

o

o

o

o

,f)

()

o

o

Index

o

o

tape unit
removal and replacement CARR-DR 490
cable harness, tape unit thermal switch
I emoval and replacement CARR-DR 830
removal and replacement (end tape unit) CARR-DR 835
removal and repla(;ement (not end tape unit) CARR-DR 833
CAE
See channel adapter error register
call deferred, MD main menu option description MD 50
card
loader control CARR-DR 2810, Lex:: 171
card, logic
control unit
removal and replacement CARR-CU 1110
drive
removals and replacements CARR-DR 640
location charts, how to read graphic format LGND 60
location identification LOC 10
plug liSts, how to read graphic format LGND 60
CARR-CU section introduction· CARR-CU 1-9
CARR-DR section introduction CARR-DR 1-9
cartridge failure determination procedure CART 30
cartridge in stack sensor removal and replacement CARR-DR 2910
cartridge latch
assembly
location LOC 100
removal and replacement CARR-DR 80
solenoid
location LOC 100
removal and replacement CARR-DR 20
cartridge latched sensor
adjustment CARR-DR 110
Introduction INTRO 51
location Lac 100
remnval and replacement CARR-DR 110
cartridge loader, automatic INSP 56, INSP 156, LGND 46, LG'ND 47,
LGND 48, PANEL 40
cartridge present sensor
Introduction INTRO 51
location Lac 100
removal and replacement CARR-DR 100
cartridge staged sensor CARR-DR 29:m
cartridge, magnetic tape
about CARR-DR 2320
clutch tool Illustration PLAN 6
condition when unable to remove cartridge from drive
how to identify CART 10
leader block and threader pin at cartridge latch
assembly CART 10-3
leader block and threader pin in the machine reel
hub CART 10-2
leader block and threader pin ~topped in the tape
p:1tl1 CART 10-2
leader block separated, example CART 10-1
tape pulled out, example C/\RT 10-1
description CART 5, INTRO 10
magnetic tape attachment procedure CART 30
lecording media characteristics INTRO 5
removal by hand CART 10
CAS
See channel adapter status register
CCA
See channel card register
CCC
See channel card control register
cd.card
center tape guide
removal and replacement CARR-DR 2310
CER

3480 MI

EC A57723

©Coryrighl IBM Corp. 1982. 19~9. All Rights Rpsprvpd

o

o

o

See channel error reaister
channel adapter
area clocks EAD 10
cable groups FSI 200
cards
clocks EAD 10
locations Lac 15
removals and replacements CARR-CU 1110
switch locations Lac 50
code, sense bits SENSE 110
communications OPER 15
data handling area OPER 15
description INTRO 30
error register (CAE) OF 33
function test DIAG 320
interrupt register, MD support diskette channel RAM
display SDISK 116
multiple channel adapters failing EAD 5007
oscilloscope information EAD 5008
status register (CAS) OF 35
status, MD support diskette channel RAM display SDISK 116
tags, MD support diskette channel RAM display SDISK 116
to buffer (local/remote) communication path OPER 140
to buffer failures, troubleshooting guide EAD 5007
to status store communication path OPER 140
to status store interconnection EAD 5006
channel adapters, setting jumpers for on !,·,e dr. power
supply CARR-GU 1450
channel address
iI'formation chart for setting INST 40, INST 340
switch
cable group FSI 200
description PANEL 10
removal and replacement CARR-Cl! 1970
channel bus cable group FSI 200
channel card address register layout OPER 215
channel card control register (CCC) OF 35
channel card control register layout OPER 215
channel card register (CCA) OF 35
channel commands
assign OPER 160
backspace block OPER 160
backspace file OPER 160
control access OPER 160
data security erase OPER 165
description of operation OPER 150
erase gap OPER 165
forward space block OPER 165
forward space file OPER 165
Introduction INTRO 55
load display OPER 165
locate block OPER 165
mode set OPER 165
no-operation (NOP) OPER 165
read backward OPER 170
read block lOOPER 170
read buffer OPER 170
read buffered log OPER 175
read forward OPER 175
rewind OPER 175
rewind unload OPER 175
sense OPER 175
sense lOOPER 175
sense path group lOOPER 175
set path group lOOPER 175
summary INTRO 55, OPER 155
suspend multipath reconnection OPER 175
synchronize OPER 180

·0

o

test I/O OPER 180
unassign OPER 180
write OPER 180
write tape mark OPER 180
channel configuration switch location(s) Lex:: 50
channel data register layout OPER 215
channel end status bit SENSE 205
channel error register bit definition OF 35
channel errors, sense error history table OF 145
channel initial selection OPER 60
channel interface OPER 15
channel Interface block multiplex operation without reconnection for
command retry EAD 12
channel interface block multiplex operation without reconnection for
device end EAD 11
channel interface initial selection from an SIO or TIO command EAD 11
channel interface optional feature, additional INTRO 30
channel Interface wrap test, diagnostic routine EE62 DIAG 300
channel RAM display diagram, MD support diskette SDISK 115
channel request register bit definitions OF 40
channel tag cable group FSI 200
channel to control unit interface lines descriptions OPER 190
channel wrap blocks, bus and tag wrap (illustration o~ PLAN 6
channel wrap test, installation INST 100, INST 400
characteristics, operating INTRO 5
characters, message display PANEL 30
checking read/write
offline checkout, dual control unit INST 76, INST 376
offline checkout, single control unit INST 72, INST 372
checking the addresses
offline checkout, dual control unit INST 76, INST 376
offline checkout, single control unit INST 72, INST 372
checking the head connectors CARR-DR 130
checking the Initial microprogram load
offline checkout, dual control unit subsystem INST 83, INST 383
offline checkout, single control unit INST 74, INST 374
checking the switches
offline checkout, dual control unit INST 76, INST 78, INST 376,
INST 378
offline checkout, single control unit INST 70, INST 370
checks
control unit power supply jumpers, installation INST 55, INST 355
file protect switch CARR-DR 90
offline checkout for a dual control unit subsystem INST 76, INST 78,
INST 376, INST 378
offline checkout for a single control unit subsystem INST 70, INST 72,
INST 370, INST 372
pneumatic PNEU 30, PNEU 130
pre-Installation INST 4, INST 304
safety INST 6, INST 306
tape litter CARR-DR 2160
tape unit power supply jumpers, il!stallation INST 56, INST 356
CHK 1 errors OPER 70
CHK 2 errors OPER 70
CHK 46 air pressure loss analysis
circuit breaker
control unit
locations Lac 35
terminals Lac 65
safety checks INST 6, INST 306
tape unit ac power CB
location LOC 70, Lac 75
panel PANEL 14, PANEL 15
terminals Lac 65
clamping procedure for the plenum supply hose CARR-DR 3-1
cleaner block
cleaning CARR-OR 130
location Lac 100

IBM Con! idential

o

o

removal and replacement CARR-DR 1610
cleaner vacuum hose
removal and replacement CAh'i~·DR 470
cleaning
cleaner block CARR-DR 130
decoupler CARR-DR 130
tape head guide assembly
manually CARR-DR 130
using the cleaning cartridge PLAN 6
clock
timing chart, control storage EAD 7
to and from the maintenance adapter EAD 70
to channel adapters EAD 10
to status store EAD 10
to the adapter card EAD 80
to the buffer control card EAD 20
to the drive-adapter card EAD 40
to the microprocessor card EAD 6
to the read clock and format card EAD 50
to the read detect cards EAD 30, EAD 50
to the read ECCICORR card EAD 50
to the read skew buffer cards EAD 50
to the status store basic card EAD 60
to the status store communication card EAD 60
to the write data card EAD 30
XR bus and control EAD 8
clutch tool for releaSing the cartridge clutch, illustration of PLAN 6
command out line operation, ct,annel to control unit interface OPER 190
command reject sense bit SENSE 110
command status table (CST) OF 90
common stop addresses, diagnostics DIAG 6
common stop addresses, support diagnostics DIAG 6
communication cable, dual control unit
installing INST 30, INST 330
introduction INTRO 40
completion report, inspection INSP 60,INSP 160
compliant guide, read/write head, removal and
replacement CARR-DR 2770
compression spring
removal and replacement CARR-DR 180
condition code 3/no path available message format MSG 10
configurations
control unit to control unit communications OPER 145
diagram, control unit to control unit communication OPER 145
dual control unit OPER 140
single control unit OPER 135
status store to status store communication path OPER 145
configure maintenance device ~'JPport diskette INST 90, INST 390
connecting
bus and tag cables CARR-CU 1360
control unit power cable INST 50, INST 360
dual control unit communinJtions cable INST 30, INST 330
MD MD 40
connecting and disconnecting the tag and bus cables CARR-CU 1360
connectors, graphic symbol LGND 5
control
lines, graphic symbol LGND 5
options, diagnostic DIAG 6
control access command OPER 160
control card removal and replacement, loader CARR-DR 2810
control card, buffer
clocks EAD 20
location Lex:: 15
operation OPER 20
removal and replacement CARR-CU 1110
control card, loader Lex:: 171
control lines, graphic symbol LGND 5
control storage

INDEX 2

o

o

o

o

o

o

()

o

o

o

Index

o

o

array card
location LOC 15
removal and replacement CARR-CU 1110
clocks timing chart EAD 7
display/alter, MD support diskette SDISK 110
introduction INTRO 20
tables and logs
device operations table (DOT) OF 120
diagnostic hardware error log (DGHELO) OF 117
path group 10 table (PGT) OF 140
path group map (PGM) OF 135
sense error history table (SNERRH) OF 145
control storage to drive interconnection OPER 230
control store card
location LOC 15
removal and replacement CARR-CU 1110
control unit
+5 V dc (J5 through J12) locations, dc power supply LOC 35
+5 V dc distribution diagram PWR 42
+8.5 Vdc distribution diagram PWR 48
-5 V dc distribution diagram PWR 46
ac fuse 1
location LOC 55, LOC 60
removal and replacement CARR-CU 1465
ac input and output locations, dc power supply LOC 35
ac power supply
grounding diagram INSP 65,INSP 165
local mode diagram PWR 36
location LOC 55, LOC 60
overview diagram PWR 32
panel description PWR 15
power off and on procedures CARR-GU 6
primary Inspection INSP 4O,INSP 140
rernote mode diagram PWR 38
50 Hz except Japan LOC 60
ac power to gate cable
:!')moval and replacement CARR-CU 1770
additional channel interface optional feature INTRO 30
addressing INTRO 10
basic diagnostics test, how to run DIAG 30
bill of material level determination procedure CARR-CU 9
blower assembly 1 and 2
locati on LOC 25, LOC 30
removal and replacement CARR-CLI 1500
buffer description OPER 20
cable connectors (dual control unit) i')cations LOC 2<;, LOC 30
cable groups listing FSI 200
cable location listing CARR-CU 157
card locations identification LOC 10
changing the addresses PANEL 12
channel adapter INTRO 3O,OPER 15
channel adapters installed sense byte SENSE 160
channel address switches
cable group FSI 200
locations LOC 50
channel interface OPER 15
circuit breakers location, dc rower sur:-1y LOC 35
clocl::; EAD 5
configurations
dual control unit OPER 140
Single control unit OPER 135
control OPER 30
control functional areas OPER 30
control unit to drive bus out driver wrap test, diagnostic routine
EE.l2 DIAG 150
covers
front cover adjustment CARR-CU 2-2. CARR-CU 2-4
removals CARR-CU 2-1, CARR-CU 2-3
replacements CARR-CU 2-2, CARR-CU 2-4

3480 MI

EC A57723

~Coryrighl rBM Corp. 1982. 1989. All RighlS Rosprvpd

o

o

o

o

CUO/CU1 switch
cable group FSI 200
description PANEL 10
data buffer INTRO 20, OPER 20
data now diagram OPER 10
data writing modes
buffered write INTRO 22
tape write INTRO 22
dc power supply
control diagram PWR 50
indicator location LOC 50
inspection INSP 45,INSP 145
location LOC 35
overview diagram PVVR 34
voltage checking without dc test tool PWR 10
voltage jumper installation CARR-CU 1450
diagram INTRO 15
dimensions INTRO 5
diskette drive PANEL 10
drive adapter INTRO 20, INTRO 30
dual control unit communications cable, connecting INST 30,
INST 330
enable/disable switches
cable group FSI 200
description PANEL 10
end status bit SENSE 205
equipment checks sense byte SENSE 170
error ctlecking OPER 30
errors, sense error history table OF 145
external registers, MD support diskette register
display/alter SDISK 126
features sense byte SENSE 160
functional area description OPER 15
functional test routine descri ption, OLT PLAN 60
functions INTRO 15
fuse location, dc power supply LOC 35
hardware level sense bits SENSE 160, SENSE 190
I/O cable installation INST 110. INST 410
I/O tailgate connector assembly location LOC 40, LOC 45
10 sense bit SENSE 110
IML procedure PANEL 7
IMLswitch
cable group FSI 200
description PANEL 10
initial selection description and tilning chart OPER 185
inside inspection INSP 35, INSP 135
inside inspection, miscellaneous INSP 55, INSP 155
insta"atlon INST 10, INST 310
introduction INTRO 15
logic board
card locations LOC 15
top card connectors LOC 20
logic gate terminal strips location LOC 25, LOC 30
mainline circuit breaker (CB1) PWR 15
maintenance adapter INTRO 20,OPER 30
maintenance adapter registers OPER 30
MD connector location LOC 50
MD serializer/deserializer OPER 30
MD/control unit connection determination START 401, START 420
microcode EC level sense byte SENSE 160
microcode error sense bytes SENSE 140
microprocessor/control storage INTRO 20
mode switches locations LOC 50
normal/test switch
cable group FSI 200
description PANEL 10
online/offline switch
cable group FSI 200

description PANEL 10
operations table (CUT) OF 105
operator panel
removal and replacement CARR-CU 1420
operator panel locations LOC 50
operator setup panel locations LOC 50
output current selection (+5 V dc) location, dc power supply LOC 35
outside inspection INSP 15,INSP 115
over-current protection, circuit breakers location LOC 35
parts definitions and locations LGND 15
power
cable, connecting INST 50, INST 360
Introduction INTRO 20
Jumper checks, Insta"ation INST 55, INST 355
mode switch location LOC 50
operation OPER 30
switch location LOC 50
voltage tolerance table PWR 20
power-on-reseVunder-voltage detector OPER 30
read
cards OPER 25
control INTRO 20
data bus INTRO 30
read/write bus connectors location LOC 25, LOC 30
reading data INTRO 22
remove/replace procedures by FRU number CARR-CU 1
scan rings diagram, MD support diskette SDISK 130
serial number high order digit sense bits SENSE 160, SENSE 190
serial number location LOC 25, LOC 30
serial number low order sense bytes SENSE 160, SENSE 190
service switch assembly
removal and replacement CARR-CU 1620
setting the addresses INST 40, INST 340, PANEL 12
status store OPER 30
status store/channel adapter communications OPER 30
status store/status store communication INTRO 20
switch panel printed circuit board
removal and replacement CARR-CU 1410
switches and indicators PANEL 10
test plug data locations, dc power supply LOC 35
test plug location, dc power supply LOC 35
thermal SWitch assembly location LOC 25, LOC 30
to control unit communications OPER 145
to drive bus and tag test, diagnostic routine EE43 DIAG 160
to drive operation OPER 185
to drive sequences
alert sequence from the drive to the control unit EAD 42
data transfer sequence between the control unit and the drive and
WTM, write erase gap sequence EAD 43
Initial selection sequence from the control unit to the
drive EAD 41
sense control transfer EAD 44
serial sequence drive interconnections EAD 44
to drive serial test, diagnostic routine EE44 DIAG 170
to drive, write operation OPER 187
top card connectors locations LOC 20
troubleshooting guide, general EAD 5050
T1 ac voltage taps location, dc power supply LOC 35
unit emergency power off cable (UEPO),lnsta"ing INST 120,
INST 420
unit emergency power switch location LOC 50
unit emergency switch location LOC 50
voltage regulator OPER 30
write OPER 20
write data flow INTRO 20
writing data INTRO 22
control unit offline verification procedure CARR-CU 5
controlling support diagnostics DIAG 5

IBM Con! idential

o

o

uOex

3

controls and data, timing chart OPER 230
convenience outlet
+ 24 V control voltage diagram PWR 40
control unit ac power supply panel PWR 1S
jumper checks INST 55, INST 355
location, control unit ac power supply LOC 55, LOC 60
MAP PWR 150-1
convoluted bellows
removal and replacement CARR-DR 2230
corrective action, predictive maintenance MSG 350
coupler assembly
covers
control unit
front cover adjustment CARR-CU 2-2, CARR-CU 2-4
removals CARR-CU 2-1, CARR-CU 2-3
replacements CARR-CU 2-2, CARR-CU 2-4
drive, removal and replacement CARR-DR 2-5
drive, top, removal and replacement CARR-DR 2-8
tape unit
front cover adjustment CARR-DR 2-2, CARR-DR 2-4
removals CARR-DR 2-1, CARR-DR 2-3
replacements CARR-OR 2-2, CARR-DR 2-4
criteria read and write data checks sense bytes SENSE 180
cross-reference tables
external register address
buffer control card OF 5
drive adapter card OF 5
maintenance adapter card OF 5
microprocessor card OF 10
read data flow and read control card OF 10
status store card OF 10
write data flow card OF 10
XRA value to register name OF 12
CRR
See channel request register
CST
See command status lable
CUT
See control unit operations table
CUo/CU1 switch description PANEL 10

data analysis, support maintenance package SPROC 2
data buffer
controls test, diagnostic routine EE33 DIAG 110
data path test, diagnostiC routine EE32 DIAG 100
introduction INTRO 20
operation OPER 20
data byte count sense byte SENSE 160
data byte transfer, mainter,ance adapter card to microprocessor
card EAD 71
data card, write
clocks EAD 30
location LOC 15
removal and replacement CARR-CU 1110
data channel path operating characteristics INTRO 5
data check sense bit SENSE 110
data fields OF 3
data flow diagram, read OPER 95
data flow/error detection diagram OPER 75
data flow/error detection external registers OPER 65
data handling functional areas, description of OPER 15
data in line operation, channel to control unit interface OPER 190
data movement, description OPER 15
data out line operation, channel to control unit interface OPER 190

INDEX 3

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

Index

o

o

data record format, tape OPER 85
data security erase command OPER 165
data table or array display, MD support diskette SDISK 110
data that can be available, support maintenance package SPROC 2
data transfer sequence between the control unit and the drive and WTM,
write erase gap sequence EAD 43
data, moving OPER 65
DC load box (mayor may not be present) LOC 35, PWR 42
dc power supply
control unit
connector locations LOC 35
dc power complete LED, ac power supply panel LOC 55,
LOC 60, PWR 15
diagnostic MAP 400 PWR 400-1
Jumpers, checking INST SS, INST 355
power indicator description PANEL 10
power indicator location LOC 50
removal and replacement CARR-CU 1450
safety inspection INSP 45, INSP 145
voltage tolerance tables PWR 20
diagram, control unit PWR 50
locations LOC 35
overview diagram PWR 34
tape unit
connector locations LOC 80, LOC 90
locations LOC 80, LOC 90
removal and replacement CARR-DR 950, CARR-DR 955
safety inspection INSP 32, INSP 132
TBcable
removal and replacement CARR-CU 1600
test tool
description PLAN 5
how to use without control unit PWR 10
how to use without tape unit PWR 'I}
verification procedure PWR 10
verification procedure PWR 12
DCR
See device control register
DDR
See dynamic device reconfiguration facility
decoupler
assembly
location LOC 100
removal and replacement CARR-DR 120
cleaning CARR-DR 130
pressure hose
removal and replacement CARR-DR 420
vacuum hose
removal and replacement CARR-DR 430
depth, control unit and tape unit INTRO 5
rj",scri ption
adapter card OPER 40
basic control unit test, error displays DIAG 32
basic control unit test, how to run DIAG 30
basic tape motion test, diagnostic routine EEA2 DIAG 500
buffer adapter card OPER 20
buffer control card OPER 20
buffer storage OPER 20
buffered read data now OPER 90
buffered write mode OPER 100
cable group list FSI 200
channel adapter OPER 15
channel adapter function test, diagnostic routine EE64 DIAG 320
channel adapter/buffer communications OPER 15
channel adapter/status store communications OPER 15
channel commands
assign OPER 160
backspace block OPER 160
backspace file OPER 160

3480 MI
© CopyriaM IBM

a

EC A57723
Corp. 1982, 1989. All Rights R~.. rv.d

o

o

o

o

control access OPER 160
data security erase OPER 165
erase gap OPER 165
forward space block OPER 165
forward space file OPER 165
load display OrER 165
locate block OPER 165
mode set OPER 165
no-operation (NOP) OPER 165
read bac,",ward OPER 170
read block lOOPER 170
read buffer OPER 170
read buffered log OPER 175
read forward OPER 175
rewind OPER 175
rewind unload OPER 175
sense OPER 175
sense lOOPER 175
sense path group lOOPER 175
set path group ID OPER 175
suspend multi path reconnect ion OPER 175
synchronize OPER 180
test I/O OPER 180
unassign OPER 180
write OPER 180
write tape mark OPER 180
channel initial selection OPER 60
channel interface OPER 15
channp.1 interface wrap test, diagnostic routine EE62 DIAG 300
control unit drive to drive seriai test, diagnostic routine
EE44 DIAG 170
control unit functional areas OPF.R 15
control unit functional test routine, OLT PLAN 60
control unit to drive bus and tag test, routi ne EE43 DIAG 160
control, control unit OPER 30
data buffer
controls test, diagnostic routine EE33 DIAG 110
data path test, diagnostic routine EE32 DIAG 100
description OPER 20
diagnostics, subsystem DIAG 2
digital servo card OPER 40
drive status bits 0-15 OF 150
error checking, control unit OPER 30
external register bus addressing and data pattern test, diagnostic
routine EE85 DiAG 400
fault symptom index FSI 2
FRU code summary report, EREP MSG 100
identification code introduction, diagnostic DIAG 2
initial microprogram load (IML) OPER 60
initial selection, control unit to drive operation OPER 185
interrupt level test, diagnostic routine EE13 DIAG SS
logical components of the tape unit OPER 40
loop write to read
description OPER 110
long test, diagnostic routine EE54 DIAG 220
short pattern test, routine EE52 DIAG 200
short timing test, diagnostic routine EE53 DIAG 218
loose wrap test, tape OPER SS
maintenance adapter OPER 30
maintenance device MD 10
maintenance information description by volume PLAN 10, PLAN 11
MD serializer/deserializer OPER 30
message display OPER 40,OPER 130
motion control OPER 130
OBR edit report, ERE? MSG 100
operator information message error code MSG 15
parallel/serial interconnection OPER 130
pathing commands test routine, OLT PLAN 60

o

permanent error summary, ERE? MSG 100
pneumatic supply OPER 45
positioning, motion control OPER 130
power amplifier board OPER 40
power overview
control unit OPER 30
tape unit OPER 40
power sequencing OPER 60
power-on-reseUunder-voltage detector, control unit OPER 30
processor card OPER 40
processor external register test, diagnostic routine EE14 DIAG 65
read
clock/detect cards OPER 25
description OPER 25
drive data flow OPER 120
ECCICORR card OPER 25
preamplifier card OPER 40
skew cards OPER 25
read clock and format card OPER 25
read data flow OPER 90
read/write reliability test routine, OLT PLAN 60
registers, maintenance adapter OPER 30
scope loop utility, diagnostic routine-EEFO DIAG 600
sense data
byte 3, formats 19, 20, and 21 SENSE 115
bytes 0 through 2, formats 19, 20, and 21 SENSE 110
bytes 16 through 23, format 21 SEl-iSE 180
bytes 16 through 23, formats 19 and 20 SENSE 150
bytes 24 through 31, format 21 SENSE 190
bytes 24 through 31, formats 19 and 20 SENSE 160
bytes 4 through 7, formats 19, 20, and 21 SENSE 130
bytes 8 through 15, format 21 SENSE 170
bytes 8 through 15, formats 19 and 20 SENSE 140
description SENSE 100
sensor test, tape OPER SS
serial interconnection OPER 130
status byte
bit descriptions SENSE 205
overview SENSE 200
status store
channel adapter communications OPER 30
description, functional area OPER 30
order test, routi ne EE93 DIAG 460
updating RAM OPER 142
write/read RAM storage test, routine EE92 DIAG 450
subsystem exception report tape, EREP MSG 100
support diagnostic flow DIAG 5
support maintenance package SPROC 2
support procedure, MD SDISK 100
switches and indicators PANEL 14, PANEL 15
cable groups FSI 200
descriptions PANEL 10
tape drive
data flow OPER 120
thread-load tape OPER SS
transport description OPER 50
unwinding/unloading tape OPER 55
tape interchange test routine, OLT PLAN 60
tape-write-immediate mode OPER 100
temporary error summary, EREP MSG 100
voltage regulator, control unit OPER 30
volume statistiCS report, EREP MSG 100
write
data now card OPER 40
data now description OPER 100
description, functional area OPER 20
write data flow OPER 120
write/read exerciser, routine EEA3 DIAG 510

IBM Conf idential

o

o

write/read exerCiser, routine EEA4 DIAG 550
determining the sense data format SENSE 100
developing a fault symptom code, support procedure"l SPROC 3
device (drive)
assignment mask, MD support diskette status store
display SDISK 121
aSSignments, MD support diskette status store display SDISK 121
bus cable groups FSI 200
command, MD support di skette channel RAM display SDISK 116
condition, MD support diskette channel RAM display SDISK 116
control bus (DCB) bit definitions OF 40
control register (OCR) bit definitions OF 40
device level register (DLR) bit definitions OF 45
end status bit SENSE 205
interrupt register (DIR) bit definitions OF 45
intervention required message format MSG 10
online sense bit SENSE 110
operations table (DOT) OF 120
program nags, MD support diskette status store display SDISK 121
status/error register bit definitions OF 45
status, MD support diskette channel RAM display SDISK 116
status, MD support diskette status store display SDISK 121
tag register (DTR) bit definitions OF 50
device data bus
oscilloscope information EAD 5011
problems EAD 5010
troubleshooting EAD 5010, EAD 5011
device interconnection checks CARR-DR 3-3
DEVNO/CUA statistics summary report, EREP
example MSG 229
field definitions MSG 228
DGHELO
See diagnostic hardware error log
diagnostic hardWare error log (DGHELO) DF 117
diagnostics
basic control 1Jnit test
how to run DIAG 30
routine E010 description DIAG 2
basic tape motion test, routine EEA2 DIAG 500
channel adapter function test, routine EE64 DIAG 320
channel interface wrap test, routine EE62 DIAG 300
common stop addresses DIAG 6
control unit/drive
control unit to drive bus and tag test, routine EE43 DIAG 160
control unit to drive bus out driver wrap test, diagnostic routine
EE42 DIAG 150
control unit to drive serial test, routine EE44 DIAG 170
data buffer
controls test, routine EE33 DIAG 110
data path test, routine EE32 DIAG 100
drive command exerciser DIAG 720
error screens DIAG 6
external register bus addressing and data pattern test, routine
EE85 DIAG 400
identification code
introduction DIAG 2
table DIAG 3
interrupt level test, routine EE13 DIAG SS
introduction DIAG 2
long loop write to read test, routine EE54 DIAG 220
maintenance device/maintenance adapter diagnostic DIAG 20
processor
external register test, routine EE14 DIAG 65
function test, diagnostic routine EE12 DIAG 50
processor function test, routine EE12 DIAG 50
rouline descriptions DIAG 2
scope loop utility, routine EEFO DIAG 600
section descriptions DIAG 2

INDEX 4

o

o

o

()

o

o

o

o

o

o

o c o o o o c c c c o o c c o c c c c c c c c c

()

o

c o
INDEX 5

Index
short loop write to read
pattern test, routine EE52 DlAG 200
timing test, routine EE53 DlAG 218
status screen DIAG 6
status store
order test, routine EE93 DIAG 460
write/read RAM storage test, routine EE92 DIAG 450
support diagnostic
now description DlAG 5
running DlAG 5
write/read exerciser, routine EEA3 DlAG 510
write/read exerciser, routine EEA4 DIAG 5SO
diagram, read data flow OPER 95
digital servo card
Introduction INTRO 50
location LOC 130
digital servo card, logical components OPER 40
dimenSions, control unit and tape unit INTRO 5
DIR
See device I nterrupt register
disconnect in line operation, channel to control unit interface OPER 100
disconnecting tape units and control unit, relocate or discontinue
subsystem INST 180, INST 480
discontinue subsystem INST 140, INST 440
diskette drl ve
location LOC SO
operation OPER 220
removal and replacement CARR-CU 860
diskette drive, control unit panel PANEL 10
diskettes used without MD PLAN 5
diskettes, maintenance device MD 10
display FRUs, MD main menu option description MD SO
display maintenance adapter registers, MD support diskette
utilities SDISK 155
display subsystem configuration, MD support diskette SDISK 105
display, MD keyboard/display MD 20
distribution cable (Internal) locations, drive de LOC 140
DLR
See device, device level register
DOT

See device operations table
dot ORs of output lines, how to read graphic format LGND 75
drtve
adapter
description INTRO 30
diagram, single control unit subsystem overview INTRO 25
adapter card
clocks EAD 40
location LOC 15
removal and replacement CARR-CU 1180
setting switches CARR-CU 1189
switch setltng worksheet CARR-CU 1188
address SWitch
description PANEL 14, PANEL 15
location LOC 70, LOC 75
removal and replacement CARR-DR 1040, CARR-DR 1045
attachment, dual control units INTRO 40
blower assembly
location LOC 120
location, 50 Hz LOC 115
location,60Hz LOC 110
removal and replacement CARR-DR 200, CARR-DR 205
bus cable groups FSI 200
cables location chart CARR-DR 491
command codes sense bytes SENSE 1SO
command exerciser
commands [)lAG 720
control options DIAG 720
detailS DlAG 722

3480 MI

c

EC A57723

(OCOpy,ioht IBM Corp. 1882. t988. All Rights R.. eNed

diagram DIAG 721
error messages DIAG 720
Introduction DIAG 2
prompting screens DIAG 725
connector locations LOC 120
connector locations, SO Hz LOC 115
connector locations, 60 Hz LOC 110
covers removal and replacement CARR-DR 2-5
covers, top, removal and replacement CARR-OR 2-8
dc distribution cable (Internal I locations LOC 140
detected errors sense byte SENSE 100
drive power switch
description PANEL 14, PANEL 15
location LOC 70, LOC 75
removal and replacement CARR-DR 1040, CARR-DR 1045
ending operation procedure PANEL 5
error codes sense byte SENSE 1SO
error recovery procedures code, sense byte 8 SENSE 140
errors, sense error history table OF 145
external registers OF 155
features sense byte SENSE 160
flag 1 sense byte SENSE 150
how to operate PANEL 5
I nterconnecti ons
control unit subsystem cable diagrams EAD S010, EAD 5030
error descriptions EAD S010, EAD S030
troubleshooting guide, general EAD S010, EAD 5030
locations LOC 95
logic INTRO SO
model number sense byte SENSE 1SO
online/offline switch locations LOC 70, LOC 75
operator panel
description PANEL 14, PANEL 15
location LOC 70, LOC 75
removal and replacement CARR-DR 2-6
power off and on procedures CARR-DR 8
read adapter cables locations LOC 145
ready/not ready switch locations LOC 70, LOC 75
rewind switch locations LOC 70, LOC 75
setting the addresses PANEL 12
setting the logical address INST SO, INST 350
setting the physical addresses INST SO, INST 350
status bits 0-15 description OF 150
status/error register (DSE) OF 45
status, message display PANEL 30
switch panel
description PANEL 14, PANEL 15
location LOC 70, LOC 75
tach sensor cable locations LOC 155
thermal switch assembly
location LOC 130
removal and replacement CARR-OR 1100, CARR-DR 1105
top card connectors locations LOC 130
transport assembly INTRO 51
unload switch locations LOC 70, LOC 75
vary offline procedure PLAN 55
write adapter cables locations LOC 1SO
o and 1 locations LOC 70, LOC 75
drive control card
IntrodUction INTRO 50
removal and replacement CARR-DR 8SO
drive data now description OPER 120
drive display panel locations LOC 70, LOC 75
drive Interconnections, error descriptions EAD 5010, EAD 5030
drive to control storage Interconnection OPER 230
DSE
See device (drive) status/error register
DTR

See device tag register
dual control unit subsystem
cable connectors location LOC 25, LOC 30
cable group listing FSI 200
command sequence OPER 141
communication INTRO 40
connguratlon diagram OPER 141
diagram, theory INTRO 35
IML procedure PANEL 7
offline checkout INST 76, INST 78, INST 376, INST 378
running support diagnostics DlAG 5
setting control unit addresses INST 40, INST 340
updating status store RAM OPER 142
updating the RAM status byte OPER 142
writing a message Into address 80 and 83 OPER 142
dual control unit, error descriptions EAD 5050
dynamic device reconfiguratlon facility SENSE 120

EAO
Introduction EAD 3
EC compatibility problems, possible START 135
education
maintenance device MD 10
safety inspection INSP 10,INSP 110
education course, MO MD 10
emergency power switch location LOC 50
enable communication path signal line, MO to MA communication
path OPER 80
enable/disable switches description PANEL 10
end-a-call procedure PLAN 60
end-of-call actions, support procedures SPROC 4
ending drive operation procedure PANEL 5
ending sequence timing chart, device stop OPER 186
ending sequence, control unit to drive operation OPER 186
engineering change procedure PLAN 60
entry Into the fault symptom index FSI 2
environmental recording editing and printing program
analysis of EREP reports MSG 350
DEVNOICUA statistics summary report
example MSG 229
field definitions MSG 228
EREP analysis/predictive maintenance MSG 350
error code summary report
description MSG 100
example and field definitions (EREP 3.1.1) MSG 225
example and field definitions (EREP 3.2) MSG 226
OBR edit report
description MSG 100
example MSG 230
field definitions MSG 231
permanent error summary
description MSG 100
example MSG 205
field definitions MSG 206
permanent/recovered error summary
example (EREP 3.2) MSG 220
field definitions (EREP 3.2) MSG 221
subsystem error report
description MSG 100
example MSG 200
field definitions MSG 201
limit controls MSG 105
tape report description MSG 100
temporary error summary

description MSG 100
example (EREP 3.1.11 MSG 210
example (EREP 3.21 MSG 212
neld definitions (EREP 3_1_1) MSG 211
neld definitions (EREP 3.2) MSG 213
volume statistiCS report
desCription MSG 100
example MSG 215
neld definitions MSG 216
limit controls MSG 105
equipment check sense bit SENSE 110
ERA and (ERAH)
See error register A bit dennltions
erase gap command OPER 165
erase gap counts sense byte SENSE 100
ERB and (ERBH)
See error register B bit definitions
EREP
See environmental recording editing and printing program
ERP
See error recovery procedures, drive (sense byte 8)
error analysis diagram logic blockS, how to read graphic
symbols LGND 55
error checking, control unit OPER 30
error checking, MD to MA communication path OPER 80
error code summary report, EREP
description MSG 100
example and neld definitions (EREP 3.1.1) MSG 225
example and field definitions (EREP 3.2) MSG 226
error codes
MDsupport diskette status store display SDISK 121
sense byte 3, error recovery procedures action
description SENSE 120
table SENSE 115
error description list, system console messages MSG 20
error indicatordescriplion PANEL 10
error match value, MD support diskette utilities, trace/match
control SDISK 146
error path isolation START 400
error recovery procedures, drtve (sense byte 8) SENSE 140
error register A (ERA) and (ERAH) bit definitions DF 50
error register B (ERB) and (ERBH) bit definitions DF 55
error registers, MD support diskette register display/alter SDISK 126
error screens, support diagnostics DIAG 6
error, MD support diskette control unit scan rings SDISK 131
error, message display PANEL 30
errors, XR detected OPER 70
ESO grounding wrist strap for electrostatiC discharge PLAN 6
examples, microprocessor to status store to channel adapter
communication OPER 205
exception report tape, subsystem
description MSG 100
example MSG 200
field definitions MSG 201
limit controls MSG 105
external drive address sense bits SENSE 160
external load resistor panel
removal and replacement CARR-DR 360
removal and replacement, 50 Hz CARR-DR 368
removal and replacement. 60 Hz CARR-DR 365
external register bus addressing and data pattern test, diagnostic routine
EE85 DlAG 400
external registers
address cross-reference tables, description of OF 3
addressing OPER 65
addressing, description of OF 3
bit definitions
buffer channel SARS regls.ter (BCSS) OF 20

INDEX 5

INDEX 6

Index
scope lOOp utility, routine EEFO OIAG &>0
short loop write to read pattern test. routine EE52 DlAG 200
short loop write to read timing test, routine EE53 OIAG 218
status store order test, routine EE93 OIAG 48)
wrtte/read exerciser, routine EEA3 OIAG 510
wrtte/read exerciser, routine EEA4 OIAG 550
write/read RAM storage test, routine EE92 OIAG 450
failures, procedure for Intermittent PLAN 55
fault symptom code
actions to take START 325
caused by other than 3480 hardware failures START 100
determining START 300
fault symptom code, developing a SPROC 3
faull symptom Index
aller using FSI 2
cable group list, using the FSI 200
description of contents FSI 2
table FSI3
features, optional INTRO 5
feed assembly LOC 171
feed assembly removal and replacement CARR·OR 29SO
field wire net lists, how to read graphic format LGNO 80
file protect gauge PLAN 6
file protect sense bit SENSE 110
file protect swttch
adjustment CARR·DR ~
checlc CARR·OR 90
description CART 5
location LOC 9S
removal and replacement CARR·OR 90
file reel clutch descrtption CART 5
file reel motor
location LOC 105
removal and replacement CARR·OR 30
file reel tachometer (tach 2) Introcluction INTRa 51
final checkout
omine checkout, dual control unit subsystem INST 81, INST 381
omlne checkout, single control unit INST 74,INST 374
first tape unit In,...lIation INST 11, INST 311
fix message, MO MO 30
forced error logging MSG 411
forced error logging/permanent error summary reports
use of SOISK 145
format, sense data
_ description SENSE 100
format 19
bytes 16 through 23 description SENSE 150
bytes 24 through 31 descrtption SENSE 1&>
bytes 24 through 31, table SENSE 155
bytes 4 through 7, description SENSE 130
bytes 4 through 7, table SENSE 125
bytes 8 through 15 description SENSE 140
bytes 8 through 15. table SENSE 135
summary SENSE 110
format 20
bytes 16 through 23 description SENSE 150
bytes 24 through 31 description SENSE 1&>
bytes 2' through 31, table SENSE 155
bytes 4 through 7. description SENSE 130
bytes' through 7, table. SENSE 125
bytes 8 through 15 descripllon SENSE 140
bytes 8 thl ough 15, table SENSE 135
summary SENSE 110
format 21
bytes" through 7, description SENSE 130
bytes 4 thr ough 7. table SENSE 125

bUffer channel status and error register (BCSE) OF 15
buffer device pointer high register (BOPH) OF 30
buffer device status and error register (BOSE) OF 20
bufler diagnostic 0 register (BOGO) OF 25
buffer diagnostic 1 register (BOG1) OF 25
buffer wrap register (SWRP) OF 30
channel error register (CER) OF 35
channel request register (CRR) bit definitions OF 40
device status/error register (OSE) OF 45
error register A (ERA) and (ERAH) OF SO
error register B (ERB) and (ERBH) OF 55
elClernal register address register (XRA) OF 85
maintenance data In register (MOl) OF 55
maintenance data out register (MOO) OF &>
maintenance status byte register (MSB) OF &>
maintenance tag In register (MTI) OF &>
maintenance tag out register (MTO) OF 62
processor control register (PCR) OF 65
processor error register (PER) OF 65
processor reset register (PRR) OF 85
processor status register (PSR) OF 70
read control register (RCR) OF 70
read diagnostic control register (ROC) OF 70
read error register (RER) OF 75
read pattern register (RPR) OF 80
read residual count register (RRC) OF 80
read status register (RSR) OF 82
write control register (WeR) OF 82
buffer control card OF 5
data flow/error detection OPER 65
diagram, data flow/error detection OPER 75
drive adapter card OF 5
drive, description of OF 155
maintenance adapter card OF 5
maintenance control register (MCR) OF 55
maintenance data out register (MOO) OF &>
maintenance status byte register (MSB) OF &>
microprocessor card .OF 10
operation OPER 65
read data flow and read control card OF 10
status store OF 10
wrtte control register (WeR) OF 82
write data flow card OF 10
XRA value to register name cross-reference table OF 12
elClractor, card PLAN 5
E010 basic control unit tests, description OIAG 2

fall Indication, IML PANEL 7
failure IDs
basic tape motion test, routine EEA2 OIAG 500
channel adapter function test, routine EE64 OIAG 320
channel interface wrap test, routine EEB:! OIAG 300
control unit to drive bus and tag test, routine EE43 OIAG 1&>
control unit to drive bus out driver wrap test, diagnostic routine
EE42 OIAG 150
control unit to drive serial lest, routine EE44 OIAG 170
data buner controls routine EE33 OIAG 110
data buner data path test, routine EE32 OIAG 100
elClernal register bus addressing and data panern test, routine
EE85 OIAG 400
Interrupt le\l8l test, routine EE13 OIAG 55
long loop write to read test, routine EE54 OIAG 220
processor elClernal register test, routine EE14 OIAG 65
processor lunctlon test, routine EE12 OIAG 50

summary SENSE 110
format, tape OPER 85
format, tape data record OPER 85
forward space block command OPER 165
forward space lite command OPER 1155
from and to connectors, cable group list FSI 200
FRU listing CARR·DR 1·7
FRU listing by alphabetical sequence CARR-CU 1·8, CARR·DR 1·8
FRU number, cable group list FSI 200
FRU selection procedure CARR·DR 4
lunction test
channel adapter OfAG 320
processor OIAG SO
lunctlonal area external registers, description of OF 3
functions, desert ption of
control unit INTRa 15, OPER 15
tape unit INTRO 45
ruse (F1) LED, control unit ac power supply panel PWR 15
fuses
control unit
location, ac power supply LOC 55, LOC &>
locations, de power supply LOC 35
loader fuses CARR·DR 2880
removal and replacement CARR·DR 960, CARR-CU 1470
tape unit de power supply
locations LOC 80, LOC 90
!uses continue to blow, tape unit PWR 30

host response, message display PANEL 30
how MO messages are generated MO 30

VO bus tag Interposer cable LOC 45
VOcable Installallon INST 110, INST 410
110 tailgate connector assembly location LOC 40, LOC 45
Identification cocle table, diagnostic OIAG 3
Identlfier, system console message MSG 10
Identifying parts LGNO 10
IML
see Initial microprogram load (IMLI
IML diskette drive
see diskette drive
IML diskette drive, removal and replacement CARR-CU 880
IML switch descrtption PANEL 10
In stack sensor removal and replacement CARR·DR 2910
Indicator
attention OPER 240, PANEL 40
power PANEL 40
Indicators and swttches PANEL 10. PANEL 14, PANEL 15
Indicators, MO keyboard/display MO 20
Information message, MO MO 30
Initial microprogram load (IMLI
description INTRO 10
diskette, about CARR-CU 2250
operation OPER 60
procedure PANEL 7
wrttlng a message Into address 80 and 83 OPER 142
Initial microprogram load or power·on reset failure EAO 4000
Initial selection sequence from the control unit to the drtve EAO 41
Initial selection, control unit to drive operation OPER 185
inlet filter
location LOC 120
location, 50 Hz LOC 115
location, &> Hz LOC 110
removal and replacement CARR-DR 330, CARR·DR 335
Input stack assembly removal and replacement CARR-DR 2900
Input/output Instructions OPER 1SO
Inspection procedures
completion report INSP &>, INSP 1&>
control unit
Ie power supply INSP 40, INSP 65, INSP 140, INSP 165
de power supply INSP 45,INSP 145
Inside INSP 35, INSP 55, INSP 135, INSP 155
outside INSP 15,INSP 115
education INSP 10, INSP 110
general Instructions INSP 10,INSP 110
preparation INSP 15, INSP 115
tape unit
ac grounding diagram INSP 70,INSP 170
dc power supplies INSP 32,INSP 132
Inside INSP 2O,INSP 32, INSP 120, INSP 132
outside INSP 15,INSP 115
installation
adding tape units to an Installed subsystem INST 135, INST 435
additional tape units tNST 20, INST 320
analyzing drives with the MO INST 90
analyzing drives WIthout the MO INST ~
channel wrap test INST 100, INST 400
control unit INST 10, INST 310
dual control unit communications cable INST 30, INST 330
first tape unit INST 11, INST 311
overview chart INST 4, INST 304
radio frequency Interference frame pans and end plates INST 130

,.

gate fan cable, Control unit
removal and replacement CARR-CU 1650
gauge, pressure/vacuum PLAN 5
get operation timing chart, MOto MA communication path
glossary GLOSS 1
graphic symbols and lines LGNO 5
ground wire check, machine INST 6, INST 306
group number, cable group list FSI 200

OPER 81

hardware control unit Information sense byte SENSE 160, SENSE 190
hardware error code sense byte SENSE 1SO
hardware permanent error analysis MSG 370
hardware temporary errors MSG 410
head and guide assembly
checking the connectors CARR·OR 130
cleaning manually CARR·DR 130
cleaning without the cleaning cartridge PLAN 6
compliant guide, removal and replacement CARR·DR 2770
location LOC 100
removal and replacement CARR·OR 130
head tape guide
Ie"
removal and replacement CARR·DR 2280
right
removal and replacement CARR·DR 2290
height, control unit and tape unit INTRO 5
hex all, MO suppor1 dlskene status store display SO!SI( 121
hex display, MO suppor1 dlskene contrOl unit scan rings SOl51( 131
hOld O\J line operation, channel to contrOl unit Interlace OPER 1~ .
hose clamp tool lor air pressure hoses, lIIustralion 0( PLAN IS
hose, clamping the plenum supply CARR·DR 3-1

INDEX 6

3480 MI EC AS7724
Cl Copyrl,1II18M Corp. 1112, 1110

')

o

r,

o o

[)

{)

()

f)

o

~)

[J

u

~)

!J

-.;' ..

Index

o

o

radio frequency interference shield INST 430
reporting INST 131, INST 431
tools and test equipment INST 4, INST 304
installing adapter cable assembly part number 8576623 or
8576624 INST 500
integrated logic probe
procedure for using PLAN 55
interconnection checks, device CARR-DR 3-3
Interconnection sequence, serial OPER 188
interface assignments, MD support diskette status store
display SDISK 121
interlock spring
removal and replacement CARR-DR 190
Intermittent failures, procedure for PLAN 55
internal clocks on the write data card EAD 30
Interposer cable and connector
removal and replacement CARR-DR 2690
interrupt level test, diagnostic routine EE13 DlAG 55
interrupt, MD support diskette control unit scan rings SDISK 131
intervention required sense bit SENSE 110

jumper, power supply
checks, installation INST 55, INST 355
control unit ac power supply CARR-CU 1440
control unit dc power supply CARR-CU 1450
drive dc power supply CARR-DR 950, CARR-DR 9SS
J1-J2 connectors location, drive LOC 120
J1-J20 locations, control unit dc power supply LOC 35
J1-J4 connectors location, drive, 50 Hz LOC 115
J1-J4 connectors location, drive, 60 Hz LOC 110

keyboard/display, maintenance device
keys, graphic symbol LGND 5

MD 10, MD 20

latch interlock
removal and replacement CARR-DR 1270
latch spring
removal and replacement CARR-DR 160
LOT
See logical device table
leader block
description CART 5
replacement procedure CART 20
separated from tape, example CART 10-1
leader block and threader pin
at the cartridge latch assembly
cartridge removal procedure CART 16
example CART 10-3
in machine reel hub
cartridge removal procedure CART 12
example CART 10-2
stopped in tape path
cartridge removal procedure CART 14
example CART 10-2
leader block replacement kit PLAN 6

3480 MI

EC A57723

~Copyright IBM Corp. 1982. 19S8. All Righto R@......d

o

o

o

o

LED positions on the message display PANEL 30
lelt guide bearing hose
removal and replacement CARR-DR 450
lelt input rail assembly removal and replacement CARR-DR 2930
length, tape INTRO 5
limit controls, EREP MSG 105
lines, MDto/lrom MA communication path signal OPER 80
listing, FRU CARR-DR 1-7
load assembly CART 17, LOC 170
load assembly removal and replacement CARR-DR 2820
load balancing in a dual control unit subsystem OPER 140
load complete sensor removal and'replacement CARR-DR 2840
load display command OPER 165
load motor removal and replacement CARR-DR 2830
load resistor card (mayor may not be present) CARR-CU 2790
load time, tape transport INTRO 5
load/open switch, maintenance device MD 10
loader
automatic cartridge LGND 46, LGND 47, LGNO 48,OPER 240,
PANEL 40
control card LOC 171,OPER 240
control panel LOC 170
mechanical assembly LOC 171,OPER 240
loader control card removal and replacement CARR-DR 2810
loader fuses removal and replacement CARR-DR 2880
loader mechanical assembly CARR-DR 2850, LOC 171
loader operator panel removal and replacement CARR-DR 2980
loader signal cable removal and replacement CARR-DR 2860
loader, automatic cartridge INSP 56,INSP 156
loading tape OPER 55
loading the support diskette, MD SDISK 100
local mode diagram, control unit ac power PWR 36
local mode MAP 110, +24 V PWR 110-1
local power enable switch description PANEL 10
local/remote power panel
connectors J1 and J2 LOC 50
location LOC SO
removal and replacement CARR-CU 840
local/remote power SWitch PANEL 10
local/remote SWitch, location LOC 50
locate block command OPER 165
locate block function failed sense bit SENSE 110
locating parts in the 3480 documentation LGND 15
location
locations
cable group list FSI 200
control unit cables, listing CARR-CU 157
control unit logic boards and cards LOC 15
loader mechanical assembly LOC 170, LOC 171
logic board
card locations identification LOC 10
control unit
card locations LOC 15
removal and replacement, A1 CARR-CU 1390
removal and replacement, A2 CARR-CU 1400
layout LOC 5
pin locations LOC 5
voltage regulator card in 01A-A1 INTRO 20
02A-A1, drive
location LOC 130
removal and replacement CARR-OR sao
logic board layout pin side, tape unit LOC 135
logic card
control unit
removal and replacement CARR-CU 1110
drive
removals and replacements CARR-DR 640
location charts, how to read graphic format LGND 60

o

o

location identification LOC 10
plug liSts, how to read graphic format LGND 60
logic diagrams
dot ORs of output lines, how to read graphic format
example LGND 70
how to read graphis symbols LGND 55
layout description LGNO 60
logic pages, cable group list FSI 200
logic probe, integrated PLAN 5
logical address switch
cable connector location LOC 120
cable connector location, SO Hz LOC 115
cable connector location, 60 Hz LOC 110
setting INST SO, INST 350
logical block position sense bits SENSE 130
logical components of the tape unit OPER 40
logical device table (LOT) OF 125
logical pins, how to read graphic format LGND 70
logs
diagnostic hardware error log (DGHELO) OF 117
long loop write to read test DIAG 220
loop utility, scope DIAG 600
loop write to read
data now diagram OPER 115
description, data now OPER 110
long OPER 110
long test, routine EE54 DIAG 220
short OPER 110
short timing test, rou1ine EE53 DIAG 218
loose wrap test, tape OPER 55

LGND 75

MA
See maintenance adapter
machine ground wire check INST 6, INST 306
machine reel
assembly location LOC 100
flange, lower
removal and replacement CARR-DR 50
flange, upper
removal and replacement CARR-DR 540
hub
removal and replacement CARR-OR 610
motor and hub mount
location LOC 105
removal and replacement CARR-OR 40
tach sensor A
adjustment CARR-DR 40, CARR-DR 2250
Introduction INTRO 51
removal and replacement CARR-DR 2250
tach sensor B
adjustment CARR-DR 40, CARR-DR 2260
Introduction INTRO 51
removal and replacement CARR-DR 2260
tape guide
removal and replacement CARR-OR 2270
magnetic tape
attachment to cartridge procedure CART 30
conditions when unable to remove cartridge from drive
how to identify CART 10
leader block and threader pin at cartridge latch
assembly CART 10-3
leader block and threader pin in the machine reel
hub CART 10-2

IBM Conr idential

o

leader block and threader pin stopped in the tape
path CART 10-2
leader block separated, example CART 10-1
pulled out of cartridge, example CART 10-1
drive clocks EAD 80
pulled out of cartridge, example CART 10-1
magnetic tape reattachment to cartridge procedure CART 30
mainline circuit breaker (CB1), control unit PWR 15
maintenance adapter
card
clocks EAD 70
location LOC 15
removal and replacement CARR-CU 1110
commands, MD support diskette utilities SDISK 160
external registers OF 5
introduction INTRO 20
operation OPER 30
registers
maintenance data in (MDI) DF 55
maintenance data ou1 (MOO) OF 60
maintenance status byte (MSB) OF 60
maintenance tag In (MTI) DF 60
maintenance tag out (MTO) OF 62
tolfrom MD communication OPER 80
maintenance control register (MCR) bit definitions OF 55
maintenance data in register (MOl) bit definitions DF 55
maintenance data out register (MOO) DF 60
maintenance device
See MO
maintenance device command byte transfer, maintenance adapter card to
microprocessor card EAD 71
maintenance device to maintenance adapter timing EAD 71
maintenance information description by volume PLAN 10, PLAN 11
maintenance package summary
description PLAN 25
diagram PLAN 30
product support diagram PLAN 50
maintenance package, support SPROC 2
maintenance starting point START 10
maintenance status byte register (MSB) OF 60
maintenance summary, 3480 PLAN 5
maintenance tag in register (MTI)
bit definitions OF 60
maintenance tag out register (MTO)
bit definitions DF 62
major bus lines, graphic symbol LGND 5
making the drive ready PANEL 5
manifold"in pressure hose
removal and replacement, 50 Hz CARR-DR 378
removal and replacement, 60 Hz CARR-DR 370
manifold-in vacuum hose assembly
removal and replacement, 50 Hz CARR-DR 388
removal and replacement, 60 Hz CARR-DR 380
MAPs, power
100, problem determination PWR 100-1
110, +24 V, local mode PWR 110-1
120, +24 V, remote mode PWR 120-1
130, +24 V control voltage PWR 130-1
1SO, convenience outlet PWR 150-1
190, power restart PWR 190-1
200, drive dc power (single drive) analysis procedure PWR 200-1
210, drive dc power (same symptom both drives) PWR 210-1
400, control unit dc power PWR 400-1
410, +1.7Vdcregulator,01A-A1-T2 PWR 410-1
420, control unit +5 Volt CB tripped PWR 420-1
430, control unit -5 Volt CB tripped PWR 430-1
440, control unit +8.5 Volt fuse blows PWR 440-1
marl< in line operation, channel to control unit interface OPER 190

INDEX 7

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

Index

o

o

mark out line operation, channel to control unit interface OPER 190
mask value, MO support diskette utilities, trace/match control SOISK 146
materials needed for inspection INSP 10, INSP 110
MCR
See maintenance control register
MO
analyzing drives with the MO INST 90
analyzing drives without the MO INST 390
as main maintenance tool PLAN 5
cable group to maintenance adapter FSI 200
configuring the support diskette INST 90, INST 390
connector location LOC 50
description MO 10
determining the control unit to MO connection START 401,
START 420
education course MO 10
how to use without the 3480 MO 40
internal adapter error detection OPER 80
keyboard/display
description and illustration MO 20
overview MD 10
menu options MO 50
messages MO 30, MO 32
reference key SOISK 131
serializer/deserializer OPER 30
to maintenance adapter communication path OPER 80
to maintenance adapter communication path error
checking OPER 80
to maintenance adapter communication path operations OPER 81
to maintenance adapter diagnostic OIAG 2, OIAG 20
to maintenance adapter timing EAO 71
MOl
See maintenance data in register

MOO
See maintenance data out register
mechanical assembly removal and replacement, loader CARR-DR 2850
rnecllanical assernbly, loader LOC l,O,OPER 240
menu, MD
message, example fAD 30
options list MO 50
message display
board
removal and replacement CARR-DR 600
board to switch board cable
removal and replacement CARR-DR 2130
cable
removal and replacement CARR-DR 2115
removal and replacement (message display to SL T
Panel) CARR-DR 2110
removal and replacement (SLT Panel to logic
board) CARR-f"lR 2113
connectors location, dri ve, 50 Hz LOC 115
connectors location, drive, 60 Hz LOC 110
de pow.. r c:able
removal and replact:'·',ent CARR-DR 900, CARR-DR 905
description OPER 40
description of messages PANEL 30
LED
description PANEL 14, PANEL 15
message formats, syslp.m console
condition code 31no path available MSG 10
device intervention required MSG 10
message identifier, system console MSG 10
messages, MO MO 30, MD 32
meter in line operation, channel to control unit interface OPER 190
microprocessor
card
location LOC 15
removal and replacement CARR-CU 1110

3480 MI

EC A57723

~CDrY';9ht IBM Corp. 1982. 19P9. All Rivhts Rpserv"d

&

o

o

o

o

clocks EAO 6
commands, MO support diskette utilities SOISK 155
control, MO support diskette utilities SOISK 140, SOISK 150
external register address register (XRA) OF 85
external registers OF 10
introduction INTRO 20
registers
channel card address layout OPER 215
channel card control layout OPER 215
channel data layout OPER 215
error register A (ERA) and (ERAH) Dr 50
error register B (ERB) and (ERBH) OF 55
processor control register (PCR) OF 65
processor error register (PER) OF 65
processor status register (PSR) OF 70
to channel adapter operation OPER 200
to status store operation OPER 200
to status store, to channel adapter data flow diagram OPER 215
microprocessor/control storage INTRO 20
minor bus lines, graphic symbol LGNO 5
miscellaneous inside inspection, tape unit INSP 32, INSP 132
mode selection switch PANEL 40
mode set command OPER 165
mode switch location LOC 50
models ofthe MO MO 10
modes of writing data INTRO 2:1
motion control
description OPER 130
diagram OPER 125
drive transport INTRO 51
motor
load CARR,OR 2830
motor control, digital servo card OPER 130
moving data OPER 65
MTI
See maintenance tag in register (MTI)
MTO
See maintenance tag out register (MTO)
multiple logic diagrams for one card, how to read graphic
symbols LGNO 60

net to pin list, how to read graphic format LGNO 80
no trouble found EAO 5070
no-operatlon (NOP) command OPER 165
normalltest switch description PANEL 10
not capable sense bit SENSE 110
number of tracks on tape INTRO 5

OBR edit report, EREP
description MSG 100
example MSG 230
field definitions MSG 231
off-page connectors, graphic symbol LGNO 5
OLTs (online tests) alter installation INST 131, INST 431
on-page connectors, graphic symbol LGNO 5
online tests descriptions, PLAN 60
online/offline switch
description PANEL 14, PANEL 15
location LOC 70, LOC 75

removal and replacement CARR-DR 1040, CARR-DR 1045
open operation timing chart, MOto MA communication path OPER 81
operating characteristics, data channel path INTRO 5
operating systems INTRO 5
operating the drive PANEL 5
operating the MO MO 40
operational in line operation, channel to control unit interface OPER 190
operational out line operation, channel to control unit interface OPER 190
operational overview of the control unit OPER 15
operations table, control unit (CUT) OF 105
operations, Introduction OPER 5
operator action message definition MSG 10
operator information message, system console message MSG 15
operator Intervention, sense byte 3 SENSE 120
operator panel, control unit
location LOC 50
operator panel, drive
removal and replacement CARR-DR 2-6
switch board
removal and replacement CARR-DR 1090
SWitch locations LOC 70, LOC 75
operator panel, loader CARR-DR 2980
operator panel, maintenance device MO 10
operator setup panel
control unit PANEL 10
location LOC 50
optional feature, additional channel interface INTRO 30
optional features INTRO 5
OSNSlMVS system console messages
error description list MSG 20
operator action message
definition MSG 10
operator information message
definition MSG 15
oscilloscope PLAN 5
oscilloscope scoping procedure PLAN 65
out of sequence record sense bit SENSE 110
outlet MAP, convenience PWR 150-1
output current selection +5 V dc location, control unit de power
suppl y LOC 35
output filter
location LOC 120
location,50 Hz LOC 115
location,60 Hz LOC 110
removal and replacement CARR-DR 320
removal and replacement, 50 Hz CARR-DR 328
removal and replacement, 60 Hz CARR-DR 325
output stack assembly LOC 171
output stack assembly removal and replacement CARR-DR 2970
output stack up position sensor CARR-DR 2960
overrun sense bit SENSE 110

panel
ac power CB, tape unit PANEL 14, PANEL 15
ac power supply, control unit PWR 15
operator, drive PANEL 14, PANEL 15
switch, drive PANEL 14, PANEL 15
panel, loader operator CARR-DR 2980
parallellseriallnterconnection OPER 130
parity error detection OPER 80
path group
10tabie (PGT) OF 140
map (PGM) DF 135
pathing commands test routine description, OLT PLAN 60

IBM Conf idential

o

o

ItAX 8

paths, data channel operating characteristics INTRO 5
PCR
See processor control register
PER
See processor error register
permanent error summary, EREP
description MSG 100
example MSG 205
field definitions MSG 206
permanent error, sense byte 3 SENSE 120
permanent/recovered error summary report, EREP
example (EREP 3.2) MSG 220
field definitions (EREP 3.2) MSG 221
PGM
See path group map
PGT
See path group 10 table
physical address switch
location LOC 95, LOC 120
removal and replacement CARR-DR 1290, CARR-DR 1295
setting INST SO, INST 350
physical pins, how to read graphic format LGNO 70
pin to net list, how to read graphic format LGNO 80
plenum assembly and pressure switch
location LOC 100
removal and replacement CARR-DR 410
plenum supply hose
removal and replacement CARR-DR 390
plenum supply hose, clamping procedure CARR-DR 3-1
plunger spring
removal and replacement CARR-DR 170
pneumatic system diagram PNEU 3, PNEU 103
pneumatics
checkout procedure PNEU 30, PNEU 130
failure in the primary pneumatics system PNEU 12, PNEU 112
locations LOC 120
locations, 50 Hz LOC 115
locations, 60 Hz LOC 110
operation OPER 45
pneumatics problem on a single drive PNEU 20, PNEU 120
system measurements PNEU 5, PNEU 105
vacuum checks PNEU 30, PNEU 130
port buffer adapter cable group from channel adapter FSI 200
positioning
drive transport INTRO 51
motion control OPER 130
power
+1.7 V dc regulator, 01A-A1-T2 MAP 410 PWR 410-1
+24Vdc
diagram PWR 40
local mode MAP PWR 110-1
MAP PWR 130-1
remote mode MAP PWR 120-1
+5 V dc distribution diagram PWR 42
+8.5 V dc distribution diagram PWR 48
-5 V dc distribution diagram PWR 46
ac overview diagram PWR 32
ac power supply panel PWR 15
control unit
ac power, local mode diagram PWR 36
ac power, remote mode diagram PWR 38
dc power MAP PWR 400-1
functional area description OPER 30
convenience outlet PWR 150-1
de control diagram PWR 50
de overview diagram PWR 34
dc test tool
description PLAN 5

INDEX 8

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

Index

o

o

o

o

o

pneumatics problem on a single drive PNEU 20, PNEU 120
cartridge removal by hand CART 10
clamping the plenum supply hose CARR-DR 3-1
dc test tool verification PWR 10, PWR 12
end a call PLAN 60
ending drive operation PANEL 5
engineering change PLAN 60
error recovery, sense byte 8 SENSE 140
for intermittent failures PLAN 55
initial microprogram load (IML) PANEL 7
integrated logic probe PLAN 65
leader block replacement CART 20
magnetic tape attachment CART 30
no trouble found EAO 5070
operating the drive PANEL 5
operating the MO MO 40
pneumatic checkout PNEU 30, PNEU 130
pressure measurement, pneumatic PNEU 5, PNEU 105
scoping (using OSCilloscope) PLAN 65
support SPROC 2
vacuum adjustment PNEU 5, PNEU 105
vacuum measurement, pneumatic PNEU 5, PNEU 105
varyomlne procedure PLAN 55
processor
card
introduction INTRO 50
location LOC 130
logical components OPER 40
control register (PCR) bit definition OF 65
error register (PER) bit definition OF 65
external register test, diagnostic routine EE14 OIAG 65
function test, diagnostic routine EE12 OIAG 50
status register (PSR) bit definition OF 70
product cable, maintenance device MO 10
product support summary ,jiagram, maintenance PLAN 50
PSR
See processor status register
pump motor
location LOC 120
location,50 Hz LOC 115
location, 60 Hz LOC 110
removal and replacement CARR-DR 300, CARR-DR 305
pump to output filter I10se
removal and replacement CARR-DR 650
removal and replacement, 50 Hz CARR-DR 658
removal and replacement, 60 Hz CARR-DR 655
pusllbuttons
control unit PANEL 10
MO keyboard/display MO 20
tape unit PANEL 14, PANEL 15
put operation timing chart, MO to MA communication path OPER 81

used without the control unit dc power supply PWR 10
used without tM tape unit dc power supply PWR 12
verification procedure PWR 10, PWR 12
drive dc (single drive) analysis procedure MAP 200 PWR 200-1
drive dc power (same symptom both drives), MAP 210 PWR 210-1
introduction PWR 5
jumper checks, control unit dc INST 55, INST 355
locations, control unit dc LOC 35
mainline circuit breaker (CB1) PWR 15
problem determination, MAP 100 PWR 100-1
restart MAP PWR 190-1
sequencing OPER 60
tape unit
fuses continue to blow PWR 30
logical component OPER 40
voltage tolerance tables PWR 20
power amplifier board
connector locations LOC 125
introduction INTRO 50
location LOC 105
operation OPER 40
removal and replacement CARR-DR 590
power cable LOC 170
power cable removal and replacement CARR-DR 2860, CARR-DR 2880
power indicator OPER 240, PANEL 40
power off and on procedure
drive CARR-DR 8
tape unit CARR-DR 8
power on/off switch and indicator description PANEL 10
power supply
introduction INTRO 20
see jumper, power supply
60 Hz and 50 Hz Japan
power-on-resetlunder-voltage detector introduction INTRO 20
power/POR card
location LOC 15
removal and replacement CARR-CU 1260
power, removing for relocate or discontinue INST 140, INST 440
preamplifier card
introduction INTRO 50
location LOC 130
logical components OPER 40
predictive maintenance overview MSG 350
preparation
for installation INST 4, INST 304
ror safety inspection INSP 15, INSP 115
pressure hose assembly
removal and replacement CARR-DR 340
removal and replacement, 50 Hz CARR-DR 348
removal and replacement, 60 Hz CARR-DR 345
pressure loss analysis procedure
air pressure loss PNEU 10, PNEU 110
pneumatics problem on a Single drive PNEU 20, PNEU 120
pressure measurement, pneumatic PNEU 5, PNEU 10"
pressure port cap
location LOC 120
location,50 Hz LOC 115
location,60 Hz LOC 110
pressure regulator adjustment PNEU 5, PNEU 105
pressure sensor
removal and replacement CARR-DR 400
pressure/vacuum gauge PLAN 5
pressure/vacuum kit PLAN 5
primary key, graphic symbol LGNO 5
probe message, MO MO 30
probe, integrated logic PLAN 5
procedures
air pressure loss analysis
air pressure loss PNEU 10, PNEU 110

3480 MI

o

question nlp.ssage, MO

EC A57723

MO 32

radio frequency interference frame pans and end plates,
installing INST 130
radio frequency interference shield, installing INST 430
rail assembly, len input CARR-DR 2930
rail assembly, right input CARR-DR 2940
RCR
See read control register
ROC
See read diagnostic control register
read
adapter
cables locations, drive LOC 145
connectors location, drive, 50 Hz LOC 115
connectors location, drive, 60 Hz LOC 110
backward test, data buffer controls diagnostic EE33 DIAG 110
blocks
buffered data flow description OPER 90
bus cable groups FSI 200
bytes processed sense bytes SENSE 170
card clocks EAO 30
clock and format card
clocks EAO 50
description OPER 25
location LOC 15
removal and replacement CARR-CU 1110
clock/detect cards OPER 25
control area INTRO 20
control register (RCR) bit definitions OF 70
corrected sense byte SENSE 170
data bus INTRO 30
data flow
area clocks EAO 50
control register (RCR) OF 70
diagnostic control register (ROC) OF 70
error register (RER) OF 75
pattern register (RPR) OF 80
residual count register (RRC) OF 80
status register (RSR) OF 82
data flow and read control card external registers OF 10
data flow description OPER 90
data flow diagram OPER 95
detect cards 1, 2, and 3
diagram, area clocks EAO 30, EAD 50
locations LOC 15
removal and replacement CARR-CU 1110
diagnostic controllegister (ROC) OF 70
ECC/CORR card
description OPER 25
diagram, area clocks EAO 50
location LOC 15
removal and replacement CARR-CU 1110
error register (RER) bit definitions OF 75
forward test, data buffer controls diagnostic EE33 OIAG 110
overrun test, data buffer controls diagnostic EE33 OIAG 110
pattern register (RPR) bit definitions OF 80
processed sense byte SENSE 180
recovery retry count sense byte SENSE 190
residual count register (RRC) bit definitions OF 80
skew cards 1,2, and 3
clocks EAD 50
description, functional area OPER 25
locations LOC 15
removal and replacement CARR-CU 1110
status register (RSR) bit definitions OF 82
read bacl'ward

IBM Conf idential

©Coryright IBM Corp. 19~2, 1989. All Rights Reserv.d

.w

o

o

lAx

9

command OPER 170
data checks sense byte SENSE 170
test, data buffer controls diagnostic EE33 OIAG 110
read block IOcommand OPER 170
read buffer command OPER 170
read buffered log command OPER 175
read bus cable removal and replaCelllf:': It CARR-DR 880
read bus problems EAO 5010
read cards, control unit OPER 25
read forward
command OPER 175
data checks sense byte SENSE 170
test, data buffer controls routine EE33 OIAG 110
read in signal line, MO from MA communication path OPER 80
read tape PLAN 45
read/write bus connectors location, control unit LOC 25, LOC 30
read/write bus connectors location, tape unit LOC 70, LOC 75
read/write operations diagram OPER 120
read/write reliability test routine description, OLT PLAN 60
reading data INTRO 22
reading speed, tape transport INTRO 5
ready/not ready switch description PANEL 14, PANEL 15
real time statistical analysis and reporting system MD 50
receive message operation, control unit to control unit
communication OPER 145
rechecking actions, support procedures SPROC 4
record format, tape data OPER 85
reference message, MO MO 32
reference screen, MO support diskette register display/alter SOISK 126
register display/alter diagram, MO support diskette SDISK 125
registers, external
address register (XRAI OF 85
addressi ng OPER 65
buffer
buffer adapter data register (CMOT) OF 36
buffer adapter mode register (CMM) OF 36
buffer adapter register page (CMRP) OF 36
buffer adapter register select (CMRS) OF 37
buffer adapter status register (CMS) OF 37
channel mode register (CHM) OF 36
channel pOinter high register (BCPH) bit definitions OF 15
channel pOinter low register (BCPL) bit definitions OF 15
channel SARS register (BCSS) OF 20
channel status and error (BCSE) bit definitions DF 15
device painter high register (BOPH) bit definitions DF 30
device pointer low register (BOPL) OF 30
device status and error (BOSE) bit definitions DF 20
diagnostic a (BOGO) bit definitions OF 25
diagnostic 1 register (BOG1) bit definitions OF 25
wrap register (BWRP) bit definitions OF 30
channel
adapter error register (CAE) bit definitions OF 33
adapter status register (CAS) bit definitions OF 35
card control register (CCC) OF 35
card register (CCA) OF 35
error register (CER) OF 35
request register (CRR) bit definitions OF 40
data flow/error detection OPER 65
device
control bus (OCB) bit definitions OF 40
control register (OCR) bit definitions OF 40
device level register (OLR) bit definitions OF 45
interrupt register (OIR) bit definitions OF 45
status/error (OSE) OF 45
tag register (OTR) bit definitions OF 50
diagram, data flow/error detection OPER 75
drive, description of OF 155
error register A (ERA) and (ERAH) OF 50

INDEX 9

o

o

o

()

o

()

t)

()

o

o

Index

o

o

error register B (ERB) and (ERBH) OF ,,<;
maintenance
data in (MOl) OF 55
data out (MOO) OF 60
status byte register (MSB) OF 60
tag in (MTI) OF 60
tag out (MTO) OF 62
operation OPER 65
processor
control register (PCR) OF 65
error register (PER) OF 65
read
control register (RCR) OF 70
diagnostic control register (ROC) OF 70
errorregister (RER) OF 75
pattern register (RPR) OF 80
residual count register (RRC) OF 80
status register (RSR) OF 82
status register (PSR) OF 70
XRA value to register name cross-reference table OF 12
registers, MD support diskette control unit scan rings SDISK 131
regulator
adjustment PNEU 5, PNEU 105
location LOC 120
location,50 Hz LOC 115
location,60 Hz LOC 110
removal and replacement CARR-DR 310
removal and replacement, 50 Hz CARR-DR 318
removal and replacement, 60 Hz CARR-DR 315
relocate or discontinue subsystem INST 140, INST 440
remote mode
diagr am, control unit ac power PWR 38
MAP 120, +24 V control voltage PWR 120-1
renlovals and replacements
ac circuit breaker/cable assembly, tape unit CARR-DR 2100
ac circuit breaker, tape unit CARR-DR 2185
ac distribution cable (drive) CARR-DR 765
ac fuse F1, control unit CARR-CU 1465
ac line cord, control unit CARR-CU 1490
ac power circuit breaker/cable assembly, tape unit CARR-DR 2180
ac power circuit breaker, tape unit CARR-DR 2185
ac power supply cable CARR-DR 750
ac power supply, control unit CARR-CU 1440
ac power to gate cable CARR-CU 1770
air pressure test hose assembly CARR-DR 2620
blower assembly, control unit CARR-CU 1500
buffer adapter card CARR-CU 1110
buffer control card CARR-CU 1110
buffer storage cards CARR-CU 1110
bus shoe cards CARR-CU 1360
cables, control unit CARR-CU 150
cables, tape unit CARR-DR 490
card, control unit, logic CARR-CU 1110
cartridge In stack sensor CARR-DR 2910
cartridge latch assembly CARR-DR 80
cartridge latched sensor CARR-DR 110
cartridge present sensor CARR-DR 100
cartridge staged sensor CARR-DR 2920
center tape guide CARR-DR 2310
channel adapter cards CARR-CU 1110
channel address switch CARR-CU 1970
cleaner block CARR-DR 1610
cleaner vacuum hose CARR-DR 470
compliant guide, read/write head CARR-DR 2770
compression spring CARR-DR 180
control storage arr ay card CARR-CU 1110
control store card CARR-CU 1110
control unit ac fuse CARR-CU 1465
control unit ac line cord CARR-CU 1490

3480 MI
EC A57723
tL; Copyright IBM Corp. 1982. 19~9. All Rights Reserv.d

o

o

o

o

control unit ac power supply CARR-CU 1440
control unit A1 logic board CARR-CU 1390
control unit A2 logic board CARR-CU 1400
control unit blower assembly CARR-CU 1500
control unit cables CARR-CU 150
control unit dc fuse F1 or F2 CARR-CU 1470
control unit dc power supply CARR-CU 1450
control unit dc power supply to gate TB cable CARR-CU 1600
control unit gate fan cable CARR-CU 1650
control unit logic card CARR-CU 1110
control unit switch panel printed circuit board CARR-CU 1410
control unit thermal switch, lower CARR-CU 1430
control unit top card connector CARR-CU 1570
convoluted bellows CARR-DR 2230
dc fuse F1 or F2, control unit CARR-CU 1470
dc power distribution (drive external) cable CARR-DR 797
dc power distribution (drive Internal) cable CARR-DR 790,
CARR-DR 794
dc power distribution cable CARR-DR 800, CARR-DR 80s
dc power supply to gate TB cable, control unit CARR-CU 1600
dc power supply, control unit CARR-CU 1450
dc power supply, drive CARR-DR 950, CARR-DR 955
decoupler assembly CARR-DR 120
decoupler pressure hose CARR-DR 420
decoupler vacuum hose CARR-DR 430
diskette drive CARR-CU 860
display board to switch board cable CARR-DR 2130
drive adapter card (conllol unit) CARR-CU 1180
drive blower assembly CARR-DR 200, CARR-DR 205
drive control card CARR-DR 850
drive dc fuse CARR-DR 960
drive dc power supply CARR-DR 950, CARR-DR 9SS
drive logic board (02A-A1) CARR-DR 580
drive logic cards CARR-DR 640
drive switch panel CARR-DR 1040, CARR-DR 1045
drive thermal switch CARR-DR 1100, CARR-DR 1105
external load resistor panel CARR-DR 360
external load reSistor panel, 50 Hz CARR-DR 368
external load reSistor panel, 60 Hz CARR-DR 36S
feed assembly CARR-DR 2950
file protect switch CARR-DR 90
file reel motor CARR-DR 30
fuse, drive dc CARR-DR 960
gate fan cable, control unit CARR-CU 1650
head and guide assembly CARR-DR 130
head tape guide (left) CARR-DR 2280
head tape guide (right) CARR-DR 2290
inlet filter CARR-DR 330, CARR-DR 335
input stack assembly CARR-DR 2900
Interlock spring CARR-DR 190
interposer cable and connector assembly CARR-DR 2690
latch Interlock CARR-DR 1270
latch solenoid CARR-DR 20
latch spring CARR-DR 160
leader block CART 20
left guide bearing hose CARR-DR 450
left input rail assembly CARR-DR 2930
left tape head guide CARR-DR 2280
load assembly CARR-DR 2820
load complete sensor CARR-DR 2840
load motor CARR-DR 2830
loader control card CARR-DR 2810
loader fuses CARR-DR 2880
loader mechanical assembly CARR-DR 2850
loader operator panel CARR-DR 2980
loader signal and power cable CARR-DR 2860
local/remote power panel CARR-CU 840
logic board, control unit A1 CARR-CU 1390

o

logiC board, control unit A2 CARR-CU 1400
logic card, control unit CARR-CU 1110
machine reel CARR-DR 40
machine reel nange, lower CARR-DR 50
machine reel nange, upper CARR-DR 540
machine reel hub CARR-DR 610
machine reel tach sensor A CARR-DR 2250
machine reel tach sensor B CARR-DR 2260
machine reel tape guide CARR-DR 2270
maintenance adapter card CARR-CU 1110
manifold-in pressure hose, 50 Hz CARR-OR 378
manifold-In pressure hose, 60 Hz CARR-DR 370
manifold-in vacuum hose assembly, 50 Hz CARR-DR 388
manifold-in vacuum hose assembly, 60 Hz CARR-DR 380
message display board CARR-DR 600
message display cable CARR-DR 2115
message display cable (message display to SL T
Panel) CARR-DR 2110
message display cable (SLT Panel to logic board) CARR-DR 2113
message display dc power cable CARR-DR 900, CARR-DR 905
message display LED CARR-DR 210
microprocessor card CARR-CU 1110
operator panel printed circuit board "CARR-CU 1420
operator panel switch board CARR-DR 1090
output filter CARR-DR 320
output filter, 50 Hz CARR-DR 328
output filter, 60 Hz CARR-DR 325
output stack assembly CARR-DR 2970
output stack up position sensor CARR-DR 2960
physical address switch CARR-DR 1290, CARR-DR 1295
plenum assembly CARR-DR 410
plenum supply hose CARR-DR 390
plunger spring CARR-DR 170
power amplifier board CARR-OR 590
power/PaR card CARR-CU 1260
pressure hose assembly CARR-DR 340
pressure hose assembly, 50 Hz CARR-DR 348
pressure hose assembly, 60 Hz CARR-DR 34S
pressure sensor CARR-DR 400
pump motor CARR-DR 300, CARR-DR 30S
pump to output filter hose CARR-DR 650
pump to output filter hose, 50 Hz CARR-DR 658
pump to output filter hose, 60 Hz CARR-DR 655
read bus cable CARR-DR 880
read clock and format card CARR-CU 1110
read detect card 1 CARR-CU 1110
read detect card 2 CARR-CU 1110
read detect card 3 CARR-CU 1110
read ECCICORR card CARR-CU 1110
read skew buffer card 1 CARR-CU 1110
readskewbuffercard2 CARR-CU 1110
read sJ.:ew buffer card 3 CARR-CU 1110
regulator CARR-DR 310
regulator, 50 Hz CARR-DR 318
regulator, 60 Hz CARR-DR 315
right guide bearing hose CARR-DR 440
right input rail assembly CARR-DR 2940
right tape head guide CARR-DR 2290
service switrh assembly CARR-CU 1620
shoe card CARR-CU 1360
stack low sensor CARR-DR 2890
status store basic card CARR-CU 1110
status store communication card CARR-CU 1110
switch panel printed circuit board, control unit CARR-CU 1410
tachometer sensor cable CARR-DR 810, CARR-DR 815
tag shoe cards CARR-CU 1360
tape lifter solenoid CARR-DR 2160
tape lifter solenoid input hose CARR-DR 2150

IBM Conf idential

a

o

o

I N . 10

tape path sensor A CARR-DR 60
tape path sensor B CARR-DR 70
tape unit ac power circuit breaker CARR-DR 2185
tape unit ac power circuit breaker/cable assembly CARR-DR 2180
tape unit cables CARR-DR 490
tape unit control box sw;lches CARR-DR 1040
tape unit power supply blower, 50 Hz CARR-DR 718
tape unit power supply blower, 60 Hz CARR-DR 710
tape unit thermal swilcll CARR-DR 820
tape unit thermal switch (end tape unit) CARR-DR 825
tape unit thermal switch (not end tape unit) CARR-DR 823
tape unit thermal switch cable harness CARR~DR 830
tape unit thermal switch cable harness (end tape unit) CARR-DR 835
tape unit thermal switch cable harness (not end tape
unit) CARR-DR 833
TCC (drive) CARR-DR 660
tension transducer CARR-DR 140
tension transducer hose CARR-DR 460
tension transducer tape guide CARR-DR 2300
terminator, write bus A CARR-CU 1990, CARR-CU 1995
terminator, write bus B CARR-CU 1990, CARR-CU 1995
thermal switch lower, control unit CARR-CU 1430
thermal switch upper, control unit CARR-CU 2240
threader assembly CARR-OR 10
top card connector, control unit CARR-CU 1570
top card connectors CARR-DR 660
UEPO switch CARR-CU 1980
vacuum distribution tee CARR-DR 2190
vacuum hose assembly CARR-DR 350
vacuum hose assembly, 50 Hz CARR-OR 358
vacuum hose assembly, 60 Hz CARR-DR 355
vacuum supply hose CARR-DR 2120
vacuum test hose assembly CARR-DR 2630
voltage regulator card CARR-CU 1110, CARR-CU 1260
write bus A terminator CARR-CU 1990, CARR-CU 1995
write bus B terminator CARR-CU 1990, CARR-CU 1995
write data card CARR-CU 1110
removing dual control unit communication cables, relocate or discontinue
subsystem INST 170, INST 470
removing I/O cables, relocate or discontinue subsystem INST 150,
INST 450
replacing sLlbcovers and covers INST 130, INST 430
request in line operation, channel to control unit interface OPER 190
request message, MD MD 32
RER
See read error register
reset control unit, MD support diskette register display/alter SDISK 126
reset switch
description PANEL 14, PANEL 15
location LOC 70, LOC 75
removal and replacement CARR-DR 1040, CARR·I'"'R 1045
restart MAP 190, power PWR 190-1
rewind command OPER 175
rewind switch description PANEL 14, PANEL 15
rewind unload command OPER 175
rewinding tape OPER 55
RFI
See radio frequency interference frame pans and end plates, Installing
See radio frequency interference shield, installing
right guide bearing hose
removal and replacement CARR-DR 440
right input rail assembly removill and replacement CARR-DR 2940
routines, diagnostic DIAG 6
RPR
See read pattern register
RRC
See read residual count register
RSR

INDEX 10

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o c c c o c c c o c c o o c c c

c c c c c c o c o o o

o c c
INDEX 11

Index
see read status register
running omlne checkout during Installation
dual control unit subsystem INST 76, INST 78, INST 376, INST 378
single control unit subsystem INST 70, INST 72, INST 370, INST 372
running support diagnostics DIAG 5

safety
checks INST 6, INST 306
control unit
ac grounding diagram INSP 65, INSP 165
ac primary power INSP 40, INSP 140
dc power supply INSP 45, INSP 145
Inside INSP 35, INSP 135
Inside miscellaneous INSP 55, INSP 155
outSide INSP 15, INSP 115
Inspection, materials needed for INSP 10,INSP 110
Instructions INSP 10, INSP 110
maintenance device MD 10
preparation INSP 15, INSP 115
tape unit
ac grounding diagram INSP 70, INSP 170
dc power supplies INSP 32,INSP 132
Inside INSP 20, INSP 120
Inside miscellaneous INSP 32, INSP 132
outside INSP 15, INSP 115
Safety inspection procedures
completion report INSP 50, INSP 160
control unit
ac power supply INSP 40, INSP 65, INSP 140, INSP 165
dc power supply INSP 45,INSP 145
inside INSP 35, INSP 55, INSP 135, INSP 155
outSide INSP 15, INSP 115
education INSP 10, INSP 110
general instructions INSP 10, INSP 110
preparation INSP 15, INSP 115
tape unit
ac grounding diagram INSP 70, INSP 170
dc power supplies INSP 32, I NSP 132
inside INSP 20, INSP 32, INSP 120, INSP 132
outside INSP 15, INSP 115
sample logic diagram pages LGND 70
scope lOOP uttllty, diagnostic routine EEFO DIAG 600
scoplng, procedure for using oscilloscope PLAN 65
secondary key, graphic symbol LGND 5
select control options, MD support diskette utilities, trace/match
control SDISK 146
select In line operation, channel to control unit interface OPER 190
select match action SDISK 146
select out line operation, channel to control unit interface OPER 190
select out line operation, control unit to drive interconnection OPER 190
selected Indicator description PANEL 14, PANEL 15
send message operation, control unit to control unit
communication OPER 145
sense
command description OPER 175
control transfer diagram, drive adapter area clocks EAD 44
error history table (SNERRH) OF 145
10 command description OPER 175
path group 10 command description OPER 175
sense data
analysis SENSE 100
byte summary SENSE 102
description SENSE 100·
format 19

3480 MI

c

EC A57723

iDCopyrlghtlBM Corp. 1982, 1999 All Rights R... rved

byte 3, table and error codes description SENSE 115
bytes 0 through 2, description SENSE 110
bytes 0 through 2, table SENSE 105
bytes 16 through 23, table SENSE 145
bytes 24 through 31 description SENSE 160
bytes 24 through 31, table SENSE 155
bytes 4 through 7, description SENSE 130
bytes 4 through 7, table SENSE 125 .
bytes 8 through 15 description SENSE 140
bytes 8 through 15, table SENSE 135
summary SENSE 102
format 20
byte 3, table and error codes description SENSE 115
bytes othrough 2, description SENSE 110
bytes 0 through 2, table SENSE 105
bytes 16 through 23,table SENSE 145
bytes 24 through 31 description SENSE 160
bytes 24 through 31, table SENSE 155
bytes 4 through 7, description SENSE 130
bytes 4 through 7, table SENSE 125
bytes 8 through 15 description SENSE 140
bytes 8 through 15, table SENSE 135
summary SENSE 102
format 21
byte 3, table and error codes description SENSE 115
bytes othrough 2, description SENSE 110
bytes 0 through 2, table SENSE 105
bytes 16 through 23, description SENSE 180
bytes 16 through 23, table SENSE 175
bytes 24 through 31, description SENSE 190
bytes 24 through 31, table SENSE 185
bytes 4 through 7, description SENSE 130
bytes 4 through 7, table SENSE 125
bytes 8 through 15 description SENSE 170
bytes 8 through 15, table SENSE 165
summary SENSE 102
format, how to determine SENSE 100
sensor
cartridge In stack CARR-DR 2910
cartridge stageg CARR-OR 2920
load complete CARR-DR 2840
output stack up position CARR-DR 2960
stack low CARR-OR 2890
sensor removal and replacement, stack low CARR-OR 2890
sensors
tape transport, deSCription of INTRO 51
thread path OPER 55
separation test, data buffer controls diagnostic EE33 OIAG 110
sequence timing chart, initial selection OPER 185
serial data In signal line, MD to MA communication path OPER 80
serial data out signal line, MD from MA communication path OPER 80
serial Interconnection OPER 130
serial interconnection sequence, control unit to drive
operation OPER 188
serial Interconnection timing chart OPER 188
serial number loeation, control unit LOC 25, LOC 30
serial number, tape unit LOC 120
serial number, tape unit, SO Hz LOC 115
serial number, tape unit, 60 Hz LOC 110
serial sequence drive Interconnections EAO 44
service action point, predictive maintenance MSG 350
service In line operation, channel to control unit Interface OPER 190
service out line operation, channel to control unit Interface OPER 190
service representative Information, message display PANEL 30
service switch assembly
removal and replacement CARR-CU 1620
set logic card SWitches
adapter card, control unit CARR-CU 1189

set path group 10 command OPER 175
setting addresses
control unit INST 40, INST 340, PANEL 12
drive PANEL 12
drive, logical INST SO, INST 350
drive, physical INST SO, INST 350
shift signal line, MD to MA communication path OPER 80
short loop write to read
description OPER 110
pattern test, routine EE52 DIAG 200
timing test, routine EE53 DIAG 218
signal cable Lac 170
signal lines, MOto/from MA communication path OPER 80
single control unit subsystem
command execution OPER 135
configuration diagram OPER 135
diagram, theory INTRO 25
IML procedure PANEL 7
offline checkout INST 70, INST 72, INST 370, INST 372
operation OPER 135
running support diagnostics DlAG 5
setting control unit addresses INST 40, INST 340
SNERRH
See sense error history table
software problems, possible START 130
special tools
descriptions PLAN 5
for installation INST 4, INST 304
stack low sensor removal and replacement CARR-DR 2890
start MAP, power PWR 100-1
start of maintenance section
actions for possible non-FRU caused error codes START 130
actions to take tor a fault symptom code START 325
determining a fault symptom code START 300
determining the control unit to MO connection START 401,
START 420
error path isolation START 400
error path sense byte definitions START 400
fault symptom codes caused by other than 3480 hardWare
failures START 100
maintenance starting point START 10
possible EC compatibility problems START 135
possible host processor channel problems or overrun
condition START 135
possible software problems START 130
start repair, MOmain menu option description MD SO
start swttch PANEL 40
starting support procedures SPROC 2
status bits 0-15 description, drive OF 1SO
status byte
description SENSE 205
table SENSE 200
updating the RAM OPER 142
status byte reglster'.MSB
See maintenance
status In line operation, channel to control unit Interrace OPER 190
status I n signal line, MD to MA communication path OPER 80
status modifier status bit SENSE 205
status out sequence, MO to MA communication path OPER 81
status out signal line, MO from MA communication path OPER 80
status screen, support diagnostics DlAG 6
status store
basiC card clocks EAO 60
cable group from channel adapter FSI 200
card
Introduction INTRO 20
location LOC 15
removal and replacement CARR-CU 1110

card clocks EAD 10
channel request register (CRR) bit definitions OF 40
communication card
location Lac 15
removal and replacement CARR-CU 1110
communication card clocks lOAD 60
communications wtthout channel adapter OPER 30
display, MD support diskette SDISK 120
error condition theory EAD 5D05
error description EAD 5005
external registers OF 10
external system problems EAD 5006
functional description OPER 30
Introduction INTRO 20
order test, routine EE93 DlAG 460
oscilloscope Information EAD 5008
sense data and diagnostic failure 10 analysis EAD 5006
status store/channel adapter diagram EAD 5005
to channel adapter communications OPER 200
to channel adapter Interconnection EAD 5006
to status store communication path OPER 140, OPER 145
troubleshooting guide, general EAO 5006
updating RAM OPER 142
write/read RAM storage test, routine EE92 DIAG 450
storage cards, buffer
location Lac 15
removal and replacement CARR-CU 1110
subsystem
characteristics INTRO 5
component descriptions, MD support diskette SDiSK 105
diagnostics DIAG 2
display/alter, MDsupport diskette SDISK 105
dump, MDsupport diskette utilities SDISK 140, SDiSK 165
exception report tape, EREP
description MSG 100
example MSG 200
field definitions MSG 201
limit controls MSG 105
features INTRO 5
Introduction INTRO 5
operating modes INTRO 5
relocate or discontinue INST 140, INST 440
vary amine procedure PLAN 55
subsystem clocks and sequences
buffer area clocks EAD 20
channel adapter area clocks
clocks to channel adapters. EAD 10
clocks to status store EAD 10
control storage subsystem clocks
subsystem clocks to the microprocessor card, timing
chart EAD 6
timing chart EAD 7
XR bus and control clocks EAD 8
control unit clocks EAD 5
drive adapter area clocks
alert sequence from the dri \Ie to the control unit EAD 42
clocks to the drive-adapter card EAD 40
data transfer sequence betWeen the control unit and the drive and
WTM, write erase gap sequence EAD 43
Initial selection sequence from the control unit to the
drive EAD 41
sense control transfer EAD 44
serial sequence drive Interconnections EAD 44
drive clocks to the adapter card EAD 80
dual control unit area clocks
clocks to the status store basic card EAD 60
clocks to the status store communication card EAD 60
maintenance adapter area clocli::s

INDEX 11

INDEX 12

Index
clocks to and trom the maintenance adapter EAD 70
data byte transfer, maintenance adapter card to microprocessor
card EAD 71
maintenance device command byte transfer, maintenance adapter
card to microprocessor card EAD 71
read data lIow area clocks
clocks to the read clock and format card EAD 50
clocks to the read detect cards EAO SO
clocks to the read ECCICORR card EAO SO
clocks to the read skew buffer cards EAO SO
Systeml370 interface
channel interface block multiplex operation without reconnect ion
for command retry EAO 12
channel Interface block multiplex operation without reconnection
for device end EAO 11
channel Interface Initial selection from an SIO or TIO
command EAO 11
write data lIow area clocks
clocks to the read detect cards EAO 30
clocks to the write data card EAO 30
Internal clocks on the write data card EAO 30
summary
channel commands INTRO 55
maintenance package description PLAN 25
maintenance product support, diagram PLAN SO
sense bytes SENSE 102
3480 maintenance PLAN 5
support diagnostics
ending use of OIAG 7
error screens OIAG 6
flow description OIAG 5
how to use the support diagnostics, lIow diagram of OIAG 4
Information supplied by OIAG 6
Introduction OIAG 2
organization OIAG 2
status screen OIAG 6
test options, how to use OIAG 7
support diskette, MO
drive command exerciser
commands [)lAG 720
control options OIAG 720
details OIAG 722
diagram OIAG 721
error messages OIAG 720
Introduction OIAG 2
prompting screens OIAG 725
maintenance package SOISIe 100
plan SOISK 100
procedure description SOISK 100
relationship to product maintenance package SOISK 100
service panel functions
channel RAM display diagram SOISK 115
control storage display/alter SOISK 110
display subsystem configuration SDISK 105
register display/alter diagram SolSK 125
status store display diagram SOISK 120
subsystem display/alter SolSK 105
utilities, t.Ao support diskette
microprocessor control SolSI( 140, SolSK 1SO
subsystem dump SOISK 140, SolSK 165
trace/match contrOl SolSI( 140
support maintenance package
description SPROC 2
developing a fault symptom code SPROC 3
end-of-call actions SPROC 4
rechecking actions SPROC 4
support procedures SPROC 2
supporttroubleshoo!ing, uSing the fault symPtom index ~SI 2
suppress out line operatIon, channe: to control U'lll interlace OPER 190

suspend multlpath reconnection command OPER 175
SWitch
mode selection OPER 240, PANEL 40
start OPER 240, PANEL 40
SWitches and indicators PANEL 10, PANEL 14, PANEL 15
SWitChing on the power
omlne checkout. dual control unit INST 76, INST 78, tNST 376,
INST 378
omine CheCkout, single control unit INST 70, INST 370
sync address, scope loop utility DIAG 600
synchronize command OPER 180
system allachmentlocalions, control unit ac power supply LOC 55,
LOC 60
system console messages, OSNSIt.AVS
error description list t.ASG 20
operator action message
definition MSG 10
operator Information message
definition MSG 15
Systeml370 Interface EAo 11

table or array name entry, t.Ao support diskette SOISK 110
tables
command status table (CST) OF 90
control unit operations table (CUT) OF 105
device operations table (DOT) OF 120
drive eXlernal registers OF 155
eXlemal register address cross-reference
buffer contrOl card OF 5
drive adapter card OF 5
maintenance adapter card OF 5
microprocessor card OF 10
read data lIow and read control card OF 10
status store card OF 10
write data now card OF 10
eXlemal register bit dellnilions OF 15
logical device table (lOT) OF 125
path group 10 table (PGT) OF 140
path group map (PGt.A) OF 135
sense error history table (SNERRH) OF 145
-XRA value to register name cross-reference OF 12
tach sensor cable locations, drive LOC 155
tag and bus cables
cable group listings FSI 200
connecting and disconnecting CARR-CU 1360
tag shoe card
locations LOC 40, LOC 45
removal and replacement CARR-CU 1360
tape cartridge
about CARR·DR 2320
description CART 5, INTRa 10
recording media characteristics INTRO 5
removal by hand CART 10
tape attachment procedure CART 30
tape Cleaning cartridge PLAN 6
tape data record format OPER ·85
tape drive
ending operation procedure PANEL 5
major FRU IOCahol'1$, SO HZ LOC 165
malor FRU locahons, 60 Hz LOC 160
message display messages PANEL 30
operating procedure PANEL 5
setllng the add'~sses PANEL 12
setting the logical address IN5T SO, INST 350

m

setting the physical address INST SO, tNST
tape drive message diSplay INTRO 10
tape drive transport oPER SO
tape format OPER 85
tape guide, head
left
removal and replacement CARR·DR 2280
right
removal and replacement CARR·OR 2290
tape Interchange test routine description, OLT PLAN 60
tape lifter solenOid
location LOC 100
removal and replacement CARR-DR 2160
tape lifter solenOid Input hose
removal and replacement CARR-DR 21SO
tape loading/unloading. drive transport INTRO 51
tape path sensors
adjustment, sensor A CARR·oR 50, CARR·OR 120
adjustment, sensor B CARR-DR 40, CARR-DR 70
locations LOC 105
removal and replacement, sensor A CARR·OR 60
removal and replacement, sensor B CARR-OR 70
tape removal tool PLAN 5
tape rewinding/unloading OPER 55
tape thread-load OPER 55
tape transport
characteristics INTRO 5
sensors INTRO 51
tape unit
ac grounding diagram IN5P 70, INSP 170
ac powerCB
location LOC 70, LOC 75
panel PANEL 14, PANEL 15
adapter card OPER 40
bill 01 material level determination procedure CARR· DR 9
cable
removal and replacement CARR-OR 490
cables location chart CARR-OR 491
covers
front cover adjustment CARR·OR 2-2, CARR· DR 2-4
removals CARR-OR 2-1, CARR-DR 2-3
replacements CARR:'oR 2·2, CARR·oR 2-4
data now diagram OPER 35
dc power supplies Inspection INSP 32. INSP 132
dc power suppl y
location LOC 70, LOC 75
voltage checking Without de test tool PWR 12
diagram, theory INTRO 45
digital servo card OPER 40
dimensions INTRO 5
drive
address switch locations' LOC 70, LOC 75
diSpl;J)' panel locations LOC 70, LOC 75
locations LOC 95
online/omlne SWitch locatiOns LOC 70, LOC 75
power switch locations LOC 70, LOC 75
ready/not ready switch localions LOC 70, LOC 75
rewind switch locations LOC 70, LOC 75
switch panel location LOC 70, LOC 75
transport assembly description INTRO 51
unload switch locations LOC 70, LOC 75
drive control card
adapter OPER 40
digital servo OPER'O
microprocessor OPER 40
drive logic INTRO SO
drive transport description oPER SO

INDEX 12

3480 MI EC A57724
C Copyri,hll8M Cor,

{)

ferrite assembly
functions INTRO 45
Juses continue to blow PWR 30
Inside Inspection INSP 20, INSP 120
installation
additional units INST 20, INST 320
first unit INST 11, INST 311
Introduction INTRO 45
locations LOC 70, LOC 75
logic board layout, pin side LOC 135
logiC location area definitions LGNo 35
logical components OPER 40
loose wrap test, tape OPER 55
message display INTRO 50, OPER 40
microprocessor card OPER 40
operator contrOl panel and display location LOC 70, LOC 75
outside Inspection INSP 15,INSP 115
pneumatic supply INTRO SO, OPER 45
pneumatics
pneumatics LOC 120
pneumatics, SO Hz LOC 115
pneumatics,60 Hz LOC 110
power
amplifier board OPER 40
Introduction INTRO SO
logical components description OPER 40
power olf and on procedures CARR-DR 8
power supply
blower removal and replacement, SO Hz CARR-OR 718
blower removal and replacement, 60 Hz CARR-OR 710
jumper checks, installation INST 56J"'N5T 356
locations LOC 80, LOC 90
read preamplifier card OPER 40
remove/replace procedures by FRU number CARR-DR 1-1
rewinding, lape OPER 55
sensor test, tape OPER 55
setting the addresses PANEL 12
setting the logical address INST SO, INST 350
setting the phYSical addresses INST SO, INST 350
switch panel location LOC 70, LOC 75
switches and Indicators PANEL 14, PANEL 15
tape threadlload OPER 55
tape unloading/rewinding OPER 55
T81 location LOC 70, LOC 75
thermal switch
cable harness removal and replacement CARR-OR 830
cable harness removal and replacement (end tape
unit) CARR-DR 835
cable harness removal and replacement (not end tape
unit) CARR·oR 833
removal and replacement CARR-OR 820
removal and replacement (end tape unit) CARR-OR 825
removal and replacement (not end tape unit) CARR·DR 823
threadl1oad, tape OPER 55
TU·p2 read/write bus connector location LOC 70, LOC 75
write card OPER 40
tape write mode INTRO 22
tape·write·lmmedlate mode OPER 100
temporary error summary report, EREP
deSCription MSG 100
example (EREP 3.1.1) t.ASG 210
example (EREP 3.2) MSG 212
fIeld defiMions (EREP 3.1.1) MSG 211
fIeld definitions (EREP 3.2) MSG 213
tension transducer
Introduction INTRO 51
removal and replacement CARR·OR 140
tension transducer hose

'''r,lno

() () f) () ()

,(

(

,)

r)

t

() l)

o

=)

\

~)

~)

~)

~)

~)

f

\

" J

Index

o

o

tension transducer hose
removal and replacement CARR-DR 460
tension transducer tape guide
removal and replacement CARR-DR 2300
test equipment
for installation INST 4, INST 304
oscilloscope PLAN 5
pressure/vacuum gauge PLAN 5
test I/O command OPER 180
test plug data
control unit dc power supply locations LOC 35
tape unit dc power supply
test tool, dc power supply
description PLAN 5, PWR 12
how to use without control unit PWR 10
how to use without tape unit PWR 12
verification procedure PWR 10, PWR 12
thermal switch assembly
location LOC 130
removal and replacement CARR-DR 1100, CARR-DR 1105
thermal switch lower, CU gate
location LOC 25, LOC 30
removal and replacement CARR-CU 1430
thermal switch upper, CU gate
removal and replacement CARR-CU 2240
thermal switch, tape unit
cable harness
removal and replacement CARR-OR 820
removal and replacement (end tape unit) CARR-DR 825
removal and replacement (not end tape unit) CARR-DR 823
threader arm location LOC 95
threader assembly
location LOC 100
removal and replacement CARR-DR 10
threader motor location LOC 105
threader pin ;md leader block
at the cartridge latch assembly
cartridge removal procedure CART 16
example CART 10-3
in machine reel hub
cartridge removal procedure CART 12
example CART 10-2
stopped in tape path
cartridge removal procedure CART 14
example CART 10-2
threading tape OPER 55
threadinglloading tape OPER 55
timing test, short loop write to read OIAG 218
tool for releasing cartridge clutch, illustration of PLAN 6
tools, special
descriptions PLAN 5
for Installation INST 4, INST 304
top card connectors
locations LOC 20
removals and replacements CARR-DR 660, CARR-CU 1570
trace level 7, MD support diskette utilities, trace/match control SDISK 146
trace/match control, MD support diskette utilities
detailed description SDISK 146
diagram SDISK 145
overview SDISK 140
transport, tape
characteristics INTRO 5
sensors INTRO 51
troubleshooting, board and cable interconnection failures EAD 5000
T1 ac voltage taps location, control unit dc power supply LOC 35

3480MI
© Copyright IBM

EC A57723
Corp. 1982, 190,9 .-' Ii RigMs R@oervpd

o

o

o

o

UEPO cables, removing for relocate or discontinue INST 160, INST 460
UEPOswitch
See unit emergency power swilch
unassign command OPER 180
under-voltage detector/power-on-reset INTRO 20
unit check
status bit SENSE 205
timing sense bit SENSE 110
unit emergency power off (UEPO) cable, installing INST 120, INST 420
unit emergency power switch
checking for failure INST 50, INST 360
description PANEL 10
location LOC 50
removal and replacement CARR-CU 1980
unit exception status bit SENSE 205
unit test, MD main menu nl1110l, description MD 50
unload switch description PANEL 14, PANEL 15
unload time, tape transport INTRO 5
unloading tape OPER 55
using the fault symptom index FSI 2
utility, scope loop DIAG 600

vacuum adjustment PNEU 5, PNEU 105
vacuum distribution tee
removal and replacement CARR DR 2190
vacuum hose assembly
removal and replacement CARR-DR 350
removal and replacement, 50 Hz CARR-DR 358
removal and replacement, 60 Hz CARR-DR 355
vacuum measurement, pneumatic PNEU 5, PNEU 105
vacuum port cap
location LOC 120
location,50 Hz LOC 115
location,60 Hz LOC 110
vacuum supply hose
removal and replacement CARR-DR 2120
vacuum test hose assembly
removal and replacement CARR-DR 2630
vary omine procedure PLAN 55
venturi
location LOC 120
location, 50 Hz LOC 115
location,60 Hz LOC 110
verification procedure, dc test tool PWR 10, PWR 12
verifying data, diagnostics DIAG 6
voltage distribution cable
connectors LOC 120
voltage distribution list, how to read graphic format LGND 80
voltage jumper
See jumper, power supply
voltage regulator card
introduction INTRO 20
location LOC 15
removal and replacement CARR-CU 1260
voltage regulator, control unit OPER 30
voltage tolerance tables PWR 20
volume content, maintenance information PLAN 10, PLAN 11
volume permanent read or write errors on more than one drive
volume statistics report, EREP
description MSG 100

MSG 380

o

example MSG 215
field definitions MSG 216
limit controls MSG 105
volume temporary read or write errors on one drive

o

IN.X 13

WS top card connector location LOC 20
WSE
See write status/error register
MSG 400

wait indicator description PANEL 10
wee top card connector
location LOC 130
removal and replacem£"nt CARR-DR 660
WCD top card connector
location LOC 20
removal and replacement CARR-CU 1570
WCR
See write control register
WE top card connector
location LOC 20
removal and replacement CARR-CU 1570
WFG top card COnnector
location LOC 20
removal and replacement CARR-CU 1570
when to use the fault symptom index FSI 2
when to use the support maintenance package SPROC 2
width, control unit and tape unit INTRO 5
width, tape INTRO 5
WKL top card connector
location LOC 20
removal and replacement CARR-CU 1570
write OPER 20
write adapter cables locations, drive LOC 150
write adapter connectors locations, drive, 50 Hz LOC 115
write adapter connectors locations, drive, 60 Hz LOC 110
write blocks corrected sense byte SENSE 170
write blocks processed sense byte SENSE 180
write bus terminator
removal and replacement CARR-CU 1990, CARR-CU 1995
write bytes processed sense bytes SENSE 180
write card OPER 40
introduction INTRO 50
location LOC 130
write command OPER 180
write control register (WCR) OF 82
write data card
clocks EAD 30
location LOC 15
removal and replacement CARR-CU 1110
write data checks sense byte SENSE 170
write data now
area clocks EAD 30
description OPER 100
diagram OPER 106
external registers OF 10
introduction INTRO 20
write data now description OPER 120
write operation timing cMrt OPER 187
write operation, control unit to drive OPER 187
write operations OPER 100
write overrun test, data buffer controls diagnostic EE33 DIAG 110
write power card
location LOC 130
write signal line, MD from MA communication path OPER 80
write status sense bit SENSE 110
write tape mark command OPER 180
write to read timing test, short loop DIAG 218
writing data INTRO 22

IBM Conf idential

o

XB top card connector
location LOC 130
removal and replacement CARR-DR
XC top card connector
location LOC 130
removal and replacement CARR-DR
XCDE top card connector
location LOC 20
removal and replacement CARR-CU
XFG top card connector
location LOC 20
removal and replacement CARR-CU
XKL top card connector
location LOC 20
removal and replacement CARR-CIJ
XR bus and control clocks EAD 8
XR detected errors OPER 70
XR interconnection timing EAD 8
XRA
See external registers
XRA decode example OPER 215
XRS top card connector
location LOC 20
removal and replacement CARR-CU

VB top card connector
location LOC 130
removal and replacement
VBCD top card connector
location LOC 130
removal and replacement
YCOE top card connector
location LOC 20
removal and replacement
YFG top card connector
location LOC 20
removal and replacement
YHJK top card connector
location LOC 20
removal and replacement
YKL top card connector
location LOC 20
removal and replacement
YP top card connector
location LOC 20
removal and replacement
VRS top card connector
location LOC 20
removal and replacement

660

660

1570

1570

1570

1570

CARR-DR 660

CARR-DR 660

CARR-CU 1570

CARR-CU 1570

CARR-DR 660

CARR-CU 1570

CARR-CU 1570

CARR-CU 1570

INDEX 13

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

Index

o

o

ZB top card connector
location LOC 130
removal and replacel ·"nt
ZSCD top card connector
location LOC 130
removal and replacement
ZCD top card connector
location LOC 20
removal and replacement
ZFG top card connector
location LOC 20
removal and replacement
ZHJK top card connector
ZKL top card connector
location LOC 20
removal and replacement
ZPQ top card connector
location LOC 20
removal and replacement

Numerics

o

fa

•

o

CARR-DR 660

CARR-DR 660

CARR-CU 1570

CARR-CU 1570

CARR-CU 1570

CARR-CU 1570

I

02A-A1 logic board pin side locations, drive LOC 95
3480 maintenance summary PLAN 5
50 Hz and 60 Hz voltage tolerance tables PWR 20
50 Hz except Japan, ac power
jumper checks INST 55,INST 355
voltl'lge tolerance table PWR 20
60 Hz and 50 Hz Japan, ac power
jumper check'!' INST 55, INST 355
voltage tolerance table PWR 20

3480 MI

EC A57723

i1")Copyrighl IBM Corp. 1982, 1989. Ali RighI> R~.prved

IBM Conl idential

INDEX 14

!}

o

u

o

()

t}

l)

{)

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

Special Characters

+ 1.7 V dc regulator, 0IA-Al-T2 MAP 410 PWR 410-1
... 24 V control transformer ac voltage taps location, control unit ac power
supply LOC 55, LOC 60
+ 24 V control voltage
diagram PWR 40
local mode MAP 110 PWR t 10-1
MAP PWR 130-1
remote mode MAP 120 PWR 120-1
+ 5 V de (J5 through J 12) locations, control unit de power supply LOC 35
+ 5 V dc distribution diagram, control unit PWR 42
+ 8.5 V dc distribution diagram, control unit PWR 48
-5 V dc distribution diagram, control unit PWR 46

abbreviations GLOSS 1
ac grounding diagram
control unit (with BM 6460460) INSP 65
control unit (without 8M 6460460) INSP 165
tape unit (with BM 6460006) INSP 70
tape unit (without 8M 6460006) INSP 170
ac input and output locations (Jl and J3), control unit dc power
supply LOC 35
ac input filter cover location, control unit ac power supply LOC 55,
LOC 60
ac line cord, control unit
removal and replacement CARR-CU 1490
ac power circuit breaker, drive
description (with 8M 6460006) PANEL 15
description (without 8M 6460006) PANEL 14
removal and replacement (with 8M 6460006) CARR-DR 2160
removal and replacement (without BM 6460006) CARR-DR 2165
ac power cord, maintenance device MO 10
ac power supply
ac power connector (with BM 6460460) LOC 45
ac power connector (without 8M 6460460) LOC 40
cable, removal and replacement (without BM 6460006) CARR-DR 750
control unit
local mode diagram PWR 36
panel PWR 15
remote mode diagram PWR 36
jumper checks (with 8M 6460460) INST 55
jumper checks (without 8M 6460460) INST 355
overview diagram PWR 32
power off and on procedures CARR-CU 6
removal and replacement CARR-CU 1440
safety inspection (with BM 6460460) INSP 40
safety inspection (without BM 6460460) INSP 140
50 Hz except Japan
location LOC 60
voltage tolerance table PWR 20
60 Hz and 50 Hz Japan
location LOC 55
voltage tolerance tables PWR 20
ac/dc distribution location, control unit ac power supply LOC 55, LOC 60
action messages (with BM 6460460 or 6460006) INST 5
action messages (without BM 6460460 or 6460006) INST 305
adapter cable assembly part number 8576623 or 6576624,
installing INST 500
adapter card
clocks EAO 80
Introduction INTRO' 50

3480 MI

o

o
INDEX 1

Index

I

o

EC A47957

.~ Copyrigh11BM Corp. 1984, 1985. 1986. 1987

location, drive LOC IS, LOC 130
logical components OPER 40
switch setting procedure CARR-CU 1189
adding tape units to an installed subsystem (with BM 6460460 or
6460006) INST 135
adding tape units to an installed subsystem (without BM 6460460 or
6460006) INST 435
additional channel interface optional feature INTRO 30
additional tape unit installation (with 8M 6460460 or 6460006) INST 20
additional tape unit installation (without BM 6460460 or 6460006) INST 320
address and register selection chart, scope loop utility OIAG 600
address cross-reference tables, external register OF 5
address in line operation, channel to control unit interface OPER 190
address in line operation, control unit to drive interconnection OPER 190
address out line operation, channel to control unit interface OPER 190
address out line operation, control unit to drive
interconnection OPER 190
address, sync (scope loop utility) OIAG 600
addresses, setting the
control unit PANEL 12
control unit (with BM 6460460) INST 40
control unit (without BM 6460460) INST 340
drive PANEL 12
drive, logical (with BM 6460006) INST 50
drive, logical (without BM 6460006) INST 350
drive, physical (with BM 6460006) INST 50
drive, physical (without BM 6460006) INST 350
addressing
external register OPER 65
introduction INTRO 10
adjustments
cartridge latched sensor CARR-DR 110
file protect switch CARR-DR 90
pressure regulator (with BM 6460006) PNEU 5
pressure regulator (without BM 6460006) PNEU 105
tach sensor A, after replacement CARR-DR 2250
tach sensor B, after replacement CARR-DR 2260
t".ch sensors A and B CARR-DR 40
tape path sensor A CARR-DR 60, CARR-DR 120
tape path sensor B CARR-DR 10, CARR-DR 40, CARR-DR 70
vacuum (with BM 6460006) PNEU 5
vacuum (without BM 6460006) PNEU 105
air fiiting location, drive (with BM 6460006) LOC 120
air fitting location, drive, 50 Hz (without BM 6460006) LOC 115
air fitting location, drive, 60 Hz (without BM 6460006) LOC 110
air pressure hose clamp, illustration of PLAN 6
air pressure loss analysis procedure
air pr!lssure loss (with BM 6460006) PNEU 10
air pressure loss (without BM 64 60006) PNEU 110
pneumatics problem on a single drive (with BM 6460006) PNEU 20
pneumatics problem on a single drive (without BM
6460006) PNEU 120
air pressure test hose assembly
removal and replacement (with BM 6460006) CARR-DR 2620
alert sequence from the drive to the control unit EAO 42
alert sequence, control unit to drive operation OPER 165
alter control storage, MO support diskette SOISK 110
area of subsystem served by cable group, cable group list FSI 200
assembly
feed CARR-DR 2950
input stack CARR-DR 2900, LOC 171
left input rail CARR-DR 2930
load CARR-DR 2820, CART 17
loader mechanical CARR-DR 2850, LOC 170, LOC 171,OPER 240
output stack CARR-DR 2970, LOC 171
right input rail CARR-DR 2940
assign command OPER 160
assigned elsewhere sense bit SENSE 110

attaching additional tape units (with BM 6460460 or 6460006) INST 20
attaching additional tape units (without BM 6460460 or 6460006) INST 320
attachment tool for leader block replacement, illustration of PLAN 6
attention indicator OPER 240, PANEL 40
attention status bit SENSE 205
automatic cartridge loader INSP 56,INSP 156, LGNO 46, LGNO 47,
LGNO 48, PANEL 40

backspace block command OPER 160
backspace file command OPER 160
bar LEOs (indicators) description (with BM 6460006) PANEL 15
bar LEOs (indicators) description (without BM 6460006) PANEL 14
basic control unit test
E010 description OIAG 2
how to run OIAG 30
basic tape motion test, diagnostic routine EEA2 OIAG 500
BCPH
See buffer channel pOinter high register
BCPL
See buffer channel pointer low register
BCSE
See buffer channel status and error register
BCSS
See buffer channel SARS register
BOGO
See buffer diagnostic 0 register
BOGI
See buffer diagnostic 1 register
BOPH
See buffer device pointer high register
BOPL
See buffer device pointer low register
BOSE
See buffer device status and error register
beginning-of-tape sense bit SENSE 110
bill of material level determination procedure CARR-DR 9, CARR-CU 9
block diagram
control unit theory INTRO 15
dual control unit subsystem, theory INTRO 35
single control unit subsystem, theory INTRO 25
tape unit theory INTRO 45
block 10 position indicator for error recovery sense bit SENSE 110
blower assembly 1 and 2, control unit
removal and replacement CARR-CU 1500
blower assembly, drive
location (with 8M 6460006) LOC 120
location, 50 Hz (without BM 6460006) LOC 115
location, 60 Hz (without BM 6460006) LOC 110
removal and replacement (with BM 6460006) CARR-DR 200
removal and replacement (without BM 6460006) CARR-DR 205
blower assembly, tape unit power supply
removal and replacement, 50 Hz (without BM 6460006) CARR-DR 718
removal and replacement, 60 Hz (without BM 6460006) CARR-DR 710
board and cable interconnection failures EAO 5000
branch circuits CB check (with BM 6460460 or 6460006) INST 6
branch circuits CB check (without BM 6460460 or 6460006) INST 306
buffer (local/remote) communication path from channel
adapter OPER 140
buffer adapter card
location LOC 15
operation OPER 20
removal and replacement CARR-CU 1110
buffer adapter, cable group from channel adapter FSI 200
buffer area clocks EAO 20

buffer channel SARS (BCSS) bit definitions OF 20
buffer channel status and error register (BCSE) bit definitions OF 15
buffer control card
clocks EAO 20
location LOC 15
operation OPER 20
removal and replacement CARR-CU 1110
buffer control external registers OF 5
buffer device pointer high register (BOPH) bit definitions OF 30
buffer device pointer low register (BOPL) description OF 30
buffer device status and error register (BOSE) bit definitions OF 20
buffer diagnostic 0 (BOGO) bit definitions OF 25
buffer diagnostic 1 register (BOG1) bit definitions OF 25
buffer memory reference CARR-CU 7
buffer page 0, I, 2, and 3, MO support diskette channel RAM
display SOISK 116
buffer registers
buffer channel pOinter high register (BCPH) OF 15
buffer channel pointer low register (BCPL) OF 15
buffer channel SARS register (BCSS) OF 20
buffer channel status and error register (BCSE) OF 15
buffer device pointer high register (BOPH) OF 30
buffer device pointer low register (BOPL) OF 30
buffer device status and error register (BOSE) OF 20
buffer diagnostic 0 register (BOGO) OF 25
buffer diagnostic 1 register (BOG1) OF 25
buffer wrap register (BWRP) OF 30
buffer storage cards
location LOC 15
removal and replacement CARR-CU 1110
buffer storage operation OPER 20
buffer wrap register (BWRP) bit definitions OF 30
buffer, data
controls test, diagnostic routine EE33 OIAG 110
data path test, diagnostic routine EE32 OIAG 100
introduction INTRO 20
operation OPER 20
buffered write mode INTRO 22,OPER 100
buffers 0 and I, MO support diskette status store display SOISK 121
bundled lines, how to read graphic format LGNO 70
bus and control lines, graphic symbol LGNO 5
bus and tag wrap, channel wrap blocks illustration PLAN 6
bus connectors location, control unit read/write (with BM
6460460) LOC 30
bus connectors location, control unit read/write (without BM
6460460) LOC 25
bus in line operation, channel to control unit interface OPER 190
bus interconnection checks CARR-DR 3-3
bus out check sense bit SENSE 110
bus out line operation, channel to control unit interface OPER 190
bus problems, support troubleshooting EAO 5010
bus shoe cards
locations (with BM 6460460) LOC 45
locations (without BM 6460460) LOC 40
removals and replacements CARR-CU 1360
buses, MO support diskette control unit scan rings SOISK 131
busy status bit SENSE 205
BWRP
See buffer wrap register

INDEX 1

INDEX 2

Index

cable
ac power distribution
removal and replacement (without 8M 6460006) CARR-DR 765
after using the fault symptom index FSI 2
checking device interconnections CARR-DR 3-3
connectors
dual control unit locations (with 8M 6460460) LOC 30
dual control unit locations (without 8M 6460460) LOC 25
from and to. cable group list FSI 200
control unit
power. connecting (with 8M 6460460) INST 60
power. connecting (without 8M 6460460) INST 360
removal and replacement CARR-CU 150
control unit subsystem diagrams (with 8M 6460460 or
6460006) EAD 5030
control unit subsystem diagrams (without 8M 6460460 or
6460006) EAD 5010
dc power distribution
internal locations. drive LOC 140
removal and replacement (with 8M 6460006) CARR-DR 790.
CARR-DR 797. CARR-DR 800
removal and replacement (without 8M 6460006) CARR-DR 794.
CARR-DR 805
drive
read adapter location LOC 145
tach sensor location LOC 155
write adapter location LOC 150
groups. listing of FSI 200
110. installation (with 8M 6460460) INST 110
110. installation (without 8M 6460460) INST 410
Installing adapter cable assembly. part number 8576623 or
8576624 INST 500
interconnection failures. troubleshooting EAD 5000
location chart. tape unit CARR-DR 491
message display dc power
removal and replacement (with 8M 6460006) CARR-DR 900
removal and replacement (without 8M 6460006) CARR-DR 905
power LOC 170
signal LOC 170
table. cable groups FSI 201
tachometer sensor
removal and replacement (with EC 333293) CARR-DR 810
removal and replacement (without EC 333293) CARR-DR 815
tape unit
removal and replacement CARR-DR 490
cable harness. tape unit thermal switch
removal and replacement (end tape unit) (without 8M
6460006) CARR-DR 835
removal and replacement (not end tape unit) (without 8M
6460006) CARR-DR 833
removal and replacement (with 8M 6460006) CARR-DR 830
CAE
See channel adapter error register
call deferred. Mo main menu option description Mo 50
card
loader control CARR-DR 2810. LOC 171
card. logic
control unit
removal and replacement CARR·CU 1110
drive
removals and replacements CARR·oR 640
location charts. how to read graphic format . LGND 60
location identification LOC 10
plug lists. how to read graphic format LGNo 60
CARR·CU section introduction CARR·CU 1-9

3480 MI

CARR·oR section introduction CARR·oR 1-9
cartridge failure determination procedure CART 30
cartridge in stack sensor removal and replacement CARR·oR 2910
cartridge latch
assembly
location LOC 100
removal and replacement CARR· DR 80
solenoid
location LOC 100
removal and replacement CARR·oR 20
cartridge latched sensor
adjustment CARR·oR 110
introduction INTRO 51
location LOC 100
removal and replacement CARR·oR 110
cartridge loader. automatic INSP 56. INSP 156. LGNo 46. LGNo 47.
LGND 48. PANEL 40
cartridge present sensor
introduction INTRO 51
location LOC 100
removal and replacement CARR·DR 100
cartridge staged sensor CARR·DR 2920
cartridge. magnetic tape
about CARR·oR 2320
clutch tool illustration PLAN 6
condition when unable to remove cartridge from drive
how to identity CART 10
leader block and threader pin at cartridge latch
assembly CART 10-3
leader block and threader pin in the machine reel
hub CART 10-2
leader block and threader pin stopped in the tape
path CART 10-2
leader block separated. example CART 10-1
tape pulled out. example CART 10-1
description CART 5. INTRO 10
magnetic tape attachment procedure CART 30
recording media characteristics INTRO 5
removal by hand CART 10
CAS
See channel adapter status register
CCA
See channel card register
CCC
See channel card control register
cd.card
center tape guide
removal and replacement CARR·oR 2310
CER
See channel error register
channel adapter
area clocks EAo 10
cable groups FSI 200
cards
clocks EAD 10
locations LOC 15
removals and replacements CARR·CU 1110
switch locations LOC 50
code. sense bits SENSE 110
communications OPER 15
data handling area OPER 15
description INTRO 30
error register (CAE) OF 33
lunction test olAG 320
interrupt register. MD support diskette channel RAM
display SolSK 116
multiple channel adapters lailing EAD 5007
oscilloscope information EAD 5008

status register (CAS) OF 35
status. MD support diskette channel RAM display SolSK 116
tags. Mo support diskette channel RAM display So/SK 116
to buffer (local/remote) communication path OPER 140
to buffer failures. troubleshooting guide EAo 5007
to status store communication path OPER 140
to status store interconnection EAD 5006
channel adapters. setting jumpers for on the dc power
supply CARR-CU 1450
channel address
information chart for setting (with 8M 6460460) INST 40
inlormation chart for setting (without 8M 6460460) INST 340
switch
cable group FSI 200
description PANEL 10
removal and replacement CARR·CU 1970
channel bus cable group FSI 200
channel card address register layout OPER 215
channel card control register (CCC) OF 35
channel card control register layout OPER 215
channel card register (CCA) OF 35
channel commands
assign OPER 160
backspace block OPER 160
backspace file OPER 160
control access OPER 160
data security erase OPER 165
description of operation OPER 150
erase gap OPER 165
forward space block OPER 165
forward space file OPER 165
introduction INTRO 55
load display OPER 165
locate block OPER 165
mode set OPER 165
no-operation (NOP) OPER 165
read backward OPER 170
read block lOOPER 170
read buffer OPER 170
read buffered log OPER 175
read forward OPER 175
rewind OPER 175
rewind unload OPER 175
sense OPER 175
sense lOOPER 175
sense path group lOOPER 175
set path group lOOPER 175
summary INTRO 55.0PER 155
suspend multi path reconnection OPER 175
synchronize OPER 180
test I/O OPER 180
unassign OPER 180
write OPER 180
write tape mark OPER 180
channel configuration switch location(s) LOC 50
channel data register layout OPER 215
channel end status bit SENSE 205
channel error register bit definition OF 35
channel errors. sense error history table' OF 145
channel initial selection OPER 60
channel interface OPER 15
channel interface block multiplex operation without reconnection lor
command retry EAo 12
channel interface block multiplex operation without reconnection lor
device end EAD 11
channel interface initial selection Irom an SIO or TIO command EAD 11
channel interface optional feature. additional INTRO 30
channel interface wrap test. diagnostic routine EE62 D/AG 300

channel RAM display diagram. Mo support diskette SDISK 115
channel request register bit delinitions OF 40
channel tag cable group FSI 200
channel to control unit interface lines descriptions OPER 190
channel wrap blocks. bus and tag wrap (illustration of) PLAN 6
channel wrap test. installation (with 8M 6460460) INST 100
channel wrap test. installation (without 8M 6460460) INST 400
characteristics. operating INTRO 5
characters. message display PANEL 30
checking read/write
offline checkout. dual control unit (with 8M 6460460) INST 76
offline checkout. dual control unit (without 8M 6460460) INST 376
offline checkout. single control unit (with 8M 6460460) INST 72
offline checkout. single control unit (without 8M 6460460) INST 372
checking the addresses
offline checkout. dual control unit (with 8M 6460460) INST 76
offline checkout. dual control unit (without 8M 6460460) INST 376
offline checkout. single control unit (with 8M 6460460) INST 72
offline checkout. single control unit (without 8M 6460460) INST 372
checking the head connectors CARR·oR 130
checking the initial microprogram load
offline checkout. dual control unit subsystem (with 8M
6460460) INST 83
offline checkout. dual control unit subsystem (without 8M
6460460) INST 383
offline checkout. single control unit (with 8M 6460460) INST 74
offline checkout. single control unit (without 8M 6460460) INST 374
checking the switches
offline checkout. dual control unit (with 8M 6460460) INST 76.
INST 78
offline checkout. dual control unit (without 8M 6460460) INST 376.
INST 378
offline checkout. single control unit (with 8M 6460460) INST 70
offline checkout. single control unit (without 8M 6460460) INST 370
checks
control unit power supply jumpers. installation (with 8M
6460460) INST 55
control unit power supply jumpers. installation (without 8M
6460460) INST 355
file protect switch CARR·oR 90
offline checkout lor a dual control unit subsystem (with 8M
6460460) INST 76. INST 78
offline checkout for a dual control unit subsystem (without 8M
6460460) INST 376. INST 378
offline checkout lor a single control unit subsystem (with 8M
6460460) INST 70. INST 72
offline checkout for a single control unit subsystem (without 8M
6460460) INST 370. INST 372
pneumatic (with 8M 6460006) PNEU 30
pneumatic (without 8M 6460006) PNEU 130
pre.installation (with 8M 6460460 or 6460006) INST 4
pre-installation (without 8M 6460460 or 6460006) INST 304
safety (with 8M 6460460 or 6460006) INST 6
salety (without 8M 6460460 or 6460006) INST 306
tape lifter CARR· DR 2160
tape unit power supply jumpers. installation (with 6460006) INST 56
tape unit power supply jumpers. installation (without
6460006) INST 356
CHK 1 errors OPER 70
CHK 2 errors OPER 70
CHK 46 air pressure loss analysis
circuit breaker
control unit
locations LOC 35
terminals LOC 65
safety checks (with 8M 6460460 or 6460006) INST 6
safety checks (without 8M 6460460 or 6460006) INST 306
tape unit ac power C8

INDEX 2

EC A47957

(; CoPVrtght IBM Corp. 1984. 1985. 1986. 1987

, ,l

~

"

1

,
)

o

o

o

o

c

o

o

Index

o

o
INDEX 3

location (with BM 6460006) LOC 75
location (without BM 6460006) LOC 70
panel (with BM 6460006) PANEL 15
panel (without BM 6460006) PANEL 14
terminals LOC 65
clamping procedure for the plenum supply hose CARR-DR 3-1
cleaner block
cleaning CARR-DR 130
location LOC 100
removal and replacement CARR-DR 1610
cleaner vacuum hose
removal and replacement CARR-DR 470
cleaning
cleaner bloci< CARR-DR 130
decoupler CARR-DR 130
tape head guide assembly
manually CARR-DR 130
using the cleaning cartridge PLAN 6
clock
timing chart, control storage EAD 7
to and from the maintenance adapter EAD 70
to channel adapters EAD 10
to status store EAD 10
to the adapter card EAD 80
to the buffer control card EAD 20
to the drive-adapter card EAD 40
to the microprocessor card EAD 6
to the read clock and format card EAD 50
to the read detect cards EAD 30, EAD 50
to the read ECC/CORR card EAD 50
to the read skew buffer cards EAD 50
to the status store basic card EAD 60
to the status store communication card EAD 60
to the write data card EAD 30
XR bus and control EAD 8
clutch tool for releasing the cartridge clutch, illustration of PLAN 6
command out line operation, channel to control unit interface OPER 190
command reject sense bit SENSE 110
command status table (CST) OF 90
common stop addresses, diagnostics DlAG 6
common stop addresses, support diagnostics DIAG 6
communication cable, dual control unit
installing (with BM 6460460) INST 30
installing (without BM 6460460) INST 330
introduction INTRO 40
completion report, inspection (with BM 6460460 or 6460006) INSP 60
completion report, inspection (without BM 6460460 or 6460006) INSP 160
compliant guide, read/write head, removal and
replacement CARR-DR 2770
compression spring
removal and replacement CARR-DR 180
condition code 3/no path available message format MSG 10
configurations
control unit to control unit communications OPER 145
diagram, control unit to control unit communication OPER 145
dual control unit OPER 140
single control unit OPER 135
status store to status store communication path OPER 145
configure maintenance device support diskette (with 8M 6460460 or
6460006) INST 90
configure maintenance device support diskette (without BM 6460460 or
6460006) INST 390
connecting
bus and tag cables CARR-CU 1360
control unit power cable (with 8M 6460460) INST 60
control unit power cable (without 8M 6460460) INST 360
dual control unit communications cable (with 8M 6460460)
dual control unit communications cable (without 8M
6460460) INST 330

3480 MI

o

EC A47957

-e COPyn9hllBM Corp. 1984, 1985

1986 1987

INST 30

MD MD 40
connecting and disconnecting the tag and bus cables CARR-CU 1360
connectors, graphic symbol LGND 5
control
lines, graphic symbol LGND 5
options, diagnostic DIAG 6
control access command OPER 160
control card removal and replacement, loader CARR-DR 2810
control card, buffer
clocks EAD 20
location LOC 15
operation OPER 20
removal and replacement CARR-CU 1110
control card, loader LOC 171
control lines, graphic symbol LGND 5
control storage
array card
location LOC 15
removal and replacement CARR-CU 1110
clocks timing chart EAD 7
display/alter, MD support diskette SDISK 110
introduction INTRO 20
tables and logs
device operations table (DOT) OF 120
diagnostic hardware error log (DGHELO) OF 117
path group 10 table (PGT) OF 140
path group map (PGM) OF 135
sense error history table (SNERRH) OF 145
control storage to drive interconnection OPER 230
control store card
location LOC 15
removal and replacement CARR-CU 1110
control unit
+ 5 V dc (J5 through J12) locations, dc power supply LOC 35
+ 5 V dc distribution diagram PWR 42
+ 8.5 V dc distribution diagram PWR 48
-5 V dc distribution diagram PWR 46
ac fuse 1
location LOC 55, LOC 60
removal and replacement CARR-CU 1465
ac input and output locations, dc power supply LOC 35
ac power supply
grounding diagram (with BM 6460460) INSP 65
grounding diagram (without BM 6460460) INSP 165
local mode diagram PWR 36
location LOC 55, LOC 60
overview diagram PWR 32
panel description PWR 15
power off and on procedures CARR-CU 6
primary inspection (with BM 6460460) INSP 40
primary inspection (without 8M 6460460) INSP 140
remote mode diagram PWR 38
50 Hz except Japan LOC 60
ac power to gate cable
removal and replacement CARR-CU 1770
additional channel interface optional feature INTRO 30
addressing INTRO 10
basic diagnostics test, how to run DIAG 30
bill of material level determination procedure CARR-CU 9
blower assembly 1 and 2
location (with BM 6460460) LOC 30
location (without BM 6460460) LOC 25
removal and replacement CARR-CU 1500
buffer description OPER 20
cable connectors (dual control unit) locations (with BM
6460460) LOC 30
cable connectors (duat control unit) locations (without BM
6460460) LOC 25

cable groups listing FSI 200
cable location listing CARR-CU 157
card locations identification LOC 10
changing the addresses PANEL 12
channel adapter INTRO 30,OPER 15
channel adapters installed sense byte SENSE 160
channel address switches
cable group FSI 200
locations LOC 50
channel interface OPER 15
circuit breakers location, dc power supply LOC 35
clocks EAD 5
configurations
dual control unit OPER 140
Single control unit OPER 135
control OPER 30
control functional areas OPER 30
control unit to drive bus out driver wrap test, diagnostic routine
EE42 DIAG 150
covers
front cover adjustment (with BM 6460460) CARR-CU 2-2
front cover adjustment (without BM 6460460) CARR-CU 2-4
removals (with BM 6460460) CARR-CU 2-1
removals (without BM 6460460) CARR-CU 2-3
replacements (with BM 6460460) CARR-CU 2-2
replacements (without BM 6460460) CARR-CU 2-4
CUO/CUl switch
cable group FSI 200
description PANEL 10
data buffer INTRO 20, OPER 20
data flow diagram OPER 10
data writing modes
buffered write INTRO 22
tape write INTRO 22
dc power supply
control diagram PWR 50
indicator location LOC 50
inspection (with BM 6460460) INSP 45
inspection (without BM 6460460) INSP 145
location LOC 35
overview diagram PWR 34
voltage checking without dc test tool PWR 10
voltage jumper installation CARR-CU 1450
diagram INTRO 15
dimensions INTRO 5
diskette drive PANEL 10
drive adapter INTRO 20,INTRO 30
dual control unit communications cable, connecting (with BM
6460460) INST 30
dual control unit communications cable, connecting (without BM
6460460) INST 330
enable/disable switches
cable group FSI 200
description PANEL 10
end status bit SENSE 205
equipment checks sense byte SENSE 170
error checking OPER 30
errors, sense error history table OF 145
external registers, MD support diskette register
display/alter SDISK 126
features sense byte SENSE 160
functional area description OPER 15
, functional test routine description, OL T PLAN 60
functions INTRO 15
fuse location, dc power supply LOC 35
hardware level sense bits SENSE 160, SENSE 190
110 cable installation (with BM 6460460) INST 110
110 cable installation (without BM 6460460) INST 410

I/O tailgate connector assembly location (with BM 6460460) LOC 45
I/O tailgate connector assembly location (without BM
6460460) LOC 40
10 sense bit SENSE 110
IML procedure PANEL 7
IML switch
cable group FSI 200
description PANEL 10
initial selection description and timing chart OPER 185
inside inspection (with BM 6460460) INSP 35
inside inspection (without BM 6460460) INSP 135
inside inspection, miscellaneous (with BM 6460460) INSP 55
inside inspection, miscellaneous (without BM 6460460) INSP 155
installation (with BM 6460460) INST 10
installation (without BM 6460460) INST 310
Introduction INTRO 15
logic board
card locations LOC 15
top card connectors LOC 20
logic gate terminal strips location (with BM 6460460) LOC 30
logic gate terminal strips location (without BM 6460460) LOC 25
mainline circuit breaker (CB1) PWR 15
maintenance adapter INTRO 20, OPER 30
maintenance adapter registers OPER 30
MD connector location LOC 50
MD serializer/deserializer OPER 30
MD/control unit connection determination START 401, START 420
.microcode EC level sense byte SENSE 160
microcode error sense bytes SENSE 140
microprocessor/control storage INTRO 20
mode switches locations LOC 50
normalltest switch
cable group FSI 200
description PANEL 10
online/offline switch
cable group FSI 200
description PANEL 10
operations table (CUT) OF 105
operator panel
removal and replacement CARR-CU 1420
operator panel locations LOC 50
operator setup panel locations LOC 50
output current selection (+ 5 V dc) location, dc power supply LOC 35
outSide inspection (with BM 6460460 or 6460006) INSP 15
outside inspection (without BM 6460460 or 6460006) INSP 115
over-current protection, circuit breakers location LOC 35
parts definitions and locations LGND 15
power
cable, connecting (with BM 6460460) INST 60
cable, connecting (without BM 6460460) INST 360
introduction INTRO 20
jumper checks, installation (with BM 6460460) INST 55
jumper checks, installation (without BM 6460460) INST 355
mode switch location LOe 50
operation OPER 30
switch location LOC 50
voltage tolerance table PWR 20
power-on-resetlunder-voltage detector OPER 30
read
cards OPER 25
control INTRO 20
data bus INTRO 30
read/write bus connectors location (with BM 6460460) LOe 30
read/write bus connectors location (without BM 6460460) LOC 25
reading data INTRO 22
remove/replace procedures by FRU number CARR-CU 1-1
scan rings diagram, MD support diskette SDISK 130
serial number high order digit sense bits SENSE 160, SENSE 190

INDEX 3

INDEX 4

Index
serial number location (with BM 6460460) LOC 30
serial number location (without BM 6460460) LOC 25
serial number low order sense bytes SENSE 160, SENSE 190
service switch assembly
removal and replacement CARR-CU 1620
selting the addresses PANEL 12
setting the addresses (with BM 6460460) INST 40
setting the addresses (without BM 6460460) . INST 340
status store OPER 30
status store/channel adapter communications OPER 30
status store/status store communication INTRO 20
switch panel printed circuit board
removal and replacement CARR-CU 1410
switches and indicators PANEL 10
test plug data locations, dc power supply LOC 35
test plug location, dc power supply LOC 35
thermal switch assembly location (with BM 6460460) LOC 30
thermal switch assembly location (without BM 6460460) LOC 25
to control unit communications OPER 145
to drive bus and tag test, diagnostic routine EE43 DlAG 160
to drive operation OPER 185
to drive sequences
alert sequence from the drive to the control unit EAo 42
data transfer sequence between the control unit and the drive and
WTM, write erase gap sequence EAo 43
initial selection sequence from the control unit to the
drive EAo 41
sense control transfer EAo 44
serial sequence drive interconnections EAo 44
to drive serial test, diagnostic routine EE44 olAG 170
to drive, write operation OPER 187
top card connectors locations LOC 20
troubleshooting guide. general EAo 5050
T1 ac voltage taps location. dc power supply LOC 35
unit emergency power off cable (UEPO). installing (with BM
6460460) INST 120
unit emergency power off cable (UEPO). installing (without BM
6460460) INST 420
unit emergency power switch location LOC 50
unit emergency switch location LOC 50
voltage regulator OPER 30
write OPER 20
write data flow INTRO 20
writing data INTRO 22
control unit offline verification procedure CARR-CU 5
controlling Support diagnostics olAG 5
controls and data. timing chart OPER 230
convenience outlet
+ 24 V control voltage diagram PWR 40
control unit ac power supply panel PWR 15
jumper cheCks (with BM 6460460) INST 55
jumper checks (without BM 6460460) INST 355
location. control unit ac power supply LOC 55. LOC 60
MAP PWR 150-1
convoluted bellows

Iront cover adjustment (with 8M 6460006) CARR-DR 2-2
front cover adjustment (without BM 6460006) CARR-DR 2-4
removals (with BM 6460006) CARR-DR 2-1
removals (without BM 6460006) CARR-OR 2-3
replacements (with BM 6460006) CARR-OR 2-2
replacements (without 8M 6460006) CARR-OR 2-4
criteria read and write data checks sense bytes SENSE 180
cross-reference tables
external register address
buffer control card OF 5
drive adapter card OF 5
maintenance adapter card OF 5
microprocessor card OF 10
read data flow and read control card OF 10
status store card OF 10
write data flow card OF 10
XRA value to register name OF 12
CRR
See. channel request register
CST
See command status table
CUT
See control unit operations table
CUO/CUl switch description PANEL 10

data analysis, support maintenance package SPROC 2
data buffer
controls test, diagnostic routine EE33 DIAG 110
data path test, diagnostic routine EE32 OIAG 100
introduction INTRO 20
operation OPER 20
data byte count sense byte SENSE 160
data byte transfer, maintenance adapter card to microprocessor
card EAD 71
data card, write
clocks EAo 30
location LOC 15
rf;lmoval and replacement CARR-CU 1110
data channel path operating characteristics INTRO 5
data check sense bit SENSE 110
data fields OF 3
data flow diagram, read OPER 95
data flo·w/error detection diagram OPER 75
data flow/error detection external registers OPER 65
data handling functional areas, description of OPER 15
data in line operation, channel to control unit interface OPER 190
data movement, description OPER 15
data out line operation, channel to control unit interface OPER 190
data record format, tape OPER 85
data security erase command OPER 165
data table or array display, MO support diskette SOISK 110
data that can be available, support maintenance package SPROC 2
data transfer sequence between the control unit and the drive and WTM
write erase gap sequence EAD 43
'
data, moving OPER 65
dc power supply
control unit
connector locations LOC 35
dc power complete LED, ac power supply panel LOC 55,
LOC 60, PWR 15
diagnostic MAP"400 PWR 400-1
jumpers, checking (with BM 6460460) INST 55
jumpers, checking (without BM 6460460) INST 355
power indicator description PANEL 10

re~oval ~nd replacement (without BM 6460006) CARR-DR 2230
correctrve action. predictive maintenance MSG 350
coupler assembly
covers
control unit

front cover adjustment (with BM 6460460) CARR-CU 2-2
front cover adjustment (without BM 6460460) CARR-CU 2-4
removals (with 8M 6460460) CARR-CU 2-1
removals (without BM 6460460) CARR-CU 2-3
replacements (with BM 6460460) CARR-CU 2-2
replacements (without BM 6460460) CARR-CU 2-4
drive, removal and replacement CARR-DR 2-5
drive. top. removal and replacement (with BM 6460006) CARR-DR 2-8
tape unit

3480 MI

1
'.1

read block 10 OPER 170
read buffer OPER 170
read buffered log OPER 175
read forward OPER 175
rewind OPER 175
rewind unload OPER 175
sense OPER 175
sense lOOPER 175
sense path group lOOPER 175
set path group lOOPER 175
suspend multipath reconnection OPER 175
synchronize OPER 180
test I/O OPER 180
unassign OPER 180
write OPER 180
write tape mark OPER 180
channel initial selection OPER 60
channel interface OPER 15
channel interface wrap test, diagnostic routine EE62 olAG 300
control unit drive to drive serial test, diagnostic routine
EE44 OIAG 170
control unit functional areas OPER 15
control unit functional test routine, OL T PLAN 60
control unit to drive bus and tag test, routine EE43 olAG 160
control, control unit OPER 30
data buffer
controls test, diagnostic routine EE33 DIAG 110
data path test, diagnostic routine EE32 DIAG 100
description OPER 20
diagnostics, subsystem DIAG 2
digital servo card OPER 40
drive status bits 0-15 OF 150
error checking, control unit OPER 30
external register bus addressing and data pattern test, diagnostic
routine EE85 OIAG 400
fault symptom index FSI 2
FRU code summary report, EREP MSG 100
identification code introduction, diagnostic olAG 2
initial microprogram load (IML) OPER 60
initial selection, control unit to drive operation OPER 185
interrupt level test, diagnostic routine EE13 olAG 55
logical components of the tape unit OPER 40
loop write to read
description OPER 110
long test, diagnostic routine EE54 olAG 220
short pattern test, routine EE52 olAG 200
short timing test, diagnostic routine EE53 OIAG 218
loose wrap test, tape OPER 55
maintenance adapter OPER 30
maintenance device MD 10
maintenance information description by volume PLAN 10, PLAN 11
MD serializer/deserializer OPER 30
message display OPER 40, OPER 130
motion control OPER 130
OBR edit report, EREP MSG 100
operator information message error code MSG 15
parallel/serial interconnection OPER 130
pathing commands test routine, OL T PLAN 60
permanent error summary, EREP MSG 100
pneumatic supply OPER 45
positioning, motion control OPER 130
power amplifier board OPER 40
power overview
control unit OPER 30
tape unit OPER 40
power sequencing OPER 60
power-on-reset/under-voltage detector, control unit OPER 30
processor card OPER 40

INDEX 4

EC A47957

'0 Copyright IBM Corp.

~

power indicator location LOC 50
removal and replacement CARR-CU 1450
safety inspection (with 8M 6460460) INSP 45
safety inspection (without BM 6460460) INSP 145
voltage tolerance tables PWR 20
diagrarr., control unit PWR 50
locations LOC 35
overview diagram PWR 34
tape unit
connector locations (with BM 6460006) LOC 90
connector locations (without BM 6460006) LOC 80
locations (with BM 6460006) LOC 90
locations (without 8M 6460006) LOC 80
removal and replacement (with BM 6460006) CARR-OR 950
removal and replacement (without BM 6460006) CARR-OR 955
safety inspection (with BM 6460006) INSP 32
safety inspection (without BM 6460006) INSP 132
TB cable
removal and replacement CARR-CU 1600
test tool
description PLAN 5
how to use without control unit PWR 10
how to use without tape unit PWR 12
verification procedure PWR 10
verification procedure PWR 12
OCR
See device control register
ODR
See dynamic device reconfiguration facility
decoupler
assembly
location LOC 100
removal and replacement CARR-DR 120
cleaning CARR-DR 130
pressu re hose
removal and replacement CARR-OR 420
vacuum hose
removal and replacement CARR-DR 430
depth, control unit and tape unit INTRO 5
description
adapter card OPER 40
basic control unit test, error displays DIAG 32
basic control unit test, how to run OIAG 30
basic tape motion test, diagnostic routine EEA2 DlAG 500
buffer adapter card OPER 20
buffer control card OPER 20
buffer storage OPER 20
buffered read data flow OPER 90
buffered write mode OPER 100
cable group list FSI 200
channel adapter OPER 15
channel adapter function test, diagnostic routine EE64 OIAG 320
channel adapter/buffer communications OPER 15
channel adapter/status store communications OPER 15
channel commands
assign OPER 160
backspace block OPER 160
backspace file OPER 160
control access OPER 160
data security erase OPER 165
erase gap OPER 165
forward space block OPER 165
forward space lile OPER 165
load display OPER 165
locate block OPER 165
mode set OPER 165
no-operation (NOP) OPER 165
read backward OPER 170

1984. 1985. 1986. 1987

"

1

1

",

..

,1

,

'\

\

, \

,

" •

,

,•

1

~)

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

Index

o

o
INDEX 5

processor external register test, diagnostic routine EE14 olAG 65
read
clock/detect cards OPER 25
description OPER 25
drive data flow OPER 120
ECC/CORR card OPER 25
preamplifier card OPER 40
skew cards OPER 25
read clock and formal card OPER 25
read data flow OPER 90
read/write reliability test rouline, OL T PLAN 60
registers, maintenance adapter OPER 30
scope loop utility, diagnostic routine EEFO OIAG 600
sense data
byte 3, formats 19,20, and 21 SENSE 115
bytes 0 through 2, formats 19, 20, and 21 SENSE 110
bytes 16 through 23, format 21 SENSE 180
bytes 16 through 23, formats 19 and 20 SENSE 150
bytes 24 through 31, format 21 SENSE 190
bytes 24 through 31, formats 19 and 20 SENSE 160
bytes 4 through 7, formats 19,20, and 21 SENSE 130
b"tes 8 through IS, format 21 SENSE 170
bytes 8 through IS, formats 19 and 20 SENSE 140
description SENSE 100
sensor test, tape OPER 55
serial interconnection OPER 130
status byte
bit descriptions SENSE 205
overview SENSE 200
status store
channel adapter communications OPER 30
description, functional area OPER 30
order test, routine EE93 olAG 460
updating RAM OPER 142
write/read RAM storage test, routine EE92 DIAG 450
subsystem exception report tape, EREP MSG 100
support diagnostic flow olAG 5
support maintenance package SPROC 2
support procedure, Mo SolSK 100
switches and indicators
cable groups FSI 200
descriptions PANEL 10
switches and indicators (with BM 6460006) PANEL 15
switches and indicators (without BM 6460006) PANEL 14
tape drive
data flow OPER 120
thread-load tape OPER 55
transport description OPER 50
unwinding/unloading tape OPER 55
tape interchange test routine, OL T PLAN 60
tape-write-immediate mode OPER 100
temporary error summary, EREP MSG 100
voltage regulator, control unit OPER 30
volume statistics report, EREP MSG 100
write
data flow card OPER 40
data flow description OPER 100
description, functional area OPER 20
write data flow OPER 120
write/read exerciser, routine EEA3 DlAG 510
write/read exerciser, routine EEA4 OIAG 550
determining the sense data format SENSE 100
developing a fault symptom code, support procedures SPROC 3
device (drive)
assignment mask, Mo support diskette status store
display SolSK 121
assignments, Mo support diskette status store display SDISK 121
bus cable groups FSI 200
command, Mo support diskette channel RAM display SDISK 116

3480 MI

o

EC A47957

e CopyrighllBM Corp

1984 1985 1986. 1987

condition, Mo support diskette channel RAM display SolSK 116
control bus (oCB) bit definitions OF 40
control register (OCR) bit definitions OF 40
device level register (oLR) bit definitions OF 45
end status bit SENSE 205
interrupt register (OIR) bit definitions OF 45
intervention required message format MSG 10
online sense bit SENSE 110
operations table (DOT) OF 120
program flags, Mo support diskette status store display SolSK 121
status/error register bit definitions OF 45
status, Mo support diskette channel RAM display SolSK 116
status, MD support diskette status store display SolSK 121
tag register (oTR) bit definitions OF 50
device data bus
oscilloscope information EAO 5011
problems EAo 5010
troubleshooting EAo SOlO, EAO 5011
device interconnection checks CARR-DR 3-3
oEVNO/CUA statistics summary report, EREP
example MSG 229
field definitions MSG 228
oGHELO
See diagnostic hardware error log
diagnostic hardware error log (oGHELO) OF 117
diagnostics
basic control unit test
how to run olAG 30
routine E010 description OIAG 2
basic tape motion test, routine EEA2 olAG 500
channel adapter function test, routine EE64 OIAG 320
channel interface wrap test, routine EE62 olAG 300
common stop addresses olAG 6
control unit/drive
control unit to drive bus and tag test, routine EE43 OIAG 160
control un it to drive bus out driver wrap test, diagnostic routine
EE42 OIAG 150
control unit to drive serial test, routine EE44 OIAG 170
data buffer
controls test, routine EE33 OIAG 110
data path test, routine EE32 olAG 100
drive command exerciser olAG 720
error screens olAG 6
external register bus addressing and data pattern test, routine
EE85 olAG 400
identification code
·.introduction OIAG 2
table olAG 3
interrupt level test, routine EE13 olAG 55
introduction olAG 2
long loop write to read test, routine EE54 OIAG 220
maintenance device/maintenance adapter diagnostic olAG 20
processor
external register test, routine EE14 olAG 65
function test, diagnostiC routine EE12 olAG 50
processor function test, routine EE12 olAG 50
routine descriptions olAG 2
scope loop utility, routine EEFO OIAG 600
section descriptions olAG 2
short loop write to read
pattern test, routine EE52 OIAG 200
timing test. routine EE53 olAG 218
status screen olAG 6
status store
order test, routine EE93 olAG 460
write/read RAM storage test, routine EE92 olAG 450
support diagnostic
flow description olAG 5

running olAG 5
write/read exerciser, routine EEA3 olAG 510
write/read exerCiser, routine EEA4 olAG 550
diagram, read data flow OPER 95
digital servo card
introduction INTRO 50
location LOC 130
digital servo card, logical components OPER 40
dimensions, control unit and tape unit INTRO 5
olR
See device interrupt register
disconnect in line operation, channel to control unit interface OPER 190
disconnecting tape units and control unit, relocate or discontinue
subsystem (with BM 6460460 or 6460006) INST 180
disconnecting tape units and control unit, relocate or discontinue
subsystem (without BM 6460460 or 6460006) INST 480
discontinue subsystem (with BM 6460460 or 6460006) INST 140
discontinue subsystem (without BM 6460460 or 6460006) INST 440
diskette drive
location LOC 50
operation OPER 220
removal and replacement CARR-CU 860
diskette drive, control unit panel PANEL 10
diskettes used without Mo PLAN 5
diskettes, maintenance device Mo 10
display FRUs, Mo main menu option description Mo 50
display maintenance adapter registers, Mo support diskette
utilities SolSK 155
display subsystem configuration, Mo support diskette SolSK 105
display, Mo keyboard/display Mo 20
distribution cable (internal) locations, drive dc LOC 140
oLR
See device, device level register
DOT
See device operations table
dot ORs of output lines, how to read graphic format LGNo 75
drive
adapter
description INTRO 30
diagram, single control unit subsystem overview INTRO 25
adapter card
clocks EAo 40
location LOC 15
removal and replacement CARR-CU 1180
setting switches CARR-CU 1189
switch setting worksheet CARR-CU 1188
address switch
description (with BM 6460006) PANEL 15
description (without BM 6460006) PANEL 14
location (with BM 6460006) LOC 75
location (without BM 6460006) LOC 70
removal and replacement (with BM 6460006) CARR-DR 1040
removal and replacement (without BM 6460006) CARR-DR 1045
attachment, dual control units INTRO 40
blower assembly
location (with BM 6460006) LOC 120
location, 50 Hz (without BM 6460006) LOC 115
location, 60 Hz (without BM 6460006) LOC 110
removal and replacement (with BM 6460006) CARR-DR 200
removal and replacement (without BM 6460006) CARR-DR 205
bus cable groups FSI 200
cables location chart CARR-DR 491
command codes sense bytes SENSE 150
command exerciser
commands OIAG 720
contrul options olAG 720
details olAG 722
diagram olAG 721

error messages olAG 720
introduction olAG 2
prompting screens olAG 725
connector locations (with BM 6460006) LOC 120
connector locations, 50 Hz (without BM 6460006) LOC 115
connector locations, 60 Hz (without BM 6460006) LOC 110
covers removal and replacement CARR-DR 2-5
covers. top, removal and replacement (with BM
6460006) CARR-DR 2-8
dc distribution cable (internal) locations LOC 140
detected errors sense byte SENSE 190
drive power switch
description (with BM 6460006) PANEL 15
description (without BM 6460006) PANEL 14
location (with 8M 6460006) LOC 75
location (without BM 6460006) LOC 70
removal and replacement (with BM 6460006) CARR-DR 1040
removal and replacement (without BM 6460006) CARR-DR 1045
ending operation procedure PANEL 5
error codes sense byte SENSE 150
error recovery procedures code, sense byte 8 SENSE 140
errors, sense error history table OF 145
external registers OF 155
features sense byte SENSE 160
flag 1 sense byte SENSE 150
how to operate PANEL 5
interconnections
control unit subsystem cable diagrams (with BM 6460460 or
6460006) EAO 5030
control unit subsystem cable diagrams (without 8M 6460460 or
6460006) EAD 5010
error descriptions (with BM 6460460 or 6460006) EAO 5030
error descriptions (without BM 6460460 or 6460006) EAO 5010
troubleshooting guide, general (with 8M 6460460 or
6460006) EAo 5030
troubleshooting guide, general (without BM 6460460 or
6460006) EAO 5010
locations LOC 95
logic INTRO 50
model number sense byte SENSE 150
online/offline switch locations (with BM 6460006) LOC 75
online/offline switch locations (without BM 6460006) LOC 70
operator panel
description (with BM 6460006) PANEL 15
description (without BM 6460006) PANEL 14
location (with 8M 6460006) LOC 75
location (without BM 6460006) LOC 70
removal and replacement CARR-DR 2-6
power off and on procedures CARR-DR 8
read adapter cables locations LOC 145
ready/not ready switch locations (with 8M 6460006) LOC 75
ready/not ready switch locations (without BM 6460006) LOC 70
rewind switch locations (with BM 6460006) LOC 75
rewind switch locations (without 8M 6460006) LOC 70
setting the addresses PANEL 12
setting the logical address (with BM 6460006) INST 50
setting the logical address (without 8M 6460006) INST 350
setting the physical addresses (with 8M 6460006) INST 50
setting the physical addresses (without BM 6460006) INST 350
status bits 0-15 description OF 150
status/error register (OSE) OF 45
status, message display PANEL 30
switch panel
description (with BM 6460006) PANEL 15
_description (without BM 6460006) PANEL 14
location (with BM 6460006) LOC 75
location (without BM 6460006) LOC 70
tach sensor cable locations LOC 155

INDEX 5

INDEX 6

Index
thermal switch assembly
location LOC 130
removal and replacement (with BM 6460006) CARR-DR 1100
removal and replacement (without BM 6460006) CARR-DR 1105
top card connectors locations LOC 130
transport assembly INTRO 51
unload switch locations (with BM 6460006) LOC 75
unload switch l'Jcations (without BM 6460006) LOC 70
vary offline proceaure PLAN 55
write adapter cables locations LOC 150
o and 1 locations (with BM 6460006) LOC 75
o and 1 locations (without BM 6460006) LOC 70
drive control card
introduction INTRO SO
removal and replacement CARR-DR 850
drive data flow description OPER 120
drive display panel locations (with BM 6460006) LOC 75
drive display panel locations (without BM 6460006) LOC 70
drive interconnections, error descriptions (with BM 6460460 or
6460006) EAO 5030
drive interconnections. error descriptions (without BM 6460460 or
6460006) EAO 5010
drive to control storage interconnection OPER 230
OSE
See device (drive) status/error register
OTR
See device tag register
dual control unit subsystem
cable connectors location (with BM 6460460) LOC 30
cable connectors location (without BM 6460460) LOC 25
cable group listing FSI 200
command sequence OPER 141
communication INTRO 40
configuration diagram OPER 141
diagram, theory INTRO 35
IML procedure PANEL 7
offline checkout (with BM 6460460) INST 76, INST 78
offline checkout (without BM 6460460) INST 376. INST 378
running support diagnostics OIAG 5
setting control unit addresses (with BM 6460460) INST 40
setting control unit addresses (without BM 6460460) INST 340
updating status store RAM OPER 142
updating the RAM status byte OPER 142
writing a message into address 80 and 83 OPER 142
dual control unit. error descriptions EAO 5050
dynamic device reconfiguration facility SENSE 120

engineering change procedure PLAN 60
entry into Ihe fault symptom index FSI 2
environmental recording editing and printing program
analysis of EREP reports MSG 350
OEVNO/CUA statistics summary report
example MSG 229
field definitions MSG 228
EREP analysis/predictive maintenance MSG 350
error code summary report
description MSG 100
example and field definitions (EREP 3,1.1) MSG 225
example and field definitions (EREP 3.2) MSG 226
OBR edit report
description MSG 100
example MSG 230
field definitions MSG 231
permanent error summary
description MSG 100
example MSG 205
field definitions MSG 206
permanent/recovered error summary
example (EREP 3.2) MSG 220
field definitions (EREP 3.2) MSG 221
subsystem error report
description MSG 100
example MSG 200
. field definitions MSG 201
limit controls MSG 105
tape report description MSG 100
temporary error summary
description MSG 100
example (EREP 3.1.1) MSG 210
example (EREP 3.2) MSG 212
field definitions (EREP 3.1.1) MSG 211
field definitions (EREP 3.2) MSG 213
volume statistics report
description MSG 100
example MSG 215
field definitions MSG 216
limit controls MSG 105
equipment check sense bit SENSE 110
ERA and (ERAH)
See error register A bit definitions
erase gap command OPER 165
erase gap counts sense byte SENSE 190
ERB and (ERBH)
See error register B bit definitions
EREP
See environmental recording editing and printing program
ERP
See error recovery procedures, drive (sense byte 8)
error analysis diagram logic blocks. how to read graphic
symbols LGNO 55
error checking. control unit OPER 30
error checking. MO to MA communication path OPER 80
error code summary report, EREP
description MSG 100
example and field definitions (EREP 3.1,1) MSG 225
example and field definitions (EREP 3.2) MSG 226
error codes
MO support diskette status store display SOISK 121
sense byte 3. error recovery procedures action
description SENSE 120
table SENSE 115
error description list. system console messages MSG 20
error indicator description PANEL 10
error match value, MO support diskette utilities. trace/match
control SOISK 146

EAO
Introduction EAO 3
EC compatibility problems. possible START 135
education
maintenance device MO 10
safety inspection (with BM 6460460 or 6460006) INSP 10
safety inspection (without BM 6460460 or 6460006) INSP 110
education course, MO MO 10
emergency power switch location LOC 50
enable communication path signal line. MO to MA communication
path OPER 80
enable/disable switches description PANEL 10
end-a-call procedure PLAN 60
"1!Ind-of-call actions. support procedures SPROC 4
ending drive operation procedure PANEL 5
ending sequence timing chart. 'device stop OPER 186
ending sequence. control unit to drive operation OPER 186

3480 MI

error path isolation START 400
error recovery procedures, drive (sense byte 8) SENSE 140
error register A (ERA) and (ERAH) bit definitions OF 50
error register B (ERB) and (ERBH) bit definitions OF 55
error registers, MO support diskette register display/aller SOISK 126
error screens, support diagnostics DlAG 6
error, MO support diskette control unit scan rings SOISK 131
error, message display PANEL 30
errors, XR detected OPER 70
ESO grounding wrist strap for electrostatic discharge PLAN 6
examples, microprocessor to status store to channel adapter
communication OPER 205
exception report tape, subsystem
description MSG 100
example MSG 200
field definitions MSG 201
limit controls MSG 105
external drive address sense bits SENSE 160
external load resistor panel
removal and replacement (with BM 6460006) CARR-DR 360
removal and replacement, 50 Hz (without BM 6460006) CARR-DR 368
removal and replacement, 60 Hz (without BM 6460006) CARR-DR 365
external register bus addressing and data pattern test, diagnostic routine
EE85 OIAG 400
external registers
address cross-reference tables, description of OF 3
addressing OPER 65
addressing, description of OF 3
bit definitions
buffer channel SARS register (BCSS) OF 20
buffer channel status and error register (BCSE) OF 15
buffer device pointer high register (BOPH) OF 30
buffer device status and error register (BOSE) OF 20
buffer diagnostic 0 register (BOGO) OF 25
buffer diagnostic 1 register (BOG 1) OF 25
buffer wrap register (BWRP) OF 30
channel error register (CER) OF 35
channel request register (CRR) bit definitions OF 40
device status/error register (OSE) OF 45
error register A (ERA) and (ERAH) OF 50
error register B (ERB) and (ERBH) OF 55
external register address register (XRA) OF 85
maintenance data in register (MOl) OF 55
maintenance data out register (MOO) OF 60
maintenance status byte register (MSB) OF 60
maintenance tag in register (MTI) OF 60
maintenance tag out register (MTO) OF 62
processor control register (peR) OF 65
processor error register (PER) OF 65
processor reset register (PRR) OF 65
processor status register (PSR) OF 70
read control register (RCR) OF 70
read diagnostic control register (ROC) OF 70
read error register (RER) OF 75
read pattern register (RPR) OF 80
read residual count register (RRC) OF 80
read status register (RSR) OF 82
write control register (WCR) OF 82
buffer control card OF 5
data flow/error detection OPER 65
diagram, data flow/error detection OPER 75
drive adapter card OF 5
drive, description of OF 155
maintenance adapter card OF 5
maintenance control register (MCR) OF 55
maintenance data out register (MOO) OF 60
maintenance status byte register (MSB) OF 60
microprocessor card OF 10

operation OPER 65
read data flow and read control card OF 10
status store OF 10
write control register (WCR) OF 82
write data flow card OF 10
XRA value to register name cross-reference table
extractor, card PLAN 5
E010 basic control unit tests, description OIAG 2

OF 12

fail indication. IML PANEL 7
failure lOs
basic tape motion test, routine EEA2 OIAG SOO
channel adapter function test, routine EE64 OIAG 320
channel interface wrap test, routine EE62 OIAG 300
control unit to drive bus and tag test, routine EE43 OIAG 160
control unit to drive bus out driver warp test, diagnostic routine
EE42 OIAG 150
controt unit to drive serial test, routine EE44 OIAG 170
data buffer controls routine EE33 OIAG 110
data buffer data path test, routine EE32 OIAG 100
external register bus addressing and data pattern test, routine
EE85 OIAG 400
interrupt level test, routine EE13 OIAG 55
long loop write to read test, routine EE54 OIAG 220
processor external register test, routine EE14 OIAG 65
processor function test, routine EE12 OIAG 50
scope loop utility, routine EEFO OIAG 600
short loop write to read pattern test, routine EE52 OIAG 200
short loop write to read timing test, routine EE53 OIAG 218
status store order test, routine EE93 OIAG 460
write/read exerciser, routine EEA3 OIAG 510
write/read exerciser, routine EEA4 OIAG 550
write/read RAM storage test, routine EE92 OIAG 450
failures, procedure tor intermittent PLAN 55
fault symptom code
actions to take START 325
caused by other than 3480 hardware failures START 100
determining START 300
fault symptom code, developing a SPROC 3
fault symptom index
atler USing FSI 2
cable group list, using the FSI 200
description ot contents FSI 2
table FSI 3
features, optional INTRO 5
feed assembly LOC 171
feed assembly removal and replacement CARR-DR 2950
field wire net lists, how to read graphic format LGNO 80
file protect gauge PLAN 6
file protect sense bit SENSE 110
file protect switch
adjustment CARR-DR 90
check CARR-DR 90
description CART 5
location LOC 95
removal and replacement CARR-DR 90
file reel clutch description CART 5
file reel motor
location LOC IDS
removal and replacement CARR-OR 30
liIe reel tachometer (tach 2) introduction INTRO 51
final checkout
offline checkout, dual control unit subsystem (with BM
6460460) INST 81

INDEX 6

EC A47957

.t) Copyroght IBM Corp. 1984, 1985, 1986. 1987

:)
"

1

",

. ,\

,

'\

"

')
\.

1

tl

.. ,1

{)

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

Index

INDEX 7

offline checkout. dual control unit subsystem (without 8M
6460460) INST 381
offline checkout. single control unit (with 8M 6460460) INST 74
offline checkout, single control unit (without 8M 6460460) INST 374
first tape unit installation (with 8M 6460006) INST 11
first tape unit installation (without 8M 6460006) INST 311
fix message. MD MD 30
forced error logging MSG 411
forced error logging/permanent error summary reports
example MSG 205
field definitions MSG 206
use of SDISK 145
format. sense data
description SENSE 100
format 19
bytes 16 through 23 description SENSE 150
bytes 24 through 31 description SENSE 160
bytes 24 through 31. table SENSE 155
bytes 4 through 7. description SENSE 130
bytes 4 through 7. table SENSE 125
bytes 8 through 15 description SENSE 140
bytes 8 through 15. table SENSE 135
summary SENSE 110
format 20
bytes 16 through 23 description SENSE 150
bytes 24 through 31 description SENSE 160
bytes 24 through 31. table SENSE 155
bytes 4 through 7. description SENSE 130
bytes 4 through 7. table SENSE 125
bytes 8 through 15 description SENSE 140
bytes 8 through 15. table SENSE 135
summary SENSE 110
format 21
bytes 4 through 7. description SENSE 130
bytes 4 through 7. table SENSE 125
summary SENSE 110
format. tape OPER 85
'format, tape data record OPER 85
forward space block command OPER 165
forward space file command OPER 165
from and to connectors. cable group list FSI 200
FRU listing CARR-DR 1-7
FRU listing by alphabetical sequence CARR-CU 1-8, CARR-DR 1-8
FRU number. cable group list FSI 200
FRU selection procedure CARR-DR 4
function test
channel adapter DIAG 320
processor DIAG 50
functional area external registers, description of OF 3
functions. description of
control unit INTRO IS, OPER 15
tape unit INTRO 45
fuse (Fl) LED, control unit ac power supply panel PWR 15
fuses
control unit
loeation, ac power supply LOC 55, LOC 60
locations, dc power supply LOC 35
loader fuses CARR-DR 2880
removal and replacement CARR-DR 960, CARR-CU 1470
tape unit dc power supply
locations (with 8M 6460006) LOC 90
locations (without 8M 6460006) LOC 80
fuses continue to blow, tape unit PWR 30

3480 MI

EC A47957

.\:: Copyright IBM Corp 1984. 1965. 1986 1987

gate fan cab;", control unit
removal and replacement CARR-CU 1650
gauge, pressure/vacuum PLAN 5
get operation timing chart. MD to MA communication path OPER 81
glossary GLOSS 1
graphic symbols and lines LGND 5
ground wire check, machine (with 8M 6460460 or 6460006) INST 6
ground wire check, machine (without 8M 6460460 or 6460006) INST 306
group number, cable group list FSI 200

hardware control unit information sense byte SENSE 160, SENSE 190
hardware error code sense byte SENSE 150
hardware permanent error analysis MSG 370
hardware temporary errors MSG 410
head and guide assembly
checking the connectors CARR-DR 130
cleaning manually CARR-DR 130
cleaning without the cleaning cartridge PLAN 6
compliant guide, removal and replacement CARR-DR 2770
location LOC 100
removal and replacement CARR-DR 130
head tape guide
left
removal and replacement CARR-DR 2280
right
removal and replacement CARR-DR 2290
height, control unit and tape unit INTRO 5
hex all, MD support diskette status store display SDISK 121
hex display, MD support diskette control unit scan rings SDISK 131
hold out line operation, channel to control unit interface OPER 190
hose clamp tool for air pressure hoses, illustration of PLAN 6
hose, clamping the plenum supply CARR-DR 3-1
host response, message display PANEL 30
how MD messages are generated MD 30

I/O cable installation (with 8M 6460460) INST 110
I/O cable installation (without 8M 6460460) INST 410
I/O tailgate connector assembly location (with 8M 6460460) LOC 45
I/O tailgate connector assembly location (without 8M 6460460) LOC 40
identification code table, diagnostic DIAG 3
identifier, system console message MSG 10
identifying parts LGND 10
IML
See initial microprogram load (IML)
IML diskette drive
See diskette drive
IML diskette drive, removal and replacement CARR-CU 860
IML switch description PANEL 10
in stack sensor removal and replacement CARR-DR 2910
indicator
attention OPER 240, PANEL 40
power PANEL 40
indicators and switches PANEL 10, PANEL 14, PANEL 15
indicators, MD keyboard/display MD 20
information message, MD MD 30
initiat microprogram load (IML)

description INTRO 10
diskette, about CARR-CU 2250
operation OPER 60
procedure PANEL 7
writing a message into address 80 and 83 OPER 142
initial microprogram load or power-on reset failure EAD 4000
initial selection sequence from the control unit to the drive EAD 41
initial selection, control unit to drive operation OPER 185
Inlet filter
location (with 8M 6460006) LOC 120
location, 50 Hz (without 8M 6460006) LOC 115
location, 60 Hz (without 8M 6460006) LOC 110
removal and replacement (with 8M 6460006) CARR-DR 330
removal and replacement (without 8M 6460006) CARR-DR 335
input stack assembly removal and replacement CARR-DR 2900
Input/output instructions OPER 150
inspection procedures
completion report (with 8M 6460460 or 6460006) INSP 60
completion report (without 8M 6460460 or 6460006) INSP 160
control unit
ac power supply (with 8M 6460460) INSP 40, INSP 65
ac power supply (without 8M 6460460) INSP 140, INSP 165
dc power supply (with 8M 6460460) INSP 45
dc power supply (without 8M 6460460) INSP 145
inside (with 8M 6460460) INSP 35, INSP 55
inside (without 8M 6460460) INSP 135, INSP 155
outside (with 8M 6460460 or 6460006) INSP 15
outside (without 8M 6460460 or 6460006) INSP 115
education (with 8M 6460460 or 6460006) INSP 10
education (without 8M 6460460 or 6460006) INSP 110
general instructions (with 8M 6460460 or 6460006) INSP 10
general instructions (without 8M 6460460 or 6460006) INSP 110
preparation (with 8M 6460460 or 6460006) INSP 15
preparation (without 8M 6460460 or 6460006) INSP 115
tape unit
ac grounding diagram (with 8M 6460006) INSP 70
ac grounding diagram (without 8M 6460006) INSP 170
dc power supplies (with 8M 6460006) INSP 32
dc power supplies (without 8M 6460006) INSP 132
inside (with 8M 6460006) INSP 20, INSP 32
inside (without 8M 6460006) INSP 120, INSP 132
outside (with 8M 6460460 or 6460006) INSP 15
outside (without 8M 6460460 or 6460006) INSP 115
installation
adding tape units to an installed subsystem (with 8M 6460460 or
6460006) INST 135
adding tape units to an installed subsystem (without 8M 6460460 or
6460006) INST 435
additional tape units (with 8M 6460460 or 6460006) INST 20
additional tape units (without BM 6460460 or 6460006) INST 320
analyzing drives with the MD (with 8M 6460460 or 6460006) INST 90
analyzing drives without the MD (without 8M 6460460 or
6460006) INST 390
channel wrap test (with 8M 6460460) INST 100
channel wrap test (without 8M 6460460) INST 400
control unit (with 8M 6460460) INST 10
control unit (without 8M 6460460) INST 310
dual control unit communications cable (with 8M 6460460) INST 30
dual control unit communications cable (without 8M
6460460) INST 330
first tape unit (with 8M 6460006) INST 11
first tape unit (without BM 6460006) INST 311
overview chart (with 8M 6460460 or 6460006) INST 4
overview chart (without 8M 6460460 or 6460006) INST 304
radio frequency interference frame pans and end plates (with BM
6460460 or 6460006) INST 130
radio frequency interference shield (without 8M 6460460 or
6460006) INST 430

reporting (with 8M 6460460 or 6460006) INST 131
reporting (without 8M 6460460 or 6460006) INST 431
tools and test equipment (with 8M 6460460 or 6460006) INST 4
tools and test equipment (without 8M 6460460 or 6460006) INST 304
installing adapter cable assembly part number 8576623 or
8576624 INST 500
integrated logic probe
procedure for using PLAN 65
interconnection checks, device CARR-DR 3-3
interconnection sequence, serial OPER 188
interface assignments, MD support diskette status store
display SDISK 121
interlock spring
removal and replacement CARR-DR 190
intermittent failures, procedure for PLAN 55
internal clocks on the write data card EAD 30
interposer cable and connector
removal and replacement (without 8M 6460006) CARR-DR 2690
interrupt level test, diagnostic routine EE13 DIAG 55
interrupt, MD support diskette control unit scan rings SDISK 131
intervention required sense bit SENSE 110

jumper, power supply
checks, installation (with 8M 6460460) INST 55
checks, installation (without 8M 6460460) INST 355
control unit ac power supply CARR-CU 1440
control unit dc power supply CARR-CU 1450
drive dc power supply (with 8M 6460006) CARR-DR 950
drive dc power supply (without 8M 6460006) CARR-DR 955
Jl-J2 connectors location, drive (with 8M 6460006) LOC 120
Jl-J20 locations, control unit dc power supply LOC 35
Jl-J4 connectors location, drive, 50 Hz (without 8M 6460006) LOC 115
Jl-J4 connectors location, drive, 60 Hz (without 8M 6460006) LOC 110

keyboard/display, maintenance device
keys, graphic symbol LGND 5

MD 10, MD 20

latch interlock
removal and replacement CARR-DR 1270
latch spring
removal and replacement CARR-DR 160
LOT
See logical device table
leader block
description CART 5
replacement procedure CART 20
separated from tape, example CART 10-1
leader block and threader pin
at the cartridge latch assembly
cartridge removal procedure CART 16
example CART 10-3
in machine reel hub
cartridge removal procedure CART 12
example CART 10-2
stopped in tape path

INDEX 7

INDEX 8

Index
cartridge removal procedure CART 14
example CART 10-2
leader block replacement kit PLAN 6
LED positions on the message display PANEL 30
left guide bearing hose
removal and replacement CARR-DR 450
left input rail assembly removal and replacement CARR-DR 2930
length, tape INTRO 5
.
limit controls, EREP MSG 105
lines, MD to/from MA communication path signal OPER 80
listing, FRU CARR-DR 1-7
load assembly CART 17, LOC 170
load assembly removal and replacement CARR-DR 2820
load balancing in a dual control unit subsystem OPER 140
load complete sensor removal and replacement CARR-OR 2840
load display command OPER 165
load motor removal and replacement CARR-OR 2830
load time, tape transport INTRO 5
load/open switch, maintenance device MO 10
loader
automatic cartridge LGND 46, LGND 47, LGND 48, OPER 240,
PANEL 40
control card LOC 171, OPER 240
control panel LOC 170
mechanical assembly LOC 171,OPER 240
loader control card removal and replacement CARR-DR 2810
loader fuses removal and replacement CARR-DR 2880
loader mechanical assembly CARR-DR 2850, LOC 171
loader operator panel removal and replacement CARR-OR 2980
loader signal cable removal and replacement CARR-OR 2860
loader, automatic cartridge INSP 56,INSP 156
loading tape OPER 55
loading the support diskette, MD SDISK 100
local mode diagram, control unit ac power PWR 36
local mode MAP 110, +24V PWR 110-1
local power enable switch description PANEL 10
local/remote power panel
connectors J 1 and J2 LOC 50
location LOC 50
removal and replacement CARR-CU 840
local/remote power switch PANEL 10
local/remote switch, location LOC 50
locate block command OPER 165
locate block function failed sense bit SENSE 110
locating parts in the 3480 documentation LGND 15
location
locations
cable group list FSI 200
control unit cables, listing CARR-CU 157
control unit logic boards and cards LOC 15
loader mechanical assembly LOC 170, LOC 171
logic board
card locations identification LOC 10
control unit
card locations LOC 15
removal and replacement, Al CARR-CU 1390
removal and replacement, A2 CARR-CU 1400
layout LOC 5
pin locations LOC 5
voltage regulator card in OlA-Al INTRO 20
02A-A 1, drive
location LOC 130
removal and replacement CARR-DR 580
logic board layout pin side, tape unit LOC 135
logic card
control unit
removal and replacement CARR-CU 1110
drive
removals and replacements

3480 MI

location charts, how to read graphic format LGNO 60
location identification LOC 10
plug lists, how to read graphic format LGND 60
logic diagrams
dot ORs of output lines. how to read graphic format LGNO 75
example LGND 70
how to read graphic symbols LGNO 55
layout deSCription LGND 60
logic pages, cable group list FSI 200
logic probe, integrated PLAN 5
logical address switch
cable connector location (with BM 6460006) LOC 120
cable connector location, 50 Hz (without BM 6460006) LOC 115
cable connector location, 60 Hz (without BM 6460006) LOC 110
setting (with BM 6460006) INST 50
setting (without BM 6460006) INST 350
logical block position sense bits SENSE 130
logical components of the tape unit OPER 40
logical device table (LDT) DF 125
logical pins, how to read graphic format LGND 70
logs
diagnostic hardware error log (OGHELO) OF 117
long loop write to read test OIAG 220
loop utility, scope DIAG 600
loop write to read
data flow diagram OPER 115
description, data flow OPER 110
long OPER 110
long test, routine EE54 OIAG 220
short OPER 110
shorl timing test, routine EE53 OIAG 218
loose wrap test, tape OPER 55

MA
See maintenance adapter
machine ground wire check (with BM 6460460 or 6460006) INST 6
machine ground wire check (without BM 6460460 or 6460006) INST 306
machine reel
assembly location LOC 100
flange, lower
removal and replacement CARR-DR 50
flange, upper
removal and replacement CARR-DR 540
hub
removal and replacement CARR-DR 610
motor and hub mount
location LOC 105
removal and replacement CARR-DR 40
tach sensor A
adjustment CARR-DR 40, CARR-DR 2250
introduction INTRO 51
removal and replacement CARR-DR 2250
tach sensor 8
adjustment CARR-DR 40, CARR-DR 2260
introduction INTRO 51
removal and replacement CARR-DR 2260
tape guide
removal and replacement CARR-OR 2270
magnetic tape
attachment to cartridge procedure CART 30
conditions when unable 10 remove cartridge 'ro'm-drive
how to identify CART 10
leader block and threader pin at cartridge latch
assembly CART 10-3

CARR-OR 640

leader block and threader pin in the machine reel
hub CART 10-2
leader block and threader pin stopped in the tape
path CART 10-2
leader block separated, example CART 10-1
pullen out of cartridge. example CART 10-1
drive clocks EAD 80
pulled out of cartridge, example CART 10-1
magnetic tape reattachment to cartridge procedure CART 30
mainline circuit breaker (CB1). control unit PWR 15
maintenance adapter
card
clocks EAD 70
location LOC 15
removal and replacement CARR-CU 1110
commands, MD support diskette utilities SDISK 160
external registers OF 5
introduction INTRO 20
operation OPER 30
registers
maintenance data in (MDI) OF 55
maintenance data out (MDO) DF 60
maintenance status byte (MSB) DF 60
maintenance tag in (MTI) DF 60
maintenance tag out (MTO) DF 62
to/from MD communication OPER 80
maintenance control register (MCR) bit definitions DF 55
maintenance data in register (MDI) bit definitions DF 55
maintenance data out register (MDO) OF 60
maintenance device
See MD
maintenance device command byte transfer, maintenance adapter card to
microprocessor card EAD 71
maintenance device to maintenance adapter timing EAD 71
maintenance information description by volume PLAN 10, PLAN 11
maintenance package summary
description PLAN 25
diagram PLAN 30
product support diagram PLAN 50
maintenance package, support SPROC 2
maintenance starting point START 10
maintenance status byte register (MSB) DF 60
maintenance summary, 3480 PLAN 5
maintenance tag in register (MTI)
bit definitions DF 60
maintenance tag out register (MTO)
bit definitions DF 62
major bus lines, graphic symbol LGND 5
making the drive ready PANEL 5
manifold-in pressure hose
removal and replacement, 50 Hz CARR-DR 378
removal and replacement, 60 Hz CARR-DR 370
manifold-in vacuum hose assembly
removal and replacement, 50 Hz CARR-DR 388
removal and replacement, 60 Hz CARR-OR 380
MAPs, power
100. problem determination PWR 100-1
110, t 24 V, local mode PWR 110-1
120, +24 V, remote mode PWR 120-1
130, + 24 V control voltage PWR 130-1
150, convenience outlet PWR 150-1
190, power restart PWR 190-1
200, drive dc power (single drive) analysis procedure PWR 200-1
210, drive dc power (same symptom both drives) PWR 210-1
400, control unit dc power PWR 400-1
410, + 1.7 V dc regulator, 01A-Al-T2 PWR 410-1
420, control unit + 5 Volt CB tripped PWR 420-1
430, control unit -5 Volt CB tripped PWR 430-1

440, control unit + 8.5 Volt fuse blows PWR 440-1
mark in line operation, channel to control unit interface OPER 190
mark out line operation, channel to control unit interface OPER 190
mask value. MD support diskette utilities, trace/match control SDISK 146
materials needed for inspection (with 8M 6460460 or 6460006) INSP 10
materials needed for inspection (without BM 6460460 or
6460006) INSP 110
MCR
See maintenance control register
MD
analyzing drives with the MD (with BM 6460460 or 6460006) INST 90
analyzing drives without the MD (without BM 6460460 or
6460006) INST 390
as main maintenance tool PLAN 5
cable group to maintenance adapter FSI 200
configuring the support diskette (with BM 6460460 or
6460006) INST 90
configuring the support diskette (without 8M 6460460 or
6460006) INST 390
connector location LOC 50
description MD 10
determining the control unit to MD connection START 401.
START 420
education course MD 10
how to use without the 3480 MD 40
internal adapter error detection OPER 80
keyboard/display
description and illustration MD 20
overview MD 10
menu options MD 50
messages MD 30, MD 32
reference key SDISK 131
serializer/deserializer OPER 30
to maintenance adapter communication path OPER 80
to maintenance adapter communication path error
checking OPER 80
to maintenance adapter communication path operations OPER 81
to maintenance adapter diagnostic DIAG 2, DIAG 20
to maintenance adapter timing EAD 71
MOl
See maintenance data in register
MOO
See maintenance data out register
mechanical assembly removal and replacement, loader CARR-DR 2850
mechanical assembly, loader LOC 170,OPER 240
menu, MD
message. example MD 30
options list MD 50
message display
board
removal and replacement CARR-DR 600
board to switch board cable
removal and replacement CARR-DR 2130
cable
removal and replacement (message display to SL T Panel) (witl1
8M 6460006) CARR-DR 2110
removal and replacement (SL T Panel to logic board) (with 8M
6460006) CARR-DR 2113
removal and replacement (without BM 6460006) CARR-DR 2115
connectors location, drive, 50 Hz (without 8M 6460006) LOC 115
connectors location, drive, 60 Hz (without 8M 6460006) LOC 110
dc power cable
removal and replacement (with BM 6460006) CARR-DR 900
removal and replacement (without BM 6460006) CARR-DR 905
description OPER 40
description of messages PANEL 30
LEO
description (with 8M 6460006) PANEL 15

INDEX 8

EC A47957

© Copyright IBM Corp.

fl
'I

1984 1985. 1986. 1987

.'

....

,\

.,

1,

...

,,

"
.~

",

,
"
,

\

,"
1

,1

,.

• •
I

i

,l

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o
INDEX 9

Index
description (without 8M 6460006) PANEL 14
removal and replacement CARR-DR 210
message formats. system console
condition code 3/no path available MSG 10
device intervention required MSG 10
message identifier. system console MSG 10
messages, MO MO 30, MO 32
meter in line operation, channel to control unit inierface OPER 190
microprocessor
card
location LOC 15
removal and replacement CARR-CU 1110
clocks EAO 6
commands, MO support diskette utilities SOISK 155
control, MO support diskette utilities SOISK 140, SOISK 150
external register address register (XRA) OF 85
external registers OF 10
introduction INTRO 20
registers
channel card address layout OPER 215
channel card control layout OPER 215
"hannel data layout OPER 215
error register A (ERA) and (ERAH) OF 50
error register B (ERB) and (ERBH) OF 55
processor control register (PCR) OF 65
processor error register (PER) OF 65
processor status register (PSR) OF 70
to channel adapter operation OPER 200
to status store operation OPER 200
. to status store, to channel adapter data flow diagram OPER 215
mIcroprocessor/control storage INTRO 20
minor bus lines, graphic symbol LGNO 5
m!sceli'aneous inside inspection, tape unit (with BM 6460006) INSP 32
mIscellaneous inside inspection, tape unit (without BM 6460006) INSP 132
mode selection switch PANEL 40
mode set command OPER 165
mode switch location LOC 50
models of the MO MO 10
modes of writing data INTRO 22
mOlion control
description OPER 130
diagram OPER 125
drive transport INTRO 51
motor
load CARR-DR 2830
motor control, digital servo card OPER 130
moving data OPER 65
MTI
See maintenance tag in register (MTI)
MTO
See maintenance tag out register (MTO)
multiple logic diagrams for one card, how to read graphic
symbols LGNO 60

net to pin list, how to read graphic format LGNO 80
no trouble found EAO 5070
no-operation (NOP) command OPER 165
normal/test switch description PANEL 10
not capable sense bit SENSE 110
number of tracks on tape INTRa 5

3480 MI

o

EC A47957

© Copyright IBM Corp. ,984. '985 1986. 1987

OBR edit report, EREP
description MSG 100
example MSG 230
field definitions MSG 231
oH-page connectors, graphic symbol LGNO 5
OL Ts (online tests) after installation (with 8M 6460460 or
6460006) INST 131
OL Ts (online tests) alter installation (without BM 6460460 or
6460006) INST 431
on-page connectors, graphic symbol LGNO 5
online tests descriptions PLAN 60
online/oHline switch
description (with BM 6460006) PANEL 15
description (without BM 6460006) PANEL 14
location (with BM 6460006) LOC 75
location (without 8M 6460006) LOC 70
removal and replacement (with BM 6460006) CARR-DR 1040
removal and replacement (without BM 6460006) CARR-DR 1045
open operation timing chart, MO to MA communication path OPER 81
operating characteristics, data channel path INTRO 5
operating systems INTRO 5
operating the drive PANEL 5
operating the MO MO 40
operational in line operation, channel to control unit interface OPER 190
operational out line operation, channel to control unit interface OPER 190
operational overview of the control unit OPER 15
operations table, control unit (CUT) OF 105
operations, introduction OPER 5
operator action message definition MSG 10
operator information message, system console message MSG 15
operator intervention, sense byte 3 SENSE 120
operator panel, control unit
location LOC 50
operator panel, drive
removal and replacement CARR-DR 2-6
switch board
removal and replacement CARR-DR 1090
switch locations (with BM 6460006) LOC 75
switch locations (without BM 6460006) LaC 70
operator panel, loader CARR-DR 2980
operator panel, maintenance device MO 10
operator setup panel
control unit PANEL 10
location LOC 50
optional feature, additional channel interface INTRO 30
optional features INTRO 5
OSIVS/MVS system console messages
error description list MSG 20
operator action message
definition MSG 10
operator information message
definition MSG 15
oscilloscope PLAN 5
oscilloscope scoping procedure PLAN 65
out of sequence record sense bit SENSE 110
outlet MAP, convenience PWR 150-1
output current selection + 5 V dc location, control unit dc power
supply LaC 35
output filter
location (with 8M 6460006) LOC 120
location, 50 Hz (without BM 6460006) LaC 115
location, 60 Hz (without BM 6460006) LOC 110
removal and replacement (with 8M 6460006) CARR-DR 320
removal and replacement, 50 Hz (without 8M 6460006) CARR-DR 328
removal and replacement, 60 Hz (without 8M 6460006) CARR-DR 325

output stack assembly LOC 171
output stack assembly removal and replacement
output stack up position sensor CARR-DR 2960
overrun sense bit SENSE 110

CARR-DR 2970

panel
ac power CB, tape unit (with 8M 6460006) PANEL 15
ac power CB, tape unit (without BM 6460006) PANEL 14
ac power supply, control unit PWR 15
operator, drive (with BM 6460006) PANEL 15
operator, drive (without BM 6460006) PANEL 14
switCh, drive (with 8M 6460006) PANEL 15
switCh, drive (without BM 6460006) PANEL 14
panel, loader operator CARR-DR 2980
parallel/serial interconnection OPER 130
parity error detection CPER 80
path group
10 table (PGT) OF 140
map (PGM) OF 135
pathing commands test routine description, OLT PLAN 60
paths, data channel operating characteristics INTRO 5
PCR
See processor control register
PER
See processor error register
permanent error summary, EREP
description MSG 100
example MSG 205
field definitions MSG 206
permanent error, sense byte 3 SENSE 120
permanent/recovered error summary report, EREP
example (EREP 3.2) MSG 220
field definitions (EREP 3.2) MSG 221
PGM
See path group map
PGT
See path group 10 table
physical address switch
location (with 8M 6460006) LOC 120
location (without 8M 6460006) LaC 95
removal and replacement (with BM 6460006) CARR-DR 1290
removal and replacement (without BM 6460006) CARR-DR 1295
setting (with 8M 6460006) INST 50
setting (without BM 6460006) INST 350
physical pins, how to read graphic format LGNO 70
pin to net list, how to read graphic format LGNO 80
plenum assembly and pressure switch
location LaC 100
removal and replacement CARR-DR 410
plenum supply hose
removal and replacement CARR-DR 390
plenum supply hose, clamping procedure CARR-DR 3-1
plunger spring
remo'/al and replacement CARR-DR 170
pneumatic system diagram (with 8M 6460006) PNEU 3
pneumatic system diagram (without BM 6460006) PNEU 103
pneumatics
checkout procedure (with BM 6460006) PNEU 30
checkout procedure (without 8M 6460006) PNEU 130
failure in the primary pneumatics system (with 8M 6460006) PNEU 12
failure in the primary pneumatics system (without BM
6460006) PNEU 112
locations (with 8M 6460006) LaC 120
locations, 50 Hz (without 8M 6460006) LOC 115

locations, 60 Hz (without 8M 6460006) LaC 110
operation OPER 45
pneumatics problem on a single drive (with BM 6460006) PNEU 20
pneumatics problem on a single drive (without 8M
6460006) PNEU 120
system measurements (with 8M 6460006) PNEU 5
system measurements (without BM 6460006) PNEU 105
vacuum checks (with 8M 6460006) PNEU 30
vacuum checks (without 8M 6460006) PNEU 130
port buffer adapter cable group from channel adapter FSI 200
positioning
drive transport INTRO 51
motion control OPER 130
power
+ 1.7 V dc regulator, 01A-Al-T2 MAP 410 PWR 410-1
+24 V dc
diagram PWR 40
local mode MAP PWR 110-1
MAP PWR 130-1
remote mode MAP PWR 120-1
+ 5 V dc distribution diagram PWR 42
+ 8.5 V dc distribution diagram PWR 48
-5 V dc distribution diagram PWR 46
ac overview diagram PWR 32
ac power supply panel PWR 15
control unit
ac power, local mode diagram PWR 36
ac power, remote mode diagram PWR 38
dc power MAP PWR 400-1
functional area description OPER 30
convenience outlet PWR 150-1
dc control diagram PWR 50
dc overview diagram PWR 34
dc test tool
description PLAN 5
used without the control unit dc power supply PWR 10
used without the tape unit dc power supply PWR 12
verification procedure PWR 10, PWR 12
drive dc (single drive) analysis procedure MAP 200 PWR 200-1
drive dc power (same symptom both drives), MAP 210 PWR 210-1
introduction PWR 5
jumper checks, control unit dc (with 8M 6460460) INST 55
jumper checks, control unit dc (without BM 6460460) INST 355
locations, control unit dc LOC 35
mainline circuit breaker (CB1) PWR 15
problem determination, MAP 100 PWR 100-1
restart MAP PWR 190-1
sequencing OPER 60
tape unit
fuses continue to blow PWR 30
logical component OPER 40
voltage tolerance tables PWR 20
power amplifier board
connector locations LOC 125
introduction INTRO 50
location LOC 105
operation OPER 40
removal and replacement CARR-DR 590
power cable LOC 170
power cable removal and replacement CARR-DR 2860, CARR-DR 2880
power indicator OPER 240, PANEL 40
power off and on procedure
drive CARR-DR 8
tape unit CARR-DR 8
power on/off switch and indicator· description PANEL 10
power supply
introduction INTRO 20
see jumper, power supply

INDEX 9

INDEX 10

Index
60 Hz and 50 Hz Japan
power-on-resetlunder-voltage detector introduction INTRO 20
power/POR card
location LOC 15
removal and replacement CARR-CU 1260
power. removing for relocate or discontinue (with BM 6460460 or
6';60006) INST 140
power. ramoving for relocate or discontinue (without BM 6460460 or
6460006) INST 440
preamplifier card
introduction INTRO 50
location LOC 130
logical components OPER 40
predictive maintenance overview MSG 350
preparation
for Installation (with BM 6460460 or 6460006) INST 4
for installation (without BM 6460460 or 6460006) INST 304
for safety inspection (with BM 6460460 or 6460006) INSP 15
for safety inspection (without BM 6460460 or 6460006) INSP 115
pressure hose assembly
removal and replacement (with BM 6460006) CARR-DR 340
removal and replacement, 50 Hz (without BM 6460006) CARR-DR 348
removal and replacement, 60 Hz (without BM 6460006) CARR-DR 345
pressure loss analysis procedure
air pressure loss (with BM 6460006) PNEU 10
air pressure loss (without BM 6460006) PNEU 110
pneumatics problem on a single drive (with BM 6460006) PNEU 20
pneumatics problem on a single drive (without BM
6460006) PNW 120
pressure measurement. pneumatic (with BM 6460006) PNEU 5
pressure measurement, pneumatic (without BM 6460006) PNEU 105
pressure port cap
location (with BM 6460006) LOC 120
location, SO Hz (without BM 6460006) LOC 115
location, 60 Hz (without BM 6460006) LOC 110
pressure regulator adjustment (with BM 6460006) PNEU 5
presslIre regulator adjustmenl (without BM 6460006) PNEU 105
pressure sensor
removal and replacement CARR-DR 400
pressure/vacuum gauge PLAN 5
pressure/vacuum kit PLAN 5
primary key, graphic symbol LGNO 5
probe message. MO MO 30
probe. integrated logic PLAN 5
procedures
air pressure toss analysis
air pressure loss (with BM 6460006) PNEU 10
air pressure loss (withoul BM 6460006) PNEU 110
pneumatics problem on a single drive (with BM
6460006) PNEU 20
pneumatics problem on a single drive (without BM
6460006) PNEU 120
cartridge removal by hand CART 10
clamping the plenum supply hose CARR-DR 3-1
dc test tool verification PWR 10, PWR 12
end a call PLAN 60
ending drive operation PANEL 5
engineering change PLAN 60
error recovery. sense byte 8 SENSE 140
for intermittent failures PLAN 55
initial microprogram load (IML) PANEL 7
integrated logic probe PLAN 65
leader block replacement CART 20
magnetic tape attachment CART 30
no trouble found EAO 5070
operating the drive PANEL 5
operating the MO MO 40
pneumatic Checkout (with BM 6460006) PNEU 30
pneumatic checkout (without BM 6460006) PNEU 130

3480 MI

pressure measurement. pneumatic (with BM 6460006) PNEU 5
pressure measurement, pneumatic (without BM 6460006) PNEU 105
scoping (using oscilloscope) PLAN 65
support SPROC 2
vacuum adjustment (with BM 6460006) PNEU 5
vacuum adjustment (without BM 6460006) PNEU 105
vacuum measurement, pneumatic (with BM 6460006) PNEU 5
vacuum measurement. pneumatic (without BM 6460006) PNEU 105
vary offline procedure PLAN 55
processor
card
introduction INTRO 50
. location LOC 130
logical components OPER 40
control register (PCR) bit definition OF 65
error register (PER) bit definition OF 65
external register test, diagnostic routine EE14 OIAG 65
function test, diagnostic routine EE12 OIAG SO
status register (PSR) bit definition OF 70
prodtlct cable, maintenance device MO 10
product support summary diagram. maintenance PLAN 50
PSR
See processor status register
pump motor
location (with BM 6460006) lOC 120
location. SO Hz (without BM 6460006) LOC 115
location. 60 Hz (without BM 6460006) LOC 110
removal and replacement (with BM 6460006) CARR-DR 300
removal and replacement (without BM 6460006) CARR-DR 305
pump to output filter hose
removal and replacement (with BM 6460006) CARR-DR 650
removal and replacement. 50 Hz (without 8M 6460006) CARR-DR 658
removal and replacement, 60 Hz (without 8M 6460006) CARR-DR 655
pushbuttons
control unit PANEL 10
MO keyboard/display MO 20
tape unit (with BM 6460006) PANEL 15
tape unit (without BM 6460006) PANEL 14
put operation timing chart, MO to MA communication path OPER 81

question message, MO

MD 32

radio frequency interference frame pans and end plates, installing (with
BM 6460460 or 6460006) INST 130
radio frequency interference shield, installing (without BM 6460460 or
6460006) INST 430
rail assembly. left input CARR-DR 2930
rail assembly, right input CARR-DR 2940
RCR
See read control register
ROC
See read diagnostic control register
read
adapter
cables locations, drive LOC 145
connectors location, drive, 50 Hz (without BM 6460006) LOC 115
connectors location. drive, 60 Hz (without BM 6460006) LOC 110
backward test. data buffer controls diagnostic EE33 OIAG 110
blocks

buffered data flow description OPER 90
bus cable groups FSI 200
bytes processed sense bytes SENSE 170
card clocks EAO 30
clock and format card
clocks EAO SO
description OPER 25
location lOC 15
removal and replacement CARR-CU 1110
clock/dstect cards OPER 25
control area INTRO 20
control register (RCR) bit definitions OF 70
corrected sense byte SENSE 170
data bus INTRO 30
data flow
area Clocks EAO SO
control register (RCR) OF 70
diagnostic control register (ROC) OF 70
error rsgister (RER) OF 75
pattern register (RPR) OF 80
residual count register (RRC) OF 80
status register (RSR) OF 82
data flow and read control card external registers OF 10
data flow description OPER 90
data flow diagram OPER 95
detect cards I, 2, and 3
diagram, area clocks EAO 30. EAO 50
locations lOC 15
removal and replacament CARR-CU 1110
diagnostic control register (ROC) OF 70
ECC/CORR card
description OPER 25
diagram, area clocks EAO 50
location LOC 15
removal and replacement CARR-CU 1110
error regis,e, (RER) bit definitions OF 75
forward test. data buffer controls diagnostic EE33 OIAG 110
overrun test, data buffer controls diagnostic EE33 OIAG 110
pattern register (RPR) bit definitions OF 80
processed sense byte SENSE 180
recovery retry count sense byte SENSE 190
residual count register (RRC) bit definitions OF 80
skew cards 1,2. and 3
clocks EAO 50
description, functional area OPER 25
locations LOC 15
removal and replacement CARR-CU 1110
status register (RSR) bit definitions OF 82
read backward
command OPER 170
data checks sense byte SENSE 170
test. data buffer controls diagnostic EE33 OIAG 110
read block 10 command OPER 170
read buffer command OPER 170
read buffered log command OPER 175
read bus cable removal and replacement (with BM
6460006) CARR-DR 880
read bus problems EAO 5010
read cards, control unit OPER 25
read forward
command OPER 175
data checks sense byte SENSE 170
test. data buffer controls routine EE33 OIAG 110
read In signal line, MO from MA communication path OPER 80
read tape PLAN 45
read/write bus connectors location, control unit (with BM
6460460) LOC 30

reaa/wrlte bus connectors iocation, control unit (without BM
6460460) LOC 25
read/write bus connectors location. tape unit (with BM 6460006) LOC 75
read/write bus connectors location, tape unit (without BM
6460006) LOC 70
read/write operations diagram OPER 120
read/write reliability test routine description. OL T PLAN 60
reading data INTRO 22
reading speed. tape transport INTRO 5
ready/not ready switch description (with BM 6460006) PANEL 15
ready/not ready switch description (without BM 6460006) PANEL 14
real time statistical analysis and reporting system MO SO
receive message operation, control unit to control unit
communication OPER 145
rechecking actions, support procedures SPROC 4
record format. tape data OPER 85
reference message. MO MO 32
reference screen, MO support diskette register display/alter SOISK 126
register display/alter diagram, MO support diskette SOISK 125
registers. external
address register (XRA) OF 65
addressing OPER 65
buffer
channel pointer high register (BCPH) bit definitions OF 15
channel pointer low register (BCPL) bit definitions OF 15
channel SARS register (BCSS) OF 20
channel status and error (BCSE) bit definitions OF 15
device pointer high register (BDPH) bit definitions OF 30
device pointer low register (BOPL) OF 30
device status and error (BOSE) bit definitions OF 20
diagnostic 0 (BDGO) b:t definitions OF 25 .
diagnostic 1 register (BOG1) bit definitions OF 25
wrap register (BWRP) bit definitions OF 30
channel
adapter error register (CAE) bit definitions OF 33
adapter status register (CAS) bit aefinltions OF 35
card control register (CCC) OF 35
card register (CCA) OF 35
error register (CER) OF 35
request register (CRR) bit definitions OF 40
data flow/error detection OPER 65
device
control bus (OCB) bit definitions OF 40
control register (OCR) bit definitions OF 40
device level register (OlR) bit definitions OF 45
interrupt register (OIR) bit definitions OF 45
status/error (OSE) OF 45
tag register (OTR) bit definitions OF SO
diagram. data flow/error detection OPER 75
drive, description of OF 155
error register A (ERA) and (ERAH) OF SO
error register B (ERS) and (ERBH) OF 55
maintenance
data in (MOl) OF 55
data out (MOO) OF 60
status by1e register (MSB) OF 60
tag in (MTI) OF 60
tag oui (MTO) OF 62
operation OPER 65
processor
control register (PCR) OF 55
error register (PER) OF 65
read
control register (RCR) OF 70
diagnostic control register (ROC) OF 70
error register (RER) OF 75
pattern register (RPR) OF 80
residual count register (RRC) OF 80

INDEX 10

EC A47957

'C; COPYright IBM Corp. 1984 1985. 1986, 1987

f\
......,

,

.. I\

.. ,\

~

,\

~

\

)

,
",

<

"

.t
I

1

~

I

"

,•

{)

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

Index

o

o
INDEX 11

status register (RSR) Dr 82
status register (PSR) OF 70
XRA value to register name cross-reference table OF 12
registers, Mo support diskette control unit scan rings SolSK 131
regulator
adjustment (with BM 6460006) PNEU 5
adjustment (without BM 6460006) PNEU 105
location (with BM 6460006) LOC 120
location, 50 Hz (without BM 6460006) LaC 115
location, 60 Hz (without BM 6460006) LaC 110
removal and replacement (with BM 6460006) CARR-DR 310
removal and replacement, 50 Hz (without BM 6460006) CARR-DR 318
removal and replacement, 60 Hz (without BM 6460006) CARR-DR 315
relocate or dis.:ontinue subsystem (with BM 6460460 or
6460006) INST 140
relecate or discontinue subsystem (without BM 6460460 or
6460006) INST 440
remote mode
diagram, control unit ac power PWR 38
MAP 120, ... 24 V control voltage PWR 120-1
removals and replacements
ac ci ;;uit breaker/cable assembly, tape unit (with BM
6460006) CARR-DR 2180
ac circuit breaker, tape unit (without BM 6460006) CARR-DR 2185
ac distribution cable (drive) (without BM 6460006) CARR-DR 765
ac fuse Fl, control unit CARR-CU 1465
ac line cord, control unit CARR-CU 1490
ac power circuit breaker/cable assembly, tape unit (with BM
6460006) CARR-DR 2180
ac power circuit breaker, tape unit (without BM
6460006) CARR-DR 2185
ae power supply cable (without BM 6460006) CARR-DR 750
ac power supply, control unit CARR-CU 1440
ae power to gate cable CARR-CU 1770
air pressure test hose assembly (with BM 6460006) CARR-DR 2620
blower assembly, control unit CARR-CU 1500
buffer adapter card CARR-CU 1110
buffer control card CARR-CU 1110
buffer storage cards CARR-CU 1110
bus shOe cards CARR-CU 1360
cables, control unit CARR-CU 150
cables, tape unit CARR-DR 490
card, control unit, logic CARR-CU 1110
cartridge in stack sensor CARR-DR 2910
cartridge latch assembly CARR-DR 80
cartridge latched sensor CARR-DR 110
cartridge present sensor CARR-DR 100
_cartridge staged sensor CARR-DR 2920
center tape guide CARR-DR 2310
channel adapter cards CARR-CU 1110
channel address switch CARR-CU' 1970
cleaner block CARR-DR 1610
cleaner vacuum hose CARR-DR 470
compliant guide, read/write head CARR-DR 2770
compression spring CARR-DR 180
control storage array card CARR-CU 1110
control store card CARR-CU 1110
control unit ac fuse CARR-CU 1465
control unit ac line cord CARR-CU 1490
control unit ac power supply CARR-CU 1440
control unit A 1 logic board CARR-CU 1390
control unit A2 logiC board CARR-CU 1400
control unit blower assembly CARR-CU 1500
control unit cables CARR-CU 150
control unit dc fuse Fl or F2 CARR-CU 1470
control unit de power supply CARR-CU 1450
control unit de power supply to gate TB cable CARR-CU 1600
control unit gale fan cable CARR-CU 1650
control unit logic card CARR-CU 1110

3480 MI

o

EC A47957

control unit switch panel printed circuit board CARR-CU 1410
control unit thermal switch, lower CARR-CU 1430
control unit top card connector CARR-CU 1570
convoluted bellows (without BM 6460006) CARR-DR 2230
dc fuse Fl or F2, control unit CARR-CU 1470
dc power distribution (drive external) cable (with BM
6460006) CARR-DR 797
dc power distribution (drive internal) cable (with BM
6460006) CARR-DR 790
de power distribullon (drive internal) cable (without BM
6460006) CARR-DR 794
dc power distribution cable (with BM 6460006) CARR-DR 800
dc power distribution cable (without BM 6460006) CARR-DR 805
dc power supply to gate TB cable, control unit CARR-CU 1600
dc power supply, control unit CARR-CU 1450
dc power supply, drive (with BM 6460006) CARR-DR 950
dc power supply, drive (without BM 6460006) CARR-DR 955
decoupler assembly CARR-DR 120
decoupler pressure hose CARR-DR 420
decoupler vacuum hose CARR-DR 430
diskette drive CARR-CU 860
display board to switch board cable CARR-DR 2130
drive adapter card (control unit) CARR-CU 1180
drive blower assembly (with BM 6460006) CARR-DR 200
drive blower assembly (without BM 6460006) CARR-DR 205
drive control card CARR-DR 850
drive dc fuse CARR-DR 960
drive dc power supply (with BM 6460006) CARR-DR 950
drive dc power supply (without 8M 6460006) CARR-DR 955
drive logic board (02A-A 1) CARR-DR 580
drive logic cards CARR-DR 640
drive switch panel (with BM 6460006) CARR-DR 1040
drive switch panel (without 8M 6460006) CARR-DR 1045
drive thermal switch (with 8M 6460006) CARR-DR 1100
drive thermal switch (without BM 6460006) CARR-DR 1105
external load resistor panel (with BM 6460006) CARR-DR 360
external load resistor panel, 50 Hz (without 8M
6460006) CARR-DR 368
external load resistor panel, 60 Hz (without BM
6460006) CARR-DR 365
feed assembly CARR-DR 2950
file protect switch CARR-DR 90
file reel motor CARR-DR 30
fuse, drive dc CARR-DR 960
gate fan cable, control unit CARR-CU 1650
head and guide assembly CARR-DR 130
head tape guide (left) CARR-DR 2280
head tape guide (right) CARR-DR 2290
inlet filter (with BM 6460006) CARR-DR 330
inlet filter (without BM 6460006) CARR-DR 335
input stat:k assembly CARR-DR 2900
interlock spring CARR-DR 190
interposer cable and connector assembly (without BM
6460006) CARR-DR 2690
latch interlock CARR-DR 1270
latch solenoid CARR-DR 20
latch spring CARR-DR 160
leader block CART 20
left guide bearing hose CARR-DR 450
left input rail assembly CARR-DR 2930
left tape head guide CARR-DR 2280
load assembly CARR-DR 2820
load complete sensor CARR-DR 2840
load motor CARR-DR 2830
loader control card CARR-DR 2810
loader fuses CARR-DR 2880
loader mechanical assembly CARR-DR 2850
loader operator panel CARR-DR 2980

loader Signal and power cable CARR-DR 2860
local/remo'te power panel CARR-CU 840
logic board, control unit Al CARR-CU 1390
logic board, control unit A2 CARR-CU 1400
logic card, control unit CARR-CU 1110
machine reel CARR-DR 40
machine reel flange, lower CARR-DR 50
machine reel flange, upper CARR-DR 540
machine reel hub CARR-DR 610
machine reel tach sensor A CARR-DR 2250
machine reel tach sensor B CARR-DR 2260
machine reel tape guide CARR-DR 2270
maintenance adapter card CARR-CU 1110
manifold-in pressure hose, 50 Hz CARR-DR 378
manifold-in pressure hose, 60 Hz CARR-DR 370
manifold-in vacuum hose assembly, 50 Hz CARR-DR 388
manifold-in vacuum hose assembly, 60 Hz CARR-DR 380
message display board CARR-DR 600
message display cable (message display to SL T Panel) (with BM
6460006) CARR-DR 2110
message display cable (SL T Panel to logic board) (with BM
6460006) CARR-DR 2113
message display cable (without BM 6460006) CARR-DR 2115
message display dc power cable (with 6460006) CARR-DR 900
message display dc power cable (without 6460006) CARR-DR 905
message display LED CARR-DR 210
microprocessor card CARR-CU 1110
operator panel prinied circuit board CARR-CU 1420
operator panel switch board CARR-DR 1090
output filter (with BM 6460006) CARR-DR 320
output filter, 50 Hz (without BM 6460006) CARR-DR 328
output filter, 60 Hz (without BM 6460006) CARR-DR 325
output stack assembly CARR-DR 2970
output stack up position sensor CARR-DR 2960
physical address switch (with 8M 6460006) CARR-DR 1290
physical address switch (without BM 6460006) CARR-DR 1295
plenum assembly CARR-DR 410
plenum supply hose CARR-DR 390
plunger spring CARR-DR 170
power amplifier board CARR-DR 590
power/PaR card CARR-CU 1260
pressure hose assembly (with BM 6460006) CARR-DR 340
pressure hose assembly, 50 Hz (without BM 6460006) CARR-DR 348
pressure hose assembly, 60 Hz (without BM 6460006) CARR-DR 345
pressure sensor CARR-DR 400
pump motor (with BM 6460006) CARR-DR 300
pump motor (without BM 6460006) CARR-DR 305
pump to output filter hose (with 8M 6460006) CARR-DR 650
pump to output filter hose, 50 Hz (without BM 6460006) CARR-DR 658
pump to output filter hose, 60 Hz (without BM 6460006) CARR-DR 655
read bus cable (with 8M 6460006) CARR-DR 880
read clock and format card CARR-CU 1110
read detect card 1 CARR-CU 1110
read detect card 2 CARR-CU 1110
read detect card 3 CARR-CU 1110
read ECC/CORR card CARR-CU 1110
read skew buffer card 1 CARR-CU 1110
read skew buffer card 2 CARR-CU 1110
read skew buHer card 3 CARR-CU 1110
regulator (with BM 6460006) CARR-DR 310
regulator, 50 Hz (without BM 6460006) CARR-DR 318
regulator, 60 Hz (without BM 6460006) CARR-DR 315
right guide bearing hose CARR-DR 440
right input rail assembly CARR-DR 2940
right tape head guide CARR-DR 2290
service switch assembly CARR-CU 1620
shoe card CARR-CU 1360
stack low sensor CARR-DR 2890

status store basic card CARR-CU 1110
status store communication card CARR-CU 1110
switch panel printed circuit board, control unit CARR-CU 1410
tachometer sensor cable (with_EC 333293) CARR-DR 810
tachometer sensor cable (without EC 333293) CARR-DR 815
tag shoe cards CARR-CU 1360
tape lifter solenoid CARR-DR 2t60
tape lifter solenoid input hose CARR-DR 2150
tape path sensor A CARR-DR 60
tape path sensor B CARR-DR 70
tape unit ac power circuit breaker (without BM
6460006) CARR-DR 2185
tape unit ac power Circuit breaker/cable assembly (with BM
6460006) CARR-DR 2180
tape unit cables CARR-DR 490
tape unit control box switches (with BM 6460006) CARR-DR 1040
tape unit power supply blower. 50 Hz (Without BM
6460006) CARR-DR 718
tape unit power supply blower, 60 Hz (without BM
6460006) CARR-DR 710
tape unit thermal switch (end tape unit) (without BM
6460006) CARR-DR 825
tape unit thermal switch (not end tape unit) (without BM
6460006) CARR-DR 823
tape unit thermal switch (with BM 6460006) CARR-DR 820
tape unit thermal switch cable harness (end tape unit) (without BM
6460006) CARR-DR 835
~ape unit thermal switch cable harness (not end tape unit) (without BM
6460006) CARR-DR 833
tape unit thermal switch cable harness (with BM
6460006) CARR-DR 830
TCC (drive) CARR-DR 660
tension transducer CARR-DR 140
tension transducer hose CARR-DR 460
tension transducer tape guide CARR-DR 2300
terminator, write bus A (with BM 6460460) CARR-CU 1995
terminator, write bus A (without BM 6460460) CARR-CU 1990
terminator, write bus B (with BM 6460460) CARR-CU 1995
terminator, write bus B (without BM 6460460) CARR-CU 1990
thermal switch lower, control unit CARR-CU 1430
thermal switch upper, control unit CARR-CU 2240
threader assembly CARR-DR 10
top card connector, control unit CARR-CU 1570
top card connectors CARR-DR 660
UEPO switch CARR-CU 1980
vacuum distribution tee CARR-DR 2190
vacuum hose assembly (with BM 6460006) CARR-DR 350
vacuum hose assembly, 50 Hz (without BM 6460006) CARR-DR 358
vacuum hose assembly, 60 Hz (without BM 6460006) CARR-DR 355
vacuum supply hose CARR-DR 2120
vacuum test hose assembly (with BM 6460006) CARR-DR 2630
voltage regulator card CARR-CU 1110, CARR-CU 1260
write bus A terminator (with aM 6460460) CARR-CU 1995
write bus A terminator (without BM 6460460) CARR-CU 1990
write bus 8 terminator (with BM 6460460) CARR-CU 1995
write bus B terminator (without BM 6460460) CARR-CU 1990
write data card CARR-CU 1110
removing dual control unit communication cables, relooate or discontinue
subsystem (with BM 6460460) INST liO
removing dual control unit communication cables, relocate or discontinue
subsystem (without BM 6460460) INST 470
removing I/O cables, relocate or discontinue subsystem (with BM 6460460
or 6460006) INST 150
removing I/O cables, relocate or discontinue subsystem (without BM
6460460 or 6460006) INST 450
replaCing subcovers and covers (with B"" 6460460 or 6460006) lNST 130
replacing subcovers and covers (without 8M 6460460 or
6460006) INST 430

INDEX 11

INDEX 12

Index
request in line operation, channel to control unit interface OPER 190
request message, MD MD 32
RER
See read error register
reset control unit, MD support diskette register display/alter SDISK 126
reset switch
description (with 8M 6460006) PANEL 15
description (without 8M 6460006) PANEL 14
location (with 8M 6460006) LOC 75
location (without 8M 6460006) LOC 70
removal and replacement (with 8M 6460006) CARR-DR 1040
removal and replacement (without 8M 6460006) CARR-DR 1045
restart MAP 190, power PWR 190-1
rewind command OPER 175
rewind switch description (with 8M 6460006) PANEL 15
rewind switch description (without 8M 6460006) PANEL 14
rewind unload command OPER 175
rewinding tape OPER 55
RFI (with 8M 6460460 or 6460006)
See radio frequency interference frame pans and end plates, installing
RFI (without 8M 6460460 or 6460006)
See radio frequency interference shield, installing
right guide bearing hose
removal and replacement CARR-DR 440
right input rail assembly removal and replacement CARR-DR 2940
routines, diagnostic DIAG 6
RPR
See read pattern register
RRC
See read residual count register
RSR
See read status register
running offline checkout during installation
dual control unit subsystem (with 8M 6460460) INST 76, INST 78
dual control unit subsystem (without 8M 6460460) INST 376, INST 378
single control unit subsystem (with 8M 6460460) INST 70, INST 72
Single control unit subsystem (without 8M 6460460) INST 370,
INST 372
running support diagnostics DIAG 5

safety
checks (with 8M 6460460 or 6460006) INST 6
checks (without 8M 6460460 or 6460006) INST 306
control unit
ac grounding diagram (with 8M 6460460) INSP 65
ac grounding diagram (without 8M 6460460) INSP 165
ac primary power (with 8M 6460460) INSP 40
ac primary power (without 8M 6460460) INSP 140
dc power supply (with 8M 6460460) INSP 45
dc power supply (Without 8M 6460460) INSP 145
Inside (with 8M 6460460) INSP 35
inside (without 8M 6460460) INSP 135
inside miscellaneous (with 8M 6460460) INSP 55
inside miscellaneous (without 8M 6460460) INSP 155
outside (with 8M 6460460 or 6460006) INSP 15
outside (without 8M 6460460 or 6460006) INSP 115
inspection, materials needed for (with 8M 6460460 or
6460006) INSP 10
inspection, materials needed for (without 8M 6460460 or
6460006) INSP 110
instructions (with 8M 6460460 or 6460006) INSP 10
instructions (without 8M 6460460 or 6460006) INSP 110
maintenance device MD 10
preparation (with 8M 6460460 or 6460006) INSP 15

3480 MI

preparation (without 8M 6460460 or 6460006) INSP 115
tape unit
ac grounding diagram (with 8M 6460006) INSP 70
ac grounding diagram (without 8M 6460006) INSP 170
dc power supplies (with 8M 6460006) INSP 32
dc power supplies (without 8M 6460006) INSP 132
inside (with 8M 6460006) INSP 20
inside (without 8M 6460006) INSP 120
inside miscellaneous (with 8M 6460006) INSP 32
inside miscellaneous (without 8M 6460006) INSP 132
outside (with 8M 6460460 or 6460006) INSP 15
outside (without 8M 6460460 or 6460006) INSP 115
Safely inspection procedures
completion report (with 8M 6460460 or 6460006) INSP 60
completion report (without 8M 6460460 or 6460006) INSP 160
control unit
ac power supply (with 8M 6460460) INSP 40, INSP 65
ac power supply (without BM 6460460) INSP 140, INSP 165
dc power supply (with 8M 6460460) INSP 45
dc power supply (without 8M 6460460) INSP 145
inside (with 8M 6460460) INSP 35, INSP 55
inside (without 8M 6460460) INSP 135, INSP 155
outside (with 8M 6460460 or 6460006) INSP 15
outside (without BM 6460460 or 6460006) INSP 115
education (with 8M 6460460 or 6460006) INSP 10
education (without 8M 6460460 or 6460006) INSP 110
general instructions (with 8M 6460460 or 6460006) INSP 10
general instructions (without BM 6460460 or 6460006) INSP 110
preparation (with 8M 6460460 or 6460006) INSP 15
preparation (without 8M 6460460 or 6460006) INSP 115
tape unit
ac grounding diagram (with 8M 6460006) INSP 70
ac grounding diagram (without 8M 6460006) INSP 170
dc power supplies (with 8M 6460006) INSP 32
dc power supplies (without 8M 6460006) INSP 132
inside (with 8M 6460006) INSP 20, INSP 32
inside (without 8M 6460006) INSP 120, INSP 132
outside (with BM 6460460 or 6460006) INSP 15
outside (without 8M 6460460 or 6460006) INSP 115
sample logic diagram pages LGND 70
scope loop utility, diagnostic routine EEFO DIAG 600
scoping, procedure for using oscilloscope PLAN 65
secondary key, graphic symbol LGND 5
select control options, MD support diskette utilities, trace/match
control SDISK 146
select in line operation, channel to control unit interface OPER 190
select match action SOISK 146
select out line operation, channel to control unit interface OPER 190
select out line operation, control unit to drive interconnection OPER 190
selected indicator description (with 8M 6460006) PANEL 15
selected indicator description (without 8M 6460006) PANEL 14
send message operation, control unit to control unit
communication OPER 145
sense
command description OPER 175
control transfer diagram, drive adapter area clocks EAD 44
error history table (SNERRH) OF 145
10 command description OPER 175
path group 10 command description OPER 175
sense data
analysis SENSE 100
byte summary SENSE 102
description SENSE 100
format 19
byte 3, table and error codes description SENSE 115
bytes 0 through 2, description SENSE 110
bytes 0 through 2, table SENSE 105
bytes 18 through 23, table SENSE 145

bytes 24 through 31 description SENSE 160
bytes 24 through 31, table SENSE 155
bytes 4 through 7, description SENSE 130
bytes 4 through 7, table SENSE 125
bytes 8 through 15 description SENSE 140
bytes 8 through 15, table SENSE 135
summary SENSE 102
format 20
byte 3, table and error codes description SENSE 115
bytes 0 through 2, description SENSE 110
bytes 0 through 2, table SENSE 105
bytes 16 through 23, table SENSE 145
bytes 24 through 31 description SENSE 160
bytes 24 through 31, table SENSE 155
bytes 4 through 7, description SENSE 130
bytes 4 through 7, table SENSE 125
bytes 8 through 15 description SENSE 140
bytes 8 through 15, table SENSE 135
summary SENSE 102
format 21
byte 3, table and error codes description SENSE 115
bytes 0 through 2, description SENSE 110
bytes 0 through 2, table SENSE 105
bytes 16 through 23, description SENSE 180
bytes 16 through 23, table SENSE 175
bytes 24 through 31, description SENSE 190
bytes 24 through 31, table SENSE 185
bytes 4 through 7, description SENSE 130
bytes 4 through 7, table SENSE 125
bytes 8 through 15 description SENSE 170
bytes 8 through 15, table SENSE 165
summary SENSE 102
format, how to determine SENSE 100
sensor
cartridge in stack CARR-DR 2910
cartridge stageg CARR-DR 2920
load complete CARR-DR 2840
output stack up position CARR-DR 2960
stack low CARR-DR 2890
sensor removal and replacement, stack low CARR-DR 2890
sensors
tape transport, description of INTRO 51
thread path OPER 55
separation test, data buffer controls diagnostic EE33 olAG 110
sequence timing chart, initial selection OPER 185
serial data in signal line, Mo to MA communication path OPER 80
serial data out signal line, MO from MA communication path OPER 80
serial interconnection OPER 130
serial interconnection sequence, control unit to drive
operation OPER 188
serial interconnection timing chart OPER 188
serial number location, control unit (with 8M 6460460) LOC 30
serial number location, control unit (without 8M 6460460) LOC 25
serial number, tape unit (with 8M 6460006) LOC 120
serial number, tape unit, 50 Hz (without 8M 6460006) LOC 115
serial number, tape unit, 60 Hz (without 8M 6460006) LOC 110
serial sequence drive interconnections EAo 44
service action pOint, predictive maintenance MSG 350
service in line operation, channel to control unit interface OPER 190
service out line operation, channel to control unit Interface OPER 190
service representative information, message display PANEL 30
service switch assembly
removal and replacement CARR-CU 1620
set logic card switches
adapter card, control unit CARR-CU 1189
set path group 10 command OPER 175
setting addresses
control unit PANEL 12

control unit (with 8M 6460460) INST 40
control unit (without 8M 6460460) INST 340
drive PANEL 12
drive, logical (with 8M 6460006) INST 50
drive, logical (without 8M 6460006) INST 350
drive, physical (with 8M 6460006) INST 50
drive, physical (without 8M 6460006) INST 350
shift Signal line, MO to MA communication path OPER 80
short loop write to read
description OPER 110
pattern test, routine EE52 DIAG 200
liming test, routine EE53 DIAG 218
signal cable LOC 170
signal lines, Mo toltrom MA communication path OPER 80
single control unit subsystem
command execution OPER 135
configuration diagram OPER 135
diagram, theory INTRO 25
IML procedure PANEL 7
offline checkout (with 8M 6460460) INST 70, INST 72
offline checkout (without 8M 6460460) INST 370, INST 372
operation OPER 135
running support diagnostics olAG 5
setting control unit addresses (with BM 6460460) INST 40
setting control unit addresses (without 8M 6460460) INST 340
SNERRH
See sense error history table
software problems, possible START 130
special tools
descriptions PLAN 5
for installation (with 8M 6460460 or 6460006) INST 4
for installation (without 8M 6460460 or 6460006) INST 304
stack low sensor removal and replacement CARR-DR 2890
start MAP, power PWR 100-1
start of maintenance section
actions for possible non-FRU caused error codes START 130
actions to take for a fault symptom code START 325
determining a fault symptom code START 300
determining the control unit to MO connection START 401,
START 420
error path isolation START 400
error path sense byte definitions START 400
fault symptom codes caused by other than 3480 hardware
failures START 100
maintenance starting point START 10
possible EC compatibility problems START 135
possible host processor channel problems or overrun
condition START 135
possible software problems START 130
start repair, MO main menu option description MO 50
start switch PANEL 40
starting support procedures SPROC 2
status bits 0-15 description, drive OF 150
status byte
description SENSE 205
table SENSE 200
updating the RAM OPER 142
status byte register'.MSB
See maintenance
status in line operation, channel to control unit interface OPER 190
status in signal line, MO to MA communication path OPER 80
status modifier status bit SENSE 205
status out sequence. MD to MA communication path OPER 81
status out signal line, Mo from MA communication path OPER 80
status screen, support diagnostics DIAG 6
status store
basic card clocks EAD 80
cable group from channel adapter FSI 200

INDEX 12

EC A47957

C CoprrighllBM Corp. 1984, 1985. 1988. 1987

1
",

.\

"

'" ,
1

.

,
1

f\

"

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

c
INDEX 13

Index
card
Introduction INTRO 20
location LOC 15
removal and replacement CARR-CU 1110
card clocks EAD 10
channel request register (CRR) bit definitions OF 40
communication card
location LOC 15
removal and replacement CARR-CU i 110
communication card clocks EAD 60
communications without channel adapter OPER 30
display. MD support diskette SDISK 120
error condition theory EAD 5005
error description EAD 5005
external registers OF 10
external system problems EAD 5006
functional description OPER 30
introduction INTRO 20
order test. routine EE93 DIAG 460
oscilloscope information EAD 5008
sense data and diagnostic failure 10 analysis EAD 5006
statu~ store/channel adapter diagram EAD 5005
to channel adapter communications OPER 200
to channel adapter interconnection EAD 5006
to status store communication path OPER 140. OPER 145
troubleshooting guide. general EAD S006
updating RAM OPER 142
write/read RAM storage test. routine EE92 DIAG 450
storage cards. buffer
location LOC 15
removal and replacement CARR-CU 1110
subsystem
characteristics INTRO 5
component descriptions. MD support diskette SDISK 105
diagnostics DIAG 2
display/alter. MD support diske1te SDISK 105
dump. MD support diskette utilities SDISK 140. SDISK 165
exception report tape. EREP
description MSG 100
example MSG 200
field definitions MSG 201
limit controls MSG 105
features INTRO . 5
introduction INTRO 5
operating modes INTRO 5
relocate or discontinue (with 8M 6460460 or 6460006) INST 140
relocate or discontinue (without 8M 6460460 or 6460006) INST 440
vary offline procedure PLAN 55
subsystem clocks and sequences
buffer area clocks EAD 20
channel adapter area clocks
clocks to channel adapters EAD 10
clocks to status store EAD 10
control storage subsystem clocks
subsystem clocks to the microprocessor card. timing
chart EAD 6
timing chart EAD 7
XR bus and control clocks EAD 8
control unit clocks EAD 5
drive adapter area clocks
alert sequence from the drive to the control unit EAD 42
clocks to the drive-adapter card EAD 40
data transfer sequence between the control unit and the drive and
WTM. write erase gap sequence EAD 43
initial selection sequence from the control unit to the
drive EAD 41
sense controllransfer EAD 44
serial sequence drive interconnections EAD 44
drive clocks to the adapter card EAD 80

3480 MI

o

EC A47957

IC CopyrighllBM Corp.

1984. 1985. 1986. 1987

dual control unit area clocks
clocks to the status store basic card EAD 80
clocks to the status store communication card EAD 80
maintenance adapter area clocks
clocks to and from the maintenance adapter EAD 70
data byte transfer. maintenance adapter card to microprocessor
card EAD 71
maintenance device command byte transfer. maintenance adapter
card to microprocessor card EAD 71
read data flow area clocks
clocks to the read clock and format card EAD SO
clocks to the read detect cards EAD SO
clocks to the read ECC/CORR card EAD SO
clocks to the read skew buffer cards EAD SO
System/370 interface
channel interface block multiplex operation without reconnectlon
for command retry EAD 12
channol interface block multiplex operation without reconnection
for device end EAD 11
channel interface initial selection from an SIO or TIO
command EAD 11
write data flow area clocks
clocks to the read detect cards EAD 30
clocks to the write data card EAD 30
internal clOCks on the write data card EAD 30
summary
channel commands INTRO 55
maintenance package description PLAN 25
maintenance product support. diagram PLAN 50
sense bytes SENSE 102
3480 maintenance PLAN 5
support diagnostics
ending use of DIAG 7
error screens DIAG 6
flow description DIAG 5
how to use the support diagnostics. flow diagram of DIAG 4
Information supplied by DIAG 6
Introduction DIAG 2
organization DIAG 2
status screen DIAG 6
test options. how to use DIAG 7
support diskette. MD
drive command exerciser
commands DIAG 720
control options DIAG 720
details DIAG 722
diagram DIAG 721
error messages DIAG 720
introduction DIAG 2
prompting screens DIAG 725
maintenance package SDISK 100
plan SDISK 100
procedure description SDISK 100
relationship to product maintenance package SDISK 100
service panel functions
channel RAM display diagram SDISK 115
control storage display/alter SDISK 110
display subsystem configuration SDISK 105
register display/alter diagram SDISK 125
status store display diagram SDISK 120
subsystem display/alter SDISK 105
utilities. MD support diskette
microprocessor control SDISK 140. SDISK lSO
subsystem dump SDISK 140. SDISK 165
trace/match control SDISK 140
support maintenance package
description SPROC 2
developing a fault symptom code SPROC 3

end-of-call actions SPROC 4
rechecking actions SPROC 4
support procedures SPROC 2
support troubleshooting. using the fault symptom index FSI 2
suppress out line operation. channel to control unit interface OPER 190
suspend multipath reconnection command OPER 175
switch
mode selection OPER 240. PANEL 40
start OPER 240. PANEL 40
switches and indicators PANEL 10
switches and indicators (with 8M 6460006) PANEL 15
switches and indicators (without 8M 6460006) PANEL 14
switching on the power
offline checkout. dual control unit (with 8M 6460480) INST 76.
INST 78
offline checkout. dual control unit (without 8M 6460460) INST 376.
INST 378
offline checkout. single control unit (with 8M 6460460) INST 70
offline checkout. single control unit (without 8M 6460460) INST 370
sync address. scope loop utility DIAG 600
synchronize command OPER 180
syst'3m attachment locations. control unit ac power supply LOC 55.
LOC 60
system console messages. OSNS/MVS
error description list MSG 20
operator action message
definition MSG 10
operator information message
definition MSG 15
System/370 interface EAD 11

table or array name entry. MD support diskette SDISK 110
tables
command status table (CST) OF 90
control unit operations table (CUT) OF 105
device operations table (DOT) OF 120
drive external registers OF 155
external register address cross-reference
buffer control card OF 5
drive adapter card OF 5
maintenance adapter card OF 5
microprocessor card OF 10
read data flow and read control card OF 10
status store card OF 10
write data flow card OF 10
external register bit definitions OF 15
logical device table (LOT) OF 125
path group 10 table (PGT) OF 140
path group map (PGM) OF 135
sense error history table (SNERRH) OF 145
XRA value to register name cross-reference OF 12
tach sensor cable locations. drive LOC 155
tag and bus cables
cable group listings FSI 200
connecting and disconnecting CARR-CU 1360
tag shoe card
locations (with 8M 6460460) LOC 45
. locations (without 8M 6460460) LOC 40
removal and replacement CARR-CU 1360
tape cartridge
about CARR-DR 2320
description CART 5. INTRO 10
recording media characteristics INTRO 5
removal by hand CART 10

tape attachment procedure CART 30
tape cleaning cartridge PLAN 6
tape data record format OPER 85
tape drive
ending operation procedure PANEL 5
major FRU locations. 50 Hz (without 8M 6460006) LOC 165
major FRU locations. 60 Hz (without 8M 6460006) LOC 160
message display messages PANEL 30
operating procedure PANEL 5
setting the addresses PANEL 12
setting the logical address (with 8M 6460006) INST 50
setting the logical address (without 8M 6460006) INST 350
setting the physical address (with 8M 6460006) INST 50
setting the physical address (without 8M 6460006) INST 350
tape drive message display INTRO 10
tape drive transport OPER 50
tape format OPER 85
tape guide. head
left
removal and replacement CARR-DR 2260
right
removal and replacement CARR-DR 2290
tape interchange test routine description. OLT PLAN 60
tape lifter solenoid
location LOC 100
removal and replacement CARR-DR 2160
response checking procedure CARR-DR 3-2
test MD 50
tape lifter solenoid Input hose
removal and replacement CARR-DR 2150
tape loading/unloading. drive transport INTRO 51
tape path sensors
adjustment. sensor A CARR-DR 60. CARR-DR 120
adjustment. sensor 8 CARR-DR 40. CARR-DR 70
locations LOC 105
removal and replacement. sensor A CARR-DR 60
removal and replacement. sensor 8 CARR-DR 70
tape removal tool PLAN 5
tape rewinding/unloading OPER 55
tape thread-load OPER 55
tape transport
characteristics INTRO 5
sensors INTRO 51
tape unit
ac grounding diagram (with 6460006) INSP 70
ac grounding diagram (without 6460006) INSP 170
ac power C8
location (with 8M 6460006) LOC 75
location (without 8M 6460006) LOC 70
panel (with 8M 6460006) PANEL 15
panel (without 8M 6460006) PANEL 14
adapter card OPER 40
bill of material level determination procedure CARR-DR 9
cable
removal and replacement CARR-DR 490
cables location chart CARR-DR 491
covers
front cover adjustment (with 8M 6460006) CARR-DR 2-2
front cover adjustment (without 8M 6460006) CARR-OR 2-4
removals (with 8M 6460006) CARR-DR 2-1
removals (without 8M 6460006) CARR-DR 2-3
replacements (with 8M 6460006) CARR-OR 2-2
replacements (without 8M 6460006) CARR-DR 2-4
data flow diagram OPER 35
de power supplies inspection (with 8M 6460006) INSP 32
de power supplies inspection (without 8M 6460006) INSP 132
de power supply
location (with 8M 6460006) LOC 75

INDEX 13

INDEX 14

Index
location (without 8M 6460006) lOC 70
voltage checking without dc test tool PWR 12
diagram, theory INTRO 45
digital servo card OPER 40
dimensions INTRO 5
drive
address switch locations (with 8M 6460006) lOC 75
address switch locations (without 8M 6460006) lOC 70
display panel locations (with 8M 6460006) lOC 75
display panel locations (without 8M 6460006) lOC 70
locations lOC 95
online/offline switch locations (with 8M 6460006) lOC 75
online/offline switch locations (without 8M 6460006) lOC 70
power switch locations (with 8M 6460006) lOC 75
power switch locations (without 8M 6460006) lOC 70
ready/not ready switch locations (with 8M 6460006) lOC 75
ready/not ready switch locations (without 8M 6460006) lOC 70
rewind switch locations (with 8M 6460006) lOC 75
rewind switch locations (without 8M 6460006) LOC 70
switch panel location (with 8M 6460006) LOC 75
switch panel location (without 8M 6460006) LOC 70
transport assembly description INTRO 51
unload switch locations (with 8M 6460006) LOC 75
unload switch locations (without 8M 6460006) LOC 70
drive control card
adapter OPER 40
digital servo OPER 40
microprocessor OPER 40
drive logic INTRO 50
drive transport description OPER 50
ferrite assembly
functions INTRO 45
fuses continue to blow PWR 30
inside inspection (with 8M 6460006) INSP 20
inside inspection (without 8M 6460006) INSP 120
installation
additional units (with 8M 6460460 or 6460006) INST 20
additional units (without 8M 6460460 or 6460006) INST 320
first unit(with 8M 6460006) INST 11
first unit (without 8M 6460006) INST 311
introduction INTRO 45
locations (with 8M 6460006) LOC 75
locations (without 8M 6460006) LOC 70
logic board layout, pin side LOC 135
logic location area definitions LGND 35
logical components OPER 40
loose wrap test, tape OPER 55
message display INTRO 50, OPER 40
microprocessor card OPER 40
operator control panel and display location (with 8M
6460006) LOC 75
operator control panel and display location (without 8M
6460006) LOC 70
outside inspection (with 8M 6460460 or 6460006) INSP 15
outside inspection (without 8M 6460460 or 6460006) INSP 115
pneumatic supply INTRO 50,OPER 45
pneumatics
pneumatics (with 8M 6460006) LOC 120
pneumatics, 50 Hz (without 8M 6460006) LOC 115
pneumatics, 60 Hz (without 8M 6460006) LOC 110
power
amplifier board OPER 40
introduction INTRO 50
logical components description OPER 40
power off and on procedures CARR-DR 8
power supply
blower removal and replacement, 50 Hz (without 8M
6460006) CARR-DR 718

3480 MI

1

"

verification procedure PWR 10, PWR 12
thermal switch assembly
location LOC 130
removal and replacement (with 8M 6460006) CARR-DR 1100
removal and replacement (without 8M 6460006) CARR-DR 1105
thermal switch lower, CU gate
location (with 8M 6460460) LOC 30
location (without 8M 6460460) LOC 25
removal and replacement CARR-CU 1430
thermal switch upper, CU gate
removal and replacement CARR-CU 2240
thermal switch, tape unit
cable harness
removal and replacement (end tape unit) (without 8M
6460006) CARR-DR 825
removal and replacement (not end tape unit) (without 8M
6460006) CARR-DR 823
removal and replacement (with 8M 6460006) CARR-DR 820
threader arm location LOC 95
threader assembly
location LOC 100
removal and replacement CARR-DR 10
threader motor location LOC 105
threader pin and leader block
at the cartridge latch assembly
cartridge removal procedure CART 16
example CART 10-3
in machine reel hub
cartridge removal procedure CART 12
example CART 10-2
stopped in tape path
cartridge removal procedure CART 14
example CART 10-2
threading tape OPER 55
threadingl/oading tape OPER 55
timing test, short loop write to read DIAG 218
tool for releasing cartridge clutch, illustration of PLAN 6
tools, special
descriptions PLAN 5
for installation (with 8M 6460460 or 6460006) INST 4
for installation (without 8M 6460460 or 6460006) INST 304
top card connectors
locations LOC 20
removals and replacements CARR-DR 660, CARR-CU 1570
trace level 7, MD support diskette utilities, trace/match control SDISK 146
trace/match control, MD support diskette utilities
detailed description SDISK 146
diagram SDISK 145
overview SDISK 140
transport, tape
characteristics INTRa 5
sensors INTRO 51
troubleshooting, board and cable interconnection failures EAD 5000
Tl ac voltage taps location, control unit dc power supply LaC 35

UEPO cables, removing for relocate or discontinue (with 8M 6460460 or
6460006) INST 160
UEPO cables, removing for relocate or discontinue (without 8M 6460460 or
6460006) INST 460
UEPO switch
See unit emergency power switch
unassign command OPER 180
under-voltage detector/power-on-reset INTRO 20
unit check

status bit SENSE 205
timing sense bit SENSE 110
unit emergency power off (UEPO) cable, installing (with 8M
6460460) INST 120
unit emergency power off (UEPO) cable, installing (without 8M
6460460) INST 420
unit emergency power switch
checking for failure (with 8M 6460460) INST 60
checking for failure (without 8M 6460460) INST 360
description PANEL 10
location LOC 50
removal and replacement CARR-CU 1980
unit exception status bit SENSE 205
unit test, MD main menu option description MD 50
unload switch description (with 8M 6460006) PANEL 15
unload switch description (without 8M 6460006) PANEL 14
unload time, tape transport INTRa 5
unloading tape OPER 55
using the fault symptom index FSI 2
utility, scope loop DIAG 600

vacuum adjustment (with 8M 6460006) PNEU 5
vacuum adjustment (without 8M 6460006) PNEU 105
vacuum distribution tee
removal and replacement CARR-DR 2190
vacuum hose assembly
removal and replacement (with BM 6460006) CARR-DR 350
removal and replacement, 50 Hz (without 8M 6460006) CARR-DR 358
removal and replacement, 60 Hz (without 8M 6460006) CARR-DR 355
vacuum measurement, pneumatic (with 8M 6460006) PNEU 5
vacuum measurement, pneumatic (without 8M 6460006) PNEU 105
vacuum port cap
location (with 8M 6460006) LOC 120
location, 50 Hz (without 8M 6460006) LaC 115
location, 60 Hz (without 8M 6460006) LOC 110
vacuum supply hose
removal and replacement CARR-DR 2120
vacuum test hose assembly
removal and replacement (with 8M 6460006) CARR-DR 2630
vary offline procedure PLAN 55
venturi
location (with 8M 6460006) LaC 120
location, 50 Hz (without 8M 6460006) LOC 115
location, 60 Hz (without 8M 6460006) LOC 110
verification procedure, dc test tool PWR 10, PWR 12
verifying data, diagnostics DIAG 6
voltage distribution cable
connectors (with 8M 6460006) LaC 120
voltage distribution list, how to read graphic format LGND 80
voltage jumper
See jumper, power supply
voltage regulator card
introduction INTRO 20
location LOC 15
removal and replacement CARR-CU 1260
voltage regulator, control unit OPER 30
voltage tolerance tables PWR 20
volume content, maintenance information PLAN 10, PLAN 11
volume permanent read or write errors on more than one drive MSG 380
volume statistiCS report, EREP
description MSG 100
example MSG 215
field definitions MSG 216
limit controls MSG 105

INDEX 14

EC A47957

© Copyright IBM Corp.

·1

blower removal and replacement, 60 Hz (without 8M
6460006) CARR-DR 710
jumper checks, installation (with 6460006) INST 56
jumper checks, installation (without 6460006) INST 356
locations (with 8M 6460006) LOC 90
locations (without 8M 6460006) LOC 80
read preamplifier card OPER 40
remove/replace procedures by FRU number CARR-DR 1-1
rewinding, tape OPER 55
sensor test, tape OPER 55
setting the addresses PANEL 12
selting the logical address (with 8M 6460006) INST 50
setting the logical address (without 8M 6460006) INST 350
setting the physical addresses (with 8M 6460006) INST 50
setting the physical addresses (without 8M 6460006) INST 350
switch panel location (with 8M 6460006) LOC 75
switch panel location (without 8M 6460006) LOC 70
switches and indicators (with 8M 6460006) PANEL 15
switches and indicators (without 8M 6460006) PANEL 14
tape thread/load OPER 55
tape unloading/rewinding OPER 55
T81 location (with 8M 6460006) LOC 75
T81 location (without 8M 6460006) LOC 70
thermal switch
cable harness removal and replacement (end tape unit) (without
8M 6460006) CARR-DR 835
cable harness removal and replacement (not end tape unit)
(without 8M 6460006) CARR-DR 833
cable harness removal and replacement (with 8M
6460006) CARR-DR 830
removal and replacement (end tape unit) (without 8M
6460006) CARR-DR 825
removal and replacement (not end tape unit) (without 8M
6460006) CARR-DR 823
removal and replacement (with 8M 6460006) CARR-DR 820
threadl/oad, tape OPER 55
TU-P2 read/write bus connector location (with 8M 6460006) LOC 75
TU-P2 read/write bus connector location (without 8M
6460006) LOC 70
write card OPER 40
tape write mode INTRO 22
tape-write-immediate mode OPER 100
temporary error summary report, EREP
description MSG 100
example (EREP 3,1.1) MSG 210
example (EREP 3.2) MSG 212
field definitions (EREP 3.1,1) MSG 211
field definitions (EREP 3.2) MSG 213
tension transducer
introduction INTRO 51
removal and replacement CARR-DR 140
tension transducer hose
removal and replacement CARR-DR 460
tension transducer tape guide
removal and replacement CARR-DR 2300
test equipment
for installation (with 8M 6460460 or 6460006) INST 4
for installation (without 8M 6460460 or 6460006) INST 304
oscilloscope PLAN 5
pressurelvacuum gauge PLAN 5
test I/O command OPER 180
test plug data
control unit dc power supply locations LOC 35
tape unit dc power supply
test tool, dc power supply
description PLAN 5, PWR 12
how to use without control unit PWR 10
how to use without tape unit PWR 12

1984. 1985, 1986, 1987

~}

.}

"

)

)

-\

)

,

1

j

)

.
j

~'t

)

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

Index
MSG 400

wail indicator description PANEL 10
WBC top card connector
location LOC 130
removal and replacement CARR-DR 660
WCD top card connector
location LOC 20
removal and replacement CARR-CU 1570
WCR
See write control register
WE top card connector
location LOC 20
removal and replacement CARR-CU 1570
WFG top card connector
location LOC 20
removal and replacement CARR-CU 1570
when to I se the fault symptom index FSI 2
when to use the support maintenance package SPROC 2
width, control unit and tape unit INTRO 5
width, tape INTRO 5
WKL top card connector
location LOC 20
removal and replacement CARR-CU 1570
write OPER 20
write adapter cables locations, drive LOC 150
write adapter connectors locations, drive, 50 Hz (without BM
6460006) LOC 115
write adapter connectors locations, drive, 60 Hz (without BM
6460006) LOC 110
write blocks corrected sense byte SENSE 170
write blocks processed sense byte SENSE 180
write bus terminator
removal and replacement (with BM 6460460) CARR-CU 1995
removal and replacement (without BM 6460460) CARR-CU 1990
write bytes processed sense bytes SENSE 180
write card OPER 40
introduction INTRO 50
location LOC 130
write command OPER 180
write control register (WCR) OF 82
write data card
clocks EAD 30
location LOC 15
removal and replacement CARR-CU 1110
write data checks sense byte SENSE 170
write data flow
area clocks EAD 30
description OPER 100
diagram OPER 106
external registers OF 10
introduction INTRO 20
write data flow description OPER 120
write operation timing chart OPER 187
write operation, control unit to drive OPER 187
write operations OPER 100
write overrun test, data buffer controls diagnostic EE33 DIAG 110
write power card
location LOC 130
write signal line, MD from MA communication path OPER 80
write status sense bit SENSE 110
write tape mark command OPER 180
write to read timing test, short loop DIAG 218
writing data INTRO 22

~ Copyright IBM

o

o
INDEX 15

volume temporary read or write errors on one drive

3480 MI

o

EC A47957
Corp. 1984. 1985 '986. 1987

WS top card connector location LOC 20
WSE
See write status/error register

XB top card connector
location LOC 130
removal and replacement CARR-DR
XC top card connector
location LOC 130
removal and replacement CARR-DR
XCDE top card connector
location LOC 20
removal and replacement CARR-CU
XFG top card connector
location LOC 20
removal and replacement CARR-CU
XKL top card connector
location LOC 20
removal and replacement CARR-CU
XR bus and control clocks EAD 8
XR detected errors OPER 70
XR interconnection timing EAD 8
XRA
See external registers
XRA decode example OPER 215
XRS top card connector
location LOC 20
removal and replacement CARR-CU

YB top card connector
location LOC 130
removal and replacement
YBCD top card connector
location LOC 130
removal and replacement
YCDE top card connector
location LOC 20
removal and replacement
YFG top card connector
location LOC 20
removal and replacement
YHJK top card connector
location LOC 20
removal and replacement
YKL top card connector
location LOC 20
removal and replacement
YP top card connector
location LOC 20
removal and replacement
YRS top card connector
location LOC 20
removal and replacement

660

660

1570

1570

1570

ZB top card connector
location LOC 130
removal and replacement CARR-DR
ZBCD top card connector
location LOC 130
removal and replacement CARR-DR
ZCD top card connector
location LOC 20
removal and replacement CARR-CU
ZFG top card connector
location LOC 20
removal and replacement CARR-CU
ZHJK top card connector
ZKL top card connector
location LOC 20
removal and replacement CARR-CU
ZPQ top card connector
location LOC 20
removal and replacement CARR-CU

660

660

1570

1570

1570

1570

Numerics

1570

02A-A 1 logic board pin side locations, drive LOC 95
3480 maintenance summary PLAN 5
50 Hz and 60 Hz voltage tolerance tables PWR 20
50 Hz except Japan, ac power
jumper checks (with BM 6460460) INST 55
jumper checks (without BM 6460460) INST 355
voltage tolerance table PWR 20
60 Hz and 50 Hz Japan, ac power
jumper checks (with BM 6460460) INST 55
jumper checks (without BM 6460460) INST 355
voltage tolerance table PWR 20

CARR-DR 660

CARR-DR 660

CARR-CU 1570

CARR-CU 1570

CARR-DR 660

CARR-CU 1570

CARR-CU 1570

CARR-CU 1570

INDEX 15

Notes

3480 MI
EC A47957
e; COPY"9nt IBM CorD. ~ . . . ~98S.

INDEX 16

INDEX 16

1986 !987

~)

~

)

,

)

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

(1

READER'S COMMENT FORM

Reader's Comment Form

Reader's Comment Form

You may use this form to communicate your comments about this publication, Its organization, or
subject matter, with the understanding that IBM may use or distribute whatever information you supply
n any way it believes appropriate without incurring any obligation to you.

You may use this form to communicate your comments about this publication, its organization, or
subject matter, with the understanding that IBM may use or distribute whatever information you supply
in any way it believes appropriate without incurring any obligation to you.

Your comments will be sent to the author's department for whatever review and action, If any, is
deemed appropriate. Comments may be written in your own language; use of English is not reqUired.

Your comments will be sent to the author's department for whatever review and action, if any, IS
deemed appropriate. Comments may be written in your own language; use of English is not required.

Note: Copies of IBM publications are not stocked at the location to which this form is addressed. Please direct any
requests for copies of publications, or for assistance in using your IBM system, to your IBM representative or to the
BM branch office serving your locality.

Note: Copies of IBM publications are not stocked at the location to which this form is addressed. Please direct any
requests for copies of publications. or for assistance in using your IBM system, to your IBM representative or to the
IBM branch office serving your locality.

Mach Type/Mod

Serial Number

Storage Control/CPU

Symptom/Error Code

Page 10

Page EC No.

If no error or symptom code. check here

L

Mech Type/Mod

0

Serial Number

Storage Control/CPU

Symptom/Error Code

Page 10

Page EC No.

If no error or symptom code, check her.

Describe the trouble as it was reported to you, or as it appeared to you (machine problem).

Describe the trouble as it was reported to you, or as it appeared to you (machine problem).

Describe problem you encountered with documentation.

Describe problem you encountered with documentation.

Do you want an acknowledgement?

RCF-1

0

Do you want an acknowledgement?

Name

Address

Address

City

City

State

- - - - -• Zip

Telephone Nuaber
Country

---------

81'0 NunJber

Thank you for your cooperation. No postage stamp necessary if mailed in the U.S.A. (Elsewhere, an
BM office or representative will be happy to forward your comments.)

3480 MI
'" Copyright IBM Corp. 19B4, 1985

State

- - - - -Zip

Telephone Number
Country
81'0

-----------

Numer

Thank you for your cooperation. No postage stamp necessary if mailed in the U.S.A. (Elsewhere, an
IBM office or representative will be happy to forward your comments.)

READER'S COMMENT FORM

RCF-1

READER'S COMMENT FORM

RCF-2

Reader's Comment Form

Reader's Comment Form

_Do

FoId _ _ _

FoId _ _ _

_DoNot ......

Not ......

Fold Ind __

- - -. - --- - - - - ---- - - - - - - - -- - -- - - - - - - - - - - - -- - Attention: Information Development
Department 61 C

NO POSTAGE
NECESSARY IF
MAILED IN THE
UNITED STATES

Attention: Information Development
Department 61 C

BUSINESS REPLY MAIL
FIRST CLASS PERMIT NO. 40

NO POSTAGE
NECESSARY IF
MAILED IN THE
UNITED STATES

BUSINESS REPLY MAIL

ARMONK. NEW YORK

FIRST CLASS PERMIT NO. 40

ARMONK. NEW YORK

POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY ADDRESSEE

POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY ADDRESSEE

International Business Machines Corporation
General Products Division
P. O. Box 27155
Tucson. Arizona 85726

International Business Machines Corporation
General Products Division
P. O. Box 27155
Tucson. Arizona 85726

_Do

FoId _ _ _

FoId _ _ _

Not ......

FoId_ ..pe

....... Do Not ......

Fold Ind ..pe

l'lF!:y
== 1i::i':i .. ==

•

3480 MI

READER'S COMMENT FORM

II CClp'/l'ight IBM Corp. 1984. 1985

•

... )

:1

~)

f)
"

rl

~)

:>

()

f
~

)

RCF-2
f

1



File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.3
Linearized                      : No
XMP Toolkit                     : Adobe XMP Core 4.2.1-c043 52.372728, 2009/01/18-15:56:37
Create Date                     : 2011:05:08 09:24:05-08:00
Modify Date                     : 2011:05:08 14:10:55-07:00
Metadata Date                   : 2011:05:08 14:10:55-07:00
Producer                        : Adobe Acrobat 9.42 Paper Capture Plug-in
Format                          : application/pdf
Document ID                     : uuid:ca772de1-2755-4a92-842c-c7d722dc07a8
Instance ID                     : uuid:cae09c60-8c76-4ae4-ae0c-2554a9597afd
Page Layout                     : SinglePage
Page Mode                       : UseNone
Page Count                      : 428